CONTENTS

KrincuHorn, J. R.: The Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939. Scientific Reports: No. 3,

Biology—Reptiles and Batrachians . 6 Ae An aA 33

Wuittry, G. P.: The Simpson Desert Ss 1939. Scientific Reports: No. 5,

Biology—Fishes ; in Ss a as ie

Muscrave, A.: The Siniaons Tissect ence: 1939. Scientific Repos: No. 4,

Biology—Hemiptera se

Trumsie, H. C.: The Relation ae Wet- Gecan, Variability to Fat- Taint radian in

South Australia ‘ ; :

Mawson, D., and Dariwitz, w. Be: The eae rich Pine orsanies Cinsiss of

Umberatana :

TurNER, A. J.: Carsbatips to Bie Daualiedes ‘of he epee Pcginicidae (Leiden

tera)

Burpipce, N. T.: Genicinatinns Studies of ‘Meealien re “with: Special

Reference to the Conditions necessary for Regeneration. I. Atriplex vesicarium

Heward ;

Hate, H. M.: simetes Sees No. 10. The ais [ieaicenides

Womers ey, H.: Acarina of Australia and New Guinea. The family Tac iailehas

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Some Parasitic Nematodes from South Aus-

tralian Marine Fish axe 26

Manican, C. T.: The Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939. Scientific Heat Introduc-

tion, Narrative, Physiography and Meteorology .. :

Bircu, L. C.: A Contributuion to the Ecology of Calandra orysae oe oe Rhis copertha

dominica Fab. (Coleoptera) in Stored Wheat .. A ie 5

Corton, B. C.: Southern Australian Gastropoda. Part I. Sees ae ee

Hate, H. M.: Australian Cumacea, No. 11, The Family Diastylidae (Part I) ..

Mawson, D., and Dattwitz, W. B.: Scapolitized Dolomites of Yankaninna

Womers.Ley, FH.: New Species of pipers (Insecta, ae from Australia eit

New Guinea

Jounston, T. H., and a Stee oe CG Tegal cates facie ‘he altee “Breshe

water Mothyecs (Part X)

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: * Capitiasid: Meh tee iis South Aust

lian Fish and Birds aa oo, 5,

Cotton, B. C.: Southern Rimeatan Leer ee II, rises.

Mawson, D., and Secnir, E. R.: Granites of thd Tintinara District

Spricc, R. C: Some Aspects of the Heamerppylony of Portion of ie See

Lofty Ranges

Bursince, N. T.: iocabrices ed Savini of the ‘Bifeeters cea Seasicn of

Triodia R. Br. I, General Morphology = ae a

Brack, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Riel ie: 43.

Seenrt, E. R.: On the Behaviour of Barium in Silicate Analysis ..

OBITUARIES :,

James Davidson ..

Horace Edgar Dunstone

James Thomas Wilson ..

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Verco MEDAL ..

List or FELLowS

INDEX

Page

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 SCIENTIFIC REPORTS:

NO. 3, BIOLOGY — REPTILES AND BATRACHIANS

BY J. R. KINGHORN, AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, SYDNEY (READ 12 APRIL 1945)

Summary

The reptiles and batrachians of Central Australia offer considerable interest for herpetologists

because of their somewhat confusing distribution due to the nature of the country and the climatic

conditions. Collections from this region are rarely large, collectors seldom have the opportunity to

camp in any one locality for any length of time, and even if they do a sudden cool change sends

reptiles to earth, where they remain hidden for many days in places where a white man has little

chance of finding them. The Simpson Desert area would be no exception to this rule, for its chief

characteristics are level plains, sandridges, an absence of surface waters, and watercourses that are

usually dry.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939

SCIENTIFIC REPORTS: No. 3, BIOLOGY — REPTILES AND BATRACHIANS

By J. R. Kincuorn, Australian Museum, Sydney

[Read 12 April 1945]

The reptiles and batrachians of Central Australia offer considerable interest

for herpetologists because of their somewhat confusing distribution due to the

nature of the country and the climatic conditions, Collections from this region

are rarely large, collectors seldom have the opportunity to camp in any one locality

for any length of time, and even if they do a sudden. cool change sends reptiles to

earth, where they remain hidden for many days in places where a white man has

little chance of finding them. The Simpson Desert area would be no exception

to this rule, for its chief characteristics are level plains, sandridges, an absence

of surface waters, and watercourses that are usually dry.

Although the reptilian fauna was found to be much scarcer than in other

parts of Central Australia, yet a collection of 120 specimens was made, compris-

ing 18 different genera, included in which were 20 species of lizards, three species

of snakes and one frog.

The caravan was almost continually on the move during daylight hours, com-

ing to rest only at evening to camp, when most reptiles had retired for the night,

and it is surprising that so many were seen and captured.

The biological collecting was in charge of Mr. H. O. Fletcher of the staff

of the Australian Museum, Sydney, which institution provided the necessary

equipment. All members of the expedition assisted, but, as might be expected,

the most expert and untiring collector was an. aborigine named Andy, a member

of the Dieri tribe, who even while on the march could tell by glancing at a burrow

whether a lizard was within it. Though Andy was very much afraid of the

Scincidae, he was quite unafraid of snakes.

It is quite obvious that there were considerable difficulties regarding preserva-

tion, particularly in transport by camel, but even so the specimens arrived at the

Museum in an excellent state of preservation, a fact that reflects credit on

Mr. Fletcher.

The following is the complete list of the reptiles and batrachians collected.

AMPHIBIA

Fam. CERATOPHRIIDAE

HELIpoRUS CENTRALIS Parker 1940

Heliporus pictus (non Peters) Spencer, 1896, Horn Exped. Central Australia,

2, Zool., 166, pl. xiii, fig. 2, pl. xiv, fig. 10-13.

Heliporus centralis Parker 1940, Novit. Zool., 42, (1), 35.

A male collected on 27 June at Kaliduwarry Station, Camp 20, Mulligan

River, near the Queensland border, measured 30 mm, in length; colour pale grey

with darker mottlings and a faint, whitish vertebral line.

A female, 38 mm., of the same colour, but without the vertebral line, was

found in a burrow three feet deep on top of a sandhill six miles north-west of

Birdsville, on 6 July. The sand was damp, it having rained a little earlier in the

day, and Andy, the aborigine, had detected the footprints of the frog. .

Trans. Roy, Soc. S.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

In the Australian Museum are five other specimens; two of them taken by

the Horn Expedition, and three from Central Australia were in the J. J. Fletcher

collection. They measure from 40 mm. to 55 mm. in length.

LACERTILIA

Fam, GEKKONIDAE

NepHurus LAEvis De Vis 1896

Nephurus laevis De Vis 1886, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2), 1, 168; Loveridge.

1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, 22, (6), 296.

Found at Camp 3 on 8 June, six miles north of junction of the Todd and

Hale Rivers, total length 541 mm., tail 30 mm.; and at Camp 19 on 27 June,

total length 95 mm., tail 29 mm. Loveridge gives an excellent key by which the

three species of this genus may easily be diagnosed. In this species the dorsal

tubercles are large, conical, smooth, and each is surrounded by a ring of small

granules.

Lucastus DAMAEUS (Lucas and Frost 1896)

Ceramodactylus damacus Lucas and Frost 1896, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., (2), 8, 1.

Lucasius damaeus Kinghorn 1929, Rec. Aust. Mus., 17, (2), 77,

Four specimens of this exceptionally rare gecko were collected at Camp 6 on

17 June. One has its tail missing, but the others measure 47 mm., 49 mm. and

50 mm. in total length, by which it will be realised that they are not fully adult.

‘A critical examination shows that there is no variation from the typical.

Hereronota ByNnoer Gray 1845

Heteronota bynoei Gray 1845, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus., 174.

This species is very widely distributed throughout the northern parts of Aus-

tralia, from Queensland to Western Australia. Specimens were collected under

logs at Camp 34, five miles from Mount Gason; at Camp 37, Cowarie Station;

and at Camp 40, along the Diamantina River, in South Australia.

DIPLODACTYLUS TESSELLATUS (Giinther 1844)

Stenodactylus tessellatus Giinther 1844, Zool, Erebus & Terror Rept., 16.

Diplodactylus tessellatus Blgs., 1885, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus., 1, 103, pl. viii, fig. 6;

Kinghorn 1929, Rec. Aust. Mus., 17, (2), 83.

One specimen from Camp 36, 12 miles north-east of Cowarie Station.

Though nearly 100 specimens of this gecko were collected near Broken Hill,

N.S.W., and on the Darling River during the 1890 floods, very few have been

seen since, and it is generally regarded as one of the rarities, particularly in

Central Australian areas. The Cowarie specimen measures 79 mm., of which the tail

is 25mm, _ It is noted that the larger tubercles of the tail are so arranged as to give a

ringed appearance, the central pairs of tubercles having a smaller one on either side.

PEROPUS VARIEGATUS VARIEGATUS (Dumeril and Bibron 1836)

Hemidactylus variegatus D. and B. 1836, Erpet. Gen., 3, 353.

Gehyra variegata Blgr., 1885, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus., 1, 151.

Peropus variegatus variegatus Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard,

22, (6), 311.

Twenty-eight specimens were coilected, mostly under the loose bark of gidgee

and mulga trees. Several were found on Andado Station: one, six miles north

of the junction of the Todd and Hale Rivers; others at Camps 7, 8, 12, 16 (the

Hay River), 21 (Kaliduwarry Station, Queensland), 22 (12 miles south of

Annandale Station), 23, 24, 27 (Karrathunka Waterhole, 25 miles south of Birds-

ville, Queensland), 28, 32, and 49.

Fam. AGAMIDAE

AMPHIBOLURUS BARBATUS BARBATUS (Cuvier 1829)

Agama barbaia Cuvier 1829, Regne Animal (2nd ed.), 2, 35.

Amphibolurus barbatus Bigr., 1885, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus., 1, 391. .

Amphibolurus barbatus barbatus Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Har-

vard, 22, (6), 324. *

This is one of the most widely distributed of the Australian Agamas, and is

found in all kinds of country. Five specimens were collected on the Simpson

Desert at the following Camps: No. 9, No 15 or the Hay River Flood Plain, and

No. 19. They were taken in spinifex, sand and grassy country. Those from

the sandy areas were brick-red in colour.

AMPHIBOLURUS PIcTUS Peters 1867

Amphibolurus pictus Peters 1867, (1866), Monat. Akad, Wiss., Berlin, 88;

Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, 22, (6), 320,

Five specimens of this beautiful lizard were collected. Though fairly widely

distributed in Central and South Australia it is nowhere common. It is most

often to be found hiding under logs or large loose stones, and was secured at the

following localities during the expedition: Camps 24, 40, 41 (north end of Lake

Eyre), and Camp 49 (south end of Lake Eyre). The smallest specimen measures

97 mm., of which the tail is 60 mm., and the largest is 225 mm., tail 165 mm.

AMPHIBOLURUS RETICULATUS INERMIs (De Vis 1888)

Grammatophora inermis De Vis 1888 (1887), Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2),

2, 812.

Amphibolurus reticulatus inermis Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool.,

Harvard, 22, (6), 321.

A valuable series of 25 specimens was collected throughout the desert area,

and, though there is some variation in colour markings, the scalation and other

characteristics are typical of inermis, The femoral and preanal pores range from

16 to 26, and the sizes range from 90 mm. to 260 mm., in total length. Eleven

were found around Andado Station, three from the junction of the Todd and Hale

Rivers, and the remainder from Camps 7, 9, 11, 13, 19, 23, 24, and 32 (Goyder’s

Lagoon).

AMPHIBOLURUS MACULATUS MACULATUS (Gray 1842)

Uromastyx maculatus Gray 1831, Cuvier, Animal Kingdom, 9, syn., 62.

Amphibolurus maculatus Lucas and Frost 1896, Horn Sci. Exped. Rept., 2, 125.

Amphibolurus maculatus maculatus Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool.,

Harvard, 22, (6), 318.

This is probably the most brilliantly coloured species of the genus Amphi-

bolurus. It inhabits sandy and sparsely timbered country, and with its red dorsal

surface covered with yellow spots, and black markings on the flanks, is most con-

spicuous when lying in the open. One collected at Camp 7 on 17 June, total

length 200 mm., tail 150 mm.; two from Camp 14, total length 100 mm., tail

66 mm.; two from Camp 16 on 24 June, total length 188 mm. and 200 mm., tails

130 mm. and 142 mm., respectively.

TYMPANOCRYPTIS CEPHALUS Gtinther 1867

Tympanocryptis cephalus Gunther 1867, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (3), 20, 52.

Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, 22, (6), 325.

Tympanocryptis tetraporophora Lucas and Frost 1895, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.,

7, 265.

Tympanocryptis lineata cephalus Kinghorn, 1932, Rec. Aust. Mus., 18, (7), 360.

Head shields only feebly keeled, nostril on a sharply defined canthus; snout

somewhat sharper than in limeata. Dorsal surface with widely spaced, spinose

tubercles. Colour greyish, with very indistinct cross bands which are broken on

the central line. Only three specimens were collected from the following localities :

Camp 31, Goyder’s Lagoon Station, total length 140 mm., tail 80 mm.; Camp 49,

Lake Eyre, total length 120 mm., tail 67 mm.; four miles east of Camp 49, total

length 130 mm., tail 77 mm.

TYMPANOCRYPTIS LINEATA LINEATA Peters 1864

Tympanocryptis lineata Peters 1864 (1863), Monat. Akad. Wiss., Berlin, 230.

Tympanocryptis lineata lineata Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Har-

vard, 22, (6), 325.

Three specimens. The head shields and dorsal tubercles are strongly keeled;

nostril below the canthus; snout rather obtuse; the head in each instance is shorter

and deeper than in cephalus, One from near Camp 1, total length 124 mm., tail

94 mm.; one from Charlotte Waters, total length 180 mm., tail 64 mm.; one from

four miles east of Camp 49, Lake Eyre, total length 91 mm., tail 55 mm.

DiporrPHora AusTRALIS (Steindachner 1867)

Calotella australis Steindachner 1867, Reise Oesterr. Freg. Novara, Reptiles,

29, pl. i, fig. 9.

Diporophora australis Bigr., 1885, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus., 1, 394; Loveridge, 1934.

Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool,, Harvard, 22, (6), 328.

Gular fold present. Two specimens were collected: one from Andado

Station, Central Australia, total length 95 mm., tail 54 mm.; one from Camp 2,

22 miles north of Andado, total length 118 mm., tail 72 mm.

MoLocu Horripus Gray 1841

Moloch horridus Gray 1841, Gray’s Journ. Exped. W. Aust., 2, 441, pl. ii.

One specimen from Camp 19 on 27 June. It was seen during the trek to

camp, and Andy, the aborigine, was afraid to touch it, but would not explain

his fears. Total length 146 mm., tail 66 mm.

Fam. VARANIDAE

VARANUS GILLENI Laicas and Frost 1895

Varanus gilleni Lucas and Frost 1895, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 7, 266.

This rare and interesting goanna is restricted to the Northern Territory,

Central Australia and the more northern parts of South Australia, One specimen,

a male, was collected at Camp 16 on 24 June. Total length 285 mm., tail 170 mm.

It might be noted that in contrast to its nearest affinity V. eremius, the claws

of gilleni are of normal length, strongly curved and deep at the base, while in

eremius the claws are long, slightly curved and narrow throughout. The head

scales of gilleni are six-sided and much more rounded than in eremius, in which

they are elongate. The caudal scales in gilleni are feebly keeled and not so

elongate as the strongly keeled scales of eremius.

Fam. SCINCIDAE

EGERNIA INORNATA Rosen 1905

Egernia inornata Rosen 1905, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (7), 16, 139, fig. 3, pl. vii,

fig. 2; Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, 77, (6), 337.

Egernia striata Sternfeld, 1919, Senkenb. Naturf. Gesell., 1, 79.

Three specimens were collected, and these differ slightly from the characters

given by Loveridge in having fewer scales round the body, there being only 36

on each of the specimens, The frontal is twice as long as broad; six supra-

oculars; one pair nuchals. One specimen from Camp 5 collected 8 June, total

length 158 mm., tail 87 mm.; one from Camp 16, Hay River Flood Plain, on

24 June, total length 100 mm., tail 42 mm.; one from Camp 18 on 26 June, total

length 127 mm., tail 62 mm.

SPHENOMORPHUS AUSTRALIS AUSTRALIS (Gray 1839)

Tiliqua australis Gray 1839, Ann. Nat. Hist., 2, 291.

Lygosoma lesueuri D. and B., 1839, Erpet. Gen., 5, 733,

Sphenomorphus australis australis Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Har-

vard, 77, (6), 345.

Though this is a widely distributed species in Australia, and was found at

the eastern and western edges of the Simpson Desert, it was not met. with at any

of the Camps in the central area. One specimen from Camp 2, 6 June, total

length 94 mm.; and one from Camp 34, 18 July, near Mount Gason, total length

210 mm., tail 142 mm., 26 rows of scales, eye shorter than its distance from the

nostril.

SPHENOMORPHUS LEAE BROOKS! Loveridge 1933

Sphenomorphus leae brooksi Loveridge 1933, Occ. Papers, Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.,

8, 95

Though the type of this subspecies was taken at Perth, Western Australia,

I have no doubt that the seven specimens collected in the Simpson Desert are

referable to S. leae brooksi, Mid body scale rows 26; the lamellae under the

fourth toe are 26 in number and sharply keeled; auricular lobules 3, there being

two large and one very small; nuchals 4; loreal scale longer than high; hind

limb reaches the wrist or elbow; prefrontals forming a long median suture; the

nasals may or may not just touch each other; frontal longer than interparietals

and fronto-parietals together. Colour (in alcohol), greenish-grey with a strong

metallic sheen; the markings on sides, limbs and tail are typical of those described

by Loveridge.

In the Australian Museum collection is a specimen from Eucla, Great Aus-

tralian Bight. The localities of those collected in the Simpson Desert are:

Camp 2, 6 June; Camp 7, 12 June; Camp 10; Camp 11, 17 June; Camp 12;

Camp 23, 9 July.

The distribution as plotted on the map is interesting, suggesting its dispersal

throughout the desert area.

ABLEPHARUS GREY (Gray 1844)

Menethia greyii Gray 1844, Zool, Erebus & Terror Rept., pl. v, fig. 4.

Ablepharus greyu Blgr., 1887, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus., 3, 349.

Two specimens from Camp 3, six miles north of the junction of the Todd

and Hale Rivers, 8 June; two from Camp 28, Andrewilla Waterhole, 45 miles

south of Birdsville, on 14 July. Mid body scales in 22 rows, digits 4, toes 5,

average measurements—total length 77 mm., tail 47 mm,

ABLEPHARUS BOUTONI METALLICUS Blgr. 1897

Ablepharus boutoni var. metallicus Blgr. 1887, Cat. Liz. Brit. Mus., 3, 347.

Ablepharus boutont australis Sternfeld, 1918, Abhand. Senkenb. Naturf. Gesell.,

36, 424.

Ablepharus boutoni metallicus Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard,

77, (6), 375-376.

The species boutoni is a widely distributed one both in Australia and in

Malaya, and is also extremely variable. The two specimens collected by the

Simpson Desert Expedition have all the characteristics of metallicus, and are from

Camp 28, Andrewilla Waterhole, 45 miles south of Birdsville, 14 July.

RuHOpONA BIPES Fischer 1882

Rhodona bipes Fischer 1882, Arch. fiir Naturg., 48, 292, pl. xvi, fig. 10-15.

This rare but widely distributed lizard has a very prominent shovel-shaped

snout, which is hard and typical of burrowing forms. Its discovery in the centre

of the Simpson Desert was quite unexpected. One from Camp 3, six miles

north of the junction of the Todd and Hale Rivers, 8 June; one from Camp 9,

on 17 June; one from Camp 34, near Mount Gason, 18 July. One specimen is

without tail, the others measure 70 mm., tail 23 mm.; and 88 mm., tail 40 mm.

OPHIDIA

Fam. BOIDAE

ASPIDIOTES MELANOCEPHALA RAMSAY! Macleay 1882

Aspidiotes ramsayi Macleay 1882, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W,, 6, 813.

Aspidiotes melanocephalus ramsayi Loveridge, 1934, Bull. Mus, Comp. Zool.,

Harvard, 77, (6), 270.

One specimen from Camp 17, Simpson Desert, total length 1,980 mm., tail

140 mm., male. Anal scale single; subcaudals 46, all single; ventrals 309. The

frontal is almost square, and is twice as broad as the supraoculars ; 56 scales

round the centre of the body. The abnormality of the head shields is accentuated

by the breaking up of the prefrontals and loreal into a number of small shields of

different shapes and sizes.

Fam. COLUBRIDAE

PsevupECHIS AUSTRALIS Gray 1842

Pseudechis australis Gray 1842, Zool. Miscell., 55; Blgr., 1896, Cat. Snakes Brit.

Mus., 3, 330.

One specimen from Camp 12, total length 1,600 mm., tail 175 mm., tip miss-

ing; subcaudals 40 single (it being assumed that those on the missing tip were

divided), anal divided, scales in 17 rows. The internasals are not half as large

as the prefrontals. Frontal one-third longer than broad, a little broader than the

supraocular, smaller than the prefrontals. The variations in the comparative

sizes of the head shields are regarded as abnormalities.

I have since received several specimens from the northern parts of Central

Australia with subcaudals mostly single, only a few near the tip of the tail being

divided.

DEMANSIA MOoDESTA Blgr. 1896

Demansia modesta Blgr. 1896, Cat. Snakes, Brit. Mus., 3, 324.

Demansia modesta Kinghorn, 1929, Snakes of Australia, 130, fig. 72 (in colour).

Two specimens were collected at widely separated localities. In colour they

are identical with that figured in “Snakes of Australia.”

A specimen from Camp 1, eight miles north of Andado Bore No. 1,

4 January, measures 360 mm., of which the tail is 48 mm., scales 17; subcaudals

34, paired; the length of the rostral is two-thirds its distance from the frontal.

Another was collected at Camp 17 on 25 June, total length 430 mm., tail 69 mm.,

scales 17, subcaudals 44, paired. Portion of rostral visible from above is equal

to half its distance from the frontal.

This is a very variable species and has a wide distribution in Australia. It

is also a very perplexing one, having close affinities to Demansia textilis nuchalis.

| | x | x : iE

| | | | | ia | ae

| | x | | \ | 2 a ejsapow vIsueUTac

i i | | | | | | | x | | | cs oss ss srreajsne siypepnas gy

| x | | | | | | | | | “+ snoqyypejou tuojneg snseydaqy

| x | fy | | | | bse] rrootr ots oes kaa snseydarqy

ak | | | | | x) | Sh tie ory © es sadiq euopouy

| | my | x | iL | | | ix ixl x | | i | | | those ++ Isyooaq avay ‘usyds

| | | | i | | | | [ox | siyesysne stpeajsne snydsoumousyds

| | | _ | | — [x | | | | ee | | rroose fs +s pieuJOUT BINIeSy

| | | | | x i | | thors ee +e qHOHTS snuese A

| | | | | | | | | | | ix | | | | | ee | | | * snyepnoeur snyemnoew ‘yoqrydury

xix | | | | |x | | rroors ose s+ snyoid ‘poqrydiuy

| | | | | E bel | is xf px] | % x} ) x) c+ smusour snyeqnones ‘joqrydury

| | i | | | | «| | | | | ‘+ snqyeqaeq snyeqiueq sninjoquydury

| | * | s+snjeoury snyeauty siydAsoouedurd 7,

; | % | | | | | | | ‘+ ++ snyeydeo sydAsoouedurd 7,

| | } i | jot | i | 3 hs vy ote oss srpeagsne eroydiiodiq

ca aie oo é ep VP < Pylee x "+ snqyeSarrea snyesarrea sndoleg

| x | | | | "+ ++ snyeypasseq snpAjoepoydiqy

Lei x | | | ie | | | | foes Riese TIOUAG BOTOID}OT]

| | eee | x | | | | poe | BS oo eG oe stase] snanydon

“| | | x | | I i Fore ors s+ gtresyusa snsodorazy

telorlaelorlocleeteeltelselaztaelsclecleclreloclerlerlarlorlerteriei'ztimtlorletelz olsi+leleiii same

GHLOATIOD SHIDHdS AO NOTLONARILSIG

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 SCIENTIFIC REPORTS:

NO. 5, BIOLOGY - FISHES

BY G. P. WHITLEY, F.R.Z.S., AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, SYDNEY (READ 12 APRIL 1945)

Summary

The only surface waters met with by the Expedition other than the very temporary and shallow

water of claypans, was in waterholes in the Coglin Creek and Charlotte Waters, Northern Territory,

and in the Diamantina River. Even the Coglin Creek waterholes may be quite dry for long periods,

but they contained clear shallow water in May, 1939, when small fish could be seen and six

specimens were netted by Mr. H. O. Fletcher. No attempt was made to take fish in the Diamantina

except at Andrewilla Waterhole in South Australia, 45 miles below Birdsville, and at its end near

Lake Eyre. Hand lines were used at both places. Andrewilla is a large permanent hole, and several

perch were caught there up to half-a-pound in weight. The water was white with suspended clay and

the fish were of a curious paleness, a sort of opalescent white. However, as they were good eating

and it was thought they would prove to be a well-known species, only the smallest was put into the

spirit bottle. The water at the mouth of the river was slightly brackish, and there were no bites on

the hand lines. Although the Diamantina runs a channel flood every year, only certain waterholes

are permanent. — C. T. Madigan

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939

SCIENTIFIC REPORTS: No. 5 BIOLOGY — FISHES

By G. P. Wuittey, F.R.Z.S., Australian Museum, Sydney

[Read 12 April 1945]

[The only surface waters met with by the Expedition other than the very temporary

and shallow water of claypans, was in waterholes in the Coglin Creek and Charlotte

Waters, Northern Territory, and in the Diamantina River. Even the Coglin Creek

waterholes may be quite dry for long periods, but they contained clear shallow water in

May, 1939, when small fish could be seen and six specimens were netted by Mr. H. O.

Fletcher. No attempt was made to take fish in the Diamantina except at Andrewilla

Waterhole in South Australia, 45 miles below Birdsville, and at its end near Lake Eyre.

Hand lines were used at both places. Andrewilla is a large permanent hole, and several .

perch were caught there up to half-a-pound in weight. The water was white with

suspended clay and the fish were of a curious paleness, a sort of opalescent white. How-

ever, as they were good eating and it was thought they. would prove to be a well-known

species, only the smallest was put into the spirit bottle. The water at the mouth of

the river was slightly brackish, and there were no bites on the hand lines. Although the

Diamantina runs a channel flood every year, only certain waterholes are permanent.

—C. T. Madigan.]

I am grateful to Dr. C. T. Madigan for the privilege of writing this report

on the fishes taken by the Simpson Desert Expedition. These comprise seven

small specimens referable to three species, two in the family Terapontidae and

one in the Chandidae.

Fam. TERAPONTIDAE

The local species of Terapon have been reviewed by Ogilby and McCulloch

(1916) in Memoirs of the Queensland Museum, 1916, 5, 99-126. The Australian

forms were again listed in Mem. Aust. Mus., 1929, 5, 159-164. Since then

Fowler has dealt with numerous species in Bull. 100, U.S. Nat. Mus., 1931, 11,

325-358. In the same year, Weber and de Beaufort (Fish Indo-Austr. Archip.,

1931, 6, 139-159), monographed the East Indian species. Some new genera were

named in Austr. Zool., 1943, 10, 180-184, and a few new species have been

described from newly explored regions.

Two species, both known to science, were collected by the Simpson Desert

Expedition, one now referable to Hephaestus De Vis, whilst the other requires

anew genus, which may be defined as follows.

Genus Madigania nov.

Orthotype, Therapon unicolor Giinther 1859.

Mouth large, reaching below middle of the small eye. Teeth villiform on

jaws, outer ones enlarged; palate toothless. Preorbital entire or with a few

denticles. Lower opercular spine not reaching gill-opening. Body elongate-

elliptical. Supracleithrum not exposed, hidden by scales. Less than 60 rows of

lateral scales: 8 or 9 between 1. lat. and spinous dorsal. Normally 12 dorsal

spines. General characters as for the family Terapontidae. Colouration greyish,

usually with small scattered dark spots. No dark blotch on spinous dorsal, no

stripes on body. Caudal fin plain. Freshwater, tropical and subtropical Aus-

tralia.

Differs from the true marine Terapon, in having long, low, first dorsal fin,

without dark blotch; body not silvery with stripes, lower opercular spine much

shorter, and caudal fin emarginate.

Named in honour of Dr. Cecil Madigan, leader of the Expedition.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

MApDIGANIA UNICOLOoR (Gtinther 1859)

Therapon unicolor Giinther 1859, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., 1, 277 (Gwydir River,

N.S.W., and Mosquito Creek, Darling Downs, Qld.; types in British

Museum) ; Ogilby and McCulloch, 1916, Mem. Qld. Mus., 5, 101, 109, pl. xi,

fig. 1 (detailed description, references and synonymy); Rendahl, 1921,

K. Svenska Vet. Handl., 61, 9 (Noonkambah, Kimberley District, North-

West Australia), and 1922, Medd. Zool. Mus., Kristiania, 5, 166 and 185

(Port Darwin and Daly River, North-West Australia); Paradice and

Whitley, 1927, Mem. Qld. Mus., 9, 88 (Howard River, Northern Territory) ;

Hamlyn-Harris, Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 41, 1929, 34 (north of Mary River,

Qld.) ; Fowler, 1931, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus. 100, 11, 355 (Bourke, N.S.W.) ;

Marshall and Preston, 1934, 30th Ann. Rept. Amat. Fisherm. Assoc., Qld.,

4 (Mary River, Qld.) ; Fletcher, 1937, Aust. Mus. Mag., 6, (5), 164 (Wa-

roona Creek, Old.) ; Toronese, 1939, Bull. Mus. Torino, 47, 187, 300 (“Mel-

bourne,” 7.e., from National Museum there).

Therapon maculosus Saville-Kent 1893, Great Barrier Reef, 369, nom. nud.,

Queensland.

Therapon (Mesopristes) unicolor Fowler, 1928, Mem, Bishop. Mus., 10, 211.

Leiopotherapon unicolor Barrett, 1933, Water Life, 13.

This species has been so fully dealt with by Ogilby and McCulloch that it

only remains to add references to records in recent literature and to list localities

at which it has been taken.

The Simpson Desert Expedition obtained five examples, 27°5 to 77 mm. in

standard length at Coglin Creek, Charlotte Waters, Northern Territory.

Abundant, swimming swiftly in small creeks.

Collector’s No. 501; Aust. Mus. Reg. Nos. IB. 22 to 26.

Apart from the material collected by the Simpson Desert Expedition, the

Australian Museum has many specimens of Madigania unicolor, up to 94 inches

long, from the following localities :—

Western Australia: King Sound (J. Cairn); Paterson Ranges, Kimberley

District (H. Basedow); Gascoyne River and Kimberley (W. Aust. Museum) ;

Murgoo, north-west-north of Yalgoo, northern goldfields railway line, “Many

thousands of these fish were found alive scattered over a large area of country

after a very heavy north-west storm had passed over. The fish appeared to have

come down with the rain. There is no known water here” (Gibson, 1925, MS.).

Northern Territory: Inland from Port Darwin (Wm. Butcher); Howard

River, 35 miles east of Darwin (W. E. J. Paradice) ; Red Bank Creek, Macdon-

nell Ranges, Indracowra, Central Australia (W. Horn).

Queensland: Winton (Qld. Museum); Flinders River and adjacent pools

near Hughenden and Richmond (F. L. Berney); Hughenden district (G. C.

Currie) ; Split Rock, Waroora Creek, 30 miles from Camooweal (H. O. Fletcher

and W. Barnes); Lake Barrine, Atherton Tableland (G. Curry); Almaden (W.

D. Campbell) ; Gayndah (Old Coll.) ; Billabongs of the Diamantina River (S. W.

Jackson); Burdekin River; Lillesmere Lagoons (A. Morton); Rockhampton

(Nobbs) ; Eidsvold, Burnett River (T. L. Bancroft). New record size 94 inches.

New South Wales—Barwon River and Tarrion Creek, Brewarrina, Aug.

1910 (D. G. Stead); Bourke (Cairn, Grant and Shaw); Moree (Barnes and

Lucas); Warrah Creek, Willowtree, near Quirindi; Liverpool Plains (G. Fair-

bairn), southernmost record; Walgett (artesian water, hospital grounds, May

1910, D. G. Stead); Wirrabilla Station, Collarenebri (D. G. Stead); Weil-

moringle Bore, from drains, July 1908 (D. G. Stead); Beringaga (D. G. Stead) ;

Corella Bore, (a “pop-eyed” specimen from D. G. Stead).

This range agrees with that given by Ogilby and McCulloch for the species.

The wide distribution may be attributed to the hardihood of the fish, its ability

to aestivate out of water, and, perhaps, such fortuitous agents as rain, rare

floods, carriage of eggs by waterfowl, etc. Essentially it inhabits the Leich-

hardtian fluvifaunula.

Genus Hernmagstus De Vis

HepHaAgEstus weLcnr (McCulloch and Waite 1917)

Therapon welchi McCulloch and Waite, 1917, Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 41, 472,

fig. 1 (Cooper Creek, near Innamincka, Central Australia); Waite, 1921,

Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 2, (1), 97; 1923, Waite, Fish. S. Aust., 117 and 119.

The single specimen has, unfortunately, been damaged during camel trans-

port, so that the snout is crushed, the caudal fin broken off, and some fin-rays

and scales abraded.

D, xii, 12; A, di, 9; P17; V.4,55. C2.

Sixty rows of scales below the lateral line between its origin and the hypural

joint, and 64 above it. Ten to 13 scales between lateral line and spinous dorsal

fin. Cheek scales in five to seven rows.

Depth (44 mm.) 3, head (39) nearly 3:5 in length to hypural joint (136).

Eye (7) 5:5 in head, 3 in postorbital (21), and a little less than snout, Inter-

orbital width (11°5) nearly 3-4 in head.

Longest (fifth) dorsal spine (19) and second anal spine (20) about half

length of head.

General characters as described by McCulloch and Waite. Maxillary reach-

ing at least to below hinder nostril or to anterior half of eye, its posterior margin

obliquely truncate and exposed. Eye slightly shorter than snout (damaged),

which may be shorter than interorbital width, otherwise the head and dentition

appear typical. Supracleithrum and cleithrum exposed, weakly denticulate.

Lower opercular spine barely reaching opercular margin. Dorsal spines hetera-

canth, the fifth longest. Second anal spine longer and stronger than the third.

The anal and pectoral rays are broken. Ventrals inserted behind the vertical of

first dorsal spine and reaching half its distance to the anal fin.

Colour, in alcohol, greyish to brownish on back, silvery on sides with dark

margins on seales. Fin-membranes and root of tail dusky grey, fin-spines olive-

greenish. Groups of scattered chromatophores under each scale on sides give,

from a distance, an appearance of wavy stripes along scale-rows. No dark

blotches on fins.

Described from a specimen 136 mm. in standard length, originally probably

about 64 inches overall.

Loc.-Andrewilla Waterhole, South Australia, 45 miles south of Birdsville.

Camp No. 28. One of several specimens observed at the time (Sturtian fluvi-

faunula). Collector’s No. 637, Aust. Mus. Reg. No. IB.21. New to the Aus-

tralian Museum collection because this species was hitherto known only from

the type, over eight inches long, caught with hook and line in Cooper Creek near

Innamincka in 1916, close to the spot where Burke was buried, and preserved

in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Dr. Madigan’s specimen differs in the proportions of the eye (and its sur-

rounding parts) to the head and in having the ventral fins farther back, but I

think these differences are accounted for by heterogonic variation.

Fam. CHANDIDAE

Small, almost transparent perch-like fishes, found commonly in shoals in

fresh and salt water, with compressed bodies covered with large cycloid scales.

Ventral fins usually without tapering axillary scale. Frontals with muciferous

channels. Preoperculum with a double ridge, the lower limb of which is serrated.

Mouth small, no supplemental bone on maxillary. Body compressed, not very

deep. Lateral line practically obsolete, only a few scales bearing tubes. Dorsal

and anal spines not very strong. About eight dorsal and anal rays.

BLANDOWSKIELLA CASTELNAUT (Macleay 1881)

Pseudoambassis castelnaui Macleay 3 Feb. 1881, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 5, 339;

Macleay 1881, Cat. Aust. Fish., 1, 39. Murrumbidgee River, N.S.W.

Chanda castelnaui Waite, 1904, Mem. N.S.W. Nat. Club, 1, 29.

Ambassis castelnaut McCulloch, 1921, Aust. Zool., 2, (2), 55, and of check-lists.

Blandowsktella castelnaui Iredale and Whitley, 1932, Vict. Nat., 49, 95; Whitley,

1935, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, (3), 361, fig. 9 (Narrandera specimen figured).

The Simpson Desert Expedition obtained one small specimen, 20 mm. in

standard length, with the following characters:

D. viii/i, 8; A. iii,8. Most of the scales are missing but there are apparently

25 along the sides, only the anterior few bearing lateral line tubes. L. tr. circa 12.

Eye (2-4 mm.) about 3, snout (1°5) about 4 in head (7:5).

Depth (7) and head about one-third standard length.

Supraorbital raised into a point (hardly a spine) posteriorly,

Agrees well with my figure of a New South Wales specimen, but is a little

deeper between soft dorsal and anal fins and has slightly shorter snout. Straw-

yellowish with punctae on back and fins. Membranes between first two dorsal

spines punctulate. A dark streak along middle of caudal peduncle.

Loc.—Coglin Creek, Charlotte Waters, Northern Territory. Collector’s No.

501, pt. Aust. Mus. Reg. No. IB. 27.

This species grows to a length of 34 inches and inhabits the Mitchellian

fluvifaunula. This is the first record of this species from South Australia and

the Northern Territory.

Fifty-seven specimens of Blandowskiella castelnaui are in the Australian

Museum from:

New South Wales—North Yanco, Narrandera, N.S.W., January 1910 (D.

G. Stead); tributaries of the Lachlan River, Goulburn, N.S.W. (A. C. Gibson) ;

Wirrabilla Station, Collarenebri (D. G. Stead); Colombo Creek, Riverina,

March 1910 (D. G. Stead); junction of the Barwon and Namoi Rivers, May

1910 (D. G. Stead).

South Australia—Hart’s Island, Murray River, May 1903 (D. G. Stead).

“Easily observed when water is clear. Very abundant, keep low, near bottom

(Stewart).”

The Simpson Desert Expedition material is of interest because it includes,

in its Sturtian region, Maedigania, which, though essentially Leichhardtian, is

widely distributed through several northern fluvifaunulae, Hephaestus (welcht),

which is Sturtian with Jardinean affinities, and Blandowskiella, which is

Mitchellian. (See Iredale and Whitley, 1938, S. Aust. Naturalist, 18, 64-68.)

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 SCIENTIFIC REPORTS:

NO. 4 BIOLOGY - HEMIPTERA

BY A. MUSGRAVE, AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, SYDNEY (READ 12 APRIL 1945)

Summary

The Hemiptera-Heteroptera collected by Mr. H. O. Fletcher of the Australian Museum and

members of Dr. C. T. Madigan’s Simpson Desert Expedition into Central Australia, have been

handed to me for determination. The collection comprises some 18 specimens.

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939

SCIENTIFIC REPORTS: No. 4 BIOLOGY — HEMIPTERA

By A. Musecrave, Australian Museum, Sydney

[Read 12 April 1945]

The Hemiptera-~Heteroptera collected by Mr. H. O. Fletcher of the Aus-

tralian Museum and members of Dr. C. T. Madigan’s Simpson Desert Expedition

into Central Australia, have been handed to me for determination. The collection

comprises some 18 specimens.

Fam. PENTATOMIDAE

EuMecorus y-nicrum Bergroth 1916

Eumecopus y-nigrum Bergroth 1916, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., (m.s.) 29, (1), 21.

Central Australia. 4 9.

Hay River, near Queensland border, Camp 16, 19; Finke River, Central

Australia, 4 June 1939, 2 9 9 ; and 4 immature specimens, Finke River, 28 May

and 4 June 1939, from Eucalyptus microtheca, are apparently referable to this

species.

PoECILOMETIS BOREALIS Distant 1910

Poecilometis borealis Distant 1910, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), 6, 380. Alexan-

dria, Northern Australia.

Burts Waterhole, South Australia, 55 miles south of Birdsville, Camp 39, 1 ¢.

Kapunpa tTypica Distant 1911

Kapunda typica Distant 1911, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8), 7, 342. Sydney,

N.S.W.

Andado Station, 29 May 1939, 19.

Genus OcuismMe Kirkaldy 1904

Trachyops Dallas 1851, List Hem. Ins. B.M., 1, 151 and 187.

Ochisme Kirkaldy 1904, Entom., 37, 280. New name for Trachyops, pre-

occupied.

Hypolcus Bergroth, 1916, Proc. Roy. Sec. Vict., (n.s.) 29, (1), 26. Haplotype:

HT. apricus Bergroth.

OcHISME AUSTRALIS (Dallas)

Trachyops australis Dallas 1851, List Hem. Ins. B. M., 1, 188, pl. vii, fig. 1.

Hypolcus apricus Bergroth 1916, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., (n.s.), 29, (1), 27.

Andado Station, Central Australia, 29 May 1939, 19. This species seems

to have been lost sight of since Dallas described it in 1851, probably owing to the

fact that it is an inland species, and the majority of collectors in the past have

confined their attentions to the coastal areas of the continent. Hypolcus apricus

Bergroth, appears to be synonymous with it.

Fam. COREIDAE

Mictis prorFANA (Fabricius 1811)

Lygaeus profanus Fabr, 1811, Syst. Rhyn., 211, 33, Amboina,

Mictis profana Lethierry and Severin, 1894, Cat. Hem., 2,9. For synonymy.

Camp 13, 24 miles west of Hay River, Simpson Desert, Central Australia,

1 2; 12 miles north-west of Birdsville, Queensland, 1 9.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

Fam. LYGAEIDAE

LyGArus Mactans Stal 1886

Lygaeus mactans Stal, 1886, Berlin Ent. Zeitschr., 10, 162. North Australia;

Sydney; Fiji.

Six miles north of Todd and Hale River junction, Simpson Desert, Camp

3,19. A widely distributed species occurring in North Australia, South Aus-

tralia, Queensland, and western New South Wales.

DieucHEs NoTATuS (Dallas 1852)

Rhyparochromus notatus Dallas, 1852, List Spec. Hem. Ins. B.M., 2, 569, n. 26.

New South Wales; Tasmania.

Dieuches notatus Stal, 1873, K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., 12, (1), 161, n.6. Mel-

bourne; Tasmania.

Indinda Well, three miles west of Andado Station, Central Australia, 1 é.

Fam. REDUVIIDAE

Havintruus RuFovaARiUS Bergroth 1894

Havinthus longiceps Stal, 1881, var. B, Reuter, Act. Soc. Sc. Fennica, 12, 23,

n. 291.

Havinthus rufovarius Bergroth, Proc. R. Soc. Vict., (n.s.), 7, 1894 (1895), 299.

Western Australia. 9.

Six miles north of Todd and Hale River junction, Simpson Desert, Camp 3. $.

PIRATES near FULVIPENNIS Walker 1873

Pirates fulvipennis Walker 1873, Cat. Hem. Heter., 7, 128, n.108, ¢. Mel-

bourne; Australia.

Twenty miles west of Hay River, @. Specimen identified as above by Mr.

W. E. China of the British Museum (Natural History).

CoRANUS near GRANosUS Stal 1873

Coranus granosus Stal 1873, K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., 12, (1), 20, nn. Australia.

Five miles west of Cowarie Station, Camp 38, @. Specimen identified by

Mr. W. E. China.

THE RELATION OF WET-SEASON VARIABILITY TO FAT-LAMB

PRODUCTION IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY H. C. TRUMBLE, WAITE AGRICULTURAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE

(READ 12 APRIL 1945)

Summary

The fat-lamb production of different districts in South Australia has been investigated by Thompson

(1), following a technical resolution (loc. Cit.) that climatological and statistical surveys were

necessary to define the areas suitable and marginal for lamb-breeding.

The present contribution relates to Thompson’s data the percentage occurrence of seasons

considered favourable for the raising of lambs on pasturage only; that is to say, in the absence of

hand-feeding.

The seasonal relationship between length of day, temperature, rainfall and evaporation was shown

earlier to govern the type of agriculture practised in South Australia (2); and agro-climatic zones

were established for Southern Australia (3) on the basis of the mean length of the rainfall season

and the mean monthly temperatures for the three coldest months.

Following the emergency of natural climatic zones from the approach adopted, variability was

examined; and the probabilities with which rainfall seasons of varying lengths, and varying amounts

of influential rainfall could be expected to occur, were determined by Wark (4).

THE RELATION OF WET-SEASON VARIABILITY

TO FAT-LAMB PRODUCTION IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. C. Trumsre, Waite Agricultural Research Institute

[Read 12 April 1945]

The fat-lamb production of different districts in South Australia has been

investigated by Thompson (1), following a technical resolution (loc. cit.) that

climatological and statistical surveys were necessary to define the areas suitable

and marginal for lamb-breeding.

The present contribution relates to Thompson’s data the percentage

occurrence of seasons considered favourable for the raising of lambs on pasturage

only; that is to say, in the absence of hand-feeding.

The seasonal relationship between length of day, temperature, rainfall and

evaporation was shown earlier to govern the type of agriculture practised in South

Australia (2); and agro-climatic zones were established for Southern Austra-

lia (3) on the basis of the mean length of the rainfall season and the mean

monthly temperatures for the three coldest months,

Following the emergence of natural climatic zones from the approach adopted,

variability was examined; and the probabilities with which rainfall seasons of

varying lengths, and varying amounts of influential rainfall could be expected to

occur, were determined by Wark (4).

METHODS

The growth of pasture in a single season is governed by a complex of factors,

including the type of pasture, soil fertility, length of day and temperature, in

addition to the duration of the period over which sufficient moisture is available;

but it has been considered appropriate at this stage to deal specifically with

moisture as the most critical of the uncontrollable limiting factors concerned,

The criterion adopted has been the maximum expected occurrence of an

effective wet period of (a) 4 months, (b) 5 months, the former being regarded

as the minimum time over which green grass should be available, and the longer

period as a safer limit. As the time at which lambs are dropped is pre-determined

by the date of mating, which tends to remain a fairly constant factor, the effective

period may not occur at any time in the year, but must always date from the same

month. A monthly critical limiting value of - = 0-3 has been employed as in

the previous work, the determinations of the periods being non-graphical.

Winter temperatures in South Australia are sufficiently high to permit active

growth throughout the rainfall season, although there is undoubtedly enough

variation to cause significant local differences in the rate at which feed is produced.

The modifying effects of temperature and other factors can most properly be

assessed after the position concerning the duration of available moisture and its

variability has been defined.

In the author’s previous analysis (1), the mean length of the period of

influential rainfall was found to be closely related to the mean annual rainfall,

provided distinct climatic zones were treated separately,

In the present study the mean length of this period has been related to the

maximum expected occurrence of effective periods of 4 and 5 months, in each case

dating from the first month for which the highest values obtain. The relation-

ships, which follow closely an empirically determined parabolic form, have been

employed to calculate the expectancies of these periods for South Australia.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

ResuLts of ANALYSIS

The following table provides, in the case of the 20 centres for which suffi-

cient data are available, the observed and calculated frequencies with which

periods of 4 and 5 months, as defined above, have occurred. The observed values

are those recorded by Wark (loc. cit.) ; the calculated values have been derived

from curvilinear regression of the observed frequencies on corresponding values

for the mean length of the effective rainfall season. In both cases the linear (b)

and quadratic (c) coefficients are significant, with multiple correlations of

0-9462 and 0:9804 for 4 months and 5 months periods respectively.

The addition of influential rainfall as an independent variate in the multiple

regression equation offered no advantages owing to its high correlation with length

of rainfall season.

TABLE [|

Mean annual rainfall, length of rainfall season and influential rainfall: observed and cal-

culated frequencies of effective rainfall periods of (a) 4 months, (b) 5 months, dating from

the month from which maximum values commence, for 20 centres in South Australia.

Mean

Mean length of Mean

annual rainfall influential % 4 months % 5 months

Centre rainfall season rainfall periods periods

Cins.) (months) Cins.) obs, cale. obs, calc.

* X%y My ¥y ¥p Y,

Mount Gambier .. 30-14 9-6 27-26 98 100 98 102

Mount Barker ... ... 31-03 8:4 27°24 98 95 92 90

Robe ite ad ohn Gn. was 83 21-35 96 94 94 89

Clare spi HE cen 2A 7:7 20-12 90 88 84 80

Bordertown eee ee 19625 7+4 15-01 82 85 72 74

Waite Institute ... .. 24-38 7-2 19-50 87 82 73 70

Kapunda at we Hee. 19873 7°2 15-20 78 82 68 70

Kingscote 2... 1... 19-32 71 15-72 92 81 73 68

Port Lincoln vee ee 19°29 7-1 15-89 87 81 67 68

Strathalbyn vee 1940 7-0 14-85 80 80 66 66

Maitland tees atten very 19885 7:0 15-15 74 80 61 66

Roseworthy College .. 17-38 6-8 13-14 68 77 55 62

Snowtown 2.0... 15676 6-3 11-30 64 68 55 50

Yongala lie ae uaa TAS? 6-3 9-50 56 68 48 50

Lameroo ree tag ae dba 6-2 10°74 60 66 48 48

Streaky Bay wee ee 615-01 5°8 11-20 71 59 35 37

Kyancutta 0. 0... 0... 13-49 5:3 8-10 55 48 22 23

Fowler’s Bay ... .... 11-98 5:1 8-04 50 43 17 17

Port Pirie 2... 0. 0. 13+27 4-9 7°07 39 38 5 11

Berri ae pt ate wey ODS 4-6 4-82 2) 30 7 J

Correlation coefficient Multiple correlation Partial correlations

X, Xy Ya X X, ¥, (elim, x,) Xy ¥, Celim. x,)

0-9555 @ 06-9176 ™ 0-3812 02672

The constants for the two fitted regression equations, with their appropriate

standard deviations, are as follows:

(Y =a + bx + cx’)

CG) 4 months periods (Y:)— a b €

Value of term... a4, a. — 145-3442 + 49-7740 —2°5198

S.D. bay wn aa teal 38°7054 11-1837 +8080

(2) 5 months periods (Y.)—

Value of term ait . = 211-0145: ++ 58-2880 —2°6727

S.D. ies om ae a 22-5984 6+5297 -4716

The standard deviations are fairly high, as only 20 pairs of relevant observa-

tions are available for comparison. In practice, however, there is much inter-

dependence, and the calculated values are in sufficiently close agreement with the

observed, as indicated in Table I.

©) Significant at 1%.

LLL

The calculated values for 227 stations in South Australia, for which the mean

rainfall season had previously been determined, have been employed to construct

the maps shown in fig. 1 and 2. On the first of these, the lambs disposed of in

1939, as revealed by Thompson, are also indicated.

{

‘

{

PERCENTAGE OF SEASONS

WITH A MINIMUM WET PERIOD OF 4 MONTHS

a ea we

ONE DOT (-) #1000 LAMBS DISPOSED OF (1939)

BASED ON DATA OF WARK AND OF THOMPSON

Fig. 1 Distribution of fat lambs (1939) in relation to the percentage occurrence

of 4 months seasons.

In Table II, the location of the lambs according to the different zones of wet

season frequency is given.

Taste II

Location of lambs disposed of ©) in 1939 (in 1,000’s) according to the

frequency of 4 months wet periods

(% occurrence of 4 months periods)

95-98 90-95 80-90 70-80 60-70 50-60 40-50 40 Total

District 98

Central eet nh, eS 42 32 80 134 65 14 6 5 386

Lower North ... — —_ 3 16 49 81 31 > 3 188

Upper North ... — — ~— 1 9 6 2 2 27 47

South-East ... ... 49 17 29 15 7 117

Western ee oo _ — 13 21 14 13 9 7 77

Murray Mallee ... — _ _ a 18 28 36 15 41 138

Totals for State .. 57 59 64 125 238 194 96 37 83 953

©) Lambs “disposed of? represent the difference between lambs marked and those

less than one year old at the end of each year. The figures thus include deaths and local

slaughterings, as well as the numbers marketed as fat lambs.

: The table, taken in conjunction with table IV and fig. 1 and 2, indicates the

outstanding climatic advantages of the Central and South-Eastern districts, and

their capacity for future development; current low numbers at the high

rainfall probabilities are due to soil deficiencies, which can be and are being

remedied.

PERCENTAGE oF SEASONS

WITH A MINIMUM WET PERIOD OF 5 MONTHS

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

eae

BASED ON DATA OF WARK

Fig. 2 Percentage occurrence of 5 months seasons, with location of key centres shown.

There are two qualifications to be considered in respect to Thompson’s data,

namely, that the numbers of lambs “disposed of” include deaths between marking

and the end of each year, as well as those sold or slaughtered, and also that the

figures apply only to the season 1939.

In regard to the first, no alternative means is available by which to arrive at

the distribution of fat lambs; and, as Thompson has stated, the figures used

indicate with reasonable accuracy the regional production of surplus lambs.

In regard to the second, the 1939 season was not characterised by any extreme

climatic conditions and also represents the position better than earlier seasons,

during which the industry was developing, or the succeeding seasons when the

impact of war was felt.

The areas of greatest interest are the Central, South-Eastern, Mallee and

Western districts, and the lambs disposed of over the seasons 1935-43 inclusive

are given for these districts in table III.

Taste IIl

Lambs disposed of (1000's) in four main districts of South Australia, 1935-43

1935 1936 =—-1937 1938 1939 = 1940 1941 1942 1943

Central ... .. 164 209 187 304 386 341 346 332 317

South-East a. 36 39 53 98 117 120 159 177 141

Murray Mallee. 70 63 64 102 138 137 132 137 124

Western .. ... 42 73 41 93 77 ill 86 58 80

This table exhibits an interesting trend in the South-East, where the numbers

have quadrupled since 1935-36, whereas in the Central and Mallee districts they

have barely doubled, and in the Western area the slight increase is by no means

a definite one. The trends are in line with the expectation to be drawn from the

climatic analysis given, except in the case of the Murray Mallee, where the num-

bers themselves and the extent of their increase are both unexpectedly high.

South-Eastern numbers, which remained below those for the Murray Mallee

between 1935 and 1940 have substantially exceeded them in the three succeeding

years, 1941-43.

Despite the figures for the Murray Mallee, this area cannot be regarded as

suitable for the reliable production of fat lambs; and as pointed out by Thompson

(loc. cit.), even the most favoured portions of this region must be regarded as

marginal and better suited to half-bred ewe production than to fat lamb pro-

duction.

Reference to table II indicates that 50% of the lambs disposed of in 1939

were located in areas where the percentage occurrence of favourable seasons is

between 60 and 80.

The main concentration in this category is to the north-west of Adelaide,

including the Gawler-Roseworthy-Owen area and much of Yorke Peninsula. In

20-40% of seasons in this region, however, hand-feeding is probably essential to

attain continuity of high quality production.

The areas in South Australia receiving the frequencies of 4 months periods

indicated are as follows:

Taste IV

Areas of South Australia with varying frequencies of 4 months wet periods,

dating from the month for which the frequency is maximum (square miles)

Total

Frequency of 4 Month Seasons >98 95-98 90-95 80-90 70-80 60-70 50-60 >509%,

Kangaroo Island... ... —_ — 910 790 — —_— ~ 1,700

Mount Lofty Ranges an

adjoining Areas ... ... 70 490 660 1,800 3,200 2,740 2,470 11,430

Yorke Peninsula tire hs 250 1,100 720 oo 2,070

Eyre Peninsula & Western 1,100 1,130 4,620 3,740 10,590

South-East (incl. Lower

Murray Mallee) ... .... 1380 1,170 2,510 2,610 3,190 2,040) 1,850) 14,750

Total ... ... 1450 1,660 4,080 6,550 8,620 10,120 8060 40,540

Area with frequency > 90%

Total South-East Kangaroo Island Mount Lofty Ranges

sq. miles sq. miles % of Total sq. miles % of Total sq. miles % of Total

7,190 5,060 70°4 910 12-7 1,220 16-9

Area with frequency of 70-90%

Eyre Pen., Yorke Pen., Mount Lofty Ranges and

Total South-East and Kangaroo Island elevated Region to North

sq. miles sq. miles % of Total sq. miles % of Total sq. miles % of Total

15,170 5,800 38-2 4,370 28-8 5,000 33-0

©) Central and upper Yorke Peninsula combined.

The importance in South Australia of (a) taking advantage of the more

assured climatic conditions of such areas as the South-East, the Mount Lofty

Ranges and Kangaroo Island by improving soil fertility, and (b) making pro-

vision for the drought years that will inevitably occur in the cereal-growing areas,

by the constant maintenance of fodder reserves, is clearly demonstrated by the

above figures.

The timing of mating and lambing periods may prove to be affected by the

frequency with which conditions suitable for the growth of pasture occur.

Mating is governed in large measure by the period of the maximum onset of

oestrus (1), but the selection of mating periods will be associated with a wider

opportunity for choice as the mean period of influential rainfall and the expectancy

of favourable seasons, which in South Australia are directly related to each other,

both increase. From the data of Wark (4), the expectancy of favourable condi-

tions of moisture for any period, and for any time of the year, can be determined.

SUMMARY

Methods previously employed in South Australia for determining the climatic

basis of the type of pastoral and agricultural production practised have been

utilised further to assess wet-season variability in association with fat-lamb

production.

Relationships have been established between the mean length of the period

of influential rainfall and the maximum expected occurrence of effective rainfall

periods of (a) 4 months and (b) 5 months, as determined by Wark (4), in each

case dating from the first month for which the highest values obtain. From

these relationships, corresponding values have been calculated for more than 200

stations, and maps constructed to compare the distribution of fat lambs, as shown

by Thompson (1), with the rainfall expectancies found.

The climatic resources of the South-East, Mount Lofty Ranges and Kangaroo

Island, which together account for practically the whole of the areas receiving an

expected occurrence of 90% or more of seasons of sufficient duration to raise fat

lambs satisfactorily, without hand-feeding, are emphasised.

The importance of taking advantage of the prevailing climatic conditions by

improving soil fertility in these areas, and of making provision for the drought

years that will inevitably occur in all other portions of the State, is demonstrated

by the analysis undertaken.

, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Acknowledgment is made to Mr. E. A. Cornish, Section of Mathematical

Statistics, C.S.L.R., for advice on statistical treatment, and to Miss Helen Ferres,

who carried out the statistical determinations; the delineation of the maps was

the work of Mr. E. J. Leaney.

REFERENCES

TuHompson, D. S. 1942 Jr. Agr. S. Aust., 45, 612-620

Trumeie, H. C. 1937 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 61, 41-62

Trums_e, H. C. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, 36-43

Wark, D.C. 1941 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65, 249-253

dk whe

THE SODA-RICH LEUCOGRANITE CUPOLAS OF UMBERATANA

BY D. MAWSON AND W. B. DALLWITZ (READ 12 APRIL 1945)

Summary

Umberatana is located in the far northern portion of the Flinders Ranges, distant in an air line about

336 miles from Adelaide (see locality map, p.23). It forms the south-western margin of that belt of

mountainous, igneous and metamorphic country which surrounds Mount Painter. The latter is rather

widely known as the locality where radium-bearing minerals have been located amongst the

depositions of the aftermath of granitic intrusion.

THE SODA-RICH LEUCOGRANITE CUPOLAS OF UMBERATANA

By D. Mawson and W. B. DaLiwitz

[Read 12 April 1945]

Puatres I to III

CONTENTS

Page

Location anp GEOLOGICAL SIGNIFICANCE OF THE CUPOLAS fer ess Jai aa 22

Tue Respective Fretp OCCURRENCES if wpe Buns te tA Aas 7 a. 24

1 Giant’s Head el te wats = PA: if lnm fA, wm, 24

2 Tourmaline Hill _.... ste _ a ce _ “ig ast spon et

3 The Needles ... ... Fas snie Oe ads aye sty me a. 28

4 The Pinnacle and Sitting Bull .... Le ser sss ae ith a. 29

PeErRoLocicaL DESCRIPTIONS .... sth. ate or ext wie bau ahs ee 3

1 Intrusive Rocks 4 eile an mer an awe : 31

A. Leucogranites—Giant’s Head: [2875], [2876], [5925], [5914],

[5844], [6001], [6006], [6002], [6003]. Tourmaline Hill:

[6000]. Big Needle: [6023]. The Pinnacle: [6004],

[5153]. Sitting Bull: [6005] .... _ Ae - ct! i St

B. Pegmatitic Schliers: [6010], [6007], [6017 _ ‘yu Ks aw. 37

2 Intruded Rocks nee rat Bree a vee a a wh ww 39

A. Hornfels: [6015], [5152], [5841], [6026], [5922]. Scapolite-

bearing: [6022], [6021], [5923], [6106], [5924], [6014] .... wa 39

B. Calc-silicate Marbles: [5922], [6029], [6028], [6027], [6025],

[6105] _ vA tee at eat i ds a, 44

CONCLUDING OBSERVATIONS .... ae i det co a -— Fen a «AF

SUMMARY in sak si a as ae Ms we sin reve a «648

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 03 ties ne wis ibis ~ bein bs, unt a 49

REFERENCES Aes che _ ar Si. att at es ‘- wah wa. 49

Description or PLATES Das a fad neds Las bok sits a, a. 49

LOCATION AND GEOLOGICAL SIGNIFICANCE

Umberatana is located in the far northern portion of the Flinders Ranges,

distant in an air line about 336 miles from Adelaide (see locality map, p. 23).

It forms the south-western margin of that belt of mountainous, igneous and

metamorphic country which surrounds Mount Painter. The latter is rather

widely known as the locality where radium-bearing minerals have been located

amongst the depositions of the aftermath of granitic intrusion.

Within two miles of the homestead of Umberatana sheep station, in a region

of only moderate physiographic relief, there are a number of small granitic out-

crops, the largest of which is known as the Giant’s Head (see area map, p. 24).

Situated within a few miles to the east and east-south-east of Giant’s Head are

three other outcrops of a similar nature: the first of these, barely 3 miles distant,

is distinguished as Tourmaline Hill locality; the third is The Needles, located

a further 3 to 34 miles on; the fourth is The Pinnacle and Sitting Bull locality

situated some 64 miles to the south-east of The Needles. The extreme limits of

this zone of outcrops thus exceeds 134 miles in length.

The many individual outcrops occurring in this belt are all small in cross-

section. A close study of them yields convincing evidence that they represent

the very summits of cupola-form masses which ascend from a large scale intrusive

body evidently located at some depth below. It is not remarkable, therefore, that

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

the rocks of such a unique igneous emplacement have proved to be unusual, and

thus interesting in their chemical and mineral characters.

The intruded sediments are of Proterozoic age, corresponding to what in the

southern portions of the State have been designated the Adelaide Series. This

stratigraphical horizon has been established as the result of extended traverses

run across the neighbouring country. The location of a glacial horizon at

Umberatana in normal relation to other established features of the Proterozoic

sedimentary succession has fixed it as of Sturtian age. Underlying the glacial

horizon are limestones and dolomites evidently equivalent to the Beaumont dolo-

mites of the region near Adelaide; these have suffered thermal metamorphism

as a result of the intrusion. It is to be noted that the intrusions are located in this

calcareous belt.

The easterly extension of the line of outcrops lies within the territory known

as Arkaroola sheep station. There these intrusions penetrate what appears to be

a lower horizon of the calcareous belt, for

the tillite in a steadily southward dipping

series is further removed to the south. Also,

in this area, gneissic and foliated rocks of

the central Mount Painter belt are located

to the north within about a mile of the line

of intrusion.

In the region to the south and south-

east of The Pinnacle, the intruded sedimen-

tary series has escaped any noteworthy

degree of metamorphism and the succession

of the beds is clearly and simply recorded.

A traverse across portion of that area, from pr aucustay

Mount Jacob to the neighbourhood of

Mount Warren Hastings, was recorded by

one (9) of us some years ago. The results

of a later more detailed examination by us

along the same line of section have not yet

been published, but the existence of a major

north-south fault line on the east side of

the Cave Hill limestone was established.

It was ascertained that the formations

traversed in the section from Cave Hiil

towards. Mount Warren Hastings repre-

sent a section of the Proterozoic succes-

sion stratigraphically lower than the beds

to the east of the line of the Cave Hill limestone. To the west of the latter are

beds of argillites, dolomites, and magnesite, evidently equivalent to the Beaumont

dolomite section of the Adelaide Series, and to the dolomite and magnesite series

situated to the west of Copley. It was from a creek boulder of a dolomite of this

locality, collected by one of us, that the late Frederick Chapman (3) described

a peculiar structure as being the accumulated remains of a calcareous alga, to

which he gave the name Mawsonella wooltanensis. During our visit in 1940 we

were able to further investigate this structure at its in situ location, and discovered

it to be entirely of inorganic origin. The structure, where it resembles an accumu-

lation of algal segments, is a compact mass of pellets of magnesite mud deposited

in shallow waters, originally plastic and subsequently flattened by load stress.

In the neighbourhood of Mount Warren Hastings the dolomite series is over-

lain by the Sturtian glacial and fluvioglacial beds, a repetition of the succession

at Mount Jacob. It is logical to assume that the outcrops which are the subject

}

LOCALITY MAP

of this investigation, on account of their contemporaneity and consanguinity, all

proceed from the same parent granitic mass below. The introduction of the latter

must have happened at the time when the Proterozoic and Lower-Cambrian rocks

of the neighbourhood were being uplifted and thrown into great domes and basins.

Elsewhere (12) we have shown that orogenic period to be probably of Late-

Cambrian age.

The question arises as to whether the parent magma of our cupola outcrops

is represented by any of the granitic contributions within the central complex of

the Mount Painter belt. If represented at all, such would be expected to show

little evidence of stress, for the region has apparently not been subjected to great

dynamic forces since the period of the cupola intrusions. Only the red, kali-

Powe: aaa ee

Sr red >

a ial “YOURLALINE HILL

ihe

OS ILLINAWOR TINA

“ale 4 2

is : &, RY APKARCOLA®,

id 1 ay Py SS. Y

SCALE { ,

as z 4 aMetes ~~ HAIN MATER EFFING i

Ri ct. saumapenoem <- ~ ~~

ol Ne

a“ Pan

ee oe ae ee oe Al ee

alaskite (see analysis V in table on p. 32) of the Mount Painter region appears

to conform to this requirement. But the fact that an erratic of red alaskite

resembling that of the Mount Painter belt was found (10) in the Sturtian tillite

of Mount Jacob, a locality somewhat further to the east, appears to negative the

suggestion of possible contemporaneity of these two groups of granitic intrusions.

In the absence of detailed mapping of the Mount Painter belt it is not possible

to further discuss the possible relationship of the kalialaskite of that region with

alaskites forming our line of outcrops extending from Giant’s Head to Sitting Bull.

THE RESPECTIVE FIELD OCCURRENCES

The Giant’s Head Locality

The occurrence of an unusual variety of igneous rock at this locality has long

been known, attention having been drawn to it by W. B. Greenwood, one-time

manager of Umberatana sheep station, on which run it is located. Reference to it

was made long ago (9).

The location is 2 miles south of Umberatana Head Station on the track to

Ulinawortina. There a number of small outcrops, about 17 in all, as shown in

the sketch plan (p. 26), extend along a length of somewhat over 1,100 yards

following the direction of strike of the country. The largest of these, the Giant’s

Head itself, so named on account of its appearance when seen at a distance, is

160 yards in greatest length, and its summit is 100 feet above its lowest exposure.

In their general type, the rocks of these outcrops are highly sodic leuco-

granites. Albite is the outstanding feldspar, but is usually associated with more

or less microcline or microcline-perthite. Only in the case of exposure of the

deeper portion of the intrusion is typical granitic texture and character presented.

Most of the exposures, both texturally as well as mineralogically, have the charac-

teristics of aplitic, pegmatitic or pneumatolitic formations,

The intruded rocks are Proterozoic slates, limestones and dolomites. From

the latter, shoaded fragments of magnesite have been found on the surface of the

ground to the east of No. 6 cutcrop. Boulder-bearing fluvioglacial sediments

were noted in the near vicinity. A roughly domed arrangement of sediments has

been observed in the neighbourhood,

In this locality no special observations have been made concerning meta-

morphic contact phenomena, but an odd specimen [5924] (see p. 43) collected

near the contact towards the western end of the intrusion has proved to be inter-

esting scapolite-bytownite-phlogopite-hornfels.

Nature or THE IntrRustve Rocks

Outcrop No. 1 is the most westerly granitic body in this area (see sketch

plan, p. 26). The rock occurring here is irregular in character. In part it is a

very fine-grained, white, sodic (albite) leucogranite,“) carrying occasional pink

garnets which were observed up to 0°5 cm. diameter. The more typical rock is

albite-leucogranite [5844] (see p. 34).

A specimen [6119] from a more siliceous portion of the outcrop is consti-

tuted of quartz and albite and was probably formed during a pneumatolitic or

hydatogenous period of consolidation, as illustrated by parallel vein structures and

residual drusy fissures.

Outcrop No. 3 is the Giant’s Head mass (pl. i, fig. 2). A chemical analysis

of each of two varieties of the granitic rock from here is available. The first of

these, from the summit of the outcrop, was analysed for one of us some time ago

by W. S. Chapman (10). It is slightly-pinkish, medium to coarse-grained

muscovite-albite-microcline-leucogranite [2875] (see p. 31). This represents

a phase of the intrusive rock remote from its contact margin.

The other rock from the Giant’s Head of which we have an analysis is illus-

trative of a tourmaline-bearing phase of a fine to medium-grained albite-microcline-

tourmaline-leucogranite [2876] (see p. 31). This was analysed by Dr. A. R.

Alderman (10).

From the middle of the north side of the mass we obtained a medium-grained

-flesh-coloured microcline-albite-leucogranite. Somewhat finer-grained and nearer

white in colour is the albite-microcline-leucogranite [6108] of the east end of the

mass. In some portions of the outcrop, rocks otherwise very similar to [6108]

differ mainly by having small clots or irregular distributions of black tourmaline

[6110 and 6008] or garnet in addition to the tourmaline [5914] (see p. 33).

Outcrop No. 5 is specially remarkable for including a large area, especially

on its north side, of a peculiar, fetid albite-leucogranite [6001] (see p. 34).

This extends under surface detritus for some distance beyond the obvious

northern margin of the outcrop. Where most typically developed, this fetid rock

is a spongy granular mass, less resistant to erosion than other portions of the

intrusion, Dust caught on its rough surface discolours the white of the albite

and has developed a general brown colour over the outcrop. In several places

in this part of the mass isolated large crystals, one of them 6 inches long of brown,

characteristically wedge-shaped sphene were observed. Where a coarse albite-

quartz-sphene-pegmatite [6010] (see p. 37) contacts the fetid rock this

sphene is strongly developed. Sphene is also very abundant in the pegmatite,

©) The term leucogranite is here given the special connotation of Hatch and

Wells (4), not that of Johannsen (6).

occurring in characteristic wedge-shaped crystals, and is exactly similar to that in

the fetid rock.

Towards the east end of the outcrop fragments of both microcline-perthite

and of albite are scattered on the surface. The latter collected here are very

finely twinned and have irregular, often elongated fluid inclusions.

Outcrop No. 6 is the most easterly mass. It is mainly a white, medium-

grained saccharoidal, microcline-albite-leucogranite [6110]. At the eastern end

black tourmaline makes its appearance in small quantity. This tourmaline is in

poikilitic clots and whisps, which at times have a dendritic appearance as observed

on the outcropping face [5925] (see p. 33). Rarely, there are local patches

richer in black tourmaline. Here also there is a notable development of coarsely

crystalline albite, much of it as runite, graphic intergrowths with quartz (pl. ii,

-Surerop

7 UNDER 1

i DETRITUS :

eer <2 Qa my

aia D3

ols 2 GRANITIC OUTCROPS

cai

Oise L210 Pes) GIANTS HEAD LOCALITY

SCALE

L faith ep

ert tentt nad

[¥

| +

| |

TOURMALINE was,

HILL ie

<b * 4)

2 EZ 3 so

Qurcnops oF

TOURMALINE HILL LOCALITY

ate SCALE

oso senyarde

fig. 3); in these the quartz lamellae are approximately at right angles to the two

cleavages of the feldspar.

Outcrop No, 8 is in part a medium but variable grain-sized, microcline-

albite-muscovite-leucogranite [6006] (see p. 35); this rock forms the summit

of the mass. Rock from three-quarters of the way up the north-west side is a

coarse-grained microcline-albite-(biotite)-leucogranite [6002] (see p. 35),

Outcrop No. 12 is represented by a white albite-leucogranite [6128] in which

the plagioclase is notably euhedral. Mlicrocline in very small quantity is present

in antiperthite. Accessory black tourmaline in small grains is distributed through

the rock.

Outcrop No. 13 is an off-white, albite-microcline- (muscovite )-leucogranite.

Outcrop No. 15. Medium to fine-grained albite-microcline-leucogranite with

coarser pegmatitic schliers, some of which carry a little muscovite, others a little

black tourmaline. In some, specks of sphene and apatite are visible.

Outcrop No. 16. An off-white, medium to fine-grained, albite-microcline-

quartz-leucogranite with traces of biotite.

Outcrop No. 17. Albite-microcline-leucogranite with a little biotite and odd

grains of tourmaline.

Tourmaline Hill Locality

Tourmaline Hill is situated about 3 miles south of Umberatana Head Station.

The actual outcrop that carries that name does so by virtue of the fact that

abundant crystals and fragments of black tourmaline weathered out from the

intruding mass litter the surface for a considerable area in that vicinity. From

among this shoaded material many well-formed crystals have been collected, and

the crystal morphology of some has been recorded (13). In all there are three

outcrops to be considered in this locality respectively numbered, from west to east

(as Nos. 1 to 3) on the sketch plan (p. 26); of these Tourmaline Hill itself

is No. 3. The location No. 4 appearing on the plan is where it is thought that

igneous rock lies not far below the surface; though nothing more is met with

among the calc-silicate marbles of the outcrop than stringers and patches of

quartz. Outcrops Nos. 1 to 3 are all small in area and each obviously represents

the summit of an intrusive mass, only the upper tip of which has reached above

the level of the present ground surface. It will be observed that they are all in

linear arrangement corresponding with the strike of the intruded rocks. The

latter, as at the Giant’s Head, are limestones, dolomites and argillaceous rocks

flanked nearby to the south by fluvioglacial sediments, which latter indicate a late

Proterozoic age for the formation.

The metamorphic effect of the intrusion has been not merely to decarbonate,

dehydrate and recrystallize the intruded sediments, but the latter have received

large additions of substances bodily transported from the igneous source by a

process of transfusion.

Metamorphism in a mild form has affected the sediments at distances of

hundreds of yards across the strike from the axis of intrusion developing obvious —

spots and flecks in the argillaceous rocks. However, it is only within a distance

of about 250 yards that general recrystallization is evident in the hand-specimen ;

it is within the last 150 yards that the more remarkable, coarse-grained, and radical

recrystallizations are located.

The absolute contact is not infrequently a dark, irregular, highly micaceous

type of rock exemplified by [6015] and [5152] (see pp. 39 and 40), which may be

regarded as a quartz-albite-zinnwaldite-hornfels.

Many of the outcrops adjacent to or at no great distance from the igneous

intrusions are scapolite-bearing, for example [5923] (see p. 42) which is a

scapolite-tremolite-biotite-hornfels [6022] (see p. 41) a scapolite-biotite-

(vesuvianite)-hornfels, and [6021] (see p. 42) a scapolite-biotite-hornfels. In

some of these scapolite-biotite-hornfels [6106] (see p. 43) the scapolite

blasts conform to a faint relict structure outlining original sedimentary laminae.

At about 200 yards distant from the igneous outcrop at Tourmaline Hill,

what appears to have been originally a similar sediment to that which developed

into the above scapolite-bearing hornfels is merely a low-grade biotite-feldspar-

quartz-hornfels [6024] of very fine grain-size. One rock specimen [6026] (see

p- 41) collected very close to the igneous albite-rich pegmatitic rock of Tour-

maline Hill has a structure quite similar to [5923] but the ovoid blasts are

merely albite; scapolite is absent.

A notable part of the original sediments of this locality were dolomitic lime-

stone; these have been transformed to tremolite-albite-biotite (phlogopitic)-

marble [6105, 5922 and 6011] (see pp. 41 and 47), an albite-biotite-marble

[6025] (see p. 46), an albite-bearing dolomitic marble [6027] (see p. 45),

and albite-glaucophane-siderite-marbles [6028 and 6029] (see pp. 44 and 45).

Tue INtruUSIVE Rocks

No. 1 outcrop is about 60 yards long and 40 feet high above the creek nearby.

The rocks are schlieric and pegmatitic albite-bearing varieties, ¢g., [6116].

A very little white mica, grains of green apatite and some black tourmaline are

sometimes present. One interesting type represented is a microcline-albite-

tourmaline-leucogranite [6000] (see p. 36). A large block of feldspar

measuring 12 inches by 12 inches by 9 inches from this outcrop was found to be

microcline-perthite in which the albite takes the form of long and wavy streaks,

some of which show multiple twinning in the hand-specimen (pl. ii, fig. 4).

No. 2 outcrop is also about 40 yards long and composed almost exclusively

‘of quartz and feldspar.

No. 3 outcrop, which is Tourmaline Hill itself, is not more than 45 yards in

greatest length. A typical rock of this outcrop is represented by [6019], which is

a very fine-grained, white saccharoidal aggregate of subhedral albite crystals with

a length of about 1 mm. amongst which are embedded irregular grains of quartz.

Potash feldspar is absent in the rock slide. Tiny grains of black tourmaline are

widely dispersed through this rock. Elsewhere the outcrop is coarsely pegmatitic,

the most striking form of which is exemplified by [6007] (see p. 38). This

is coarsely crystalline, composed of white albite, black tourmaline, green apatite,

red garnet and glassy quartz. The feldspar in these coarse-grained portions of

the outcrop is usually a very pure form of albite in bladed masses, often radially

arranged,

The Needles Locality

Some 3 miles east-south-east of Tourmaline Hill are granitic intrusions

known as The Needles. There, soda-rich leucogranite, with associated veins and

patches of pegmatite, outcrops in two major masses of pyramidal form with some

aligned subsidiary extensions (see plan below). The pyramidal igneous masses

which are known as “The Needles” have a quite striking appearance (pl. i, fig. 1).

Like those of the Giant’s Head locality, they are located in a belt of Proterozoic

THE NEEDLES LOCALITY © mee?

BIG NEEOLE SD

Cay

Cc. Se, carl,

ced

O, Mee, 7

LITTLE NEEDLE CD

Sey

Cory,

% OR py.

Pe fh 5

~~ Rae

KUM,

7H, ~ UMBER,

a MOG sp “WATANA HS TO _ARKAROOLA 4 3.

~ TOLARKAROOLA, +

Att wy

dolomites and limestones. The intruded rocks show the effect of mashing and

transgression at contacts. The carbonate rocks and the argillaceous and arenaceous

beds associated therewith all exhibit the effects of thermal metamorphism; in

adjacent areas, say within 200 yards of the intrusive rocks, there is clear evidence

of wholesale introduction into the intruded formations of certain constituents from

the intruding magma. The more obvious of the transported elements are soda and

chlorine, resulting in the development of hornfels rich in albite and scapolite.

The track from Umberatana to Arkaroola passes within several hundred

yards of the Little Needle (see plan, p. 28). In that neighbourhood the track

traverses spotted slates and marbles rich in tremolite and actinolite. It follows

along the strike, which trends about E.15°S.; the dip is moderately steep in a

southerly direction.

In the vicinity of the Little Needle highly siliceous, feldspathic types of horn-

fels occur. Wornfels of this kind forming a high hill situated to the south-east

of the igneous outcrop appears to have been siliceous sediments into which a large

amount of feldspar, principally microcline, has been introduced, developing micro-

cline-quartz-muscovite rocks.

Magnesia-rich calc-silicate hornsfels again appear in the neighbourhood of

the “Big Needle.” In this locality a tremolite-scapolite-hornfels [6014] (see

p. 44) was collected.

INTRUSIVE Rocks

The Little Needle, which is about 50 feet in height, is almost entirely com-

posed of a uniform white, fine-grained, richly-albitic-leucogranite [6121].

The Big Needle is located about 600 yards further to the north-east. Its

height from base to summit is about 150 feet. Here again the granitic rock is a

microcline-albite-leucogranite, but is relieved by irregular pegmatitic veins and

patches, in some of which microcline and microcline-perthite are well developed.

Occasional patches of fine-granular black tourmaline, often poikilitically arranged,

are distributed through the rock; coarser black tourmaline appears in small

quantity in narrow, coarse-grained pegmatitic concentrations,

At the summit of the intrusion, tiny pink garnets are distributed through the

rock [6023] (see p. 36). Here also are occasional patches of green apatite,

and some black tourmaline.

There is a considerable development of coarse, pegmatitic, quartz-feldspar

rock in the north-westerly extension of the Big Needle. There, large feldspar

crystals in masses up to 20 Ibs. in weight are microcline and microcline-perthite.

In the upper portion of the Big Needle a patch of brown sphene was located

and in its north-western extension there are patches of dravite, a brown magnesia-

rich tourmaline [6017] (see p. 39).

Mica in any form is a rarity in the body of these intrusive masses, though

some coarse plates of both white and black phlogopitic mica occur here in a pegma-

titic patch at the north-west end of the Big Needle; however, at the contact of

the intrusive and intruded rocks the latter has been metasomatically reconstituted

and may be highly micaceous, as exemplified by a phlogopite hornfels [6016],

collected at the north-western extension of the Big Needle outcrop.

The Pinnacle and the Sitting Bull Locality

The Pinnacle is a striking granite mass of pyramidal form (pl. ii, fig. 1)

located about a half-mile north of the track from Umberatana to Arkaroola at a

point 24 miles east of Bolla Bollna. It is about 7 miles east-south-east of the

Needles (see map, p. 30). The rocks intruded are the eastward extension of the

same belt as encountered at the Needles. Once again dolomitic limestone and

associated shales have been converted by the intrusion to tremolite and marble and

other calc-silicate rocks and hornfels. One variety collected is an albite-tremolite-

muscovite rock.

A notable development in a belt within 200 yards of the main intrusion is an

albite-magnetite-quartz-hornfels [5154]. Weathering out of the latter and

mantling the surfaces thereabout are octahedral magnetites as much as 4 cms. in

cross-section; some have stepped faces, the result of oscillatory growth. In

several places at the immediate contact with the intrusive mass, the sediments have

been converted to highly micaceous hornfels such as the albite-tourmaline-biotite-

quartz-hornfels [5841] (see p. 40) collected at the igneous contact of the Eastern-

Addendum (see plan below), and a variant [6163] from the contact of the main

intrusion which contains honey-yellow crystals of sphene 2 mm. diam. distributed

through the dark micaceous matrix.

In this same locality but half-a-mile east of the Pinnacle is another consider-

able granite outcrop, which on account of its peculiar outline, is known as

Sitting Bull.

Intrusive Rocks

The Pinnacle is a pyramidal mass with some minor extensions. It is elongated

in a direction roughly north of west to south of east, and at the base its diameter

is about 150 yards. Its height from the lowest exposure to summit is in the

SITTING

WESTERN

ADDENDUM ED

THE PINNACLE

EASTERN

ADOENDUM

je 2,

Cale.

7 Shea re

®Ocrs

ALBITE™RICH «.,

PIPE NO

QuTcRors oF

THE PINNACLES LOCALITY

““éous Anas

° sooyards

Coeeneengereence

neighbourhood of 200 feet. The mass of the rock is a microcline-albite-leuco-

granite [6009], which is very similar to that of Sitting Bull but contains a little

less quartz and somewhat more abundant albite, the ratio of albite to microcline

being about 1 to 1. Occasionally a little black tourmaline makes its appearance,

usually in small symmetrical patches.

This rock which is typical of the intrusion is replaced at intervals over the

outcrop by local variations in texture and even in mineral character. One such

[6018] is a granitoid albite-mica-orthoclase-quartz rock which appears to be

hybrid. In it the black mica has a value 2V about 16°. Both the feldspars are

fresh in appearance but there is evidence that the orthoclase has been in process

of replacement by albite.

Coarse pink feldspar of a pegmatitic schlier in this granite mass was proved

to be albite, but a paler pink feldspar associated with it is microcline-perthite.

The low, subsidiary outcrop, designated the Western Addendum is a white

albite-leucogranite carrying very small quantities of tourmaline and_ biotite

6004] (see p. 36). Here also was collected from an irregular pegmatitic

patch a very large crystal of feldspar which has proved to be pure albite.

A further auxiliary mass, the Eastern Addendum, located on the axial line

to the east of the Pinnacle is a pyramidal body of peculiar nature. Here the rock

is unusual in appearance and in its freedom from any coloured constituent or

mica. It is a snow white, saccharoidal albite-microcline-leucogranite [5153]

(see p. 34). A block of feldspar from a pegmatitic formation in the marginal

zone of this mass was found to be pure albite.

At Sitting Bull the main rock in a flesh-coloured microcline-albite-leuco-

granite [6005] (see p. 37). Crystals and granular patches of tourmaline

occur in portions of this intrusion,

PETROLOGICAL DESCRIPTIONS

Intrusive Rocks

LEUCOGRANITES

MUSCOVITE-ALBITE-MICROCLINE-LEUCOGRANITE [2875]: Giant’s Head

A medium to coarse-grained, granitoid rock which tends to be porphyritic.

In the hand-specimen it is seen to consist of white plagioclase, quartz and larger

flesh-coloured potash-feldspar and muscovite. One exceptionally large but

irregular crystal of potash-feldspar is 3 cms. long, but the average length of the

larger feldspars is 1 cm. Some grains of the potash-feldspar have a narrow shell

of plagioclase.

Microscopic Observations—The size of the bulk of the mineral grains in the

slide is about 5 mm. Anhedral, slightly perthitic microcline, subhedral albite

(less An than 5%) and anhedral quartz are the principal minerals. Although the

larger grains often contact each other in the manner typical of granitic texture,

they are frequently partly bordered by a fine-grained aggregate of albite and

quartz; there are also some medium-sized interstitial grains of the same minerals,

together with a little microcline. The fine-grained aggregate sometimes intersects

the potash feldspars. Fluid inclusions are specially abundant in the potassic

feldspar. The other essential mineral is muscovite. Extremely rare specks of

blue tourmaline and black iron ore complete the list of minerals.

A chemical analysis of this rock executed by W. S. Chapman is given in the

table on page 32. From this the norm has been calculated as follows:

Quartz sh wee 2549 Magnesite .... aw. 008

Orthoclase .... wee 23°35 Imenite Linc a = O10

Albite ee w. 44-60 Apatite sete wee 034

Anorthite .... 168 Water ti we 131

Corundum _.... wine DDD nd i$

En... many .. ~—050 Total ... 100°46

Hy... es we 0°26

C.LP.W. classification: Class I, order 4, rang 1, sub-rang 1.

ALBITE-MICROCLINE-TOURMALINE-LEUCOGRANITE [2876]: Giant’s Head

This is a fine-grained, somewhat saccharoidal rock consisting of faintly-

pinkish white feldspar, semi-vitreous quartz, and black tourmaline. In some

areas the rock is quite free from tourmaline, in others there are isolated grains of

that mineral, while often there are patches several inches across thickly studded

with it,

Microscopic Observations—Almost pure albite (symmetrical extinction about

17°) is easily the most abundant mineral; the other essential constituents are

quartz, microcline and tourmaline. Hiatal texture is conspicuous. Between

grains of the four principal minerals averaging 1 mm. in size lie fine-grained

aggregates of albite and subordinate quartz. In general the albite is subhedral.,

but the quartz and microcline have very irregular boundaries. The tourmaline,

which is pleochroic from very dark, almost opaque bluish-grey to light greyish-

purple, is also anhedral and nearly always poikilitically includes feldspar and

quartz. Whisps of muscovite appear only very rarely.

A chemical analysis of this rock executed by A. R. Alderman is given in the

table on page 32. The boron content indicates it to have a tourmaline content

of about 2%. Assuming for this the mean composition of black iron-magnesium

tourmaline, the norm has been calculated as:

Quartz es we 3232 Tourmaline a 2°00

Orthoclase .... we = 18°35 Apatite ne! we O35

Albite LS vee 43°75 Haematite .... a. 0°32

Anorthite —.... we dell Water i. we 0°33

Corundum .... we 163

Total ... 100-06

C.1.P.W. classification: Class I, order 4, rang 1, sub-rang 4.

TABLE oF ANALYSES

I II Til IV Vv

SiO. 3 we 42°34 75 +36 76°90 76-02 72°06

ALOs a a. 16°30 14-64 13°75 14-60 15-10

FeOs hs a. 0°06 0-35 0-34 0-27 0°47

FeO ihe we O22 0-17 ar 0-08 0-17

MgO _ .. 0°20 0-12 0-22 0-04 0-12

CaO De ae = O50 0-49 0-20 0-34 0-62

NasO a3 wa ~—- 526 5-48 6°26 7-08 0-15

K.0 rise we 3197 3°25 2-78 0-96 11-14

H.O+ at wee 125 0-12 0-15 0-34 6-59

HO — Px 0-07 0-21 0-05 0-15 0-01

CO. ak ‘535 nil nil nil _ nil

TiOe a a. = 005 trace 0-03 0-07 0-14

P.O; _ we O13 0-19 —_ — 0-02

B.Os Hay Jesiby oo 0-19 — em whee

MnO note , 0-01 — — — nil

BaO is as nil ~~ — —_ nil

ZrOz Was —_ —_— — — nil

Cl ae A nil ve nil — nil

F ete ha mae — — — nil

SOs 7 Y,, nil —_ — — nil

Feas (Fez) te nil ~ ee hee 0-07

Rare Earths ist — _ ae —_ nil

100-36 100-57 100-68 99-95 100-66

I. Muscovite-Albite-Microcline-Leucogranite [2875]. Analyst: W. S,

Chapman, Analytical Laboratory, Mines Department, Adelaide,

fT. Albite-Microcline-Tourmaline-Leucogranite [2876]. Analyst: A. R.

Alderman, University, Adelaide.

Lit. Albite-Microcline-Leucogranite [5153], The Pinnactes Umberatana,

South Australia. Analyst: W. T. Dalwood, Analytical Lahoratory,

Mines Department, Adelaide.

IV. White soda aplite, Port Eliot, South Australia, Analysed and

recorded (2) by W. R. Browne.

V. Pink Potash Leucogranite (the Kalialaskite of Johannsen) [2881]

from one mile north of Mount Painter. Analysed by W. S. Chapman

and recorded (10) by Mawson.

ALBITE-TOURMALINE-MICROCLINE-LEUCOGRANITE [5925]: Giant’s Head Locality

A medium-grained, saccharoidal rock composed essentially of faintly greyish-

white feldspar, semi-vitreous quartz and black tourmaline concentrated in local

patches. The tourmaline-rich part passes suddenly into rock almost devoid of

that mineral. Pore-spaces are sometimes present between feldspar crystals. Close

scrutiny reveals occasional tiny pockets of a pale, faintly yellow-green mica.

Microscopic Observations—The texture is dominated by the presence of

euhedral, roughly equidimensional crystals of pure albite whose average grainsize

is 2mm, Occupying the spaces between the albite crystals are tourmaline, quartz,

and microcline.

The tourmaline is poikilitically disposed over considerable areas. Its pleo-

chroism seems to be from very dark, almost opaque brown to light nigger-brown,

sometimes with a purplish tinge. This mineral anastomoses in the most com-

plicated way between the albite crystals and is never idiomorphic. Often it con-

tains small inclusions of microcline, and in a few cases it, sometimes together

with quartz, veins that mineral. From this evidence it is clear that boron-

containing vapours, at a late stage, invaded the rock and attacked the microcline

to deposit tourmaline, while the albite was untouched,

At least some of the albite seems to have had a special mode of origin, for

many grains contain irregular pieces of microcline of various sizes. These are

of the nature of residual cores veined by albite. Thus it appears that, before the

tourmalinization, some microcline was replaced by albite. In a number of cases

tourmaline occurs within albite crystals; probably it has replaced microcline

residua there, for it closely simulates their shapes.

Many crystals of albite contain flakes of muscovite of various sizes; these

usually lie in the central parts of the feldspar and in a few cases they attain a fair

size and occupy a large part of the grains; (001) of the muscovite is often parallel

to (010) of the host. Probably the mica resulted from a late-magmatic activity

connected with the albitization and tourmalinization of the microcline,

The feldspars appear to be completely fresh, but they contain very many

irregularly distributed fluid and dusty inclusions; in albite crystals carrying

residual microcline, these inclusions are more abundant in the potash-feldspar.

The quartz is remarkable in that it is almost free from inclusions of any kind.

One small grain of apatite was seen in the slide.

MICROCLINE-ALBITE-TOURMALINE-(GARNET)-LEUCOGRANITE [5914]: Giant’s Head

Locality

A fine-grained, faintly pinkish-white, aplitic rock consisting of feldspar, |

semi-vitreous quartz, patches of black tourmaline and scattered red garnets.

Microscopic Observations—Anhedral, microcline, quartz and subhedral albite

are the essential minerals. The grains are in two groups, the first composed of

much larger individuals than the second, which consists mainly of small indi-

viduals of albite and quartz. Sometimes the microcline is slightly perthitic; in

the plagioclase X’ A (001) 1 Z= 22°, which corresponds to pure albite. Both

feldspars contain abundant fluid and granular inclusions. In the closely related

rock [6008], the plagioclase contains about 6% of the anorthite molecule.

Dusty and gas-liquid inclusions are abundant in the quartz, the latter being

rather unevenly distributed and often unusually large.

Tourmaline, garnet and a little muscovite are the accessories. The tourma-

line is a dark variety pleochroic from very dark grey-black to chocolate brown.

It is in very ragged grains which enclose quartz and feldspar, and has probably

been formed from microcline by metasomatic replacement. The garnet which is

present in individuals up to 0°5 cm. diameter, is pale pink in transmitted light and

poikilitically includes much quartz; it, too, is in very irregular grains.

ALBITE-MICROCLINE-LEUCOGRANITE [5153]: Eastern Addendum at The Pinnacles

In a fine-grained saccharoidal base of white feldspar are set scattered grains

of vitreous quartz usually 1 to 2 mm. in diameter with occasional extreme cases,

as much as 4 mm. diameter (pl. i, fig. 2).

Microscopic Observations—In a matrix of subhedral albite and anhedral

microcline of average grain-size about 0°5 mm. or less are embedded anhedral

grains of quartz (pl. iii, fig. 1). A few gas-liquid inclusions are present in the

latter, while the feldspars, which are perfectly fresh, contain granular and some

irregular fluid inclusions.

Minute traces of apatite and black iron-ore are the only accessories; a little

leucoxene was observed bordering one grain of the latter.

This rock is closely related to [6005], differing mainly in that the feldspar

is of finer grain.

A chemical analysis executed by W. T. Dalwood is given in the table on

page 32. This yields the following norm:

Quartz wis a 29-01 En... aie we O55

Orthoclase .... w= 16°68 Haematite .... a O29

Albite Ash aw 52°92 Timenite ce a. 0°06

Anorthite _.... a. 0°97 Water Te a 020

Corundum .... we 0°05

Total ... 100°73

C.LP.W. classification: Class I, order 4, rang 1, sub-rang 4.

In Johannsen’s classification this would be a leuco-sodaclase-granodiorite.

ALBITE-LEUCOGRANITE [5844]: Giant’s Head Locality

Somewhat saccharoidal, medium-grained, slightly porous rock of even tex-

ture. Purplish flesh-coloured feldspar, usually as euhedral equidimensional grains,

and semi-vitreous quartz are the obvious minerals.

Microscopic Observations—Euhedral to subhedral plagioclase and anhedral

quartz are the only two minerals present apart from rare accessories. The felds-

par is apparently quite fresh but is speckled with fluid and dusty inclusions; it

usually has a narrow zonal shell and determinations on the two parts gave

x’ A (001) 4 Z= 15° = An,, for the core and X’ A (001) 4 Z= 22° = An,

for the extreme outside. The determination on the central part checked with the

reading of 12° for symmetrical extinction. Only very rarely is the albite anti-

perthitic, the included mineral being microcline.

The accessories are a very little mica and rare grains of tourmaline. The

mica is pleochroic from brownish white to almost colourless.

Porous, Fetm, ALBITE-LEUCOGRANITE [6001]: Giant’s Head Locality

A medium-grained, spongy (abundant pore-spaces) and friable, saccharoidal

rock consisting of white to colourless, usually transparent, pearly feldspar,

vitreous quartz and tourmaline (extremely rare). When struck with a hammer

a fetid odour is emitted.

Microscopic Observations—The texture of this rock is determined by the

abundance of loosely-packed euhedral to subhedral crystals of fresh albite (maxi-

mum extinction angle in symmetrical zone== 17°). In grain-size the crystals

average about 1°5 mm.; some of them are bent and partly broken. The twin-

lamellae are very fine, and the pericline type is unusually common. Myrmekite

and microcline-antiperthite are present in very small amount (pl. iii, fig. 2).

The feldspars contain some granular inclusions, and there is an abundance of

irregular fluid inclusions. The gas from these released on fracture is the source

of the fetid odour above mentioned. This is partly hydrogen sulphide, but the

peculiar odour suggests the presence also of carbon-bisulphide. When a micro-

scope section ) of the rock is prepared without delay, the compressed liquid in

the minute vesicles can be seen in a state of great agitation as the gas escaping

through cleavage cracks, slowly volatilises.. Within the period of a few hours the

imprisoned gases, where they can get away, have all escaped.

An occurrence of fetid feldspar, referred to as necronite, was recorded long

ago by Hayden (5).

Quartz is the only other mineral of any importance; it makes up about 35%

of the whole. It is interstitial between the albite grains and carries a moderate

number of gas-liquid inclusions.

Accessory minerals are present in minute amount only; they comprise

leucoxene, fluorite, tourmaline, black iron ore and apatite. The fluorite is moulded

on the albite, and not infrequently forms a thin lining to cavities.

MICROCLINE-ALBITE-MUSCOVITE-GRANITE [6006]: Giant’s Head Locality

A rock of medium but variable grain-size, ranging from about 1 mm. in some

parts to 3 mm., and up to 5 mm. in more richly micaceous irregular schliers. It

consists of off-white feldspar, semi-vitreous quartz, notably abundant muscovite

plumose in the coarse parts, and occasional grains of black tourmaline.

Microscopic Observations—Essentially composed of anhedral microcline-

perthite, quartz, very subordinate subhedral albite (Ab 964), and muscovite. The

alkali-feldspar sometimes contains irregular blebs of quartz. Muscovite is

plentiful in portions of the rock. No tourmaline appears in the rock section.

MicrocLiNE-ALBITE-(BIOTITE)-LEUCOGRANITE [6002]: Giant’s Head Locality

Coarse-grained, semi-pegmatitic rock consisting of flesh-coloured and off-

white feldspars, semi-vitreous quartz, and biotite. The grain-size is variable;

many grains are over 1 cm. across and most approach that size. The mica com-

prises probably not more than 1% of the whole, and it is unusual in that it occurs

in extremely thin plates, which are often over 1:5 cm. across, A little black

tourmaline is also visible.

Microscopic Observations—The texture is granitic. Microcline-perthite is

predominant, occurring in irregular grains among which lie subhedral grains of

plagioclase. Some granular plagioclase is found in the microcline-perthite. The

feldspars are generally quite fresh and they contain irregular fluid inclusions.

The slide available permitted only limited optical measurements of the plagioclase ;

a content of An, was indicated, but it is thought likely that the anorthite content

is actually less than this. The quartz is interstitial and contains strings of gas-

liquid inclusions. Pleochroism in the mica, which contains some haloes, is from

nigger-brown to pale yellow. Accessories are present in minute quantity only;

they are very dark brown sphene, black iron ore, brown tourmaline, muscovite

and zircon.

MICROCLINE-ALBITE-LEUCOGRANITE [6003]: Giant’s Head

A medium-grained, granitoid rock consisting of flesh-coloured and pinkish-

white feldspars, vitreous quartz and very rare specks of tourmaline and flecks of

muscovite. Blebs of quartz are present up to 5 mm. diameter.

Microscopic Observations—A rock of granitic texture, but of very uneven

grain-size, which, however, averages about 2 mm. Anhedral microcline and

@) Some details of this feature observed in a specimen from another portion of the

outcrop are recorded in Mawson (8).

slightly perthitic microcline are the dominant minerals. Next comes subhedral

albite (symmetrical extinction = 16°), which is often in crystals smaller than the

average. The potash-feldspar sometimes contains granular quartz and plagio-

clase. All of the feldspars are quite fresh, but they carry many irregular fluid

and a few granular inclusions, The quartz is interstitial, It contains a few gas-

liquid and granular inclusions.

Accessories, which are very rare indeed, are muscovite, tourmaline (pleo-

chroic from light steel-grey to light purplish grey) and black iron ore.

‘/MICROCLINE-ALBITE-TOURMALINE-LEUCOGRANITE [6000]: Tourmaline Hiil

Medium-grained, light-coloured, saccharoidal, granitic rock consisting of

white feldspars, semi-vitreous quartz, unevenly distributed elongated black tourma-

line, a very little pale blue-green apatite and very rare muscovite.

Microscopic Observations—The essential minerals, in order of abundance,

are microcline, albite and quartz. The plagioclase is almost pure albite in lath-

shaped, subhedral crystals which have a broad interstitial texture. Microcline,

in shapeless interstitial grains, is dominant. Both feldspars are absolutely fresh;

the albite and, to a lesser extent, the microcline, carries fluid inclusions. The

quartz, also, is interstitial; it usually occurs in largish grains poikilitically enclos-

ing quantities of both feldspars.

The tourmaline is in anhedral grains poikilitically disposed towards feldspars

and quartz. It is zoned irregularly, with resultant mottled effect. Parts of some

grains are deep cobalt blue, but longitudinal sections are pleochroic from very dark

brownish-grey to pale violet-grey. Apatite, a few rods of black iron-ore and rare

muscovite are the only accessories.

MICROCLINE-ALBITE-M USCOVITE-GARNET-LEUCOGRANITE [6023]: The Big Needle

Medium-grained, saccharoidal rock consisting of white feldspar, semi-vitreous

quartz, a little pearly, white muscovite and irregularly distributed icositetrahedra

of light red garnet averaging about 2 mm. in diameter.

Microscopic Observations—An allotriomorphic-granular rock of uneven

grain-size consisting essentially of microcline (very rarely slightly perthitic)

quartz, albite, muscovite and garnet, in that order,

The grains of quartz and microcline are quite irregular, but the albite tends

to be subhedral, and is apparently almost quite free from the anorthite molecule.

The feldspars contain many irregular fluid and dusty inclusions but are only very

slightly clouded by alteration. Gas-liquid inclusions are prominent in the quartz.

Muscovite is in subhedral books,

The garnet is very pale brown in section and generally encloses a few grains

of quartz and, less frequently, of albite and muscovite. Apatite and black iron-ore

occur only extremely rarely.

‘TOURMALINE-BEARING ALBITE-LEUCOGRANITE [6004]: The Pinnacle

Medium-grained, slightly porous and’ somewhat saccharoidal rock consisting

of white, somewhat pearly plagioclase, semi-vitreous quartz and a little black

tourmaline. The quartz is blebby, frequently concentrated into irregular pockets

up to 0°75 cm. across. Poikilitic patches of black tourmaline are visible.

Microscopic Observations—The texture is hypidiomorphic granular. Essen-

tial minerals are subhedral plagioclase and interstitial quartz. The average grain-

size of the plagioclase is 1:5 mm., whereas that of the quartz is usually much

coarser (hiatal texture). Some areas of plagioclase measuring several millimetres

across are quite free from quartz. The plagioclase, which is about 100% albite,

contains many fluid inclusions of irregular shape and is quite fresh.

Strings of gas-liquid inclusions are more common in the larger grains of

quartz than in the smaller ones. These large grains also contain some plagioclase,

and are often in optical continuity with smaller ones lying between the surround

ing plagioclase crystals.

Tourmaline, pale biotite, a few spherules of leucoxene, and apatite are the

accessories. The first, which is fairly abundant, is usually in dispersed grains

which are in optical continuity over an area of about 0-5 sq. cm.; it is pleochroic

from almost opaque blue-black to medium brown. The biotite, which is in less

amount, sometimes fills the interstices between albite crystals.

MICROCLINE-ALBITE-LEUCOGRANITE [6005]: Sitting Bull

A granular, medium-grained rock consisting almost entirely of evenly dis-

tributed flesh-coloured feldspar and vitreous quartz, roughly in the proportion of

3:2. The quartz is considerably coarser than the feldspar.

‘Microscopic Observations —Irregular grains of quartz averaging about

2-5 mm. to 3 mm. are embedded in a “matrix” of feldspar of average grain-

size about 0°8 mm. Two feldspars are present in nearly equal amount; subhedral

albite (Abo) and anhedral microcline, The microcline is somewhat in excess,

and is a little coarser than the other. Some grains of albite are embedded in the

quartz. Mica is a rare accessory; in some cases the core is muscovite surrounded

by a narrow shell of biotite.

PEGMATITE SCHLIERS

ALBITE-MICROCLINE-QUARTZ-SPHENE-PEGMATITE [6010]: Giant’s Head

A coarse, pegmatite constituted of very pale flesh-coloured albite in individuais

up to 6 cm, across, which embed and surround irregular crystals and patches up

to 3 cms. across of quartz, at times faintly smokey, and lozenges of sphene.

Microscopic investigation shows the presence also of some microcline, but this 1s

not obvious in the hand-specimen. This pegmatite occurs as an irregular pocket

in the cellular, fetid, albite-leucogranite [6001].

Microscopic Observations—The leucocratic minerals consist of albite, which

is apparently free from anorthite, quartz with a few gas-liquid inclusions,

myrmekite, and small quantities of microcline. Some of the myrmekite is of a

peculiar, spongy form which does not extinguish normally under crossed nicols ;

instead, a shadow-band moves along the intergrowth as the stage is rotated. The

albite is either twinned in a very fine scale, untwinned or normally twinned. The

microcline occurs as inclusions or partly bordering albite, and its presence in the

microscope slide indicates that some of the coarser feldspar in the pegmatite itself

is probably microcline. Both feldspars are quite fresh.

A few flakes and fine-grained aggregates of mica are present; it 1s pleochroic

from golden-brown to light golden-yellow, and 2E appears to be about 25°. It

appears to be zinnwaldite.

The sphene is in wedge-shaped crystals up to about 7 cms. by 1 cm.; these

are dark brown and often quite vitreous internally but may be black, earthy and

cellular in a superficial zone. Occasionally the latter characters permeate the

entire crystal. A study of microscopic preparations has indicated that the original

sphene was homogeneous and vitreous, but that subsequent reaction with residual

liquors has had the effect of breaking down some of the sphene to non-homogene-

ous aggregates of ilmenite, leticoxene and sheets about 1 mm. thick containing

quartz and feldspars ramify through the original crystal in an irregular manner.

Pleochroism in the sphene is variable but ranges between light maroon and

silvery buff. The cleavage-lines are wavy and closely spaced. The dark colour

of the outer parts (and often the whole) of certain of the crystals is due to the

presence of small ilmenite grains; except at the margins where, however, they are

often bordered by leucoxene.

The sphene has been subjected to a partial analysis by B. R. Lewis and the

presence of 0°3% rare earth oxides established.

One near-basal section of light-blue tourmaline was observed.

ALBITE-TOURMALINE-APATITE-GARNET-QUARTZ-PEGMATITE [6007]: Tourmaline

Hill

This is an irregular and coarse-grained rock composed of faintly-greenish-

white albite in which are embedded large masses of black tourmaline, green

apatite, clear reddish-brown garnet, and some clear semi-vitreous quartz.

Microscopic Observations—Detailed investigation reveals that the bulk of the

rock is a felted and bladed mass, often in semi-radiating aggregates of elongated

but usually anhedral albite crystals exhibiting irregular and interrupted twinning

and markedly undulose extinction. In the hand-specimen the cleavage faces of

the albite are seen to be wavy and bent. In addition to the minerals visible in the

hand-specimen there is a little microcline, occasional flecks of muscovite, and rare

scattered grains of black iron-ore, sometimes in needle-like crystals. Optical tests

show the plagioclase to be approximately 100% albite. The quartz is unusual in

that it contains only very few fluid inclusions; it shows slight to moderate strain

shadows.

The tourmaline is mainly in large black masses, occasionally exceeding 5 cms.

in cross-section. It is pleochroic from blue-black to pale purplish-brown. Near-

basal sections of large crystals show marked, irregular streakiness and zoning,

the colour ranging from dark bluish-grey to grey-brown. Tourmaline bordering

the garnet is pleochroic from bluish-black to pale nigger-brown.

The apatite is sometimes in green, granular masses, but it more often shows

a layered structure in which saucer-shaped layers 1 to 1*5 mm, thick alternate with

similar ones of albite. Apatites as much as 3 cms. across have been met with.

The R.I. is 1:64, indicating it to be a fluor-apatite with a small admixture of the

chlor-apatite molecule.

A secondary mineral, buff or pale brown, as seen in the hand-specimen is

associated with the apatite; this gives a strong reaction for phosphate, but does

not seem to be completely soluble in hot 1:1 HNO,, though effervescence takes

place during solution, In some parts of the specimen an apparently similar

mineral is white and somewhat drusy. In other parts there is a soft, waxy, buff-

brown to reddish buff secondary substance which gives a reaction for phosphate

but is probably a mixture, since it is only very slightly soluble,

As seen in the microscope slide, this secondary mineral is usually observed as

a shell bordering and embayed into apatite; most of this is light brown to buff in

transmitted light, but parts of it are light greenish-brown, while a little is rust-

brown from iron oxide staining. From chemical and optical tests it appears that

this substance is dahllite or a closely similar mineral. Closer microscopic examina-

tion reveals the fact that the light brown parts are yellowish-white in vertical

reflected light ; they are almost isotropic but sometimes show spherulitic structure;

the light greenish-brown parts, on the other hand, are neutral in reflected light

and show aggregate polarization. Perhaps this difference explains the incom-

plete solubility of the substance. Some small grains of apatite are almost com-

pletely replaced by these minerals. An unidentified, colourless, biaxial negative

mineral of low D.R. and R.1. slightly higher than apatite is occasionally found

with the dahllite.

The garnet is a pale pinkish-buff in transmitted light. It may be in masses up

to 3 cms. in diameter, but usually in very irregular grains, often bordered by

isolated grains or a narrow rim of poikilitic tourmaline which sometimes encloses

a little microcline. A few small grains of garnet are embedded in the feldspar.

We are indebted to B. R. Lewis for a chemical analysis of this garnet as stated

herewith :-—

SiO... ads we 3560 CaO —"... sia we 08

TiO... 0-1 MgO 2. oe OF

AbOs shea 22+1 MnO ore apd: wee 2965

FeO 12-6

Total ... 100-5

This, approximately, represents an isomorphous mixture of 2 Spessartite

[3 (MnO).Al1,0,.3 (SiO, ) | molecules with 1 Almandite [3(FeO).AL,O,.3 (SiO, ) |

molecule.

PEGMATITIC DRAVITE-QUARTZ-ALBITE Rock ([6017]: The Big Needle

This occurs as an irregular local schlier in albite-leucogranite. It is a porous

rock consisting of a clear nigger-brown to yellow-brown mineral (often in striated

crystals typical of tourmaline) which is apparently dravite, saccharoidal quartz

and semi-saccharoidal albite. Little or no feldspar is associated with the dravite

which occurs in separate, medium-grained pockets, with a little associated quartz.

Evidently the quartz and dravite have replaced the feldspar. Tiny cavities are

particularly abundant in the parts of the rock which have been replaced, and some

of them are about 1 cm. long; small crystals of quartz (sometimes double-ended)

and occasional crystal of dravite can be seen projecting into these spaces.

Microscopic Observations—Optical tests on the brown mineral show that it

is uniaxial negative with its maximum R.I. approximately equal to 1°62 and the

minimum slightly less than 1°61. The lower limit of R.I. seems a little too low

for any known tourmaline, and the higher is certainly too low. The D.R. of the

mineral is probably about 0-013, and it is pleochoic in shades of pale buff. These

data correspond most closely to those given for dravite, but there must be some

important modifications in this case to give rise to the differences mentioned. In

a few places the dravite is bordered by small patches of a grey-blue to very deep

cobalt-blue, pleochroic mineral which appears to be tourmaline, and since

these patches are in optical continuity with the larger masses, it seemed reasonable

to assume that the latter, also, are a variety of tourmaline. Undulose extinction

suggesting composition zoning is a feature of it.

In order to make certain of the nature of this mineral a partial analysis was

kindly undertaken by Mr. Lewis, who found it to be composed of 12°8% MgO

and 38°8% SiO,. Its identity as dravite is thus confirmed.

Optically continuous dravite is extensively riddled with inclusions of quartz,

and the contact between the two minerals is extremely irregular.

Intruded Rocks

HORNFELS

METASOMATIZED SCHLIERIC QUARTZ-ALBITE-ZINNWALDITE-HORNFELS [6015]:

Tourmaline Hill

A fine to medium--grained contact rock from the Tourmaline Hill Locality,

consisting of patches and schlieren of brownish-grey mica embedded in a matrix

of white feldspar and quartz. The rock, particularly in the micaceous parts, is

distinctly miarolitic.

Microscopic Observations—The principal minerals are mica, fresh plagioclase

and quartz. In grain-size the feldspar is very variable; some bands average

0-25 mm., while others average about 2 mm. The mica is associated with quartz

and a little plagioclase ; large irregular grains of the former usually form a matrix

for numerous flakes of mica.

In the feldspar, which is subhedral, the symmetrical extinction is 17°; in its

(001) cleavage-flakes y’ = 1°53 and a < 1°53; thus it is pure albite. Twinning

is often abruptly interrupted within a crystal and is usually very coarse; both

opaque and clear granular inclusions are conimon.

The plagioclastic bands are completely free from quartz, but the quartzose

and micaceous areas contain a little feldspar, usually included in the quartz; the

latter also contains minute rod-like grains of a greenish-white mineral, apparently

tremolite. Also an occasional grain of calcite.

Pleochroism in the mica is from light buff to off-white, and pleochroic haloes

are often developed. The @ refractive index is approximately 1:57 and the

interference figure of cleavage-flakes is biaxial with a very low optic axial angle,

2V about 10°. Examined spectroscopically lithium was found to be present iv

large amount. Thus this mica is taken to be zinnwaldite.

A number of accessories is present, all in small amount. Pinkish-white

fluorite is, perhaps, the most abundant; some isolated grains occur, but most of

it fills cavities and lines vughs; no crystal forms are visible. Next there is

brownish-yellow chalcedony, and its mode of occurrence is similar to that of

fluorite, with which it is often associated; its R.I. is considerably less than that of

balsam, and part-spherules are often developed. A few grains of tourmaline

(pleochroic from brownish-grey with a bluish tinge to yellowish-grey), of apatite

and black iron ore are also present. Finally, there is a colourless, uniaxial posi-

tive mineral of good relief, which shows sieve structure in one or two instances.

Specimen [5152] is another example of metasomatized contact rock from

Tourmaline Hill, very like [6015] but with relatively more abundant mica. Some

of the miarolitic cavities are about 1°5 cm. across,

In the microscope slide mica plates of hexagonal outline are not uncommon.

and some carry needles of rutile. The feldspar is albite (X’ A (001) 1 Z= 22°);

one or two grains contain granular, apparently residual, microcline with many

dusty inclusions, and a few carry a little mica. Small, well-shaped crystals of

tourmaline occur occasionally in feldspar. Sporadic grains of zircon are found in

the zinnwaldite, where they cause pleochroic haloes. Finally, the uniaxial positive

mineral of high relief and second order interference colours present in [6015] is

more abundant here: it is quite formless and usually shows marked sieve struc-

ture, the included mineral being zinnwaldite.

ALBITE-TOURMALINE-BIOTITE-QUARTZ-HORNFELS [5841]: The Pinnacle

A schlieric contact rock from the Pinnacles locality. It is of variable colour-

ing and grain-size and is constituted of greyish white feldspar, biotite, and black

tourmaline, the latter usually in grains about 3 mm. across.

Microscopic Observations—In a confused mass of albite of fine but variable

grain-size are set larger grains of biotite, tourmaline and anhedral quartz. The

albite is fresh and carries very numerous dusty and granular inclusions. Many

grains of feldspar are embedded in the quartz.

The mica, which occasionally includes grains of rutile, is pleochroic from

yellow-brown to yellowish white; pleochroic haloes, though present, are scarce.

Some of the books are bent. It appears to be phlogopitic.

Zoning is a feature of the tourmaline; the cores are yellow-brown and the

outer parts olive-green. Some grains which are entirely of the latter colour are

present; these and the zonal shells were obviously formed at a late stage in crys-

tallization. They are pleochroic from olive-green to very pale pink.

Accessories are ragged grains of very cloudy apatite, small quantities of grey

sphene, black iron ore, calcite and zircon.

ALBITE-TREMOLITE-CALCITE-SPHENE-HORNFELS [6026]: Tourmaline Hill

A mottled rock consisting of oval (about 3 mm. x 2 mm.) masses of a light

ash-grey to a somewhat warmer-toned substance embedded in a cementing aggre-

gate of faintly greenish-grey amphibole with lustrous cleavage faces,

Microscopic Observations—Iin section the oval areas of the hand-specimen

are faintly brownish. They consist of very fine-granular aggregates of a number

of minerals. The most abundant of these is difficult to identify, but it appears

to be untwinned plagioclase, apparently albite, though its colour in the hand-

specimen suggests scapolite; it is so very fine-grained and dusty as to be difficult

to recognise. This then is a spilositic development, but its analogy with [5923]

and [6106] suggests that it may have passed through a preliminary stage of

scapolization during the process of thermal metamorphism.

Scattered through this “matrix” of what appears to be plagioclase are

abundant minute grains of calcite and brown biotite, and also much coarser ragged

individuals and sheaf-like groups of pale grey-green actinolite. These are different

from but sometimes mingled with or bordered by a colourless or greenish-white

iron-poor actinolite which forms the cementing aggregate so conspicuous in the

hand-specimen. In this latter amphibole Z A C= about 18° and the sign is

biaxial negative with very high optic axial angle; it contains a number of green

pleochroic haloes, which border grains (probably sphene) of high R.f.

Associated with the main masses of actinolite are small amounts of sphene,

calcite, apatite and clear albite or quartz; the sphene is interesting in that it is

strongly pleochroic like that from the Giant’s Head itself [6010]; its colour-

change is from wine-red mottled with light brown, to buff; the mottling shows

variability of composition. Flakes of a light-coloured chlorite are also associated

with actinolite masses and with the groundmass,

ALBITE-TREMOLITE-CALCITE-HORNFELS [5922]: Tourmaline Hill

A mottled, medium-grained, semi-gneissic, cale-silicate rock composed of light

silver-green tremolite, flesh-coloured carbonate, white albite and a few unevenly

distributed flakes of dark mica. Pore-spaces are not uncommon in the calcitic

areas. The albite and carbonate are in discontinuous wavy bands and also in clots,

Microscopic Observations—The minerals are irregularly distributed. The

whole “matrix” consists of fresh, fine-grained, twinned albite, which contains

very many inclusions of granular, light green tremolite, often as stumpy rods. At

times these inclusions are so numerous as to take up as much space as the host

itself. Symmetrical extinction in the feldspar is 17° (100% Ab).

Embedded in the albite are irregular pockets, often elongated, of colourless

tremolite and calcite. These two minerals are very closely associated and inter-

growths of them are common, so much so that the amphibole sometimes encloses

more than its own volume of carbonate. This shows that recrystallization took

place very rapidly. Grains of albite also are frequently present in the same host.

The tremolite, in which Z A c= about 20°, is in ragged-bladed crystals often

showing a radiating structure when grouped. Odd grains of quartz are present;

this indicates that the MgO has all been used up in the formation of tremolite,

leaving none for dolomite.

Accessories are present in very small amount only; they comprise sphene

and rutile, often intergrown phlogopite (pleochroic from pale brownish-green to

very pale yellow-green), a grain of epidote and a speck of goethite.

SCAPOLITE-BIOTITE-(VESUVIANITE)-HORNFELS [6022]: Tourmaline Hill

A grey-black rock consisting mainly of oval grains of waxy scapolite about

2 mm. across. Fine-grained dark mica and minute grains of pyrite can be dis-

tinguished by the aid of a lens. Occasionally the pyrite occurs in larger masses.

On the weathered (but unabraded) surface the scapolite stands out in relief as

knots, between which are depressed areas rich in mica; in these areas there is also

in relief a relic of fine-scale sedimentary banding.

Microscopic Observations—In section, when compared with specimen [5923],

this rock shows important differences warranting special description. It consists

predominantly of oval, rounded and irregular grains of marialite-rich scapolite,

which are mottled under crossed nicols and have no relatively clear margins

(contrast [5923]). Although these grains show no pronounced optical orienta-

tion, those which are elongated grains have their long axes parallel. As in [5923],

fine-grained, pale brown mica, probably phlogopite, occurs between the scapolite

grains, but it is by no means as well segregated as in that rock; much scapolite

relatively free from mottling but showing undulose extinction is associated with it.

The relics of sedimentary laminae noted in the hand-specimen show up in

section as closely-spaced, apparently slightly carbonaceous biotite-rich bands,

alternating with others rich in scapolite grains.

Forming inclusions in the scapolite are pale brown mica, clear quartz, a little

pale green tremolite, calcite, pyrite, grey and brown sphene in small, irregular

grains and rare magnetite and tourmaline (pleochroic from blue-grey to bluish-

yellow). Zircon, in elongated crystals, is very rare. Very strong pleochroic

haloes around minute grains have developed in some of the mica.

Apart from scapolite, the most interesting mineral in this rock is vesuvianite ;

it occurs rather sparsely as euhedral to irregular grains associated with the mica.

The mineral is traversed by closely-spaced cracks which render it grey in trans-

mitted light, though it is quite clear between the cracks. Its relief is high.

The rock is a_scapolite-biotite-(vesuvianite)-hornfels, derived by mieta-

somatic replacement from an impure, slightly carbonaceous limestone, which was

thoroughly worked over by sodic solutions.

SCAPOLITE-BIOTITE-HORNFELS [6021]: Tourmaline Hill

This rock closely resembles [6022]. Microscopic examination reveals the

following differences.

The scapolite grains are notably elongated, and there is probably a more

marked parallelism of their c-axis. Mottling is often stronger in certain well-

defined parallel bands which may represent channels along which solutions tra-

velled. These bands are parallel to the original bedding. These peculiarities

suggest relationship to varying porosity and chemical variation in the original

sedimentary laminae.

Carbonaceous inclusions are almost entirely absent, but, as in specimen

[6022], the elongated scapolite grains lie parallel to whatever banding there is.

The mica is a little more plentiful and is more strongly segregated. Carbonate

(calcite or dolomite) is much more abundant and usually occurs in distinct pockets

and veinlets. Tremolite and vesuvianite are absent and iron-ore is less plentiful.

A few apatite inclusions are found in the scapolite ; inclusions of tourmaline,

as stumpy prisms, pleochroic from brown, bluish-brown or greenish-brown to

yellowish-white are relatively more abundant in the scapolite of [6021].

SCAPOLITE-TREMOLITE-BIOTITE-HORNFELS [5923]: Tourmaline Hill

A medium-grained rock consisting largely of a mass of dark grey grains of

scapolite about 2-5 mm. across; their cleavage faces are dull and waxy, due to the

presence of abundant inclusions. Occupying the spaces between these are small

laths of greenish-white tremolite and plates of brown mica,

Microscopic Observations—Polygonal and oval porphyroblasts of scapolite

make up the bulk of the rock (pl. iii, fig. 3). Several features of this mineral are

of interest. It contains very numerous inclusions of quartz and pale biotite and

small quantities of grey sphene and of calcite; small tourmaline needles, pleochroic

irom greenish-brown to a faintly greenish tint are also present, but they are very

rare. A narrow marginal zone of the scapolite grains is often relatively poorer

in inclusions; however, this zone shows up most clearly not for that reason, but

because of its lower double refraction as compared with that of the inner parts

of the grains, which are further distinguished by being strongly mottled under

erossed nicols—-so much so that they have the appearance of being broken up into

a mosaic; this mottling suggests non-uniformity of composition (see below) and

is undoubtedly connected with the formation of the rim of different composition.

Nearly all parts of any one grain extinguish simultaneously. In the slide examined

the range of interference colours to be observed in certain mottled areas is from

blue to yellow; the lower colours both here and in the marginal zone are un-

doubtedly due to the gradual partial replacement of the original scapolite by a

more marialitic one, a process which probably took place as more and more soda-

rich material found its way out from the igneous intrusion to the country rock,

which was probably an impure magnesian limestone.

Forming pockets between the scapolite grains are aggregates of bladed

tremolite, fine-grained biotite and calcite, together with small amounts of granular

grey sphene, apatite and rare haematite. A little scapolite is also mingled with

these minerals.

The tremolite is pleochroic in white and greenish-white, and green pleochroic

haloes around grains of sphene are not uncommon therein. A little tremolite is

also embedded in the scapolite grains, but here it has developed a considerably

stronger green colour, and the grains are much more irregular. Pleochroism in

the biotite (phlogopitic) is from light rust brown to pale yellow; the mica in the

scapolite has a somewhat greenish tinge.

SCAPOLITE-BIOTITE-HORNFELS [6106]: Tourmaline Hill

This is closely related to [5923] but with more abundant interstitial micaceous

base between the richly scapolitic ovoids. Obvious tremolite is absent, A relict

structure based on the original planes of deposition is a feature of the rock.

SCAPOLITE-BYTOWNITE-PHLOGOPITE-HORNFELS [5924]: Giant’s Head Locality

A dark grey, massive, medium-grained rock consisting of very dull scapolite

containing clots of dark mica.

Microscopic Observations—The texture is typically decussate. No relic of

directional structure remains. The essential minerals are scapolite, plagioclase and

phlogopite, or pale biotite. The first of these predominates greatly and is in

extremely irregular grains with sinuous and sutured boundaries; only rarely is

there any sign of subhedral outline. Judging by its D.R., this mineral is probably

somewhat more meionitic than that in the other rocks described. By contrast

with specimens [5923] and [5110] the scapolite is sometimes more meionitic near

its borders; this is indicated by an increased D.R., generally though not invariably,

unnoticeable when the mineral is in contact with plagioclase or mica.

When fresh the plagioclase is clouded brownish-white by very minute,

extremely concentrated, unidentified inclusions. Measurements with the universal

stage gave the maximum extinction in the symmetrical zone as 52°, which corre-

sponds to Ab,,An,,. The plagioclase is extensively sericitized and scapolitized ;

the sericitization seems always to have extended in advance of the scapolitization.

A dark mica is not uncommonly associated with the other two minerals in the

feldspar.

A mica which appears to be phlogopite is pleochroic from very light brown

to yellowish-white; occasionally a little carbonate is associated with it. Besides

occurring in clots, it forms rather abundant fine inclusions in the scapolite,

The accessories are anhedral black iron-ore, often bordered by pale leucoxene,

grey-green pleochroic actinolite and rather rare apatite. The iron-ore and

amphibole are fine-grained and rather irregularly distributed in the scapolite;

the second is confined to the scapolite, but the first is also associated with the

mica-clots, and in these cases it is subhedral to euhedral. All sections of what is

referred to as apatite are isotropic; this may be a matter of chance, or else the

mineral may be hibschite or plazolite ; however, the frequent occurrence of apatite

in other rocks of this locality is evidence in favour of this also being apatite.

TREMOLITE-SCAPOLITE-HORNFELS [6014]: The Needles

This rock consists of a felted aggregate of light greenish-grey, silky tremolite

in which are embedded grains of off-white scapolite 1 to 2 mm. long. In a more

coarsely crystalline pocket the tremolite crystals approach 1 cm. in length and

0-75 cm. in breadth. The ratio of amphibole to scapolite is about 2°5: 1.

Microscopic Observations—The microscope section shows a closely-inter-

locking mass of bladed, colourless tremolite crystals interspersed with subhedrai

to anhedral (especially in basal and near-basal sections) grains of scapolite; a

little sphene is also present. The amphibole is often in sheaf-like and radiating

bunches and the grains present are roughly of two sizes, namely 2 mm. and

0-5 mm.; its maximum measured extinction Z A c= 18°. Pale green pleochroic

haloes are occasionally seen around the sphene, especially the smaller grains, when

it is embedded in tremolite.

The scapolite is in grains and resembles plagioclase in ordinary light. Under

crossed nicols mottling is sometimes seen, and the central parts of the grains are

richer in meionite than are the outer shells. Often this mineral has a brownish

stain, and occasionally it shows some alteration to sericite. In one crystal a few

small grains of calcite were seen.

The sphene is in irregular grains and is pleochroic from brown to yellowish-

brown. It closely resembles the sphene of rock [6010] of Giant’s Head.

CALC-SILICATE MARBLES

‘TREMOLITE-ALBITE-PHLOGOPITE-MARBLE [5922]: Tourmaline Hill

A faintly greenish-grey and white patchy rock composed of tremolite, calcite,

albite and a little brown mica.

Microscopic Observations—The original marble has been completely re-

crystallized and the minerals developed contain abundant inclusions, giving the

slide a cloudy appearance as viewed under ordinary light. Taken in order of

abundance the minerals present are the following.

Albite with a composition about Ab,,An, and in quite fresh condition is

present in small subhedral to anhedral crystals. It is clouded owing to inclusions

of a dusty nature and others of minute tremolite.

Tremolite is plentifully developed, especially in pockets where it forms

radiating sheaf-like structures. Calcite is plentiful; some occurs intergrown with

the tremolite.

Accessory constituents are phlogopite, sphene and rutile; the latter quite rare:

GLAUCOPHANE-ALBITE-SIDERITE-MARBLE [6029]: Tourmaline Hill

A medium-grained rock consisting of yellow-buff carbonate minerals contain-

ing patches very rich in blue amphibole. :

Microscopic Observations—In a matrix of medium-grained calcite are set

grains and whisks of blue amphibole, anhedral to subhedral albite and some

poorly-developed rhombs of what is probably siderite.

The amphibole often includes large quantities of calcite; occasionally it con-

tains albite and a few granules and rods of black iron ore. ZAc>= 26° ;

X = bluish-white, Y= pale blue with a purple tinge, and Z= pale blue-green ;

the double refraction is about 0°03, much higher than for normal glaucophane,

and the mineral is probably so-called abnormal glaucophane of Winchell (15),

which may be Naurodite of Knebel (7). Anomalous brown interference-colours

and mottling between crossed nicols are common.

The albite contains granules of fine amphibole, dark specks, irregular fluid

inclusions and some grains of calcite. In numerous places it is being replaced by

a mottled feldspar resembling anorthoclase.

The accessories are quartz, haematite in mossy patches, a few grains of rutile,

and light brown mica pleochroic from golden-brown to light golden-yellow.

The calcite is rich in fluid inclusions. The quartz is in very irregular, inter-

stitial grains; it contains some albite, calcite and blue amphibole. Its presence

indicates that, very probably, no dolomite is to be expected here, for its mode of

occurrence (shape, inclusions) is such that there is no doubt that the whole rock

has been re-constituted; amphibole has been formed, and there was obviously not

sufficient MgO to form more. Conditions were not suitable for the formation of

wollastonite, olivine or monticellite.

SIDERITE-ALBITE-GLAUCOPHANE-MARBLE [6028]: Tourmaline Hill

A medium-grained, blue-grey rock consisting of calcite and related carbonate

minerals, patches of white feldspar, a little black mica and grains and fibres of a

blue amphibole. Occasional minute specks of pyrite are visible.

Microscopic Observations—In an irregularly distributed base made up of

calcite and albite of fine but variable grain-size are set abundant and imperfect

rhombs of siderite, ankerite or a similar mineral, subhedral grains of albite, and

small quantities of other minerals. A little albite may be included in the rhombs;

they also carry small amounts of goethite or limonite.

_ The fine-grained albite often occurs in clots, though it is sometimes mingled

with calcite. These albite clots, especially, are crowded with dusty and granular

inclusions and also contain small grains of calcite; sometimes they are made up

of extremely small grains (0-015 mm.), but their average diameter is 0-03 mm.

In many cases the coarser plagioclase is being replaced by anorthoclase or ortho-

clase. This feldspar has a lower R.I. than that of albite and a mottled appearance

under crossed nicols.

The amphibole is present in less quantity, only about 2%, than is suggested

‘by the appearance of the rock in hand-specimen. Apart from being interstitial

generally, it is often crowded in a thin layer of minute grains round the borders

of rhombs of carbonate. Its pleochroism is similar to that of the abnormal

glaucophane in rock [6029]. Altogether it is very like that mineral. ZA c was

measured as 23°, but may be more. Many grains do not extinguish at all—they

mostly change from an anomalous brown through greenish-yellow to blue-green

on rotation between crossed nicols,

The most abundant accessory is mica. It is pleochroic from golden-brown

to light golden-yellow; bent flakes are not uncommon,

There are also present black iron ore in granules and rods, sparse haematite

and some stall, scattered grains of rutile. Quartz is not present.

ALBITE-BEARING, DOLOMITIC MARBLE [6027]: Tourmaline Hill

This is a faintly brownish-white, fine-grained rock, composed largely of

carbonate minerals. Small patches of white feldspar are visible on a cut surface,

while black grains of tourmaline are scattered throughout the specimen.

Microscopic Observations—Broadly, the rock consists of a matrix of car-

bonates in which are embedded clots of albite. Both calcite and dolomite are

present; the latter occurs in clear, subidiomorphic rhombohedra about 0-2 mm.

across, embedded, often poikilitically, in much coarser calcite, which is really

interstitial in development, and shows no crystal boundaries. The most obvious

distinction between the two carbonates is that the calcite is murky with inclusions,

and it is this feature which makes it so easy to see the subhedral outlines of the

dolomite crystals.

The albite is almost pure, as shown by a symmetrical extinction of at least

16°5°; confirmation of this result is found in its positive sign and in the fact

that X’ A (001) 1 Z= 22°. It occurs both as shapeless clots and as masses

which have definite rhombic and tabular shapes, strongly resembling those charac-

teristic of feldspar crystals. The albite is largely confined to these areas, and is a

fine-grained aggregate in their central parts, but coarser toward their margins. A

little tourmaline, pleochroic from deep brown to buff, is associated with the albite

aggregates.

Occasional grains of subhedral to euhedral quartz are embedded in the

matrix, but this mineral does not appear to be associated with the albite aggregates.

In one or two cases, however, small albite crystals are embedded in the quartz.

Minute grains of a dark red-brown mineral resembling rutile are present.

Phliogopite or pale biotite is present, but rare.

The fact that quartz is associated with dolomite suggests that metamorphism

in this rock and probably in the whole intrusion, took place at a very low tempera-

ture, because no forsterite has been formed. There is no evidence in the field or

in the slide that the failure of SiO, to react with MgO, in this case at least, was

due to high confining pressure; non-carbonate rocks in the vicinity of this intru-

sion have been scarcely affected by metamorphic processes.

A partial chemical analysis of this rock gave the following percentage results.

Insoluble 23-14, FeCO, 2°96, CaCO, 54:28, MgCO, 20°04; total 100-42. In

arriving at this result the CO, was not determined but is that calculated assuming

the soluble bases to be all carbonates.

ALBITE-BIOTITE-MARBLE [6025]: Tourmaline Hill

A mottled, medium-grained rock consisting of white carbonate minerals in

which are embedded dark grey aggregates of very fine-grained albite and biotite.

Octahedra of pyrite, stained red with a thin coat of haematite are quite prominent.

Microscopic Observations—The carbonate and silicate parts of the rock are

more or less sharply differentiated in section (pl. iti, fig. 4). Very irregular

patches of the former, whose average grain-size is about 0°3 mm., are embedded

in a very fine-grained matrix consisting mainly of albite; the two parts are present

in about equal amount, with the albite probably in slight excess. In section, in

contradistinction to the hand-specimen, it seems logical to refer to the albite as

the matrix.

Included in the carbonate tracts are small amounts of albite and biotite, while

the siliceous areas are composed of albite with subsidiary amounts of biotite and

fine-grained carbonate. The material of the feldspar was probably introduced

into the limestone during the process of metamorphism; at the same time, com-

plete reconstitution probably took place, for the biotite tends to be most abundant

at the edges of the carbonate, which seems to indicate that the carbonate re-

crystallized in segregated areas, while any impurities therein were withdrawn and.

contributed to the formation of biotite,

In the case of some of the larger subhedral grains of the feldspar, its com-

position was determined as very close to Ab,j,. The albite is quite fresh and

contains minute, irregularly distributed inclusions of biotite.

The subhedral shape of some of the grains of carbonate mineral suggests

that dolomite is present; colourless to pale green tremolite is only very rarely

developed: it occurs in minute grains in what appears to be dolomite.

Quartz is very rare in the slide, and only one grain was seen in the hand-

specimen.

The mica is pleochroic from light brown to very pale yellow and, therefore,

phlogopitic. It occasionally contains pleochroic haloes; minute clots of leucoxene

are also embedded therein.

Pyrite, which is always in the grey albitic areas, is usually bordered. by

haematite and magnetite.

Numerous, small, irregular, dark grey aggregates of sphene-granules are

found, particularly in the albitic areas and at the junction of these with the

carbonate.

TREMOLITE-ALBITE-BIOTITE-MARBLE [6105]: Tourmaline Hil!

This rock is closely related to [6025] but contains less carbonate minerals.

It is grey and very similar in general appearance to the preceding, but differs in

being loaded with ash-grey prisms of tremolite. These, mainly concentrated along

the bedding planes, reach 1 cm. in length and 1:5 mm. in cross-section,

ConcLuDING OBSERVATIONS

From the foregoing observations concerning these intrusive masses it will be

observed that they are in the nature of cupola summits above the general

plutonite mass of a large scale granitic intrusion into the thick series of sediments

deposited during Proterozoic and Cambrian times in the great geosyncline of

South Australia. They wepresent the summits of active upward migration of

magmatic gases and solutions.

The igneous rocks of these cupolas are essentially leucocratic, quartz-

orthoclase (orthoclase, microcline and microperthite ) -albite (sodaclase) rocks.

Rarely if ever is the plagioclase as calcic as oligoclase ; in very many, the soda-

clase is in excess of the orthoclase, Femic minerals are absent to rare. In

Johannsen’s classification (6) they range from alaskites to leuco-sodaclase-grano-

diorites with exceptional occurrences just coming into the range of leucogranites

as defined by him. However, for our purpose, the broader use of the term leuco-

granite as defined by Hatch and Wells (4) has been adopted in this contribution.

Whether gravity separation of earlier crystallized femic minerals has played any

notable part in determining their absence is not obvious. There is, on the other:

hand, clear evidence of large scale migration of soda, silica, chlerine, boron and

potash into the surrounding rocks, enriching them in such minerals as albite,.

scapolite, mica and tourmaline.

Soda-rich differentiates of granite intrusions of this same age have been

recorded elsewhere in South Australia, for example, the soda-aplite (see table,

p. 32) of Port Elliot described by Browne (2) and the albite of Cape

Willoughby described by Tilley (14). The latter contains local concentrations of

tourmaline which are closely paralleled in some of the Umberatana leucogranites.

For the most part these cupola rocks of Umberatana differ in texture from

normal granites. They bear evidence of having crystallized from magmatic liquids

abnormally rich in volatiles resulting in pegmatitic, aplitic and even spongy

textured crystallizations with abundance of liquid and gaseous inclusions in the

feldspar and quartz. The summits of the cupola masses are crystallizations of

this kind, but a transition in texture towards normal granite is noticeable in more

deeply exposed areas.

Increasing abundance of microcline is a feature of the deeper zones. In

portions of the marginal areas of the intrusions, microcline is in process of replace-

ment by albite. Bowen’s (1) explanation for such replacement may be applicable

here. He states: “Of the two alkali metals, soda and potash, the latter forms

the more volatile compounds. As loss of vapour proceeds, the liquid is enrched

in soda more than potash. Eventually potash feldspar becomes tnstable in contact

with the liquid and is replaced by albite.”

It would appear that the operation of the mechanism responsible for the

transfer of soda, silica, etc., into the surrounding sediments has been responsible

also for the abnormal enrichment in soda of the cupola rocks, the transfer to the

latter site taking place in ascending gaseous and thermal fluids and not as a

gravity separation of already crystallized constituents. Accessory minerals in the

jeucogranite are very irregularly distributed, but in some places there are notable

concentrations of tourmaline, apatite, sphene and garnet.

A notable feature of the metamorphic aureole is its richness in albite and

scapolite. Earlier formed scapolite in the hornfelses is unusually meionitic with

later accessions and marginal zones richly mariolitic.

Albite is almost ubiquitous in both igneous and metamorphic rocks. The

only group in which it does not figure is the scapolite-bearing rocks. But in one

hornfels specimen albite is replacing what appears to have been earlier-formed

scapolite.

The occurrence of glaucophane (Naurodite (?) ) in the hornfelses is also a

matter of special interest.

A common feature of the intruded sediments at their contact with the intru-

sions is their conversion to dark phlogopitic biotite and brown zinnwaldite bearing

hornfels, often containing notable amounts of tourmaline ; in one case scapolite is a

constituent of this zone.

There is ample proof that the mineral transformations evidenced in the horn-

fels were effected at a very low temperature. This is attested [6027] by the

persistence of quartz even in the presence of dolomite.

SUMMARY

Attention has been drawn to the occurrence near Umberatana of the exposed

tips of a number of granitic summit cupolas of an early palaeozoic plutonite

intrusion. The cupola rocks are remarkably free from femic minerals and are

richly sodic with subordinate potash content. At a late stage in their consolida-

tion much of the potash feldspar was replaced by albite. At that time the residual

magmatic liquids were highly charged with volatile constituents rich in soda,

chlorine, boron, etc.

There is clear evidence that these gases and solutions, containing also potash

displaced and eliminated from the cupola rocks, permeated the intruded sediments,

some of which were dolomites and limestones. In the hornfels of the metamorphic

aureole, dependent on material thus introduced, are much albite, scapolite, phlogo-

pite, as well as orthoclase and tourmaline. Low temperature conditions prevailed

during the formation of the hornfels.

Among the more important accessory minerals encountered in the igneous

rocks are tourmaline including dravite, sphene containing traces of rare earths,

fluor-rich apatite and manganese-rich garnet. Zinnwaldite occurs in the contact

zone. Dahllite is recorded in the summit pegmatite of Tourmaline Hill.

Traus. Roy, Soc. §. Aust., 1945 VoL 69, Plate I

Vol ov, Plate tl

Aust, 145

Fig,

Trans, Koy. Soe, Vol. 69, Tate [11

Fig, 1 Fig. 2

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

We take this opportunity to thank Mr. G. A. Greenwood, of Mount Searle,

for drawing our attention to The Needles and The Pinnacles-Sitting Bull occur-

rences, and both him and Mr. R. C. Sprigg for assistance in the field and in an

examination of all the areas. We are indebted to Mr. L. W. Treloar, of Umberatana,

for hospitality, and to R. G. Thomas and A. R. Alderman for assistance during

a preliminary investigation of the Giant’s Head and Tourmaline Hill areas under-

taken by one of us some years ago.

REFERENCES

Bowen, N. L. Ore Deposits of the Western States (Lindgren Vol.), 123

Browne, W. R. 1920 Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 44, 28

CuapMAn, F. 1927 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51, 123

Hatrcu and Wetts 1937 The Petrology of the Igneous Rocks, 151

Haypen 1819 Amer. Jour. Sci., 1, 306

JoHannsen 1932 Petrography.

Knepet, W. von 1907 Neues Jahrb. Min., 1, 229

Mawson, D. 1906 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 30, 67

Mawson, D. 1923 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 47, 385

10 Mawson, D. 1926 Aust. Ass. Adv. Sci., 18, 254

1i Mawson, D. 1934 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 58, 187

12 Mawson and Datitwirz 1944 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, 191

13. Ropertson, I. E. 1925 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 49, 266

14 Trey, C. E. 1919 Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 43, 316

15 Wincuetit, N. H. 1927 Elements of Optical Mineralogy, pt. ii, 209

WOON AMP & Ne

Pratt I

Fig. 1 The Little Needle observed from the south-south-west. The Big Needle is

behind the shoulder of the slope on the left. “

Fig. 2 A close view of the upper portion of the Giant’s Head outcrop,

Priate IT

CORRIGENDA

Arising from the absence of both authors at time of final proofing.

. 22 line 18, p. 35 line 19, and p. 37 line 21, for ‘‘schliers” read “schlieren”,

. 23 line 30, for “(9)” read “(11)”.

. 25 lines 4 and 21, for “pneumatolitic” read “pneumatolytic”.

. 26 line 9, p. 32 line 6, and p. 44 line 48, for “whisps” read “wisps.”

29 line 34, after “white” insert “mica’’,

32 and p. 34, for “W. T. Dalwood” read “T. W. Dalkwood”.

36 line 15, for “interstitial” read “intersertal’.

39 line 12, for “schlier” read “schliere”.

40 line 2, for “a” read “q’”’.

41 line 19, for “green” read “pale green”.

41 line 47, transpose comma after ‘rutile’ to after “intergrown”.

. 44 line 27 should read, “pleochroic from light maroon to buff”.

. 48 line 7, for “enrched” read “enriched”,

. 48 line 13, in place of “in ascending” read “through the agency of ascending”.

. 48 line 48 pier brackets before and after “including Dravite” and “containing traces of

rare earths”,

hahaha haclarhaLachasiashachaclahachie

CONTRIBUTIONS TO OUR KNOWLEDGE OF THE AUSTRALIAN

TORTRICIDAE (LEPIDOPTERA)

BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER (READ 10 MAY 1945)

Summary

Fam. TORTRICIDAE. I use this family name in a broad sense to include the four families into

which it has been divided by Meyrick. These I prefer to consider subfamilies. The two largest

subfamilies, the Tortricinae and Eucosmidae, though natural groups, are not separable by any

absolute character, and do not therefore seem entitled to more than subfamily status. The

Tortricinae (sensu lato) should, I think, be regarded as a branch of the great superfamily Tineoidea.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO OUR KNOWLEDGE OF THE AUSTRALIAN

TORTRICIDAE (LEPIDOPTERA)

By A. Jerrerts TuRNER

[Read 10 May 1945]

Fam. TORTRICIDAE

I use this family name in a broad sense to include the four families into

which it has been divided by Meyrick. These I prefer to consider subfamilies.

The two largest subfamilies, the Tortricinae and Eucosmidae, though natural

groups, are not separable by any absolute character, and do not therefore seem

entitled to more than subfamily status. The Tortricidae (sensu lato) should, I

think, be regarded as a branch of the great superfamily Tineoidea.

Subfam. PHALONIANAE

Gents HELIOCOSMA

The following species of this genus are closely similar, and need careful dis-

crimination. They have been adequately described; but it seems advisable to give

their distinguished characters and geographical distribution.

H. exoeca Meyr., 12-16 mm. Forewings without red scales; with a narrow

ochreous-grey subterminal fascia. Hindwings white.

North Queensland: Cape York, Townsville. Magnetic Island. Lindeman

Island. Also from New Guinea.

Hi. argyroleuca Low., 15-22 mm. Examples from Mount Kosciusko and

Tasmania are much larger than those from other localities. Forewings without

reddish scales; terminal area with divergent grey streaks. Hindwings grey-

whitish.

Queensland: Brisbane, Dalby, Chinchilla, Warwick, Milmerran, Inglewood,

Stanthorpe. New South Wales: Tenterfield, Brunswick Hds., Tabulam, Ebor,

Mittagong, Mount Kosciusko (3,500 feet). Victoria: Gisborne. Tasmania:

Cradle Mount, Hobart.

H., incongruana Wlk., 12-19 mm. Forewings with reddish markings ; terminal

area with apical and tornal streaks or spots, sometimes approximated. Hindwings

grey-whitish.

North Queensland: Cape York, Atherton. Queensland: Duaringa, Caloun-

dra, Stradbroke Island, Tweed Hds. New South Wales: Ebor, Sydney,

Katoomba, Mount Kosciusko (6,000 feet). Victoria: Gisborne, Beaconsfield,

Melbourne. Tasmania: Strahan, Tasman Peninsula, St. Marys, Weldborough.

South Australia: Mount Lofty.

H. rhodopnoana Meyr., 15-22. Forewings with broadly suffused dark

markings; a sharply dentate subterminal line of irregular thickness, sometimes

interrupted into spots or streaks. Hindwings grey.

New South Wales: Mount Kosciusko (6,000 feet). Victoria: Mount

Buffalo, Gisborne, Melbourne. Tasmania: Cradle Mount, Derwent Bridge, Lake

Fenton, St. Helens. South Australia: Mount Lofty. Western Australia:

Albany, Denmark, Perth.

Gen. Choristis nov.

Xwpirris, Separate.

Tongue present. Palpi short; second joint broadly expanded above and

beneath; terminal joint short, obtuse. Antennae in male thickened, simple.

Thorax with a posterior crest. Forewings smooth; 2 from four-fifths, 7 and 8

Brans. Roy. Soo. S.A,, 69, (1), 27 July 1945

stalked, 7 to termen. Hindwings with 3 and 4 connate, 5 from middle of cell,

6 and 7 stalked, 7 to costa. Type C discoplaca Turn,

CHORISTIS DISCOFLACA Turn.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1916, 501. Capua discotypa Turn., ibid, 1916, 510, is

a synonym.

Queensland: Mount Tamborine, Tweed Hds., Toowoomba, Carnarvon Range.

Subfam. TORTRICINAE

Paraselena haplopolia n. sp.

érdorodos, simply grey.

8,16mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 2; grey. Antennae grey ; ciliations

in male 1. Antennae grey. Abdomen grey-whitish, Forewings narrow, costa

slightly arched, apex pointed, termen obliquely rounded; whitish-grey sparsely

sprinkled with fuscous; cilia whitish-grey. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

Tasmania: Bothwell, in March (W. B. Barnard) ; one specimen.

Gen. Axioprepes nov.

déiorperys, goodly.

Tongue present. Head rough-scaled. Palpi ascending, closely appressed to

face, reaching vertex, moderately thickened, slightly rough anteriorly. Antennae

in male thickened, ciliations in male minute. Thorax with a small posterior crest.

Forewings smooth, in male with costal fold; 7, 8, 9 stalked, 7 to termen. Hind-

wings with 3, 4, 5 widely separate, approximately equidistant, 6 and 7 stalked.

Axioprepes leucozancla n. sp.

AevxoLayxros, with white sickles.

@,13mm. Head dark fuscous; tegmina whitish-brown. Abdomen fuscous ;

tuft whitish-ochreous, towards apex grey. Legs ochreous-whitish; tarsi fuscous

with whitish rings. Forewings broad, costa strongly arched, apex pointed, termen

scarcely rounded, slightly oblique; costal fold in male narrow, from base to one-

third; whitish largely suffused with pale ochreous; a blackish costal streak from

base to one-third, where it expands into a round spot; a narrow dorsal streak from

near base to one-fourth, followed by several minute strigules; some dark fuscous

irroration in basal area; three broad vertical ochreous lines from dorsum ending

in the median suffusion; a series of blackish costal dots; an ochreous streak from

two-thirds costa obliquely to near termen; an ochreous spot at apex, narrowly

prolonged along termen, interrupted by blackish dots; cilia whitish with four

blackish bars, on apex, above and beneath middle, and on tornus. Hindwings

pale yellowish; cilia pale grey.

North Queensland: Malanda (Atherton Tableland) in September; one

specimen.

IsocHorista EuDRosA Turn.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1916, 503.

I. eutypa Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1925, 46, is a synonym, Queens-

land: Cape York to Killarney.

Gen. Anisolepida nov.

dvicoAeriSos, unevenly scaled.

Head rough-scaled. Tongue present. Palpi moderate, porrect. Thorax with

a posterior crest. Forewings with raised scales; 7 and 8 stalked; 7 to termen.

Hindwings with 3, 4, 5 separate, approximately equidistant, 6 and 7 stalked.

Differs from Jsochorista in the thoracic crest and the raised scales on forewings.

Anisolepida semiophora n. sp.

enpeopopos, bearing a mark.

?, 19-22 mm. Head grey-whitish. Palpi 2 and a half; fuscous, upper edge

grey-whitish. Antennae fuscous. Thorax fuscous; tegulae whitish. Abdomen

fuscous. Legs fuscous with whitish tarsal rings; posterior pair whitish. Fore-

wings dilated posteriorly, costa rather strongly arched, apex rounded-rectangular,

termen nearly straight, scarcely oblique; whitish sparsely sprinkled with fuscous;

markings dark fuscous; basal patch indicated by a dentate sub-basal line, con-

nected by a slender subcostal line with base of wing; a square costal spot at two-

fifths, giving off a crescentic blackish longitudinal line with concavity facing

costa, ending on four-fifths costa, preceded by two costal dots and followed by

one; a short erect pyramid from tornus; cilia whitish with some grey bars, on

tornus dark fuscous. Hindwings and cilia grey.

The male differs as follows: 17-18 mm. Forewings with a slender costal

fold reaching to one-third costa; basal patch indicated by a fine fuscous line only ;

quadrangular spot on costa replaced by two fine parallel lines running to dorsum;

no dark crescentic mark in disc; costal triangle suffused, its apex prolonged

to tornus,

Queensland: Toowoomba, in September and October (W. B. Barnard) ;

seven specimens. Type in Queensland Museum.

Gen. Pyrcotis Meyr.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1881, 440, and ibid., 1910, 170.

In Meyrick’s original description of this genus he described veins 3 and 4 of

hindwings as separate, but very near in origin and 5 closely approximated to 4.

In his later reference 3, 4, 5 are described as separate, equidistant, and rather

approximated towards base. In reality there is considerable variation in these

veins. Meyrick’s description is in both cases accurate for some examples, but

in others 3 and 4 are connate, and 5 approximated at base as in Capua. Notwith-

standing, the genus is a good one, sufficiently distinct by its large thoracic crest.

PYRGOTIS INSIGNANA Meyr.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1881, 440.

Widely, distributed. Queensland: Brisbane, Toowoomba, Stanthorpe.

New South Wales: Glen Innes, Sydney, Bulli, Katoomba, Mount Kosciusko.

Victoria: Gisborne, Melbourne. Tasmania: Launceston, Deloraine, Cradle

Mt, Mount Wellington, Lake Fenton. South Australia: Mount Gambier, Mount

Lofty. Western Australia: Albany, Denmark, Waroona.

Acropolitis xuthobapta n. sp.

fovdoBarros, tawny-suffused.

9, 24 mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous. Palpi 2 and a half; dark

fuscous, lower edge whitish. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous with whitish rings;

posterior pair whitish. Forewings suboblong, costa strongly arched to middle,

thence straight, apex rectangular, termen straight, rounded beneath; grey,

posterior half whitish-grey; markings fuscous; an obscure basal patch, its outer

edge oblique from one-fifth costa to tornus, interrupted above middle; cilia

fuscous, on tornus grey. Hindwings greyish-tawny; a white costal streak not

reaching apex; cilia grey, on dorsum whitish.

New South Wales: Mount Tomah near Mount Wilson, in March; one

specimen.

Acropolitis cinefacta n. sp.

cinefactus, reduced to ashes.

@ ¢@, 18-20 mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous. Palpi 1 and a half; dark

fuscous. Antennae dark fuscous; ciliations in male nearly 1. Abdomen prey.

Legs fuscous with whitish tarsal rings; posterior pair whitish. Forewings sub-

oblong, costa moderately arched, apex rounded-rectangular, termen slightly

rounded, slightly oblique; costal fold in male reaching one-third, rather broad;

grey with slightly raised transverse lines and strigulae; cilia grey with a darker

median line. ,

Queensland: Cunnamulla, in October; nine specimens.

Acropolitis melanosticha n. sp.

peAavooriyos, with a black line.

@, 22 mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 2; grey. inner surface white.

Antennae grey; ciliations in male 1. Abdomen ochreous-grey. Legs fuscous with

white rings; posterior pair white. Forewings with costa gently arched, apex

rounded, termen obliquely rounded; grey; a black line from base along fold almost

to two-thirds dorsum; other markings fuscous; a series of minute costal dots;

an oblong costal spot from two-thirds nearly to apex; three or four interrupted

lines on veins running to termen; cilia grey-whitish. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Victoria: Birchip, in September; one specimen received from Mr. D. Goudie.

BATODES HEMICRYPTANA Meyr.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1881, 461.

Batodes euryxutha Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1925, 47, is a synonym.

Batodes sphenotoma n. sp.

odyvoropos, divided by a wedge.

9, 26 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 1 and a half; fuscous.

Antennae fuscous. Abdomen grey. Legs white with fuscous tarsal rings. Fore-

wings dilated posteriorly, costa gently arched, apex rectangular, termen straight,

rounded beneath; white with pale grey suffusion, especially in basal area; mark-

ings dark fuscous; no basal patch; costa shortly strigulated; median fascia wedge-

shaped, broadest on costa, where it extends from two-fifths to three-fifths, anterior

edge nearly straight, posterior excavated above middle, apex on two-thirds dorsum ;

a quadrangular spot on four-fifths costa, from which proceeds a fine line to

tornus; a similar parallel line shortly beyond originating in a costal dot; longi-

tudinal streaks on veins between these lines; a terminal line; cilia pale grey.

Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

North Queensland: Kuranda, in June; one specimen.

Batodes nimbifera n. sp.

nimbiferus, clouded.

é, 14mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 1 and a half; fuscous, inner

surface whitish. Antennae grey annulated with dark fuscous; ciliations in male

minute. Abdomen fuscous; tuft grey. Legs grey-whitish. Forewings narrow,

costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen very obliquely rounded; costal fold in

male narrow, reaching to one-fifth costa; grey-whitish; markings suffused,

fuscous; a moderate basal patch, its outer edge from one-third costa to one-fifth

dorsum; two or three costal spots beyond middle; some fine dorsal strigulae; a

large roundish spot in middle of disc; cilia grey, Hindwings and cilia grey.

Queensland: Stanthorpe, in January; one specimen.

Batodes ilyodes n. sp.

cAvwdys, muddy.

$, 15-18 mm. Head fuscous. Palpi 1 and a fourth; fuscous. Antennae

brownish-ochreous annulated with dark fuscous; ciliations in male minute.

Thorax brownish-ochreous. Abdomen fuscous; tuft brownish-ochreous. Legs

fuscous; posterior pair brownish-ochreous. Forewings dilated posteriorly, costa

moderately arched, apex sharply pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly

oblique ; brownish-ochreous ; a large dark fuscous patch filling posterior two-fifths

of wing except a narrow terminal strip with irregular anterior margin; cilia

brownish-ochreous. Hindwings greyish-ochreous or pale fuscous with a few

darker strigulae; cilia concolorous.

New South Wales: Murrurundi, in September and October; two specimens

received from Dr. B. L. Middleton.

Batodes argillina n. sp.

argillinus, clay-coloured.

$, 20 mm. Head and thorax brown. Palpi 1 and a fourth; brown.

Antennae pale brownish annulated with dark fuscous; ciliations in male minute.

Abdomen grey; tuft whitish-ochreous. Legs brown with whitish-ochreous tarsal

rings; posterior pair whitish-ochreous. Forewings dilated posteriorly, costa

gently arched, apex rectangular, termen not oblique; brown; a triangular mark

on costa before apex, partly edged with fuscous; cilia brown. Hindwings whitish-

ochreous, sparsely strigulated and reticulated with grey; cilia grey.

South Australia: Adelaide, in September; one specimen received from Mr.

F. M. Angel.

Lamyrodes euchroma n. sp.

eixypwpos, well coloured.

$ 12 mm. Head fuscous; face grey. Palpi 2; grey. Antennae grey,

annulated with fuscous; ciliations in male 1. Thorax and abdomen dark fuscous.

Legs whitish. Forewings suboblong, dilated posteriorly, costa nearly straight,

apex rounded, termen nearly straight, slightly oblique; male without costal fold;

dark fuscous; cilia orange, on tornus fuscous. Hindwings orange; apex, terminal

edge, and cilia fuscous.

New South Wales: Cudgen Hds., near Tweed Hds., in November (W. B.

Barnard) ; one specimen.

Lamyrodes pellochroa n. sp.

weAXoxpoos, grey.

¢, 14 mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 2; grey. Antennae grey; cilia-

tions in male 1 and a half. Abdomen grey. Legs grey with whitish rings;

posterior pair whitish. Forewings narrow, costa gently arched, apex round-

pointed, termen obliquely rounded; in male without costal fold; grey with

numerous fuscous dots and strigulae; a costal series of strigulae at regular

intervals; a fine sinuate line from four-fifths costa to termen below middle; a

shorter similar line between this and apex; cilia grey. Hindwings and cilia

pale grey.

Queensland: Maryland, near Stanthorpe, in February (W. B. Barnard);

two specimens. Type in Queensland Museum.

Gen. Coeloptera nov.

xovkorrepos, With hollowed wings.

Head rough-scaled. Tongue present. Palpi long, porrect, much thickened

above and beneath; apex of terminal joint thickened with long scales. Thorax

without crest. Forewings with costa strongly arched to near middle, thence

hollowed, marginal scales at junction large, apex rectangular, termen slightly

sinuate, not oblique; 7 and 8 stalked, 7 to termen. Hindwings with 3 and 4

connate, 4 closely approximated to 5 at base, 6 and 7 stalked. A derivative of

Capua with peculiarly shaped forewings.

Coeloptera castanina n. sp.

xacraviwos, chestnut-brown.

2, 16-18 mm. Head and thorax reddish-brown, Palpi 10; reddish-brown.

Antennae pale grey. Abdomen fuscous. Legs ochreous-whitish. Forewings

grey more or less suffused with reddish-brown; sometimes with a few slender

transverse grey striae; no definite markings; sometimes several pale costal dots

towards apex; cilia fuscous with pale antemedian and terminal lines, Hindwings

and cilia grey.

Queensland: Bunya Mountains, in February. New South Wales: Mount

Wilson, in March. Three specimens.

Capua rhynchota n. sp.

povywros, beaked.

$, 14-16 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 6; fuscous-brown, upper

edge fuscous. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 1. Antennae grey. Abdomen

grey. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior pair grey. Forewings with costa strongly

arched to two-fifths, thence straight, apex rectangular, termen slightly rounded,

slightly oblique; in male with broad costal fold to two-fifths; brownish-fuscous ;

three whitish-ochreous costal dots in apical third; there are also dots in disc, very

variable in development, among them a white dot just before tornus; cilia fuscous-~

brown. Hindwing pale grey with darker strigulae; cilia pale grey.

Queensland: Bunya Mountains, in October and April (W. B. Barnard) ;

four specimens. Type in Queensland Museum.

Capua myopolia n. sp.

pBuoTrodwos, Mmouse-grey.

g, 21 mm. Head whitish-ochreous; face fuscous. Palpi 1 and a fourth;

fuscous. Aritennae grey; ciliations in male one-half. Thorax fuscous. Abdomen

with basal half grey; beyond this whitish-ochreous. Legs fuscous with whitish-

ochreous rings; posterior pair mostly whitish-ochreous. Forewings with costa

rather strongly arched, apex rounded, termen rounded, slightly oblique; male

without costal fold; whitish-ochreous partly suffused with grey; an irregular

rather broad fuscous stripe from mid-base to two-thirds costa, and thence to apex;

a whitish-ochreous dot in disc at two-fifths, thinly edged with brown and fuscous;

a narrow whitish streak on middle third of dorsum; a slender undulating fuscous

line from beneath costa near apex to below middle of termen; cilia whitish-

ochreous, apices fuscous. Hindwings and cilia pale grey. The shape of the fore-

wings resembles C. gongylia Turn.

North Queensland: Cape York, in June (W. B. Barnard) ; one specimen.

Capua euthemon n. sp.

«iOnpov, well made.

¢¢@,12mm. Head and thorax ochreous-brown. Palpi 2; fuscous-brown,

upper edge ochreous-brown. Antennae white with blackish annulations; ciliations

in male 2. Abdomen dark fuscous. Legs grey; posterior pair whitish. Fore-

wings narrow, costa slightly arched, apex pointed, termen straight, oblique;

whitish sprinkled or strigulated with ochreous; markings distinct, ochreous partly

edged with fuscous; basal patch small, posterior margin sinuate, median fascia

broad, only moderately oblique, ending abruptly in a dark fuscous spot above

middle of dorsum; a large triangular spot on two-thirds costa, its lower anterior

angle touching median fascia; a dorsal spot before tornus; a narrow terminal

fascia; cilia grey-whitish, on apex and tornus fuscous. Hindwings fuscous; cilia

whitish with a fuscous sub-basal line.

Western Australia, in March (W. B. Barnard); two specimens. Type in

Queensland Museum.

Capua multistriata n. sp.

multistriatus, with many striae.

?, 15 mm, Head ochreous-grey. Palpi 2 and a half; ochreous-grey.

Antennae ochreous-grey with fuscous annulations. Thorax fuscous-brown.

Abdomen fuscous. Legs ochreous-whitish, Forewings narrow, costa gently

arched, apex pointed, termen nearly straight, oblique; ochreous-whitish mostly

suffused with reddish-ochreous; numerous dark fuscous costal dots, from which

"arise fine fuscous lines or striae running to dorsum, some interrupted, slightly

outwardly oblique, those nearest termen bent inwards in middle; cilia ochreous-

whitish. Hindwings and cilia whitish-grey.

Tasmania: Strahan, in January; one specimen.

Capua xuthochyta n. sp.

fovdoxvros, with brownish suffusion.

9,14mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen fuscous. Palpi 2 and a half; grey.

(Antennae missing.) Legs fuscous with whitish rings; posterior pair whitish.

Forewings with costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded ;

grey with fuscous strigulae, and with orange-brown suffusion and irroration ;

short costal and longer dorsal strigulae; a fuscous spot in middle of disc, preceded

and followed by orange-brown suffusion; four oblique triangles on apical half of

costa; terminal area with orange-brown irroration and minute fuscous dots; cilia

grey. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Queensland: Brisbane, in January; one specimen.

Capua tapinopis n. sp.

rarevers, humble.

$,10mm. Head and thorax whitish-ochreous. Palpi 1; whitish-ochreous.

Antennae pale grey; ciliations in male one-half. Abdomen grey; tuft whitish.

Legs whitish; anterior pair grey. Forewings narrow, costa arched near base,

thence straight, apex rounded-rectangular, termen obliquely rounded ; in male with

a narrow costal fold to two-fifths; whitish-ochreous; a fuscous costal spot near

base; a brownish transverse fascia from one-third dorsum reaching two-thirds

across disc, followed by some ochreous costal suffusion; cilia whitish-ochreous.

Hindwings grey; cilia whitish.

North Queensland: Malanda, Atherton Tableland, in August; one specimen..

Capua arrosta n. sp.

aéppworos, weak.

69, 11-12 mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous. Palpi 2; dark fuscous.

Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male minute, Abdomen dark fuscous ; tuft grey-

whitish. Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish. Forewings narrow, costa slightly

arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; in male without costal fold;

grey-whitish with a few slender transverse fuscous striae ; markings dark fuscous;

basal patch usually well defined, its posterior edge straight from one-fourth costa

to one-third dorsum ; median fascia variably developed, from costa before middle

towards, but rarely reaching, dorsum before tornus, posterior edge usually

excavated in middle; costal triangle imperfectly developed; a fine terminal line;

cilia whitish with fuscous bars. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Western Australia: Denmark, in March and April (W. B. Barnard) ; eight

specimens. Type in Queensland Museum.

Capua belophora n. sp:

BeAodoposs carrying darts (palpi).

4,14mm. Head and thorax pale ochreous-grey. Palpi5; grey. Antennae

pale ochreous-grey with fuscous annulations; in male with tufts of long cilia (3).

Abdomen grey-whitish. Legs grey-whitish; anterior pair grey. Forewings with

costa strongly arched, apex rectangular, termen slightly sinuate, slightly oblique ;

in male without costal fold; whitish tinged with ochreous and speckled throughout

with fuscous or grey; darker on costal and terminal margins; cilia grey. Hind-

wings whitish, faintly speckled with grey.

Western Australia: Albany and Margaret River, in November; two

specimens.

Capua notopasta n. sp.

vwroracros, With speckled dorsum.

42, 15-16 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-whitish. Palpi 2 and a half;

ochreous-whitish, external surface sometimes grey. Antennae grey; ciliations

in male minute. Abdomen grey. Legs grey; posterior pair ochreous-whitish.

Forewings rather narrow, costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen almost

straight, oblique; in male without costal fold; ochreous-whitish with a few fuscous

dots, most numerous on costal edge; sometimes an oblique fuscous mark in mid-

disc; usually a narrow triangular costal patch from middle to four-fifths; several

black dots on posterior third of dorsal margin; sometimes a few minute black

dots on termen; cilia grey, apices usually whitish.

South Australia: Mount Lofty, in October. Western Australia: Yanchep,

in September. Three specimens.

Capua scaphosema n. sp.

skapooypos, with boat-shaped marking,

?,14mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi2; grey. Antennae grey. Abdomen

grey. Legs fuscous with whitish tarsal rings; posterior pair whitish. Forewings

narrow, costa slightly arched, apex round-pointed, termen obliquely rounded;

ochreous-whitish; basal patch ill-defined, grey with some fuscous dots, posterior

edge convex; a boat-shaped patch extending on costa from two-fifths to near

apex, broader anteriorly, where it reaches midde of disc, dark fuscous mixed with

ferruginous, intersected by an ochreous-whitish oblique bar with dentate margins;

cilia ochreous-whitish. Hindwings and cilia grey.

New South Wales: Mount Tomah, near Mount Wilson, in March; one

specimen.

Capua erythrosema n. sp.

épvOpornpmos, with reddish marking.

9, 12-13 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-whitish. Palpi 3; whitish, some-

times grey on outer surface. Antennae grey, Abdomen grey. Legs ochreous-

whitish. Forewings narrow, costa slightly arched, apex rectangular, termen

sinuate, not oblique ; white, sprinkled with pale grey; a grey patch on dorsum from

one-fourth to three-fourths, anteriorly reaching to above middle of disc, but this

patch is not always developed; sometimes a reddish subdorsal suffusion before

middle; a well-defined reddish apical patch, its margin curved from midcosta to

midtermen; in this are two pairs of white dots on costa beyond three-fourths;

cilia grey. Hindwings grey; cilia whitish.

Western Australia: Albany, in February; Bunbury, in October; two

specimens.

Capua adynata n. sp.

advvaros, feeble.

2, 13 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-grey. Palpi 2; ochreous-grey.

Antennae grey. (Abdomen missing.) Legs grey; posterior pair whitish, Fore-

wings rather narrow, costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen straight, oblique;

whitish sprinkled and strigulated with ferruginous; some fuscous discal

dots; markings ferruginous-fuscous; median fascia rather narrow, from costa

before middle, terminating abruptly in mid-disc; a triangular spot on three-

fourths costa; cilia whitish. Hindwings and cilia grey-whitish.

Western Australia: Denmark, in April (W. B. Barnard); one specimen.

Capua glycypolia n. sp.

yAukuToAws, sweetly grey.

6, 16mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen grey. Palpi 4; grey, upper edge

and inner surface whitish. (Antennae missing.) Legs grey; posterior pair white.

Forewings gently arched, apex pointed, slightly produced, termen sinuate, slightly

oblique; in male without costal fold; grey; markings fuscous sprinkled with

darker fuscous; several minute dark fuscous costal dots before median fascia;

basal patch represented by a very fine line from one-fourth costa to one-fifth

dorsum; some ill-defined fuscous suffusion towards base of dorsum; median

fascia narrow, from costa before middle towards but not reaching dorsum before

tornus; three or four minute blackish strigulae edged with whitish on costa

beyond fascia; a slender blackish terminal line; cilia whitish, on apex and tornus

grey. Hindwings with 3 and 4 stalked; pale grey; cilia pale grey.

Western Australia: Margaret River, in November; one specimen.

Capua acritodes n. sp.

axpitwdys, disorderly.

é, 11-13 mm. Head and thorax fuscous or grey. Palpi 1 and a half;

fuscous. Antennae fuscous or grey; ciliations in male one-half. Abdomen

fuscous; tuft whitish. Legs whitish; anterior pair fuscous with whitish rings.

Forewings narrow, costa gently arched, apex obtuse, termen very obliquely

rounded; in male without costal fold; grey-whitish with fuscous strigulae; mark-

ings fuscous; basal patch straight-edged at one-fourth; median fascia from costa

before middle, at first rather narrow, broadening in disc to extend from mid-

termen to tornus; a costal triangle before apex; a terminal line or series of dots;

cilia whitish mixed with fuscous. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Western Australia: Denmark, in March (W. B. Barnard); seven specimens,

Type in Queensland Museum.

Capua ischnomorpha n. sp.

toxvonoppos, Narrow.

g, 16-17 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 3; fuscous. Antennae

fuscous. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish. Forewings

narrow, costa slightly arched, apex pointed, termen very obliquely rounded; grey;

markings fuscous, variable; basal patch more or less developed; an oblique bar

from midcosta half across disc and a triangular costal patch usually developed ;

sometimes a broad fuscous dorsal streak from base to apex, sometimes a slender

terminal line; cilia grey, sometimes partly fuscous. Hindwings and cilia grey-

whitish.

South Australia: Adelaide (Glenelg), in May; three specimens received from

Mr. J. O. Wilson.

Capua dura n. sp.

durus, stern.

é 9, 16-18 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 3; fuscous, inner surface

and upper edge white. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male 1. Abdomen grey

or fuscous; tuft whitish. Legs fuscous; posterior pair fuscous. Forewings

broad in male, less so in female, costa strongly arched in male, gently in female,

apex rectangular, termen scarcely rounded, scarcely oblique; costal fold in male

reaching two-fifths; whitish with dense fuscous-brown irroration; markings

fuscous, in male expanded to fill most of disc; basal patch in female moderate,

its outer edge angled above middle, in male larger and confluent with median

fascia; median fascia in male very broad, expanded on costa, excavated

posteriorly, in female scarcely indicated; cilia fuscous. Hindwings grey-whitish

coarsely strigulated with grey; cilia white with sub-basal and subapical fuscous

lines.

Western Australia: Perth and Yanchep, in September; three specimens.

Capua symphonica n. sp.

suppovicos, neat,

9,16mm. Head dark fuscous. Palpi 1 anda half; dark fuscous. Antennae

grey. Thorax dark fuscous with a whitish posterior spot. Abdomen fuscous.

Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish. Forewings with costa gently arched, apex

obtusely pointed, termen almost straight, oblique; pale grey with markings and

strigulae blackish partly edged with ochreous-whitish; basal patch indicated by

strigulae and edged by an outwardly curved line from one-fourth costa to one-

third dorsum; several costal strigulae, one larger and wedge-shaped at three-

fourths; an erect quadrangular mark on two-thirds dorsum reaching middle of

disc; an erect strigula from tornus; cilia fuscous, towards apex and tornus pale

erey. Hindwings and cilia fuscous.

Queensland: Carnarvon Range, in January (W. B. Barnard); one specimen.

Capua phaeosema n. sp.

<baroonpos, dusky-marked.

@, 18mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen fuscous. Palpi 4; fuscous, lower

edge white. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 2. Legs fuscous with whitish

tarsal rings; posterior pair except femora whitish. Forewings with costa gently

arched, apex rectangular, termen slightly rounded, scarcely oblique; white

sparsely sprinkled and dorsum strigulated with fuscous; markings fuscous, and

except for a suffused basal patch distinctly outlined; an oblique bar from two-

fifths costa towards but not reaching tornus, constricted beneath costa; a

quadrangular spot before apex enclosing a white costal dot; a terminal line end-

ing in a tornal spot; cilia grey with a sub-basal fuscous line. Hindwings and

cilia grey.

South Australia: Noarlunga, near Adelaide, in September; one specimen

received from Mr. F. M. Angel.

Capua pancapna n. sp.

TAYKATVOS, all smoky.

$,17mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 1; fuscous. Antennae fuscous;

ciliations in male minute. Abdomen fuscous; tuft grey. Forewings broad, costa

strongly arched to middle, thence straight, apex rectangular, termen sinuate, not

oblique; in male without costal fold; grey with some dark fuscous strigulae ;

markings leaden-fuscous edged with dark fuscous; basal patch well defined,

posterior edge concave from one-fourth costa to one-third dorsum; a narrow

fascia from costal edge of basal patch to mid-dorsum, much broader below middle ;

a wedge-shaped costal spot at three-fourths, its apex connected by a fine dentate

dark fuscous line with dorsum before tornus; a similar parallel line from costa

before apex to tornus; the space between these lines leaden-fuscous; a narrow

terminal fascia from apex to near tornus; cilia fuscous, on tornus grey. Hind-

wings and cilia fuscous.

Queensland: Brisbane, in February; one specimen,

Capua tolmera n. sp.

ToApnpos, bold,

é, 16mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous. Palpi 1; fuscous. Antennae

fuscous; ciliations in male minute. (Abdomen missing.) Legs fuscous with

whitish rings; posterior pair mostly whitish. Forewings dilated posteriorly,

costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen slightly rounded, scarcely oblique; in

male without costal fold; whitish with some grey sprinkling; boldly marked with

fuscous partly edged with blackish; a basal patch with a median posterior angle;

median fascia from midcosta to tornus, narrowly interrupted in middle, bifurcat-

ing shortly before dorsum; a narrow irregular fascia from three-fourths costa to

midtermen ; a costal dot before apex; a terminal line; cilia grey with some fuscous

bars. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Queensland: Injune, in August (W. B. Barnard) ; one specimen.

Capua aurantiaca n. sp.

aurantiacus, orange.

8 @, 15-18 mm. Head and thorax reddish-orange. Palpi 5 to 6; reddish-

orange. Antennae pale grey; ciliations in male 2. Abdomen pale grey. Legs

whitish; anterior pair grey. Forewings with costa moderately arched, apex

pointed, termen slightly sinuate, slightly oblique; in male without costal fold;

reddish-orange with scattered minute purple fuscous dots, best marked on costal

edge; sometimes a few white dots on costa; cilia purple-fuscous. Hindwings

grey-whitish obscurely dotted with purple-grey; cilia grey-whitish.

Western Australia: Albany, in November; Denmark, in March and April;

twelve specimens.

Capua leucobela n. sp.

AeveoBeros, with white palpi.

é,16mm, Head white. Palpi 2; white. Antennae grey; ciliations in male

1 and a half. Thorax ochreous-grey. Abdomen ochreous-grey ; terminal half and

tuft fuscous. Legs fuscous with whitish rings; posterior pair whitish. Fore-

wings with costa slightly arched, apex round-pointed, termen obliquely rounded;

in male without costal fold; ochreous-grey with fuscous irroration and markings;

some basal fuscous suffusion; a discal suffusion beyond middle; a series of dark

fuscous costal dots; cilia fuscous. Hindwings and cilia grey.

New South Wales: Murrurundi, in March; one specimen received from

Dr. B. L. Middleton.

Adoxophyes thelcteropa n. sp.

GeArnpwwos, charming. ;

é, 11-14 mm. Head pale ochreous. Palpi 1 and a fourth; pale ochreous.

Antennae pale ochreous with fuscous annulations; ciliations in male one-half.

Thorax pale ochreous with patagia and some irroration reddish. Abdomen pale

grey; apical segments and tuft pale ochreous. Legs whitish-ochreous; posterior

pair white. Forewings broadly dilated, costa strongly arched, apex rectangular,

termen slightly rounded, not oblique; in male with a broad costal fold reaching

two-fifths; white sprinkled with reddish; costal fold minutely strigulated with

dark fuscous; basal patch with irregular mottling and margin; a moderate oblique

grey central fascia from middle of costa gradually enlarging to extend from three-

fifths to tornus; a grey bar on costa from two-thirds to near apex, extended by

a subterminal process to near tornus; cilia whitish. Hindwings and cilia whitish.

North Queensland: Cape York, in June, October and November (W. B.

Barnard), Cairns (F. P. Dodd); eight specimens. Type in Queensland Museum.

Adoxophyes ablepta n. sp.

aBXerros, inconspicuous.

@, 22-24 mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 2 and a half to 3; grey.

Antennae grey. Abdomen pale ochreous-grey. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior

pair grey. Forewings dilated posteriorly, costa strongly arched, apex pointed,

slightly produced, termen sinuate, not oblique; whitish-ochreous with grey mark-

ings, both minutely strigulated ; no basal patch; median fascia ill-defined or almost

obsolete, from midcosta, where it is narrow, becoming broader towards tornus;

a fairly well-defined apical triangle extending from three-fourths costa to mid-

termen; cilia ochreous-whitish, apices usually dark fuscous, on tornus wholly

whitish. Hindwings whitish-ochreous, towards base grey; cilia grey-white.

Queensland: Toowoomba, in September and October (W. B. Barnard) ; four

specimens. Type in Queensland Museum.

Adoxophyes amblychroa n. sp.

ap BAvxpoos, dull-coloured.

8, 16 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen grey. Palpi 2; grey. Antennae

grey; ciliations in male one-half. Legs ochreous-whitish. Forewings broad,

costa strongly arched to middle, thence almost straight, apex rectangular, termen

straight, not oblique; costal fold in male reaching one-fourth; ochreous-whitish

with obscure pale fuscous strigulae; markings pale fuscous; basal patch scarcely

indicated; median fascia indicated by a triangular spot on costa before middle,

and a suffused dorsal patch before tornus; a well-defined triangular apical patch,

its anterior edge from two-thirds costa to about midtermen, nearly straight;

posterior edge submarginal ; cilia ochreous-whitish. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

Queensland: Toowoomba, in September and October (W. B. Barnard) ;

three specimens. Type in Queensland Museum.

HOMONA SIMILANA (WIk.)

Meyr., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1881, 466,

Hi. stenophracta Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1925, 211, is a synonym.

Homona ecprepes n. sp.

éxxperns, distinguished.

$,26 mm. Head and thorax dark reddish-brown. Palpi 1; reddish-brown.

Antennae grey; ciliations in male one-half. Abdomen reddish-ochreous. Legs

ochreous; posterior pair whitish. Forewings with costa sinuate, apex pointed,

slightly produced, termen sinuate, not oblique; pale purplish-grey; costal edge

reddish; a dark reddish-brown basal patch, towards termen reddish-grey, com-

mencing on one-fourth costa, angled beneath costa, thence inwardly curved to

one-fourth dorsum; two short, acute reddish-brown streaks from and from above

angle of basal patch, the former longer; a purplish-grey costal line from middle

to near apex, leaving costal edge reddish; a narrow ochreous wedge, broadest

above, before termen, its apex reaching terminal edge; cilia purplish-fuscous,

towards tornus whitish. Hindwings broad, termen strongly rounded; reddish-

ochreous, near dorsum whitish-ochreous; cilia whitish, on apex purplish-grey.

North Queensland: Cape Yor, 11 Uciober (W. B. Barnard) ; one specimen.

Homona notoplaga n. sp.

vetotAayos, with dorsal patch.

¢,28 mm. Head grey. Palpi 1; brown. Antennae pale grey. Abdomen

whitish; base of dorsum grey. Legs ochreous-whitish. Forewings dilated

posteriorly, costa sintiate, apex pointed, somewhat produced, termen sinuate, not

oblique; pale brownish; a series of minute dark fuscous costal dots; a large

triangular dark fuscous dorsal patch from one-fifth to tornus; its apex reaching

nearly half across disc; cilia fuscous, on lower third of termen ochreous-whitish.

Hindwings with termen sinuate; whitish-ochreous, dorsal area with suffused grey

strigulae; cilia whitish.

Queensland: Macpherson Range, in November (W. B. Barnard); one

specimen.

Tortrix sobrina n. sp.

sobrinus, akin.

é,18 mm. Head grey; face whitish. Palpi 2; grey. Antennae pale grey ;

ciliations in male 1. Thorax fuscous. Abdomen fuscous; tuft grey-whitish.

Legs whitish; anterior pair fuscous with whitish rings. Forewings strongly

arched to middle, apex rectangular, termen nearly straight, in male with a rather

broad costal fold extending to one-third; grey-whitish with fuscous dots and

strigulae; markings fuscous with darker dots; basal patch undefined; median

fascia narrow, from before middle, expanding in disc so as to reach from three-

fifths dorsum almost to tornus; a narrow costal triangle from three-fifths to four-

fifths; a small suffusion before termen above middle; cilia grey with a basal series

of darker dots. Hindwings with darker strigulae towards margins; cilia grey.

Queensland: Brisbane, in October; one specimen.

Tortrix phaeoscia n. sp.

gotooxios, darkly shaded.

6,24 mm. Head whitish-brown. Palpi 1 and a half; fuscous. Antennae

whitish; ciliations in male one-half. Abdomen fuscous; sides and tuft whitish.

_ Legs whitish. Forewings with costa strongly arched to middle, thence straight,

apex rectanguiar, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; in male with a costal

fold extending to middle; whitish-brown; markings fuscous; basal patch scarcely

indicated; median fascia from one-third costa, soon confluent with a large

triangular blotch, which extends to apex and tornus, indented in middle

posteriorly ; an irregular subterminal spot opposite indentation; some minute dots

on dorsum; an interrupted line near terminal edge; cilia whitish-brown. Hind-

wings pale fuscous; cilia whitish.

Queensland: Bunya Mountains, in October (W. B. Barnard) ; one specimen.

TORTRIX CERUSSATA Meyr.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1910, 234.

T. spodota Meyr., tbid., 234, is, I think, a synonym.

Tortrix phoenicoplaca n. sp.

gowixorAaxos, with dark reddish blotch.

@, 16 mm. Head whitish-grey. Palpi 2 and a half; whitish-grey, lower

edge whitish, Thorax dark reddish; tegulae whitish-grey, Abdomen grey.

Forewings with costa slightly arched, apex rectangular, termen straight, not

oblique; whitish-grey; numerous short oblique dark reddish costal strigulae; a

large distinctly defined dark reddish dorsal blotch extending two-thirds across

disc, its edge subcostal to two-thirds, thence outwardly curved almost to tornus;

cilia whitish-grey, towards apex with blackish bases. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Queensland: Cunnamulla, in February; one specimen received from Mr.

N. Geary.

Tortrix eusticha n. sp.

ebariyos, well streaked.

é@, 16-22 mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 2 and a half; grey.

Antennae grey; ciliations in male one-half. Abdomen grey; tuft whitish. Legs

grey; posterior pair whitish. [Forewings with costa strongly arched to middle,

thence straight, apex obtusely pointed, termen obliquely rounded; in male with

a narrow costal fold reaching to one-third; white; all interneural spaces streaked

throughout with fuscous; cilia white. Hindwings grey; cilia white.

Western Australia: Albany, in February and March; Perth; four specimens..

‘Type in Queensland Museum.

Tortrix leucocephala n. sp.

Aevxoxedadros, with white head.

8,17 mm. Head white. Palpi 2 and a half; pale grey. Antennae grey;

ciliations in male 1. Thorax fuscous. Abdomen grey; tuft white. Legs grey;

posterior pair whitish. Forewings rather narrow, costa slightly arched, apex

rectangular, termen straight, slightly oblique; in male without costal fold; light

fuscous; a broad whitish costal streak narrowing to a point at base and apex, with

some fuscous scales on dorsal edge; cilia fuscous. Hindwings broad; grey-

whitish faintly strigulated with grey; cilia grey, on tornus whitish.

Tasmania: Waratah, in January; one specimen.

Tortrix didymosticha n. sp.

Sdvpooreyos, twin-lined.

9,17 mm. Head and thorax whitish sprinkled with dark fuscous. Palpi 3

and a half; grey. Antennae dark fuscous. Abdomen fuscous. Legs dark

fuscous with whitish rings; posterior pair paler, Forewings rather narrow,

dilated posteriorly, apex rounded, termen oblique; dark fuscous with two narrow

oblique white fasciae, first from one-third costa to before mid-dorsum, second

from two-thirds costa to before tornus, each bisected by a narrow interrupted

fuscous line, some white irroration in basal area; two white costal dots before

apex ; a subterminal series of blackish dots; cilia white with apices and a sub-basal

line fuscous. Hindwings grey; cilia grey-whitish with a sub-basal grey line.

Western Australia: Albany, in March (W. B. Barnard); one specimen.

Tortrix trimochla n. sp.

tpttoxdos, thrice-barred.

8, 1416 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 2 and a half; fuscous,.

lower edge towards base white. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male minute.

Abdomen grey. Legs white with dark fuscous rings; posterior pair mostly white.

Forewings with costa slightly arched, apex rounded, termen straight, not oblique;

in male without costal fold; white with three fasciae fuscous-brown edged with

dark fuscous dots; first fascia sub-basal; second fascia from costa before middle

to three-fifths dorsum; third from three-fourths costa to tornus; dark fuscous

dots on costa between fasciae; a dark fuscous transverse line just before termen ;

cilia pale grey with some dark fuscous basal dots, Hindwings and cilia grey.

North Queensland: Cape York, in April (W. B. Barnard); four specimens.

Type in Queensland Museum.

Tortrix irenica n. sp.

elonvexos, peaceful.

$9, 19-22 mm. Head and thorax pale grey or whitish; face white. Palpi

2 and a half; pale grey. Antennae grey; ciliations in male one-half. Abdomen

grey-whitish ; tuft whitish. Legs whitish; anterior pair grey. Forewings rather

narrow, costa arched to one-third, thence straight, apex rectangular, termen

slightly rounded, slightly oblique; white more or less sprinkled with ochreous and

grey ; costal edge near base grey ; markings grey more or less mixed with ochreous;

a short oblique bar from two-fifths costa soon bent and continued beneath costa

nearly to termen; a suffused spot or short oblique bar from two-thirds dorsum not

quite reaching subcostal line; a grey terminal suffusion; cilia white. Hindwings

pale grey; cilia white.

Western Australia: Albany and Busselton, in February (W. B. Barnard);

six specimens. Type in Queensland Museum.

Tortrix pulla n. sp.

pullus, gloomy.

$,18mm, Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 3; fuscous, lower edge whitish.

Antennae grey; ciliations in male 1 and a half. Abdomen grey; tuft grey-whitish.

Legs fuscous with whitish rings; posterior pair whitish. Forewings with costa

strongly arched, apex pointed, termen obliquely rounded; costal fold in male

rather broad, extending nearly to middle; grey thickly sprinkled with fuscous;

markings dark fuscous; a small triangular spot on costa near base; central fascia

narrow from two-fifths costa, interrupted in disc, rather broader but suffused on

dorsum, where it extends from three-fifths to tornus; a small suffusion before

middle of termen; a terminal line; cilia grey-whitish, on tornus fuscous. Hind-

wings pale grey with darker grey mottling; cilia grey-whitish.

Western Australia: Yanchep, in September; one specimen.

Tortrix campylosema n. sp.

xoprvdooyos, with bent marking.

6, 19 mm. Head grey-whitish. Palpi 2; fuscous. Antennae fuscous;

ciliations in male 1. Thorax fuscous; tegulae grey-whitish, Abdomen grey-

whitish. Legs dark fuscous; posterior pair whitish. Forewings with costa gently

arched, apex pointed, termen straight, oblique; in male with a narrow costal

fold to one-third; whitish mostly heavily sprinkled with fuscous; markings

fuscous ; an oblique bar from one-sixth costa to fold; a second bar from one-third

costa to middle of disc, giving off a broad subcostal streak to apex; a suffused

spot above tornus; four sharply defined dark fuscous dots on posterior half of

costa; fine short streaks on veins running to termen; cilia whitish with a series

of basal dots. Hindwings grey; cilia white with a sub-basal grey line.

Tasmania: Flinders Island, in November; one specimen.

Tortrix ammotypa n. sp.

dpporumos, with sand-coloured markings.

8, 19 mm. Head and thorax pale grey. Palpi 2; pale grey, lower edge

white. Antennae whitish; ciliations in male 1. Abdomen white. Legs white;

anterior pair grey. Forewings gently arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely

rounded; in male without costal fold; grey-whitish; markings ochreous-brown,

somewhat suffused; a broad interrupted costal streak from base to apex; a short

subdorsal streak; a discal suffusion at one-fourth; an upwardly curved streak

from middle of disc to termen beneath tornus; a dorsal spot at three-fourths ;

some dark fuscous scales on termen; cilia white. Hindwings white, tinged with

grey towards apex; cilia white.

South Australia: Adelaide (Glenelg), in April; one specimen received from

Mr. J. D. Wilson

ToRTRIX EURYSTROPHA Turn.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 1926, 135,

T. hemiphoena Turn., Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1926, 126, and T. loxotomea

Turn., Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1926, 127, are synonyms.

Queensland: Brisbane, Macpherson Range, Toowoomba, Bunya Mountains.

New South Wales: Murrurundi, Canberra. Tasmania: Waratah, Zeehan,

Strahan, Russell Falls, Mount Wellington. Western Australia: Yanchep.

Tortrix sordida n. sp.

sordidus, dingy.

é,20mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 2; fuscous. Antennae fuscous;

ciliations in male minute. Abdomen grey. Legs mostly fuscous; posterior pair

whitish. Forewings dilated posteriorly. costa slightly arched, apex rounded,

termen obliquely rounded; in male with a moderately broad costal fold extending

to one-third; whitish densely sprinkled with fuscous and brownish; markings pale

fuscous surrounded by some brownish suffusion; a dot on base of costa; a dot

on end of cell and another beneath cell; a subterminal series of minute dots; cilia

whitish. Hindwings and cilia grey,

Queensland: Macpherson Range, in February (W. B. Barnard); one

specimen.

Tortrix cnecochyta n. sp.

Kynxoxutos, suffused with yellowish,

é,19mm. Head pale greyish-ochreous, Palpi 2 and a half; fuscous; inner

surface whitish. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 1. Thorax fuscous. Abdomen

grey; tuft whitish. Forewings narrow, costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen

sinuate, oblique ; in male without costal fold; whitish thickly sprinkled with grey

and ochreous; basal patch large, mostly ochreous; costa with dark fuscous

strigulae and two dark fuscous spots at two-fifths and four-fifths; cilia whitish-

ochreous. Hindwings and cilia grey.

New South Wales: Scone, in July, from larva feeding on Bassia quin-

quecuspis; one specimen received from Mr. H. Nicholas,

Tortrix lypra n. sp.

Avrpos, poor,

8, 18 mm, Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 3; fuscous. Antennae grey;

ciliations in male 1. Abdomen pale fuscous; tuft whitish. Legs whitish; anterior

pair fuscous with whitish rings. Forewings strongly arched to middle, thence

straight, apex rectangular, termen obliquely rounded; in male with costal fold

almost reaching middle; whitish more or less suffused with grey; markings

fuscous; basal patch with outer edge angled in middle; median fascia narrow,

from two-fifths costa to tornus, sometimes obsolete towards dorsum, or inter-

rupted beneath costa; a small costal triangle at two-thirds; an erect mark from

tornus to about halfway across disc; some subterminal suffusion; cilia whitish

sometimes mixed with fuscous. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

Western Australia: Albany, Nornalup, and Margaret River, in October and

November; Yanchep in September; five specimens.

Tortrix ischnosema n. sp.

icxvornpos, with narrow marking.

$,19mm. Head and thorax greyish-ochreous. Palpi 2; greyish-ochreous.

Antennae grey; ciliations in male one-half. Abdomen grey; tuft whitish. Legs

fuscous; posterior pair grey. Forewings with costa gently arched, apex round-

pointed, termen obliquely rounded; in male with costal fold reaching almost to

middle; grey-whitish with some sprinkling of ochreous and fuscous; markings

fuscous; basal patch ill-defined, mostly ochreous; dorsal area suffused with grey;

central fascia very narrow; from two-fifths costa towards but not reaching

tornus; a small well-defined semilunar mark on costa at three-fourths; cilia grey-

whitish. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Queensland: Toowoomba, in September (W. B. Barnard); one specimen.

Tortrix euphara n. sp.

eidapos, well attired.

¢, 22mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 2 and a half; fuscous, lower

edge whitish, Antennae dark fuscous with white annulations. Abdomen brown;

tuft whitish. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior pair fuscous. Forewings with

costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen almost straight, oblique; whitish-

ochreous with fuscous markings; basal patch imperfectly developed; four costal

dots in basal third; median fascia narrow, from two-fifths costa to two-thirds

dorsum, interrupted in middle; a curved line from and to costa near apex enclos-

ing a shallow bisected area; a costal dot before apex; two confluent spots before

lower part of termen, to which they are connected by fine lines on veins; a broad

terminal line; cilia whitish-ochreous, on tornus grey. Hindwings brown; cilia

whitish-ochreous.

Queensland: Milmerran, in September; one specimen received from Mr.

J. Macqueen.

Tortrix phaeoneura n. sp.

asovevpos, dark-lined.

@, 18mm. Head and thorax pale grey. Palpi 2 and a half; pale grey.

Antennae pale grey; ciliations in male one-half. Abdomen grey-whitish; tuft

ochreous-whitish. Legs grey; posterior pair ochreous-whitish. Forewings with

costa moderately arched, apex obtuse, termen slightly rounded, oblique; male

without costal fold; whitish; veins heavily sprinkled with fuscous; cilia whitish.

Hindwings and cilia grey-whitish.

Western Australia: Albany, in February (W. B. Barnard); two specimens.

Type in Queensland Museum.

Tortrix atacta n. sp.

draxros, confused.

é 92, 20-22 mm. Head whitish-ochreous. Palpi 5; fuscous. Antennae

fuscous; ciliations in male 3. Abdomen grey. Legs ochreous-whitish with

fuscous rings; posterior pair wholly ochreous-whitish. Forewings with costa

slightly arched, apex round-pointed, termen nearly straight, oblique; in male

without costal fold; fuscous; basal and dorsal areas variably mixed with white;

some white costal strigulae; short oblique series of white dots running to apex,

sometimes confluent; terminal area more or less white; cilia fuscous. Hindwings

and cilia grey.

New South Wales: Tooloom, in April; Ebor, in March; eight specimens.

Tortrix plagiomochla n. sp.

mAaytopoxdos, with oblique bar.

8, 15 mm. Head and thorax white. Palpi 2 and a half; grey. Antennae

white with dark fuscous annulations; ciliations in male 1 and a half. (Abdomen

missing.) Legs white; anterior pair grey with white rings. Forewings with costa

scarcely arched, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, oblique; in male without

costal fold; white with some grey strigulae; markings dark fuscous; basal patch

moderately angled outwards in middle, not reaching costa; median fascia repre-

sented by a broad oblique bar from costa before middle to beyond middle of disc ;

an elongate costal patch from three-fifths costa almost to apex; a short erect

streak from dorsum before tornus; a terminal line not reaching apex and tornus;

cilia grey, and apex white. Hindwings and cilia grey-whitish.

Western Australia: Denmark, in April (W. B. Barnard); one specimen.

Tortrix plagiograpta n. sp.

mhayoyparros, obliquely marked.

9, 14 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen pale grey. Palpi 4; pale grey.

Antennae pale grey. Legs grey-whitish; posterior pair whitish. Forewings

narrow, costa gently arched, apex sharply pointed, termen sinuate, oblique;

whitish with obscure fuscous strigulae mostly on margins; a rather broad oblique

bisinuate fuscous line, ending obtusely, from one-third costa to middle of disc;

fine fuscous lines on veins running to termen; a dark fuscous terminal line; cilia

grey-whitish. Hindwings and cilia white.

Western Australia: Denmark, in November; one specimen.

Tortrix procapna n. sp.

mpoxarvos, dusky in front.

@ @, 20-24 mm. Head and thorax fuscous-grey. Palpi 3 to 3 and a half;

fuscous-grey, lower edge white. Antennae grey; ciliations in male 1. Abdomen

grey-whitish. Legs fuscous; posterior pair grey-whitish. Forewings narrow,

costa strongly arched to middle, thence straight, apex rounded-rectangular, termen

obliquely rounded; in male with a very narrow costal fold to one-third; whitish-

ochreous with sparsely scattered black scales; cilia ochreous-whitish. Hindwings

and cilia grey-whitish.

Western Australia: Denmark, in March (W. B. Barnard); two specimens.

Type in Queensland Museum.

Arotrophora polypasta n. sp.

woAdvracros, much sprinkled,

¢, 24 mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous. Palpi 3 and a half; inner sur-

face and a minute terminal dot on third joint whitish. Antennae dark fuscous.

Abdomen fuscous. Legs dark fuscous with whitish rings; posterior pair mostly

whitish. Forewings with costa strongly arched, apex obtusely pointed, termen

straight, slightly oblique; whitish partly suffused with dark fuscous; costa and

dorsum strigulated with dark fuscous; a moderate basal patch strongly angled in

middle; following this a whitish costal triangle to two-fifths; dorsal edge whitish

with dark fuscous strigulae; a broad whitish fascia from apex to tornus, strongly

angled inwards; a triangular dark fuscous patch between this and termen; cilia

fuscous sprinkled with whitish. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Queensland: Bunya Mountains, in February (W. B. Barnard) ; one specimen.

Arotrophora amorpha n. sp.

dpopgos, without pattern.

8, 18-24 mm. Head and thorax dark grey. Palpi 5; dark grey. Antennae

dark grey; ciliations in male minute. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous; posterior

pair whitish. Forewings with costa strongly arched, apex obtusely pointed,

termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; dark grey sprinkled with fuscous, a

more or less distinct fuscous line from three-fifths costa to two-thirds dorsum;

some subterminal fuscous striae; cilia fuscous. Hindwings pale grey with darker

grey strigulae; cilia pale grey.

New South Wales: Ebor, in December; three specimens,

Arotrophora sphenotypa n. sp.

odyvoruros, marked with a wedge.

9, 15-18 mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 5; grey. Antennae grey.

Abdomen grey. Legs grey; posterior pair whitish. Forewings with costa gently

arched, apex sharply pointed, termen straight, strongly oblique; whitish-grey with

a few fuscous dots in basal area and on dorsum; a fuscous costal triangle from

one-third to apex, touching posterior extremity of cell, with some.darker marginal

dots; a blackish terminal line preceded by some grey suffusion; cilia grey. Hind-

wings and cilia grey-whitish.

Western Australia: Albany and Margaret River, in November; Perth, in

September ; four specimens,

Arotrophoa myophanes n. sp.

puodavys, mouse-like.

é,18 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen grey. Palpi 3 and a half; whitish,

upper edge and terminal joint grey. Antennae grey; ciliations in male minute.

Legs grey; tarsi with whitish rings; posterior pair whitish. Forewings with

costa strongly arched, apex rectangular, termen rounded, not oblique; grey

with very fine fuscous strigulae; numerous dark fuscous costal dots, those on

apical half separated by whitish-ochreous dots; two silvery-whitish transverse

lines before termen, connected by very fine longitudinal fuscous lines; a whitish-

ochreous terminal line, edged anteriorly by dark fuscous; cilia grey, around

tornus whitish. Hindwings grey; cilia whitish.

Queensland: Mount Tamborine, in November; one specimen,

Meritastis siniodes n. sp.

oiiwdys, like a sieve.

9, 21 mm. Head and thorax greyish-yellow. Palpi 1; ochreous-whitish.

Antennae whitish-grey. Abdomen and legs whitish. Forewings dilated

posteriorly, costa gently arched, apex rounded-rectangular, termen not oblique;

white finely reticulated and strigulated with greyish-yellow; cilia greyish-yellow.

Hindwings and cilia white.

South Australia: Ooldea, in October; one specimen.

Epichorista phaeoplaca n. sp.

datordaxos, with dusky patch.

?,18mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 2 and a half; grey, extreme apex

of third joint whitish. (Abdomen missing.) Legs grey; anterior pair fuscous

with whitish rings. Forewings with costa strongly arched, apex rounded, termen

obliquely rounded; whitish-grey with fuscous markings; basal patch well defined,

margin straight to near dorsum, where it is indented; median fascia with anterior

edge fairly well defined, straight from before middle of costa to near dorsum,

posterior edge indefinite, confluent with costal triangle; some subterminal strigulae

or striae; cilia whitish-erey. Hindwings and cilia grey.

North Queensland: Mackay, in May; one specimen.

Epichorista spodophanes n. sp.

erododavys, grey.

$, 18mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen pale grey. Palpi 2 and a half; pale

grey. Antennae grey; ciliations in male nearly 1. Legs grey. Forewings narrow,

costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen very obliquely rounded; pale grey; a

fuscous discal dot at two-thirds; cilia whitish. Hindwings and cilia whitish-grey.

Victoria: Halls Gap, in November; one specimen received from Mr. C,

Borch.

Epichorista homopolia n. sp.

éporodtos, uniformly grey.

g, 15 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 2 and a half; fuscous.

Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male minute. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous;

posterior pair whitish. Forewings narrow, posteriorly dilated, apex obtuse,

termen obliquely rounded; uniform grey; cilia grey. Hindwings and cilia pale

grey.

Queensland: Stanthorpe, in November; one specimen.

Epichorista loxomochla n. sp.

NofopoxAros, with an oblique bar.

é, 15 mm. Head and thorax pale ochreous. Palpi 2 and a half; pale

ochreous. Antennae pale ochreous annulated with dark fuscous; ciliations in male

minute. Abdomen grey; tuft pale ochreous. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior

pair with fuscous bars. Forewings with costa moderately arched, apex pointed,

termen straight, oblique; ochreous-whitish; markings fuscous; a narrow fascia

from midcosta to two-thirds dorsum, preceded by some dorsal suffusion; a

broadly suffused streak from apex meeting fascia on dorsum; a series of costal

strigulae beyond middle; cilia ochreous-whitish with a median fuscous line.

Hindwings and cilia grey.

New South Wales: Murrurundi, in February; one specimen received from

Dr. B. L. Middleton.

Epichorista eurymochla n. sp.

eipupoxdos, broad-barred.

é, 14 mm. Head ochreous-whitish. Palpi 2 and a half; ochreous-whitish.

Antennae grey; ciliations in male minute. Thorax and abdomen fuscous. Fore-

wings with costa moderately arched, apex obtuse, termen slightly rounded,

slightly oblique; ochreous-whitish; markings fuscous; some costal dots; median

fascia from midcosta to tornus, interrupted in disc, suffusedly broadened on

dorsum; an apical spot; an inwardly curved streak from midtermen towards but

not reaching costa; a fine terminal line; cilia ochreous-whitish. Hindwings and

cilia grey.

Queensland: Stanthorpe, in April (W. B. Barnard); one specimen.

Cnephasia arescophanes n. sp.

épecxodavys, pleasing.

@, 12 mm. Head and thorax brownish. Palpi 2; brownish. Antennae pale

brownish. Abdomen grey. Forewings with costa gently arched, apex sub-

rectangular, termen straight, slightly oblique; grey with brown markings; basal

patch large, posterior edge angled, grey with brown transverse lines; a narrow

fascia from midcosta to three-fifths dorsum; a series of costal strigulae; a circular

subterminal spot connected by slender lines with tornus and midtermen; a dark

brown apical dot; cilia grey. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

North Queensland: Cape York, in June (W. B. Barnard); one specimen.

Cnephasia rutilescens n. sp.

rutilescens, reddish.

9, 15-18 mm. Head whitish-ochreous. Palpi 3; pale grey. Antennae

grey. Thorax pale grey. Abdomen grey. Forewings with costa very slightly

arched, more strongly near apex, apex pointed, termen straight, oblique; pale

grey; a rounded ferruginous-reddish apical blotch, edged by a broad whitish

line from two-thirds costa to slightly above tornus; cilia whitish. Hindwings

with 3 and 4 stalked; rather dark grey; cilia whitish with a grey sub-basal line.

Queensland: Chinchilla, in October; Leichardt, in January; Injune, in

November ; three specimens.

Cnephasia ochroplaca n. sp.

&xporAaxos, with pale blotch.

9, 18mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 2; fuscous. Antennae grey.

(Abdomen missing.) Legs fuscous with whitish rings; posterior pair fuscous.

Forewings with costa slightly arched, apex rounded, termen nearlv straight. not

oblique; fuscous; costa with dark fuscous strigulae; a large ochreous-whitish

apical patch, edged anteriorly by a clear white line not reaching margins; costal

edge of disc curved to near apex, well defined, dorsal edge to termen above

tornus, suffused ; in it two blackish streaks above tornus, an upwardly curved dark

fuscous mark from midtermen, and several costal strigulae; cilia ochreous-whitish

with fuscous bars. Hindwings grey with obscure darker strigulae; cilia pale grey.

Queensland: Bunya Mountains, in February (W. B. Barnard) ; one specimen.

Cnephasia catarrapha n. sp.

xarappados, patched.

é 2, 16 mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Palpi 2; fuscous. Antennae

whitish annulated with fuscous; ciliations in male minute. Abdomen grey. Fore-

wings gently arched, apex obtuse, termen straight, oblique; whitish much sprinkled

with fuscous; markings fuscous; basal patch with a median posterior angle,

incomplete towards costa; median fascia moderate from costa to fold, there

deflected to tornus; an oblong spot on three-fourths costa, sometimes confluent

with median fascia; a subcostal suffused spot on termen; sometimes also confluent ;

cilia fuscous. Hindwings and cilia grey.

Tasmania: Wilmot, in February (W. B. Barnard); two specimens. Type

in Queensland Museum.

Cnephasia pallida n. sp.

pallidus, pale.

$,14mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 2; grey. Antennae grey; ciliations

in male 1. Abdomen grey; tuft whitish. Forewings narrow, costa gently arched,

apex pointed, termen straight, oblique; whitish with a few minute fuscous dots;

cilia whitish. Hindwings and cilia whitish.

Western Australia: Margaret River, in November; one specimen.

Cnephasia polia n. sp.

woAsos, grey.

$, 18 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen grey. Palpi 2; grey. Antennae

grey; ciliations in male 1. Forewings rather narrow, costa gently arched, apex

pointed, termen sinuate, not oblique; in male without costal fold; grey; a fine

whitish subcostal line edged with fuscous from base to beyond middle; a broad

whitish streak from apex half across disc; some whitish terminal suffusion ; cilia

whitish. Hindwings and cilia whitish-grey.

New South Wales: Sydney; one specimen.

Gen. Eremas nov.

épypas, lonely.

Palpi ascending. Thorax with a strong posterior crest. Forewings with

7 and 8 separate, 7 to termen. Hindwings with 3 and 4 connate. 5 approximated,

6 and 7 connate.

Eremas leucotrigona n. sp.

Aevxorptywvos, with whitish triangle.

3, 11-15 mm. Head and thorax blackish. Palpi 2; blackish. Antennae

fuscous; ciliations in male minute. Abdomen light fuscous; tuft ochreous-

whitish. Legs fuscous with whitish rings; posterior pair whitish. Forewings

with costa gently arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; blackish; a

large ochreous-whitish costal triangle from two-fifths almost to apex, extending

half across disc, containing some blackish dots on costal margin; cilia blackish.

Hindwings and cilia grey.

North Queensland: Cape York, in October (W. B. Barnard); nine speci-

mens. Type in Queensland Museum.

Schoenotenes craspedospila n. sp.

xpacwredoomitos, with marginal spots.

2, 20 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-whitish. Palpi 2 and a half; grey.

Antennae grey. Abdomen with basal segments whitish-ochreous; terminal seg-

ments grey, with fuscous apices; tuft whitish. Legs whitish; anterior pair and

middle tarsi fuscous. Forewings rather narrow, costa moderately arched, apex

rounded, termen obliquely rounded; whitish with some pale ochreous suffusion ;

markings blackish; an oblong costal spot at two-fifths, costal edge before this

with strigulae, and after with a series of dots; a few scattered dots in disc; a

slight suffusion on three-fifths dorsum; an interrupted terminal line; cilia whitish

with an antemedian blackish line. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

New South Wales: Ebor, in December; Murrurundi, in November; two

specimens.

Schoenotenes multilinea n. sp.

multilimeus, many-lined.

é, 12 mm. Head pale ochreous. Palpi 1; whitish. Antennae fuscous;

ciliations in male minute. Thorax fuscous; tegulae pale ochreous. Abdomen

fuscous. Legs whitish; anterior pair grey. Forewings dilated posteriorly, costa

gently arched, apex obtusely pointed, termen obliquely rounded; pale ochreous

suffused with grey, except towards base and on margins; a small basal fascia and

numerous wavy transverse lines fuscous; a pale ochreous terminal line; cilia

whitish with a series of blackish basal dots. Hindwings and cilia pale grey.

Queensland: Brisbane, in November; two specimens.

SCOLIOPLECTA RIGIDA (Meyr.)

Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 1910, 275,

This species should be transferred here from Epichorista.

Gen. Neurospades nov.

veupoowadys, with string drawn back.

Palpi long, porrect. Thorax with a small posterior crest. Forewings with

7 and 8 separate, 7 to termen. Hindwing with 3 and 4 connate, 5 approximated,

7 from before end of cell widely separate from 6.

Characterised by the neuration of the hindwing, which differs from that of

Isotrias figured by Meyrick in the General Insectorum (pl. iv, fig. 67) in the

origin of 7 from before angle of cell, and the absence of a median vein in cell.

Neurospades anagaura n. sp.

dvayavpos, plain.

é, 19 mm. Head whitish. Palpi 3; whitish, terminal joint fuscous.

Antennae grey; ciliations in male one-third. Thorax fuscous; tegulae whitish.

Abdomen pale fuscous. Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish. Forewings with

costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen sinuate, slightly oblique; in male with-

out costa: fold; grey sprinkled with ochreous and blackish; costa with blackish

dots separated by white; no defined basal patch; median fascia broad from middle

of costa, becoming narrow as it approaches two-thirds dorsum; a straight-edged

terminal fascia from three-fourths costa to tornus; a series of blackish dots from

costa near apex to below middle of termen; cilia dark fuscous mixed with white.

Hindwings and cilia grey.

Western Australia: Denmark, in March (W. B. Barnard); one specimen.

SuM MARY

The present paper deals with the subfamily Phalonianae, of which there are

few Australian species, and the Tortricinae, which are largely represented here.

In it are deseribed 10 new genera and 81 new species. It also contains some

additions to the synonymy. The subfamily Rucosminae will form the subject of

a future paper.

GERMINATION STUDIES OF AUSTRALIAN CHENOPODIACEAE WITH

SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE CONDITIONS NECESSARY FOR

REGENERATION

1. ATRIPLEX VESICARIUM Heward

BY NANCY T. BURBRIDGE, B.SC., WAITE AGRICULTURAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE

(READ 10 MAY 1945)

Summary

Continued utilization of the arid pastoral country in Australia is likely to be impossible unless there

is effective regeneration of the edible perennial shrubs, of which bladder saltbush, A‘riplex

vesicarium, is one of the most important. Natural regeneration does not take place with sufficient

rapidity. Many factors are involved, but a study of the characteristics of germination is a primary

essential in the elucidation of the general problem.

GERMINATION STUDIES OF AUSTRALIAN CHENOPODIACEAE

WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO THE CONDITIONS NECESSARY

FOR REGENERATION

I. ATRIPLEX VESICARIUM Heward

By Nancy T. Burpincs, B.Se., Waite Agricultural Research Institute

PuaTe IV

[Read 10 May 1945]

Continued utilization of the arid pastoral country in Australia is likely to be

impossible unless there is effective regeneration of the edible perennial shrubs, of

which bladder saltbush, Atriplex vesicartum, is one of the most important.

Natural regeneration does not take place with sufficient rapidity. Many factors

are involved, but a study of the characteristics of germination is a primary essential .

in the elucidation of the general problem.

The majority of botanical studies carried out in arid regions have concen-

trated on the relations between the habitat and the plants, regardless of the age

or maturity of the latter. Studies of germination, on the other hand, have been

mainly concerned with viability tests, overcoming dormancy or increasing the rate

of germination under incubator or field conditions. There is a definite gap in the

knowledge of the behaviour of seed in its natural habitat.

The work described herein was undertaken to provide information regarding

the field conditions necessary for regeneration following germination. Only in the

laboratory can controlled experiments on germination be made, and although such

experiments have their limitations they may contribute information basic fo an

understanding of the field problem. This paper is concerned with germination,

but it follows that favourable conditions must continue long enough for the estab-

lishment of a root system which will reduce vulnerability to drought. The factors

controlling such establishment cannot be discussed until further field work has

been completed.

Tue SPECIES

The plants are dioecious. There is no female perianth and the ovary is pro-

tected by two lateral, opposing and contiguous bracts. The ovule is flattened, it

is campylotropous and basally attached, but the funicle is long and slender so that

the mature seed has the micropylar protrusion pointed upwards. The condition

is figured in the account of the family in Die Natirlichen Pflanzenfamilien

(Volkens). See plate iv.

By the time the seed is mature the bracts have enlarged and become scarious,

as have the dorsal spongy appendages. Occasionally the spongy tissue may be lack-

ing on one or both bracts. This structure of two bracts and enclosed seed forms

the fruit, from which the seed is not released except by decay of the bract tissue.

The ovary wall is thin and scarious and is ruptured by the developing embryo

before the radicle succeeds in emerging through the micropyle. In its emergence

the radicle splits the outer integument, and then the inner. Commonly there is a

small cap of outer integument tissue isolated on the tip of the inner integument

as it is pushed out by the radicle (see pl. iv, fig. 7-11). The elongation of the

Trans. Roy. Soc. SJA., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

hypocotyl pushes the cotyledons, as they withdraw backwards from the seed,

above the soil.

The seed used in the experiments was collected at Whyalla in October 1943.

METHOpS

Various media have been used in researches on germination. The most

familiar are absorbent paper, jelly culture media and sand. Sand was used for

the experiments described below because it provides a more natural seedbed and

also because preliminary experiments indicated that it would be less liable to fungal

contamination over a three-week period. Germination was considered as accom-

plished when the hooped cotyledons and hypocotyl appeared through the sand.

Under these circumstances the recording would reveal a delay if compared with

germination of seed on the surface of a medium, when the emergence of the radicle

would be the criterion. The chief disadvantage of the method used was that at

high temperatures the plumule protruded above the sand soon after the emergence

of the radicle, whereas at low temperatures there was a period of radicle develop-

ment lasting a day or more before the plumule appeared.

It has been shown that duration of an experiment is important (2). Owing

to the fact that the rate is retarded at low temperatures, the longer the experi-

ments last the greater the germination at low temperature, or, in other words,

the shorter the duration the higher the apparent optimum temperature will tend

to be. Following preliminary tests a three-week period was decided upon.

The sand used was run through a 1 mm. sieve and oven-dried. The petri

dishes used were of two sizes. The smaller (9°0x1°5 cm.) held 60 gms. of sand

and the larger (10:0 x 2:0 cm.) held 100 gms. The dishes with the seeds and wet

sand in position were weighed at the commencement of an experiment, and then

watered up to weight at intervals throughout the test.

The incubators used were (a) a multiple temperature incubator with four-

teen cabinets. The temperatures varied from 4°-40° C, in the winter months to

7°-42° C. in the summer, but during tests, temperature per cabinet rarely varied

more than half a degree either way; (b) a Hearson germinator with a closed glass-

topped lid.

RESULTS

A, Errects oF TEMPERATURE

A test was made to find the optimum temperature for germination. Seeds

were germinated in the multiple temperature incubator. Two sets of dishes were

used. In one the true seeds were removed from their bracts, and in the other

there was no treatment. The sand was kept at 80% saturation. The results are

shown in Table I, and Graphs 1 A and 1 B.

It will be noted that the removal of the seeds from their bracts had a con-

siderable effect. The difference is probably due to the water- and air-holding

capacity of the spongy tissue. Without the bracts the seeds have direct access to

the soil moisture and air.

High temperatures appeared to have an inhibitive effect, whereas low merely

decreased the rate of germination in both treated and untreated seed. The seed-

lings which appeared in the dishes at 36°5° C. and 30°5° C. died almost imme-

diately and turned black. The petri dishes from the two highest temperature

cabinets were kept at a lower temperature for some days following the test, but

no germination occurred. Apparently the embryos had been permanently damaged.

They had not merely failed to develop. The optimum temperature is somewhere

near 16° if both amount and rapidity of germination are considered. The con-

clusion drawn from these results was that daily maximum temperatures might

be expected to have a distinct effect upon germination. An experiment was

accordingly designed to test this hypothesis.

Tasie |

Atriplex vesicorium germinated in multiple temperature incubator.

50 seeds per petri dish with sand at 80% saturation. Sum of two replications.

Mean

‘Temperature Increase per 3-day period Germination

Lr Os 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 %

A. Seed removed from Floral Bracts:

42-0... —_ —_ — —

36°5 — 1 1 — —_ 2 1 5

30-5 1 — 1 1 1 _ 6

26:5 5 2: 7

24-0 5 i) 3 1 — — a i8

21-5 8 28 18 2 3 — 1 60

19-5 5 45 14 1 2 _ — 67

17°5 3 55 ll 4 Hl — — 74

16-0 3 50 14 7 § ao — 79

13:5 — 36 35. 12 1 1 ai 75

12:5 1 27 35 15 7 1 1 87

10°5 — 14 41 21 4 6 3 89

8-5 aah 1 27 2l 15 il 5 80

55... — — 2 6 17 20 20 65

B. Seed in Floral Bracts:

42:0. — — —

36°75. — eae _ i —_— —_ — 1

30°5 —_ os ~ —

26°5 a,

24-0. a _— 3 i co ve — 4

21-5 ees — 4 — 3 3 2 2

19-5 _ 2 12 5 11 2 6 38

17-5 _ 2 17 12 4 7 1 43

16-0 — 1 18 10 6 10 aan, 45

13:5 S= ol? 13 16 8 8 5 50

12-5. =e os 2 7 11 13 — 33

10-5. a ae 2 8 8 16 5 39

85. 4 10 20 34

55, — —_ 6 6

Maximum Temperature Experiment 1

Two sets of three petri dishes each were run through a series of tempera-

tures during the day and left overnight at a low temperature. Each dish was

planted with 50 seeds in their bracts, and the sand was saturated to 60% of the

water-holding capacity. Each set of dishes followed a definite schedule of tem-

perature changes. The aim was to have a gradual daily rise to a two-hour

maximum period. Two control dishes were present in each cabinet used.

Schedule A:: Schedule Bi:

17° C.from 9.00 ~ 9.30a.m. 12.5°C. from 9.00 ~ 9.30a.m.

2’ cs, 9.30 — 10.00 a.m. 155°C" 3 9.30 —10.00a.m.

26° CC. , 10.00 -11.06a.m. 18.5°C. ,, 10.00 —11.00a.m.

36° CC. = 11.00 ~ 12.00 noon 23° C. ,, 11.00 — 12.00 noon

41.5°C. ,, 12.00 - 2.00p.m. 30° Cc. , «= 12.00 ~ 2.00p.m.

36° CC. = 2.00 ~ 3.00 p.m. 23° Cc. ,, «= 2.00 — 3.00 p.m.

26° Cc. , 3.00 — 4.00 p.m. 18.5°C. ,, 3.00 ~ 4.00 p.m.

2t°-C. 4.00 — 4.30 p.m. 15.5°C. ,, 4.00 ~ 4.30p.m.

17° Cc. ,, «= 4.30 - 5.00p.m. 125°C. ,, 4.30 — 5.00 p.m.

13.5°C. ,, 5.00p.m. ~ 9.00 a.m. Y aiame OF A 5.00 p.m. ~ 9.00 a.m.

The range of temperature represented by these schedules is greater than

would occur naturally over a three-week period, but ranges of 20°-25° C. in daily

air temperatures are commonly recorded during hot spells in December, January

or.February, in saltbush areas. In the soil the range would be greater. Since it

was intended to test the hypothesis that high soil temperatures during the summer

ees 5 : ete nance : aera PLE a r a

308 365

265

24-0

20) pment panning inn npmami tmp n= tym ft

8 g 3

NOLLVNINYSO BOVINE DUId

60}

9°

fit

118

apy

60 175

DEGREES, CENTIGRADE

Graph 1A

135

125

10-5

“

VOLO

: f : i

3 3 3 3

NOLLVNIWNYSO BOVLNSOYSd

BOF

ie}

20F

ire)

months would inhibit germination even after heavy rains, the range used is not

excessive. The results are shown in Table IJ, and Graph 2.

Tasce IT

Maximum temperature experiment 1.

50 seeds per petri dish with 60 gms. of sand at 60% saturation.

Mean

Temperature Increase per 3-day period To

in 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 Germination

Schedule A

(sum of three replications) : ian aa a 1 4 3 3 73

Schedule By

(sum of three replications) : — aes 1 3 ll 19 22 37°3

Controls

(sum of two replications) :

= 1 St 1-0

3655 i An mes 1-0

U0 Amst —_ nil

26... nil

23... nil

As me tea — —_ 1 3 4 2 1 li

“1855... ~~ 2 3 3 9 3 1 2i

17-0 — 2 7 12 12 7 4 44

15°5 — 1 6 6 1 9 7 30

13°5 ... — ~ 6 5 10 5 3 29

12°5 ... — — 3 13 13 6 Fe 37

7 8 16 18

MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE

Exer f Exer 2

40 40

Conrao af constant Conraen al conslant

optimum lGenperature, optimum Cemperadire.

Raised to 39°C daly Raed t 405°C.

OT fom 2 hours. TAO every fourth day.

Raised b 45°C daily Rarsed 405°C.

WE for 2 hours. | “On every hurd aay.

z ad |

s 5

aq a

ny i]

5) oO 75

a a

4 20 {207 vd

Zz 4 é

i /

a <et

4 a

10 4 IGF

[ poe | ii i

| a Vi |

ZL | f |

. i PAS os Me Laud tL nme 1 ee ue :|

Br Pan ann DE bot A A 4

i) it 1 15 17 ig at 3 ? 3 it 13 1S 17 12 ai

DAYS OF INCUBATION DAYS OF INCUBATION

Graph 2 Graph 3

Raising the dishes to 41°5° C. for two hours per day reduced the ultimate

germination to 7% as compared with 44% at 17° C., but raising the dishes to

30° C. did not reduce the final result to any significant extent. However, it will

be seen in the graph that germination was definitely retarded. The retardation

appears to be due to the high temperature effect rather than the normal low tem-

perature delay, since the effect is stronger with the dishes following Schedule A,

than it is in B, where the dishes were kept overnight at 7° C.

Having shown that a maximum temperature would affect the germination

rate, further experiments were carried out on similar lines.

Maximum Temperature Experiment 2

ScuHepuLe A,—Dishes passed from 13-5° C-30°5° C. and back during the

hours 9 a.m.-5 p.m., but on alternate days were raised to

40°5° C. for one hour.

SCHEDULE B,—As in A,, but dishes raised to 40°5° C. every third day.

SCHEDULE C,—As in A,, but dishes raised to 40°5° C. every fourth day.

The results can be seen in Graph 3. The high temperature effect is not so

pronounced as in the first experiment, and there is no significant difference

between the three treatments.

Maximum Temperature Experiment 3

Five sets of two dishes each were incubated according to the following

schedules. Dishes were prepared as before and there were the usual controls.

The usual number of temperature changes was used.

sp plat ScHEDULE A,—Dishes passed from

15° C. - 32° C. between 9 a.m. and

12 noon and back between 2 p.m.

and 5 p.m. except on the third

day, when they were raised to

(dénirnel: kbs eon eB 41-5° C. for one hour.

gpd. Garperaase:

Pavaedtods arate ScHEDULE B,—As in A,, but raised to

Sika: Say Sa 41-5° C. on tenth day only.

Raised & 465 € ¥ .

ScHEDULE C,—As in A,, but raised to

41°5° C. on seventeenth day only.

MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE

Exer 3

en 17 ay.

SCHEDULE D,—From 16°C. raised to

36° C. every day for two hours

and returned to the low tempera-

ture for the night.

SCHEDULE E,,—-As in D,, but raised

to 41°5° C. for one hour on sixth,

twelfth and eighteenth days of

incubation

PERCENTAGE GERMINATION

The results are seen in Graph 4. It

will be noted that raising to 36° C. both

depressed and retarded germination, c/f.,

Graph 2. Owing to this, no effect of

raising to 41°5° C. on every sixth day

o 1 8 6 7 (E,) can be diagnosed. In Ag,

wpe see B., and C,, raising to 41°5°C. on the

Graph 4 third day has had more effect than raising

on either the tenth or the seventeenth day, but the effect has been to lower the

final result rather than to retard the onset. The final results of B, and C, are

close to that of B, in the first experiment. Apparently the germination rate is not

seriously affected by a high temperature occurring ten or more days after the

moistening of the soil.

B. Errects of Sor SATURATION

The problem of germination in an arid habitat is twofold. A species must

be able to utilise moisture as soon as it is available, but the seeds must not be so

sensitive that they respond to light showers which moisten the soil surface for

a few hours.

Two experiments were carried out to find the optimum saturation for

germination. The first test was at 23°5° C. The levels of saturation were 20%,

40%, 60%, 80% and 100% water-holding capacity. Each petri dish (10 x 2 cm.)

held 50 seeds in 100 gms. of sand. There were two series of dishes; one with

the seeds removed from their bracts and the other with untreated seed. Each

series was duplicated. So far as the amount of germination was concerned, this

test was a failure, but it supports the conclusion that Atriplex vesicarium requires

a cool season for germination, and hence regeneration, The results are shown

in Table III.

Tasie III

Effect of varying soil saturation at 23-5° C. Sum of two replicates of 50 seeds.

Saturation Increase per 3-day period %

% 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 Germination

A. Seeds removed from bracts: ,

20 — i 3 2 1 — 1 8

40... 3 4 1 2 2 1 2 15

60... 4 5 7 6 4 1 1 28

80... 4 8 7 5 2 2 1 29

100... 4 8 1 3 4 1 1 22

B. Seeds in floral bracts:

20... — = 1 ~~ 2 —~ is 3

40... _ ca =

60... — i 2 1 — 1 es 5

80... — 1 2 1 I ~ 1 6

100... — _ _ 1 — many — 1

The test was repeated at 18° C and the results compared satisfactorily with

those of the temperature experiment. See Table IV.

TAste [V

Effect of varying saturation at 18°C. Sum of two replicates of 50 seeds,

% Increase per 3-day period %

Saturation 3 6 9 12 45 18 21 Germination

A. Seeds removed from bracts:

20... — 35 26 10 7 rt a 78

40... 3. 38 2 12 ee a 85

60... 2 58 25 6 i rer 92

80... 7 43 22 8 2. — = 82

100... 1 32 25 9 4 — oe 71

B. Seeds in floral bracts:

rae ean! 4 2 3 1 4 14

40... — — 8 8 5 1 a 22

60... — 6 16 9 6 3 ps 40

80... re 1 17 11 8 Po ds 38

100... — 6 16 9 7 3 ~ 44

It will be noted that 60% gave the best results. In the treated seed at 18° C.

the result is significantly better than all other saturations. In the untreated seed

there is no significant difference between 60%, 80% and 100%. It is believed

that this is due to the soil aeration factor. At high saturations aeration is poor

—hence the result with treated seed. When the bracts are present, the spongy

tissue retains bubbles of air which would be available to the developing seed.

It was suspected that at low saturation the water-absorbing capacity of the

spongy tissue of the bracts would compete with that of the seeds. To check this,

seeds whose bracts had spongy appendages were tested against those without.

The seeds were placed on the surface of sand moistened to 60% saturation in

AMG aa ca aa i aM rman a alas al T pstiesett

[BURIED] tazarwent [PURER] |

| thy the oe oe eh et laaie ae sates | |

erry 4 ays eae | |

60r | mentee ID cc® water per week onan Semen i 4

L sabiens, CNG WRC accents Pepe | |

50h

PERCENTAGE GERMINATION

n i rt 4 wee 4 i

3 4 5 8 7 & 9 10 i 2 i3

WEEKS

Graph 5

10 x 2 cm. petri dishes. Germinations of 34% and 35-°3% were obtained. Seeds

‘buried in sand and seed on the surface were also tested in a saturated atmosphere.

There was no significant difference in the results, but the tests are inconclusive.

An experiment under glasshouse conditions was planned, using flat tins

15 x 6 cms., each holding one kilogram of sand and planted with 100 seeds. The

tins were arranged as follows:

Series 1 watered to 70% saturation continuously.

» 2 watered to 70% saturation 2 weeks and left dry 3 weeks alternately.

» 9% given 10 ccs. water once a week.

» 4 left dry.

In each series, half the tins had buried seeds and half had seeds scattered on

the surface. There were three replications.

Treatments continued for ten weeks (9th June-10 August), after which all

tins were brought to the 70% saturation level for three weeks.

The results are seen in Table V and Graph 5,

TABLE V

Effect of various watering treatments under glasshouse conditions.

%o Jo Yo Yo %o %o Yo

germin. germun. germin. germin. germin. germin. germin,

Treatment Ist 2nd 3rd 4-10th llth 12th 13th Total

week week week week week week week %

Continuous 70%

saturation—

buried seed ~ 1:7 23-0 13-0 15+3 1-0 0-3 aves 54-3

Continuous 70%

saturation—

surface seed - 0:3 8-0 6-0 21:3 0-7 — 1-0 37-3

14 days 70%

21 days dry—

buried seed - 0-7 20-0 14-3 7°3 0-3 1-0 — 43-7

14 days 70%

21 days dry—

surface seed - 6-3 6-0 8-7 6-0 _ _ 1-0 22-0

10 ccs. water

per week—

buried seed - 5+7 35-3 11-3 $2°3

10 ccs. water

per week—

surface seed - 2-0 2:3 443

No water—

buried seed - — 27 35-3 18-0 56:0

No water—

surface seed - 1:7 2°6 4-3

In all cases buried seed is superior to seed scattered on the surface. Inter-

mittent watering caused a setback in the fourth week, from which there was no

full recovery (see graph 5). Series 3, with 10 ccs. water per week (equivalent to

a heavy dew), did not show any deterioration of the seed due to treatment.

Germination of the buried seed in Series 3 and 4 was more rapid than in Series 1

and 2, due to the more propitious August temperature. The poor germination of

the surface seed in Series 3 and 4 was found to be due to the higher evaporation

under the August temperatures. The seeds were covered with sand and watered

to the 70% saturation level. The resulting germination was extremely good.

In a second glasshouse experiment, the planting treatments were:

(1) Buried seed; (2) Surface seed; (3) Seed covered by 2°5 cm. of litter

composed of twigs and leaves of Acacia Sowdenti; (4) Seed on sur-

face but shaded with sacking from 10 a.m, - 4 p-m. (to imitate shading

by a shrub during the hottest portion of the day).

There were three watering treatments:

(a) 40 ces. water per week; (b) 20 ccs, per week; (c) left dry;

The test ran for eight weeks (15 September - 10 November), after which the

tins were brought to the 70% saturation level for 21 days. There were three

replications. The results are shown in Table VI.

8&2

Taste VI

Effect of various planting and watering treatments under glasshouse conditions.

% germination

40 ccs. water 20 ccs. water

Planting Treatment per week per week No water

Buried Seed - - - 46-0 56-7 49-7

Surface seed - - - - 493 2:0 1-0

Seed under litter - - - 9-7 2-7 2-3

Surface seed shaded—

10am.-4 p.m. - - 4-0 1-7 3-3

The buried seeds were overwhelmingly superior. The seeds under litter

were disappointing. With 40 ccs. per week one replication gave 21%, the others

6% and 2%. The seeds lay between the sand and the litter. Under natural

conditions they would be covered with drift sand, which would filter through the

twigs. The differences due to watering treatments were not significant.

C. Tue Errect or SATURATION X TEMPERATURE

Four saturation levels (40%, 60%, 80% and 100%) were tested at the

following temperatures, 29° C., 25° C., 22° C.,17°5° C., 140° C.,, in the multiple

temperature incubator. There were 50 seeds per petri dish (9 x 1°5 cm.) with

60 gms. of sand. There were two replications. The results are shown in

Table VII.

TasLe VII

Temperature x saturation — % germination,

Temperature Saturation

ha On 40% 60% 80% 100%

29-0) - - — 2 — 1

25-0 - - _ 2 1 —

22-0 - - 5 4, 14 26

17-5 - - 28 $1 52 48

14-0 - - 34 45 49 64

It would appear that both above and below the optimum temperature germina-

tion is improved by a rise in the saturation level. At 17°5° there is no significant

difference between the results at 60%, 80% and 100% (c.f. Table IV).

D. Derru or PLANTING

To test the ability of Atriplex vesicarium to germinate in sand drifts, seeds

were planted at 4”, 3”, 2”, 1”, 4” and on the surface of sand in 800 cc. beakers

which were enclosed in bands of black paper. Incubation was at 20° C., this being

the lowest temperature available in the Hearson incubators in November.

The results were:

4” - no germination gr 13% a" =~ 32°7%

37 ly fy 1” ~ = 21:3% Surface - 17°3%

Examination of the seeds showed that germination had taken place in all

beakers, but at 2” or deeper the hypocotyls were not capable of sufficient elonga-

tion to push the cotyledons above the surface. It is evident that the seeds of this

species would not survive for long in a wet sand drift, and only under exceptional

conditions could they colonise such a habitat.

Discussion

It should be emphasised that the results represent germination under experi-

mental conditions over a 21-day period. The manner in which germination takes

place and the appearance of a few seedlings each day over most of the period, is

in accordance with field observations and agrees with germination in pots under

glasshouse conditions with no control of temperature. This feature appears to

be characteristic for the species. It also occurred in preliminary experiments on

Atriplex spongiosum, but not Atriplex semibaccatum, so that the position in the

remainder of the genus requires further study. Trumble (6) reported that at

optimum temperature and saturation most of the seeds of Atriplex semibaccatum

germinate in the first week.

Evidence concerning the longevity of Atriplex vesicarium seed under natural

conditions is slight. The glasshouse experiments show that deterioration due to

light showers, which are a feature of arid climates, is not particularly important.

Under storage conditions at the Waite Institute the seed has not been seriously

affected over the period 1936-43, but the results are not conclusive. Insect damage

in the field probably plays a very important part.

It was found (1) that germination of the seeds of desert winter annuals was

improved by alternating temperatures of 10° - 30° C. for 18 and 6 hours respec-

tively. The seeds of these species are shed early in summer, but the high tem-

peratures of the next few months inhibit germination, which commences during

the following winter. However, by the next summer, dormancy has apparently

been overcome, and early summer rains could bring up seedlings, since higher

temperatures are now tolerated in tests. In Atriplex vesicarium there is no

evidence that any period of dormancy exists. Such a period is unlikely because

the seed coat is thin, there is little endosperm, and the embryo is well developed

when the seed is shed.

_ The method of overcoming dormancy by alternations of temperature is

widely practised in the United States of America. With Australian plants it has

not been successful. It has been used in Danthonia pilosa (5), Stipa nitida (4)

and Astrebla lappacea (3), but without any appreciable improvement in results.

The method is most likely to succeed with seeds having a marked after-ripening

or dormant period. Seeds of plants growing under climatic conditions where

there are marked seasons and seasonal changes are more likely to show such a

period than the seeds of plants growing under Australian conditions, where the

transition from season to season is not so pronounced.

The maximum temperature experiments were designed to study the effect of

high daily maxima during germination. The results show clearly that tempera-

tures above 30°C. are likely to be highly injurious to the developing embryo.

The indications are that high temperatures do not merely inhibit germination but

that when moisture is present the physiological processes are disturbed, causing

injury to the tissues. In this event, high temperatures following summer rains

must be responsible for a considerable amount of damage to the seed reserves

in the soil.

There was no indication that any combination of temperature changes gave

a better rate of germination than that at the optimum temperature, even though it

has been found (7) that naturally fluctuating temperatures have a beneficial effect

in some species.

It follows from the experiments that good regeneration of saltbush is unlikely

to occur after a heavy summer rain. However, there are a number of reports

that satisfactory regrowth has taken place after an autumn rain. A study of the

meteorological records of a locality in the saltbush areas shows that in February,

March and early April the daily maximum air temperature is likely to be

dangerously high for germination of saltbush. But after a heavy rain the tem-

perature falls suddenly and may stay down below the danger level for several

weeks. If this “danger level” be hypothetically fixed at 85° F, (29° C.), then it

is found that temperatures very rarely fall for a long enough period in February,

occasionally do in March and always do in April. Thus two inches of rain in one

March may be followed by cool weather, and in another by hot, so that the weather

following the rain has a profound effect on germination.

Early summer rains do not have the same effect on air temperatures which

are still low following the cool season, which makes a sudden drop unlikely. Also,

the temperatures are on the up-grade with the approach of summer. Speaking

generally, September corresponds with April and October-November with March,

but since conditions grow daily more severe, as the summer drought approaches,

seedlings resulting from any rain will probably be scorched off very rapidly.

The climate of the saltbush areas is characterised by the irregular and erratic

rainfall. There is no definite wet season. But bladder saltbush requires a cool,

wet season for germination, and hence regeneration. The amount of precipitation

in any one year may be very satisfactory, the herbage produced may be good, but

if the temperature is wrong during the period immediately following the chiet

rains then regeneration of the perennial bladder saltbush will be disappointing.

SUMMARY

Incubated at constant temperature the optimum range for germination of Atriplex

vesicarium is approximately 14-18° C. over a period of 21 days.

Removal of seed from the bracts widens the range tolerated and increases the

rate and amount of germination.

Daily maximum incubating temperatures of over 30° C. have a lowering effect

on the germination rate.

The effects of raising to a temperature above 30° C. for various numbers of days

is described. In all cases the germination rate is lower than that at the

optimum temperature.

When seeds are removed from their bracts, sand saturated to 60% of water-

holding capacity gave best results at optimum temperature. If left in bracts,

there was no significant difference between 60%, 80% and 100%.

Seeds buried in sand gave better germination than those on the surface except in

a saturated atmosphere.

In glasshouse tests, light weekly waterings did not result in any seed deterioration.

When seeds were planted more than 2” deep no seedlings succeeded in reaching

the surface. Best results were obtained from seed planted at 4”.

It is concluded from the results that regeneration of Atriplex vesicarium is not

likely to occur after summer rain, and that hot days following such rain may

cause considerable damage to the seed reserve in the soil.

REFERENCES

Barton, L. V. 1936 Boyce Thompson Contrib., 8, 7

Haasis, F. W. 1928 Plant Physiology, 3, (4), 368

Myers, A. 1942 Jour. Aust. Inst. Agric. Sci, 8, (1), 31

Oszorn, T. G. B., Woon, J. G., and Parrrmcg, T. B. 1931 Proc. Linn. Soc.

N.S.W., 56, (4), 299

Trumzie, H. C. Experiments with some typical Native Fodder Plants—

unpublished thesis.

Trumpets, H.C. 1932 Jour. C.S.LR., 5, 152

Warrincron, K. 1936 Jour. Ecol, 24, 185

NA wo BONE

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE IV

Fig. 1-2: Fruit: a, appendage; b, bract. 3, Bract, showing inner face and attached seed(s).

4, Vertical section of seed, showing embryo and endosperm. 5, Same cut in another posi-

tion: t, testa; e, embryo. 6-13, Stages in germination: o.w., ovary wall; o.i., outer integu-

ment; ii., inner integument; c, cap of outer integument tissue. 14-15, Young seedlings:

h, hypocotyl. Fig. 1-11, x 10ca.; 12-15, x5 ca.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1945

Vol. 69, Plate IV

AUSTRALIAN CUMACEA, NO. 10 THE FAMILY LEUCONIDAE

BY HERBERT M. HALE, DIRECTOR, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

(READ 10 MAY 1945)

Summary

The most northerly record of the family in the southern hemisphere seems to be that of Leucon

calluropus Stebbing (1912, p.156 — off Natal, South Africa, latitude about 29° S, longitude 32° E).

Calman (1907, 31-39) records seven species from the south island of New Zealand (latitude 43 ° -

44° § , longitude 173° E); this fairly good representation was secured in a small area, evidently by

the same collector, H. Suter, in May and August 1897. About ten of the other known species occur

in the Subantarctic and Antarctic.

AUSTRALIAN CUMACHA, No. 100)

THE FAMILY LEUCONIDAE

By Herpert M. Hate, Director, South Australian Museum

[Read 10 May 1945]

Fig. 1-6

Family LEUCONIDAE

The most northerly record of the family in the southern hemisphere seems

to be that of Leucon calluropus Stebbing (1912, p. 156—off Natal, South Africa,

latitude about 29° S., longitude 32° E.). Calman (1907, 31-39) records seven

species from the south island of New Zealand (latitude 43°-44° S., longitude

173° E.); this fairly good representation was secured in a small area, evidently

by the same collector, H. Suter, in May and August 1897. About ten of the other

known species occur in the Subantarctic and Antarctic.

It would seem that Leuconids play but a small part in the Cumacean fauna

of Australian coasts, although the southern waters of Tasmania may produce

somewhat different results. Notwithstanding the fact that some extensive collec-

tions have been made off New South Wales and South Australia, individuals

belonging to the family number less than fifty, and represent only three species.

These were secured between latitude 35°-36° S., two from the east coast (longi-

tude 150°-152° E) and one from the south (longitude 138° E.). All are herein

described as new; two are referred respectively to Leucon and Hemileucon, but

if they are to remain so placed some latitude in the definition of these genera

must be allowed.

Genus Leucon Kroyer

Leucon, Kroyer, 1846, 208; Stebbing, 1913, 63 (syn.) ; Hansen, 1920, 7.

Kroyer’s name has been long quoted for this widely distributed Cumacean

genus and the discarding of Leucon because it has been used in Besser Ms.

(Schoenherr, 1834, Gen. Curc., 2, (1), 285, 286) for the Coleoptera would serve

no useful purpose.

Leucon ocularis sp. nov.

Adult male (A). Carapace smooth, excepting for faint, sparse pitting and

a feeble median carina on frontal lobe; it is a little longer than the pedigerous

somites together and more than one-fourth of total length of animal; it is slightly

compressed and with greatest width more than half its length. Pseudorostrum

not at all upturned; lobes meeting for a distance equal to about one-seventh of

length of carapace, in front subtruncate, serrate and fringed with setae. Ocular

lobe not distinctly defined, but there is present a small projection at apex of

frontal lobe ; eye present, there being a large sooty patch on frontal lobe, surround-

ing a single, oval, tumid corneal lens. Antennal notch widely open; the antero-

lateral margin and front part of infero-lateral margin of carapace serrate.

Pedigerous somites somewhat depressed, the pleural parts of first to fourth

rather prominent; second to fourth subequal in length.

Pleon distinctly longer than cephalothorax; first to fifth somites suc-

cessively increasing in length; telsonic somite short, as long as second somite; as

wide as long, and with posterior margin rounded and bisinuate; the produced

distal part is one-half the length of the remainder.

First antenna with second and third joints of peduncle subequal in length.

together as long as first joint; flagellum almost as long as last peduncular seg-

@) No. 9, see Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8, 1945, pp. 145-218, fig. 1-49.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

ment, two-jointed, the first segment seemingly composed of two fused joints;

accessory flagellum large, single-jointed, as long as first segment of main lash.

Flagellum of second antenna reaching to just beyond end of telsonic somite.

Mandible typical of genus; lacinia stout and bidentate.

Third maxilliped with basis more than half as long again as palp.

Basis of first peraeopod barely longer than rest of limb; carpus slightly

longer than ischium and merus together; propodus a little shorter than carpus and

longer than dactylus. :

Second peraeopod with basis longer than rest of limb; ischium short but

distinct; carpus with three unequal distal spines; dactylus twice as long as

propodus, and not quite as long as the longest of its five distal spines.

& B. ceph.

Fig. 1 Leucon ocularis, A, Lateral view and (ceph.) cephalothorax of type male,

Backstairs Passage. B. ceph., Cephalothorax of male from St. Vincent Gulf.

C, Lateral view of allotype female, St. Vincent Gulf (all x 37); C.c, pace, Carapace

of allotype female (x 60).

Third and fourth peraeopods with basis wide and more than twice as long

as rest of limb; ischium subequal in length to merus and with three unequal setae ;

carpus not much longer than propodus, with three distal setae, the longest reach-

ing level of tip of dactylus.

Fifth peraeopod abruptly shorter, only about half length of fourth; basis

not expanded, barely longer than rest of limb.

Peduncle of uropod shorter than the subequal rami, and with half-a-dozen

plumose setae and a few shorter outstanding stiff setae; exopod with three

unequal spines at truncate apex, the longest almost half as long as the ramus, its

inner margin with three plumose setae and a spine next to the terminal three ;

endopod single-jointed, with two stout unequal distal spines (the longer less than

half as long as ramus) and with a row of about a dozen short spines on whole

length of inner margin.

Colour white save for the pronounced pigmentation of the frontal lobe; this

colour patch bifurcates behind the lobe and extends for some distance along

the back. Length 2-8 mm.

Loc-—South Australia: Page Islands, Backstairs Passage, 9 fath. (K.

Sheard, submarine light, Ap!. 1941). Type, male, in South Australian Museum,

Reg. No. C.2493.

Males only were taken at this locality.

Adult male (B). Carapace distinctly longer than pedigerous somites

together and with its greatest width much less than half its length; it is little more

than one-fourth of total length of animal. Pseudorostrum narrowly truncate in

map. 3 ¢

Fig. 2 Leucon ocularis, paratype adult male from Backstairs Passage, and allo-

type female from St. Vincent Gulf; p. lobe, mand. and ant. 1, anterior end of

pseudorostral lobe, mandible and first antenna (x 135}; ant. 2, and prp, part of

second antenna and peraeopods (x60); urop, uropod with telsonic somite, etc.

(x 60).

front, the lobes meeting for a distance equal to nearly one-fourth of length of

carapace. Frontal lobe and eye as described (fig. 1, B). Pleon barely longer

than cephalothorax, slender as in the female shown in fig. 1,C.

Second antenna with flagellum reaching beyond end of pleon for a distance

equal to length of telsonic somite,

Length 2:7 mm.

Loc—South Australia: St. Vincent Gulf, off Troubridge Island, near Edith-

burgh, 104 fath. (H. M. Hale and K. Sheard, A. Trawl, Apl. 1945).

This male, taken in more sheltered waters than the examples from Back-

stairs Passage, agrees in essential features with the latter but differs strikingly in

the much more slender form and the longer and narrower pseudorostrum.

Subadult female (C). Carapace more than one-fourth of total length of

animal, decidedly compressed, and one and three-fourths times as long as

deep; mid-line of dorsum with three teeth, one placed posterior to eye at

middle of length, the other two very close together a little behind this. Pseudo-

rostrum horizontal, the lobes meeting for a distance equal to more than one-fourth

of length of carapace; seen from the side the lobes are very obliquely subtruncate

and finely serrate in front; the oblique antero-lateral margin leading to the small

but distinct antennal notch is feebly serrate; antero-lateral angle rounded, with

a small tooth inferiorly, and margin posterior to this very feebly serrate. A large

lens and dark colour patch on frontal lobe as in male, the pigment mass embrac-

ing several pale oval areas.

Pleon barely longer than cephalothorax; fifth somite about twice as long as

telsonic somite, which is longer than wide and is well produced posteriorly above

bases of uropods.

Main flagellum of first antenna apparently three-jointed, and accessory lash

two-jointed, the second segment minute.

Basis of first peraeopod shorter than in male, not as long as remaining joints

together.

Second peraeopod with basis equal in length to rest of limb; the ischium,

although distinct in the male, cannot be made out here.

Third and fourth peraeopods not much longer than fifth,

Peduncle of uropod nearly four-fifths as long as the subequal rami and with

a few short and feeble inner setae, but no plumose hairs; endopod single-jointed,

with seven spines on inner margin and two terminal ones, the longer of which is

fully half as long as the ramus.

Length 2°65 mm.

Loc.—South Australia: St. Vincent Gulf, off Troubridge Island, near Edith-

burgh, 104 fath.; and midway between Edithburg and Glenelg, 35 metres (H. M.

Hale and K. Sheard, A. Trawl, Apl. 1945). Allotype female in South Australian

Museum, Reg. No. C. 2757.

In some Cumacea with well-developed eye the corneal lenses are not confined

to the portion of the frontal area separated off as an ocular lobe (see for instance

Glyphocuma bakeri Hale, 1944, fig. 31); further, an ocular lobe is not necessarily

sharply marked off in species with eyes (see Gephyrocuma repanda Hale, 1944,

fig. 16). Some of the species of Leucon are regarded as having a small and

obscure eye-lobe, like the tiny anterior projection of the frontal lobe of ocularis.

In Zimmer’s kerguelensis (1908, 178, pl. xli, fig. 71-72) this is larger and quite

distinct.

Apart from the presence of a pigmented eye, ocularis differs from all other

species referred to the genus in having the endopod of the uropod not divided into

two segments.

Genus Hemireucon Calman

Hemileucon Calman, 1907, 32 and 37; Stebbing, 1913, 152,

The only species previously referred to the genus are the two from New

Zealand described by Calman-—untplicatus and comes. The form recorded below

differs from both of these in having the endopod of the uropod single-jointed and

in lacking lateral ridges on the carapace; it would appear that latitude in these

characters will have to be allowed in Leuconid genera, as it is in Bodotria and

Gynodiastylis. The new species agrees with comes in having the ischium of the

second peraeopod distinct.

The genus stands on male characters, the complete absence of pleopods and

a second antenna with short flagellum.

Hemileucon levis sp. nov.

Ovigerous female. Integument shining, sparsely and faintly pitted, par-

ticularly on carapace.

Carapace two-thirds as long again as deep, considerably compressed, and one-

fourth of total length of animal; a serrated crest runs from apex of frontal lobe

to just beyond middle of length of carapace; this is cut into nine teeth, the anterior

five separated from the others by a wider interspace; antennal notch rather

Fig. 3 Hemuilewcon levis. A, lateral view of type female. B, Cephalothorax of

ovigerous female. C, Carapace of female showing variation in armature. D, Type

male, lateral view and (ceph.) cephalothorax from above. E, lateral view of

small adult male. F, Carapace of adult male with serrated crest (all x 32).

deep and angle narrowly rounded ; inferior margin immediately posterior to antero-

lateral angle feebly serrate. Pseudorostrum long, the lobes meeting for a distance

equal to nearly one-third of total length of carapace; its anterior margin is sub-

truncate, slightly oblique and feebly serrate, while the very oblique lower margin

is irregularly toothed.

None of pedigerous somites greatly expanded on sides, but pleural parts of

second longer than in any of the others; together they are a little shorter than

carapace.

Pleon a little longer than cephalothorax; fifth somite much longer than any

of the others and nearly twice the length of telsonic somite, which is as broad as

long, rounded posteriorly.

First segment of peduncle of first antenna distinctly longer than second and

third together, and second a little longer than third; flagellum three-jointed, its

first segment longest and about equal in length to the single-jointed accessory lash.

c.pace 9

Fig. 4 Hemileucon levis, paratypes female and male; c, pace, front of carapace

from the side; ant. 1-2, first and second antennae; prp, 1 and 4, first and fourth

peraeopods (x 60; distal part of endopod of uropod, x 135); prp, 2, second peraeo-

pod, basis not shown (x 135).

Basis of first peraeopod not much more than half as long as remaining joints

together, with plumose seta at outer distal angle, and with spines at inner distal

angle; ischium with an inner tooth; carpus a little longer than propodus, which

is longer than merus; dactylus about two-thirds as long as propodus, with one of

its terminal setae stout.

Second peraeopod with ischium short but distinct; merus subequal in length

to carpus; dactylus almost as long as carpus and propodus together, and with

longest of terminal setae fully as long as propodus and dactylus together.

Third and fourth peraeopods with basis not or barely longer than rest

of limb.

Exopod of uropod one-fifth as long again as endopod and two-thirds as long

again as peduncle, which has a single spine near distal end of inner margin;

endopod with no trace of division into two joints and with two or three. stout

setae on proximal part of inner margin, followed by seven rather stout spines,

the last a little stouter than the others and subterminal; the robust terminal spine

is more than one-third as long as the ramus; exopod with two long setae on inner

edge and three slender and very unequal spines at apex.

The animal is translucent in alcohol, without colour markings. Length

3°5 mm.

Adult male. Carapace rather more than half as long again as deep; seen from

above it is somewhat inflated (as wide as deep) in posterior half and the sides

are sinuate, tapering rapidly to the front in anterior half; it is one-fourth of total

length of animal and has no dorsal serrations (see below). Antennal notch widely

open and angle a little obtuse. Pseudorostral lobes subtruncate in front, meeting

for a distance equal to almost one-fifth of length of carapace.

Pedigerous somites successively increasing in length, together distinctly

shorter than carapace.

~ Pleon distinctly longer than cephalothorax; telsonic somite longer than wide,

quite well produced posteriorly above bases of uropods.

First antenna much as in female. Last joint of peduncle of second antenna

not much longer than the preceding; flagellum not or scarcely reaching beyond

hinder end of carapace, composed of eleven joints, the first very short, the second

the longest.

Basis of first peraeopod relatively long, although shorter than rest of limb,

with a plumose seta at external distal angle; remaining joints of same proportions

as in female.

Second peraeopod with short, collar-like ischium; carpus with two par-

ticularly stout distal spines and a plumose seta.

Third and fourth peraeopods with basis distinctly longer than rest of limb;

no outstanding features.

Rami of uropod subequal in length, nearly twice as long as peduncle, which

has four slender spines on inner edge; endopod single-jointed, its inner edge with

four stout proximal setae, followed by a series of eleven spines, scarcely differing

in length, but the last two slightly stouter than the others; there are two more

robust spines at apex, the truly terminal one three times as long as the other and

one-fourth as long as the ramus.

Colour translucent, with mottling of red pigment at antennal notch and on

last pedigerous and pleon somites. Peduncle and rami of uropod with linear red

mottlings.

Length 3°25 mm.

Loc.—New South Wales: 5 miles off Port Hacking, 100 metres (July 1943) ;

4 miles off Eden, 70 metres (Oct. 1943); 4 miles off Port Hacking, 80 metres

(type female, May 1944); Ulladulla, 75 metres (type male, June 1944)—all

K\. Sheard, A. Trawl, on mud or silt; Ulladulla, Brush Island, 45 fath., fine silt

on flathead grounds (D. Rochford, A. Trawl, Jan. 1945). Types in South Aus-

tralian Museum, Reg. No. C. 2549 and 2563,

A male taken with the type male had the red pigmentation as described. The

size is variable; one ovigerous female (from 100 metres) is only 2°85 mm. in

length (fig. 3, B), while a male with exopods fully developed is 2-7 mm. This

last example has the dorsum of the carapace smooth and rounded as in the type,

although the pseudorostrum is less truncate anteriorly when viewed from the side

(fig. 3, E). A slightly larger male (2°85 mm.), also with fully developed

exopods, has the dorsum of the carapace serrate as in the type female, but with the

teeth in a continuous series (fig. 3, F). The carapace armature of the female is

variable; usually there is a break in the series (four or five plus four; or three

plus four or five), but in one example the dorsum is serrate for practically the

whole length (fig. 3, C), although the posterior teeth are insignificant.

Genus Evporetta Norman

Eudorella Stebbing, 1913, 74 (syn.); Hansen, 1920, 21.

Only five of the twenty-two species previously described have been noted for

the southern hemisphere. Calman (1907, 33) records iruncaiula (Spence Bate)

from the South Island of New Zealand, and Zimmer has named four Antarctic

and Subantarctic species, gracilior, fallax, splendida and sordida (Stebbing, 1913,

77, 80 and 81, ref. and syn.).

Eudorella rochfordi sp. nov.

Ovigerous female. Integument smooth except for faint pitting, which

ig most distinct on carapace; thin and translucent.

Carapace rather less than one-fifth of total length of animal and as long as

the first four pedigerous somites combined; it is compressed (one-third as deep

again as wide) and not very much longer than deep. Antero-lateral angle not

Fig. 5 Eudorella rochfordi, type female; lateral view and cephalothorax from

above (x 35).

prominent but armed with a tiny tooth, behind which the inferior margin is

shallowly serrate for nearly half its length. Anterior margin immediately above

antero-lateral tooth slightly emarginate, then with a prominence cut into three

(left side) or four (right) teeth, the lower two of which are downbent; a little

distance above this again is a second prominence cut into four or five teeth, mostly

directed upwards; between the two prominences the sinus is distinct. Upper

margins of pseudorostral lobes slightly vaulted as seen from the side, each with a

group of prominent setae, the longest equal in length to about one-third depth

of carapace.

First pedigerous somite partially covered by second on sides; third somite a

little longer on sides than any of the others excepting the fifth.

Pleon longer than cephalothorax ; fifth somite three-fourths as long again as

telsonic somite and with a pair of long dorsal setae, placed close together at

posterior end, and reaching fully to end of telsonic somite; the last-named is well

produced above bases of uropods.

First antenna with second segment of peduncle not at all dilated and distinctly

more than half as long again as third, which is about as long as the wide first joint;

main flagellum three-jointed, the first segment as long as last peduncular joint,

and two and one-third times as long as second; third very small; accessory

flagellum single-jointed, not much shorter than first segment of the other lash.

Third maxilliped much as in female of emerginata but with basis not longer

than remaining joints together; carpus one-fourth as long again as propodus,

which is equal in length to ischium and merus together, and is fully one-third as

long again as dactylus.

First peraeopod slender, the merus reaching to level of anterior margin of

carapace; basis two-thirds as long as rest of limb; propodus half as long again

as carpus and twice as long as dactylus.

Fig. 6 Eudorella rochfordi, type female; c, pace, anterior edge of carapace from

the side (x 87); ant. 1, first antenna (x87); prp, first to fifth peraeopods (x74);

urop, uropod with fifth pleon and telsonic somites (x 74).

Second peraeopod with basis only as long as combined lengths of merus and

carpus, which are equal in length; dactylus not quite twice as long as propodus,

almost as long as carpus, and with the longest terminal setae nearly as long as

propodus plus dactylus.

Basis longer than rest of limb in third peraeopod, equal to this in fourth and

shorter than remaining joints together in fifth; third and fourth pairs subequal

in length (each a little more than half as long as second leg) and fifth only two-

thirds as long as fourth; dactylar seta and longest propodal seta in all at least

equal to combined lengths of the three distal joints of the limbs.

Peduncle of uropod little longer than telsonic somite and equal in length to

exopod, its inner margin with three short setae; endopod broken.

Length 3°33 mm.

Loc-—New South Wales: Ulladulla, Brush Island, 45 fath., in fine silt on

flathead grounds (D. Rochford, A. Trawl, Jan. 1945). Type in South Australian

Museum, Reg. No. C. 2761.

A single example was found amongst a mass of Cumacea collected by the

Hydrologist of the Fisheries Division, C. S. and I. R., Mr. D. Rochford, after

whom the form is named.

This species belongs to the puzzling truncatula group (Hansen, 1920, 21).

While the anterior margin of the carapace is very like that of truncatula (Spence

Bate) the general shape of the carapace is more as in hirsuta Sars (Sars, 1900,

pl. xxix-xxx). It differs from ¢rwncatula in having the vaulted upper profile of

the pseudorostral lobes furnished with longer and more prominent setae, while

the pair of dorsal setae at the posterior end of the fifth pleon somite, instead of

being insignificant, project over the telsonic somite as in emarginata (Kroyer)

—Sars, 1900, pl. xxvii. Further, the second joint of the peduncle of the first

antenna is relatively longer (little longer than third in female of truncatua), the

flagella of this appendage are longer and the propodus of the first peraeopod is

proportionately more elongate (only one-third as long again as carpus in

truncatula) ; the endopod of the uropod also may show some difference.

As previously noted, Calman refers a small species of Eudorella from New

Zealand to the North Atlantic truncatula, remarking at the same time on some

slight differences.

SUMMARY

The family Leuconidae is poorly represented off Australian shores, and

amongst a considerable amount of Cumacean material collected on the southern

and eastern coasts only three species have been found—Leucon ocularis, Henu-

leucon levis and Eudorella rochfordi spp. nov. The two first-named are distinc-

tive in the genera they are referred to, but the last resembles closely the North

Atlantic Eudorella truncatula (Spence Bate).

REFERENCES

CaLMAN, W. T. 1907 “On New or Rare Crustacea of the Order Cumacea from

the Collection of the Copenhagen Museum, pt. i. The Families Bodo-

triidae, Vauntompsoniidae, and Leuconidae.” Trans. Zool. Soc., 18,

1-58, pl. i-ix

Hace, Herserr M. 1944 “The Family Bodotriidae.” Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust.,

63, 225-285, fig. 1-38

Hansen, H. J. 1920 Danish Ingolf-Exped., 3, pt. vi, Crustacea Malacostraca,

iv; 6, The Order Cumacea, 1-74, pl. i-iv

Kroyer, H. 1846 Naturhist. Tidsskrift., ser. 2, 2, (2)

Sars, G. O. 1899-1900 Crust. Norway, 3, Cumacea, 1-115, pl. i-bxxii

Srepstnc, T. R. R. 1912 “The Sympoda” (pt. vi of S.A. Crustacea for the

Marine Investigations in South Africa). Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 10, 129-

176, pl. i-xvi

Sreparnc, T. R. R. 1913 Cumacea (Sympoda). Das Tierreich, Lief. xxxix, 1-

210, fig. 1-137

Zimmer, Cart 1908 “Die Cumaceen der “Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition’.”

Wiss. Ergebn. D. Tiefsee-Exp. “Valdivia,” 8, 157-196, pl. xxxvi-xlvi

ACARINA OF AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA THE FAMILY

LEEUWENHOEKIDAE

BY H. WOMERSLEY, ENTOMOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

(READ 10 MAY 1945)

Summary

In 1944 (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 102) the present writer erected the subfamily

Leeuwenhoekiinae for the larval genus Leewenhoekia Ouds. 1911, on the discovery of a true

stigmal opening situated on each side between coxae I and the gnathosoma, from which tracheal

tubes ramify through the body. In this feature the species of Leewenhoekia s.1. differ from the other

genera of the Trombiculinae.

ACARINA OF AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA

THE FAMILY LEEUWENHOEKIIDAE

By H. Womerstey, Entomologist, South Australian Museum

[Read 10 May 1945]

In 1944 (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 102) the present writer erected

the subfamily Leeuwenhoekiinae for the larval genus Leeuwenhockia Ouds. 1911,

on the discovery of a true stigmal opening situated on each side between coxae I

and the gnathosoma, from which tracheal tubes ramify through the body. In this

feature the species of Leeuwenhoekia s.l. differ from the other genera of the

Trombiculinae.

I am now convinced that such a fundamental character justifies raising the

group to familial rank, and in this paper propose the family Leeuwenhoekiidae.

I am more disposed to do this as Ewing recently (1944 Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash..

57, 101-104) raised the Trombiculinae to Trombiculidae.

In 1944 (loc. cit.) it was suggested that the allied genus Hannemannia Ouds.

might also be found to possess similar true stigmal organs, but as that genus

has not yet been found to be represented in Australia, I had not seen any species.

Through the kindness of Sq./Ldr. C. D. Radford, however, I have recently been

privileged to study a mount of Hannemannia ochratoma Radford from a pika

from Rassis Hole, Montana, U.S.A., and can now affirm that this genus, which in

the larvae is closely related to Leeuwenhoekia, also possesses a true stigma on each

side between the gnathosoma and coxae I.

In the Journal of Parasitology, 1942, 28, Ewing subdivided the genus

Leeuwenhoekia Ouds., retaining Leeuwenhoekia s. str. only for the genotype,

verdumi Ouds. 1910. The remaining known species he placed in two new genera

Comatacarus and Acomatacarus.

Leeuwenhoekia s. str. was diagnosed as having the dorsal setae relatively

few and arising from tubercles, the postero-lateral scutal setae differing from the

others in being distally thickened or clavate, and the chelicerae serrated. The

other two genera have more dorsal setae but not set on tubercles, and the postero-

lateral scutal setae similar to the others. In Comatacarus the chelicerae possess

only a single dorsal and a single ventral tooth; in Acomatacarus the chelicerae

are serrated. In the last genus Ewing placed the Australian species L. austra-

liensis Hirst and two other species.

In the same paper Ewing also agreed that the peculiar quill infesting genus

Apolonia Torres and Braga 1939, as the authors suggested, was closely related

to Leeuwenhoekia.

Hitherto the above genera only have been known, and these only from the

larvae. Recently, however, Major G. M. Kohls of the American Serub-Typhus

Commission, has been successful in rearing fully engorged larvae of two species

of Acomatacarus to the nymphal stage, while Lt.-Col. C. B. Philip has reared

the nymph of a third species. Three species, previously referred to the Micro-

trombiinae, and known only from the adults, also agree with these nymphs, and

are placed here in Acomatacarus.

For the readiness with which the above colleagues have entrusted their

material to the writer for taxonomic study I tender my grateful appreciation.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

Family Leeuwenhoekiidae nov.

= Leeuwenhoekiinae Womersley 1944, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 102.

Diagnosis of Larvae— Typical Trombidiid larvae, with pseudostigma

(urstigma) between coxae I and II, and on each side between gnathosoma and

coxae I a true stigmal opening, from the atrium of which tracheal tubes traverse

the body. With a single dorsal scute furnished with 2 antero-median, 2 antero-

lateral and 2 postero-lateral setae (absent in Apolonia), as well as a pair of fila-

mentous sensillae; anteriorly the scutum with or without a median tongue-like

process. All tarsi with similar paired claws and median longer claw-like

empodium.

Diagnosis of Nymphs—Typical Trombidiid facies, rather elongate, widest

across the shoulders and distinctly narrowing behind but without the characteris-

tic medial constriction of the Trombiculidae. Eyes present or absent, if present

then 2-2, sessile and away from crista. Crista elongate, linear, with sub-

posterior sensillary area furnished with two long filamentous sensillae; anteriorly

the crista is expanded into a characteristic rounded or arrow-head-shaped nasus

carrying two long, normally ciliated setae which are probably homologous with

the antero-median scutal setae of the larvae. Palpi rather slender, tibia

with strong apical claw, no accessory claw, but several strong spines instead,

without pectines. Chelicerae finely serrated on inner edge. Legs long and

slender, I and IV longer than body. Dorsal setae varied. Genital organs with

two pairs of discs.

Diagnosis of Adults—As in nymphs but of larger size and genitalia with

3 pairs of discs, except in Neotrombidium which has only 2 pairs of elongate

oval discs.

Within this family would also appear to belong the genus Neotrombidium

Leonardi 1901, which was included in the subfamily Microtrombidiinae by Sig

Thor 1935 and Womersley 1937. It only differs from the other adult genus

known, Acomatacarus, in that the nasus is more or less rounded and not arrow-

head-like.

Key To tHE LARVAL GENERA OF LEEUWENHOEKIIDAE

1 Dorsal scutum without anterior median process. Both AL and PL scutal

setae present. Hannemannia Ouds. 1911

type hylodeus Ouds, 1916

Dorsal scutum with an anterior or median tongue-like process. 2

2 PL scutal setae wanting. Apolonia Torres & Braga 1939

type tigipioensis Torr. & Braga 1939

PL scutal setae present. 3

3 PL scutal setae distally thickened and differing from AL. Dorsal setae relatively

fewer and arising from tubercles. Chelicerae with a row of blunt teeth.

Leeuwenhoekia Ouds. 1911

s. str. Ewing 1942

type verduni Ouds. 1910

PL and AL scutal setae similar and not thickened distally. Dorsal setae more

numerous and not on tubercles, 4

4 Chelicerae with only a single dorsal and a single ventral tooth, and not obliquely

flattened distally. Comatacarus Ewing 1942

type americanus Ewing 1942

Chelicerae with a row of teeth on upper margin. Acomatacarus Ewing 1942

type arizonensis Ewing 1942

Key To tHE KNownN NyYMPHAL AND ADULT GENERA OF LEEUWENHOERKIIDAE

1 Anterior nasal expansion of crista arrow-head shaped. Eyes present or absent.

Dorsal setae varied. Acomatacarus Ewing 1942

Anterior nasal expansion of crista more or less rounded. Eyes present. Dorsal

setae trifurcate. Neotrombidim Leonardi 1901

Genus Acomatacarus Ewing 1942

Jour. Parasitology 1942, 28, 490 (Genotype A. arizonensis Ewing 1942),

In this genus, as defined by Ewing, will come all the larval species previously

described from Australia and New Guinea; australiensis Hirst, southcotts Wom.,

mecullochi Wom., adelaideae Wom., hirsti Wom., and nova-guinea Wom., as well

as the new species, longipes, athertonensis, barrinensis and echidnus, described

herewith.

Of the above species nymphs of both longipes and nova-guinea have been

reared by Major G. M. Kohls, and more recently Lt.-Col. C. B. Philip has reared

nymphs from larvae, from Hollandia, Dutch New Guinea, which I have identified

as. australiensis Hirst.

As a result of these rearings the genus Acomatacarus and family Leeuwen-

hoekiidae can be defined as above, and several Australian Trombidiids previously

referred to other genera must now be placed in Acomatacarus. These species are

Rhyncholophus attolus Banks 1916, R. retentus Banks 1916, both considered

(1934) as Microtrombidium, and Dromeothrombium dromus Wom. 1939, the

last being now shown to be really two species.

The taxonomy of at least this genus of the Leeuwenhoekiidae is particularly

difficult in the larval stage, such specific characters as exist being found in the

slight differences in the number of dorsal setae, and in the Standard Data of the

dorsal scutum. From those few species as yet known from the nymphal and

adult stages, however, the specific differences are more manifest in the form and

dimensions of the dorsal body setae.

Both these features are in contrast to what is found in the Trombiculidae,

where better defined specific characters are to be found in the larvae than in the

nymphs and adults.

ACOMATACARUS AUSTRALIENSIS (Hirst 1925)

Leeuwenhockia australiensis Hirst 1925, Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. and Hyg.

nec Womersley 1934, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, (2), 217; Gunther 1939, Proc.

Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1, 2), 95; Womersley and Heaslip 1943, Trans. Roy.

Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 141 (in part); Womersley 1944, Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 68, (1), 104.

Fig. 1 A-E, 5-C

Description of Nymph—Propodosoma somewhat triangular; opisthosoma

elongate, rounded posteriorly. Colour in life creamy white. Length 0°6 mm.,

width 0-3 mm. Legs long and slender, I and IV much longer than body, I 975n,

If ?, III ?, IV 1,275p, II and III missing from specimen; tarsus I elongate and

almost parallel-sided, 300% long by 75» high, metatarsus I 2254 long. Eyes

absent. Crista elongate, linear (cf., fig. 1A), 216m long, with a large subposterior

sensillary area with 2 fine filamentous sensillae apparently nude and with their

bases ca. 40» apart; anteriorly with a large triangular arrow-head-shaped nasus

carrying anteriorly a pair of ciliated setae, probably homologous with the AM

setae of the larval scutum. Palpi rather long and slender, as figured; tibia with

long apical claw, no accessory claw or pectines, but with 3 or 4 thick spines at

base of claw; tarsus elongate, slightly over-reaching tip of claw. Chelicerae with

finely serrated inner edge. Dorsal setae hardly of two distinct sizes, but varying

from 254 to 40 in length, with very long setules, more numerous and shorter

on one side, sparser (only 2-4) on the other where one setule is fully half the

length of the whole seta (cf., fig. 1D, E).

Loc.—A single nymph bred from larvae identified by the writer as A. aus-

traliensts (Hirst) from Hollandia, Dutch New Guinea, 1944 (C. B. Philip),

Remarks—I am indebted to Lt.-Col. C. B. Philip of the U.S.A. Scrub Typhus

Commission for the above specimen, which he succeeded in rearing. He also

furnished specimens of the larvae from which the nymphal stage was reached.

Although at times the larvae of this species are common and a source of

annoyance to residents of the suburbs of Sydney, a visit paid to the localities in

October 1944 by the writer failed to produce either larvae or any of the later

stages.

The separation of the nymph from those of other species may be made by the

key on p. 110.

Fig. 1 Acomatacarus australiensis (Hirst). Nymph. A, crista; B, palp; C, front

tarsus and metatarsus (x200); D, dorsal setae from propodosoma (x 860):

E, dorsal setae from end of opisthosoma (x 860).

ACOMATACARUS NOVA-GUINEA (Wom. 1944)

Leeuwenhoekia nova-guinea Wom. 1944, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 102.

Fig. 2 A-F

Description of Nymph—Propodosoma somewhat triangular; opisthosoma

elongate, rounded posteriorly. Colour in life reddish, Length 0°825 mm., width

0-525 mm. Legs long and slender, I and IV much longer than body, I 1,200p,

II 675p, III 750n, TV 1,200n; tarsus I elongate and almost parallel-sided, 310.

long by 82» high, metatarsus I 218% long. Eyes absent. Crista elongate, linear

(cf., fig. 2B), 2544 long, with a large subposterior sensillary area with two fine,

ca. 904 long, filamentous sensillae with their bases 40m apart; anteriorly with a

large broad arrow-head-shaped area forming a distinct nasus and carrying

anteriorly a pair of strong, thickly but shortly ciliated setae, 61 long, probably

homologous with the AM setae of the larval scutum. Palpi long and slender

100

(cf., fig. 2D), tibia with long apical claw, no accessory claw or pectines, but with

2 or 3 thick spines at base of claw; tarsus rather stumpy, not quite reaching tip of

claw. Chelicerae as figured (fig. 2C), with the inner edge finely serrate. Dorsal

Fig. 2 Acomatacarus nova-guinea (Wom.). Nymph. A, entire dorsal view;

B, crista (x 375); C, chela; D, palp; E, front tarsus and metatarsus (x 200);

F, dorsal seta (x 860).

setae (fig. 2F) uniform in length, 25p long, slightly curved, thick and tapering

with few but basally long setules, and each seta arising from a large rounded

platelet.

101

Loc.—The above is described from two nymphs reared by Maj. G. M. Kohls

from engorged larvae identified as L. (Acomatacarus) nova-guinea Wom. from

New Guinea, April 1944.

Walch (Goenesk. Tijdschr. v. Ned. Indie, 67, (6), 922), 1927, recorded

some larval Leeuwenhoekia from rats in the neighbourhood of Makassar, Celebes

as L. australiensis Hirst.

From his data and figures the following Standard Data in microns can be

derived: PW 86, SB 63, AL 53, PL 67, Sens 71.

In addition the DS number 64 and are ca. 48% long and PW/SD = 1-36.

From these data, the Celebes material agrees more with A. nova-guinea than with

the Australian species, and should probably be thus assigned.

Acomatacarus longipes n. sp.

Fig. 3A-F, 4A-E

Description of Larvae—Fig. 3 A-F. Unfed. Shape subrotund, length 450p,

width 375p. Dorsal scutum typical of the genus, pentagonal, with the follow-

ing Standard Data in microns: AW 90, PW 94, SB 32, ASB 40, PSB 29, SD 69,

A-P 32, AM 40, AL 65, PL 68, Sens 60 ciliated on distal half. Anterior median

scutal process 21 long by 1lp wide; AM setae 18 apart at bases and 14 behind

anterior margin. Scutal and dorsal setae shortly ciliated and blunt tipped.

Dorsal setae 56-58 in number arranged 2.10.10.8.10.10(12).6. Palpi normal, with

bifurcate tibial claw. Chelicerae dorsally serrate as in the genus. Eyes 2-4 2,

about 3 diams. from postero-lateral corners of scutum, Legs normal, I 450» long,

II 405p, III 4504; coxae III separated from II. Coxae I with 2 setae, II and

III with one seta; no setae between coxae I, a pair between coxae III, and there-

after ca. 64 setae, beginning with a row of 12. Claws and tarsi normal. Leg IIT

with a pair of long whip-like setae on tibiae and one on tarsus. True stigma on

each side between coxae I and gnathosoma.

Description of Nymph—Fig. 4 A-E. Shape as described for A. nova-guinea.

Length to 1:125 mm., width to 0°75 mm. across shoulders. Colour in life red.

Crista elongate, linear, 405. long, with rounded subposterior sensillary area with

two long filamentous nude sensillae ca, 110” long and their bases 47» apart;

anterior end of crista expanded into an arrow-head-shaped enlargement with a

pair of long ciliated setae anteriorly. Palpi normal, fairly slender, as in nove-

guinea, with 3-4 strong spines at base of claw. Chelicerae with finely serrate

inner edge. Eyes absent. Legs very long and slender, I and IV longer than

body, I 2,025, II 1,350, III 1,470n, [V 2,1754; tarsus and metatarsus I long

and slender, tarsus I 450% long by 120» high, metatarsus 450n long, Claws

normal, Dorsal setae numerous and uniform, decumbent, to 30, long, rather

broad basally and tapering to a point with long ciliations (cf. fig. 4D). On the

legs the setae are similar, but are interspersed with some short, curved simple

setae (cf. fig. 4E).

Loc.—-The type and | paratype and 1 unfed and 3 engorged larvae from the

the same colony from which the nymphs were reared were sent to me by Maj.

G. M. Kohls and were found on Podargus sp. from the Dobodura area of New

Guinea, 25 July 1940 (G. M. K., 532).

Two other nymphs and several larvae, both unfed and fully engorged from

a colony on honey-eaters, from the same locality, 24 May 1944 (G. M. K. 348

and 350) are also this species.

Remarks. Larva—Fig. 3 A-F. Very close to adelaideae Wom. 1944 in the

number of dorsal setae, but differs therefrom in the wider AW and in the longer

AL and PL.

102

| : (WN AR

VN A

dorsal vie

Fig. 3 Acomatacarus longipes n.sp. Larva. A, dorsal v

, palp; E, dorsal scutum (x 500); F, hind tarsus and m

103

The Standard Data in microns derived from the type, 1 paratype larva, and

5 larvae from the colony from a honey-eater are as follows :—

Standard Theoretical (2) Observed () Coeff. of

Mean Deviations ange Range Variation

AW 86°641:17 3°1140°83 -77:3~ 95-9 83-0— 92:0 3-6

PW 96°7 40°85 2:25+0°60 90-0-103-4 93-0-101-:0 2:3

SB 30°440°40 1:0540°28 27-3— 33:5 29:0~ 32:0 3-4

SD 72°7 0°98 2°6040°69 64:9— 80:5 68:0— 77:0 3:6

A-P 31°6+0°40 1°054+0°28 28-5- 34:7 29:0— 32-0 3:3

AM 43-94+0°55 1:-4640°39 39°5- 48:3 43-0-— 47:0 3°3

AL 65:7 40°90 2°3740°63 58:6- 72°8 61:0~ 68:0 3°6

PL 70°640°66 1-7640°47 65°3— 75:9 68:0— 72:0 2:5

Sens. - - 64:440°70 1-8440-49 58:9- 69-9 62:0— 68:0 2:8

Fig. 4 Acomatacarus longipes n.sp. Nymph. A, crista (x 375): B, palp; C,

front tarsus and metatarsus (x 125); D, dorsal setae (x 860); E, leg setae (x 860).

Nymph-—Differs from other species in the form of the dorsal setae and in

the relative dimensions of the front tarsi and metatarsi. In the type, one front

metatarsus is slightly shorter than the other, and slightly shorter than the tarsus.

In the paratype the front tarsi and metatarsi are the same on both legs. Similarly

in the two specimens from honey-eaters the front metatarsi are slightly shorter

than the tarsi and in one specimen both segments are much shorter than in the

other, which latter agrees with the type. In the second specimen the front tarsi

measure 330s long by 604 high, and the metatarsi 270% long, but it agrees per-

fectly in the dorsal setae.

©) In mounts of Trombiculidae and Leeuwenhoekiidae excessive compression

of the normally convex larval scutum will tend to make the higher values of the Standard

Data unreliable, and this should be kept in mind when considering the theoretical and

observed ranges.

104

Acomatacarus athertonensis n. sp.

Fig. 5 A-B

Description—Larvae. Length 270p, width 2054. Shape broadly oval. Dorsal

scutum typical of the genus, pentagonal, with the following Standard Data in

microns for 16 specimens.

A-P

Sens.

Fig. 5 Larvae A-B: Acomatacarus athertonensis n. sp.

Mean

66°1+0°35

Standard Theoretical

Deviations Range

1-394+0°24 61:9 —70°3

1-67+0:29 72:9 —82-9

06640711 22°75—-26°75

2°8240°49 53-85-70°75

No variation recorded

1:-4540-25 36:2 —44-0

1°5740°28 39°4 —48°8

1-3540°24 55:9 —64-0

No variation recorded

Observed

Range

65°0—-68°0

G |

Coeff, of

Variation

A, dorsal scutum (x 500),

B, gnathosomal seta (x 860); C, A. australiensis (Hirst), gnathosomal seta (x 860),

D-E, A. echidnus n.sp.: D, dorsal scutum (x 500); E, gnathosomal seta (x 860).

F-G, A. barrinensis n.sp.: F, dorsal scutum (x 500); G, gnathosomal seta (x 860).

Anterior median scutal process 21p long by 9 wide.

Qp apart and situated 11 behind anterior scutal margin. Scutal and dorsal setae

strongly ciliated and rather blunt at tip. Eyes 2-+ 2, about 1 diam. from postero-

AM with their bases

105

lateral corners of scutum. Dorsal setae difficult to count, but ca. 66 arranged

ca. 2.8(9).10.12.10.8.6.2. Ventrally without setae between coxae I, a pair between

coxae III, and then ca. 8.10.14.10.6.4 = 52, the latter setae about half the length

of the dorsal setae. Coxae I with 2, II and III with one seta. The pair of setae

on the base of gnathosoma to 25y, with 5 long branches. Palpi normal; femur,

genu and tibia with long lightly ciliated seta, claw bifurcate, the outer fork reach-

ing half-way to tip of inner fork, tarsus short and stumpy, normal as regards

setae, Chelicerae dorsally with 3 or 4 teeth. Legs normal, tibia and tarsus II

with a pair and a single whip-like seta as in other species; claws two, with a

longer more slender claw-like empodium. Both true and pseudostigmal openings

present.

Loc—From fence posts, etc. Wongabel, Atherton Tableland, Queensland,

Oct. 1944 (R. N. McCulloch). Described from 16 syn-types.

Remarks—This species is very close to australiensis Hirst in the number

and arrangement of the dorsal and ventral setae and cannot be separated there-

from on these features. The Standard Data of the dorsal scutum are consistently

lower, the values for AW, PW, SB, SD, A-P, PL and Sens. all being significantly

different ; the Difference of Means between the population of 16 specimens of

athertonensis and the 13 specimens of australiensis from Chatswood, New South

Wales (reported 1944), give the values of d/o, as follows AW 11°8, PW 11:9,

SB 8-0, SD 7-6, A-P 4:2, AM 0°5, AL 2:25, PL 5:4, Sens. 20°8.

Besides these differences the gnathosomal setae are slightly longer, but with

only 5 branches, in athertonensis (cf. fig. 5B) than in australiensis which has

many and shorter branches (cf. fig. 5 C).

The habits of these larvae are remarkable. Major McCulloch reports that

they frequent fence posts and the connecting wires in large numbers, and that

they are also very resistent to poisons.

Acomatacarus echidnus n. sp.

Fig. 5 D-E

Description—Larva. Shape elongate oval. Length 218», width 162z.

Scutum normal for the genus with the following Standard Data, derived from

7 specimens in microns.

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviations Range Range Variation

AW 57°7+0°87 2°31 40°62 50-8-646 54-0-—61:0

PW 69-040°38 1:0 40:27 66°0-72:0 68:0—70-0 1-45

SB 22°1+40°55 1:464+9°39 17:7-26°5 =21:0—25-0 675

SD 55°640°83 2°1940°58 49-0-62°2 54-0-59-0 3°9

A-P 25-640°53 1:-40+0°-37 21°4—-29°8 25:0~29-0 5°5

AM 31°640°36 0°80+0°25 29°2—34:0 30°0—32-0 2°5

AL 38:0 40°82 2°0 40°60 32:0-49'0 36°0-—40-0 5:2

PL 48°8+0°68 1:53+0°48 44-2~53'4 47-0-—50°0 3:2

Sens 54:0 No variation recorded

Dorsal setae ca. 66 and arranged 2.8.8.8.10.10.10.6.4, 40-45, long, ciliated and

not very tapering; ventral setae, excluding the pair between coxae HII ca. 42,

arranged 10.8.12.8.4 and ca, 20 long, rather more slender than dorsal setae.

Anterior median scutal process 18» long by 71 wide. AM setae 7p apart at bases

and 9, behind anterior scutal margin. Chelicerae dorsally serrate. Palpi normal

as in other species, with bifurcate tibial claw, setae on femur, genu and tibia

slender and ciliated. Eyes 2-+ 2, about 1 diam. from postero-lateral corners of

scutum. Legs I 300p, II 252» and III 306» long, normal; tibia II] with 2 long

flagellate simple setae, tarsus II] with 1 such. Coxae I with 2 setae, I] and Ii

with 1 seta. Ventrally gnathosoma with a pair of long, 20, setae, as in fig. 5 E.

106

Loc.—Described from 7 syn-types taken from an echidna, on the Atherton

Tableland, Queensland, 11 June 1944 (Lt.-Col. J. M. Bonin).

Remarks—In the ratio of PW/SD = 1-24, this species will come very close

to hirsti Wom. 1944, but differs greatly in the number of dorsal setae and in the

Standard Data, the values of which are significantly lower.

Acomatacarus barrinensis n. sp.

Fig, 5 F-G

Description — Larva, Shape elongate oval. Length 252y, width 180y.

Scutum normal for the genus with the following Standard Data in microns

derived from 6 specimens.

Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of

Mean Deviations ange Range Variation

AW 73°0+0°57 1°41 +0°32 68°8—-77°2 72:0—75°0 1-95

PW 87-°2+1-01 2°48+40°71 79°7-94°7 84-0 —90-0 2°8

SB 28°5+0°45 1-:1240°32 25°5—-31°8 27-0—30-0 4-0

SD 64°7 +0°96 2°364+0°68 57°7-71°7 63-0—65-0 37

A-P 30°2 40°54 1°3440°39 26°2—34:2 29-:0—32-0 4:4

AM - - 40:0 No-variation recorded

AL - - 44:°340°77 1°89 40°54 38°7-49°9 43:0-—47-0 4:3

PL - - 61:0 No variation recorded

sens, - - Missing in all specimens

Dorsal setae ca. 64 arranged 2.10,8.6.10.10.8.6.4, from 40-50, long, ciliated,

not much tapering, scapula setae 70~ long; ventral setae, excluding the pair

between coxae III, ca. 48, rather shorter and thinner than dorsal setae. Ratio

PW/SD = 1:34. Anterior median scutal process 18» long, by ca. 82 wide. AM

setae situated 14y behind anterior scutal margin and with their bases Il apart.

Eyes 2+ 2, about 1 diam. from postero-lateral scutal corner. Palpi and chelae

as In preceding species. Legs I 306» long, II 288, [II 306u. Claws and setae

normal, tibia ITI with 2 and tarsus with 1 long flagellate seta. Coxae I with 2,

if and II with 1 seta. Gnathosomal setae as figured (fig. 5G).

Loc.—Described from five syn-types collected free, from Lake Barrine,

Queensland, 16 Nov. 1943 (R. V. S.), and a single specimen from man, Atherton

Tableland, Queensland, 8 March 1944 (R. V.S.).

Remarks—-This species is very close to athertonensis in the number of dorsal

setae, ca. 64 in each. It differs, however, in the Standard Data, the values for

AW, PW and SB being very significantly different.

The following species are only known from the adult and are placed in this

family on the characteristic structure of the crista. They are also here referred

to the genus Acomatacarus, but with a certain amount of reservation until such

times as other known larval genera have been reared through to the nymph.

ACOMATACARUS RETENTUS (Banks)

Rhyncholophus retentus Banks 1916, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 40, 225, pl. xxii,

fig. 2 and 3

Microtrombidium (Enemothrombium) retentus Wom. 1934, Rec. S. Aust. Mus.,

5, (2), 193, fig. 34-37,

Calothrombium retentus Wom. 1937, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 6, (1), 85.

Fig. 6 A-D

A careful re-examination of the syn-type material of this species in the South

Australian Museum now shows clearly that it is congeneric with the nymphs of

the previous species. The 3 syn-types are all adults, one at least possibly a male.

The re-description is as follows :—

107

Re-description—Colour in life Pred. Shape apparently much as in previous

species. Length 1--1:5 mm. (after Banks), width ca. 0°8-1'0 mm. Legs I 1,530y,

II 1,125, II] ?, IV ca. 1,800; tarsus I elongate, 3602 long by 110 high, meta-

tarsus I 330h long. Crista elongate with a subposterior sensillary area, with

paired filamentous, apparently nude, sensillae 1502 long, with their bases 43pn

apart; from the sensillary area the crista gradually tapers towards the anterior

end, where it expands into an arrow-head-like area forming a nasus and carrying

two thickly ciliated setae. Eyes present, 2-+-2, small, on distinct ocular shields,

and lying in a line midway between anterior area and sensillary area of the crista.

—

r—-~

Fig. 6 Acomatacarus retentus (Banks). Adult. A, crista and eyes (x 200):

B, palp; C, front tarsus and metatarsus (x125); D, dorsal setae (860).

Palpi rather slender, tibia with strong apical claw, no accessory claw or pectines

(the spines shown in Banks’ figure are the normal setae and not a pectine), with

4 strong spines at base of claw (cf. fig. 6B). Chelae with finely serrate, inner

edge. Dorsal setae of two sizes, both large (to 56.) and small (to 20), thick

and strongly setulose, often appearing clavate due to their being bi-, tri- or

quadrifurcate (cf. fig. 6D).

Loc.—Only known from the original material from Victoria, and taken at

Lal Lal with the ant, Polyrachis hexacantha, and at Sea Lake and Ocean Grove

with Iridomyrmex nitidus.

108

ACOMATACARUS ATTOLUS (Banks)

Rhyncholophus attolus Banks 1916, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 40, 225, pl. xxiii.

fig. 6

Microtrombidium attolus Wom. 1934, Rec. S.A. Mus., 5, (2), 189, fig. 24-27.

Microtrombidium (Dromeothrombium) attolus Wom. 1937, Rec. S.A. Mus., 6,

(1), 86; ibid, 7, (2), 176. Fig. 7A-D

This species is re-described from the syn-type material.

Re-description—Length 1-2 mm. (after Banks). Eyes according to Banks

one on each side, but are not now visible in the preparations of syn-types. If

present, then they are probably two small ones on each side, as in retentus.

POG ~ me me ome

Fig. 7 A-D, Acomatacarus attolus (Banks). Adult. A, crista (x 200); B, palp;

C, front tarsus and metatarsus (x 200); D, dorsal setae (x 860). E-H, A. patrius

nsp.: E, crista (x 200); F, palpal tibia; G, front tarsus and metatarsus (x 200);

H, dorsal seta (x 860).

109

Crista as in fig. 7 A, ca. 300 long with SB 36, apart; otherwise as in the genus.

Legs I ca. 1,500» long, II 1,125p, IIL 1,035p, [V 1,980; tarsus I almost as long

as metatarsus, 300» long by 105y high, metatarsus 300z long. Palpi slender as in

fig. 7B. Dorsal setae uniform, fairly thick and not tapering, with long setules,

not furcate as in retentus, to 302 long, tending to be more slender and a little

longer laterally, posteriorly and near suture and crista (fig. 7D).

Loc.—Only known from the original material from Sydney, New South

Wales, and taken with the ant Ponera lutea,

Acomatacarus patrius n. sp.

= Dromeothrombium dromus Wom. 1939, Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 51

(in part). Fig. 7 E-H

Description—-Adult. Colour in life white, Shape as in other species of the

genus. Length 1-7 mm., width 1-35 mm. Legs I 1,770y, II 1,125p, TIT 1,275p,

IV 1,900n; tarsus I elongate, distinctly shorter than metatarsus, 353 long by

‘ ‘

Fig. 8 Acomatacarus dromus (Wom.). Adult. A, crista (x 200); B, palpal tibia;

C, front tarsus and metatarsus (x 125); D, dorsal setae (x 860).

126p high and gradually narrowing apically, metatarsus 390p long. Crista linear,

340, long, with subposterior sensillary area, with two long filamentous sensillae,

their bases 43 apart; anterior end expanded into a broad arrow-head-like area

with the usual two ciliated setae apically. Chelae with finely serrate inner edge.

110

Palpi elongate, tibia with strong apical claw and 4 straight stout spines at base

of claw; tarsus elongate, over-reaching tip of claw. Eyes absent. Dorsal setae

uniform, to 20u, tapering posteriorly and near suture and crista.

Loc.—Type. One specimen from under a stone, Murray Bridge, S$. Aust.,

in mallee country, 25 May 1938 (R. V. S.). Two other adults associated with

ants, Burra, S. Aust., 4 Aug. 1940 (J. S. W.).

Remarks—This species is very close to attolus Banks, and my material has

been so labelled for some time. It differs, however, in the ratio of length of front

tarsus to metatarsus and in the form of the dorsal setae.

ACOMATACARUS DROMUS (Wom, 1939)

Dromeothrombium dromus Wom. 1939, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (2), 151,

E-G (in part). Fig. 8 A-D

Re-description—Adult. Length 2°4 mm., width 1-3 mm. Colour in life

white. Legs I and IV very long, IV much longer than body, I 2,400 (not

3°32 mm. as reported in 1939 in error), IT 1,000n, III 1,800g, IV 2,700z, tarsus I

elongate 555 long by 135p high, metatarsus 435 long. Eyes absent. Crista as

in fig. 8A, 430% long with long, filamentous sensillae with bases 54 apart on a

subposterior sensillary area; anterior end expanded to an arrow-head-like shape,

with 2 ciliated setae. Chelae with serrated inner edge. Palpi slender, tibia as in

fig. 8B with 4 spines at the base of claw, tarsus stout and over-reaching tip of

claw. Dorsal setae long, slender, tapering with rather short adpressed setules, of

two lengths 40-50u and to 90» (fig. 8D).

Loc.—The type and 4 paratypes from Long Gully, S. Aust., 18 Aug, 1938,

associated with ants (H. W.).

Remarks-—-The previous description was drawn up from a complex of

species and should be disregarded. This species is abundantly distinct in the

dorsal setae.

Key to tHe Nympus anp Aputts or Acomatacarus

1 Eyes present, two or ? one on each side. 2

Eyes absent. ’ 3

2 Dorsal setae of two sizes, to 204 and to 56y, thick with long outstanding setules,

often bi-, tri- or quadrifurcate and appearing clavate. Eyes 2+2, small, on

ocular shields. A. retentus (Banks 1916)

Dorsal setae uniform, to 304, thick and not tapering distally, with fairly long

setules. Front tarsus and metatarsus equal in length. Eyes ? 1+1,

A. attolus (Banks 1916)

3 Dorsal setae of two lengths, to 45-50, and to 90y, long and slender, tapering,

with rather short adpressed setules. Front tarsus longer than metatarsus.

A. dromus (Wom. 1939, in part)

Dorsal setae more or less uniform, much shorter. 4

4 Dorsal setae on small platelets, thick, curved, tapering with few setules. Front

tarsus longer than metatarsus. A. nova-guinea (Wom. 1944)

Dorsal setae not on platelets. 5

5 Front tarsus shorter than metatarsus. Dorsal setae slender, tapering, with long

setules, to 20, long (cf. fig. 7 H). A. patrius n. sp.

Front tarsus and metatarsus equal. Dorsal setae to 304 long, bushy and decum-

bent with finer ciliations (cf. fig. 4D). A. longipes n. sp.

Front tarsus longer than metatarsus. Dorsal setae 25-40, long, with very long

outstanding setules (cf. fig. 1D). A. australiensis (Hirst 1925)

lil

Key To THE AUSTRALIAN AND NEw GUINEA LARVAL SPECIES OF

Acomatacarus Ewing

1 Tibiae and tarsi of leg II] with some long simple whip-like setae. 2

No such long whip-like setae on tibiae and tarsi of leg ITI. Scutum small and

relatively shallow PW/SD=1-74. AW 62-1544-45, PW _ 82-445:3, SB

28:643:0, SD 49-144-0, A-P 27-643°9, AM 20-941-1, AL 29-94.3-3, PL

40-8 44-0, Sens. 64- 344-4. DS relatively short, straight and blunt at apex, 42 in

number. A. southcotti (Wom. 1944)

2 Scutum relatively shallow, PW/SD greater than 1-3. 3

Scutum relatively deeper, PW/SD smaller than 1-3. 7

3 DS between 50 and 60 in number. 4

DS between 60 and 80 in number. 5

4 DS 52-54. PW/SD=1-335, AW 76-4 st8 PW 92-443-6, SB 28-844:4,

SD 69-241:2, A-P 32-841-2, AM 41-244 3 AL 37-8459, PL 59-$47-7

Sens, 63-U+45-2. A. adelaideae (Wom, 1944)

DS 56-58. PW/SD 1:33, AW 86-649-3, PW 96-7467, SB 30-443-1,

SD 72:747-8, A-P 31-643+1, AM 459 44-3, AL 65+7 47-1, PL 70-6 45-3,

Sens. 64°44.5-5. A. longipes n.sp-

5 DS 76. PW/SD=1-32. AW 77-3414-2, PW 93-4414:3, SB 30-2461,

SD 70-8410-5, A-P 31-945-3,AM 44-949-8 AL 49-049-6, PL 03- 648-2,

Sens. 64- U48- +3. A, ausiraliensis (Hirst 1925)

DS 62-64. 6

6 DS 62. PW/SD=1-32. AW 85: aie. PW 98:4412-3, SB 27-94 6-8,

SD 73-0415-6, A-P 34-2410-4,AM 41°548-9, AL 62-1417-5, PL 72-8 47-7,

Sens. 58-7 + 12-6. A. nova-guinea (Wom. 1944)

DS 64. PW/SD=1-34. AW 73-044-2, PW 87-247:4, SB 28:543:3,

SD 64-747-0, A-P 30-244-0, AM 40-0, AL 44:345-7, PL 61-0, Sens. 7.

A. barrinensis n. sp.

7 PW/SD 1-194, DS ca. 70. AW 64:045-2, PW 81-04+6:0, SB 25-0,

SD 71-04+8:5, 'A-P 32-54.2°6, AM 36:542°6, AL 38-046-0, PL 54-0, Sens.

44-345°7. A. mecullochi (Wom.)

PW/SD ca. 1:24 — 1-25. 8

8 DS ca. 82 in number. PW/SD 1-25. AW 79-0, PW 97-0, SB 29-0, SD 77°5,

A-P 36:0, AM 43-0, AL 43-0, PL 54-0, Sens. 72-0, A, hirsti (Wom. 1944)

DS ca. 66. 9

9 PW/SD = 1-24. AW 57-7+6-9, PW 69:04-3-0, SB 22-144-3, SD 55-646-6,

A-P 25-644-2, AM 31-642:4, AL 38-0+6-0, PL 48 B44. , Sens. 54-0.

oF echidnus n. sp.

P ,oB Ae ae SD 62-3.48-4,

“144: 7, PL 59 944-0, Sens, 50-0.

A. athertonensis n. sp.

In this key the theoretical range as expressed by Mean + 3¢ is given.

PW/SD = 1:25. AW 66:14

A-P 29-0, AM 40-644-3, AL

ball)

Genus NEoTRoMBIDIUM Leon. 1901

Leonardi, 1901 Zool. Anz., 25, 18; Berlese 1912, Redia, 8, (1), 49.

Neotrombidium was first erected by Leonardi as a subgenus of Trombidium

on the supposed absence of the crista and on the presence of a single eye on each

side. The type was Trombidium (Neotrombidium) furcigerum Leon. from

South America.

Berlese in his Monograph, 1912, showed that Leonardi was in error, in that

in furcigerum a crista and two eyes on each side were present. Berlese raised

Neotrombidium to generic rank on the following diagnosis:—“Body elongate,

abdomen with well developed shoulders. Cephalothorax small, elongate, conical,

densely setose. Crista linear, with a posterior rhombic sensillary area. Nasus

present. Eyes sessile, difficult to see. Palpi small, with a series of subapical

112

spines on the fourth segment; tarsus small, elongate, conical. Legs small and

slender, shorter than body. Dorsal setae peculiar, trifurcate, fork with short

peduncle and rami long-pointed, sub-barbate. Setae of legs simple, spiniform

and nude.”

Besides the type species Berlese also described T. (Neotrombidium)

ophtalmicum from South America. In 1928 Hirst (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (10),

1, 563-571) described Neotrombidium barringunense from Barringun, New South

Wales, and in 1936 I recorded it from South Australia.

In 1935 in his revision of the subfamilies of the Trombidiidae Sig Thor

included Neotrombidium in the Microtrombidiinae. It is now evident, however,

that in the form of the crista with the anterior end expanded into a more or less

round or conical nasus carrying two setae, the genus is closely allied to the

nymphs and adults now known to belong to the genus Acomatacarus of the

Leeuwenhoekiidae.

The Australian species is herewith re-described and details figured.

NEOTROMBIDIUM BARRINGUNENSE Hirst 1928

Hirst 1928, Ann. Mag. N. Hist., (10), 1, 561-671; Womersley 1934, Rec. S. Aust.

Mus., 5, (2), 185; idem 1936, J. Linn. Soc. Zool., 40, 107.

Fig, 9 A-E

Re-description of Type—Adult. Elongate, broadest across shoulders, then

narrowed and parallel-sided to the apex which is rounded, propodosoma small and

Fig. 9 Neotrombidium barringunense Hirst. Adult. A, crista and eyes (x 200);

B, palp, C, front tarsus and metatarsus (x200); D, dorsal seta (x 860);

E, genital opening of adult egg-bearing female.

conical-triangular. Colour in life red. Length 1°8 mm., width -9 mm. Crista

linear, 240, long, with anterior end enlarged to form a more or less rounded

nasus with two long setae; with subposterior sensillary area with two long fila-

mentous sensillae with bases 18. apart. Eyes 2-+2, on distinct shields, in

113

advance of sensillary area, and about 2 diams. therefrom, the posterior eye the

smaller. Chelicerae sickle-shaped, inner edge only indistinctly and finely serrate.

Palpi small and rather slender, tibia with strong curved apical claw, no accessory

claw or pectines, but with 2 or 3 strong spines at base of claw; tarsus elongate

and over-reaching tip of claw. Legs all shorter than body, I 930u long, II 570p,

III 660g, IV 820n; tarsus I elongate, 216y long by 72» high, metatarsus I

170 long. Dorsal setae uniform to 35 long, trifurcate, with very short peduncle,

the forks shortly and rather indistinctly barbed or ciliated. Leg setae simple.

Genital opening very elongate, 280 with only two pairs of discs, which them-

selves are elongate (cf. fig. 9 E).

Loc.—New South Wales: Barringun, June 1927 (S. Hirst), (type locality) ;

also under eucalypt bark, Bathurst, 31 May 1934 (S. L. A.). South Australia:

Menindie, 2 July 1928 (S. Hirst); Long Gully, 12 May 1934 (H. W); Belair,

Jan. 1935 CH. W.); under bark, Monarto South, April 1943 (H. W.), in num-

bers; Robe, by sweeping, July 1943 (H. W.). Queensland: Biloela, Feb. 1943

(Horn.).

Remarks—All these specimens have only two pairs of characteristically

elongate oval genital discs and might therefore have been assumed to be only in

the nymphal stage, as is the case in most of the Trombidiids. One of the speci-

mens, however, is an adult female, carrying a number of eggs. Two pairs only of

genital discs in the adult is therefore not only characteristic of this species, but

probably also of the genus. The genital opening also is extraordinarily elongate

and situated between the second coxal groups.

SUMMARY

In 1944 (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 102) the subfamily Leeuwen-

hoekiinae was erected for the genus Leeugvenhoekia Ouds., on the presence in the

larvae of a pair of true stigmata with tracheae, situated one on each side between

the gnathosoma and coxae I. Except possibly in the allied genus Hannemannia

Ouds. these true stigmata were absent from all other genera of the Trombiculinae,

but are now shown to be present in that genus.

As the nymphs of the three larval species of Leeuwenhoekia, australiensis

Hirst, nova-guinea Wom. and longipes n.sp. have now been reared, it is shown

that these also differ from the nymphs of other genera of Trombiculinae. The

nymphs are of an entirely different body shape and lack the characteristic median

constriction typical of the Trombiculids. The crista is distinct in having an

expanded arrow-head-like anterior nasus, furnished with a pair of setae homo-

logous with the antero-median setae of the larval scutum.

In addition to these nymphs, four species of adults, one new, the others

previously placed in genera of the Microtrombidiinae are, on the shape and form

of the crista, shown to be related.

On these characters therefore the Leeuwenhoekiinae is raised to Leeuwen-

hoekiidae.

Ewing’s (1944) separation of Leewwenhoekia Ouds. into three genera is

accepted and the Australian and New Guinea species now placed in Acomatacarus

Ewing.

Ten larval species, of which three are known as nymphs and four adult

species are recognised.

The genus Neotrombidium Leonardi 1901 with the Australian species

N, barringunense Hirst, with a similar form of crista is included in the Leeuwen-

hoekiidae. It differs from the only other nymphal and adult genus known,

Acomatacarus, in having two instead of three pairs of genital discs in the adult,

and these very elongate.

SOME PARASITIC NEMATODES FROM

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MARINE FISH

BY T. HARVEY JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON (READ 10 MAY 1945)

Summary

The fish hosts of most of the parasites recorded in this paper formed part of collections made on our

behalf by Messrs. H. M. Cooper, E. J. Hanka, and S. Hurcombe, the material having been obtained

from St. Vincent Gulf and Kangaroo Island. We desire to express our thanks to these collaborators,

and our indebtedness to the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide. Types of

the new species will be deposited in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

114

SOME PARASITIC NEMATODES FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN

MARINE FISH

By T. Harvey Jounston and Patricia M. Mawson

[Read 10 May 1945]

(Fig. 1-8)

The fish hosts of most of the parasites recorded in this paper formed part

of collections made on our behalf by Messrs. H. M. Cooper, E. J. Hanka, and

S. Hurcombe, the material having been obtained from St. Vincent Gulf and

Kangaroo Island. We desire to express our thanks to these collaborators, and

our indebtedness to the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of

Adelaide. Types of the new species will be deposited in the South Australian

Museum, Adelaide.

List of fish hosts and their parasites referred to in this paper :-—

Caranx Georcianus C. & V. Stomachus marinus (L.), larva, American River,

Kangaroo Island.

PaGrosomus AuRATUS Forster. Stomachus marinus (L.), larva, Glenelg and

Cape Jervis; Cucullanellus sheardi Jnstn. and Mawson, Glenelg; Echino-

cephalus uncinatus Molin, larva, Glenelg,

LATRIDOPSIS FORSTERI Casteln. Cucullanellus sheardi J. & M., Kangaroo Island.

DacTYLopHora nicricAns Richardson. Cucullanellus sheardi J. and M., Back-

stairs Passage and Rapid Bay.

PSEUDOLABRUs PSITTACULUS Richardson. Echinocephalus uncinatus Molin, larva,

Port Noarlunga.

SILLAGINODES PuNCTATUS C. & V. Echinocephalus uncinatus Molin, larva,

Glenelg.

PLATYCEPHALUS BASSENSIS C. & V. Ascarophis cooperi n.sp., Rapid Bay.

PLATYCEPHALUS FUscus C. & V. Echinocephalus uncinatus Molin, larva,

Glenelg.

CNIDOGLANIS MEGASTOMA Richardson. Cucullanellus cnidoglanis n.sp., Port

Willunga.

APTYCHOTREMA BANKsII M. & H. Proleptus trygonorrhinae J. & M., Rapid Bay.

The South Australian shovel-nosed ray was identified by Waite (1921, 27;

1923, 47) as Rhinobatus philippi Mill. & Henle, syn. R. banksii M. & H.

McCulloch (1919, 225; 1922, 10; 1934, 10) listed the species from New South

Wales as Fk. banksiz, Garman in 1913 used the name R. philippi, which was not

quoted by McCulloch or by Whitley (1934). Norman (1926, 979) allocated

R. banksii and R. bougainvillii M. & H. to Aptychotrema and reported that both

occurred in New South Wales and were frequently confused. He listed R. philippi

of Garman and of Waite as a synonym of A. banksit. McCulloch’s check-list

(1929, 22) contains the names A. bougainvillii and A. banksii, the range of the

latter including all Australian States. Whitley (1934) listed the former as the

Port Jackson species, and mentioned the chief differences between it and

A. banks. In view of the foregoing, we have used the latter name for the

southern shovel-nosed ray.

SromacHus marinus (Linn.)

We have already recorded the occurrence of this widely distributed larva in

several species of Australian fish. We reported it as Capsularia marina (1943,

22-32), but have recently (1945) indicated that Capsularia is a synonym of

Stomachus. We now record as additional hosts, Caranx georgianus from Ameri-

can River, and Pagrosomus auratus from Glenelg and Cape Jervis.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

115

Ascarophis cooperi n. sp.

(Fig. 1-3)

Four males and one female were taken from Platycephalus bassensis from

Rapid Bay. Male, 7-8 mm. long; female, 12 mm.

The two lateral labial processes at the anterior end are small, but distinct.

Vestibule -11--13 mm. long, 54 wide. Ratio of width of body at level of posterior

O°2 mm.

Fig. 1-3, Ascarophis cooperi: 1, anterior end; 2, male tail; 3, tip of longer spicule.

Fig. 4-5, Cucullanellus cnidoglenis: 4, anterior end; 5, male tail, Fig. 6-8 Cucul-

lanellus sheardi, successive stages in growth of male. Fig. 1 and 3, drawn to

same scale; 4, 6, 7 and 8 to same scale,

116

end of vestibule to length of vestibule is 1:3-1-4:2. Nerve ring a short distance

behind vestibule. Anterior part of oesophagus 1-7-2-3 times as long as vestibule;

posterior part 6-7 times as long as anterior; posterior end of oesophagus dividing

body into anterior and posterior parts in the ratio 1:3-7-5. Excretory pore at

about +13 mm. behind end of vestibule.

Caudal alae of male very narrow, with four pairs of preanal and six pairs

of postanal papillae. Two or three longitudinal rows of bosses on ventral surface

between alae. Spicules -07--09 mm., and -31--32 mm. long respectively; outer

part of longer possessing unusual form (fig. 3).

Vulva at beginning of posterior third of body, Ripe eggs 18 by 36,, thick-

shelled, with coiled larva.

These specimens are regarded as belonging to a new species, differing from

A, australis J. & M. 1944 (also from a South Australian telost) in the position of

the vulva, the size and shape of the eggs, the form of the longer spicule and the

length of the oesophagus. The species closely resembles A. nototheniae J. & M.

1945, but differs in the form of the longer spicule and the size of the eggs. It is

easily distinguished from A. upeneichthys J. & M. 1945 by the greater length of

the vestibule. The female resembles closely that of A. morrhuae Beneden, as re-

described by Baylis (1933), but differs in the egg size; the absence of an account

of the male of that species prevents further comparison.

Cucullanellus cnidoglanis n. sp.

(Fig. 4-5)

From the estuarine catfish, Cnidoglanis megastomus, from Port Willunga.

The worms were somewhat shrivelled and difficult to roll; consequently the posi-

tion of the cervical papillae was not ascertained.

Male 6 mm. long; female 7 mm. Head of the usual Cucullanellid type; each

lateral “lip” with three papillae. In the specimen figured, the jaws (the two

lateral anterior margins of the oesophagus) are protruded through the mouth.

Oesophagus ‘8-1 mm. long; intestinal caecum -4-°55 mm. in length. Nerve ring

“32--35 mm. from anterior end of worm. Excretory pore just behind oesophagus.

Vulva inconspicuous, dividing body into anterior and postvulvar regions in

the ratio of 14:1. Eggs about 32 by 72y. Female tail long, -24 mm., tapering.

Spicules ‘8-1 mm. in length; three pairs of large preanal papillae, four pairs

adanal, four pairs caudal.

The species closely resembles C. plewronectidis Yamaguti 1935, differing in

minor details, e.g., the exact arrangement of the adanal papillae, and the greater

length of the caecum relative to that of the oesophagus,

CUCULLANELLUS SHEARDI Johnson and Mawson

This species, originally described by us (1944, 64) from Threpterius macu-

losus from Cape Borda, is now recorded from Dactylophora nigricans, Backstairs

Passage and Rapid Bay; Latridopsis forsteri from Kangaroo Island; and Pagro-

somus auratus from Glenelg.

Numerous specimens of various ages were studied. In the case of males we

have considered the state of maturity of the testis tubule to be an indication of

relative age. The youngest worm was a short, very thin male, -72 mm. long;

others which measured 1+1 mm. in length (fig. 6), were also very narrow. Others

which were older, were of about the same length as the latter but were very much

wider, because of the relatively wide transparent cuticle surrounding them; one

such worm, *95 mm. long, is indicated in fig. 7. The longest male observed

measured 2°5 mm. As we mentioned in our original account, the female is about

117

4mm. in length. The presence of a mid-dorsal papilla in the vicinity of the junc-

tion of the anterior two-thirds and posterior one-third of the body length in very

young males was mentioned in the original description, and has been observed in

the present material. Such a papilla has been noted by us in young males of

C. fraseri (Baylis 1929), and it is possible that its presence is a feature of the

enus.

: ECHINOCEPHALUS UNCINATUS Molin

The larval stage of this species was found encysted in the mesentery or

omentum of the following fish:—Platycephalus fuscus, Pagrosomus auratus and

Sillaginodes punctatus from Glenelg; and from Pseudolabrus psittaculus from

Port Noarlunga.

PROLEPTUS TRYGONORRHINAE Johnston and Mawson

A female of this species, originally described (1943, 187) from Trygonor-

rhina fasciata, was collected from Aptychotrema banksii from Rapid Bay.

LITERATURE

Bayris, H. A. 1929 Discovery Reports, 1, 541-559

Bayuis, H. A. 1933 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (10), 11, 111-117

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1943 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67,

20-35 ; 187-190

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1944 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68,

jJounstron, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. Parasitic Nematodes. Rep. Brit. Aust.

N.Z. Antarct. Res. Exped., B, 5, (2), 73- (in press)

McCuttocu, A. 1919 Aust. Zoologist, 1, (7), 217-227

McCuttocn, A. 1922 Check-list of the Fishes, etc., of New South Wales.

Aust. Zool. Handbook, No. 1, 104 pp., Sydney. Second edition, 1927.

Third edition, 1934

McCutiocu, A. 1929 A Check-list of the Fishes recorded from Australia.

Part 1. Mem. Aust. Mus., 5, 1-144

Norman, J. R. 1926 Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 941-982

Waite, E. R. 1921 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 2, (1), 1-208

Waite, E. R. 1923 The Fishes of South Australia, Adelaide

Wuittey, G. 1934 Supplement to McCulloch, 1934

Yamacutl, S. 1935 Jap. Jour. Zool., 6, (2), 384-5

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 — SCHENTIFIC REPORTS

INTRODUCTION, NARRATIVE, PHYSIOGRAPHY AND METEOROLOGY

BY C. T. MADIGAN (READ 10 May 1945)

Summary

This expedition through the Simpson Desert by camel was the culmination of several previous

investigations extending over many years. The first of these was an aerial reconnaissance in 1929

(Madigan 1929), when several flights were made across the desert in different directions and the

name Simpson Desert was given to it. In 1937 a journey was undertaken by motor truck, round the

northern end of the desert. In 1938 an account of all the available information on the desert was

published (Madigan 1938, Clarke Memorial Lecture), including a review of all explorations in the

vicinity to that date, with references. A more complete list of literature on the desert regions of

Australia was given in the Presidential Address to Section P, A.N.Z.A.A.S., 1937 (Madigan 1937).

118-

THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 — SCIENTIFIC REPORTS

INTRODUCTION, NARRATIVE, PHYSIOGRAPHY AND METEOROLOGY

By C. T. Mapican

[Read 10 May 1945]

Prares V to IX

I. INTRODUCTION

This expedition through the Simpson Desert by camel was the culmination

of several previous investigations extending over many years. The first of these

was an aerial reconnaissance in 1929 (Madigan 1929), when several flights were

made across the desert in different directions and the name Simpson Desert was

given to it. In 1937 a journey was undertaken by motor truck, round the northern

end of the desert. In 1938 an account of all the available information on the

desert was published (Madigan 1938, Clarke Memorial Lecture), including a

review of all explorations in the vicinity to that date, with references. A more

complete list of literature on the desert regions of Australia was given in the

Presidential Address to Section P, A.N.Z.A.A.S., 1937 (Madigan 1937).

The desert was defined as a broad triangle with its apex pointing downward,

and resting on Lake Eyre in the south at the junction of the Macumba and War-

burton Rivers. Its margins are the Macumba and Finke Rivers to the south-

west, the MacDonnell Ranges to the north-west, the Plenty and Thring (Mar-

shall) Rivers to the north, the Mulligan River to the east and the lower Diaman-

tina to the south-east. It lies mainly in the south-east corner of the Northern

Territory, but extends into Queensland and South Australia. It lies roughly

between latitude 23° and 27° south and longitude 135° and 139° east. The area is

about 56,000 square miles.

It had been established, particularly by the aerial reconnaissance, that nothing

lay within the borders of the desert but sandridges and scattered claypans. There

were no ranges and no water-courses other than the known streams entering from

the highlands to the north, and it seemed very improbable that anything was to

be found inside, either geological, biological or botanical, that did not occur round

the more accessible margins. However, the late Mr. A. A. Simpson, C.M.G.,

after whom the desert had been named, was still very anxious that the middle of

the desert should be crossed on the ground by a scientific party, for up till then the

only crossing had been made by a pastoralist, Mr. E. A. Colson, accompanied by a

black boy, by camel in 1936, This crossing was made towards the southern end

of the desert, practically along the 26th parallel, the border between the Northern

Territory and South Australia. Mr. Simpson offered to finance an expedition on

a scale that would allow a reasonable scientific staff to make the journey. This

offer was accepted, and arrangements were made for a camel expedition in the

winter of 1939, as there had been good rains in two successive seasons with floods

along the railway line and in western Queensland, and reports indicated that there

should be good green herbage in the desert. Under such conditions camels can,

and often do of their own accord, go without water for months on end. It was

anticipated that there would be a dry stage of at least two hundred miles across

the sandridges.

The expedition set out with three definite primary objects, physiography,

botany and zoology. Under physiography the chief study in this remarkable

desert was the parallel sandridges that run so straight and evenly spaced for

hundreds of miles; to attempt to discover their mode of origin, their age, the

Trans. Roy. Soc. §.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

119

source of the sand, their possible extension, retreat or stability, and their relations

to former climates and aridity. This was the main attraction to me, as I had

already made some contributions on the subject (Madigan 1936) based on the

aerial reconnaissance and ground observations in the Birdsville area. A journey

through the desert would provide much more information than was given by

aerial observations and photographs, and it was for this reason that it was decided

to make the crossing from west to east and thus cross the sandridges, instead of

from north to south in the lanes between them. The latter, though a considerably

longer journey, would have been easier for the camels, but less in the nature of a

cross-section of the desert.

The season seemed propitious for vegetation, as indeed it proved to be, and

it was determined to make as complete a botanical collection as possible with a

view to providing a reliable plant-oecology of the desert regions.

The third objective was the animal life of the desert, Completeness here

would be more difficult to achieve and require a larger expert staff, but every

member of the party was expected to keep up a remorseless hunt for all creatures

great and small, under the guidance of an experienced field collector. It was not

likely that the desert would provide much in the way of new plants or animals,

but their relative abundance and distribution were of considerable interest.

Lastly, there was the attraction of the purely physical feat of crossing the

desert, the fascination of planning to overcome natural obstacles and the great

satisfaction derived from plans proving successful in operation,

The outbreak of war seriously affected the preparation and publication of

the results of the expedition, as several members, including myself, joined the

services, and the activities of other scientific workers were diverted to war pur-

poses. It is only now that the older age groups are being released from the ser-

vices that it has been possible to make definite headway. A popular account of

the expedition is written, but publication is retarded by the exigencies of man-

power and paper. The Royal Society of South Australia has agreed to publish

the scientific results, and these will appear from time to time under seria] numbers

in the Transactions of the Society, as the papers are presented and space allows.

The present paper is intended as an introduction to the scientific reports, and will

include a short narrative as well as a general description of the area, and a map,

to which reference should be made for localities referred to in other contributions.

The following Reports have already appeared: No. 1, Biology—Scorpions

and Spiders, by V. V. Hickman (Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 68, (2), 18-48, 1944) ;

No. 2, Geology—The Simpson Desert Sands, by Dorothy Carroll (ibid, 68, (2),

49-59, 1944) ; No. 3, Biology—Reptiles and Batrachians, by J. R. Kinghorn (ibid,

69, (1), 3-9, 1945) ; No. 4, Biology—Hemiptera, by A. Musgrave (ibid, 69, (1),

14-15, 1945); and No, 5, Biology—Fishes, by G. P. Whitley (ibid, 69, (1),

10-13, 1945,

Reports in preparation include Plant Oeccology by R. L. Crocker, Sand

Formations by C. T, Madigan, Insects by H. Womersley, and Botany by C. M.

Eardley.

Il. NARRATIVE

The party consisted of nine members, namely, R. L. Crocker, M.Sc., of the

Soils Division of the C.S.LR., as botanist; H. O. Fletcher of the Australian

Museum, Sydney, as biological collector; R. A. Simpson as wireless operator ;

D. Marshall as photographer; A. Hubbard as cook; Jack Bejah in charge of the

camels, assisted by Nur Mahommed Moccha; Andrew, an aboriginal from Marree;

and myself as leader, navigator and geologist, Nineteen camels were obtained

from Bejah Dervish, of Marree, Jack’s father. Bejah had been L. A. Wells’

camel man on many journeys but was now too old to travel. Seven camels were

120

required for carrying water, five for the remaining stores and equipment, and

seven were riding camels. The camel transport was supplemented by a motor

truck for the first hundred miles of the journey, where it could be used before

the crossing of sandridges began, in order to increase mobility.

In stores, water was the chief consideration, The camels were to go with-

out, but the nine men would require water for about three weeks, between Andado

Station and the Mulligan River. At a gallon a day this would mean some 200

gallons, and for its transport fourteen sixteen-gallon galvanised iron camel can-

teens were made to my design, together with two four-gallon canteens for recon-

naissance work. Other equipment included a Traeger pedal wireless transmitter,

theodolite and chronometer, Sestrel aerial compass fixed to a camel saddle,

biological collecting equipment supplied by the Australian Museum, two 16 mm.

moving picture cameras lent by the Board of Anthropological Research and the

South Australian Government, three hand cameras, aneroid, maximum and

minimum thermometers, Birkmyre canvas ground sheets, blankets and a 20-ft. by

18-ft. tarpaulin, There were no beds or tents, The rations were for nine men

for six weeks and consisted mainly of five 50-Ib. bags of flour, 250 Ibs. of salted

meat, some cases of tinned meats presented by W. M. Angliss (Aust.) Pty. Ltd.,

and onions and potatoes, besides dried fruits, bacon, honey, rice, condensed milk,

and those bushman’s essentials, tea and sugar.

The route was to be by rail to Abminga near the Central Australian border,

and thence on to Charlotte Waters, the old telegraph station across the border,

which was the assembly point where the rail party would meet the camels from

Marree.

From Charlotte Waters the scientists would go on by truck to Andado

Station, 80 miles away on the edge of the sandridges, and there await the arrival

of the camels. From Andado the route would be northward to the junction of

the Hale and Todd Rivers, with the truck going on as far as it could, and from

near this junction the desert crossing would start on an easterly course to the

Queensland Border and thence south-east to the Mulligan River and Birdsville.

From Birdsville it was proposed to follow the Diamantina down to Lake

Eyre, and thence round the east side of the lake to the railway at Marree.

The scientific staff left Adelaide by train on 25 May 1939. The truck, sup-

plied by Harry Ding of Yunta, was picked up with driver at Hawker, and in it,

on the 27th, the party drove from Abminga to Charlotte Waters where the camels

were found waiting. They had already done a journey of nearly 400 miles from

Marree in three weeks and had settled down into a good working team, a very

important point in preparing for a journey stich as this.

There had been heavy rains along the railway line, with several washaways,

and our train was the first to run to schedule for some time. Local pastoralists

told us they had never seen anything like the feed then growing, which was a good

augury for the desert crossing.

There was water in the shallow holes in the Coglin Creek at Charlotte

Waters, and some ducks were shot. There were also some little perch in the pools,

of which specimens were taken. The fish proved to be of two species, one of

which, unicolor, was later placed in a new genus, Madigania. The other,

Blandowskiella castelnaut, a little fellow only three-quarters of an inch long, was

the first example of this species recorded in South Australia or the Northern

Territory. The day was spent in making up the camel loads. The weather was

of the delightful kind, typical of Central Australia in the winter time, with a

maximum shade temperature of 76° and a minimum that night of 38°F. Flies

were in plague numbers, owing to the proximity of stock and human occupation,

but in the desert they entirely disappeared. Mosquitos are unknown in the

interior in winter.

121

On 28 May the scientists went on to Andado Station by truck, followed by

the camels. The track follows the flood plain of the Finke for some seven miles,

before turning north between the sandridges towards Mount Peebles. The flood-

plain was conspicuous from its open forest of gum trees among grasses and

herbage head high, but the only sign of a true watercourse was a single narrow

ditch some ten feet deep in clay. The broad sandy bed 50 miles upstream at Crown

Point, so well known and so difficult to cross, had quite disappeared, A wild

turkey was shot here and eaten that night at the station, and a pair of crows were

seen near the river. Twined among the shrubs on the flood-plain were many

small straggling vines (Cucumis melo) bearing little green melons called by the

natives ilkarta, about the size of gooseberries and quite pleasant to eat.

The country around Charlotte Waters south of the Finke is a stony table-

land. There are table-topped hills to the east, where the Coglin joins the Finke,

composed of flat-lying chocolate-coloured sandy shales with marked stream

bedding and about 100 feet high. There was nothing to indicate their age, but

they did not resemble the glacial (late Palaeozoic) sands occurring further up the

river. They are probably of Upper Cretaceous or Eyrean (early Tertiary) age.

On one of these table-tops at the Finke close to the Andado track, a place called

by the natives Koppadeitchaka, where there is a stone cairn, not the trig. point

of Mount Wilyunpa which is three miles to the south, was found what appeared

to be an unusual aboriginal work. It was a sort of long narrow yard enclosed by

stones. It was open at the north end, from where two parallel lines of stones

eight feet apart ran south for 44 yards, where they opened out to 20 feet apart

for another 20 yards and then joined in a curve. Inside the wide part there were

many large flat stones turned up on end, without any definite arrangement, and

also others outside the yard, many of them projecting several feet above the

ground. It may have been an imitation cattle yard, but seemed too laborious an

undertaking to represent mere “fun-games.” The dislodged stones might have

been connected with building the cairn, but not so the yard.

The sandridges begin immediately across the river valley on the northern

side of the Finke. The track to Andado, after leaving the valley or flood-plain,

swings north-north-west between parallel sandridges for 15 miles to a stony patch

on which Mount Peebles, Mount Day and Moolta Hill are conspicuous features.

These hills are all low flat-topped residuals on the sandridge-free area, which is

about 30 miles across east and west and 12 miles north and south. Mayfield’s

Swamp lies near the river between the sandridges. At the time it was a large

sheet of shallow water surrounded by box gums, with a few ducks on it. There

were no signs of water in the Finke itself at our crossing.

Andado Station lies in the edge of the sandridges just off the eastern end of

the stony patch of ground mentioned above. It is necessary to cross two 50-ft.

sandridges to reach it. An ill-defined watercourse runs along the lane between the

sandridges, and good water is found in a well at 60 feet at the homestead. There

are innumerable similar sites that should be equally successful for well-sinking in

the desert areas, This is normal ground water, not the artesian supply, which lies

800 or 900 feet below the surface and is much inferior water.

A surprise awaited us at Andado, We found that the rains had missed that

locality and only two inches had fallen in the last six months. The place had a

desolate appearance and there was practically no feed about. Bejah took the

camels further north on the track to the Bore No. 1, where some herbage was

found. It was felt that this state of affairs should only be local, as there had

been heavy rains not only along the railway line but also in Western Queensland

and the Birdsville area on the other side of the desert.

A mishap occurred to the wireless at Andado. For some unknown reason

all three transmission valves blew out and it was necessary to get more spares up

122

by train. This detained us a week at Andado, but the time was well spent. The

accident was disconcerting as the cause remained unknown, but fortunately it

never happened again. During the wait, cross-sections of sandridges were mea-

sured and films were taken of sand-drifts, aboriginals at the station camp and

other subjects of interest, the position of the station was astronomically fixed,

biological and botanical collections were made, and the meat was killed and salted,

The pretty little hopping brush-tailed marsupial mouse or fawn jerboa mouse

(Ascopharynx cervinus), first collected by Sturt, was common in the sandridges

round the station, but other mice captured here proved to be the common intro-

duced mouse. Only one other species, the fat-tailed marsupial mouse (Sminthop-

sis crassicaudatus centralis) was taken on the whole expedition.

On 4 June the party got away from Andado and proceeded on to Andado

Bore No. 1, 25 miles to the north of the station. The lane between the two sand-

ridges at the station was followed for ten miles, when another stony area was

arrived at, on which the bore is situated. This bore is 870 feet deep and the water

stood at 70 feet from the surface. It had not been used for some time. At the

bore occurs one of the only two groves known in Australia of the tree Acacia

peuce, the other being near Birdsville. It is known as Casuarina at Andado and

waddy at Birdsville. It is a tall, straight tree 50 feet or more high with thin

drooping foliage and seeds in long pods. It is not unlike a Casuarina or sheoak

in general appearance. The wood is very heavy, red and hard. There are only 50

or so trees remaining at each locality, and the timber is in such demand that it is

likely that it will all soon be cut out.

The truck was sent back from the bore as at most it might have made

another 40 miles to the north, after which the easterly course across the sand-

ridges would have been impossible for it.

The stony patch on which the bore lies extends as a narrow tongue northward

to the Hale-Todd junction, as was afterwards discovered, but the party made

straight for the approximate position of the junction, cutting across a bay in the

stony tongtte. In this bay the sandridges were close and small and clothed with

spinifex. There was not a living tree there, but quite a lot of scattered and dead

mulga. Across the bay the stony tableland was met again and followed along the

west side to its pointed end. The edges were here abrupt, rising some 50 feet

above the plains. The table-land was composed of porcelainized shale capped by

a pebbly conglomerate up to ten feet thick. The locality at the point is known as

Poodnitera. There is a round table-topped hill standing out from the main table-

land on the west side, and a mile to the north were two round-topped twin hills

with a cairn on one of them. From the Twins a good view is obtained. The

Todd comes in from the north-west, an ill-defined watercourse among the sand-

ridges, and passes just north of the Twins to join the Hale, known locally as the

Illitera, at a point about four miles away east by south. The Hale comes down

from the north in a straight and better-defined course from a tableland edge

about eight miles to the north. There had been rain here and camel feed was

plentiful, including buckbush and munyeroo.

An old blackfellow had been brought from Andado to locate a native soak

on the Hale some miles above the junction, from which point it was proposed to

turn east after filling up with water. A course was taken from the Twins to

meet the Hale about eight miles above the junction, where it flows along a high

rocky bank on the east side.

Although the course of the Todd had seemed obvious from the Twins, owing

to scattered box gums, we crossed it on the ground without being aware of it,

and passed through very close sandridges for six miles before converging on the

flood areas of the Hale, where the herbage was as dense as it had been along the

Finke, with flowering acacias in addition. Birds were plentiful along the Hale,

123

including budgerigars, zebra finches and pigeons, and emu tracks were noted.

There was no open water anywhere about, but dews were heavy.

The Hale here showed a single well-defined channel, little more than a gutter,

like the Finke, but it was obvious that in times of flood it would cover con-

siderable areas.

We camped on 7 June on the Hale under the low cliffs on its east side near

their southern end. A light rain fell during the night, about 10 points, sufficient

to make everything unpleasantly damp. A day was spent searching for the soak.

The old aboriginal seemed a little uncertain of the locality, but it was eventually

found to be another seven miles upstream, or 15 miles from the Twins (Poodni-

tera). At this camp a good colour film was made by Marshall of Andy, our

aboriginal, cutting out widgettie grubs from a gum tree and eating them. There

was a rabbit warren near the camp and a few rabbits were seen. These, with

another at the bore, were the only rabbits noted in the whole desert crossing, the

next being along the Diamantina far below Birdsville.

On 9 June camp was moved up to the soak, which proved to be Allua Soak,

already mapped by Day. The east side of the Hale all the way was marked by a

50-ft. stony ridge, often with deep bays in it. The trend of these low cliffs and

of the river up to this point is about 10 degrees west of north, which is an excep-

tion to the rule that all streams run parallel to the sandridges in the desert, a rule

that always holds in the level plains, where the trend is 30 degrees west of north.

To the west were level sandridge plains. At the soak the river has a single wide

sandy bed 50 yards across, which is typical of its course from its source in the

MacDonnell Ranges to this point, but below the soak it breaks up into small

gutters and channels without sand.

Excellent water was found in the river bed three feet below the surface and

all canteens were topped off and the camels offered a drink, but most of them

refused or took very littl. There were emus nesting near the soak and some

eggs were eaten. Yams were plentiful in sandy banks, and widgettie grubs in the

trees. It had been an important locality before the aboriginals became detribalized,

and there were many signs of native occupation. It was discovered afterwards

that our old guide remained there for three weeks after we left him, before return-

ing to Andado.

Stars were visible that night for the first time since leaving Andado, and an

astronomical fix was obtained for the soak, the point of departure for the east-

ward crossing of the desert. A course of three degrees south of east was set for

“Mudioo Well,” a point marked on the map just across the border in Queensland,

about 150 miles away. We had no information about this well.

The crossing began on 10 June, with a load of 232 gallons of water. The

cliff, there over two miles from the river, was scaled by means of a watercourse,

and we found ourselves on a level stony plain. After three miles of this another

valley, about three miles wide, crossed our path. It trended away south-south-

east, with a stream bed in the bottom. In it were green acacias, gums and herbage,

with many budgerigars and finches, but no water. For the first few miles beyond

this valley the plain was stony, with a few small sandridges, odd claypans, and

some small dead timber. In lower areas there was living mulga and green herbage,

but the gum trees were all dead. Zebra finches were still numerous in these

green patches.

From twelve miles east of the river the country rapidly deteriorated. The

sandridges became straighter and more regular and closer, Seventy sandridges

were crossed in 16 miles on the second day, the later ones rising to 50 feet high,

and only a few stony patches were seen, sand now covering the lanes between the

ridges. Spinifex became the universal plant, with a few succulents on the crests

124

of the sandridges, but camel feed was becoming scarce. On the next day 73

sandridges were crossed in 15 miles. One dry but tree-covered claypan was

passed, but conditions were steadily deteriorating. Camp 8 was reached on

13 June, after crossing 55 sandridges rising to 80 feet high in 13 miles, which

took six hours of travelling. This was the average spacing of the sandridges,

four to the mile. We were now in country that had had no rain for at least a

year, and probably two, for the spinifex had not flowered, and most of it was dead.

During the afternoon a patch was entered where rain had recently fallen, as the

spinifex was in flower and there was green canegress, but camel feed was still

inadequate. On the far side of this green area Camp 8 was made between the

sandridges where there was a clump of needlebush, the first so far seen. Rain

came on in the evening and kept us in camp for the next three days, during which

time over an inch fell in an almost continuous drizzle. About 30 gallons of

water was caught on ground sheets, in which water beetles were found swimming,

at first a profound mystery, but later it was realised that they had flown there on

the east wind from claypans further east. The rai wetted the sand to a depth

of 15 inches. This camp was 60 miles east of the Hale and geographically about

in the middle of the desert. A national broadcast was sent out from here over

our little pedal set, to be picked up and relayed over land-lines by Harry Ding

at Yunta.

A cross-section of several sandridges was measured at this camp, and a

series of soil samples taken. The posthole-borer would only go down 11 feet in

between the sandridges, at which depth sandstone gravel was met, indicating the

proximity of the solid sandstone. Although there was still no surface water,

wrens and chats were found round the camp.

Camp 8 was left on 17 June. The going was rather easier at first, with some

groves of mulga between ridges, and three little claypans with water, the first

open water seen since leaving Charlotte Waters. The recent showers had filled

them. Budgerigars, crows, finches and chats were noted. Dingoes were first heard

along the Hale, and thereafter almost every night during the desert crossing their

occasional yaps and howls were the only sounds to break the silence. They were

often seen peering over the crests of sandridges. No emus, kangaroos or rabbits

were seen during the crossing. The most conspicuous creatures were lizards and

an occasional snake. Mouse holes were common, but only yielded the two kinds

of marsupial mice mentioned above.

Between Camps 9 and 10 conditions became very difficult. The rate of tra-

velling was only averaging two miles an hour and six hours was enough for a day.

The sandridges were up to 100 feet high, and one had to be crossed every seven

or eight minutes. Camel feed had practically disappeared and the beasts were

beginning to fail, several falling during that day. The last summer rains had not

reached the western side of the desert at all. It was obvious that a crossing

would be impossible unless feed were better, but to return was now as hazardous

as to go on and probably more so, as on any day we expected to reach the areas

covered by the Queensland rains. Scarcely enough dead needlebush could be

found to make a fire. There was nothing to be seen but sand and spinifex, and

nothing to be done but push on hopefully. Camp 10 was left on 18 June. From

the crest of the second sandridge from the camp, not half-a-mile on, there was

suddenly seen a claypan full of water in the valley before us. The claypan was

found to be surrounded by great mats of munyeroo, a portulacca that makes very

good camel fodder. so camp was immediately made again and the camels turned

out to feed, at Camp 11.

This proved to be the edge of the Queensland rains and all difficulties were

over. The feed steadily improved to the east, and the camels eventually arrived

at Birdsville in even better condition than they left Andado.

125

On two sandridges away to the north-east of Camp 11 there was a group of five

claypans up to 50 yards across, covered with a few inches of water. These claypans

were surrounded by living gidgee and there were small exposures of silicified

sandstone around them, with flint and ironstone nodules lying about. Here we

discovered the signs of visits by aborigines in the form of chipped flints and broken

grinding stones,, one grinding stone of schist suggesting that it came from the

MacDonnell Ranges. Although the natives from the south of the desert and the

Diamantina always deny all knowledge of the desert, obviously fearing it and

maintaining that no one ever went into it, it is clear that other tribes from the

north have penetrated a long way in by following the streams down from the

MacDonnell Ranges in times of rain.

A clear night made observations for latitude and longitude possible at

Camp 11, the first opportunity afforded since we left the Hale. It was found

that dead-reckoning distances were correct to a mile in 80, but the crossing of

the sandridges at a small angle had caused a definite drift to the south, which on

later courses was slightly over-corrected.

From Camp 11 a course was taken north-easterly to re-locate some large

claypans plotted on the aerial reconnaissance. These were found as marked, but

no attempt was made to map them in detail. Several lanes were seen to the north

full of dark gidgee trees, and several small claypans and two large ones were

passed, both containing water, one as much as 200 yards across. The water was

only a few inches deep, recently fallen, and would dry up in a few weeks. The

camels were not interested in drinking. The claypans ceased several miles before

Camp 12 was reached,

The sandridges were now dwindling in height, reaching only about 30 feet,

and the herbage was daily increasing, There was green sandhill wattle, water-

bush, buckbush, hopbush, flowering grevillea, grasses, and seeding spinifex. The

spinifex grew everywhere except on the live sand of the crests, which was

favoured by everything but the spinifex. Between Camps 12 and 13 a few white-

stemmed gum trees were seen. A second national broadcast was given at

Camp 13.

As the Hay River was approached the sandridges became low and irregular.

Eighty were crossed in 16 miles between Camps 13 and 14. In the heart of the

desert the sandridges had been red and forbidding, serrating the horizon with

their jagged crests, but now, from the top of a ridge, the country looked flat and

the yellow spinifex stalks gave it the friendly appearance of a great wheat field.

For a week after the rain the nightly dews were extraordinarily heavy, and

everything was covered with a film of water every morning. The dews later

changed to frosts, as had been experienced in the earlier days of the journey.

For a mile before reaching the Hay odd box gums were noted between the

sandridges, and then suddenly the valley of the Hay appeared. It was merely a

sandy-floored depression up to 400 yards wide, covered with scattered box gums

of meagre growth, and abundant acacias and herbage. There was a single small

watercourse winding along the valley, but no signs of torrential floods. It was a

dead river valley. The bed of the channel was of fine sand. In one place the

bed showed about 100 yards of crusty silicified rocks similar to all the desert

rock surfaces.

We followed the Hay down for ten miles. It ran S.30°E., parallel to the

sandridges on either side. Birds were fairly numerous. Budgerigars were in

large flocks, and there were also a few galahs, and crows, hawks, zebra finches,

and some smaller wrens and chats. It seemed that dew could be their only water,

as we knew of none within 50 miles. A single turkey was seen and secured for

the pot.

126

Astronomical observations were taken at both Camps 15 and 16 on the Hay.

The position agreed with that given by Winnecke, who had come down the river

in 1884 to a point about 15 miles above where we first struck it. Camp 16 was

17 miles west of the Queensland border at a point 86 miles north of Poeppel’s

Corner. A tree was marked at Camp 16 with 39, the largest tree that could be

found, which was about a foot in diameter.

The third and last national broadcast, in which all members participated, was

given from the Hay River.

A few dry claypans were seen close to the Hay on its east side. The country

again became much drier between the river and the border, with the sandridges

rather higher, very few trees, and dense spinifex. It was the bad belt of country

in which Sturt turned back in 1845.

Camp 17 was on the Queensland Border, but no signs could be found of the

old survey party or Wells’ mile posts and quarter-mile pegs put in over 50 years

before.

From Camp 17 a course was set for old Kaliduwarry Station on the Mulligan,

44 miles away. Although near it, we decided not to try to locate Mudloo Well,

as we did not need water, and it probably belonged to border survey days and

might long have disappeared.

At the border the country showed a marked change. The sandridges became

further apart, straighter and higher, up to 60 feet, and instead of dense spinifex

between them there were clumps of gidgee, gradually becoming more continuous

till they ran for miles along the valleys. The country became greener again with

some saltbush appearing in the lanes in clay and limey soils instead of sand. The

sandridges were now being crossed obliquely at the rate of 15 or 16 a day.

A few miles short of the Mulligan a long white lake was crossed, dry, but

covered with salt and gypsum and extending as far as the eye could see to the

N.N.W. and S.S.E. Soon the once rabbit-proof fence was encountered five miles

west of the river, and at last Camp 20 was made on the river itself on 28 June.

Near the river the sandridges had died down to mere broad undulations.

The desert had been crossed from the Hale to the Mulligan in 19 days, over

626 sandridges in a distance of 204 miles. We arrived with 77 gallons of water

in the canteens. Thirty gallons of rain water had been added to our supply on

the journey, and consumption had worked out at 10 gallons a day for nine men.

Actually we could have refilled half-way across the desert at the claypans, but

such a fortuitous finding of water could never be relied on. Water restrictions

had been somewhat relaxed during the latter part of the journey. At first the

two 4-gallon canteens had been filled daily and no more water could be used.

The Kuddaree Waterhole on the Mulligan was a fine sheet of water 600

yards long by 100 wide. There were teal and several larger kinds of duck, geese,

black swans and cranes on it, and in the trees large swarms of corellas and some

galahs. A mile to the east there was another smaller waterhole, by which stand

the remains of the old station building.

We were held up for another two days here by rain, but at length continued

on down the Mulligan to the deserted Annandale Station. The cattle had all been

removed from the Mulligan at this time and the stations closed, though feed was

now everywhere about in great abundance. Near Annandale we had to weather

another two days’ rain, during which an inch fell, By this time the river flats

were a series of shallow lakes; in fact, the whole journey of 75 miles from

Kalliduwarry to Birdsville was a most miserable one, with rain, bitter winds and

water lying about everywhere, so that the camels sloshed and slipped along and

we had to pick our way between the bogs. It was so cold that the party preferred

127

to walk most of the time in spite of mud and wet feet. The sandridges became

quite friendly, providing, as they did, much better going as well as the only dry

places to camp on, The whole journey was made under exceptional conditions.

Far from suffering from lack of water, we suffered from a surfeit of it.

Between Kalliduwarry and Annandale the Mulligan showed a well-defined

channel with sandy bed about six feet deep and 25 yards wide, in a broad valley

flanked with sandridges and well timbered with box gums, in the hollow trunks

of which the budgerigars were nesting in hundreds, Below Annandale the river

breaks up into braided channels. All waterholes were full, but it did not seem

that the river had run for many months. From about eight miles below the

station we took a direct course for Birdsville, as no tracks could be found. This

took us through sandridges all the way. The track actually takes a curve to the

south and avoids most of them.

The country between the Mulligan and Birdsville was of a quite different

character. Instead of the sandridges running through a sea of sand they were

separated by bare gibber plains. All the sand was swept up into ridges which

were spaced more irregularly, The average distance apart was two-thirds of a

mile instead of the quarter mile in the desert, but there were often plains up to

two miles wide separating the most impressive sandridges we had seen. They

looked like mountain ranges across the level stony plains. Actually they were no

higher than some of the desert ridges, one measuring 77 feet 6 inches against an

86-ft. ridge at Andado, but the sides were steeper, without the long and gentle

approach which lessened the apparent height of the desert ridges. The sand of

the ridges east of the Mulligan was of a light buff colour, and not the deep red

of the desert. This was also the case along the Diamantina and round Lake Eyre,

where it was almost white. Emus were again seen on this side of the desert, but

no kangaroos till we were well down the Diamantina.

Birdsville was reached on 6 July, after a journey of 347 miles from Andado

Station or 427 miles from Abminga, After four days’ rest at Birdsville the last

stage of the journey was begun, the return to Marree via the Diamantina and

Lake Eyre, a distance of some 400 miles. This was through known country,

most of it occupied for cattle-raising at one time or another, but now practically

deserted. The paradox was that never in the memory of living man had the

country looked better. Drovers had never known the “Birdsville Track” to

Marree to be in better heart, and mobs of cattle were moving down from Queens-

land at intervals of a few days apart. Statistics show that good seasons occur

about once in nine years. The present conditions were causing one of the periodic

revivals of interest in the country, with several new enterprises starting, all

doomed to go the way of their predecessors, unless new methods and more organi-

sation are introduced. Erosion has had little effect on the Diamantina country in

South Australia. Its failure is due to the simple fact that not only is the average

rainfall five inches, but it is so erratically distributed that the actual rainfall may

be only from one to two inches for many years in succession, followed by a

10- or 11-inch fall often in two successive seasons occurring at intervals of about

nine years, The rainfall is better described as 10 inches or nothing a year. There

is no evidence that the country has “gone back” except round the waters, and

there were no signs of recent sand drift around the four deserted homesteads

visited along the Diamantina, namely Goyder’s Lagoon, Mount Gason, Cowarie

and Kalamurina. The country is much the same as ever it was, lakes and meadows

one-fifth of the time, parched and almost barren plains four-fifths of the time.

Occupation began in the 1880’s, and several places opened atid closed finally before

the end of the century; others have been reoccupied from time to time ever since.

Conditions were no better in the beginning. The only way to make any use of

the country is to exploit the good seasons and withdraw in the bad. Cattle can-

128

not live when the feed is gone even if water is provided. Rainfall controls the

stock-carrying capacity of these vast areas. Any talk of irrigation except in

narrow belts along rivers is quite fantastic.

The Diamantina runs a channel flood almost every year, and was running

strongly at this time. It was an opportunity to find out what eventually became

of the water, and whether Lake Eyre was still dry after the two exceptionally wet

seasons. The investigation of Lake Eyre was the chief object of this part of the

expedition.

From Birdsville the party followed the fine-weather mail track as far as

Mount Gason. The track keeps close to the edge of the sandridges on the west

side of the Diamantina as far as Goyder’s Lagoon, where it turns and crosses

to the east side, The sandridges everywhere near the river were a mass of vegeta-~

tion. The most conspicuous plant was the wild stock (Blennodia pierosperma),

which completely covered large areas with its mauve and yellow flowers. Giant

buckbushes grew to six feet in diameter.

Andrewilla Waterhole, a permanent water six miles long, was visited. Good

edible perch (Hephaestus welchi) were caught here on hand lines. Tt was sur-

prising to find later that they were known only from the type taken at Inna-

mincka on the Cooper. The trees at the waterhole were crowded with flocks of

cockatoos, mostly corellas. Birdsville received its name from the abundance of

bird life along the river. There were a few ducks and other waterfowl, but

ducks were far more abundant on the temporary waterholes along the track.

Goyder’s Lagoon was crossed obliquely at its western end. It is a level clay

flat covered with interlacing channels which are lined with lignum bushes, all

dead at the time. The gutters are from 10 feet to 30 feet across and no more

than three or four feet deep. They were running full, with the level of the water

not more than an inch below the ground surface. We had taken some risk in

attempting to cross with camels, but the cattle were still using the track. The

whole surface was carpeted with yellow daisies and billy-buttons in bloom, There

is no timber on the lagoon with the exception of “One Tree,” and firewood had

to be carried. We were crossing gutters for about 10 miles, a dozen in the first

five miles. A canegrass swamp half-a-mile wide and under water gave the

greatest difficulty on the far side, beyond which a small rise brought us on to gibber

flats, part of Sturt’s Stony Desert, where the sandridges are fewer and much

farther apart.

On a long narrow waterhole close to the ruins of Goyder’s Lagoon Station

we found ducks in thousands. There were several kinds, and shooting them was

like mass murder. When fired on they merely flew up and down the narrow

water and soon settled again.

We crossed the Warburton (Diamantina) just below the Kallakoopah branch

and went into the yellow sandhills between the rivers, re-crossing again lower

down at Bulkalara crossing. The river was running a few feet deep at the cross-

ings, as it had been at Birdsville. The channel of the river below Goyder’s

Lagoon is very well defined and is mainly about 50 yards wide between clay banks

20 to 40 feet high. It is a series of pools connected by shallows and reminds one

much of the Darling.

Near the river opposite Mount Gason we saw a group of five kangaroos, the

only ones seen on the whole journey. There were also ibis on the swamps, and

emu tracks in the vicinity.

Near Cowarie we were again in sandridges decked with flowers, including

broom, stocks and daisies, all in bloom. There is a complete and striking absence

of spinifex in the sandridges south of the Warburton and all round the east side

——_ ae ee ee ae

129

of Lake Eyre. The climate is the same, the sand cannot vary much, yet a hundred

miles to the north there is very little else but dense spinifex. It may be that the

high gypsum content of Lake Eyre sand is inimical to the spinifex.

Between Cowarie and the remains of Kalamurina Station the course lay along

the edge of the sandridges and on the river flats. The box gums round claypans

near the river were all dead in this area. Between Kalamurina and the lake we

travelled mainly across the yellow Lake Eyre sandridges. Here there was less

herbage, but a mat of wiry grass covered sandridges and inter-ridge lanes alike,

giving the whole landscape a black appearance. The grass was drying off and

was very slippery to the camels’ feet. This grass was found all down the side of

the lake, and there was little else except buckbush, which was profuse, and a few

scattered needlebushes, the only timber, which was so scarce that it had to be

searched for to build a fire. At the lower end of the Warburton the channel was

as much as 150 yards wide, and full from bank to bank. No movement of the

water could be detected.

We could go no further west than Camp 42, where the Kalaweerina Creek

runs south into Lake Eyre from the ring formed by the Warburton and Kalla-

koopah, as we could no longer cross the waters. The Finke and Macumba also

join this ring, but whether the main inlet into Lake Eyre is Kalawerrina Creek

or another bay further to the west, or whether the waters are shared by both

inlets, we had no means of knowing. At Camp 42 three broad placid waterways

met, and there did not appear to be definite movement of the water in any direc-

tion. Floating sticks went both ways with the breezes. There were a few scrubby

box gums along the creek near the camp, and some lignum, neither persisting to

the south, and a few rabbits.

The water in the claypans and waterholes along the Mulligan and Diaman-

tina had been white from suspended clay, often as opaque as milk, but here, under

the flocculating effect of greater salinity, it was much bluer. All the water sub-

sequently seen in arms of the lake was quite clear, and in most places it was

saturated brine. At Camp 42 the water was still drinkable.

An account of Lake Eyre (Madigan 1930) had been written after the aerial

reconnaissance and ground expedition of 1929, just 10 years earlier. That was

at the end of a long drought period and the lake was completely dry, with a salt

crust as much as 17 inches thick at 12 miles from the southern end. This present

visit was after two exceptionally wet seasons, and it was of interest to see how

the lake had been affected. We followed the brimming Kalaweerina Creek down

for eight miles, but there an arm extending to the east cut us off from further

progress south and we could not reach the surface of the main lake at the north

end. The creek had spread out on entering the arm and no channel could be seen.

The water was now only a few inches deep. It extended south-east down the arm

for about 10 miles, where it ended. A few ducks and swans had been seen at

Camp 42, but round the shallow water in the arm there were tremendous flocks

of sea birds, mainly gulls and terns. Towards sunset they were moving about in

clouds. No birds at all had been seen 10 years before, Stories of natives collect-

ing birds’ eggs had been used as an argument that the lake was always full. As

the Diamantina appears to reach the lake every year it is probable that birds do

breed annually at the north end in the arms and swamps, if not on the lake itself,

but towards the south end the salt crust is so thick that it can rarely go into

solution, the 17 inches requiring nearly nine feet of water to dissolve it, so that

any water on most of the area of the lake would always be a brine and birds would

avoid it, as was found to be the case on this journey. The birds’ eggs no longer

interest the few aborigines who are now all segregated round the stations or

towns, Not a single man or beast was seen in the 200 miles from Cowarie to

Muloorina.

130

Other arms of the lake, all dry, kept us away from the margin and it was not

till after crossing the Cooper that we were able to get in to the real shores at a

point about half-way down the east side of the lake, for though there was no

water in the arms their clay beds were damp and too soft to risk a crossing with

the camels. From the sandridge running parallel to the shore, the white surface

of the lake could be seen extending to the horizon about five miles away. There

was no sign of water. We walked out nearly three miles over the damp buff-

coloured gypseous clay surface, in which our feet sunk about half an inch.

Occasional large pieces of driftwood were seen, that would take a foot of water

to float them, and ants and spiders were found at intervals all the way, indicating

that it was a long time since the driftwood had been carried there. The spiders

proved to belong to two species new to science. Previous experience had shown

that the lake margins slope gently inwards and that the salt crust may be up to

four miles from the shore. We did not reach the salt in our hour’s walk.

That night on the lake shore was the coldest of the whole journey, the

minimum thermometer falling to 23° F. at grass.

In the sandridges near the shore at this point there was a long narrow lake

which had a few inches of water on it for a distance of about a mile. The water

was brine, with salt crystallizing out round the margins. There was no drainage

running into this lake, as is the case with most of the scattered and detached

lakes in the sandridge country on the east side of Lake Eyre, and the water repre-

sented only local infall on the lake floor, gathered towards the centre.

Again we were kept from the margin by an arm running inland, but after

rounding this a southerly course brought us to the shores again in the south-east

corner of the North Lake. Camp 49 was at the channel connecting the Clayton

Lake, which receives the waters of the Clayton and Frome Rivers, with Lake

Eyre. The neck was a mile wide, with a quarter of a mile of water half an inch

deep in the middle, a saturated brine that was already depositing its salt. It was

easy to walk across, but the camels began to bog, and the attempt to take the

string over was abandoned.

The channel connecting the north and south lake was revisited, this being

the vicinity of the ground expedition to the lake in 1929. The channel had gutters

in it, running crosswise and lined with shrubs. This showed clearly that any

water in the channel comes from run-off from the shores, and that the saline

waters of the lakes never now pass through the channel. No herbage ever grows

on any of the lake beds, which are always completely bare. The former visit to

the channel had been to a point a mile or so to the south, where it was wider and

was then covered with a salt crust. Half-way between the connecting channel

and the Frome entrance we found the tracks of the truck used on the 1929

journey and followed them for over a mile out on to the lake. They were almost

as clear as when they were made 10 years before.

These observations confirmed my belief that Lake Eyre is never completely

covered with water, but that when floods come down, which is almost annually

in the case of the Diamantina, two or three times every 10 years in the case of

the Macumba and Frome, and never since 1917 in the case of the Cooper, then

the waters spread out on the swamps round the river mouths, which are them-

selves vast areas in all cases, and may extend out on to the lake, but only in the

vicinity of the river entrances, where their depth is soon measurable in inches

and they disappear in a matter of months under the effects of evaporation which

is of the order of 100 inches a year.

As we were unable to make a short cut to Muloorina across the neck, we had

to go round the Clayton Lake, as I have named this arm of Lake Eyre, Lake

Frome being preoccupied. Clayton Lake was dry as far as could be seen, but

boggy. We safely crossed some of its arms.

131

The only creatures other than insects and reptiles seen round the lake were

crows, that were nesting very obviously in the few needlebush trees ; also the

beautiful little orange chat in considerable numbers, and an occasional skylark.

In spite of the exceptional vegetation and some bird life, the Lake Eyre region

still retained its eerie and depressing atmosphere of vast silence, desolation and

death. This was thrown into even greater relief on our arrival at Muloorina

Station, which had been re-opened after its original closure as a cattle station in

1902, and its long use as a Government camel depot followed by another 10 years

of desertion, Now it was a flourishing sheep station with shearing in full swing,

and has so continued successfully up to 1945. :

Matree was reached on 8 August, after a journey of 800 miles in a little over

10 weeks on the camels, and the party returned from there to Adelaide by train.

The Expedition has accomplished what it had set out to do. The desert had

been crossed; much more had been discovered about the nature of this unique

physiographic region with its remarkable ribbing of sandridges; Mr. Crocker had

made a very complete plant collection under most favourable conditions; all

members had assisted in the collection of animal life, in which the energy and

keenness of Andy the aboriginal had been outstanding, and Mr. Fletcher had

made an excellent job of the care and maintenance of the collections under diffi-

cult conditions, Little was done with birds other than the observations recorded

in this narrative, only five species having been actually taken, all in the middle

of the desert and none of them new, though the crimson chat and banded white-

face are rare and beautiful little birds. The reptile collection, however, was

described as an excellent one, comprising 18 genera and 23 species, some of them

exceptionally rare. Of 28 species of spiders, 14 of them were new. The insects

included 80 species. One of them, Varnia perloides, is known only by a singie

specimen in the British Museum. Only three mammals were collected, the two:

marsupial mice and one introduced mouse, and no others were seen except dingos

and rabbits. The desert had given us all it had to give, and these poor offerings

will be found described in greater detail in papers by various authors appearing

in the Transactions of this Society under the heading of the Simpson Desert

Expedition 1939—Scientific Reports.

Ill. PHYSIOGRAPHY

The natural features along the route have been described in the narrative

above, and a full account of the physiography and geology of the region as far

as then known was given in the address, “The Simpson Desert and its Borders”

(Madigan 1938). This crossing confirmed previous observations, but added little

that was new except a series of levels, The country between camps in the desert

is described in words on the map, the notes including the nature of the sand-

ridges, whose trend is shown by the dotted lines, the vegetation and the occurrence

of claypans. The margin of the sandridge area is shown practically as before.

It is very definite to the west and south, being the Finke and Macumba in the

west, and Lakes Eyre, Gregory, Callabonna and Frome to the south (the borders of

the Northern Flinders Ranges), but the eastern border is indefinite. The Mulligan

and lower Diamantina (Warburton) form a definite margin to the desert,

but not to the sandridges, which extend a hundred miles and more to the east

of those rivers. The desert is a monotonous sandy plain ribbed with close sand-

ridges and covered with spinifex, but east of the line of the rivers mentioned the

country is broken by occasional low stony tablelands and tabletopped hills (mesas

and buttes) and is characterised by stony gibber plains known as Sturt’s Stony

Desert in the north-east corner of South Australia, but extending northward

through Birdsville into Queensland. The sandridges in this country are large

and isolated, often several miles apart. In the region of the Strzelecki Creek,

south of the Cooper, they are again smaller and closer in a bad patch of desert.

132

The limits of the map obviate the necessity of committing oneself to an eastern

margin of the sandridge area, but it may be taken approximately as the latitude

of Lake Frome to the south and the 141st meridian, the border of South Aus-

tralia, to the east. Sandridges are not a notable feature of the north-west corner

of New South Wales, but there is an extension into Queensland east of Inna-

mincka. It is everywhere a fading and indefinite margin to the east.

The northern limit of the regular sandridges was plotted from aerial observa-

tions and from Winnecke’s explorations, To the north-east they end against

Winnecke’s Adam Ranges, a group of tabletops, but to the north they fade out

into a featureless sand plain which is broken by the Dulcie, Jervois and Tarlton

Ranges, but extends beyond them as red sandy loams for hundreds of miles to

the north. The northern limit of the parallel sandridges is closely associated with

the margin of the artesian basin, suggesting that the greater quantities of sand are

derived from the erosion of the Upper Cretaceous and Eyrean sandstones that

cover the basin in this lower area, as well as to the fact that the desert receives the

inwash from all the streams from nearly half a million square miles of country.

As regards the cartography, there are several new features on the map as

well as changes of position of old ones. Attention was drawn to some of these

points in a former paper (Madigan 1938), namely that the Marshall River joins

the Plenty, and it is the Thring that runs east to join the Arthur and form the

Hay River; that the Arthur does not run through the Tarlton Range but down

the west side of it, and that Goyder’s Pillars are on the middle of the Range and

not on the river. The river runs between two small ridges five miles west of the

Pillars, and these ridges have wrongly become known as Goyder’s Pillars. The

Hay River was fixed by longitudes at the Tarlton Range and also at Camps 15

and 16. These positions agree with Winnecke’s, and are 9 to 10 miles to the

west of the position shown on present-day maps. The map presented with this

paper shows the Field River as Winnecke placed it, which is 74 miles west of

that given on most maps. I have not visited this river, but it is obvious that both

rivers have been plotted from Winnecke’s route survey, and both moved east, the

Hay definitely wrongly so. This move was made to allow Winnecke’s Field River

to agree with Wells’ (Border Survey) position for Gnallanageer Creek which

crosses the border. It would be surprising but possible that Winnecke should be

correct for the Hay River and so much out for the Field. On the other hand,

the Field may not have been conspicuous where it crossed the border, so that

Wells’ Gnallanageer may not be the same as Winnecke’s Field River or the

Alanajeer of most maps, or it may be that the Field makes an unexpected kink at

the border. No one seems ever to have followed the stream right down.

It is considered that the lower reaches of the Hale are much straighter than

usually shown, with one well-defined channel. The width is usually exaggerated.

The Hale and Todd, after junction, still continue on as a recognisable watercourse

for another 40 miles to a swamp 45 miles east of Andado, according to the people

of Andado, who should know.

Down the east side of Lake Eyre the existing maps still reproduce the route

sketches made by J. W. Lewis in 1874-5. There has been no triangulation in that

area. These sketches were necessarily very approximate. The Simpson Desert

Expedition passed hurriedly down the side of the lake and did not attempt to map

the shores. The arms of the lake were found to be roughly as shown on maps

from the north end down to the Cooper, but if the arm at Camp 45 is correct, and

it seemed to be so, then the shore of the lake near Camp 47, south of the Cooper,

is a good 74 miles further east than marked. There was a small lake at Camp 48,

as shown, but no signs of the big horseshoe lake marked on maps.

The small lakes in the sandridges to the east of the great lake were very

interesting. The sandridges, near the middle of the lake and to the south, are

133

mostly broad, low undulations not more than 40 feet high, without steep crests

of live sand, though they were steeper and higher towards the Warburton. No-

where are they as high and forbidding as in the desert. The lakes, of all sizes

and shapes from round ones a mile across to narrow ones 20 miles long, occur

sporadically in this undulating sea of sand. The smaller ones are not seen till

one comes suddenly on the edge and looks down on the lake floor 60 to 70 feet

below, by aneroid measurement, They are like holes scooped out of the sand, or

large craters. The floors are absolutely flat sand-free clay surfaces, of a buff

colour. They were at the time rather boggy, but during droughts, when the sur-

face is crusty and gypseous, they can be crossed by motor vehicles. In all cases

the banks were higher on the southern and western sides, the windward

sides, where there was usually live sand in dunes. The remarkable thing is that

the lakes persist and do not become filled with drifting sand. It appears that

the eddies caused by the depression, together with the smoothness of the floor,

keep the floors swept clean of sand. The sand travels north throughout the whole

desert, yet it seems to halt and pile up on the windward shores of these lakes.

Their origin presents a difficult problem, as it requires a decision as to which was

there first, the lakes or the sand, but once dunes have formed on the windward

side of the lake their presence would arrest the oncoming sand and they would

advance slowly by slumping in the normal way. It seems necessary that the sand

must be encroaching on the lakes in this way, and perhaps the leeward shores

retreating, but there were no obvious signs of it. The trends of the lakes as

mapped seem haphazard, but several of them, together with some of the arms of

the great lake, trend south-east at a small angle to the trend of the sandridges, and

this suggests that they are protected by crescentic dunes formed by the stronger

south-west winds. The lakes towards Poeppel’s Corner, like all of those more

remote from Lake Eyre, are obviously merely lanes between the sandridges.

The lee shores of arms of Lake Eyre at Camps 43, 44 and 45 all sloped

gently upwards northward into the sandridges. The sandridges were very low and

the sandy shores not more than 20 feet above the lake floor at Camp 49, but across

the neck from this camp along the southern edge of the lake the shores rise to

about 50 feet, with broad scattered sandridges in the country to the south. It can

be taken that the tops of the sandridges east of the lake are about 70 feet above

the lake floor level, and in most parts the gentle undulating ridges themselves are

only 20 to 40 feet high, so that the lanes between them are some 40 feet above

lake level and the floors of the scattered lakes are probably at about the same

level as that of the main lake.

The Cooper, where we crossed it, was in a depression a mile wide crossing

the sandridges, but the actual channel was a well-defined sandy bed 50 feet across

and a couple of feet deep. The low banks indicated that any floods passing today

are small, and the fineness of the sand in the bed and the absence of pebbles and

driftwood showed that velocities are low. There were no trees, not even dead

ones, in the valley, but only grasses, a condition very different from the box gum

flats along this river where the Birdsville track crosses it. No Cooper floods have

reached beyond Lake Hope since 1917, but it seemed that local rains must have

caused some flow in these lower courses, or the grasses and herbage would have en-

croached on the bed as they had in the connecting channel between the main lakes.

Heights were determined at every camp, and these are marked on the map.

They were calculated from aneroid readings and weather map interpolations, the

originals of the weather maps having kindly been made available by the Common-

wealth Weather Bureau, Adelaide. The tables used were Nos. 51 and 52 of the

Smithsonian Meteorological Tables. The isobars of the weather maps in the

central regions are based on widely scattered stations, with an area 800 miles long

from Urandangie to Broken Hill and 400 miles wide from Finke to Boulia with-

134

out any stations at all, so that the expedition stations were mostly 100 to 200

miles from the nearest meteorological station. However, the pressure gradients

are small in the inland and interpolations could be relied on in most cases to -Ol

of an inch. The diurnal variation at Oodnadatta between 9 a.m. and 3 p.m. was

known to be 0-11 inch, and from this figure, by comparison with Adelaide, a full

graph of hourly variation was constructed. This gave good results on the western

side of the desert, but towards Birdsville the allowance was obviously too great,

as shown by observations taken at different times at the same station, afternoon

determinations being invariably lower, so that for the greater part of the journey

only observations taken at 8.30 a.m., the time for which the weather map was

drawn, were used, and the temperature of the intermediate air was taken as that

read at the time of observation. As both weather map and aneroid were read

to Ol inch, the maximum error from reading would be 20 feet. The results were

remarkably consistent, and all determinations can confidently be relied on to be

correct within 50 feet. The calculated height of Abminga was 716 feet, where

the railway survey gives 719 feet. Andado Station was at 789 feet, and Camp 4 on

the Hale, 634 feet. From there across the desert the fall was fairly uniform down

to 136 feet at Kaliduwarry Station on the Mulligan. There was only one rise, to

the higher ground between the line of water-courses and claypans at Camp 13

and the Hay River, Camp 14 being 60 feet above Camp 13, The two camps on

the Hay, 15 and 16, were at 312 and 306 feet. Annandale Station, on the Mulli-

gan (Camp 21), was 125 feet above the sea, from where the country rose slightly

to 149 feet at Birdsville.

The fall down the Diamantina, from Birdsville to the lake, was found to be

of the order of 18 inches to the mile,

The height at Camp 41, on the edge of the sandridges near the river, worked

out at eight feet, and on the shore of an arm of the lake at the north end, Camp 43,

it was 37 feet below sea level. This is in extraordinary agreement with the rail-

way survey’s level of 35 feet below in the bed of Stuart’s Creek on the south side

of Lake Eyre South, too close an agreement on a single reading to be more than

a fluke if correct. Camps 44, 45, 46 and 47 were all in the sandridges, from 10

to 40 feet above the lake floor. Camp 48 was on a high ridge at a measured

height of 70 feet above the floor of a small lake, making its bed 22 feet below

sea level. Camp 49 was 20 feet above the floor of the main lake, giving 35 feet

below sea level for the lake bed in the south-eastern corner. Camp 50, in the

sandridges near the Clayton entrance, stood at 27 feet above the sea, As men-

tioned above, these results were very gratifyingly consistent. The railway level

at Marree is 155 feet.

IV. METEOROLOGY

Meteorological observations were not carried out very systematically, but

enough were taken to give a picture of the weather in the Simpson Desert in the

winter months. As the information is meagre, even from the few meteorological

stations that do exist round the margins of the area, it is felt that the meteorological

log of the expedition is of sufficient interest to warrant publication in full below.

The notes cover a period of ten weeks, from 27 May to 7 August, 1939. In

the winter time the track of the anticyclones moves northward towards the centre

of the continent and the weather is usually clear and dry. The normal rainfall

months of the desert area are January and February, when the anticyclones have

receded and the monsoonal depressions invade the country from the north, with

rain in the troughs extending south far into and even right across the continent.

This particular winter, however, was apparently anomalous, for more than half

the average rain fell during the ten weeks of the expedition, the whole area

traversed having been inside the 5-inch rainfall line, in the driest part of Aus-

tralia. The rain was associated with both northerly and southerly depressions.

135

In general, the weather was either brilliant, with warm days and frosty nights,

or overcast with drizzle or light rain, with a very rapid transition from one

extreme to the other. Of the 72 days, 52 were clear and sunny and 20 were

heavily overcast.

There were six rainy periods, In every case the cloud came up from the

west, usually with westerly breezes at first, later veering to the south or south-

west, Rain was always associated with a falling barometer. The first rain was

very light, merely a few drops in the night, due to a trough extending up from

South Australia, where rain was general, The second was also very light, and

very local, with the whole area under anticyclonic conditions. The third lasted for

five days, during which over 14 inches fell. This was due to a trough from the

north with rains right through the Northern Territory. A week later there was

another very light fall, followed four days after by a wet period of six days during

which about two inches of rain fell, between 28 June and 4 July. This was also

caused by a trough across the continent, with rain first extending up from the

south and then down from the north. Three weeks later there was some light

precipitation of no consequence.

The inland surface winds rarely exceed 20 miles an hour. Fifteen days

were logged as calm. Only light airs were logged from the north, and no winds

from the north-east. There were often gentle breezes from the east, but most

of the wind blew from between south-south-east and south-west, with some fresh

breezes from the south and fresh to strong breezes from the south-west. Few

winds came from the west, but north-west winds were very strong round Lake

Eyre, where they reached 40 miles an hour on two days. During most of the

eight days spent on the east side of Lake Eyre strong westerly winds blew during

the day, backing and dying away regularly at sunset. In the summer north-east

winds are common, especially on the east side of the desert.

The maximum temperature recorded was 78° F., a chance reading at 2 p.m.

on 28 May. On most clear days the temperature would exceed 70° F., but the

maximum thermometer was rarely set as the party was moving all day. Twenty-

nine settings of the minimum thermometer gave an average of 38°5° F. The

highest was 548° F. during wet weather on the Hale, and the next was 52°0° F.

in the rains at Camp 8. The lowest minimum was 23° F. at Lake Eyre.

Exceptionally heavy dews followed for several nights after rain, but soon

ceased.

The mean of the hundred barometric pressure interpolations from weather

maps (reduced to sea level), was 30:126 inches. The lowest reading was 29-80

inches at Kalliduwarry, Camp 20, and the highest 30°45 inches near Lake Eyre.

The lowest actual aneroid reading was 29°22 inches at Abminga, the highest

point, and the highest reading 30-40 at Lake Eyre.

List oF REFERENCES

Manpican, C. T. 1929 An Aerial Reconnaissance into the south-eastern

portion of Central Australia. Proc. Roy, Geog. Soc. Aust., 5. Aust.

Branch. Session 1928-29.

Manpican, C. T. 1930 Lake Eyre, South Australia. Geog. Jour., 76, No. 3,

215-240

Mapican, C. T. 1936 The Australian Sandridge Deserts. The Geog. Review,

26, No. 2, 205-227

Manican, C. T. 1937 A Review of the Arid Regions of Australia and their

Economic Potentialities. Report. Aust. and N.Z. Assn. for the

Advancement of Science, 23, 375-397

Manican, C. T. 1938 The Simpson Desert and its Borders. Proc. Roy. Soc.

N.S.W., 71, 503-535

136

"N 02‘ ysnoiyy

poyoeq Sey PUIAA “painsvau Yipp uo ‘sty OOST

aouls ures Your T—enulju09 ystur pue ules WsryT “IN OL/OL SATB "NT £9 PPr-62 OOrL ocr SI

WYSE [pe urer {Aep ye azziap ywWSsrq “AN WOIZIN 01/01 2 20¢ —-8h-6Z ss OOTZSs«OS ial

YSU ys] Surmp ures -s3d gz IN OT/OT “ASS S 6S 86-62 OOIT 9p al

p99 = LL-6Z)—00Z sO a

‘sid ¢ Syst yse] ures yy By Ar, ‘SV EN OL/0L 92391q ‘S 9$ £9°62 0060 S6F el

"M WOE SY OL/0T Yew gr ass £9 9-62 OO8T S6Pr ZI

“M WOT IY 01/6 “yds cy ay 9$ 96-62 0060 209 ral

“M WIT TD O1T/8

“M HOTS TD O1/T

a 99 96°62 00ZT 209

eet OE OD OO sb sh <P im Oo ON IN 60 00 00 00

“

Toary eH 9D O1/T wdur gL | 6§ £662 0060 peg or

Joany aeH 8S 2S-62 ool +89 6

UNS ysiig “Buyusiour Burmp paresyy ‘soary opey ‘23 01/1 eae OL Ly-6Z OOST FEO 6

ounf g jo W4su Buynp ures syurod OY weary aepy AA'S WO Oy SOT /OT ydur gt “as's 09 «£662 0060 0¢9 6

Surusiow Alea

ur yer Jo sdoip May YIM YseorIAQ “seATY oye ET “M Wor SV 01/6 WOUWOT “AS gps 89 Bb-6z ooZt ogo 8

“MS Wor DV OT/¢ Sie “Ny 6€ Of Ch-6Z Of80 399 £

1291) 01/0 sue -a'S — 69 Zb6Z of0z 3899 9

38319 01/0 SaIe “AA'N — 98 2-62 of20 225 9

FEIN OL/O wyes Cas 8S $S-62 —ONGE = 22S S

I ‘ON ‘oJ0g opepuy e919 01/0 cage S Of 9S 95-62 0060 98 — +F

woes opepuy TIDOT/O “WEMOZ"STM'S G-BE 8-0G 20-62 0060 68 — +

uoneis opepuy yaa gz “Sq A'S — — — 68h — ¢

uoneIS opepuy 18319 01/0 wey ¢-ep _ _ 68r — 2

UOZiIOY *S YO OS

uonNe}S opepuy VY OL/S 20h 69S 89-6Z 0060 BRO ST t

: ~— Sun

WoReIS Opepuy HIIDO/O “ydu ge Sq M's th = = 0060 «68h Cl STS

woHe|g opepuy — 8S £662 O01 68 — oF

“AM Woz dn psaour

Pnopd Gysru ysel ures yyy AtaA ssoary oyu F831 01/0 ‘Yau oT “S — £9 %b-6Z 0060 zg — og

esurmqy — OL . 2-62 SIZl 614 —~ 62

JOY OUT — 04 OF-6% 0091 zs — 62

duems s pryseyy ar arr Soa — 8f SS-62 OOP 96F — 8

(A8W 8Z) (S°S2 ‘xe

SHIEM SOTIeYD ne “SBE PL 8862 OUST LS LR

— AR

‘A'Beq ‘aq‘Beq = soyouy "say Va “ON 6f6L

SHIVUID YT pro PULA ‘dway, "duay, “reg euny ‘TSW dweg azeq

UW oy saoqy

DOT TVOIDOTOXORLAW—6E61 NOILIGGdXA LYASaa NOSdWIS

.137

SBUIUSAS Ul ‘AA WIOIy

dn ame ng y ‘ep suuns ‘“aeayy ‘saargy uediynzy

Aep ][@ uyer ysry ‘soary uesynyy

(your %) Uyer 4B YM WYysU ye “A'S 0}

peSueys ‘Aep Surinp "MA'N PuUlAA “JOAIY UesrNPY

Simoy O02 Fe Aypider Buy

“AOU NID ‘WYySiu Surmp «AA wor dn sures pnoyy

Jeaj2 pue wyes

"A'S OF 'M'N Wor Aep Burinp sezeaig

Wye. pUe Ivy ‘“Jopiog purjsusen?y

‘pereayo usy}

“ny 0} pnop “yd gz 38 "AA 0} pasueyo

PUM ‘UOoUIaIe Bung “IeajQ “1epiog puejsusens)

daarny ABE

‘daa AVY

Jaane AvP

Jiasap

“TOATY ACE

Jaary Aezy

FYSIU jsey urer jo sdoip moi

BULII}Ua BUIS Jssy ‘FYyYSU ysey yso1g

sie “MN

S}YBIu 9914} Ise] Map Aaeozy

Auuns pue sea

‘urd g ye 'g “urd 7 ie sure *-N ‘ssoyuoKjour proy):

SuLIva]I MOoU—jYsIu Jse] Bupinp siomoys

Aep [Je 3s#01940

Pposvao Urey “duryvaiq pnoj>

sysewoy

(penupU0d) DOT TVOIDOIOMOALAW—666l NOILIGHAXA LNASAC NOSdWIS

IN OT/OL

“M WOST IN OL/0T

"SV OI/0I

"M Wor} Tt) OL/T

7¥aq 01/0

183{) 01/0

4¥21D 01/0

4¥91D 01/0

“M Wesy "9S O1/8

“MUDTD 01/0

TP3TD OT/0

Ava) 01/0

Tea 01/0

FPa19 01/0

72919 01/0

38219 OT/0

“S Wort ND “IH 01/0

Te91) OT/0

“AD. OT/0T

“M'S Wot} ND OT/8

‘9S OT/0T

“MA'S WOIE 9S 01/6

prog

yd ST SA'S

Se “A'S

wyey

tye)

uryes)

mye)

se “MIN

WySyN

sie “Nl

sure M'N

azaoIg “A'S'S

Se N

32991q °S

9za01q *N

‘JeA

BZI9IG “AAS

yd 02 °S

yur 0Z SA'S

PULA,

“a *BaqT

‘dura y,

“UHAL

409

“A390,

‘dua,

$9°6¢

96£°62

€8° 62

£3-62

82°62

CL6¢

965 +62

8°62

65°62

29°62

£9-62

69°62

£9°6€

b9-62

$9 +62

£9°62

£9°02

TZ-62

€L:6C

£2-6¢

02-62

€L£°62

09-62

£8+67

vS-62

09-62

£9-6¢

Ch 6C

sayouy

“eg

002

0080

00ZT

0080

0021

0080

008T

0060

0080

006

OOrT

006T

00ST

0£20

O01?

0080

006T

00ST

0080

O&ZT

0060

0081

0060

006T

0060

0002

0060

009T

‘SIE

aul

LI 0z

oft 0z

OFT 0g

891 6T

801 ot

96T 8I

961 8t

£9¢ Lt

£07 Zt

90¢ OL

90¢ oI

90¢ oT

cle ST

zie ST

c6e ¥I

S6e val

cee eT

cee ft

gee eT

See et

ore ct

09¢ IT

T6¢ or

T6e Or

Sep 6

oey 6

oP 8

9SP 8

Sh 8

‘ht ‘ON

"TS dug

aaoqy

Way

138

Aauanol

JO 4Sai Joy snonoidsuos jou pue Yysu jst]

yoyySy yonws yng Jszasap Ysnoiyy [ye smep Aavayy 38319 01/0 Sezaaiq‘N Spf Sp 8-62 0080 — oe = dt

ae Jaq 01/0 §9z901q “A a GS 96°62 0080 TZ 62 oT

sOUIICM VMolpuy e219) 01/0 mye) — 8F Z0-0€ 0080 86 82 ST

SPOUIIVM Ul Maipuy ‘M949 9D 01/2 azaalg tqay OA — 9 eL-0€ 0060 86 82 bt

Sy +82aqD 01/0 mye — SF bT-0€ 0080 SOT Le el

—~ — 960-08 0091 SOT Ze el

Je] 01/0 yd gS — @ 960-08 0080 oct 9¢ OT

Pnop> “AD'S 01/6

yy ‘sinoy Oost 1 ‘ep ye “yd og “pum “MA'S'S JED OT/O 22901q TERT MA'S'S core |e cae o06T oOzI 92 It

aTASPLg JIT 01/0 “MS es ae | = 000 6vT Se iat

phoys suros yy “yd (6°29 "XeN)

Of 0} ezaeI1q “(M BuoNs Aep Buying “eyplasparg 12319 01/0 yam aT A'S fr Of 82:62 0080 6FI se

aIAsplrg — S$ 46% 0061 orl Ss 6

(299 XW)

aTTASpag > ae Tb? tal es 8F 9S 06:62 0060 6rI sé 6

Aep wypeo ‘reap ‘oy Asparg Se Te a OS = om orl sc 8

Buueas Burinp pareays 44S “OTASPArEL capes oe oe = a 6rl 1 4

[[e }SBJeAQ ‘Burusas sey Areva uyes jo sdoip May ‘2S OL/0T mye as es 86:6¢ 0080 80T ve 8069

poseoi9Uur

Ayjenpesd uoou ye ‘NOI “Surusow ye svay 2S OT/0T ‘deta gt “Ss — 96 26:62 = Q09T 801 ve S$

Avaq 01/0 ‘Ss cae 6F 16-62 0080 bri £é §

yysu ype Jeajg ‘sanoy ?

000z £4 pereap> ANS ‘etayMAIoAS noe BulAy :

TIeM PUIM Jog “Ulel OU ‘Aep [Te SEIIIAO “M'S WO04E 9S OT/0T yd cz A'S a Zs 98-62 0081 bl £2 >

Bunesl) ‘SuIUIoU ul siamoys 148] "MS WOIT 9S O1/€ “yd oz SA'S oa 0s 16°62 0060 Ort Ze t

Sep [je yo pue uo ures yysry c= hy - <a 0S 82°62 001z Ort ce £

BULIvI]O MOU S}siyy

“sinoY OORT sours sid pg Sures WB] “Jeary ues YW IN OT/0T Sire — 96 £2:62 0060 vA I ¢&

“8111. 9060 20UIs “s}d QO “Sutures [JNS “Jeary uesTyN IN 01/01 a 7 0081 ZI IZ ¢€

Surures NS “any uesynW ‘A Wosy IN OT/0T yur cy a re — ras 009T Sel IZ 4

Sino pz ISB] UE yout % ‘Burures [NS weary uesTINW IN OT/0T “2 +S L8°62 0060 SZ vA vA

WUuled

[3S pue ‘sinoy OOS] 3B Uesaq Urey “JOANy UeBITIN IT IN O1/01 as — &09 68-62 0002 vA 1é I

: sinoy Ofgd 32% paddojs

‘Suyusowm Apia Ur ures qsry weary wes ‘IS O1/0T ‘TEA — 89 9F8-6Z 0060 St 02 I

—Anf

"q'59 Wt ae) soyou "Sr 4 ‘

asemiont proig PULA duoy ‘duoy wg = om, «TSE dua Sea

wh av aaoqy

sys

(penunucp) DOT TVOINDOIONOALAN 6661 NOILIGUdXE LAASAd NOSdWIS

Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1945 Vol. 69, Plate V

Fig. 1

The end of the Todd River? from Poodnitera JU.

Fig, 2

Allua Soak, Hale River, Camp 4

Tras. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1945 Vol. 69, Plate VI

Fig, 1

Typical Simpson Desert Sandridge, near Andado Station.

Fig. 2

The Desert, between Camps 9 and 10,

Trans. Roy. Sac, S. Aust., 1945 Vol, 69, Plate VIT

Fig. 1

A Ciayoan in the middle of the Desert, between Camps 11 and

owt

te,

The Expedition descending a Sandridge near the Queensland Boriler,

between Campe 17 and 18.

Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 1945 Vol. 69, Plate VITI

Fig. 1

Camp 15, in the Hay River Valley.

Fig. 2

Camp 21, on the River Mulligan.

‘Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 1945 Vol, 69, Plate IX

Fig. 1

Tree blazed at Camp 16, River Hay

Fig. 2

Lake Eyre, at the middle of the east side,

MT RIDDOCK

@STN.

Fae Mah,

Oar ye ee ARLTUN

ew OR aminne

te” RANGES

ei, i edie 3

are

4c} _-

‘Doctors > DEEP WELL a

STONES” H.5-

MT, CHARLOTTE x2

CHAMBERS

ef:

YE MANLON'S MINE

{s° \ cK.

Transactions Royal Society South Australia, 69, (1), 1945

137 ; ne ee, 18's

ULLURICKA «7

ALKEAH W.HzoW He”

z oi

A COCKROACH

> LAGOON

sh MT GUID

i GOYDERS PILLARS

a WT EWING

140

Pins 0”

ANDADO BORE.” 4%

586’ NOL

5 pene

ae 2 STN:

a an “” 189

’

ANDADO- BORE “46 3

“NO 26 patie?

A d ids Swanp 496"

“Sy \\o VANACOORA

SA): BORE®

\ \ ‘ 4

. A

\, | ag, Garr. rieTeins V4

\ | arr. sar

ip M7. WINNECKE wen

r BARRINGTON 3 WOOLDRIDGE

MT. DOBBIE DR

* ;

TERRITORY

WOOLCANA

Jy : on BORE ‘s

Z ~

GLENGYLE

sTnN®\L\MA ae

Fo aa ETINGAMBRA

cale \7ile.s.

3o 40 50 60 70

8o (7 FOO

TERRITORY

134

TF E.MOORE. GOVERNMENT PHOTOLITHOGRAPHER, ADELAIDE

TIA DIGAN. (744,

135

rq )

PUTHAT NG 0 4 4p epba’s CORNER QUEENSLAND

WAN AUSTRALIA

o MURRABURT 4

TIVE WELL ta®

la, Pay

778)

GOYDER'S_LAGO! ar

BORES fanghs

139.

sasplipues uy

Wystu 1e pereayo ‘hep

SULNP PHol "sy QOST 3@ UMop Pq yaw

of ‘Aep ye pum +A NM Buons ‘adOys. FeoNy

pareayo. Ays nay

“si 0007 18 UMOp parp ‘Buywaas wi + AQ 03 peyoeq

“MIN'N Woy Aep qe pura Su0ijg. -aspiipues u~E

uMop Surdp ‘jyStu [Te purm ‘N ‘M’N'N

‘pd Op 07 ep Surinp asoi pur yy ‘aSPLIpUuRs uO

aSpLIpues UG

paddoip 3: uaym

“sIY 0081 ©} 0060 PUIM "S saq}Ig ‘eBprpues uO

SInOy O61 38 Wyes pue ivazs. ‘pereayo Aye

“npers ANS ‘yd ¢z ‘uoousaqye TT2 Pulm "Ss Jantg

Atala Buuaaa ay} UT Wye 0}

Surddoip ‘spurm so} AA tp Sung ‘aspiupurs uo

WAT aye] s10y4s

yd Og “M'S OF MA Pur YEA

‘utusour BuLinp pareayo "Ny woay propo Sures-o

sdoip Mo} U}IM {YSU Jsey Burnp. iseossa0 Stee g:

yey Jeary

esplipurs ud

asplipurs uO

asplipues ug

noes alee)

34SIu Surinp

pasespo ‘Aep ye ures Ajsiut wy Biy.A1aAQ. ‘yuasosd

78 PUB JUS yse] wer sdoip- May ““‘uosey yunoyyt

uoser) Junopy,

HSBOI9AO OUIBIAg Aypenpeis) “Aep [fe pura “y's

sep ye

92991q 'S “Buyuaae ay} UE paieaya nq pemroy

Nj Iq ewos Aep Burinq ‘aiog ucose-y $Japfsory

‘Yd 9z 32 "S 0} "MAS Malq pura ABps93sa

syIeway

(penunu0d) DOT TVOIDOTONOALAN—EE6I NOILIGHdXa Laasaq NOSdWIs

4¥9]9.01/0

4¥91D 01/0

“M MOA OW OL/S

4831) 01/0

2891 01/0

7891 01/0

2S O1/01

“MA'NUL‘OW “S819 01/0

aBaT) 01/0

4e9T 01/0

A¥at 01/0

4eaf 01/0

“FOUN GO") OT/0

aval 01/0

“A'S BERD O1/0

SV OI/01

OV OT/0I

“MMOLE TD O1/Z

7P219) 01/0

7821. 01/0

Pro)

aZaaIq "MA

"yet OZ “MM 'N'M

‘yeu ¢Z “MANN

SBN

azearq"s

mye

8ZaaIg "AAS

wye5

HeULOS M's

Sezasiq ‘ay

Sezoolg ‘a

“yd ur Or Cay

‘yd oT oa

sazeaiq: ay

mye)

wyey

sire ‘Wipes,

‘yd OT og

sue ays

“yds OT “Ss

‘yond ur Or ae

ele PUI

afb 0S

pike

PA ae 2)

f% BE

ao Re

eee A.

es RS

ce a4

—~ OP

#62. FP

manareeiice «13

fr OO

oemetaen: 1 4

a OS

aes 1-7

me 0S

Suan 4-1

ism tia)

'a3eq- a faq

"data,

AY:

‘dus,

“UW

ZTE

ee-0E

OP-0F

6£-08

Se-0F

0£-0€

€7:0¢

21-0¢

vE-08

9bZ-0E

£2°0€

81-0€

sayouy

iss

42+ 08

Si 66

8i-+ BF

8+ Lb

8+ oF

Le oP

fo bb

con oth

“oe EP

ca ch

8 Ty

9¢ Or

92 6¢

PAN 8F

we Ze

9¢ of

se se

£or $e

£01 FE

0s &e

ras) ce

es Tg

ta. “ON

"TSH. dura

aa0gy

Wa H

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE ECOLOGY OF CALANDRA ORYZAE L. AND

RHIZOPERTHA DOMINICA FAB. (COLEOPTERA) IN STORED WHEAT

BY L. C. BIRCH, WAITE AGRICULTURAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE,

UNIVERSITY OF ADELAIDE (READ 14 JUNE 1945)

Summary

The storage, for unusually long periods, of large quantities of wheat in Australia directed attention

early in the war to the possibility of infestation of the grain by insects. It soon became apparent that

the two most important primary pests of wheat in Australia were Calandra oryzae L. and

Rhizopertha dominica Fab. (Gay and Ratcliffe 1941). It was appreciated that the extent to which

infestations of these insects would develop was dependent upon the temperature and moisture

content of the wheat in storage. And the information that was then known of the effect of

temperature and moisture on the biology of the two species was summarised by Davidson (1940)

and Ratcliffe, Gay and Fitzgerald (1940). It was evident, however, that the knowledge available was

scanty and quite inadequate. The writer, therefore, set out to determine as precisely as possible the

effect of temperature and moisture on the rate of multiplication of the two species concerned, and to

find out the ocnditions under which they could not increase in numbers. For this purpose, it was

necessary to determine by experiments the biotic constants for these insects. The biotic constyants

describe quantitatively the rates of egg-laying and the rates of development and survival of the

different stages of the insects under various conditions of temperature and moisture (c.f Chapman

and Baird 1934). The experimental work on the results of which the biotic constants were

determined has been described in a number of papers given in the list of references. The results of

that work are further discussed in the present paper.

140

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE ECOLOGY OF CALANDRA ORYZAE L. AND

RHIZOPERTHA DOMINICA FAB. (COLEOPTERA) IN STORED WHEAT

By L. C. Brrc#

Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of Adelaide

[Read 14 June 1945]

Piates X AND XI

J. INTRODUCTION

The storage, for unusually long periods, of large quantities of wheat in

Australia directed attention early in the war to the possibility of infestation of

the grain by insects. It soon became apparent that the two most important

primary pests of wheat in Australia were Calandra oryzae L. and Rhizopertha

dominica Fab. (Gay and Ratcliffe 1941). It was appreciated that the extent to

which infestations of these insects would develop was dependent upon the tem-

perature and moisture content of the wheat in storage. And the information that

was then known of the effect of temperature and moisture on the biology of the

two species was summarised by Davidson (1940) and Ratcliffe, Gay and Fitz-

gerald (1940). It was evident, however, that the knowledge available was scanty

and quite inadequate. The writer, therefore, set out to determine as precisely as

possible the effect of temperature and moisture on the rate of multiplication of

the two species concerned, and to find out the conditions under which they could

not increase in numbers. For this purpose it was necessary to determine by

experiments the biotic constants for these insects. The biotic constants describe

quantitatively the rates of egg-laying and the rates of development and survival

of the different stages of the insects under various conditions of temperature and

moisture (c.f. Chapman and Baird 1934). The experimental work on the results

of which the biotic constants were determined has been described in a number of

papers given in the list of references. The results of that work are further dis-

cussed in the present paper.

In the course of the investigations, it was found that there were at least two

strains of C. oryzae, a “large strain” and a “small strain”. Besides differing in

size, the two strains have different biotic constants. The “large strain” has only

been found occurring naturally in maize in Australia, although it breeds readily

in wheat in laboratory cultures. Except where otherwise stated, all references in

this paper are to the “small strain.”

Il. Tue Brorrc ConsTANTs OF CALANDRA ORYZAE

(i) The rate of mortality and speed of development of the immature stages.

The effect of dryness and unfavourable temperatures on the development of

C. oryzae varies with the different stages of the insect. The eggs are the stage

in the life cycle least susceptible to adverse affects of dryness and high tempera-

ture. They can develop and hatch under conditions which are lethal to other

stages. The eggs hatched, for example, when the relative humidity of the air

was as low as 27%; wheat at this relative humidity has a moisture content of

8%.) The larvae, on the other hand, were unable to survive when the wheat had

4 moisture content less than 10°5%. And in wheat of 10°5% moisture content

@) The values for moisture content of wheat given in this paper were determined

by drying the wheat for 72 hours at 105° C., the moisture content was then expressed as

the percentage loss of the original weight.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

141

the mortality exceeded 75% at all temperatures. The first larval instar was more

susceptible than later instars. If the conditions were sufficiently favourable for

the survival of the first instar, then there was practically a hundred per cent.

survival of the later instars and pupae.

TEMPERATURE °C

T -

t ¥ ¢ T T t T Tv t T

fe)

25%-~ ~~

ANALNOD FYNLSIOW LNIDUId

10 stn O%

Lut at L n 4. 2 ok. i i L i

lg 16 18 20 22

Fig. 1

Showing lines of equal mortality for the small strain of Calandra oryzae in

development from the egg to the adult stage. The small figures are the

experimental values.

Figure 1 shows the mortality in development from egg to adult, for the com-

plete range of temperature and moisture within which there is any survival of

insects at all. Lines of equal mortality have been interpolated from the experi-

mental values, which are shown in small figures. In wheat of 14% moisture

content some insects were able to develop from egg to adult at any temperature

of 7 TEMPERATURE °C.

; 7 +

ZO}

Comment RR, DOMINICA

ema ORV ZAL

Q OnmmmO R. DOMINICA

woe CL ORYZAE 4

160h

\ is FY; 26 “36 35 38 16

Fig. 2

Showing the time required for the development of C. oryeae and R. dominica

in wheat of 14% moisture content at different temperatures.

A, “Egg to Adult”. B, “The Egg Stage”.

142

between 15°° C. and 34°C. In wheat drier than 14% moisture content the range

of temperature within which any insects survived was smaller and the mortality

at any particular temperature was higher. The temperature range within which

there was any survival in wheat of 10°5% moisture content, for example, was

18° C. to 30° C.; the higher mortality can be seen from the figure.

The time taken for the development of the egg at various temperatures under

favourable conditions of moisture is shown in fig. 2B, and that for the develop-

ment from egg to adult in grain of 14% moisture content is shown in fig. 2 A.

The egg develops in the shortest time at 32°3° C. taking 3-3 days; but the larva

develops fastest at a lower temperature, namely, 29°C. At this temperature the

insect develops from egg to adult in 25 days; the adult then remains a few days

inside the grain before it bores its way out. Development from egg to adult was

longest at 15-2°C., taking over seven months; at this low temperature the

mortality was 75% in grain of 14% moisture content.

TEMPERATURE °C.

T + a |

384

ia]

[aa]

—

Fig. 3

Showing lines of equal egg production for the small strain of Calandra oryzae.

Small figures are experimental values.

Of the total time taken to develop from egg to adult, the pupa occupied about

25% and the prepupa 6% ; most of the time (about 55%) was spent in the feed-

ing larval stage.

When wheat was drier than 14% moisture content, development was slightly

longer than the times shown in fig. 2. In wheat of 11% moisture content, for

example, C. oryzae took 2-4 days longer to complete development at 29° C.

(u) The rate of oviposition.

C. oryzae begins to lay eggs within the first few days of the female boring

its way out of the grain, and it reaches the maximum rate of egg-laying at the end

of the first or second week, depending on the temperature. The females then

continue laying eggs for about three months, The rate at which eggs were laid

during this period did not remain constant for any length of time except at tem-

peratures of 23°C. and lower. At temperatures above 23° C., the rate at which

143

eggs were laid gradually fell off after the peak rate had been reached in the first

two weeks.

The total number of eggs laid and the speed with which they are laid depends

not only upon temperature and the moisture of the grain, but also upon the density

of the insects in the grain. At a density of one insect in 50 grains for example,

the rate of egg-laying was maintained at a higher level, more especially after the

first eight weeks of egg-laying, as compared with the rate of egg-laying at a density

of one insect in ten grains. This resulted in a greater number of eggs being laid

at the lower density. In an infestation of stored wheat, the density of the insects

would, of course, change as the infestation developed. Little has yet been pub-

TEMPERATURE °C.

T Tt ¥

30 26

ANJLNOD FWNLSIOW “LNIDU3ad

Fig. 4

Showing lines of equal mortality of Rhizopertha dominica in development

from the egg to the adult stage. Small figures are experimental values.

lished, however, on the way in which density changes and its relation to the move-

ments of insects in the wheat.

The total numbers of eggs laid under different conditions of temperature and

moisture (at a density of one insect in 10 grains) are shown in fig. 3. Lines of

equal egg production have been interpolated from the experimental data (shown

in small figures). The most favourable conditions for egg-laying are shown by

the isopleth for 300, #.¢., C. oryzae lays 300 or more eggs at temperatures between

24° C. and 30° C in wheat having moisture contents between 13% and 14%. The

maximum number of 384 eggs was laid in wheat of 14% moisture content at

25°5° C. Eggs were laid at the greatest rate at temperatures between 25°5° C.

and 29° C., the actual temperature depending upon the density of the insects in

the grain.

The combinations of temperature and moisture, which are so unfavourable

that no eggs are laid, are shown by the isopleth for zero in fig. 3. When moisture

144

is not the limiting factor, 15° C. and 35° C. are the lowest and highest temperatures

at which any eggs are laid. When grain is drier than 14% moisture content, the

range of temperature within which any eggs are laid is smaller. C. oryzae is

only able to lay eggs within a very narrow range of moisture content. Even in

wheat of 12% moisture content the number of eggs laid is one-quarter of the

number laid in wheat of 14% moisture content. And in wheat of 10% moisture

content, the driest in which any eggs are laid, no more than a dozen eggs were

laid at any temperature.

III. Tue Brortc Constants or RH1IZOPERTHA DOMINICA

(i) The rate of mortality and speed of development of the immature stages.

All the stages of R. dominica were able to survive under drier conditions and

at higher temperatures than the various stages of C. oryzae. As with C. oryzae,

the eggs were the most resistant of all the stages to the harmful effects of dryness

and high temperature. Some eggs (9%) hatched at the high temperature of

39° C., and some were able to hatch in an atmosphere of about zero relative

humidity (ie., over concentrated sulphuric acid). The cuticle of the egg is

apparently sufficiently impermeable to prevent much loss of moisture from the

egg in dry atmospheres. The great resistance of eggs of R. dominica as com-

pared with C. oryzae is correlated with the particular micro-environments in which

the eggs develop. The eggs of C. oryzae are laid inside the grain and so are pro-

tected from the sudden changes of temperature and humidity of the outside

atmosphere; those of R. dominica, on the other hand, are laid outside the grain,

where they are subject to more severe desiccating influences.

When the first stage larva hatches from the egg it proceeds to find its way

into the grain. If the grain is damaged, it enters through cracks in the grain.

In sound grain the larvae generally enter at the embryo end where the covering

testa is loose, This freely-wandering larva is the weakest link in the chain of the

life cycle; it is more easily killed by dryness and high temperature than any other

stage. Under any combination of temperature and moisture, a large proportion

of the first stage larvae perish without entering the grain. When, however, entry

into the grain is facilitated, as when the grain is cracked and damaged, a much

larger number of first stage larvae enter and become established in the grain. Quite

a high proportion of the larvae that succeed in entering both damaged and un-

damaged grain, die in the first instar ; the hazards of entering the grain apparently

weaken these larvae. It was also found that R. dominica was able to develop in

drier grain when the grain was damaged; this was due to the greater number of

first stage larvae which were able to enter the grain without dying. In wheat of

9% moisture content, for example, some insects were able to complete their

development from egg to adult at any temperature between 26° C. and 36° C,,

when the grain was damaged; but in sound grain of 9% moisture content, the only

temperature at which any insects were able to survive was 34° C. Wheat of 9%

moisture content was the driest in which any insects were able to survive.

Fig. 4 shows the mortality in development from the egg to adult for the com-

plete range of temperature and moisture within which any insects were able to

survive. Reduction of moisture content below 14% did not have anything like

the same effect on R. dominica as it had with C. oryzae. There is no significant

difference between the mortality of insects developing in wheat of 14% moisture

content and 12% moisture content (compare with fig. 1). Not until the moisture

content was reduced below 11% did mortality increase greatly. At most tempera-

tures the mortality in wheat of 10% moisture content was about twice as high as

the mortality at 11%.

The isopleths of equal mortality in fig. 4 tend to lie concentrically around the

intersection of the ordinate for 14% moisture content and the abscissa for 34° C.;

145

this is because mortality was less at 34° C. in wheat of all moisture contents and

least in wheat of 14% moisture content. It is associated with the facts that

development takes place in the shortest time at 34° C. and temperatures above

34° C. begin to exert a direct harmful effect, until development is prevented

altogether at 39° C. The highest temperature at which any insects developed from

egg to adult was 38°6° C.; at this temperature 17% survived when the grain was

damaged.

Fig. 2A and 2B show the time taken by the egg and the other stages to

complete their development in grain of 14% moisture content. The development

from egg to adult took place in the shortest time at 34° C. (24:7 days), and the

longest time at 22° C. (84 days). Most of the time was spent in the feeding

larval stages; the egg stage occupied about 16% of the total time, whilst the

prepupal and pupal stages together occupied 15% of the total time. In comparing

TEMPERATURE °C.

2 ¥

i: ins eee ie

ob.

LANILNOD FYNLSICW LNADW3d

Fig. 5

Showing lines of equal egg production for Rhizopertha dominica.

Small figures are experimental values.

fig. 2A and 2B, it will be seen that the eggs developed fastest at a higher tem-

perature (36°C.) than the temperature (34°C.) at which the other stages

developed fastest.

Fig. 2 A shows that R. dominica took longer to develop than C. oryzae at all

temperatures except at 32:2" C. At 32-2° C. the two species developed from egg

to adult in 26 days. At higher temperatures R. dominica is able to develop,

whereas C. oryzae ceases at 34° C.

(uw) The rate of Oviposition,

Females begin laying eggs within the first few days of their emergence from

the grain, and if plenty of food is available, the maximum rate of egg-laying is

reached in the first fortnight. They continue laying up to four months under

favourable conditions. It was found that the number of eggs laid was dependent

not only upon temperature, moisture and the density of the insects, but varied

146

according to whether the insects had access to damaged grains for food. When

they did not have access to damaged grains, they only laid eggs at one-eighth of

the normal rate. It would seem that the adults have greater difficulty in feeding

in sound grain than in grain which has been damaged. The cracks in damaged

grain were favourite sites for the deposition of eggs, very few eggs were laid

loose; in sound grain they were mainly deposited in the crease or under the loose

testa of the grain.

At all temperatures below 34° C. the rate at which eggs were laid fluctuated

widely over an average value for most of the life of the insect, without reaching

any one definite peak. At 34° C., and at higher temperatures, a peak value for rate

of egg-laying was reached in the first fortnight, and after that it gradually fell

until oviposition ceased altogether.

Fig. 5 shows the number of eggs laid in wheat of various moisture contents

at different temperatures. The greatest number of eggs (415) were laid at

34° C. in wheat of 14% moisture content. In wheat of 14% moisture content,

oviposition ceased at a temperature between 15° C. and 18° C. and at temperatures

higher than 39°C. Dryness had much less influence in reducing the number of

eggs laid by R. dominica compared with the effect of dryness on the egg-laying

of C. oryzae. The number of eggs laid did not fall off markedly until the moisture

content of the wheat was below 9% (c.f. fig. 5). Wheat of 8% moisture content

was the driest in which any eggs were laid.

IV. Tue Mutrtipeiication or C. orvZAE AND R. DOMINICA

(1) The multiplication in one generation.

The development of an infestation of insects in wheat is dependent upon the

conditions being sufficiently favourable for the numbers to increase from one

generation to the next. The actual number of insects which will be produced by

a single pair in one generation will depend upon the value of the biotic constants

for egg laying and the mortality in the development from the egg to the adult

insect. The values of these constants have been given in preceding sections of

this paper (c.f. fig. 1, 3,4 and 5). They have now been combined in the follow-

ing formula to give the multiplication of insects in one generation:

The multiplication Total number per cent. of eggs giving rise

inone generation = of eggs laid x to adult insects

per female

2x 100

The formula is based on a sex ration of unity. It has been shown previously that

the number of males and females arising from a random selection of eggs of both

C. oryzae and R. dominica is the same.

TABLE I

Showing the multiplication of the smali strain of C. oryzae in one generation

in wheat of various moisture contents at different temperatures.

Per cent.

Moisture Temperature °C.

Content 13 15-2 18-2 25-530 32 33-5 34 35

10 - —_ —_ ~~ 0 0

10-5 - —_ —_ 0 1 1-2 0 base Say ep!

11 - — 0 1-5 13 21 0 a ie a

12 - — 0 — — — — 1-2 6 mg

14 - 0 1@) 1+ 179 155 80 4 O-1 0

(approx.) >

©) A population could maintain its numbers from one generation to the next at

15°C. in wheat of 14% moisture content, but each generation would take a year to

complete.

147

TABLE II

Showing the multiplication of R. dominica in one generation in wheat of

various moisture contents at different temperatures.

Per cent.

Moisture Temperature °C.

Content 18-3 22:0 26:0 34-0 36:0 38:2 39-2

8 j sound grain - -_ = —_ _ 0 ae ~~ arias

damaged ©) - - _ 0 0 0 — _

9 { sound - - “ -_ — 0 3 0 _ a

l damaged - - -— 0 53 36 11 a _

10 § sound - - - - 0 19 34 10 0 _

(damaged - - - 3 ae nen —_ 2

11. § sound - - * _ = 11 — — ane 5 rae

i damaged~- - oo gs _ aad — —_ —_ —

14 § sound - - + - 0 eet — 162 = 7 0

( damaged - - - 0 _ —_ —_ 37 0

Plates X and XI show the data of Tables I and II respectively in the form of

three-dimensional graphs. The points on the graphs where the lines rise from the

basal grid indicate the conditions under which the insects can increase in numbers

from one generation to the next, i.e., where the values of the vertical ordinate

exceed unity, Under the most favourable conditions the two species have about

the same potential rate of increase, ie., in wheat of 14% moisture content

C. oryzae can increase in numbers 179 times in one generation at 25-5° C.; at

34° C. R. dominica can increase in numbers 162 times.

Wheat of 10% and 11% moisture content is within the favourable zone for

the multiplication of RK. dominica over a wide range of temperatures, but these

moisture contents are near the lower limit of C. oryzae. This striking difference

is chiefly due to the fact that R. dominica maintains a high rate of egg-laying in

wheat of 10% and 11% moisture content, whereas the number of eggs laid by

C. oryzae is greatly reduced at moisture contents below 13% (c.f. fig. 3 and 5).

Although Rk. dominica has a multiplication rate of 10 to 34 in wheat of 10%

moisture content between 26° C. and 36° C. (depending upon the temperature),

the mortality in development from egg to adult is high, varying from 74 to 88

(depending upon the temperature). This shows that under conditions in which

the insect can multiply rapidly there can also be high mortality of the immature

stages,

The ranges of temperature at different moisture contents of wheat within

which the two species can maintain or increase the size of the population are

summarised from Tables 1 and 2 in Table IIT,

Taste IIT

Showing the range of temperature within which a population can maintain or increase

its size from one generation to the next.

Per cent. Temperature °C.

moisture content Calandra oryzae Rhizopertha dominica

8-0 - - - 0 0

9-0 - - - 0 : 26-0 — 36-0

10-0 - - - 6 22:0 — 38-2

10°5 ee ee 25-5 ~ 30-0 _

11-0 - - * 18:2 — 30-0 22-0 — 38-2

12-0 - - - 18-2 — 33-5 i

14-0 - - - 15-2 ~ 33-5 22-0 — 38-2

() The grain was damaged by making two oblique scalpel cuts. The figures for

the number of eggs laid, used in calculating the two sets of figures above, were obtained

from insects which had damaged grain to feed on.

148

(it) The rate of multiplication (biotic potential).

A knowledge of the number of times an insect will multiply in one genera-

tion under known conditions will indicate whether those conditions are favourable

or not for the development of an infestation, but it tells nothing of the speed with

which the infestation could develop. This is dependent upon the time the insect

takes to develop from the egg to the egg-laying adult (fig. 2A). Now, this

factor has been incorporated with the data on the rate of multiplication in one

generation by multiplying the values in Tables I and II by 100 days required

for development from egg to adult. This gives the rate of multiplication in

100 days (the biotic potential). Fig. 6 has been derived in this way. It shows

the rate of multiplication of the two species over their complete temperature

range in wheat of 14%, 12%, 11% and 10% moisture content.

TEMPERATURE °C

7 et a

ue | im

C ORYZAE |-— ean

#. DOMINICA | ~ =

1216 MOISTURE CONTENT ,

14%, MOISTURE CONTENT

7| —_ i — 7

‘

bk em

10% MOISTURE CONTENT

SAVd OO! NI NOLLWOIIdiLinw

Fig. 6

Showing the rate of multiplication in 100 days (biotic potential) of

Rhizopertha dominica and Calandra orysae in wheat of moisture contents of

14%, 12%, 11% and 10%. The vertical arrows show the temperatures above

which R. dominica multiplies more rapidly than C. oryzae.

Fig. 6 shows that C. oryzae multiplies more rapidly than R. dominica in wheat

of 14% moisture content at all temperatures up to 31° C. At temperatures higher

than 31°C. R. dominica multiplies more rapidly. In wheat of 11% moisture

content C. oryzae could only multiply more rapidly than R. dominica at tempera-

tures below 23°C. In wheat of 10% moisture content C. orygae is unable to

multiply at all, but R. dominica can multiply in wheat as dry as this at tempera-

tures between 24° and 38° C.

The biotic potential of R. dominica shown in fig. 6 is based on figures for

mortality of the immature stages developing in sound grain. Since the mortality

is less in grain which has been damaged, the biotic potential will be greater under

these conditions. In the early stages of an infestation of stored grain, the biotic

potential would be less than when the infestation had become established. The

range of temperature and moisture content of wheat within which the insects can

survive is also greater when the grain is damaged. This means that in some

conditions R. dominica behaves as a primary pest in the sense of being able to

establish an infestation in sound grain, ¢.g., at 34° C. in wheat of 9% moisture

content. Under certain conditions, however, it behaves as a secondary pest, ¢.g.,

at 36° C. in wheat of 9% moisture content the biotic potential is zero in sound.

grain, but it has a value of 3 in damaged grain.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Atst., 1945 Vol. 69, Plate X

NOVANDVAAALVAW 490 ALWY

Three-dimensional diagram showing the rate of multiplication in one

generation of the small strain of Calandra orvsae (c.f. Table 1).. Broken

lines connect points which have been interpolated.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1945 Vol. 69, Plate XI

NOVLWIVVAILVAW 40 ALWR

Three-dimensional diagram showing the rate of multiplication in one

generation of Rhisopertha dominica (c.f. Table 11). Broken lines connect

points which have been interpolated.

149

SUMMARY

An account is given of the biotic constants for egg-laying, development and

survival of the small strain of C. oryzae and R. dominica. This data is combined

to show the potential rate of multiplication of the two species over the complete

range of temperature and moisture within which any increase can occur.

All the stages of R. dominica were more resistant to dryness than those of

C. oryzae, and they were able to develop at higher temperatures, Wheat of 10°5%

moisture content was the driest in which C. orysae was able to develop, whereas

R. dominica survived in grain of 9% moisture content. The highest tempera-

tures at which the two species were able to develop was 32°3°C. for C. oryzae

and 38-2° C. for R. dominica. The egg stage of both species was the most

resistant to the harmful effects of dryness and high temperature, The least

resistant stage was the first larval instar.

The rate of oviposition of R. dominica was maintained at a high level at

all moisture contents between 14% and 9%. With C. oryzae, on the other hand,

the rate of oviposition fell greatly with any reduction of moisture content below

13%. The maintenance of a high rate of oviposition by R. dominica in dry wheat

enables it to multiply rapidly despite the high mortality of the immature stages

under these conditions.

The two species have about the same maximum potential rate of increase

when each is provided with optimum conditions. But their optimum conditions

occur in different parts of the temperature and moisture scales. In wheat of

14% moisture content, C. oryzae multiplies more rapidly than R. dominica at all

temperatures up to 31°C. At temperatures higher than 31°C., R. dominica

multiplies more rapidly. In wheat of 11%, however, C, oryzae could only mul-

tiply more rapidly at temperatures below 23° C.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Grateful acknowledgments are made to Professor J. Davidson and Mr. H. G.

Andrewartha for their advice and helpful criticism, and to Miss H. M. Brookes

who made the final drawings for the figures.

. REFERENCES

Bircu, L. C. 1944 Aust. Journ. Exp. Bio. Med. Sci., 22, 265

Bircu, L. C. 1944 Aust. Journ, Exp. Bio. Med. Sci., 22, 271

Biren, L. C. 1944 Aust. Journ. Exp. Bio. Med. Sci., 22, 277

Bircu, L. C. 1945 Aust. Journ. Exp. Bio, Med. Sci., 23, 141

Bireu, L. C. 1945 Aust. Journ. Exp. Bio. Med. Sci., 23, 29

Bircuw, L. C. 1945 The oviposition of Calandra oryzae Land Rhizopertha

dominica Fab. (Coleoptera) in relation to temperature, humidity and

density. Aust. Jour. Exp. Biol. Med. Sci., 23 (in press)

Brrcu, L. C. 1945 The biotic potential of the small strain of Calandra oryzae

Land Rhizopertha dominica Fab. Journ. Animal Ecol (in press)

Bircu, L. C., and Snowsaty, J. G. 1945 Aust. Journ. Exp. Bio. Med. Sci.,

23, 37

Cuapman, R. N., and Barrp, L. 1934 Journ, Exp. Zool., 68, 293

Davinson, J. 1940-1941 Agric. S. Aust., 44, 123, 243, 346, 391

Gay, F. J., and Rarcuirre, F. N. 1941 Journ. Coun. Sci. Ind. Res. (Aust.),

14, 173

Ratcuirre, F. N., Gay, F. J., and Firzceracp, J. S. 1940 Journ. Coun. Sci.

Ind, Res. (Aust.), 13, 229

SOUTHERN AUSTRALIAN GASTROPODA PART 1. STREPTONEURA

BY BERNARD C. COTTON (READ 14 JUNE 1945)

Summary

The following species have been picked from dredgings and material collected by the late Sir

Joseph Verco, the author and others. Although sorting and identifying the minutae from shell sand

is a slow process the results are well worth while. In this paper a number of new and definite

localities are recorded and observations on the variability of species noted. This paper covers only

preliminary notes relating to the subclass Streptoneura.

150

SOUTHERN AUSTRALIAN GASTROPODA

PART Il. STREPTONEURA

By Bernarp C, Cotton

[Read 14 June 1945]

Pirates XII anp XIII

The following species have been picked from dredgings and material collected

by the late Sir Joseph Verco, the author and others. Although sorting and

identifying the minutae from shell sand is a slow process the results are well

worth while. In this paper a number of new and definite localities are recorded

and observations on the variability of species noted. This paper covers only

preliminary notes relating to the subclass Streptoneura.,

Scissurona vincentiana sp. nov.

Pi. xii, fig. 5, 6

Shell ear-shaped, translucent, white, with pink apex; spiral threads on the

upper part, sharp, distant keels on the lower portion, all crossed by faint accre-

mental striae; spire elevated, adult whorls three, early whorls rounded, last oval,

flattened above; mouth large, oval, oblique; slit deep, well above the periphery;

columella concave, broad, with a moderate lobe over the narrow umbilicus. Height

1-2 mm., diameter 1°35 mm.

Loc—South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent; Glenelg, shell sand (type loc.).;

Guichen Bay; Minlacowie. Victoria: Port Fairy. Western Australia: Albany.

Remarks—-This species differs from remota Iredale 1924, New South Wales,

in its greater size and higher spire. A synonym is Scissurella obliqua Pritchard

and Gatliff 1903, not Watson 1886. S. rosea Hedley 1904, from New Zealand, is

distinct. The present species is figured by the writer, as S. remota, in the S. Aust.

Nat., 1933, 15, pl. i, fig. 9. Holotype, Reg. No. D. 14109, S. Aust. Museum.

ScHizoTRocHUs GUNTERI Cotton and Godfrey

Schizotrochus gunteri Cotton and Godfrey 1933, S. Aust. Nat., 15, 23,, pl. i, fig. 11.

Loc.—South Australia: Beachport, 150 fms. (type loc.), 200 fms.; Cape

Jaffa, 100, 130 and 300 fms.; Cape Wiles, 100 fms.

Remarks—Less strongly sculptured than the australis Hedley 1903 from

New South Wales but not South Australia, although attaining to almost the

same size.

Family FISSURELLIDAE

HEMITOMA SUBEMARGINATA (Blainville)

Emarginula subemarginata Blainville 1819, Dict. Sci. Nat., 14, 382.

Loc—South Australia: MacDonnell Bay (type loc.) ; Guichen Bay; Streaky

Bay; Kangaroo Island; Rapid Head, 9 to 12 fms.; Eastern Cove, 9 fms.; Hard-

wicke Bay, 9 fms.; Investigator Straits, 8, 15 and 17 fms.; Edithburgh, 5 fms.;

Point Marsden, 13 and 17 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 8, 13, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 and

22 fms.; Yankalilla Bay, 10, 12 and 20 fms.; Thistle Island, 12 fms.; Gulf

St. Vincent, 9 fms.; Porpoise Head, 17 fms.; American River, 8 fms.; Black

Point, 14 fms.; Western Cove, 10 fms.; Wallaroo, 15 fms.; St. Francis Island,

Trana. Roy. Soe. S.A., 69, (1), 27 July 1945

151

15, 20 and 35 fms. Western Australia: Hopetoun; Ellenbrook; Bunbury, 22

f{ms.; eight miles west of Eucla, 81 fms.; Esperance; Rottnest; Albany; King

George Sound.

Remarks—Alive from 5 to 20 fms. and common on rocks just below low tide.

The young has a distinct slit fasciole pitted by successive slit margins and

slightly curved to the right of the middle line, giving an asymmetrical appearance.

The radula has an average-sized central tooth, fairly wide, not serrated laterals,

overlapping; a distinct line running across the central and laterals about midway

in their length; major lateral bicuspid; marginals numerous and serrated.

FORALEPAS BAKEIEI (Sowerby)

Macroschisma bakeiei Sowerby 1886, Thes. Conch., 3, 206, pl. cexliv, fig. 221.

Loc.—Western. Australia: Albany (type loc. here designated) ; Hopetoun;

Rottnest ; Yallingup; Ellenbrook; Bunbury; Geraldton.

Remarks-—-The shell is smaller, thicker, wider and decidedly more coarsely

sculptured than Foralepas tasmaniae from the eastern end of the Flindersian

Region. The animal is very large in proportion to the shell and gleaming white.

The shell is situated well to the front covering the vital organs, while the

posterior portion of the animal is uncovered. The species is usually attached to

the undersurface of smooth rocks deeply buried in clean sand. This situation

serves as a protection for such a vulnerable animal.

DoLicHoSCHISMA propucta (Adams)

Macroschisma producta Adams 1850, Proc. Zool. Soc., 202.

Loe—South Australia: Port Lincoln (type loc.) ; Normanville; American

River; Beards Bay; Black Point; Hardwicke Bay; Edithburgh; Pondolowie Bay;

Yankalilla Bay, 12 to 15 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 20 fms.; Investigator Straits,

15 fms.; St. Francis Island, 15 to 20 fms.

DoLicHoscHisMA MuUNITA (Iredale)

Dolichoschisma producta munita Iredale 1940, Aust. Zool., 9, (4), 431.

Loc.—Western Australia: Geraldton (type loc.); King George Sound;

Albany; Rottnest; Hopetoun; Bunbury, alive in shallow water, dead on the beach.

Remarks—Records of “Dolichoschisma producta Adams” from Western Aus-

tralia are really this species, which is smaller and has well-developed foramen and

sinus features and finer scupture.

Family TROCHIDAE

MIcCROCLANCULUS GATLIFFI (Tomlin. )

Clanculus gathffi Tomlin. 1924, Proc. Mal. Soc., 16, 24, text fig.

Loce.—Western Australia: Fremantle (type loc.).; Bunbury.

Remarks—An examination of cotypes from Gatliff suggests that this is at

most a subspecies of euchelioides Tate 1893, being the Western Australian form.

MINOLOPS CORALLINA Rony | and Godfrey)

Gibbula corallina Cotton and Godfrey 1935, S. Aust. Nat., 16, 35, text fig.

Loc.—South Australia: Gulf St. *inaont (type fac. Western Australia:

Rottnest ; Yallingup; King George Sound; Ellenbrook; Bunbury.

Remarks—The species must be rare in South Australia, as only the type

specimens taken by Dr. Basedow are known from there,

152

Family STOMATITDAE

STOMATIA AUSTRALIS Adams

Stomatia australis Adams 1850, Proc. Zool. Soc., 34.

Loc.—Northern Australia (type loc.). Western Australia: North West;

Geraldton; Rottnest Island.

Remarks—Probably closely related to the genotype phymotis Helbing 1779.

It has not yet been taken in western South Australia.

GENA AURICULA (Lamarck)

Stomatella auricula Lamarck 1816, Tabl. Encyc. Meth., Liste, 10, pl ccccl, fig. a~b.

Loc—Western Australia: King George Sound (type loc.). South Aus-

tralia: general on reefs amongst weeds below low tide; abundant dredged alive

on seaweeds, stones and ascidians in 5 fms. and down to 9 fms. Victoria.

Tasmania.

Remarks—Moves quickly along the surface of rocks. Coarser and larger

than the Peronian Gena impertusa Burrows = strigosa Adams and the Queens-

land nigra Quoy and Gaimard.

Family STOMATELLIDAE

VACEUCHELUS AMPULLUS (Tate)

Euchelus ampullus Tate 1893, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 197, pl. i, fig. 5.

Loc.—Western Australia: Cambridge Gulf; North Western Australia (type

loc.?) ; Rottnest ; Yallingup ; Albany ; Ellenbrook; Geraldton; King George Sound;

beach and alive down to 22 fms. South Australia: West Coast; Beachport;

St. Francis Island, 35 fms. Tasmania: North Coast. Queensland: Caloundra.

Remarks—Holotype, Reg. No. D. 14182. The holotype and cotypes have the

locality “W.A.” It is common in southern Western Australia; much rarer in

South Australia.

VACEUCHELUS PROFUNDIOR (May)

Euchelus profundior May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 98, pl. vii, fig. 39.

Loc—South Australia: Beachport, 150 and 200 fms. Western Australia:

80 miles west of Eucla, 81 fms.; 40 miles west of Eucla, 72 fms.

Remarks—This is probably a deep water subspecies of ampullus Tate 1893,

and some specimens intergrade with examples of Tate’s species from 20 to 50 fms.

HERPETOPOMA PUMILIO (Tate)

Euchelus pumilio Tate 1893, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 17, 196, pl. i, fig. 3.

Loc.—South Australia: Fowler Bay (type loc.) ; Streaky Bay; Minlacowie;

Robe. Western Australia: Rottnest; Bunbury ; Yallingup; King George Sound.

Remarks—More depressed than fenestratus, five lirae on the body whorl,

stouter and more distant and more vertical axial riblets, feebler nodosities at the

intersections. Holotype, Reg. No. D. 13393, S. Aust. Museum.

HERPETOPOMA scABRiuscULUs (Adams and Angas)

Euchelus scabriusculus Adams and Angas 1867, Proc. Zool. Soc., 215.

Loc.—New South Wales: Port Jackson (type loc.). Victoria: Port Fairy.

South Australia: Beachport, 40, 100, 110 and 200 fms.; Backstairs Passage,

20 fms. ; Cape Jaffa, 90 and 130 fms.; St. Francis Island, 15 to 20 fims.; Gulf

St. Vincent, 10 fms.; Cape Borda, 55 fms.; Ardrossan, 6 to 8 fms.; alive on reefs

153

just below low tide and down to 10 ims.; also dead on beach Wallaroo, Venus Bay,

Edithburgh, Murat Bay, Gulf St. Vincent and Spencer Gulf. Tasmania: Rocky

Shores, down to 10 fms.

Remarks—Distinguished from virumbilicatus by the narrow reddish to brown

shell and closer, finer sculpture with obsoletely latticed narrower interstices. A

synonym is Euchelus tasmanicus Tenison Woods 1876, from Tasmania.

HERPETOPOMA VIXUMBILICATUS (Tate)

Euchelus vixumbilicatus Tate 1893, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 17, 196, pl. i, fig. 4.

Loc.—South Australia: West Coast of South Australia (type loc.) ; Streaky

Bay; Venus Bay; Point Sinclair; St. Francis Island; Guichen Bay; Robe; Cape

Borda, 55 fms.; Gulf St. Vincent; Marino, 5 fms. Western Australia; Ellen-

brook; Hopetoun; Yallingup; Rottnest; King George Sound, beach and 28 fms.;

Bunbury, 15 fms.; 90 miles west of Eucla 100 fms., 20 miles west 300 fms.;

Shark Bay; alive in shallow water and dead from 60 to 100 fms.

Remarks—The white colour, pink spotting, broader shell, well developed

latticed scupture distinguish this shell from scabriusculus Adams and Angas from

New South Wales and extending into South Australia. Holotype, Reg. No.

D. 13394, S. Aust. Museum.

HERPETOPOMA FENESTRATA (Tate)

Euchelus fenestratus Tate 1893, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 17, 195, pl. i, fig. 2.

Loc-—Western Australia (type loc): Rottnest; King George Sound; Bun-

bury, 15 fms. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent; Normanville; West Coast;

St. Francis Island, dredged; Beachport, 40 and 150 fms.; Cape Borda, 55 fms.;

Neptunes, 45 fms.; St. Francis Island, 15 to 20 fms., alive on reefs in shallow

water and down to 20 fms., dead from 55 to 150 fms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the clathrate sculpture, elevated spire, biangulated

whorls, imperforate base. Holotype, Reg. No. D.13396.

HERPETOPOMA ANNECTANS (Tate)

Euchelus annectans Tate 1893, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 17, 196.

Loc.—Western Australia (type loc.): Albany; Ellenbrook. South Aus-

tralia: Reevesby Island.

Remarks—Distinguished from vixusmbilicatus, though generally similar in

shape, in being imperforate, and consequently having no umbilical beaded cingulus ;

from pumilio it differs in having five instead of two spiral lirae on the penultimate

whorl. The species is close in general appearance to viwumbilicatus, Holotype,

Reg. No. D. 13395.

HERPETOPOMA ASPERSUS (Philippi)

Trochus aspersus Philippi 1844, Zeitschr. fiir Malakoz., 103.

Loc-—Western Australia (type loc. baccatus Menke 1843, and possibly of

aspersus Philippi): Bunbury; Yallingup, Rottnest; Albany; Geraldton. South

Australia: Gulf St. Vincent; St. Francis Island; Spencer Gulf; Cape Borda,

55 fms.; Tunk Head, 16 fms.; Beachport, 40 and 150 fms.; Guichen Bay; Port

MacDonnell; Wallaroo, beach and 15 fms.; Port Elliston.

Remarks—Monodonta baccatus Menke 1843, not Defrance 1824, is a

synonym. Philippi 1846 gives as original reference “Trochus aspersus Koch 1846,

Zeitsch. fiir Malakoz., 103.” A variant represented by one or two specimens from

South Australia has the granules radially elongate giving the shell quite a different

appearance under 10 diams, magnification.

134

Family LIOTIIDAE

MUNDITIA TASMANICA (Tenison Woods)

Lioha tasmanica Tenison Woods 1875, Proc. Roy Soc. Tas., 153.

Loc.—Tasmania: Long Bay (type loc.), South Australia: Yankalilla Bay,

9. to 20 ims.; Rapid Head, 10 to 12 fms.; Gulf St. Vincent, 7 fms.; Spencer Gulf,

13 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 22 fms.; Investigator Straits, 15 fms.; Port Lincoln,

9 fims.; Newland Head, 20 fms.; Point Marsden, 15 fms.; Beachport, 40 to 150

fms.; Wallaroo, 15 fms.; Ardrossan, 6 fms., alive down to 40 fms., many at

22 fms. New South Wales. Victoria.

Remarks—Synonyms are tucerta Tenison Woods, immature, and tasmanica

var. scalaris Hedley 1903, New South Wales. Delphinula syderea Reeve 1843 from

the Philippines was a name incorrectly used for the South Australian shell. The

distinguishing feature of this species is the nodular projecting tubercles on the

periphery whorls. There is a certain amount of variation in South Australian

specimens. Adults may vary in maximum diameter from 3°5 mm. to 8mm. The

axials may number from 12 to 16 and sometimes are distinct from the suture

outwards, or scarcely visible on the dorsum but standing out at the angle as large,

sharp, triangular tubercles. Similarly, the spirals which may be prominent and

stout on the dorsum form a marked tuberculation with axials, or in others may

be just visible. In some there may be a peripheral carina almost as large as the

upper one which forms the dorsal angle, with a fairly well marked one in between,

while in others all but the dorsal one may be obsolete. The carina forming the

basal angulation is generally well marked, but even this may be obsolete. The

axials in some become much reduced towards the aperture. The degree of descent

of the last whorl towards the aperture varies, as does also the elevation of the

spire, which in most is quite flat, but rarely slightly raised. The axial lirae vary

much in their distinctness. The radula of a South Australian specimen has the

formula «-+-5-+-1-++-5-+ «, a central denticle, five laterals and an indefinite number

of about 75 marginals. It is very like the figure of “Leptothyra carpenteri” given

by Pilsbry, in Tryon’s Manual Conch., 10, pl. 60, fig. 73. The median tooth is

provided with a narrow elevated part above, and this is hooked over to form a

median, slightly serrated cusp; below this there is a ledge, which is not a project-

ing thickening but is due to the recession of the parts below it. The lateral

margins are expanded into projecting wings, and these rest upon corresponding

projections from the adjacent laterals, Extending above the cusp, and lying

behind it is an accessory plate. The laterals are long and very oddly shaped.

There is an obliquely-placed serrated cusp at the top; then a plate at the upper

part projecting outwards on which lies the inner upper part of the next outer

marginal. Below this is another thicker and somewhat twisted plate which, like

the expanded wings of the central tooth, rests in front of a plate projecting from

the inside of the next lateral. The lower end is somewhat pointed. The outer-

most lateral is slightly different from the others in that it wants the two expan-

sions from its outer side. The central tooth stands a little lower than its adjacent

laterals, the innermost three of these rise successively higher, the fourth is lower

and the fifth lower still. The first 10 or 12 marginals are hooked, the hooks

being smooth, but there is a notch in the stem immediately beneath the hook.

These are all joined by another and finer piece to a horizontal rod, about as long

as the stem of the marginal. The next marginals are serrated on both edges of

the hook, and notched underneath, and on each successive marginal has the hook

shorter, until it is finally reduced to a mere bending forward or thickening of the

top of the stem with serrated edges, and the knobs gradually lessen in size;

finally they appear to be reduced to acicular uncini with thin, curved ends, two

of which needles may be articulated to a divided lower limb.

155

Munpiria HepLeyi (Pritchard and Gatliff)

Liotia hedleyi Pritchard and Gatliff 1899, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 12, 105, pl. viii,

fig. 8, 9, 10.

Loc.—Victoria: Flinders Beach; Western Port (type loc.). South Aus-

tralia: Gulf St. Vincent, 17 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 17 fms.; Beachport, 100,

110, and 150 fms.; Cape Jaffa, 130 fms., alive down to 17 fms.

Remarks—-Distinguished by the strong, spaced axials crossing and serrating

the spirals and extending from suture to umbilicus. Somewhat resembling the

tropical Philippine Liotina discoidea Reeve which occurs in Northern Australia

but which does not have the axials continued on to the base.

MUNDITIA AUSTRALIS (Kiener)

Delphinula australis Kiener 1839, Coq. Viv., 10, 8, pl. iv, fig. 7.

Loc.—South Australia: Islands of St. Peter and St. Francis (type loc.) ;

Yankalilla Bay, 15 fms.; Rapid Head, 10 and 12 fms.; Investigator Straits,

15 fms.; Gulf St. Vincent, 10 and 20 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 17, 19, 20 and

22 fims.; Newland Head, 20 and 24 fms.; Porpoise Head, 17 fms.; Middleton,

10 fms.; Beachport, 40 and 110 fms.; Tunk Head, 16 fms., alive down to

40 fms. Tasmania: North Coast. Victoria: Western Port; Port Fairy. Western

Australia: Bunbury; Fremantle; King George Sound; Esperance; Hopetoun,

25 fms.

Remarks—South Australian specimens vary greatly in adult size when the

aperture has formed a varix. They range from 5 mm. in diameter in a micro-

morph to 14 mm. in macromorph. The “beaded riblet winding into the umbilicus”

is composed of four or five axial lirae which bend towards one another and unite

to form a small furrowed flame-like pyramid ending in a fine point. The varix

of the mouth is in two parts, the second portion being of less diameter than the

first; both have rounded tubercles on their margin formed by expansions of the

spiral ribs. These tubercles touch one another between the two parts. Specimens

examined in which the animal has been devoured have the shell bored in and

about the base, the hole being in or near the umbilicus, only one has a dorsal hole.

The operculum has a granular external surface and is very close fitting, so as to

remain in situ when the mollusc has been devoured.

MUNDITIA DENSILINEATA (Tate)

Liotia densilineata Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 228.

Loc-—Tasmania: D’Entrecasteaux Channel (type loc.); Pilot Station, 10

fms. South Australia: Beachport, 40, 110, 150 and 200 fms.; Cape Borda, 55

fms., alive down to 10 fms.

Remarks--It is suggested by Tate that the holotype description may be based

on an immature specimen, and indeed the shell does recall an immature Munditia

australis, though probably quite distinct from that species. In Munditia sub-

quadrata the spiral sculpture consists also of fine threadlets, but its revolving

ridges are few and bold, imparting a quadrate outline to the last whorl. Holotype,

Reg. No. D.13413.

Munpiria MAYANA (Tate)

Liotia mayana Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. 5S. Aust., 23, 227, pl. vi, fig. 5, a, b, ¢.

Loc.—Tasmania (type loc.), dredged 50 to 100 fms. Victoria: Western

Port. South Australia: Spencer Gulf, 20 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 16, 17,

18, 19, 20 and 22 fms.; Investigator Straits, 13 and 15 fms.; Port Lincoln,

9 fms.; Point Marsden, 15 fms.; Porpoise Head, 17 fms.; Beachport, 110 and.

156

150 fms.; Newland Head, 20 and 24 fms.; Tunk Head, 16 fms.; Wallaroo,

15 fms.; Cape Jaffa, 130 fms., alive down to 40 fms.

Remarks—Resembles in size and general appearance Munditia subquadrata,

but the suture is not excavated, the aperture not so explanulately thickened and

the columella margin is detached from the umbilical rim. Holotype, Reg. No.

D.13413, S.A. Museum.

Munpirra suBsguApRATA (Tenison Woods)

Liotia subquadrata Tenison Woods 1878, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 2, 236.

Loc.—Tasmania: Long Bay (type loc.); Blackman’s Bay, all round the

coast in shallow water. Victoria: Western Port. South Australia: Gulf St.

Vincent, 5 fms.; Porpoise Head, 17 fms.; Middleton, 10 fms.; Backstairs Passage,

22 fms.; Beachport, 40, 110 and 150 fms.; Cape Jaffa, 130 fms., alive down to

10 fms. Western Australia: Hopetoun, 25 fms.

Remarks—The holotype is a juvenile of 3 mm. diameter. South Australian

specimens range between 5 mm. to 6°5 mm. in diameter; Tasmanian attain to

9mm. South Australian specimens may have the axials continued to the apertural

varix or the last third of the whorl may be free from them.

CHARISMA ARENACEA (Pritchard and Gatliff)

Leptothyra arenacea Pritchard and Gatliff 1901, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 14, 181,

pl. ix, fig. 3

Loc.—Victoria: Rhyll; Phillip Island; Western Port, 5 to 6 fms. (type loc.).

Tasmania: Thouin Bay, 40 fms. South Australia: Backstairs Passage, 17 fms.

Remoarks—The species is distinguished by the well-defined spiral ridges.

CHARISMA JOSEPHI (Tenison Woods)

Cyclostrema josephi 1877, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 147.

Loc-—Tasmania: Blackman’s Bay (type loc.), 10 to 100 fms., common in

deep water. Victoria: Western Port. South Australia: Backstairs Passage,

20 and 22 fms.; Cape Borda, 62 fms., living at around 20 fms. Western Aus-

tralia: Ellenbrook; Yallingup.

Remarks-~A stout, somewhat globular shell, with the first two or three

whorls smooth, the rest spirally engraved, umbilicus well marked, with a rounded

axially finely striated pad; mouth round, entire, bevelled inside, flat margined.

The operculum is multispiral and apparently thinly calcareous exteriorly.

CHARISMA CARINATA (Verco)

Leptothyra carinata Verco 1907, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 31, pl. xxix, fig. 8.

Loc-—South Australia: Backstairs Passage, 20 fms. (type loc.); Newland

Head, 20 fms., dead; St. Francis Island, 6 fms., alive.

Remarks-——Distinguished from arenacea by the more marked carinae, more

widely canaliculated suture and wider umbilicus of the present species. Holo-

type, Reg. No. D.14199,

ARGALISTA FuGITIVA Hedley 1911

Leptothyra fugitiva Hedley 1911, Zool. Res. Endeavour, 1, 104, pl. xviii, fig. 18,

19, 20.

Loc.—South Australia: Cape Wiles, 100 fms. (type loc.); Beachport,

110 fms.

157

Remarks—Smaller, flatter, more finely grooved than any other Australian

species, such as rotatum Hedley 1899, from Tutaga Islet, Funafuti, 200 fms.,

roseopunctata Angas 1880, from South Australia, and rosea Tenison Woods 1876,

from Tasmania,

AGALISTA ROSEOPUNCTATA (Angas)

Collonia roseopunctata Angas 1880, Proc. Zool. Soc., 417, pl. xl, fig. 8.

Loc,—South Australia: Holdfast Bay, in shell sand (type loc.) ; MacDon-

nell Bay; Cape Borda, 62 fms.

Remarks—The dotted rose colouring and solid shell distinguish this species.

STARKEYNA CANCELLATA (Tate)

Ethalia (?) cancellata Tate 1878, Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 2, 139, pl. v, fig. La,

llc.

Loc.—South Australia: Holdfast Bay; Gulf St. Vincent (type loc.) ;

Streaky Bay; Fowlers Bay; Great Australian Bight; St. Francis Island, 6 and

35 f{ms.; Beachport, 40 fms. Western Australia: Rottnest.

Remarks—Holotype, Reg. No. D.14110, S. Aust. Museum.

CALLOMPHALA LucipA Adams and Angas 1864

Callomphala lucida Adams and Angas 1864, Proc. Zool. Soc., 35.

Loc.—New South Wales: Coogee Bay, in shell sand (type loc.). South

Australia: Robe; St. Francis Island, shell sand; Beachport, 40 and 110 fms.;

Cape Borda, 55 and 62 fms., alive in shallow waters down to 5 fms., dead from

10 to 110 fms. Victoria: Western Port. Tasmania: ?.

Remarks—Rare in South Australia, only one or two specimens from each of

the above localities.

CIRSONELLA WELDII (Tenison Woods)

Cyclostrema weldu Tenison Woods 1876, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 147.

Loc.—Tasmania: Long Bay, 20 ims. (type loc.), shallow water to 100 fms.,

common ; North Coast (type loc. susonis). New South Wales: Botany Bay (type

loc. australis), South Australia: MacDonnell Bay; Robe; Sceales Bay; Arno

Bay, dredged; Gulf St. Vincent, 10 fms.; Cape Borda, 62 and 90 fms.; Cape

Jaffa, 49 and 300 fms.; Beachport, 40, 110 and 150 fms.; Investigator Straits,

20 ims., alive down to 90 fms. and shells in good condition, probably living

specimens down to 150 fms., dead shells in deeper water.

Remarks—Not common in South Australia. Synonyms are australis Angas

1877 and susonis Tenison Woods 1877.

CIRSONELLA TRANSLUCIDA May

Cirsonella translucida May 1915, Trans. Roy. Soc. Tas., 97, pl. vii, fig. 39.

Loc.—Tasmania: Thouin Bay, 40 fms. (type loc.). South Australia:

Beachport, 40 fms.; Cape Borda, 55 fms.; Venus Bay. Western Australia: King

George Sound.

Remarks—Varies much in size, average smaller in South Australia.

LissoTESTA MicrA (Tenison Woods)

Cyclostrema micra Tenison Woods 1876, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 147.

Loc.—Tasmania: Long Bay (type loc.), 10 to 100 fms. Victoria: Western

Port. South Australia: Backstairs Passage, 20 fms.; Cape Borda, 55 fms.;

Beachport, 40 fms.; Cape Jaffa, 49 fms.

Remarks—Rare in South Australia.

158

LISSOTESTA CONTABULATA (Tate)

Cyclostrema contabulata Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 222, pl. vii,

fig. 6.

Loc.—South Australia: Streaky Bay (type loc.) ; Fowlers Bay; Smoky Bay ;

Murat Bay; Gulf St. Vincent; Robe, in shell sand in great numbers; Beachport,

40 fms., dredged alive in numbers in weeds, St. Francis Island, 6 and 35 fms.

Tasmania: Frederick Henry Bay; rare. Western Australia: King George Sound,

beach and down to 24 fms.

Remarks—Holotype, Reg. No. D.13405, S. Aust. Museum.

LISSOTESTA PORCELLANA (Tate and May)

Cyclostrema porcellana Tate and May 1900, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 24, 101.

Loc.—Tasmania: Frederick Henry Bay (type loc.). South Australia:

Cape Borda, 55 fms., one specimen only. Victoria: Port Fairy.

Remarks—More conic than contabulata and micra. A synonym is Rissoa

translucida May 1912.

Eudaronia gen. nov.

Genotype: Cyclostrema (Daronia) jaffaensis Verco 1909—South Australia.

Shell small, planorbid of two whorls, with a carinating cord above and below,

suture impressed, aperture reniform, peristome simple, thin, not continuous,

spread as a thin glaze over the preceding whorl; umbilicus very wide and per-

spective; spire sunken.

Distribution—Southern Australia and Tasmania.

Remarks—The genus differs from Daronia, genotype Daronia spirula Adams

1861 from the Philippines, in the discontinuous peristome, which must be regarded

as an important generic feature.

EUDARONIA JAFFAENSIS (Verco)

Cyclostrema (Daronia) jaffaensis Verco 1909, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 270,

pl. xx, fig. 6, 7.

Loc.—Cape Jaffa, 90 fms. (type loc.) 49 fms. Tasmania: Schouten Island,

80 fms.; Cape Raoul, 50 fms.

Remarks—Holotype, Reg. No. D13411, S. Aust. Museum.

LoDDERIA LODDERAE (Petterd)

Liotia lodderae Petterd 1884, Journ. Conch., Lond., 135.

Loc.—Tasmania: Leven Heads (type loc.) ; North Coast, in shallow water.

South Australia: Fowler Bay; American River; Kangaroo Island; Denial Bay;

Streaky Bay; St. Francis Island, alive in shallow water just below low tide.

Victoria: Western Port. New South Wales: Middle Harbour.

LoppERENA MINIMA (Tenison Woods)

Liotia minima Tenison Woods 1878, Trans. Roy. Soc. Vict., 14, 58.

Loc.—Victoria: Western Port (type loc.). South Australia: Robe, in shell

sand. New South Wales: Port Jackson,

CROSSEOLA CONCINNA (Angas)

Crossea concinna Angas 1867, Proc. Zool. Soc., 911, pl. xliv, fig. 14.

Loc-—New South Wales: Port Jackson (type loc.). Victoria: Western

Port. Tasmania: North Coast. South Australia: rare, Gulf St. Vincent, 17

fms.; Newland Head, 20 fms.; Yankalilla and Robe, shell sand.

Remarks—Distinguished by the fine sculpture,

159

CROSSEOLA CARINATA (Hedley)

Crossea carinata Hedley 1903, Mem. Aust. Mus., 4, 345, fig. 71.

Loc—New South Wales: Port Kembla, 63-75 fms. (type loc.), 16 miles

east of Wollongong, 100 fms. Tasmania: 40 to 100 fms., common. South Aus-

tralia: Beachport, 110 fms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the globular shell, bluntly keeled at the periphery.

CROSSEOLA CANCELLATA (Tenison Woods)

Crossea cancellata Tenison Woods 1878, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 122.

Loc.—Tasmania: Blackman’s Bay (type loc.); Channel, 10 fms. South

Australia: Gulf St. Vincent, 5 fms.; Newland Head, 20 fms.; Beachport, 40 and

150 fms.; Cape Borda, 55 fms., living down to 150 fms.

Remarks—Minute, cancellate.

CROSSEOLA CONSOBRINA (May)

Crossea consobrina May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 97, pl. xxiii, fig. 1.

Loc—Tasmania: Thouin Bay, 40 fms. South Australia, Beachport,

40 ims.

Remarks—Distinguished from cancellata by the square cut, non-channelled

front of the columella, smaller umbilicus and less strongly cancellate sculpture.

DoLicrossEA LABIATA (Tenison Woods)

Crossea labiata Tenison Woods 1875, Proc. Roy Soc. Tas., 151.

Loc-——Tasmania: Long Bay, 10 fms. (type loc.), 10 to 40 fms. South

Australia: Beachport, 40 and 150 fms.; Cape Jaffa, 130 fms.; Investigator Straits,

20 fms.; Ardrossan, 14 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 18 fms.; Gulf St. Vincent,

5 and 9 fms.; Sceales Bay; Venus Bay; Holdfast and Aldinga Bays; Grange and

Outer Harbour, shell sand.

Remarks—Distinguished by the narrow canaliculation of inner lip and the

thickened and reflected outer lip. Related fossils are Dolicrossea labiata sub-

labiata Tate and lauta Tate.

BrooKULA ANGEL! (Tenison Woods)

Rissoa angeli Tenison Woods 1876, Proc. Roy Soc. Tas., 153.

Loc—Tasmania: Long Bay (type loc.) ; Blackman’s Bay. South Australia:

shell sand, Robe; and dredged Cape Borda, 62 fms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the ill-defined axial ribs, about as wide as the

interspaces, becoming obsolete at the periphery and base, and numbering about 15

on the body whorl. Variable in shape. Variants are:

(a) The typical form has few stout axial ribs, about ten, ceasing at the

periphery.

(b) The axial ribs may be almost obsolete but axial incision may be present on

the earlier whorls, and also suggestion of ribbing on the body whorl, mak-

ing the spirals faintly polygonal.

BROOKULA CREBRESCULPTA (Tate)

Cuyltacreins crebresculpta Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 219, pl. vii,

fig. 5.

Spee eee ae (type loc.), Channel, 10 fms. South Australia: Back-

stairs Passage, 10 fms.; Robe, shell sand.

Remarks—Besides the sculpture of crowded axial threads and interstitial

spiral striae, there is also a microscopic sculpture of incremental striae,

160

BROOKULA NEPEANENSIS (Gatliff)

Scala nepeanensis Gatliff 1906, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 1, pl. i, fig. 5.

Loc.—vVictoria: in shell sand, Ocean Beach; Point Nepean (type loc.).

Tasmania: Storm Bay; Thouin Bay, 40 fms. South Australia: Cape Borda,

62 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 10 ims.

Remarks—Distinguished from angeli by the more definite axial ribs.

BRoOKULA JOHNSTONI (Beddome)

Cyclostrema johnstoni Beddome 1882, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 168.

Loc.—Tasmania: off Old Station, Brown’s River Road, 7 fms. (type loc.).

South Australia: Robe, in shell sand.

ZALIPAIS INSCRIPTA (Tate)

Cyclostrema inscriptum Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 13, 216, pl. vii,

fig. 3.

Loc.—South Australia: West Coast (type loc.); Glenelg, shell sand; Cape

Jaffa, 49 fms.; Beachport, 40 fms.; Cape Borda, 62 fms.; dredged alive down to

49 fms., dead to 62 fms.

Remarks—LDistinguished by the flattened spire.

ZALIPAIS BRUNIENSE (Beddome)

Cyclostrema bruniensis Beddome 1883, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 168.

Loc.—Tasmania: Cloudy Bay; Lagoon; South Bruny Island (type loc.).

South Australia: Port MacDonnell. Victoria: Portsea.

Remarks—A minute brown, flattened shell.

ELACHORBIS TATEI (Angas)

Cyclostrema tatei Angas 1878, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 862, pl. liv, fig. 10.

Loc.—South Australia: Holdfast Bay, shell sand (type loc.); Largs Bay;

Tourville Bay; St. Francis Island, beach; Point Sinclair, 15 to 20 ims.; Beach-

port, 40, 110 and 150 fms.; Cape Jaffa, 130 fms.; Cape Borda, 62 fms., alive in

shallow water down to 5 fms. Western Australia: Bunbury; King George Sound.

Remarks—Two spiral keels, varying in strength, sometimes almost obsolete.

Shell varying in thickness.

ELACHORBIS HARRIETTAE (Petterd)

Cyclostrema harriettae Petterd 1884, Journ. Conch., 215.

Loc—Tasmania: North-west Coast (type loc.). South Australia: Robe;

Holdfast Bay, shell sand; Newland Head, 28 fms.; Cape Borda, 62 fms., dead

below 50 fms. Victoria: Port Fairy.

Remarks—A pure white species very closely allied to tatei but quite distinct,

and has a more open umbilicus than Elachorbis homalon Verco 1907.

ELACHORBIS HOMALON (Verco)

faye homalon Verco 1907, Trans. Roy..Soc. S. Aust., 31, 305, pl. xxix,

g. 3, 4.

Loc.—South Australia: Cape Borda, 62 fms. (type loc.); Cape Jaffa,

130 fms.; Beachport, 110 fms.

Remarks—Holotype, Reg. No. D.13410. Related to harrietiae but has a less

open umbilicus, labrum not sinuous on the dorsum but having a continuous convex

curve; the infra-umbilical spirals are much finer and more crowded.

161

ELACHORBIS CAPERATA (Tate)

Cyclostrema caperatum Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 216 pl. vii,

fig. la-Ib.

Loc.—Victoria: Lakes Entrance; Gippsland, in shell sand (type loc.). South

Australia: Robe.

Remarks—Holotype, Reg. No. D.13407, S. Aust. Museum.

ELACHORBIS DELECTABILE (Tate)

Cyclostrema delectabile Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 216.

Loc.—South Australia: Fowlers Bay, West Coast (type loc.) ; Backstairs

Passage, 22 fms.

Remarks—Distinguished by the rather strong spiral sculpture meshed by

axial threadlets. Holotype, Reg. No. D.13409, 5. Aust. Museum.

Family TURBINIDAE

SUBNINELLA UNDULATUs (Solander)

Turbo undulatus Solander 1786, Portland Catalogue.

Loc.—-Tasmania (type loc.). South Australia: Rapid Head, 9 and 11 fms.,

alive at low tide mark, common on reefs; both Gulfs; Ocean Beaches; Kangaroo

Island; Pondolowie Bay; Point Sinclair; Venus Bay; St. Francis Island;

Reevesby Island; Robe. Victoria. New South Wales. Western Australia:

Albany; Yallingup; Esperance.

Remarks—South-Eastern specimens from Robe and vicinity are strongly

ribbed above with supra, infrasutural and peripheral carinae conforming closely

to the typical Tasmanian specimens. The species is plentiful and is locally called

Common Warrener, being edible and suitable for bait. It is common on native

kitchen middens at Cape Banks and vicinity generally.

NINELLA TorQUATUS (Gmelin)

Turbo torquatus Gmelin 1784, Syst. Nat., 3,597, No. 106.

Loc.—New South Wales: Port Jackson (type loc.). Queensland. Victoria.

South Australia: both Gulfs; Corny Point; Kangaroo Island; Robe; Pondolowie

Bay; Venus Bay; Point Sinclair; St. Francis Island, alive at low tide on reefs,

dredged down to 5 fms. alive. Western Australia: Albany; Esperance; Yallin-

gup; Bunbury; Rottnest; Ellenbrook; Cottesloe; Geraldton.

Remarks—Described originally as Limax stamineus Martyn 1784, not

binomial. Ninella torquatus lamellosus Broderip is the Western Australian sub-

species, type locality Garden Island, with higher whorls, markedly carinated at

their centre with a stout cord, though there is variation and intergradation with

torquatus.

EUNINELLA GRUNERI (Philippi)

Turbo gruneri Philippi 1846, Conch. Cab., 52, pl. xii, fig. 7, 8.

Loc—South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent (type loc.); Yankalilla Bay,

15 fms.; Rapid Head, 9 fms.; Investigator Straits, 8, 10 and 15 fms.; Point

Marsden, 134 fms.; Porpoise Head, 12 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 22 fms.; Cape

Borda, 62 fms.; Tunk Head, 16 fms. Beachport, 40 fms.; both Gulfs; Robe; Point

Sinclair, alive on reefs in shallow water and down to 15 fms. Western Australia:

Bunbury; Yallingup, beach and dredged; Bunbury, 22 fms.; King George Sound,

12 to 14 fms.; Hopetoun, 35 fms.; 80 miles west of Eucla, 80 fms. Tasmania.

Remarks—When quite young the shell has a distinct rimate umbilicus, as in

a specimen dredged from 8 fms. The species occurs as a Pleistocene fossil in

raised beaches, and also in the Pliocene.

162

BELLASTRAEA SQUAMIFERA (Koch)

Astralium squamiferum Koch 1852, Conch. Cab., 2, Trochus, 215, pl. xxxii, fig. 4

(Kuster).

Loc.—Western Australia (type loc.): Albany; Geographe Bay; Rottnest.

South Australia: common in both Gulfs in shallow water, under weed-covered

stones and down to 30 fms. alive; Yankalilla, 15 ims.; Rapid Head, 9 and 12 fms.;

Eastern Cove, 9 and 5 fms.; Investigator Straits, 8 to 10 fms. many alive, 13, 15

and 17 ims.; Corny Point, 30 fms.; American River, Kangaroo Island, 8 fms.;

Coffins Bay, 5 fms.; Spilsby and Reevesby Islands, 5, 10, 12 and 13 fms.; Beach-

port, 40 fms., dead; Point Sinclair; Arno Bay, Streaky Bay. Tasmania: North

and West Coast. Victoria: Western Port; Port Fairy.

Remarks—Young shells, of about half an inch in diameter, are umbilicated,

but older, not so. The animal has a small foot compared with the base of the

shell; sole white, upper surface of foot black, spotted irregularly with white;

muzzle black, but its open and exserted end quite white and kept nearly in the

same plane as the sole and in front of it; tentacles are about one-third the length

of the foot, white with three rather wide longitudinal black lines and with crowded

sublenticular transverse black lines; eyes are on the outside of the tentacles close

to their base on white peduncles separate from the tentacle proper; there are no

lateral cilia; the shelly operculum is carried on the back of the foot, not quite

centrally but a little to the right and rather far forward. Variants are as follows:

(a) The suprasutural margin markedly stellate, especially in the young, tend-

ing with age to become a corrugated lamella, but in some the stellate margin

is retained even when quite large.

(b) Stellate at first, rapidly losing the sharp points and furnished with a very

sharp lamelliform supramarginal edge.

(d) Columellar callus abundant and forming a slightly projecting inner lip,

which may extend somewhat beyond the region of the umbilicus.

BELLASTRAEA TENTORIFORMIS (Jonas)

Astrea tentoriformis Jonas 1845, Trochus, Zeit. Malak., 2, 66.

Loc.—Western Australia (type loc.): Albany; Bunbury; Rottnest; Shark

Bay; Geraldton. South Australia: Point Sinclair.

Remurks—This large, high shell is common in Western Australia, but its

South Australian record is based on a specimen from the western end of that

State, which is the limit of its eastern range. The species is distinguished from

squamifera by the larger size, higher shell and pink to violet columella.

MICRASTRAEA AUREA (Jonas)

Trochus aureum Jonas 1844, Zeit. Malak., 2, 168.

Loc—Western Australia (type loc.): Esperance; Albany; Rottnest; west

of Eucla, 100 fms. South Australia: American River; both Gulfs, under weed-

covered stones below low tide and on Razor Edge shells (Pinna); Glenelg;

Normanville; Yorke Peninsula; Robe; Port MacDonnell, St. Francis Island;

Point Sinclair; Streaky Bay; Beachport, 40 and 150 fms.; Eastern Cove, 5 fms.,

many alive; Troubridge; Port Lincoln, Investigator Straits, 15 fms, and 8 fms.,

alive down to 10 fms. Tasmania: common on rocky shores. Dredged alive in

great abundance in seaweed off the sand-spit off Kingscote, Kangaroo Island, at

about three to four miles from the shore in 9 fms., the larger ones covered with

calcareous matter, the younger ones free; even more abundant in 5 fms.

163

MICRASTRAEA RUTIDOLOMA (Tate)

Turbo (Astralium) rutidoloma Tate 1893, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 17, 192,

pl. i, fig. 9.

Loc.—South Australia: at low tides, Moonta Bay (type loc.) ; Hardwicke

Bay, 8 fms.; Reevesby Island; Arno Bay.

Remarks—Operculum shelly, thick, slightly angled at the columella side;

and with a central weak depression much like aurea, The shell has an entirely

different sculpture from aurea. Holotype, Reg. No. D.9965, S. Aust. Museum.

Family EUTROPHDAE

PHASIANELLA AUSTRALIS (Gmelin)

Buccinum australis Gmelin 1788, Syst. Nat., 3490, No. 173.

Loc.—South Australia (type loc.): both Gulfs; Beachport; Robe; Rapid

Head; Kangaroo Island; Port Lincoln; Arno Bay; Venus Bay; Point Sinclair ;

Corny Point, plentiful in patches of Cymodocea weed in shallow water at such

places as Fort Largs; Gulf St. Vincent; largest specimens from Corny Point and

west coast of Yorke Peninsula; juveniles under algae-covered stones; dredged

alive down to 10 fms.; Gulf St. Vincent, 6 fms.; Semaphore, 5 fms.; Hardwicke

Bay, 10 fms. Western Australia—King George Sound, 10, 12, 15, 24, 28 and

35 fms. ; 90 miles west of Eucla, 100 fms.; Fremantle, 6, 10 and 15 fms.; Albany ;

Bunbury, 15 fms.; Geraldton. Tasmania: general, on weeds. Victoria: Western

Port; Port Fairy.

Variants are:

(a) Colour of broad axial irregular dull red stripes—‘subsanguimea” Pilsbry

(b) Surface tessellated by revolving series of squarish red blotches—‘“venusta”

Reeve 1862.

background.

Other synonyms which are named from varieties only are tritonis Chemnitz 1788,

bulimoides Lamarck 1822 and delicatula Tenison Woods 1877.

MIMELENCHUS VENTRICOSA (Swainson)

Phasianella ventricosa Swainson 1822, Appendix to Cat. Coll. Shells Bligh, 12.

Lec.—Victoria (type loc.): general. South Australia: both Gulfis; Beach-

port; Kangaroo Island; Port Lincoln; Yorke Peninsula; West Coast; Point Sin-

clair; Rapid Head, 10 and 12 fms.; Investigator Straits, 8, 10, 15 and 20 fms. ;

Yankalilla Bay, 15 fms.; Encounter Bay, 15 fms.; Thorny Passage, 25 fms., alive

down to 10 fms. Western Australia: Bunbury; Albany; Esperance; Ellenbrook ;

Yallingup; Fremantle; Rottnest. Tasmania: North and West Coast. New South

Wales: Port Jackson.

Remarks—-Synonyms are perdix Wood 1828, sanguinea, zebra and reticulata

Reeve, inflata and obtusa Swainson 1822,

Variants are:

(a) Obliquely, axially conspicuously, broadly banded with chestnut, red and

yellow, lineated with flesh colour—‘zebra’” Reeve.

(b) Closely undulately painted throughout with brown lines and with flesh-

coloured flames beneath the sutures, and shorter than the typical, “reticu-

lata’ Reeve. ,

164

OrTHOMESUS ANGASI (Crosse)

Phasianella angasi Crosse 1864, Journ. de Conch., 344, pl. xiii, fig. 5.

Lec—South Australia: Port Elliot (type loc.); both Gulfs; Beachport;

Encounter Bay; Kangaroo Island; Port Lincoln; Yorke Peninsula; Point Sinclair ;

Venus Bay; Yankalilla Bay, 15 and 20 fms.; Rapid Head, 10 and 12 fms.; Hard-

wicke Bay, 8 and 10 fms. ; Investigator Straits, 10, 15 and 20 fms.; Royston Head,

22 fms.; Wallaroo, 15 fms.; Yankalilla Bay, 12 fms., alive in shallow water and

down to 22 fms. Western Australia: Bunbury; Ellenbrook; Rottnest; Albany ;

Yallingup; Esperance, Fremantle; Shark Bay; Carnarvon; Geraldton. Tasmania:

North and West Coasts. Victoria: Western Port and Port Fairy.

Remarks—A very variable shell common at the type locality and vicinity,

it is smaller than rubens Philippi which appears to be distributed in Northern

Australia and the South Pacific, while vartegata Lamarck is the Peronian species.

PELLAX GABINIANA Cotton and Godfrey 1938

Pellax gabimana Cotton and Godfrey 1938, Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 6, No, 2, 202,

pl. xvii, fig. 12.

Loc.—South Australia: Yorke Peninsula; Royston Head (type loc.) ; Corny

Point; Robe; Port Lincoln; Kangaroo Island. Victoria: Port Fairy. Western

Australia: Albany; Rottnest.

Remarks—This species has been recorded from Southern Australia as

Phasianella kochi, a South African shell, which is stouter and more solid in struc-

ture. The present species varies in colour pattern from the typical to the more

common subsuturally axially flamed pattern, but all have the maculated band on

the body whorl. Common in shell sand. Holotype, Reg. No. D.13414, S. Aust.

Museum.

PELLAX TOMLINI (Gatliff and Gabriel)

Phasianella tomlini Gatliff and Gabriel 1921, Proc. Mal. Soc., Lond., 14, 173,

fig. 1, 2, 3.

Loc.—Western Australia (type loc.) ; Albany; Rottnest; Esperance; Hope-

toun; King George Sound.

Remarks—The umbilical chink is closed in full adults. The shell differs

from gabiniana in being more globose, spirally sculptured, thicker and with a

different, contrasting, axial colour pattern. The comparison is made with para-

types of tomlini and holotype and paratypes of gabiniana.

Pellax johnstoni sp. nov.

Pl. xii, fig. 3, 4

Shell elongate oval, thin; whorls six, very slightly convex, smooth but for

fine numerous sublenticular spiral striae; sutures linear, slightly descending at

the aperture; aperture vertically ovate, slightly angulate above, outer lip simple,

thin; inner lip simple, less curved than the outer lip, smooth, thickened, slightly

excavate and scarcely effuse at the base; protoconch blunt, of two whorls,

smooth, reddish-brown; body whorl with a white band below the suture, about

one-fifth of the whorl, fading rapidly out anteriorly, crossed by nine axial brown

bands, about one-half the width of their interspaces, slightly widening out at the

anterior margin of the band; another white band gradually increasing in width

anteriorly arises just below the angle of the aperture, and bounds the outer margin

of the labium to the front edge of its effuse base, and is decorated throughout with

oblique lines of reddish-brown spots. Height 6 mm., diameter 3:2 mm.

165

Loc—wWestern Australia: Ellenbrook (type loc.) ; Hopetoun; Esperance.

South Australia—Venus Bay.

Remarks—All specimens are typical and unlike any descriptions or figures

of any allied species. Holotype, Reg. No. D14200. Named after Profegsotr

T. H. Johnston.

PELLAX virco (Angas)

' Eutropia (Tricolia) virgo Angas 1867, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 115, pl. xiii, fig. 25.

Loc.-—New South Wales: shell sand, Coogee Bay (type loc.) ; Port Jackson.

South Australia: Guichen Bay; Robe.

Remarks—Rare in South Australia, only one or two specimens taken in the

South-East.

PeLLAx ROSEA (Angas)

Se en rosea Angas 1867, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 114, pl. xiii,

fig. 24.

Loc.—New South Wales: shell sand Coogee Bay (type loc.) ; Port Jackson.

South Australia: Beachport; Robe; MacDonnell Bay; numerous both Gulfs;

St. Francis Island; dredged, Beachport, 40 fms.; Cape Borda, 55 fms.; Cape

Jaffa, 130 fms., shallow water, alive down to 5 fms. Tasmania: general. Vic-

toria: Western Port, Port Fairy. Western Australia: Yallingup; Ellenbrook ;

Hopetoun; King George Sound.

Remarks—Dredged specimens are buff-coloured. There are a number of

variants amongst Southern Australian specimens, those from Rottnest being

somewhat flattened, with waving axial colour flames.

(a2) Unicoloured deep rose-red, typical.

(b) Distant, short, white narrow infrasutural flammules.

almost completely axially across the body whorl.

(d) Infrasutural flammules a spiral row of white spots well below the peri-

phery, occasionally two rows, rarely joined with the infrasutural row by a

white streak.

(e) More elongate, and whorls more convex.

(f) Body whorl somewhat flattened.

(g) A white line replaces the row of white dots below the periphery.

(h) Body whorl somewhat flattened, convex towards the base and with waving

axials of red and white, best marked as crescents just below the suture and

below the periphery, common at Rottnest.

(1) Zigzag flames of red joining upper with lower alternate red spots, with

intercalating red flames from intermediate red spots, foundation colour of

a faint tint.

GABRIELONA NEPEANENSIS (Gatliff and Gabriel)

Phastanella nepeanensis Gatliff and Gabriel 1908, Proc. Roy. Vict., 21, (2), 366.

Loc.—Victoria: Flinders; Western Port; Ocean Beach; near Point Nepean

(type loc.). South Australia: Port Lincoln; Robe.

Remarks—I succeeded in finding only two specimens in shell sand at

Port Lincoln in 1936 when on the McCoy Expedition, and one at Robe. Some

of our specimens of Pellax virgo are hard to separate from nepeanensis and need

very careful examination before certain identification.

166

Family COCCULINIDAE

NoTOCRATER TASMANICA (Pilsbry)

Acmaea tasmanica Pilsbry 1895, Nautilus, 8, 128.

Loc.—Tasmania: Derwent Estuary, 10 fms. (type loc.), South and East in

kelp roots. South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent, 10 fms.; St. Francis Island.

Victoria: San Remo.

Remarks—-Notocrater meridionalis Hedley 1903, from Port Kembla, New

South Wales, 63 to 75 fms., is closely allied.

TECTISUMEN TASMANICA (May)

Cocculinella tasmanica May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 67, pl. xvii, fig, 25, 25a.

Loc-~Tasmania: East Coast, 40 to 70 ims. (type loc.). South Australia:

Cape Jaffa, 130 fms.

Remarks—The single South Australian specimen recorded by Verco in 1907

as Cocculina coercita Hedley 1906 is still unique. From a series of Tasmanian

specimens I am inclined to think that the present species is close to coercita

Hedley from east of Sydney in 300 fms. (type loc.), but Hedley’s species is

narrower, flatter, with an almost flat base, differences which may be detected in

the adult but not so easily in younger specimens. The South Australian specimen

is intermediate between tasmanica and coercita, but it is here placed as tasmanica,

to which it bears closer resemblance, pending the discovery of further material.

Tectisumen compressa Suter 1908, from New Zealand, is also closely allied.

TECTISUMEN MAYI Finlay

Tectisumen mayi Finlay 1926, Trans. New Zeal. Inst., 57, 374.

Loc.—Tasmania: Schouten Island, 40 fms. (type loc.); Maria Island, 50

ims.; Port Arthur, 50 to 70 fms. South Australia: Beachport, 110 fms.

Remarks—This is the species recorded by May from Tasmania under the

name clypidellaeformis Suter 1908, a New Zealand shell belonging also to the

genus Tectisumen Finlay 1926.

Family LOTIIDAE

CoNACMEA SUBUNDULATA (Angas)

Acmaea subundulata Angas 1865, Proc. Zool, Soc. Lond., 155.

Lec.—South Australia: Port Lincoln (type loc.) ; Normanville; Yankalilla

Bay, American River, Kangaroo Island; Hardwicke Bay ; both Gulfs; Robe; Port

MacDonnell, Streaky Bay, Murat Bay, St. Francis Island, dredged alive at Kan-

garoo Island; Eastern Cove, 9 fms.; Rapid Head, 9 and 11 fms.; Gulf St. Vincent,

off Glenelg, 7 fms., many alive. Victoria: Barwon Heads; Port Phillip; Cape

Otway.

Remarks—Three specimens are before me which have been compared with

the types in the British Museum and pronounced by Verco as typical. The holo-

type specimens and those before me represent the maximum adult size, the

average being about 5 mm. x 7 mm. x 8 mm. and some apparently just adult being

4mm. x 5 mm. x 6mm. Verco correctly recorded this species as subundulata

Angas 1906. Notoacmea (Conacmea) alta Oliver 1926 is a synonym, his figure

and description agreeing perfectly with specimens compared with the types of

subundulata except that his, like many South Australian examples, is smaller.

This species occurs alive in quantity in the meadows of short Cymodocea

found on the lower parts of the sand flats exposed at low tide, such as at Outer

Harbour, South Australia, the specimens being consistently small, and possibly

juvenile.

167

Family CASSIDIDAE

Hypocassis BICARINATA (Jonas)

Cassis bicarinata Jones 1839, Archiv. Naturg., 1, 343, pl. x, fig. 2.

Text fig.

Loc—China (type loc., in error). South Australia: Gulf St. Vincent (type

loc., designated); Minlacowie; Port Victor; Port Lincoln; American River ;

Lacepede Bay; common in both Gulfis; dredged Yankalilla Bay, 12 fms.; Rapid

Bay, 9 fms.; Rapid Head, 10 to 12 fms.; Investigator Straits, 15 fms.; Middleton,

23 fms.; Troubridge, 19 fms., alive down to 20 fms., but rare. Victoria: Port Fairy.

Remarks—-When young the shell has a denticulated inner margin to the outer

lip, the teeth being well marked, numbering 15 to 16, the most anterior at the

commencement of the canal, and the most posterior being the largest. Sometimes

there is an additional small tooth behind the large posterior one. The large

posterior tooth is opposite the second transverse row of tubercles, which is more

or less apparent on the inner lip. In larger shells, say about two-and-a-half inches

OPERCULUM

pink coloration

eye

brown line =

posterior

FOOT TENTACLE

long, the outer lip is nearly or quite edentulous, but for the anterior or posterior

teeth, and is much inflected. The young shell shows also longitudinal distant

irregular, wavy or zigzag and even reticulated rusty lines. The animal has a large

foot which is white, round behind, uniformly but less curved in front; on its upper

surface is a brown line about two millimetres broad, complete posteriorly where

it is produced to the edge. The tentacles are short, pointed, white at the distal

ends and at the proximal half. The eyes are placed half-way down on the outer

side, and just beyond these for one-half of the part distal to them the colour is

pink. The under surface of the foot is quite white. There are varietal forms,

micromorphs and macromorphs, which is not unusual in this family,

(a) Smaller closely wrinkled, low spired form, “decresensis’ Hedley 1923,

from Kangaroo Island.

(b) Thicker, smaller, heavier sculpture, spiral colour bands obsolete. This

approaches fimbriata and is found rarely on the West Coast of South

Australia.

168

irregular colour stripes of walnut brown, and the callus on the body whorl

a mere glaze,

(d) A smaller dark-coloured form found in the sand amongst Posidonia weed.

The species is sometimes found in numbers on sandy beaches, 45 living

specimens being counted by me at high tide mark on Sellicks Beach in 1935. The

largest specimen measures 128 mm. in height and the average about 110 mm. for

a fully grown adult. ;

Hypocassis FIMBRIATA (Quoy and Gaimard)

Cassis fimbriata Quoy and Gaimard 1833, Voy. Astrolobe Zool., 2, 596, pl. xliii,

fig. 7 to 8.

Loc.—Mariannes (type loc., error). Western Australia (type loc.): Albany;

Esperance; Bunbury; Eyres Sand Patch; west of Eucla, 100 fms., alive.

Remarks—All our Western Australian specimens are much smaller than

bicarinata, thicker and have wavy, axial, rust-coloured flames in the adult and

juvenile, and the protoconch is larger, almost bulbous. They are consistently

bicarinate with two rows of spiral sharp nodules. The 20 specimens before me

show no intergradation, though a larger series might. The two specimens from

100 fms. are strongly bicarinate, one with a third weak carination below. This

is the largest specimen I have seen and was recorded by Verco 1912 as

“fimbriata,” measuring 83 mm. in height, The average would be about 70 mm.

XENOGALEA PAUCIRUGIS (Menke)

Cassis pauctrugis Menke 1843, Moll. Nov. Holl, Spec., 23.

Loc.—-Western Australia (type loc.); Albany, Esperance, Bunbury, beach

and 22 ims. South Australia: Robe; Beachport, 100 fms.

Remarks—This species is represented from South Australia by a few beach-

worn specimens and one dredged fragment.

Xenogalea mawsoni sp. nov.

Pl. xii, fig. 1, 2

Shell large, thin, globose oval, spire moderately exserted, aperture wide,

external varix thin; colour when fresh pink-flesh tint with a blackish-purple on

the varix of the canal and about seven blotches of black-purple on the outside of

the recurved labrum, fading away towards the dorsum as vanishing spiral flames ;

some have two spiral bands of orange blotches on the body whorl; protoconch of

two-and-a-half finely punctate whorls followed by finely spirally striate early

whorls, later becoming smooth with two very weak and shallow spiral grooves ;

body whorl keeled at the shoulder with numerous small nodules, beneath which

series is a shallow channel; there are close accremental striae throughout; canal

short, recurved; columella not wrinkled, with a broad weak central fold; a deep

gutter running into the wide umbilicus; outer lip with a thin, weakly developed

varix, scarcely folded back and smooth, without internal lirae. Height 80 mm.,

width 55 mm.

Loc.—Western Australia: 120 miles west of Eucla, 120 fms. (type loc.),

also 75 fms.; 90 miles west of Eucla, 85 and 100 fms.

Remarks—These specimens were recorded by Verco 1912, Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 217 under the name Cassidea pyrum Lamarck, but they are a very

different species. The relationship is rather with paucirugis, but they are quite

distinct. They are larger, thinner, differently sculptured and coloured and

have a thin, scarcely reflected, non-lirate outer lip. The specimens are now faded

169

to almost dead white, but signs of the colour pattern can be faintly discerned.

Holotype, Reg. No. D.14201, S. Aust. Museum. Named after Sir. D. Mawson.

Xenogalea denda sp. nov.

Shell, large, thin, globose, smooth; cream, with an extremely faint sugges-

tion of rufous blotches; mouth white except on the lower outer lip, where there

are pairs of chestnut blotches; body whorl smooth; outer lip narrowly reflected ;

columella with five weak plications above, then a narrow furrow followed by a

strong fold running to the edge of the lobe. Height 82 mm., diameter 60 mm.

Loc—Western Australia: Great Australian Bight, west of Eucla, 100 fms.

(type loc.) ; also 250 fms.

Remarks—More globose than stadialis Hedley 1914, from between Gabo

Island and Green Cape 50-100 fms., and practically without colour pattern.

Holotype, Reg. No. D. 533, S. Aust. Museum.

ANTEPHALIUM SEMIGRANOSUM (Lamarck)

Text fig.

Cassis semigranosum Lamarck 1822, Hist. Anim. s. Vert., 7, 228.

Loc.—Tasmania: South (type loc.). South Australia: Yankalilla Bay;

Aldinga Bay; Encounter Bay; Pondolowie Bay; Lacepede Bay; dredged Yanka-

lilla Bay, 15 fms.; Newland Head, 20 fms.; Beachport, 100, 110, 150 and 200 fms. ;

Cape Borda, 55 and 62 fms.; Cape Jaffa, 90 and 130 fms.; St. Francis Island,

507

RADULA

OPERCULUM

15 to 20 fms. Western Australia: 80 miles west of Eucla, 80 fms.; King George

Sound, 12 and 35 fms.; Hopetoun, 35 fms.; Bunbury.

Remarks--All the dredged specimens are dead shells, some from 100 fms.

having a longer protoconch. An occasional specimen has a kind of varix formed

at a distance of half a whorl or less from the aperture, due to a reflected and

thickened lip prematurely formed. The radula teeth and operculum are figured

here.

170

ANTEPHALIUM aococKi (Sowerby)

Cassis adcocki Sowerby 1896, Proc. Mal. Soc. Lond., 2, 14, text fig.

Loc.—South Australia: Yankalilla Bay (type loc.) ; Kingscote; Troubridge

(Riddle) ; Normanville; Port Morowie; Port Elliot; Beachport, 40 fms. (frag-

ment). Western Australia: 90 miles west of Eucla, 100 fms.

Remarks—The largest specimen I have seen, 42 mm. in height, is in

G. Pattison’s Collection, taken at Troubridge.

Family VOLUTIDAE

MELO MILTONIS (Gray)

Pl, xiii

Voluta milionis Gray 1833, Griffiths Animal Kingdom, 12, Mollusca, pl. xxix.

Cymbium miltonis Gray, Kuster 1841, Conch. Cab., 5, (2), 213, p’. xlii, fig. 1.

Voluta miltonis Deshayes, Anim. Sans Vert., 2nd edit., 10, 406, sp. 46.

Melo miltonis Gray, Broderip, Thes. Conch., 1, 415, sp. 7, pl. Ixxxiii, fig. 24, 25.

Loc.—South Australia: Cape Thevenard; Murat Bay; Streaky Bay; Fowlers

Bay; St. Peters Island; Laura Bay; Eyre Island; Cape Vivonne. Western Aus-

tralia: 90 miles west of Eucla, 60 miles off shore, 95 fms.; Eucla, 90 fms.; King

George Sound.

Remarks—The original figure in Griffith and Pidgeon (Griffith’s Edition of

Cuvier’s Animal Kingdom) is not very good, but there is no other Melon shell

at all like this species and Broderip 1855 reduced his cylindratus to a synonym.

Reeve 1861, Conch. Icon., 13, pl. xvi, fig. 8a and b, shows a typical specimen from

Swan River, Western Australia, not unlike that of Griffith and Pidgeon’s.

Sowerby Thes. Conch., 1, pl. Ixxxiii, fig. 24 and 25, gives accurate figures of a

specimen from the same locality like that figured by the writer from Cape

Thevenard, in Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, (4), 506, fig. 1 and 2. A specimen taken

alive at St. Peters Island has a big muscular fleshy foot, light chocolate coloured,

veined with cream and the upper parts of the body cream-coloured. A photo-

graph of the animal just emerging from the shell is reproduced here (pl. xiii). The

shell is 260 mm. in height and 160 mm. wide. During and between the months of

September to December the Baler congregates in groups of 40 to 50 in certain

definite areas on our west coast, when egg-laying takes place. The males and

females have shells of slightly different size and shape, which has led some to

think that there are two species of Baler along our coast. Queensland species

are umbilicatus Sowerby 1825, Gen. Moll., pl. ccliv, a wide-mouthed form, closely

coronate, with spikes incurved, based on a Moreton Bay shell; the commoner

georginae Gray 1833, originally named from a Swan River shell, and the closely

allied mucronatus Sowerby 1847 from Moreton Bay.

SUMMARY

The exact geographical and vertical localities of 77 South Australian Gastro-

pods are given. One new genus, Eudaronia, and four new species, Scissurona

vincentiana, Pellax johnstoni, Xenogalea mawsoni and X. denda are described.

Many variations of the typical shell and observations on the living animal and

radula are also given.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1945 Vol. 69, Plate XII

Gwen D. Walsh

Fig. 1 and 2) Nenogalea mawsont sp.nov., x0:6 3and4 Pellax johustoni sp. nov., x8

Sand6 Scissurona vincentiana sp.nov., x8

Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 1945 Vol. 69, Plate XI!T

Melo miltonis Gray, animal emerging from the shell, x 0°38

Page

Acmaea - - - 166

adcocki - - ~- 170

alta- - - - - 166

ampullus - - - 152

angasi - - - - 164

angeli - - - - 159

annectans - = 133

Antephalium - 169

arenacea - - - 156

Argalista - - 156

aspersus - - - 153

Astrea - - - ~- 162

aurea - - - - 162

auricula - - ~ 152

australis 152, 155, 163

baccatus - - - 153

bakeiei - - + 451

Bellastraea - ~- 162

bicarinata - = 167

Brookula - ~ 159

bruniense -~ - 160

Buccinum - += 163

bulimoides - - 163

Callomphala - - 157

cancellata - 157, 159

caperata - - - 161

carinata - 156, 159

carpenter} - - 154

Charisma - - 156

Cirsonella - - 157

Cocculinella - - 166

coercita - - ~- 166

compressa - - 166

Conacmea - ~ 166

concinna - - - 158

consobrina - - 159

contabulata - - 158

corallina - - - 151

erebresculpta - 159

Crosseola - - 158

Cyclostrema - - 160

cylindratus - - 170

171

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES

Page

decresensis - - 167

delectabile - - 161

delicatula - + 163

Delphinula - - 154

denda - - - - 169

densilineata - - 155

Dolichoschisma 151

Dolicrossea - ~- 159

Elachorbis - - 160

euchelioides - ~- 151

Eudaronia - ~- 158

Euninella- - - 161

fenestrata - = 153

fimbriata - - ~ 168

Foralepas - - 151

fugitiva - - - 156

gabiniana - - 164

Gabrielona - - 165

gatlifi - - - - 151

Gena - - - - 152

georginae - - 170

gruneri - - - 161

gunteri - - - 150

harriettae - - 160

hedleyi - - - 155

Hemitoma - - 150

Herpetopoma - 152

Hypocassis - - 167

homalon - - - 160

impertusa - - 152

incerta - - - 154

inflata - - - ~- 163

inscripta - - - 160

jaffaensis ~ - 158

johnstoni - 160, 164

josephi - - - 156

labiata - = - 159

lamellosus - - 161

lauta - - ~ - 159

Leptothyra - - 154

Limax - - - ~ 161

Lissotesta - - 157

Liotia - - -

lodderae - -

Lodderena -

Lodderia - -

lucida - - -

mawsoni - -

mayana - -

mayi - - -

Melo - - -

meridionalis -

micra - - -

Micrastraea_ -

Microclanculus

miltonis - -

Mimelenchus

minima - -

Minolops - -

mucronatus -

Munditia - -

munita - +

nepeanensis

nigra - - -

Ninella - -

Notacmea = -

Notocrater -

obtusa - -

Orthomesus -

paucirugis ~-

Pellax ~ - -

perdix - - -

Phasianella_ -

porcellana -

producta - -

profundior -

pumilio - -

pyrum- - -

reticulata -

rosea . - -

roseopunctata

rotatum - -

rutidoloma -

sanguinea = -

Page

- 154

~ 158

- 158

- 157

- 168

botopre)d

oan

Fore bb tora Oe ra

—_

Las)

scabriusculus

Schizotrochus

Scissurona -

semigranosum

squamifera -

stadialis - -

Stakeyna - -

strigosa - -

stamineus 5

Stomatia - -

subemarginata

sublabiata -

subquadrata -

subninella -

subsanguinea

subundulata -

susonis - -

syderea - -

tasmaniae = -

tasmanica

tatei - -

Tectisumen | -

tentoriformis

tomlini - -

torquatus -

translucida -

Tricolia - -

tritonis - -

Trochus - -

Turbo - - -

umbilicatus -

undulatus -

Vaceuchelus -

ventricosa = -

venusta - -

vincentiana -

virgo - - -

vixumbilicatus

weldii - - -

Xenogalea -

Zalipais - -

zebra - - -

Page

152

150

169

162

169

157

152

161

152

150

159

156

161

163

166

157

154

151

, 166

160

166

162

164

161

VOL, 69. PART -2 30 NOVEMBER 1945

TRANSACTIONS OF

THE ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

. ADELAIDE

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE

Price Twelve Shillings and Sixpence

Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide,

for transmission by post asa periodical

AUSTRALIAN CUMACEA NO. 11 THE FAMILY DIASTYLIDAE (PART 1)

BY HERBERT M. HALE, DIRECTOR, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

(READ 14 JUNE 1945)

Summary

The Australian Diastylid fauna, as collected to date, presents a facies very different from that of the

Arctic, Subarctic and Boreal regions; the Cumacea of the Antarctic and Subantarctic are as yet not

very well known.

While more than 40 Australian species are now in hand, mainly from off the southern and eastern

coasts, two-thirds of them belond to Gynodiastylis and allied genera, where the reduction of parts is

carried further than anywhere else within the family. These last are dealt with in another place. The

other species are referred to four genera which may be separated as follows:-

dr.

Adult male with basis of peraeopods not greatly expanded, and with flagellum of second

antenna short. Leptostylis Sars.

Adult male with basis of first to fourth peraeopods greatly expanded and with flagellum of

second antenna reaching at least to end of pleon. 2

Third maxilliped of female without exopod. Paradiastylis Calman.

Third maxilliped of female with exopod. 3

. Pleopods each with two rami, furnished with plumose setae. Female with no trace of

exopods on __ third and fourth peraeopods. Dimorphostylis Zimmer

Pleopods each with only one ramus, furnished with modified, non-plumose setae. Female

with small exopods on third and fourth peraeopods. Anchistylis gen. Nov.

173

AUSTRALIAN CUMACEA No. 11%

THE FAMILY DIASTYLIDAE (PART 1)

By Herserr M. Hate, Director, South Australian Museum

[Read 14 June 1945]

Fig. 1-26

INTRODUCTION

The Australian Diastylid fauna, as collected to date, presents a facies very

different from that of the Arctic, Subarctic and Boreal regions; the Cumacea of

the Antarctic and Subantarctic are as yet not very well known.

While more than 40 Australian species are now in hand, mainly from off the

southern and eastern coasts, two-thirds of them belong to Gynodiastylis and allied

genera, where the reduction of parts is carried further than anywhere else within

the family. These last are dealt with in another place. The other species are

referred to four genera which may be separated as follows :—

1 Adult male with basis of peraeopods not greatly expanded, and with flagellum of

second antenna short. ; . . “3 Leptostylis Sars.

Adult male with basis of first to fourth peraeopods greatly expanded and with

flagellum of second antenna reaching at least to end of pleon. _.... ot fun We

2 Third maxilliped of female without exopod. nea Paradiastylis Calman

Third maxilliped of female with exopod. He ns _ eel a a 8

3 Pleopods each with two rami, furnished with plumose setae. Female with no

trace of exopods on third and fourth peraeopods. ..... Dimorphostylis Zimmer

Pleopods each with only one ramus, furnished with modified, non-plumose

setae. Female with small exopods on third and fourth peraeopods.

Anchistylis gen, nov.

The three last-named genera present points of interest when compared to

the Gynodiastylis group. In Paradiastylis the exopod of the third maxilliped of

the female is consistently absent, in some species of Dimorphostylis it is rather

small in this sex. In Dimorphostylis vieta the pleopod is somewhat more rudi-

mentary than in other species referred to the genus. The post-anal part of the

telson is short or insignificant in both sexes of Paradiastylis and Dimorphostylis

australis Foxon, and also in the females of Dimorphostylis asiatica Zimmer,

D. vieta (Hale), D. colefaxi sp. nov. and Anchistylis, The three genera are out-

standing in that they have the basis of all but the last of the peraeopods of the

adult male conspicuously expanded, distally produced, and furnished with

exopods having the peduncle very broad; these wide thoracic exopods are strik-

ingly different from those of Gynodiastylis, etc., where the specialized second

antenna of the male and the complete absence of pleopods provide good dis-

tinguishing features. Also worthy of attention is the telson of Dunorphostylis

australis, where, while there is no distinct post-anal part, the somite is very long

and cylindrical, a feature paralleled in the genotype of Dic (Stebbing. 1910,

p. 415), Makrokylindrus (Stebbing 1912, p. 150) and in Calman’s Diastylis

tubulicauda and D. fistularis (Calman, 1905, p. 46 and 1911, p, 383; see also

Zimmer, 1914, pp. 191-193).

Another point of interest is the fact that the branchial leaflets where

examined in both Dimorphostylis and Anchistylis are digitiform and few in

number, usually about ten or so in both sexes.

Finally, the pleopods of Anchistylis exhibit a departure from the usual type.

©) No. 10, see Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 69, (1), 86-95.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5.A., 69, (2), 30 November 1945

174

Genus Leprostyiis Sars

Leptostylis Sars, 1869, p. 343; Stebbing 1913, p. 123 (ref.) ; Hansen 1920, p. 71;

Hale 1928, p. 47.

Key to AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF LEPTOSTYLIS

Carapace covered with spinules. ..... dese fide cet a. wvercot Hale

Carapace smooth, an site He oh ee bi recalvasira sp. nov.

Leptostylis recalvastra sp. nov.

Ovigerous female—Integument thin, semi-transparent, slightly calcified and

clothed with scattered but quite prominent hairs.

Carapace two-sevenths of total length of animal and more than twice as long

as pedigerous somites together; seen from above it is subtriangular in shape,

broadest at rear end, where it is almost as wide as long and nearly half as wide

Fig. 1

Leptostylis recalvastra, type female and allotype

male; lateral views and (ceph.) cephalothorax

from above (x18); serr., serrations of lower

margin of carapace (x 112).

again as deep; seen from the side the upper profile is somewhat sinuate because

of the swollen branchial regions, between which the dorsum is sulcate; there is a

low boss on each side of frontal lobe at posterior end of sutures and outside

the latter is a low fold, but the sides are without ridges or other sculpture save

for faint pitting. Pseudorostrum subacute in front, the lobes meeting for a

distance equal to one-sixth of length of carapace. Ocular lobe very small,

unarmed, rounded, and without apparent lenses. Antero-lateral margin very

shallowly concave, antero-lateral angle obtuse, and inferior margin posterior to it

serrate, the teeth varying as shown in fig. 1.

175

Pedigerous somites each with a transverse fold; first partly concealed, the

rest not differing much in length and not greatly expanded on sides.

Pleon half as long again as cephalothorax; fifth somite narrowing slightly to

the rear, subcylindrical, as wide as deep and nearly three times as long as breadth;

sixth somite only half as long as fifth and distinctly dilated posteriorly: telson

about as long as sixth somite, armed with a pair of rather long apical spines and

with a single pair of lateral spines; about one-fourth of its length is post-anal.

Fig. 2

Leptostylis recalvastra, paratypes ovigerous female and subadult male; ant., mxp.

and prp., first antenna, third maxilliped and first to third peraeopods (x 43);

exop. 3, exopod of third peraeopod (x 180); urop., uropod with fifth to sixth pleon

somites and telson (x43).

First antenna with first and third joints of peduncle subequal in length, each

considerably longer than second; flagellum composed of two subequal joints,

which together are almost as long as last segment of peduncle; accessory lash

shorter than first joint of main flagellum, also two-jointed but with the first seg-

ment very short.

Mandible with ten or eleven spines, the anterior eight or nine of which are

stout.

176

Third maxilliped slender, the basis nearly half as long again as rest of limb;

merus, carpus, propodus and dactylus subequal in length.

First peraeopod long, the carpus reaching well beyond level of end of pseudo-

rostrum; basis only about half as long as remaining joints together, propodus

nearly two-thirds as long again as carpus and almost three times as long as

dactylus.

Basis of second peraeopod only half as long as rest of limb; ischium distinct ;

carpus twice as long as merus, a little more than twice as long as propodus, and

equal in length to the long dactylus.

Third and fourth peraeopods with basis longer than rest of limb and with

merus shorter than carpus; propodal seta and longest carpal setae reaching well

beyond tip of the slender dactylus; exopods three-jointed (the last segment

minute) and furnished with three setae; fifth peraeopod with basis not longer

than remaining joints together.

Peduncle of uropod distinctly more than twice as long as telson, the inner

margin with a dozen irregular spines; endopod two-thirds as long as peduncle,

three-jointed ; first segment one-third as long again as second and with two spines

on inner margin; second joint with one inner spine at distal end; third joint not

quite as long as second and without spines on inner margin.

Length, 5-4 mm. Embryo, with pleon curved, 0°28 mm. Ova approxi-

mately 0-2 mm.

Subadult male—Carapace suboval in shape as viewed from above, widest at

about middle of length, where it is less than one-third as broad again as depth;

it is about two-sevenths of total length, and more than twice as long as pedigerous

somites together; the antennal angle is not at all marked but the inferior margin

is serrate (see fig. 1, serr. 3); frontal lobe, etc., as in female.

Pleon fully half as long again as cephalothorax; telson and uropods as in

adult female.

First antenna relatively very large, the last joint of peduncle globose, but

the long hairs have not yet appeared; flagellum five-jointed, the first and last

joints short, the others subequal in length; accessory lash four-jointed, and as

long as first three segments of main flagellum; the proximal and distal joints are

small, the other two elongate,

Length, 4:5 mm.

Loc—New South Wales: four miles off Eden, 70 metres, in silt (allotype

male, K. Sheard, Oct. 1943) ; five miles off Eden, 60 metres, on mud (type female,

K. Sheard, submarine light, Dec. 1943); four miles east of Port Hacking, 80

metres, on mud (K. Sheard, A. Trawl, May 1944). Types in S. Aust.

Museum, Reg. No. C. 2762-2763.

A second ovigerous female taken with the type is slightly smaller. Only

immature males are available; in these the first pleopod, though still without setae,

is large, but the second quite rudimentary.

This species in some respects closely resembles the Subarctic gracilis

Stappers (male only—1908, p. 100, pl. i-lii), but differs in the slightly different

proportions of the uropods, the much shorter basis of the first peraeopod, and the

very large male first antenna.

Genus ParAprastyLis Calman

Paradiastylis Calman 1904, p. 173, and 1905a, p. 20, and 1911, p. 366; Zimmer,

1908, p. 181, etc., and 1936, p. 435; Stebbing, 1912, p. 146, and 1913, p. 121;

Kemp, 1916, p. 398.

177

Two species are now recorded for Australia. P. tumida Hale (1937, p. 66,

fig. 3) proves, by acquisition of the adult male, to belong elsewhere.

Key To SpectIEs OF PARADIASTYLIS

1] Each side of carapace with at most one ridge. Distal end of male telson

spiniform and without articulated terminal spines. eu culicoides Kemp

Each side of carapace with at least three oblique ridges. Distal end of male

telson not spiniform and with a pair of articulated spines. _.. flee;

2 First joint of endopod of uropod twice as long as second and third joints towether,

brevicaudata (Zimmer)

First joint of endopod of uropod not longer than second and third joints together. 3

3 Peduncle of meer much longer than combined tenets of sixth pleon somite

and telson. ree . — longipes Calman

Peduncle of uropod not ¢ thhger Seti sixth plada somite and telson together. ... 4

4 Each side of carapace with four oblique ridges. Propodus of first peraeopod

short, not as long as merus and carpus combined. Propodus of second peraeopod

three-fourths as long as either dactylus or carpus. ate brachyura Calman

Each side of carapace with three oblique ridges. Propodus of first peraeopod

elongate, considerably longer than merus and carpus combined. Propodus of

second peraeopod only half as long as wachying and much less than half as

long as carpus... ae fhe fey eo 4: we .. molhs sp. nov.

PARADIASTYLIS LONGIPES Calman

Paradiastylis longipes Calman 1905a, p. 21, fig. 4; Stebbing, 1913, p. 122 (ref.).

A single male from New South Wales (Cronulla, 8 feet, K. Sheard, Sept.

1942) departs from Calman’s description in small details. The size is a trifle

larger (3:7 mm.) but the body and appendages are just as described, except that

the uropod differs in having 13 or 14 instead of about 20 inner spines, and in

having the endopod relatively shorter; this has the joints armed with five, three

and three inner spines respectively, but the first segment is relatively shorter, so

that the ramus as a whole is not much longer than the exopod and is less than

half as long as the peduncle. The integument, as stated by Calman, is membran-

ous, and the three lateral ridges of the carapace are detected with difficulty ; in the

example in hand these are less oblique than shown in Calman’s figure. The

U-shaped ridge on the dorsum of the telson is pronounced and the short post-anal

portion has a pair of apical spines, on each side of which are a shorter spine

and a seta.

The species was previously known only from north of the Equator, in

Malayan waters. Possibly the Australian form represents another species, but

as the male now recorded agrees so closely in most details with that of longipes

one hesitates to separate it on the grounds mentioned.

Paradiastylis mollis sp. nov.

Ovigerous female—Integument membranous; fragile and transparent.

Carapace ovate in shape as seen from above, wider than deep, about two-

thirds as long again as deep; it is one-third of the total length of animal and

twice as long as pedigerous somites together; each side has three oblique, curved

ridges, the most anterior distinct, the others faintly defined; posterior half of

dorsum with a deep and wide median gutter; the mid-line, as seen from the side,

is excavate at the front of the first of the ridges and again (where it is armed with

a small tooth) midway between this and the ocular lobe. Pseudorostrum sub-

acute in front, one-fifth of total length of carapace. Ocular lobe moderately

large, more than twice as wide as long, with no apparent lenses, but with a small

tooth on each side; antero-lateral angle scarcely at all excavate and angle not

defined.

178

First pedigerous somite partly concealed; fourth dorsally much the longest,

as long as combined dorsal lengths of first to third somites.

Pleon not much longer than cephalothorax ; fifth somite subcylindrical, twice

as long as wide and almost twice as long as the sixth somite, which is not markedly

dilated posteriorly; telson subcordate, as long as sixth somite, with short post-

anal portion, armed with a pair of apical spines and two pairs of lateral spines,

anterior to which are two pairs of short bristles.

Third segment of peduncle of first antenna one-fourth as long again as

second ; flagellum not much shorter than second peduncular segment and composed

of two equal joints; accessory flagellum unisegmentate, nearly half as long as

main lash. Second antenna four-jointed, the last segment minute, the third and

fourth subequal in length.

Mandible with nine or ten spines, the last two of which are slender, the

others unusually robust.

First peraeopod long, the carpus reaching almost to level of end of pseudo-

rostrum ; basis short, not greatly more than one-third as long as rest of limb and

Paradiastylis mollis, type female; lateral view

and cephalothorax from above. (x 34)

not quite as long as propodus, which is almost half as long again as carpus and

fully twice as long as dactylus.

Basis of second peraeopod also relatively short, not longer than rest of limb

without dactylus; ischium distinct; carpus longer than dactylus (but shorter than

dactylus plus propodus), twice as long as merus and nearly three times as long

as propodus; longest dactylar setae equal in length to dactylus.

Basis of third peraeopod not as long as rest of limb, merus distinctly longer

than carpus, and dactylus long and slender; fourth peraeopod little shorter than

third, and fifth not much smaller than fourth; the propodal seta and two slender

distal carpal setae in all the posterior legs reach beyond the tip of dactylus.

Uropod with peduncle twice as long as telson and armed on inner margin

with nine or ten spines which successively increase in length in distal half;

endopod not much shorter than peduncle, three-jointed, the first segment not quite

twice as long as second which is barely as long as third; inner spines are respec~

tively four, two and two, and the slender distal spine is equal in length to the

third joint; exopod equal in length to the first two segments of endopod, with

the longer of the distal spines two-thirds as long as the ramus.

Length, 2°58 mm. Ova, 0:164 mm. to 0°176 mm.

Loc.—Queensland: Moreton Bay, Myora Bight, surface (I. S. R. Munro,

Stations 29 and 45, 50 cm. 40 m. net, 3.30 a.m. and 10.30 p.m., 29 Nov. 1940).

Type in S. Aust. Museum, Reg. No. C.2765.

179

Another female has an extra spine on second joint of endopod of uropod.

In this species the peduncle of this appendage is much shorter than in longipes

Calman, being only twice as long as the telson, as in brachyura Calman (1904,

p. 174, pl. v, fig. 76-90) ; the last-named species, however, has the rami shorter

in relation to the peduncle and the exopod little shorter than the endopod, the

second segment of which is longer than the third according to Calman’s figure,

Fig. 4

Paradiastylis mollis, type female: c pace, anterior portion of carapace and first

antenna (x75); mand., mandible (x 125); prp., first, second, third and fifth

peraeopods (x75); urop., uropod with sixth pleon somite and telson (x75).

while the very different proportions of the joints of the first and second

peraeopods, the shorter carpal and propodal setae of the posterior legs, and the

presence of four ridges on each side of the carapace provide other differences.

Genus DimorpHostyLis Zimmer

Dimorphostylis Zimmer 1921, p. 144, and 1936, p. 435; Foxon, 1932, p. 390;

Hale, 1936, p. 403.

If Zimmer’s genotype material is all referable to the one species this is

unusual in the very marked differences between the telson of female and adult

male. What is more extraordinary is the fact that in the young male the telson

has no distinct post-anal part (as in the young female) but that this appears in

the adult male.

Examination of the Australian Diastylids so far in hand and, as previously

noted, representing upward of 40 species, forces one to the conclusion that the

relative length, and armature, of the post-anal part of the telson cannot be

regarded as reliable generic characters; this is discussed under the genus Gyno-

diastylis, which is dealt with in another paper. The species now placed in

Dimorphostylis differ so much in this respect that the generic name becomes apt

in still another direction! (see Zimmer ué supra, p. 148).

180

As Zimmer himself states, the genus is close to Paradiastylis; broadening the

diagnosis to admit Foxon’s australis, cottoni Hale, and the new species described

below, it differs only in having an exopod on the third maxilliped of the female.

The males of both Dimorphostylis and Paradiastylis are distinguished from

Diastylis by the expanded basis of the peraeopods, but the inclusion in the first-

named genus of species with two instead of three terminal spines on the telson

makes it difficult to find characters to separate males of this genus from those of

Paradiastylis. Difficulties arise also if females alone are concerned; in the

present case colefaxi sp. nov. is referred here rather than to Diastylis only

because in Dimorphostylis, as in Gynodiastylis, etc., there is a tendency towards

extreme reduction of the post-anal part of the telson.

Exopods are entirely absent on the third and fourth peraeopods of the

females of the species now dealt with; in this detail they are distinct from the

forms placed in Leptostylis, The males, where known, have the flagellum of the

second antenna longer than is recognised for Leptostylis.

Key To SPECIES OF DIMORPHOSTYLIS

1 Preanal portion of telson much longer than sixth pleon somite .... australis Foxon

Preanal portion of telson shorter than sixth pleon somite. en ae Be

2 Sides of carapace covered with short spines. ne .. subaculeata sp. nov.

Carapace not spiny or with spines confined to anterior portion. .... i rt as:

3 Each lateral margin of telson with a non-articulated tooth. bute ees nti OH

Lateral margins of telson entire (articulated spines or bristles present).

4 Carapace with distinct lateral carinae posterior to level of frontal lobe. Basis

of second peraeopod shorter than rest of limb, with a strong distal tooth; ischium

and merus of this limb also with inner teeth. Second segment of endopod of

uropod shorter than third. aie ff. inauspicata sp, nov.

Carapace with no distinct carinae posterior to level of frontal lobe. Second

peraeopod without teeth, its basis as long as rest of limb. Second segment of

endopod of uropod longer than third. .... zsh bls .. fasmanica sp. nov.

5 First segment of endopod of uropod not much longer than second. vieta (Hale)

First segment of endopod of uropod longer than second and third segments

together, is . 6

6 Carapace with low folds but no clear-cut ridges. First peraeopod short, with

propodus not as long as carpus. _.... ian seh _ colefaxi sp.nov.

Carapace with sharply defined lateral ridges. First peraeopod long, with pro-

podus much longer than carpus. oleh 7 be k ’ 2

7 Carapace with at least four carinae on each side, between hinder end of frontal

lobe and posterior margin. -Carpus of second peraeopod distinctly longer than

combined lengths of propodus and dactylus ee cottont Hale

Carapace with three carinae on each side between hinder end of frontal lobe

and posterior margin, “a . ; it a a 8B

8 Carpace without spines. Telson of young male and female with no distinct post-

anal part and no lateral spines. Carpus of second peraeopod not much longer

than merus. att ts ’ f , asiatica Zimmer

Anterior part of carapace with spines; first lateral carina spiny. Telson of

female. with distinct post-anal part, armed with lateral spines. Carpus of second

peraeopod almost twice as long as merus. .... ay 4 .. tribulis sp. nov.

DIMORPHOSTYLIS AUSTRALIS Foxon

Dimorphostylis australis Foxon 1932, p. 390, fig. 7-8.

Foxon’s specimens were secured by the Great Barrier Reef Expedition at

Low Isles, Queensland (lat. 16° 23’S.). Males occur in material from several

of Mr. I. S. R. Munro’s stations in Moreton Bay (lat. 27° 18’S.), and it is

possible to supplement the brief description of that sex.

Adult male—Integument membranous, transparent.

181

Carapace more than twice as long as pedigerous somites together, one-third

of total length of animal (one-fourth in female, fide Foxon), considerably wider

than deep and twice as long as greatest depth; seen from the side its dorsum is

but slightly arched; from above its greatest width occurs at the level of ocular

lobe; sides with three faintly defined, oblique, and forwardly curved ridges, not

meeting on dorsum but separated by a wide longitudinal gutter. Antero-lateral

margin oblique, very slightly sinuate, and antero-lateral angle widely rounded, not

dentate. Pseudorostrum narrowly truncate as viewed from above, subacute as

seen from the side; lobes meeting for a distance equal to one-sixth of total length

of carapace. Ocular lobe large, rounded, very slightly constricted at base, twice

as wide as long and with three large, unpigmented, corneal lenses.

{SCORN

Fig. 5

Dimorphostylis australis, adult male; lateral view and cephalothorax from above (x20).

First pedigerous somite very short; fourth a little longer than any of the

others; pleural parts not greatly dilated, but third expanded both fore and aft.

Pleon longer than cephalothorax by half the length of telson; fifth somite

subcylindrical, half as long again as wide and one-fourth as long again as sixth

somite, which is slightly broadened posteriorly, where it is as wide as long; on

each side of distal end of ventral gutter of third and fourth somites there is a

pair of strong setae, plumose for part of their length; the almost cylindrical telson

is fully as long as fifth and sixth pleon somites together, more than four times

longer than greatest width, without any post-anal part, and with a pair of tiny

dumb-bell-shaped terminal spines, flanked on each side by a bristle; in posterior

third the dorsum is marked by a depression, with a U-shaped raised margin.

First antenna with first joint longer than third, which is distinctly longer

than second and is furnished with a brush of dense sensory hairs, emanating from

an oval area occupying the greater part of length on one side; flagellum as long

as second and third peduncular joints together, four-jointed, the first segment

very short, the second longer than subequal third and fourth combined; accessory

lash more than half as long as main flagellum, four-jointed, the proximal and distal

segments short and second segment shorter than third, which is about half the

length of the whole flagellum.

Second antenna with flagellum reaching at least to end of peduncle of uropod,

sometimes to distal ends of rami of that appendage.

182

Third maxilliped with the dilated basis half as long again as rest of limb, the

segments of which successively increase in length to the propodus, which is half

as long again as dactylus.

First peraeopod elongate, the carpus reaching to level of tip of pseudo-

rostrum; basis half as long as rest of limb with the usual distal brush of finely

plumose setae; propodus nearly half as long again as carpus and distinctly more

than twice as long as dactylus.

Second peraeopod with basis, including distal lobe, longer than remaining

joints together ; carpus as long as propodus and dactylus together and more than

twice as long as merus.

tels.”

Fig. 6

Dimorphostylis australis, adult, male; ant., first antenna (x65); mxp. and prp.,

third maxilliped and peraeopods (x 34); plp., pleopod (x90); urop., uropod with

fifth to sixth pleon somites and telson (x34; distal joints of endopod, x 65).

Basis of third and fourth peraeopods about as long as rest of limb, that of

fifth much shorter; merus in all posterior legs shorter than carpus and propodus

together ; longest carpal and propodal setae reaching a little beyond tip of dactylus.

Peduncle of pleopods robust; rami small, the exopod indistinctly two-jointed.

Peduncle of uropod fully half as long again as telson, more than two and

one-third times as long again as endopod, and with about 25 short spines on inner

margin, preceded by a bristle; endopod with first joint more than half as long

again as second and third segments together, and with second joint one-third as

long again as third; inner spines are usually six plus three plus two and the

slender terminal seta is as long as the last two joints together; exopod a little

183

shorter than endopod, with the long distal seta not much shorter than the second

joint of the ramus.

Length, 4:9 mm. to 5 mm.

Dimorphostylis subaculeata sp. nov.

Ovigerous female—Integument thin, but calcified and firm. Armed with

spinules, which are numerous and closely set on carapace.

Carapace robust, one-third of total length of animal, twice as long as deep,

and fully half as wide again as deep; seen from above the sides are subparallel

in posterior half, tapering rapidly to the front; the branchial regions are swollen

and between them the dorsum is sulcate; there is a deep pit on each side of rear

end of frontal lobe. Pseudorostrum subacute in front, the lobes meeting for a

distance equal to almost one-fifth of length of carapace. Antero-lateral margin

very shallowly concave; antennal angle rounded and, like inferior margin,

spinulose. Ocular lobe rounded, more than twice as wide as long, spinulose but

without apparent lenses.

c v4

Al HE

Fig. 7

Dimorphostylis subaculeata, type female; lateral view and cephalothorax from

above (x9).

Pedigerous somites together more than half as long as carapace; first partly

concealed ; fourth and fifth dorsally longer than second or third; pleural parts not

greatly expanded, but second and third legs a little more widely separated than

the others.

Pleon about as long as cephalothorax; fifth somite subcylindrical, slightly

narrowed towards distal end and fully one-third as long again as sixth somite,

which is somewhat expanded posteriorly, where it is almost as wide as long;

telson not much shorter than sixth somite, with two-fifths of its length post-anal ;

it is armed with a pair of short, stout, terminal spines and two pairs of lateral

spines, anterior to which on each side is a row of short bristles.

First antenna with first segment of peduncle a little longer than third and

half as long again as second; the flagellum is composed of two subequal joints,

184

is half as long as the last peduncular joint, and fully twice as long as the three-

jointed accessory lash, which has the proximal and distal segments very short.

Second antenna four-jointed ; the first segment bears two long plumose setae,

the second and third joints each one similar seta and the short, conical, terminal

segment one plain seta.

Mandible with 19 to 20 spines in the row (fig. 9 A).

First maxilliped with 10 digitiform gill-lobes. Third maxilliped with

exopod more than half as long as the basis, which is twice as long as remaining

joints together, and has the external distal angle rounded, not forwardly produced

or expanded, and furnished with a fan of half-a-dozen plumose setae; ischium

with a tooth at outer distal angle; carpus and propodus subequal in length, each

a little longer than either merus or dactylus.

)

Fig. 8

Dimorphostylis subaculeata, type female; ant., first and second antennae (x 44;

seta, x 135); mxp. and prp., third maxilliped, first, second, and fourth peraeopods

(x 22); urop., uropod with sixth pleon somite and telson (x 22); tels., post-anal

portion of telson (x55); end., distal joint of endopod of uropod (x 60).

First peraeopod long, the carpus reaching just beyond antero-lateral angle of

carapace; basis spinose, not dilated, less than two-thirds as long as rest of limb;

propodus fully as long as merus and carpus together, and three-fourths as long

again as dactylus.

Basis of second peraeopod shorter than rest of limb by the length of dactylus ;

ischium distinct, relatively large; carpus slender, more than three times as long

as merus and fully four times as long as propodus, which is not much more than

half as long as the dactylus.

185

Third to fifth peraeopods stout, with numerous long setae; basis (as in

second) spinose, in the third and fourth pairs about as long as rest of limb with-

out dactylus, in the fifth shorter than this; merus quite as long as carpus and

propodus together; dactylus long and slender; the outer face of carpus bears

near distal end three stout setae (preceded by four or five more slender setae),

and these, together with propodal seta, form a stout rake which extends well

beyond tip of dactylus.

Peduncle of uropod twice as long as telson and fully twice as long as the

rami, which are equal in length; its inner margin bears 19 to 21 spines; endopod

three-jointed, the first segment fully three times as long as the combined lengths

of the last two joints, the second not quite half as long again as the short terminal

joint ; inner spines of the respective segments, on both endopods, are twelve plus

two plus one and the terminal spine, much stouter than the others (fig. 8, end.) is

not as long as the distal joint; exopod with two terminal spines, one minute, the

other less than one-third as long as the ramus.

Colour white. Length, 12-1 mm. Embryos in marsupium very numerous,

smal] in relation to size of animal and, with pleon curved against back, 0-34 mm.

to 0°39 mm. in length.

Loc.—Tasmania: Marion Bay, 10-17 fms., amongst kelp (W. S. Fairbridge,

Euphausiid bottom net, Dec. 1944). Type in S. Aust. Museum, Reg. No. C. 2745.

Dimorphostylis subaculeata var. praecox nov.

Ovigerous female—Armature of body and proportions of body and segments

of appendages as in Tasmanian form. Differs in the smaller size and in having

fewer spines in the mandible row (13 to 14) and a lesser number of spines arm-

ing the inner margins of peduncle and endopod of uropod. In the type, 8-8 mm.

in length, these number 13 on peduncle and six plus two plus one on the

endopodal joints. The largest ovigerous females are 9-3 mm. in length and have

17 spines on the peduncle, and on the endopod seven or eight plus two plus one.

Young females—The spines of the carapace are sparser than in the adult,

and there are fewer inner spines on the uropod. It is evident that in the case of

the female the spines of this appendage increase more or less regularly in number

as the animal grows. The smallest available example is 4-6 mm. in length and

has the peduncle of the last-named appendage armed with only nine spines, that

of endopod with three plus two plus one. In a subadult female 7 mm. in length

the armature is much as in the type. The telson has about one-third of its length

post-anal even in the young and bears one or two pairs of lateral spines (rarely

there is a third spine on one side, fig. 9, urop. 2); this variation has no relation

to the size of the animal.

Embryos in the marsupium are the same size as those of the large Tas~

manian female.

It would seem that this form, which was taken in waters slightly warmer

than those of Marion Bay, the Tasmanian type locality, passes through fewer

ecdyses before becoming ovigerous.

Adult male—Integument less calcified than in female; spiny armature sparser

and tending on sides of carapace to become blunted.

Carapace only about two-sevenths of total length of animal, two-thirds as

long again as pedigerous somites, more than twice as long as deep and half as

broad again as deep; seen from above it is suboval, tapering to the front in

anterior third. Pseudorostrum subacute in front, the lobes meeting for a distance

equal to little more than one-sixth of length of carapace. Antero-lateral margin

oblique, slightly sinuate, scarcely at all excavate; no antennal angle, the margin

186

forming a wide curve to the inferior edge, which is finely spinulose. Ocular lobe

rounded, larger than in female, more than twice as wide as long and with three

prominently raised but colourless corneal lenses.

Pleon, not including telson in the length, as long as cephalothorax ; fifth

somite narrowed slightly towards the rear, and half as long again as sixth, which

is less widened posteriorly than in female; telson as long as sixth somite, with a

pair of stout terminal spines and two pairs of much smaller lateral spines.

Fig. 9

Dimorphostylis subaculeata, var. praecoxa, adult male and 9-3 mm. ovigerous female;

lateral view of male and (ceph.) cephalothorax from above (x 12); ant., first

antenna (x30); mand., distal portion of mandible (x80; A, mandible of Tas-

manian type ovigerous female for comparison, x80); prp. and urop., peraeopods

and uropod with telson, etc. (x20; distal parts of rami of uropod, x 52).

First antenna stouter than in female; first peduncular joint nearly twice as

long as either second or third segments, which are subequal in length; third not

much narrower than second and furnished with a dense brush of sensory setae;

flagellum one-third as long again as last peduncular segment, four-jointed, the

distal and proximal joints very short, the other two subequal in length; accessory

lash as long as distal joint of peduncle, four-jointed, the third segment much the

187

longest and the terminal one minute. Second antenna with flagellum reaching to

end of pleon.

Mandibles with 11 to 12 spines in the row.

First peraeopods relatively a little longer than in female, the carpus reaching

slightly beyond level of end of pseudorostrum; basis two-thirds as long as rest

of limb; proportions of other joints as in female, save that the dactylus is a

trifle longer,

Basis of second peraeopod, including distal lobe in the length, shorter than

remaining joints together ; ischium distinct; other segments as in female except-

ing that dactylus is slightly longer.

In the third and fourth peraeopods the wide basis is fully as long as the rest

of limb, the setae of which are as in female; fifth peraeopod about three-fourths

as long as fourth, with the narrow basis only two-thirds as long as rest of limb.

Peduncle of uropod slender, two and one-half times as long as telson and

distinctly more than twice as long as endopod; its inner margin bears thirty or

more spines, much shorter than those of female; endopod exceeding exopod in

length by almost the length of its distal joint; first segment fully two-and-one-

half times as long as second and third together; second joint less than half as

long again as third; inner spines 16, plus three or four, plus two; terminal spines

of both rami as in female.

Both pairs of pleopods biramous, the exopod two-jointed.

Colour, semi-transparent. Length, 9 mm.

An adult male, 8 mm. in length and taken in company with females at Ulla-

dulla, has the spines on the inner margin of the three endopod joints of the

uropod twenty-two plus five plus two.

Subadult males have the carapace shaped more as in the young females, with

similar armature and with about the same number of spines (longer than in adult

male) on the uropods. An example 8-1 mm. in length (with the setae of the

pleopods and exopods of third and fourth peraeopods very short) has only about

17 spines on the peduncle of this appendage and nine plus two plus one on the

endopod. This example has the basis of the peraeopods a trifle wider than in the

adult female, but not greatly expanded and distally produced as in the adult male.

Loc.—New South Wales: off Jibbon, on sand, 35 fms: (K. Sheard, sub-

marine light, 1940) ; Cronulla, 8 feet on sand (K. Sheard, submarine light, Sept.

1942); off Jibbon, 50 metres on sand (dredged, K. Sheard, June 1943), and

40-70 metres, on sand (K. Sheard, A. Trawl Station 6, 9 and 10, July-Aug.

1943) ; off Ulladulla, 75 metres (K. Sheard, A. Trawl, June 1944). Types in

S. Aust. Museum, Reg. No. C. 2754 and 2767,

This species resembles the Western Australian Leptostylis vercoi (Hale

1928, p. 47, fig. 17), which, like other members of its genus, has small exopods

on the third and fourth legs of the female; the appendages show relatively slight

differences, in the uropods, for instance, the peduncle is a little shorter, and the

first joint of the endopod is only twice as long as second and third segments

together.

Dimorphostylis inauspicata sp. Nov.

Subadult male—Integument thin, not much calcified, but tough and not easily

torn.

Carapace one-third of total length of animal and twice as long as pedigerous

somites together; it is a little wider than deep and almost half as long again as

deep ; each side with four ridges curving obliquely forwards; the most anterior

ridge is short and serrate and arises near posterior end of frontal suture ; the

second, more feebly serrate, commences near the mid-line and terminates close te

188

the upper part of first; it is almost joined near mid-line by a fainter carina which

in turn is met by the fourth; in addition to these a short, sinuate, serrate ridge

arises near end of pseudorostrum, curves backwards and downwards, and is con-

tinued as a much fainter carina, subparallel to inferior margin and reaching to

hinder edge; anterior half of carapace from ocular lobe to branchial regions is

elevated medianly, the rounded ridge sinuate as viewed from the side and armed

with three small teeth, one at base of ocular lobe and two (one behind the other)

at rear end of frontal lobe; there is also a pair of tiny denticles on the ocular lobe;

the lateral ridges are somewhat broken and this, together with the slight depres-

sions between them, results in an irregularity of the outline of the sides when the

animal is viewed from above; branchial regions somewhat elevated dorsally, leav-

ing between them in posterior half of carapace a rather deep sulcus; pseudo-

rostrum depressed, each lobe with a small point anteriorly; lobes meeting for a

distance equal to about one-sixth of length of carapace; antero-lateral margin

Fig. 10

Dimorphostylis inauspicata, type male; lateral view and (ceph.) cephalothorax from

above (x 164); end., distal joints of endopod of uropod (x 80); tels., telson of

paratype male and allotype female (x 56).

very shallowly concave; antero-lateral angle rounded and, like inferior margin

posterior to it, finely serrate; ocular lobe rounded, twice as wide as long, with

faint indications of eye-spots.

Pedigerous somites successively increasing in dorsal length to fourth, which

is a little longer than fifth; each is marked with a fine median dorsal line and has

the pleural parts not much expanded.

Pleon fully as long as cephalothorax ; somites one to five with a dorso-lateral

and infero-lateral carina on each side, the lateral space between them concave;

sixth somite depressed, keeled laterally, slightly widened posteriorly and about

four-fifths as long as fifth; telson four-fifths as long as sixth somite, with a

small tooth beyond middle of length of each lateral margin and with only a short

post-anal portion, armed with a pair of terminal spines and two pairs of lateral

spines.

Antennae not fully developed. First segment of peduncle of first pair twice

as long as second joint, longer than the swollen third, and with a distal spine, as

well as the usual stout seta and plumose seta; each flagellum four-jointed, the

main lash half as long again as the other and as long as third peduncular joint.

Mandible with 13 to 14 spines.

189

Third maxilliped with basis quite half as long again as rest of appendage,

with a tooth at inner distal angle and margin posterior to this in part serrate;

ischium and merus each with an inner tooth.

First peraeopod long, the carpus reaching beyond level of end of pseudo-

rostrum; basis relatively short, not quite half as long as rest of limb; propodus

almost equal to combined lengths of ischium, merus and carpus, and a little more

than twice as long as dactylus.

Basis of second peraeopod broad (presumed to be forwardly produced

distally in adult), serrate on inner edge and with a large tooth, preceded by a

Fig, 11

Dimorphostylis inauspicata, paratypes male and subadult female; ant., first and

second antennae; mxp. and prp., third maxilliped and first to third peraeopods;

urop., uropod, telson and fifth to sixth pleon somites; tels., lateral view of

telson (all x37); plp. 2, second pleopod (x70).

smaller tooth, at outer distal angle; it is not as long as rest of limb; ischium

distinct, armed with a large outer tooth; merus with two teeth on outer margin;

carpus three times as long as merus and nearly four times as long as propodus,

which is not quite half as long as dactylus.

Basis broad in third and fourth peraeopods, and about as long as remainder

of limb; merus nearly as long as carpus and propodus together; fifth peraeopod

190

with basis barely wider than, and not much more than half as long as, remainder.

of limb; three distal carpal setae, successively increasing in length, the longest

(like the propodal seta) reaching to the level of tip of slender dactylus.

Peduncle of uropod two and three-fourths times as long as telson, three-

fourths as long again as endopod, and with 13 spines on inner margin; endopod

three-jointed, the first segment a little longer than second and third combined ;

second joint slightly shorter than third; inner spines of segments of endopod six

plus two plus two, and terminal spine distinctly longer than last segment ; exopod

about as long as first two joints of endopod together, and with longest terminal

spine more than half as long as ramus,

Both pairs of pleopods, though incompletely developed and with short setae,

have the exopod two-jointed, and the endopod not divided.

Colour, white. Length, 5-6 mm.

Female with developing marsupium—General form as in the young male

illustrated.

First antenna differing from that of male in having the third joint narrow,

the main flagellum consisting of two segments and the accessory of three short

joints. Second antenna apparently four-jointed, the small terminal segment

capped with a plain seta.

Armature and proportions of thoracic appendages as in the young male,

excepting that the basis in the second to fourth peraeopods is much narrower.

An exopod is present on the third maxilliped but is more slender than in the

male. There are no exopods on the third and fourth legs.

Telson and uropods are as described but with peduncle of last-named only

half as long again as endopod.

Length, 5-7 mm.

Loc—New South Wales: Ulladulla, Brush Island, 45 fms., in fine silt on

flathead grounds (D. Rochford, Jan. 1945). Types in 5. Aust. Museum, Reg.

No. C.2703.

The females available are not in good condition.

Dimorphostylis tasmanica sp. nov.

Female with developing marsupium-——Integument thin but slightly calcified

with surface dull.

Carapace plump and shaped as in tribulis; it is about one-third of total

length of animal and twice as long as pedigerous somites together ; antero-lateral

fold armed with a row of strong teeth, posterior to which is a patch of smaller

teeth, while there are scattered spines on anterior part of sides; mid-line of

dorsum, posterior to ocular lobe with three conspicuous teeth, placed one behind

the other, and at about middle of length with a couple of small spines; to the rear

of antero-lateral fold the sides are shallowly pitted and bear exceedingly faint

indications of three oblique furrows, not at all like the defined carinae of tribulis ;

branchial regions somewhat swollen and elevated on dorsum, where there is a

deep median gutter between them; seen from the side the dorsal profile is

irregular because of these elevations, the tumid ocular lobe, etc. Antero-lateral

margin shallowly concave and antero-lateral angle with a tooth which is the first

of a series running back along front portion of inferior margin (see fig. 12,

c. pace). Pseudorostral lobes each with a small tooth at anterior end, meeting

for a distance equal to one-sixth of length of carapace. Ocular lobe wider than

long and with a pair of spines.

Pleon a little longer than cephalothorax, the sides of first to sixth somites

with a few spines; the anterior five somites are indented on the sides, not smoothly

191

cylindrical; fifth somite one-fourth as long again as wide and not much longer

than sixth, which is somewhat dilated posteriorly, where it is as broad as long;

telson broadly subtriangular, two-thirds as long as sixth pleon somite, and with

a pair of spines at the narrow apex; each side of telson, at about middle of length

is produced as a tooth, immediately anterior to which is a bristle, and there are

three pairs of lateral bristles, but no spines, in front of the terminal spines.

Third maxilliped with exopod about two-thirds as long as basis.

First peraeopod long, the carpus reaching a little beyond level of end of

pseudorostrum; basis relatively short, much less than half as long as remainder

of limb, with several teeth at distal end (including one at inner angle) and several

urep. &

tels. &

G.pace 9

Fig. 12

Dimorphostylis tasmanica, type female and allotype male; c. pace, lateral view of

carapace (x21); prp., first and third peraeopods (x32); urop., uropod with

telson, etc. (x 32; distal joints of endopod, x 100); tels., telson (x 100).

on outer face; ischium and mertss each with an inner apical tooth ; propodus longer

than combined lengths of ischium, merus and carpus, and two-and-one-half times

as long as dactylus.

Second peraeopod without teeth on proximal joints; basis equal in length

to remainder of limb and with a fringe of plumose setae on outer edge; ischium

distinct; carpus twice as long as merus, nearly three times as long as propodus

and a little longer than propodus and dactylus together ; exopod longer than basis;

edges of marsupial plate, like those of others, toothed.

Basis of third peraeopod about as long as rest of limb, that of fourth and

fifth pairs relatively shorter; these posterior limbs are fairly stout; the merus is

broader than in inauspicata and is longer than the carpus and propodus together ;

the propodal seta, like the longest of the three distal carpal setae, reaches to, but

192

not beyond, the tip of the stout dactylus, which is a little longer than either carpus

or propodus; inner margin of carpus with two stout setae.

Uropod with peduncle distinctly longer than fifth and sixth pleon somites

together and more than twice as long as endopod; its inner margin bears a row

of sixteen spines in distal two-thirds of its length and its outer margin a row of

fine, spaced setae; endopod with first joint little longer than second and third

segments combined and with second nearly one-fourth as long again as third;

inner spines of endopod four or five, plus two, plus one, and terminal spine about

as long as second joint; exopod eight-ninths as long as endopod, with its slender

terminal spine almost as long as its second joint.

Colour, creamy white. Length, 5-5 mm.

Subadult male—In general very like the female, and with similar armature,

including the pair of spines on ocular lobe, the three median ones posterior to it,

and the tooth at end of each pseudorostral lobe. A pair of small corneal lenses

are discernible on ocular lobe. First legs as in female, with very long propodus.

The telson is relatively a little longer than in female but has the same lateral

teeth, bristles and terminal spines (cf. tels. 6 9, fig. 12).

Finally, the uropods are much as in the female, except that the peduncle is a

little shorter in relation to the rami and has only 12 to 13 spines on inner edge,

features which may be attributed to immaturity.

Length, 4°6 mm.

Loc.—Tasmania: off Babel Island, latitude 39° 55’ S., longitude 148° 31’ E.

(“Warreen” Station 29, Jan. 1939), Types in S. Aust. Museum, Reg. No. C.2728.

DimMoRPHOSTYLIS VIETA (Hale)

Pachystylis vieta Hale, 1936a, 424, fig. 14-15, and 1937, 72.

The species is available from St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs, South Aus-

tralia, The previously unknown adult male, described below, has the basis of

the first to fourth peraeopods expanded, and in general agrees so closely with

males of the other Australian species referred to Dimorphostylis that it can

scarcely be separated generically. In one respect, however, the males show some

discrepancy in that the pleopods are rather more rudimentary than is usual in

the genus.

Most of the species placed in Dimorphostylis have oblique lateral ridges

posterior to the level of hinder end of frontal lobe. In the female of vieta these

are characteristically represented by series of low elevations, sometimes capped

with setae. The curved antero-lateral fold (present in all species) is sometimes

armed with a few spines, never so numerous as in fribulis and tasmanica. In the

two last-named and in imauspicata, the distal carpal and propodal setae of the

fossorial legs do not reach beyond the tip of the dactylus, as they do in the other

Australian species excepting D. vieta which has these setae even shorter, and

not reaching to end of dactylus.

The broad carapace and the proportions of second peraeopod and uropod

provide other good distinguishing features for the species.

Adult male—Integument transparent, scarcely at all calcified, granulate on

dorsal and dorso-lateral parts of carapace.

Carapace less than two-fifths of total length, nearly twice as long as deep,

and about one-fourth as wide again as deep ; there are three ill-defined longitudinal

folds on each side (see fig. 13) and a pair of faint, irregular, longitudinal ridges

on back, margining a slightly concave median area. Antero-lateral margin

oblique, scarcely concave, and antero-lateral angle rounded, with two denticles.

193

Pseudorostrum subacute anteriorly, both as seen from above and from side, rather

wide basally and with the lobes meeting for a distance equal to fully one-sixth

of total length of carapace. Ocular lobe large, twice as wide as long and with

three prominent, tumid, pale lenses, with granular structure.

Pedigerous somites together only half as long as carapace; pleural parts not

much expanded in any, but those of first concealed by second,

Pleon not much shorter than cephalothorax; fifth somite little longer than

sixth, which is somewhat widened posteriorly, where it is almost as broad as long;

telson larger than in female, three-fourths as long as sixth pleon somite, sub-

cylindrical for greater part of length then tapering suddenly to the narrow apex;

there is an extremely short post-anal part, with a pair of short terminal spines

Fig. 13

Dimorphostylis vieta, adult male; lateral view and cephalothorax from above

(x 30); ant. 1, ventral aspect of first antenna, the terminal appendages of flagella

omitted (x 80).

flanked by a bristle on each side (these spines are sometimes longer in the female

than is shown for the type, but are always small).

First antenna with basal segment not quite as long as second and third joints

together ; the third peduncular joint is half as long again as second and bears a

stout seta, and a rather dense fringe of hairs around an oval ventral area;

flagellum four-jointed, as long as the two distal segments of peduncle combined ;

accessory lash four-jointed (the last segment tiny) and relatively long, being

equal in length to last peduncular joint.

Second antenna with flagellum long, reaching to end of pleon and with very

elongate joints; it is furnished with minute spinules but no dense fringe of hairs.

Mandible with 10 or 11 spines in the row.

Third maxilliped with basis half as long again as rest of limb, its external

angle not forwardly produced and, with the usual fringe of stout and long

plumose setae.

First peraeopod stout and long, the merus reaching beyond level of antennal

angle, and carpus beyond that of pseudorostrum; basis half as long as rest of limb

194

with two of the plumose setae distal and long; propodus a little longer than carpus,

twice as long as ischium and merus together, and more than twice as long as

dactylus, the terminal seta of which is stout and claw-like.

Basis of second peraeopod (like that of third and fourth) produced distally ;

it is half as long again as remainder of limb; ischium distinct ; carpus a little longer

than either merus or propodus and subequal in length to dactylus.

Remaining peraeopods rather robust, with basis longer than rest of limb in

third and fourth, shorter in fifth; merus of third and fourth not much shorter

than carpus, propodus and dactylus together ; longest distal carpal seta not nearly

attaining, and propodal seta reaching, level of tip of dactylus.

Fig. 14

Dimorphostylis vieta, adult male; ant. n., antero-lateral margin and angle; ant. 1,

first antenna and upper lip; ant. 2, second antenna, only the proximal joints of

flagellum shown; mand., mandible; mxp. and prp., third maxilliped and peraeo-

pods; urop., uropod with fifth to sixth pleon somites and telson; tels., lateral

view of telson (all x50); plp., pleopods (x 120).

Each of the two pairs of pleopods are biramous, both rami single-jointed ;

the setae are sparse (see fig. 14, plp. 1-2).

Peduncle of uropod very long and slender, almost equal in length to fifth and

sixth pleon somites and telson combined; the distal three-fourths of the inner

edge bears a row of a dozen or so short spines; exopod and endopod subequal in

length, each with a terminal spine about half as long as the rami; endopod divided

into three segments, the first and third subequal in length, the second a little

shorter ; inner margin with one, two and two spines respectively.

Length, 3°3 mm.

Secured in Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs, South Australia, at night, by

townet or submarine light. ‘

Zimmer (1921, 148) considers that Dimorphostylis may be closely related to

Pachystylis (Hansen, 1895, 58). The recent examination of a score of species

referable to Gynodtastylis leaves one with the impression that the affinities of

Pachystylis rotundata lie more with that genus (see also Zimmer, 1914, 192) than

with Dimorphostylis. Fuller information regarding Hansen’s Brazilian species

must be awaited.

Dimorphostylis colefaxi sp. nov.

Female with developing marsupiwm—Integument lightly calcified, tough but

not brittle.

Carapace less than one-third of total length of animal and not much longer

than pedigerous somites together ; it is more than half as long again as deep and

is as wide as deep; seen from above the sides are subparallel in proximal half; on

Fig. 15

Dimorphostylis colefaxi, type female; lateral view and (ceph.) cephalothorax from

above (x24); c, pace, anterior portion of carapace (x 36).

each side a dorso-lateral fold curves back from pseudorostrum around frontal

lobe to beyond middle of length; as in other Cumacea with similar sculpture these

elevations are most conspicuous when the animal is viewed from above; the dorsal

space between the folds is somewhat flattened, but rises to a low ridge medianly;

in posterior third of length of carapace the dorsum is slightly excavate and on

each side this hollow is emphasised by a low fold; below dorso-lateral ridge there

is on each side a shallow concavity beneath which, and subparallel to inferior

margin, is a faint, curved carina, above which the surface is faintly pitted, result-

ing in an obscurely reticulated appearance; seen from the side the pseudorostrum

is acutely pointed in front and the dorsal contour is irregular because of the

folds alongside the dorsal concavity and a couple of slight incisions in the median

ridge of anterior half (fig. 15, c. pace).

196

Pedigerous somites not differing much in length; with pleural parts expanded

but not conspicuously so; second and third legs separated by a wider interspace

than third and fourth, but even so by no means well separated.

Pleon shorter than cephalothorax, the somites successively increasing in

length to fifth; sixth less than two-thirds as long as fifth, dilated posteriorly,

where it is distinctly wider than long; telson cordate, less than three-fourths as

long as sixth somite, with a very abbreviated post-anal portion and a pair of

slender terminal spines flanked on each side by a bristle.

Fig. 16

Dimorphostylis colefaxi, type female; ant., first antenna (x56; flagella, x 126);

mxp. and prp., third maxilliped and peraeopods (x56); urop., ventral view of

uropod, fifth to sixth pleon somites and telson (x56); tels., dorsal view of

telson (x85).

First antenna slender and rather long; third joint of peduncle fully as long

as first, and half as long again as second; flagellum stout, composed of two joints,

the first of which is two-thirds as long again as second; accessory flagellum insig-

nificant, two-jointed.

The second antenna has the plumose setae thickly clogged with sediment

and the joints cannot be made out.

Third maxilliped with exopod well developed; basis large, one-third as long

again as rest of limb and with outer apical part a little produced forwards; carpus

197

longer than any other of the remaining joints and almost twice as long as the

rather small dactylus.

First peraeopod small, reaching when extended barely beyond level of front

of pseudorostrum and with the carpus reaching antennal angle ; basis shorter than

rest of limb, with plumose setae on both margins; carpus more than twice as long

as merus (which bears an outer distal plumose seta) and one-third as long again

as propodus, which is more than half as long again as dactylus,

Second peraeopod with the stout basis shorter than the exopod but consider-

ably longer than rest of limb; ischium suppressed; merus and carpus subequal in

length, each half as long again as propodus, which is not much more than half

length of dactylus; one of the terminal dactylar setae is slender, and is as long as

the three distal joints together.

Third and fourth peraeopods stout, the basis little shorter than remaining

joints together; carpus almost as long as merus, and with four distal setae, the

longest, like propodal seta, reaching well beyond tip of dactylus.

Peduncle of uropod narrow, almost as long as fifth and sixth pleon somites

together and armed on inner margin with a row of nine spaced spines; endopod

one-fourth as long again as exopod and a little less than three-fourths as long as

péduncle; it is three-jointed, with the first joint two-and-one-half times as long

as second, which is two-thirds as long again as the distal joint; inner spines four,

one and one, and longer terminal spine less than half as long as the ramus ; exopod

with three setae on outer margin and one (subdistal) on inner; distal spine more

than half as long as the ramus.

Colour, creamy-yellow. Length, 4-2 mm.

Loc-—New South Wales: Lake Illawarra (A. N. Colefax, June 1937)

Type in S. Aust. Museum, Reg. No. C.2683.

It should be noted that Lake Illawarra, like the Noosa River in Queensland,

ig an inlet of the sea. The species is named after its collector, Mr. A. N. Colefax,

Lecturer in Zoology of the University of Sydney.

DimorPHostyLis cotton: Hale

Dimorphostylis cottoni Hale, 1936, 400, fig. 5-6 (male only).

Material now referred to this species is available from more than a score

of localities off South Australia, Tasmania and New South Wales (long. 136° to

152°; lat. 32° to 40°). Adult males far outnumber ovigerous females in the

hundreds of specimens taken by submarine light, Agassiz trawl, and townet.

The carinae of the carapace of some New South Wales examples are much

more distinct than in material from South Australia, and also appear to be more

markedly crenulate. These ridges are also somewhat variable in disposition; the

one immediately behind the frontal lobe may run completely across the back and

in some specimens, both male and female, and from both South Australia and

New South Wales, there is an additional lateral ridge towards the rear of the

carapace (x in fig. 17, ceph.).

The size is variable, both adult males and ovigerous females, ranging from

barely more than 4 mm. to over 7 mm. in length. The telson of the female has

usually two pairs of lateral spines, but sometimes three are present on one or

both sides, and occasionally only one pair is developed. In the male the position

is different. Young examples and small adults (5 mm. or so in length) have the

telsonic spines as in the female, but in the larger mature males (6 mm. to 7 mm.)

lateral spines are completely absent. The average size of adults taken in sheltered

waters (such as in the closed bay of Port Lincoln in South Australia) is smaller

198

than that of those from more open seas, and it is amongst the latter, from both

southern and eastern coasts, that the males without lateral telsonic spines are

found; in these last the flagellum of the second antenna reaches to the end of

the rami of the uropods.

The U-shaped ridge enclosing the depression in the dorsum of the male telson

is well developed, and is just as in Paradiastylis longipes (Calman, 1905, 21,

fig. 4). The armature of the uropods of the adults of this sex is variable, the

spines being usually a trifle more numerous in the aforementioned large males

than they are in the type and in examples of similar size to this, The peduncle

has on inner edge 12 to 18 spines, the joints of the endopod 12 to 16, plus one to

three, plus one or two. The pleopods have the exopods two-jointed, the second

segment very short (fig. 18, plp.).

Fig. 17

Dimorphostylis cottom,; lateral view of 4+2 mm. ovigerous female and (c. pace)

carapace from above; ceph., cephalothorax of subadult 5 mm. female (all x 25).

The type is described as having a single corneal lens on the ocular lobe;

examination of further material shows that three lenses are present in both sexes,

but in most preserved specimens they are extremely difficult to see. Material in

alcohol is semi-transparent, but Mr. Sheard notes that some examples he collected

in South Australia in 1941 were bright orange in colour during life. Some speci-

mens recently found amongst plankton collected in St. Vincent Gulf by the

writer, and preserved for a few hours in formalin, and then for a short time in

alcohol, had red eyes, a few red spots on the sides of third and fourth pedigerous

somites and a red spot on each side of the fifth pleon somite; the general body

colour was yellow.

Ovigerous female—Integument membranous. Carapace a little less than one-

third of total length of animal, nearly half as long again as pedigerous somites

together, distinctly wider than deep and three-fourths as long again as deep.

Antero-lateral margin scarcely concave, antero-lateral angle rounded, and inferior

margin very finely serrate. Pseudorostrum narrow, subacute in front when

viewed from above or from the side, the lobes meeting for a distance equal to

199

from one-fifth to one-sixth of length of carapace. Ocular lobe much wider than

long, armed with a pair of denticles in front.

Pedigerous somites not much expanded on sides; fourth and fifth a little

longer than the others.

Pleon, as in male, distinctly longer than cephalothorax; fifth somite sub-

cylindrical, twice as long as wide and one-third as long again as sixth, which is

not very greatly dilated posteriorly, where it is about four-fifths as wide as long;

telson not quite as long as sixth somite.

First antenna without the brush of sensory setae present in the male; first

joint of peduncle nearly twice as long as second and about equal in length to the

Fig. 18

Dimorphostylis cotton, ovigerous female; ant., first and second antennae (x 86);

mxp. and prp., third maxillipeds and peraeopods (x43; distal end of basis of

first peraeopod, x 86); urop., uropod with fifth to sixth pleon somites and telson

(x43; distal joints of endopod, x 172). plp., Pleopod of male (x 86).

slender third segment; flagellum as long as second peduncular segment and com-

posed of three joints, the first short, the other two subequal in length; accessory

lash three-jointed, about half as long as main flagellum, and with distal segment

small. Second antenna with first joint longer than second, which is longer than

third, and with fourth and last very small; first three segments each with a

plumose seta, terminal one capped with a plain seta.

Branchial lobes digitiform and, as in male, about seven in number, the

posterior ones small.

200

Third maxilliped with exopod only about half as long as basis, which is half

as long again as combined lengths of remaining joints, which do not differ much

in length save that the dactylus is distinctly shorter than propodus.

First peraeopod with carpus reaching well beyond level of anterior end of

pseudorostrum ; basis half as long as remainder of limb, its distal end with a series

of graded plumose setae; propodus only about one-fifth as long again as carpus

and twice as long as dactylus.

Second peraeopod less than half as long as first; basis two-thirds as long as

rest of limb; ischium distinct ; carpus more than twice as long as merus, four times

as long as propodus, and not quite twice as long as dactylus.

Second and third peraeopods separated more widely than any of the others.

Third to fifth with basis distinctly shorter than rest of limb, with merus as long

as carpus and propodus together, and with dactylus long and slender; the distal

carpal setae, like the propodal seta, reach well beyond end of dactylus.

Peduncle of uropod more than twice as long as telson and half as long again

as endopod, which is one fourth as long again as exopod; it has about a dozen

spines on inner margin, first segment of endopod fully twice as long as combined

lengths of the subequal second and third joints; spines of inner margins of

endopod joints usually about ten plus one plus one.

Fig. 17 gives the lateral view and carapace of a female 4:2 mm. in length

(Port Lincoln, South Australia), and the cephalothorax of a larger subadult

female from New South Wales. The largest ovigerous female is 7:1 mm. in

length, and its ova are 0-23 mm. in diameter.

Dimorphostylis tribulis sp. nov.

Ovigerous female—Integument thin but considerably calcified; surface,

except for carinae and spines as described, almost smooth, dull and not at all

polished. Sparsely clothed with short plumose hairs which tend to collect algal

debris, forming a coating concealing the surface sculpture,

Carapace plump, wider than deep and little more than half as long again as

deep ; it is almost twice as long as pedigerous somites together, and less than one-

third of total length of animal; seen both from above and from the side it is sub-

oval and tapering towards the front in anterior fourth of length; the antero-

lateral fold is armed with an irregular row of spines and the dorsum on and behind

frontal lobe bears a few spines, one more prominent than the others; posterior

to frontal lobe each side has three curved carinae, the first of which is spinose and

is joined near lower edge of carapace by the second, the short connecting part also

spinose. Antero-lateral margin quite deeply concave for the genus; inferior

margin strongly serrate, the most anterior of the teeth emphasising the antero-

lateral angle; pseudorostral lobes meeting for a distance equal to one-sixth of

length of carapace; each terminates dorsally in a small tooth, and seen from the

side has the anterior end narrowly subtruncate, Ocular lobe wider than long,

denticulate.

Pedigerous somites successively increasing in dorsal length to fourth, and

fifth a little longer than third; third somite expanded fore and aft, but second and

third peraeopods no more widely separated than the others.

Pleon stout, longer than cephalothorax, with a few scattered spines on sides,

which in the first to fifth somites are uneven, not smoothly cylindrical ; fifth somite

not conspicuously longer than sixth, which is scarcely dilated posteriorly, where

it is as wide as long; telson shorter than sixth somite, subtriangular, with sides

entire but sinuate; post-anal part short, armed with a single terminal spine and

two pairs of lateral spines, anterior to which are two widely spaced pairs of setae.

201

Mandible with 12 to 13 spines.

First joint of peduncle of first antenna stout, one-third as long again as third,

and two-and-one-half times as long as second; it is armed with a small distal

tooth and has the usual large plain seta and distal plumose seta; flagellum half as

long as first peduncular segment, three-jointed, the first joint the longest and the

second shorter than third; accessory lash half as long as main flagellum and three-

jointed, the proximal and distal segments short. Second antenna with terminal

joint very small and capped with a plain seta; first to third segments with the

usual plumose setae.

Third maxilliped as in tmauspicata, with exopod about three-fourths as long

as basis.

First peraeopod long, the carpus reaching to level of apex of pseudorostrum;

basis short, much less than half as long as remaining joints together, with a small

Fig 19

Dimorphostylis tribulis, type female; lateral view and (ceph.) cephalothorax from

above (x22); c. pace, anterior part of carapace, with frontal lobe removed

(x44); tels., telson (x88); tels. p., telson of paratype ovigerous female (x 88).

tooth at inner distal angle and a dense distal brush of plumose setae; ischium with

a tooth at inner apical angle; propodus equal to combined lengths of merus and

carpus, twice as long as propodus and little shorter than basis.

Second peraeopod with basis unarmed but with fine and dense plumose setae

on inner margin; it is not quite as long as remaining joints together; ischium

distinct; carpus elongate, almost twice as long as merus, and two-and-one-half

times as long as propodus, which is two-thirds as long as dactylus; setae of last-

named slender, the longest terminal ones much exceeding the joint in length,

202

Third to fifth peraeopods robust; basis not quite as long as rest of limb in

third pair, relatively shorter in the others; merus a little longer than carpus and

propodus together; propodal seta and longest of the three distal carpal setae not

reaching beyond tip of the stout claw-like dactylus ; on its inner margin the carpus

has two stout setae, which are longer in fourth and fifth peraeopods than they are

in the third pair.

Peduncle of uropod not quite as long as fifth and sixth pleon somites and

telson together, twice as long as endopod and with 14 spines on inner margin;

endopod with first joint nearly one-third as long again as second and third seg-

ments together; second more than one-third as long again as third; spines on

inner margin number four plus two plus one, and the slender terminal spine is

Fig. 20

Dimorphostylis tribulis, type ovigerous female; ant., first antenna (x70); prp.,

first to third peraeopods (x 38; distal joints, x 100) ; urop., uropod with fifth to

sixth pleon somites and telson (x38; distal joints of endopod, x 100).

longer than second joint; exopod a little longer than first two segments of

endopod together, with terminal spine as long as its second joint.

Colour, creamy-white. Length, 5 mm.

Loc—South Australia: Kangaroo Island, Antechamber Bay, dredged in day-

light, 7 fms. and submarine light, surface at night with tide running strongly

(K, Sheard, April 1941). Type ovigerous female in S. Aust. Museum, Reg.

No. C.2800.

The telson of the type female is not perfectly symmetrical and should be

regarded as abnormal in regards to terminal armature; the usual condition is as

in the telson of the ovigerous female shown in fig. 19, tels. p.

This species is easily separated from the other two occurring in South Aus-

tralia. The conspicuously stouter third to fifth peraeopods and the lesser number

203

of lateral carinae of the carapace at once distinguish it from cotfoni, and it may

be added that the last-named characteristically has a clean integument but tribulis,

at least in the case of the ovigerous female, is coated with flocculent material. In

some respects tribulis resembles wieta more closely, particularly when the latter

has a few spines on the antero-lateral fold; apart from size there are, however,

many small points of difference. The character most readily checked is found

in the endopod of the uropod of vieta, where the three segments do not differ

much in length, a feature not found in any other species of the genus.

D. tribulis is close to tasmanica, which, however, has (1) no well-marked

carinae on sides of carapace posterior to the antero-lateral fold; (2) a small tooth

on each side margin of the telson, which lacks articulated lateral spines in both

sexes; (3) the first peraeopod longer and of different proportions.

Genus Anchistylis nov.

Generally resembling Colurostylis (Calman, 1911, 376) but with the pleopods

of the male much modified. In each of the two pairs there is only one unjointed

ramus, The ramus of the first bears a pair of strong hook-like setae, that of the

second three non-plumose setae of different type. The endopod of the uropod

is three-jointed in both sexes. The second antenna of the female is four-jointed,

the last segment tiny, the penultimate large. That of the male has the flagellum

composed of very long, slender joints, and reaching to or beyond end of pleon.

The basis in the first to fourth peraeopods of the male is expanded as in

Paradiastylis and Dimorphostylis, but less markedly; it is produced well beyond

the articulation of the ischium.

Genotype Anchicolurus waitet Hale.

Zimmer (1930, 651) places A. waitei in Colurostylis, evidently not regarding

Stebbing’s Anchicolurus as separable from Calman’s genus. In view of the varia-

tion which occurs in Gynodiastylis, the number of joints of the endopod is not

alone very important and the relative lengths of propodus and dactylus of the

second leg can scarcely be regarded as of generic value. Calman, however (1912,

670-674) mentions other noteworthy characters wherein his Californian Coluro-

stylis (?) occidentalis (later the type of Anchicolurus—Stebbing, 1912, 176, and

1913, 130) does not conform with the two New Zealand species which he admits,

viz., the genotype, pseudocuma, and lemurum (Calman, 1911, 376, pl. xxxvi,

fig. 23-26, and 1917, 153, fig. 7-8).

A. waiter agrees with Calman’s genus in the form of the telson; this is.

rounded, subcordate and without armature or postanal portion in the female, but

in the male with a distinct post-anal part bearing a pair of very slender spines, or

bristles, set a little below the actual tip (see fig. 21, tels.). There is also marked

sexual difference in armature in Allodiastylis (Hale 1936a, 72), etc.

Calman refers to the very small size of the telson of his forms; the relative

length of this somite varies greatly in the three species here referred to Anchi-

stylis and, indeed, exhibits some variation within the limits of one species.

The integument is semi-transparent with little or no calcification.

Key to Srecies or ANCHISTYLIS

1 Second joint of endopod of uropod at least half as long again as third.

1S waiter (Hale)

Second joint of endopod of uroped not longer than third. a3 x. a 2

2 Adult female. Telson small, one-half as long as sixth pleon somite or less. First

peraeopod with basis as long as remaining joints together. .., similis sp. nov.

Adult female. Telson large, more than three-fourths as long as sixth pleon

somite, First peraeopod with basis much shorter than remaining joints together.

longipes sp. nov.

204

ANCHISTYLIS WAITEI (Hale)

Anchicolurus waitei Hale, 1928, 45, fig. 15-16, and 1936, 418.

Colurostylis waitei Zimmer, 1930, 651.

A good number of specimens are now available from the southern coasts

of Australia.

The posterior margin of the antero-lateral depression of the carapace is finely

serrate, as is also the curved dorso-lateral ridge; the antero-lateral angle is pro-

duced as an acute tooth in both sexes and the margin behind it is feebly serrate. _

The telson varies in length. In the female type, taken on the south-eastern

coast of South Australia, it is about two-thirds as long as the peduncle of the

uropod, but in females from St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs and from Victoria

it is shorter, only half as long as the peduncle (bottom right in fig. 24). Spines

at distal end of male telson about one-third as long as telson.

Fig. 21

Anchistylis waitei, ovigerous female and adult male; ant. 1g@ and ant. 129,

first and second antennae (x 120); ant 24, second antenna (x 55, only proximal

part of flagellum shown); mand., mandibles (x55, distal portions, x 120); tels.,

lateral views of telson (x 120); seg. ie ensernt edge of fifth pedigerous somite

Mandible with eight to nine spines in the row.

The external distal angle of basis of third maxilliped is forwardly produced,

reaching just beyond level of distal margin of ischium in the female, and much

beyond this in the male; in the female the basis of this appendage is almost twice

as long as the remaining joints together, and fully half as long again as exopod.

Basis of second peraeopod less than two-thirds as long as rest of limb in

adult female.

Uropod with peduncle subequal in length to rami in female, a little longer

in male; second joint of endopod about half as long again as third in both sexes.

The pair of strong, hook-like setae on the ramus of the first pleopods are

about as long as the peduncle and curve outwards and forwards; their tips bear

205

a few tiny plumes; no other large setae are present on this appendage, but there

is a pair of plumose setae near their base.

Ramus of second pleopod with three unequal composite setae; one of these,

seated at distal end, is stout and apically bifid, one on anterior edge (lower edge

when the pleopod lies along venter of somite in normal position) is long and more

slender, while another, also moderately stout, is situate on the upper or posterior

edge. At the base of ramus the outer distal angle of peduncle bears a bifid seta

like that of apex of ramus.

The function of these curious pleopods is apparent in some of the many males

preserved in alcohol. When in a resting position the long lash of the second

antenna lies beneath the sides of the carapace and pleural parts of the first four

pedigerous somites, then against the underside of the pleon, in much the same way

as in some other Diastylids where this appendage is long. It emerges at the rear

of the fourth pedigerous somite, thence passes outside the basis of the fifth

peraeopod, and beneath three stout plumose setae on the prominent postero-

lateral rounded portions of the fifth pedigerous somite (fig. 22). It is then held

down by the hooks of the first pleopod, the tension producing a sharp bend, at an

Fig. 22

Anchistylis waitet; first three pleon somites, etc., showing the anchoring of

flagellum of second antenna by pleopods (x 120). ped 4-5, Posterior parts of

fourth and fifth pedigerous somites; prp. 5, fifth peraeopod; plp. 1 and 2, pleopods.

articulation, immediately behind the thorax, and another less pronounced at the

end of the joint actually caught by the hooks; this joint, incidentally, may be very

slightly curved by the tension.

The second pleon somite is much produced ventrally, particularly posteriorly ;

seen from below the protuberance is cordate and tapers to the rear, where are

seated on each side a group of thick setae with bifid apices, and some distance

above these a pair of stiff, pointed setae. The flagellum is held against the concave

sides of this prominence by the first pleopods, passing between the two groups

of setae, and is thus guided in towards the mid-line of the venter, passing the

second pleopods. The upper seta of the ramus of the last-named apparently serves

as a lateral guide to the lash, while in some examples the lower seta crosses its

fellow of the opposite pleopod below the flagella. Beyond the second somite the

two flagella lie side by side in the ventral gutter of the pleon. The third to fifth

somites each bear, near posterior end, two groups (one on each side of the

channel) of three unequal rod-like setae, the longest of which is furnished with

206

plumes directed inwards; these setae possibly assist to retain the lashes in the

ventral groove.

Anchistylis similis sp. nov.

Ovigerous female—Carapace much as in waited but with antero-lateral angle

rounded, feebly dentate and without prominent tooth; a depression at antennal

border margined posteriorly by a ridge which is met by the very feebly serrate

dorso-lateral ridge; on dorsum the area between the ridges is slightly excavate,

with a low tumidity on each side of the hollow. Ocular lobe wide, with eyes ill-

defined, but discernible as three areas more opaque than surrounding chitin.

Pedigerous somites as in waited but anterior margin of fifth somite with

smaller serrations.

Telson half as long as sixth pleon somite and not much more than one-third

as long as peduncle of uropod.

Second antenna as in waitei (fig. 21) but first pair with accessory flagellum

a little longer.

Sm OS =

Fig. 23

Anchistylis similis, paratype male; lateral view and cephalothorax from above

(x 23).

Mandibles with 10 and 11 spines in the row, the last two or three short

and slender.

Nine digitiform branchial lobes, one reflexed, the last two very small.

Basis of third maxilliped much less than half as long again as remaining

joints together and not much longer than exopod; with external apical angle not

produced beyond level of distal margin of ischium.

First peraeopod as in waitei, with the basis as long as or a little longer than

rest of limb.

Second peraeopod with basis as long as remainder of limb without the

dactylus; ischium distinct; merus, propodus and dactylus subequal in length,

carpus a trifle longer.

Peduncle of uropod about as long as the subequal rami; first joint of endopod

more than twice as long as second, which is not quite as long as third; inner

margin with a few spines near distal end, the rest of this edge with fine setae.

Length, 3-5 mm.

207

Adult male—Carapace a little less than one-third of total length of animal,

longer than pedigerous somites together and a little wider than deep; as in the

female the antero-lateral angle lacks the acute tooth present in both sexes of

wattet, Ocular lobe very wide, with the three corneal areas large and distinct.

Pleon distinctly shorter than cephalothorax; fifth somite not much longer

than fourth but longer than any of the others and more than half as long again

as fifth; apical spines of telson about half as long as the somite.

Antennae as in male of waite?,

pip, 2

similis

pip. 2

waitet

Fig. 24

Anchistylis simulis, appendages of paratypes adult male and ovigerous females with

those of A. waite: for comparison; c. pace, antennal angle (x 55); mxp. and prp.,

third maxilliped and second peraeopod (x55); plp., pleopods (x 120); urop.,

uropod with sixth pleon somite and telson (x55). A, Sixth pleon somite and

telson of A. similis, male and female, from Tasmania (x 55).

Third maxilliped with basis nearly twice as long as rest of limb, with external

distal angle much less produced than in waite: (cf. mxp. 3 of males in fig. 24).

Basis of first peraeopod a little longer than remaining joints together, that of

second not quite as long as rest of limb.

208

Second and third legs not widely separated as in female.

Peduncle of uropod a little longer than rami, with inner spines near distal

end; joints of endopod of same proportions as in female.

Length, 4 mm.

Loc.—-New South Wales: Cronulla, 8 feet, on sand (type loc., K. Sheard,

submarine light, Sept. 1942). Tasmania: St. Helens Point, 4-5 fms., on clean

sand (W. S. Fairbridge, submarine light, Jan. 1945). South Australia: St. Vin-

cent Gulf, off Glenelg (H. M. Cooper, submarine light, Nov. 1944). Types in

S. Aust. Museum, Reg. No. C.2730-2731.

The telson of some examples (Tasmania) is relatively smaller than in others

(fig. 24, A), and there is some variation in the total length of the animal.

The pleopods of a few of the males of waitet and similis from different

localities have been critically examined. There is some slight variation in the

setae of the body, and in similis the lower (or anterior) seta of the ramus of the

second pleopod seems always to be shorter than in waite, or may even be absent.

Males usually predominate in the available takings of both waiter and similis,

but in a submarine light haul in Tasmania Mr. Fairbridge secured a large number

of females together with some males. Many of the females are 4 mm. to 4:5 mm.

in length and have just moulted; the brood-pouch is fully developed but empty

and the ovaries are swollen with large eggs (see also Cyclaspis usitata Hale, 1944,

124, and Glyphocuma bakeri Hale, 1944 a, 273).

In both waite and similis, some examples in soft condition have the carapace

curiously inflated and expanded; this is probably due to the effect of the

preservative.

Fig. 25

Anchistylis longipes, type female; lateral view

and cephalothorax from above (x32).

Anchistylis longipes sp. nov.

Female with developing marsupium—Carapace two-sevenths of total length

of animal and a little longer than pedigerous somites together; its depth is about

three-fourths the length and is equal to the breadth; carinae, etc., much as in

genotype; the curved, anterior, dorso-lateral ridge on each side is serrate

209

posteriorly but the teeth die away towards the front and the ridge itself becomes

very faint near that which marks off the antennal area. Antero-lateral margin

shallowly concave, finely dentate, and antennal angle produced as acute tooth.

Pseudorostrum rounded as seen from above, subacute in front as viewed from the

side; lobes meeting for a distance equal to one-sixth of total length of carapace.

Ocular lobe wide, with three ill-defined, whitish lenses.

First and second pedigerous somites, as in the other species, shorter than

the others; pleural parts of first concealed by those of second, which extend to

the carapace; third somite short dorsally but greatly expanded fore and aft on

mand,

Fig. 26

Anchistylis longipes, type female; c. pace, antero-lateral margin of carapace and

antennal angle (x55); ant., first and second antennae (x 120); mand., mandible

(x 55); mxp. and prp., third maxilliped, and first, second and fourth peraeopods

(x55); exop., exopod of fourth peraeopod (x 120); urop., uropod with sixth pleon

somite and telson (x 55).

the sides, where it reaches almost to anterior margin of second; anterior edge of

fifth somite finely denticulate on back.

Pleon a little shorter than cephalothorax; fifth somite little longer than sixth

which is longer than wide; telson large, elongate, cordate, without post-anal part,

about three-fourths as long as either sixth somite or peduncle of uropod.

210

First antenna stout, the first joint of peduncle as long as second and third

together ; flagellum as long as last peduncular joint, composed of two stout equal

joints ; accessory lash minute, two-jointed.

Mandible with 10 and 11 spines in the row.

Third maxilliped with basis more as in wattei than in similis; it is more than

half as long again as rest of limb and the external distal part is expanded and

produced forwards to level of apex of ischium; exopod much shorter than basis.

First peraeopod with carpus reaching well beyond antennal angle and pro-

podus beyond tip of pseudorostrum; basis only two-thirds as long as remaining

joints together; carpus, propodus and dactylus are about equal in length, each as

long as ischium and merus together.

Second peraeopod with basis as long as rest of limb without dactylus;

carpus almost as long as merus and the distinct ischium together, three-fourths

as long again as propodus and a little longer than dactylus.

As in the other species the first and second peraeopods have well-developed

exopods, the third and fourth with small two-jointed exopods, with indication of

the division of the second segment into two parts (fig. 26, exop.).

Peduncle of uropod about as long as the subequal rami, with a couple of

distal spines on inner margin; endopod with first segment three times as long as

second which is equal in length to third; inner spines of joints three, one and one;

terminal spine of endopod shorter than that of exopod and no longer than last

two joints of its ramus.

Length, 3:2 mm.

Loe-—South Australia: Spencer Gulf, Memory Cove, 3 fms. (K. Sheard,

submarine light, Feb. 1941). Type in S. Aust. Museum, Reg. No. C.2737.

SUMMARY

The majority of the Australian Diastylids so far obtained are referable to

Gynodiastylis Calman and allied genera. Of the others, herein dealt with, all but

two species belong to Paradiastylis Calman, Dimorphostylis Zimmer and Anchi-

stylis gen nov., in which the males have the basis of the first to fourth peraeopods

conspicuously expanded. The new genus is noteworthy in that it has the pleopods

remarkably modified.

Species regarded as new are Leptostylis recalvastra, Paradiastylis mollis,

Dimorphostylis subaculeata and var. praecox, D, inauspicata, D, tasmanica. D.

colefaxi, D. tribulis, Anchistylis sinulis and A. longipes.

Notes are given concerning the female of Dimorphostylis cottoni Hale and

the male of D. vieta (Hale), neither of which was previously described in detail,

and the description of the male of D. australis Foxon is amplified.

REFERENCES CITED

CatMANn, W. T. 1904 “Report on the Cumacea collected by Prof. Herd-

man, at Ceylon, in 1902.” Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fish., 1904, Supp. Rep.

12, 159-180, pl. i-v

Carman, W. T. 1905 “The Marine Fauna of the West Coast of Ireland,

pt. iv. Cumacea.” Sci. Invest, Fish. Ireland, 1904, app. 1, 3-52, pl. i-v

Catman,.W. T. 1905a “The Cumacea of the Siboga Expedition.” Siboga Ex-

ped., Mon. 36, 1-23, pl. i-ii, text fig. 1-4

Carman, W. T. 1911 “On New or Rare Crustacea of the Order Cumacea

from the Collection of the Copenhagen Museum, pt. ii. The Families

Nannastacidae and Diastylidae.” Trans. Zool. Soc., 18, 341-398,

pl. xxxil-xxxvii

211

Carman, W. T. 1912 “The Crustacea of the Order Cumacea in the Collec-

tion of the United States National Museum.” Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus.,

41, 603-676, fig. 1-112

Carman, W. T. 1917 Brit. Antarc. (“Terra Nova’) Exped., 1910. Nat.

Hist. Rep. Zool., 3, (4), 145-156, fig. 4-9

Foxon, G. E. H. 1932 Great Barrier Reef Exped., 1928-29. Sci. Rep., 4,

No. 11, 387-395, fig. 5-10

Hate, Herperr M. 1928 “Australian Cumacea.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.,

52, 31-48, fig. 1-17

Have, Herpert M. 1936 “Three New Cumacea from South Australia.” Rec.

S. Aust. Mus., 5, 395-403, fig. 1-6

Hace, Herperr M. 1936a “Cumacea from a South Australian Reef.” Rec.

S. Aust. Mus., 5, 404-438, fig. 1-23

Have, Herpert M. 1937 “Further Notes on the Cumacea of South Austra-

lian Reefs.” Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 6, 61-74, fig. 1-9

Hare, Herpert M. 1944 “The Genus Cyclaspis.” Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8,

63-142, fig. 1-60

Have, Herpertr M. 1944a “The Family Bodotriidae.” Trans. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 63, 225-285, fig. 1-38

Hansen, H. J. 1895 “Isopoden, Cumaceen u. Stomatopoden der Plankton-

Expedition.” Ergebn. d. Plankton-Exped., Bd. II, 1-105, pl. i-viii

Hansen, H. J. 1920 Crustacea Malacostraca, IV. The Order Cumacea.

Danish Ingolf-Exped., 3, (6), 1-85, pl. i-iv

Kemp, STAntey 1916 “Fauna of the Chilka Lake, Cumacea.” Mem. Ind.

Mus., 5, 1916, 395-402, fig. 1-5

Sars, G. O. 1869 Nyt Mag. Naturv., 16

Sraprers, L, 1908 “Les Sympodes recueillis a la parte de Kara durant la

croisiére du duc d’Orléans en 1907.” Arch. Exp. Zool., (4), 8, 92-104

StepBinc, T. R. R. 1910 “Sympoda” (in pt. v of S.A. Crustacea for the

Marine Investigations in South Africa), Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 6, 409-418,

pl. xliv-xlvii

STEBBING, T. R. R. 1912 “The Sympoda” (pt. vi of S.A. Crustacea for the

Marine Investigations in South Africa). Ann. S. Afr. Mus., 10, 129-

176, pl. i-xvi

Stespinc, T. R. R. 1913 Cumacea (Sympoda). Das Tierreich, Lief. xxxix,

1-210, fig. 1-137

Zimmer, Cart 1908 “Die Cumaceen der Deutschen Tiefsee - Expedition.”

Wiss. Ergebn. d. Tiefsee-Exp. “Valdivia,” 8, 157-196, pl. xxxvi-xlvi

ZimMeER, Cart 1914 Fauna Siidwest Aust., 5, Cumacea, 175-195, fig. 1-18

ZIMMER, Cart 1921 “Mitteilungen iitber Cumaceen des Berliner Zoologischen

Museums.” Mitt. Zool. Mus., Berlin, 10, 115-149, text fig. 1-55

ZIMMER, Cart 1930 “Untersuchungen an Diastyliden (Ordnung Cumacea).”

Mitt. Zool. Mus., Berlin, 583-658, fig. 1-47

ZIMMER, Cart 1936 “California Crustacea of the Order Cumacea.” Proc.

U.S. Nat. Mus., 83, No. 2992, 423-439, fig. 34-39

SCAPOLITIZED DOLOMITES OF YANKANINNA

BY D. MAWSON AND W. B. DALLWITZ (READ 14 JUNE 1945)

Summary

While investigating the thick series of Proterozoic sediments exposed on Yankaninna and

Umberatana sheep stations, in the North Flinders Ranges, we came across an unusual and quote

notable occurrence of scapolite, the recording of which is the main object of this contribution. The

location of Umberatana is shown on the regional map appearing on page 24 of this volume. We

submit herewith a local map, which shows the neighbourhood of Yankaninna (330 miles north of

Adelaide) and its relation to Umberatana. The rock formations thereabouts are illustrated by the

cross-section on page 213, which refers to the line A to B on the map.

212

SCAPOLITIZED DOLOMITES OF YANKANINNA

By D. Mawson and W. B. DaLtiwirz

[Read 14 June 1945]

Prates XIV anp XV

While investigating the thick series of ‘Proterozoic sediments exposed on

Yankaninna and Umberatana sheep stations, in the North Flinders Ranges, we

came across an unusual and quite notable occurrence of scapolite, the recording

of which is the main object of this contribution. The location of Umberatana is

shown on the regional map appearing on page 24 of this volume. We submit

herewith a local map, which shows the neighbourhood of Yankaninna (330 miles

north of Adelaide) and its relation to Umberatana. The rock formations there-

MANOARIN HILL.

ARCOONA BANMOW GAMMON RANGE

Mea

BLUFF “ibkancoed RK,

BLUE RANGE

abouts are illustrated by the cross-section on page 213, which refers to the line

A to B on the map.

The Gammon Range and the Blue Range to the south of it constitute a

massive quartzite block. In the former the strike ranges between 70° to 75°

E. of N. (true). This quartzite formation extends across the country to the east

from Arcoona Bluff to some eight miles beyond Gammon Hill. The succession

of strata to the north of the range conforms in a general way with the above

direction of strike. The angle of dip, however, falls off to the north from near

verticality in the Gammon Range until an anticlinal axis is reached on the line

joining the point A of the section (see map) to Mandarin Hill (pl. xiv, fig. 1),

to the north of this axis the sediments dip to the north.

The notable development of tillite and fluvioglacial beds is accepted as the

Sturtian glacial horizon, and consequently serves as a valuable datum horizon in

developing the stratigraphy of the district. Many years ago the late Mr. W. B.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (2), 30 November 1945

213

Greenwood, of Umberatana, drew the attention of one of us to the occurrence of

tillite in the neighbourhood of Yankaninna, namely at the Mount Rose Copper

Mine and at Muller’s Hill.

Continuing to the north of our present line of section, during our recent

reconnaissance, we met the tillite again at Taylor’s Bald Hill. Further to the

north beyond that point, we traversed a great thickness of sediments for some

eight miles across the strike, meeting some narrow fluvioglacial horizons but no

repetition of strong tillite.

GEOLOGICAL CROSS-SECTION AT YANKANINNA

A geological section across the strike of the country from the summit of the

Blue Range to the anticlinal axis to the north is figured herewith. The quartzite

ridges stand out in bold relief, the crest of the first range, the Gammon Range,

being about 685 feet above the ground level at its base; the second range, the Blue

Range, reaches some 300 feet higher. The true thickness of this quartzite was

not ascertained owing to the presence of faulting, but it is certainly of the order

of several thousand feet with a possible upper limit of 5,000 feet.

ROSS ~ SECTION A= $

iMne THE BLUE RANGE

THE GAMMON RANGE ; ta

SCAPOLITE & TREMOLITE MORNFELS

IN OCCASIONAL BANDS

\ (Vi: Wie Rui QUARTZITE

iri aang euInlayED: AND [SLATES WITH SOME SILTSTONE Ne A GREAT QUARTZITE FORMATION \

GLACIAL SediMENTS FLAGGY Ato SANOY BARDS IN UPPER DIVISION i

The succession of sediments met with in descending order below the Gammon

Range quartzite is set out below; the thicknesses stated are reduced true values.

Disturbances suggesting strike-faulting were observed in the first three items,

consequently the figures relating thereto may not be significant. Below that

horizon we have no reason to doubt but that the succession is undisturbed by any

serious dislocation.

Gammon Range quartzite (several thousand feet). Feet

Alternations of sandstone and slate... Ae ba be se st .. 1,820

Slates Lod my r= ot a a .. 2,590

Flaggy slates aud ailietoned Bad te nH wen i af .. 2,300

Clay slates... ay We a ee oft _ i ve eas 920:

Limestone wel awn il Sh ies ay 1A, a 60

Sandstone and kilideous dttels Des aie am, vest Sout wees abit 120

Hard flaggy slates... 1,080

Alternations of laminated sites aid iesrene itt: -skescional Bavidons

of intraformational breccia —_ se sd =, ~~ 690

Laminated slates with intraformational puckesttia sie te nt .. 1,830

Laminated slates with recurrent calcareous bands. Occasional horizons

exhibit the “spots” of incipient thermal metamorphism sah 420

Laminated slates with calcareous horizons; the latter exhibiting varying

degrees of conversion to tremolite Hoxntels and scapolite hornfels ... 1,100

Fluvioglacial muds with erratics .... i ais ad an sets mrs 609

Tillite ie A coe ejb hs Ae. ut Sons whi ary 72

Fluvioglacial arty. Bae ° agly a mt aye My 12

Fluvioglacial siliceous grits with evraties an te ue 120

Tillite with large boulders (continues down beyond range of ‘gcetony ro 40+

214

Only the upper 850 feet of the glacial sediments is exposed where we were;

but in this section some quite typical moraine-type of tillite is included.

Boulders up to two feet in length are frequent. One ice-scratched and striated

boulder met with measured 66 by 48 by 45 inches. The photograph (pl. xiv,

fig. 2) shows one of the largest erratics,

For the most part the glacial sediments are very firmly welded, having been

subjected to the same degree of thermal metamorphism as was responsible for the

development of tremolite and scapolite in the overlying beds,

Proceeding along the anticlinal axis towards Mandarin Hill the glacial beds

wing out to the south and to the north and an underlying series of dolomitic

sediments (evidently to be correlated with the Beaumont dolomites) makes its

appearance.

Reverting to a consideration of the scapolite and tremolite hornfels

developed in the beds overlying the tillite, we noted that the degree of meta-

morphism decreased towards the west. In our contribution (Proc. Roy. Soc.

S. Aust., 68, 191-209) dealing with the leucogranite intrusions at Giant’s Head

it was obvious that the tremolite- and scapolite-bearing hornfels, developed from

calcareous and dolomitic sediments closely associated with the tillite horizon, owe

their metamorphism to the adjacent igneous intrusions. Chlorine-rich gaseous

or liquid emanations from some igneous source appear to have been necessary for

the development of scapolite in this new area also. Thus it would appear that the

intrusive granitic magma outcropping near Umberatana must extend below ground

to within several miles of the Yankaninna homestead, for to its activities as a

metamorphosing agent we ascribe the production of the scapolite.

The development of scapolite and tremolite in calcareous and dolomitic bands

in the laminated slates above the glacial beds is well marked immediately above

the glacial horizon and recurs at intervals throughout more than 1,000 feet of the

immediately overlying sediments.

Individual bands thus affected vary in thickness from several feet to many

yards. They are dark-coloured, owing to the presence of much fine graphite and

some biotite (in part phlogopitic) discernible only in microscope sections.

In the case of some of the outcrops large crystals of scapolite stand out in

bold relief as a result of weathering under arid conditions: rock [5973] described

below and figured on pl. xv is an example of such. Associated with the scapolite-

bearing marbles are others rich in tremolite, as [5155] and [5157] described below.

PETROGRAPHIC DESCRIPTIONS OF THE SCAPOLITE

AND TREMOLITE MARBLES

GRAPHITIC SCAPOLITE-SIDERITE-MARBLE [5973]

A dark grey, almost black, rock consisting of a very fine-grained matrix of

calcite in which are embedded abundant idioblasts of scapolite. On the weathered

surface these stand out in a spectacular manner (pl. xv, fig. 1), many individuals

being well over 0:5 cm. in cross-section; some weathered in relief are seen to

exceed 2 cm. in length.

Microscopic Observations—-The texture is maculose with porphyroblasts of

scapolite in a finely granoblastic groundmass.

The groundmass consists of fine-grained calcite, quartz (some albite may be

present, but it cannot be definitely identified on account of the fineness of grain),

graphite, and biotite, which is pleochroic from light brown to pale yellow. In

addition to scapolite the groundmass carries well-shaped rhombs of siderite which

measure, on the average, about 0-7 mm. by 0°6 mm, These rhombs often have

215

included in them graphite, biotite, etc., of the groundmass. Pockets and veinlets

of coarser, segregated, relatively clear calcite are not uncommon; they are

especially developed around scapolite grains.

The scapolite porphyroblasts contain very abundant inclusions of finely

granular biotite, quartz and graphite, and sometimes veinlets and patches of

goethite and grains of black iron ore; occasionally irregular pockets of calcite are

also found therein. The graphite is usually in thin wisps whose length is parallel

to the c-axis of the host. The crystals are mottled and are bordered by a narrow,

marialitic shell, easily recognised by its lower D.R. In one case narrow veinlets

of marialitic scapolite cross a large crystal of that mineral in a direction parallel

to (001).

We attribute the mottling illustrated in these porphyroblasts to the continued

introduction of sodium and chlorine, an explanation which accounts for the outer

marialitic zone in the case of scapolite in some of the Tourmaline Hill rocks

described recently (see Mawson and Dallwitz, this volume, pages 22 to 49).

The original more meionitic scapolite has been attacked and replaced.

The prismatic faces of the crystals are clear-cut, yielding periectly shaped

sections across the c-axis. Terminal faces are always wanting, the crystals

merely ragging out at either end of the prism zone. In some individuals thin,

straight fingers of the marialitic scapolite penetrate clear marginal calcite and in

others short rods of calcite are embedded in the marginal shell; both these cases

are fundamentally the same, because in the first calcite is in excess, while in ie

second scapolite preponderates.

Basal sections of scapolite idioblasts may contain inclusions arranged in a

manner commonly observed in chiastolite (pl. xv, fig. 2). This feature, as well

as the general abundance of inclusions, testifies to very quick growth. The prism

faces of some of the idioblasts exhibit a concave curvature.

DoLoMITIC TREMOLITE-MARBLE [5157]

A mottled dark grey rock composed very largely of carbonate minerals. The

only other constituent clearly defined in the hand-specimen is tremolite, which

usually occurs in bladed and needle-like crystals, often in radiating groups; some

of these are almost 2 cm, long, with an average width of about 1 mm. Lighter

coloured pockets of coarsely crystalline carbonate minerals in crystals as much

as 1 cm. across and often with curved cleavage faces are distributed through the

general very fine-grained dark base.

Microscopic Observations—Both texture and distribution of the minerals are

markedly uneven. The greater area of the microscope slide is occupied by very

fine-grained calcite representing the but little altered original limestone. Coarsely

recrystallized calcite and dolomite occurs in pockets; in these latter irregularly

distributed patches of graphite are usually found. These pockets are commonly

associated with tremolite-rich areas.

Not all of the tremolite is in long crystals, some being of normal habit. It

is in colourless euhedral to subhedral crystals. The maximum measured extine-

tion angle is 18°. It is frequently, though not invariably, mottled under crossed

nicols; this feature is best seen in transverse sections, in which the “mottling”

takes the form of zoning; the inner parts, in sections of normal thickness, show-

ing first-order yellow and the outer zone second-order blue to yellow-green, due

to the richness of the latter in MgO. Simple twinning is occasionally seen.

Inclusions of graphite, though not abundant, are usually present, but they are

irregularly distributed and may be entirely absent in part of a crystal. Calcite

also forms inclusions, but such are relatively rare.

The dolomite grains themselves are bordered by a narrow black band of

concentrated graphite, which the mineral evidently succeeded in expelling almost

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1945 Vol. 69, Plate XV

217

PORPHYRITIC POTASH-SODA MICROGRANITES OF MOUNT MONSTER

By D. Mawson and E. R. Seenir

[Read 14 June 1945]

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS

Mount Monster is a hill rising about 150 feet above the surrounding mallee-

covered plain seven miles south of the township of Keith, 130 miles south-east of

Adelaide (see regional map, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944, 68, (2), 193).

Over a wide area in the surrounding district there is a covering of Recent sand

and soil, with no rock exposed beyond the outcrops to be described, an occasional

inlier of granite encountered at widely spaced intervals, and boulders and crusts

of surface travertine. At comparatively shallow depth below the surface, Tertiary

limestone is usually met with before bottoming on granitic igneous rocks and

associated schists. The age of the latter fundamental formation is thought to be

not later than Middle-Cambrian.

The existence of an occurrence of quartz-feldspar-porphyry at Mount

Monster was recently recorded (Mawson and Dallwitz, Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust.,

1944, 68, (2), 191; the object of the present contribution is to furnish a detailed

account of other microgranites outcropping in the area.

THE IGNEOUS OUTCROPS

The outcrops, shown on the plan herewith, are distributed in two groups,

namely, those at and around Mount Monster and those forming a chain to the

south and south-east. Except in the case of Mount Monster itself they are incon-

spicuous, rising only from a few feet to a maximum of 50 feet above the lowest

ground surface in the neighbourhood. The south-easterly chain consists of nobbly

outcrops with a tendency to elongation and cleavage in a general north and south

direction.

The Mount Monster mass occupies an area of about 450 yards by 500 yards.

Near the summit there is a 40-ft. high rock face. The trend of the grain of the

rock is about W. to E.

Outcrops 1, 2, 3, 4 and 7 are all very much alike, though the rock of outcrop

4 has, possibly, a somewhat greater proportion of base to phenocrysts. Specimen

[5797], typical of outcrop 7, is described on page 221, and a rather similar rock

[5479] from outcrop 4, is dealt with on the same page.

Portion, at least, of outcrop 5 is remarkable for the high degree of deuteric

alteration suffered by it, although, doubtless, it was initially very similar to the

rock [5797]. An example of this phase [5778] is described on page 219.

The remaining variant is that of the farthest south, outcrop 6. The rock

from that locality can be distinguished at a glance on account of its lighter colour.

Specimen [5777], which is typical of it, is described on page 221.

The petrological descriptions to follow indicate a general similarity of type

throughout and illustrate the effect of attack on already formed minerals by late

magmatic residual liquors and gases.

There is, however, in the case of the rock of outcrop 6, a more fundamental

difference, for in it the orthoclases, which are to a minor degree microperthitic,

are markedly tabular and in some parts of the outcrop tend to be aligned as Ly

flow structure. Also there is much micrographic development as a late crystalliza-

Trans. Roy. Soc, S.A., 69, (2), 30 November 1945

218

tion in the groundmass. Finally, some of the calcite occupying spaces between

earlier formed grains in the rock has the appearance of having crystallized from

the late magmatic mother liquors.

ae MONSTER WELL

GENERAL CHARACTER OF THE ROCK TYPES

THE FELSITIC QUARTZ-FELDSPAR-PORPHYRY OF MOUNT MONSTER

The rock composing Mount Monster itself and the outcrop to the north of it

is distinct from that of the group of minor outcrops distant one mile and more

to the south-south-east. That of the former area is more uniform in character as

well as being characterised by phenocrysts of smaller dimensions and a devitrified

base of finer texture.

A typical specimen from the summit of Mount Monster [4426] has already

been briefly described (Mawson and Dallwitz, 1944, loc. cit.). Dallwitz’s analysis

of that potash-soda-microgranite is repeated herewith in the table on page 219.

It is made up of phenocrysts of pinkish-buff coloured orthoclase, somewhat lighter

coloured albite and obviously smoky quartz embedded in about an equal volume of

a liver-brown devitrified felsitic base.

A,second specimen [4425] from the main Mount Monster mass has now been

sectioned but discloses no new features.

The rock [4424] representative of the large body (outcrop B) situated to the

north of Mount Monster differs in no material features from [4426]. It is note-

worthy, however that all three of these specimens agree in indicating that the rocks

of this group have not suffered so seriously from secondary deuteric and sub-

sequent changes as is a feature of the minor outcrops to the south-south-east. For

example, the orthoclases of the former group are ustially fresh and clear within,

having suffered alteration only in their peripheral areas.

219

THE SOUTHERN GROUP OF PORPHYRITIC MICROGRANITES

The rocks of these small but numerous outcrops represent a considerable

range in appearance. It is found that they can be grouped under three slightly

variant forms. In the petrological descriptions to follow [4579] and [5797] are

the more general forms, [5778] is modified by late magmatic reaction and [5777],

which is in the extreme southern end of the intrusion, is a granophyric end-product

in the consolidation of the magma.

TABLE OF ANALYSES

I il Ill IV

Sie ~ ~ 73:77 72:50 74°44 69-42

AlOs - - 13-06 14-02 12-94 15-01

FeOs - - 0°72 0-92 1°35 0-36

FeO - - 1:43 1-24 0-99 2:42

MnO - - 0-05 0-04 — a

MgO - - 0-12 0-23 0-16 0-12

CaO 7 - 0-89 0°77 0-53 1-63

NaezO - - 3°55 3°47 3°53 3-48

K:0 ~ - 5-44 5-24 4-79 5-71

H.O+ - - 0-57 0-73 0°55 0-68

H.O— - - 0-11 0-18 0-01 0-13

P:Os - - 0-08 0-06 0-05 0-11

TiOz - - 0-18 0-08 0-26 0-31

ZrOz - ~ 0-01 0:04 — ~—

CriOs - - nil — eae —_

BaO - - 6-06 0-07 —_ —

SrO - - 0-01 — —_ ite

CO2 ~ - 0-16 0-80 0-20 0-81

F - ~ 0-04 0-08 0-04 0:07

cl - - trace _ a —

SOs ~ al nil oe —_ one

S - - 0-02 om de le

10027 100-47 99-84 100-26

Less O for F - 0-02 0-03 0-01 1-02

Total E - 100-25 100-44 99-83 100-24

Sp. Gr. at 15°C. 2-613 2-595 2-742 2:580

I. Porphyritic potash-soda-microgranite (porphyritic quartz-feldspar-porphyry)

[4426], the rock forming the mass outcropping as Mount Monster itself;

from the Summit. Analyst, W. B. Dallwitz.

Il Autometamorphosed porphyritic potash-soda-microgranite [5778] from a por-

tion of outcrop 5 (see plan, p. 218) of the south-eastern belt of outcrops,

Mount Monster locality. Analyst, E. R. Segnit.

Ill. Porphyritic potash-soda-microgranite [5479] from outcrop 4 of the south-

eastern belt of outcrops, Mount Monster locality. Analyst, D. J. Guppy

(with minor additions by E. R. Segnit).

IV. Porphyritic granophyric potash-soda-microgranite [5777] from outcrop 6 of

the south-eastern belt of outcrops, Mount Monster locality. Analyst, J. H.

Shepherd (with minor additions by E. R. Segnit).

AUTOMETAMORPHOSED PORPHYRITIC POTASH-SODA MICROGRANITE [5778]

from Outcrop 5

This is a markedly porphyritic rock in which large brick-red, idiomorphic

phenocrysts of orthoclase, some greyish-white plagioclase and plentiful small clear

quartzes are set in a felsitic brownish-red base. Also some small dark green,

220

chloritic patches are distributed through the stony base. The orthoclases, which

are up to 2 cm. by 0-5 cm. in size, exhibit Carlsbad twinning and not infrequently

have an outer zone of plagioclase.

Microscopic Observations—The large orthoclase phenocrysts are observed

to be microperthitic ; the albite element is in small amount and but faintly recorded.

As a result of secondary alteration the large microperthite phenocrysts have, in large

measure, been reduced to a reddish, cloudy mass which in places almost obliterates

the original structure. Smaller plagioclase phenocrysts have optical characters

corresponding to almost pure albite. The plagioclase has had developed in it

unoriented flecks of mica (sericitization), but lamellar twinning is still dis-

tinguishable.

Quartz phenocrysts are both large and small but seldom exceed 0-4 mm.

diameter. They contain abundant inclusions both solid, liquid and gaseous, which

are often aligned along definite crystal planes.

Chlorite, with pleochroism X == Y = green, Z == pale greenish-yellow, is of

frequent occurrence as small irregular flakes up to 1 mm. in length; these are

length-slow and of moderate D.R., which characters combined with the high

FeO:MgO ratio disclosed by the analysis (cf., rock [5777] ), indicate this

mineral to be a chlinochlore rich in iron. There are clear indications that, in most

cases at least, this chlorite has developed from primary biotite, though to a minor

degree it may represent paramorphs after amphibole.

Magnetite, leucoxenized ilmenite, apatite and zircon occur as small but dis-

tinct crystals, the latter is grey and occurs in crystals up to 0-4 mm. diameter.

Apatite laths and purple grains of fluorite are both very rare.

The groundmass is a very fine granular aggregate of quartz, about 40%, and

altered feldspar with a small amount of chlorite; average grain-size is about

0-05 mm. The feldspar of the groundmass and that of the microperthite pheno-

crysts have been subjected to the same secondary changes and appear red in

reflected light.

Tiny particles of a carbonate mineral which appear in the groundmass and

as alteration products of some of the feldspars are a very minor but notable and

general constituent. It appears to be calcite with Fe and Mg replacing some of

the Ca. This conclusion is indicated by the fact that the rock powder when

digested for a few minutes with HCl of 50% dilution had abstracted from it the

following, stated in percentage of the rock: Al,O, 1°53, Fe,O, 0°64, FeO 1°19,

CaO 0:70, which suggests that much of the iron is present as the siderite molecule.

It would appear that this porphyritic felsite owes some of its special

characters to the action of late magmatic liquids and gases resulting in chloritiza-

tion and calcitization.

A chemical analysis is submitted in the table on page 219. From this the

Norm has been derived as follows. In column I the CO, is taken into account in

the calculation, but excluded in column II.

I It I Il

Quartz - ~ 31-98 29°94 Zircon - - 0-05 0-05

Orthoclase ~ 30-58 30-58 Siderite = - - 0-81 =—

Albite - - 29-34 29°34 ‘Calcite - - 1:10 —

Anorthite - -_ = 3°34 Apatite - - 0-13 0-13

Corundum - 2°65 1-53 Fluorite - - 0-16 0:16

Hypersthene - 1-00 2:05 COs - -_ 0°80

Magnetite - 1°39 1-39 HA - - - 0-91 0-91

Imenite - - 0-15 0-15

Total 100-25 100-37

C.I.P,W. classification: Class I, order 4, rang 1, subrang 3.

221

PORPHYRITIC POTASH-SODA MICROGRANITE [5479] from Outcrop 4

This rock is fundamentally not very different from [5778], but here the con-

trast between the two feldspars and the groundmass is not so pronounced: the

perthite is lighter in colour and the plagioclase is pinkish, The main point of

difference is that here there is less evidence of late magmatic deuteric change.

Microscopic Observations—An essential difference between this rock and

[5778] is that here (1) a light-coloured epidote is abundantly developed as tiny

crystal grains as an alteration product of plagioclase, and (2) obvious carbonate

minerals are absent. Both feldspars are clouded as in [5778], but crystal grains

of epidote up to 0-1 mm. in length are distributed through the plagioclase, which

latter corresponds in optical characters with an albite containing only a very small

amount of the anorthite molecule. LEpidote of the pistasite variety appears as

grains up to 2 mm. by 0°5 mm., in association with chloritized relics of original

biotite. Other accessory constituents are ilmenite, magnetite, zircon and fluorite

(very rare), The plagioclase in this rock is less abundant and smaller in grain

than is the case of [5797] and [5778].

A chemical analysis appears in the table on page 219. The composition of

the Norm is as follows. In column I the CO, is taken into account but excluded

from column IT.

I It I Il

Quartz ~ - 35-28 34-68 Ilmenite - - 0-61 0-61

Orthoclase ~ 28-36 28°36 Apatite = - - O13 0-13

Albite - - 29°34 28°34 Calcite -- - 0-50 —

Anorthite - - 0°83 2:22 Fluorite = - ~ 0-07 0-07

Corundum - 1°63 1-12 CO2 - - -— 0-20

Hypersthene - 0°53 0-53 H:0 - - - 0:56 0-56

Magnetite - - 2-09 2-09

Total 99-93 98-91

C.ILP.W. classification: Class I, order 4, rang 1, subrang 3.

PORPHYRITIC POTASH-SODA MICROGRANITE [5797] from Outcrop 7

In general appearance ‘this rock resembles [5479]; in the hand specimen it

differs from [5778] mainly in that the latter has suffered deuteric changes to a

more marked degree. The orthoclases are large and tabular in form, up to 1 cm.

in length, and the central areas are often light-coloured contrasting with a redder

marginal zone. The quartzes are large and black in appearance,

Microscopic Observations—The orthoclases are not microperthitic; the

secondary attack resulting in a red dusty appearance has affected the margins

only, leaving clear unaltered orthoclase within. There is plenty of porphyritic plagio-

clase, the crystals often bunched together in a glomeroporphyritic arrangement.

Grains of epidote are present, but calcite is absent. Green chloritic areas are

conspicuous, in association with some of which there is a notable concentration. of

apatite in laths up to 3 mm. in length. Small amounts of zircon and of partly

leucoxenized iron-ore are to be observed, but no fluorite appears in the section.

PORPHYRITIC GRANOPHYRIC 'POTASH-SODA MICROGRANITE [5777] from Outcrop 6

This rock which is typical of the farthest south mass on the line of outcrops

is quite obviously different in appearance from any of the others from this locality,

in that the felsitic base is light grey in place of the prevailing red-brown of other

outcrops. It is, however, like them, a felsitic quartz-feldspar-porphyry, but again

it differs in that the orthoclases tend to be tabular and to exhibit a marked fluc-

tional arrangement.

The largest phenocrysts are buff-pink orthoclases, which attain a maximum

size of lL cm. by 0°25 cm. The plagioclases are greyish-white and sometimes inter-

grown with a little chlorite. Quartz occurs in small dark-grey equidimensional

crystals, rarely exceeding 2 mm. diameter.

222

Microscopic Observations—Of the phenocrysts large turbid idiomorphs of

orthoclase predominate; some of them carry a little microperthitic albite. The

plagioclase is in smaller individuals, and these are much less affected by turbidity

than is the case with the orthoclase. In shape the quartzes range from ragged

and rounded to sub-idiomorphic.

The slide reveals that there is an abundant development particularly around

the quartz and feldspar phenocrysts, but also in the groundmass, of granophyric

intergrowths of these minerals.

The groundmass is in the main a fine-grained aggregate of clear quartz and

clouded feldspar. Other minerals are merely accessory.

Chlorite (apparently after iron-rich biotite) is abundant. Its micaceous habit

is well developed, facilitating determination of its properties. It is strongly

pleochroic; X= Y = green, Z== very pale yellowish-green. D.R. 0-009, RI.

1°65. Pseudo-uniaxial negative and length-slow. These properties and the high

FeO: MgO ratio in the analysis indicate approach to the daphnite-ferroantigorite

end of the series, with a composition about FAn,, Ant,, Dap,, Am,).

Calcite is present to a notable extent. It is better crystallized and segregated

than in the case of [5778], and is rarely seen in association with the feldspars.

It frequently occurs with the chlorite, but does not appear to bear any reaction

relation to it. Elsewhere it occurs independently in large crystals, up to 2 or 3 mm.

in length. There appears to be no doubt but that much of the calcite in this rock

formed in small cavities at a late stage in the crystallization of the residual liquors

of the magma.

Epidote is present only to a very limited extent in association with the

chlorite. Magnetite, zircon and apatite are accessories.

The chemical composition is given in the table on page 219. The Norm is

as stated below, where in column I the CO, is taken into account in the calculation,

but is excluded in column II.

I II I II

Quartz - ~ 24-84 22-68 Ilmenite - - 0-61 0-61

Orthoclase ~ 33-92 33-92 Apatite - - 0°34 0°34

Albite - ~ 29°34 29-34 Calcite - - 1-80 _

Anorthite - - 1-67 6°67 Fluorite = - - 0-16 0-16

Corundum ~ 2°45 0-61 COz - - a 0-81

Hypersthene ~- 3-73 3°73 H:0 - - - 0-81 0-81

Magnetite - 0-70 0-70

Total 100-37 100-38

C.I.P.W. classification: Class I, order 4, rang 2, subrang 3.

SUMMARY

The location of a number of outcrops of porphyritic potash-soda micro-

granites occurring in the neighbourhood of Keith have been mapped. They are

in the nature of quartz-feldspar-porphyries with a felsitic to microcrystalline base

and appear to be of the nature of intrusions into the upper crust, but relevant

evidence relating thereto is obscured by recent surface formations. <A late

crystallized phase has a well-developed micro-granophyric texture. Interesting

deuteric changes are recorded,

These porphyries belong to the suite of the extensive fluor-granite formation

which reappears at intervals from the Mount Lofty Ranges in a south-easterly

direction towards the Victorian border.. An apparently similar rock occurs near

Hamilton in Victoria, suggesting the probability of this belt of rocks extending

into western Victoria.

NEW SPECIES OF DIPLURA (INSECTA APTERYGOTA)

FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA

BY H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM (READ 9 AUGUST 1945)

Summary

Family PROJAPYGIDAE, Genus SYMPHYLURINUS Silvestri 1936. Boll. Lab. Zool., Portici., 30,

52,m 1936.

Symphylurinus swani n. sp. Description — Colour, creamy-white. Head above with medium and

short setae, occiput with 5 medium setae on each side, anterior of transverse suture with 3+3

medium setae, behind antennae bases with 3+3, between antennae bases 1 median and medium in

length, on clypeus with one long median and 1+1 shorter latero-medial setae; antennae 23

segmented, with the setae and sensillae as in the genus (see Silvestri 1936).

223

NEW SPECIES OF DIPLURA (INSECTA APTERYGOTA)

FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA

By H. Womersiey, South Australian Museum

[Read 9 August 1945]

Family PROJAPYGIDAE

Genus SyMPHyLurinus Silvestri 1936

Boll. Lab. Zool., Portici., 30, 52, 1936.

Symphylurinus swani n. sp.

Fig. 1

Description—Colour, creamy-white. Head above with medium and short

setae, occiput with 5 medium setae on each side, anterior of transverse suture

with 3+ 3 medium setae, behind antennae bases with 3+ 3, between antennae

bases 1 median and medium in length, on clypeus with one long median and 1 +1

shorter latero-medial setae; antennae 23-segmented, with the setae and sensillae

as in the genus (see Silvestri 1936).

Thorax: pronotum with 4+ 4 macrochaetae furnished with 1-2 short in-

distinct subapical barbs, one submedian subanterior and slightly shorter than

length of pronotum, one lateral slightly longer than pronotum and 2+2 sub-

posterior slightly shorter than pronotum, otherwise pronotum with many short

setae; mesonotum with 9 + 9 macrochaetae, 2 + 2 subanterior, 2+ 2 transversely

submedian, 1 +1 lateral and 3+ 3 posterior of which the laterals are slightly

longer than the sublaterals, all with 1-3 subapical barbs; metanotum with 5+ 5

macrochaetae of which 3+3 are subposterior, otherswise as in mesonotum;

praesternum with 2+2 medium barbed setae, fork of sternum with 1+ 1,

several lateral, 1 +1 transverse median and 1+ 1 subposterior macrochaetae,

all long and with 1-3 barbs.

Legs: tibiae of I with strigulae of 4 spathulate setae at apex; III, trochanter

with 2 short ventral macrochaetae; femur with 3-4 dorsal, subanterior 1, inferior

2; tibia with short inferior macrochaetae; tarsi with numerous very short setae,

praeapical dorsal setae short, praetarsal claws curved, unequal.

Abdomen: tergite I with 1+ 1 subanterior submedian macrochaetae and

1+ 1 posterior submedian with 1-2 barbs; II with 1+ 1 subanterior submedian,

and 2+ 2 posterior; III with 2+2 subanterior and 3+ 3 posterior, IV-VII

with 3+ 3 subanterior, 1 +1 lateral and 4+4 posterior; VIII and IX with

4+ 4 posterior; X with 1 median long macrochaetae, and 5 + 5 shorter posterior

macrochaetae ; sternite I, macrochaetae 3+-3 anterior, 1+1 lateraland4+4 posterior,

stylets rather more than half length of sternite (72), subcoxal appendage slightly

longer than stylet (80%) with ca. 8 short stout apical spines; IJ-VII macro-

chaetae 8 + 8, 2+ 2 subanterior, 6+6 posterior, stylets as in I; VIII macro-

chaetae 1+ 1 posterior submedian sublateral; IX macrochaetae 2 +2 posterior

and 2 laterals; X 2+ 2 macrochaetae and 10 + 10 shorter setae.

Cerci: 11-segmented, I short and annuliform, II-IV about one-third length

of entire cerci together, each segment from J-IX with 2-transverse series of

6-setae, X and XI with 1 series.

Length 2°475 mm., width of head 0-48 mm., antennae 1:35 mm., leg III

0-9 mm., cerci 0°675 mm.

Loc.—A single female from under a stone, Atherton, North Queensland,

20 April 1945 (D.C. S.).

Trana. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (2), 30 November 1945

224

Remarks—The first record of Symphylurinus and of the Projapygidae from

Australia. The genus was previously known only from India, China, West

Africa and South America.

Fig. 1 Symphylurinus swani n. sp.

A, head in dorsal view; B, C, D, antennae in three sections B, apical, C, medial,

D, basal; E, thoracic tergites; F, abdominal tergites; G, tibia and tarsi of leg I;

H, apex of tibia III; I, tarsal claws leg I; J, cerci; K, urosternite I; L, maxilla;

M, sensillae on submedian area of mentum.

225

Family JAPYGIDAE

Subfamily PARAJAPYGINAE

Genus ParayApyx Silv. 1903

Annu. Mus. Napoli (n.s.), 1, (7), 3, 1903.

Parajapyx queenslandica n. sp.

Fig. 2 A-B

Description—Colour, creamy-white except for the well-chitinised yellow

Xth abdominal somite and the forceps. Head rather longer than wide, with ca.

18 + 18 short subequal setae, suture lines not evident. Eyes absent. Antennae

Fig. 2 A-B—Parajapyx queenslandica n.sp.: A, abdominal tergites VIII-X and

forceps; B, subcoxal organ on urosternite I. Indjapyx goodenoughensis n. Sp.:

C, abdominal tergites VIII-X and forceps; D, antenna IV from above; E, right

half urosternite V; F, claws of leg III.

226

18-segmented, entirely without sensillae. Labial palpi wanting. Mouth-parts as

in the genus.

Thorax: pronotum with 6 + 6 short to longer setae, a median transverse row

of 3 +3, the laterals the longest, and a subposterior row of 3+ 3, the middle one

on each side being the longest; mesonotum with 24 short and longer setae, i+1

anteromedian, 4+ 4 longer with the outer the longest, then 2 + 2 short, followed

by 3+3 short subposterior; metanotum with 26 short and longer setae, 2+ 2

antero-median, the inner members the longer, then 4+ 4 the outer the longest,

then 2+2 short, then 4+4 longer, followed by 3+3 short and posterior ;

prosternum with 3+3 praesternal, then 3 +3, then 1 median plus

1+1 furcal, then 2+2; mesosternum with 4+4, then 1 median plus 1 +1

furcal, then 2+2 subposterior; metanotum 5+ 5 praesternal, then 1 median

plus 1+ 1, then 4+ 4, then 1 median plus 1+1 furcal, then 2 + 2 subposterior.

Legs short, claws subequal with a pair of fine setae from the praetarsus.

Abdomen: tergites I-VII with four rows of short to longer setae; VIIT with

11 +11 setae, fairly long, 4+ 4 subanterior, the first and third on each side long,

the others very short, 1 +1 lateral long, 1 +1 sublateral and very short, then

1 +1 long submedian, then 4 +4 subposterior, the third on each side very short;

tergite IX much shorter than VIII or X with a subposterior row of 4 + 4 long

setae; X and forceps as figured. Sternites I-VII with four transverse rows of

6-8 short setae, VIII with 8+8 short and longer setae, IX with 4+4 sub-

posterior short and longer setae. All setae simple.

Sternites II and III with the usual large round paired vesicles.

Stylets (cf. fig. 2B) small, conical and with a smaller outer accessory cone.

Subcoxal organs on sternite I as figured.

Forceps symmetrical, as figured.

Loc-—Under stones, Edge Hill, Cairns, Queensland, 2 June 1945 (D.C. S.).

Remarks—Described from two specimens received from F./Lt. D. C. Swan

The paratype is a juvenile specimen of only 2100, in length.

This species is very different from the only other known species of

Parajapyx from Australia (P. swani Wom. from South Australia) in the struc-

ture of the forceps.

Subfamily INDJAPYGINAE

Genus Inpyapyx Silv. 1930

Rec. Indian Museum 1930, 32, (4), 451.

Indjapyx goodenoughensis n. sp.

Fig. 2.C-F

Description—Colour yellowish, with somite IX, X and forceps somewhat

deeper yellow. Head rounded, about as wide as it is long, dorsally with 9+9

long and strong simple macrochaetae and others shorter and still shorter ; without

the fine pubescence posteriorly as in many of the hitherto described species.

Antennae 44-segmented, with sensillae only on segment IV to VI, the dorsal

sensillae on IV placed subposteriorly as is characteristic of the genus. Thorax

dorsally with long and short setae, the macrochaetae as follows: pronotum with

6+ 6, subanteriorly 2+ 2, sublaterally 2+ 2, and subposteriorly 2+ 2; meso-

notum with 5+5, subanteriorly 2+ 2, laterally 1+ 1, subposteriorly 2+2;

metanotum 5+ 5, subanteriorly 2+ 2, laterally 1+ 1, subposteriorly 2+ 2;

ventrally on prosternum, praesternal 4 + 4 macrochaetae, then 1 median plus 4+4

subanterior, within the furca 4, then 1 +1 lateral and 3 + 3 subposterior ; meso-

and metasterna similar.

Abdomen similarly with long and short macrochaetae; tergites I with 1 +1

subposterior submedian and 1+ 1 subposterior macrochaetae; II-H1 with 4+ 4

227

lateral and 1 + 1 subposterior submedian ; IV-VII with 4 + 4 laterally only, VIII

with 1+ 1 lateral subposterior; IX and X as figured. Sternites furnished with

more macrochaetae, I-VIII with from four to two rows of long and short setae.

Sternites II-VII with long conical stylets as in fig. 2E. Subcoxal organ on

sternite I displaced in mount and details not available for description. Legs with

Fig. 3. Lepidocampa weberi Ouds.

A, head and thoracic tergites; B, antennal segments III-VII; C, tip of tibia, and

tarsus of leg I1I; D, scale from abdominal tergites.

228

paired slightly unequal claws. Forceps as in figure, symmetrical. Tergites with

the lateral apical angles rounded in I-VI, produced into a point in VII

(cf. fig. 2 C).

Length 6°0 mm., antennae 3-1 mm., forceps 525p,.

Loc.-—A single specimen from Goodenough Island, New Guinea, collected

by F./Lt. D. C. Swan, January 1944.

Remarks—In the subposterior position of the dorsal sensilla on antennae IV,

and the proportions of somites VII-IX, this species comes into Silvestri’s genus

Indjapyx. It differs from most described species and varieties in lacking the

pubescence on the posterior portion of the head, and in the number of antennal

segments. Also the absence of all macrochaetae except laterals on tergites [V-VIII

is remarkable, although in other species they are comparatively few, and only

represented by one or two pairs.

Family CAMPODEIDAE

P, 228, between line 15 and 16 insert “LepmocaAmMpa cf. WEBERT Ouds. 1890.”

Colour, creamy-white. Length 2-4 mm. Antennae ca. 20-segmented Cerci

ca. 10-12 segmented. Head dorsally with long and short smooth setae, as figured.

Pronotum with 1+ 1 anterior submedian macrochaetae strongly feathered, and

4+4 similar sublateral and subposterior macrochaetae, of which the second from

the posterior angle is very long; mesonotum with 1 +.1 antero-submedian, 2 + 2

antero-lateral and sublateral, and 4 +4 lateral and subposterior, the second from

posterior the longest ; metanotum with 1 + 1 antero-submedian, and 4 + 4 postero-

sublateral, the second from posterior the longest. Abdominal tergite I without

macrochaetae; II and III with 1 +1 submedian, IV-VII with 3+ 3 subpostero-

lateral: VIII and IX with 4+ 4 subpostero-lateral; X with many but number

indeterminate. Cerci with whorls of long macrochaetae. Antennae also with

whorls of macrochaetae and the usual sensillae on III-VI. Tarsi with paired claws

and pulvilli.

Loc.—A single specimen from Goodenough Island, New Guinea, collected

by F./Lt. D. C. Swan, January 1944.

Remarks—As the microscopic preparation is somewhat damaged it is not

possible to completely describe or figure all necessary details of this specimen, but

it is tentatively referred to Oudeman’s species, which is known to be widely dis-

tributed in the Melanesian Region. The specimen also was preparing for an

ecdysis, the setae of the next instar being visible and rendering the normal setal

pattern rather difficult to make out.

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN

FRESHWATER MOLLUSCS PART X

BY T. HARVEY JOHNSTON AND ANNE C. BECKWITH (READ 9 AUGUST 1945)

Summary

Cercaria (Furcocercaria) tetradena n. sp. One of the commonest parasites of the mollusc, Plotiopsis

tatei, from the lower River Murray, is the furcocercaria, C. tetradena. From 38 collections of that

mollusc, in which a total of 7,592 specimens were gathered and tested in individual tubes for the

presence of cercariae, 338 showed infection with the parasite, 7.e., approximately 4% infected.

These 33 collections were made only in the warmer months, from October to May, in the years

1937-45, and snails were gathered at Tailem Bend (26 collections), Swan Reach (5 collections),

Renmark (1 collection), and Morgan (1 collection). On only six out of the 33 occasions were no C.

tetradena observed; but only one of these contained a large number of molluscs (326), the others

being small collections each of less than 36 snails.

229

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER MOLLUSCS

PART X

By T. Harvey Jounston and Anne C. BecKwitH

[Read 9 August 1945]

Cercaria (Furcocercaria) tetradena n. sp.

Fig. 1-5

One of the commonest parasites of the mollusc, Plotiopsis tatet, from the

lower River Murray, is the furcocercaria, C. fetradena. From 38 collections of

that mollusc, in which a total of 7,592 specimens were gathered and tested in

individual tubes for the presence of cercariae, 338 showed infection with the

parasite, i.c., approximately 4% infected. These 33 collections were made only

in the warmer months, from October to May, in the years 1937-45, and snails

were gathered at Tailem Bend (26 collections), Swan Reach (5 collections),

Renmark (1 collection), and Morgan (1 collection). On only six out of the

33 occasions were no C. tetradena observed; but only one of these contained a

large number of molluscs (326), the others being small collections each of less

than 36 snails.

In five Plotiopsis a double infection of C. tetradena and another cercaria was

observed—once with the cercaria of Echinochasmus pelecam, once with a

‘Xiphidiocercaria, once with a Monostome, and in the remaining two cases each

with a different species of Gymnocephalan, the four latter being species not yet

described.

The cercariae are emitted in greatest numbers during the morning, but in

dull weather, particularly between 11 am. and 2 p.m. In bright weather, large

numbers emerge by 9.30 am. They are vigorous swimmers, readily visible to

the naked eye, and most of those present in a tube are in motion at any given

moment. When resting, the furcae are spread each at an angle of about 90° to

the tail stem, with the body hanging down. They swim tail-first, with very rapid,

jerky movements. The length of life is not more than 24 hours.

For measurement, cercariae were fixed by the addition of an equal quantity

of boiling 10% formalin to the water in which they were swimming. Fifteen

specimens were measured and the results averaged. Measurements were made

with an ocular micrometer, and using coverslip pressure only sufficient to keep

the cercariae in one plane, t.e., they were not distorted by pressure. Measure-

ments are given in micra, and their range is indicated in brackets after the average.

Length of body, 144 average (128-160); breadth (at widest part) 37 (32-43);

length of tail stem, 159 (138-198) ; breadth of tail stem (widest), 26 (23-29) ;

length of furca, 158 (133-176) ; breadth of furcae, 13 (11-20) ; length of anterior

organ, 40 (30-48); breadth of anterior organ, 19 (14-25); length of ventral

sucker, 18 (16-20); breadth of ventral sucker, 18 (14-20).

A live, unstained specimen appears clear and faintly yellowish. In front of

the mouth are two rows of straight spines arranged alternately, four in the front

and five in the second series. A variation observed, three and four in these rows

respectively—may have been due to the accidental loss of two spines.

There is a small circumoral spineless area (fig. 1). Then follows a series

of six to seven irregular rows surrounding the anterior half of the anterior organ.

These spines are larger than those of the rest of the body, and diminish in size

from before backwards. Almost the whole of the body is covered with spines

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (2), 30 November 1945

230

which tend to be arranged in rows, except for a small spineless area just in front

of, and a long strip behind the ventral sucker. About 32 spines, arranged in two

rows with the spines alternating, are borne by the ventral sucker. This arrange-

“tld Uf SOG

o-osmrm

Fig. 1-3, C. tetradena—l, body, showing spination, digestive system, glands,

suckers, nervous system, genital primordium; 2, excretory system of body; 3, tail.

Outlines drawn with camera lucida, details freehand.

ment can be clearly seen only under heavy coverslip pressure. Except when

greatly extended, the body has a finely corrugated appearance.

The subterminal mouth leads into a short prepharynx; then follows a

muscular pharynx and a long oesophagus which bifurcates just in front of the

231

ventral sucker into the two broad intestinal caeca which stain with neutral red

and usually have several irregular constrictions. The position of the end of these

caeca posterior to the ventral sucker varies with the state of contraction, but they

usually extend about half-way between the ventral sucker and the posterior end

of the body.

Two pairs of prominent gland cells lie in front of, and dorsal to, the anterior

half of the ventral sucker. Ina greatly extended specimen, these cells are entirely

anterior to the acetabulum, but in a contracted state they come to lie beside and

behind it; their changing position is a very conspicuous feature of a cercaria

undergoing contraction and extension. The cells appear granular and stain deeply

with neutral red used intra-vitally, though their nuclei and the distal part of their

ducts do not take up this stain. Other intra-vitam stains used were Orange G.,

which stained neither the ducts nor the glands; Nile Blue Sulphate, which stained

the glands, leaving the ducts unstained ; and Methylene Blue which stained neither

the ducts nor the glands. Fixed specimens were stained with acetic acid alum

carmine, Delafield’s haematoxylin, thionin, alum carmine and Mallory’s triple stain,

Toy

iat

TRG

AWS

8 ¥ Mis

Rie

s _

Fig. 4-5, C. tetradena—4, general appearance of cercaria; 5, sporocyst.

Outline of 4 drawn with camera lucida, details freehand; fig. 5, drawn with

camera lucida from Canada balsam mount.

but none of these, except Mallory, stained either glands or ducts, the last-named

colouring the gland cells a deep maroon and the rest of the body blue.

The genital primordium or posterior cell mass stains deeply with nuclear

stains, and consists of a closely packed mass of cells in which no differentiation

can be observed. It lies immediately in front of the excretory bladder. The

nervous system is represented by a faint bridge of tissue crossing the oesophagus

immediately posterior to the. pharynx.

The stem of the longifurcate tail (fig. 3) contains eleven pairs of caudal

bodies, irregular in shape and connected with the walls of the tail by thin elastic

strands of tissue. These bodies are capable of considerable freedom of movement

within the hollow tail-system, the last pair slipping down as far as the base of

the furcae. Muscle fibres are arranged chiefly longitudinally and diagonally in

the tail stem.

232

The bladder, when fully distended, is seen to consist of a central stalk-like

portion, from either side of which a larger, round part originates (fig. 2). Into

the latter drains a large main collecting duct, which passes forward without form-

ing loops to the mid-region of the ventral sucker. Here it receives from the

anterior part of the body a tubule with which are connected two pairs of flame

cells, the members of the anterior pair being situated just anterior to, and just

posterior to, the pharynx respectively, while the more posterior pair is situated

in the region of the first pair of penetration glands. The main collecting duct

also receives from the posterior part of the body and from the tail-stem a tubule

bearing three pairs of flame-cells, the first just in front of the ends of the caeca,

the second at the level of the bladder, and the third pair from each side in the

tail (fig. 3), the actual flame-cells being distributed at the levels of the fourth

and ninth, and the sixth and tenth caudal bodies. The flame-cell formula is thus

2((2+2) + (242+ [2])] = 20.

From the posterior side of the central portion of the excretory bladder arises

a large duct which, after first dividing at the junction of the body and tail to form

an island of Cort, re-unites and passes down the centre of the tail stem between

the two finer tubules which bear the flame cells. At the origin of the furcae

the duct divides, a branch passing along either furca to open at the tips.

We have not been successful in our attempts to obtain the metacercaria stage.

Experimental infections have been attempted with the fish, Gambusta affinis and

Carassius auratus; tadpoles (Lymnodynastes spp.); the molluscs usually found

in the vicinity of Plotiopsis, namely, Amerianna spp., Lumnaea lessoni and Cor-

biculina angasi, as well as uninfected Plotiopsis tatei; also with leeches (Glossi-

bhonia sp.), freshwater shrimps (Peratya australiensis), and larvae of dragon-

flies and mosquitoes,

SPOROCYST STAGE

Upon a dissection of a host Plotiopsis, sporocysts are found in great num-

bers, packed chiefly in the liver, but a few are to be found among the other organs.

The sporocysts (fig. 5) are colourless, long, tubular, greatly coiled and twisted

and difficult to unravel without breaking. The longest measured was 5 mm. in

length; the breadth is variable, the ends frequently being slightly wider than the

rest of the sporocyst. The walls are covered by a very thin, delicate cuticle, with

sparsely distributed cells, but showing considerable thickening at either end. One

end is bluntly rounded, the other usually, though not invariably, more pointed,

often with a small knob at its apex. Occasionally a spherical swelling part way

along the tube was observed, packed with germ-balls and more than twice the

diameter of the tube. The sporocysts may contain, according to age, all stages

from early cleavage and morula-like germ-balls to fully-formed cercariae, ready

to emerge; or germ-balls of varied sizes only, or may be packed with cercariae all

nearly mature. From sections the germ-balls appear to proliferate from the walls

of the sporocyst, and may be found anywhere along its length. A birthpore

could not be seen, and no movement, apart from that caused by cercariae within

the lumen of the sporocyst, was observed.

RELATIONSHIPS

C. tetradena belongs to Miller’s group of pharyngeal, longifurcate distome

cercariae. Sewell (1922) divided the known forked-tailed cercariae into three

main groups. C. tetradena falls into his Group 2, though it cannot be allocated to

any of his subsidiary “Pahila,” “Emarginata,” “Dusra” or “Baiswan” groups.

Wesenberg-Lund (1934) allotted his 18 Danish species to seven groups, which

include No. 5 (“Pro-alaria group”) with penetration glands behind the ventral

sucker, and No. 6 (“Strigea group”) with penetration glands before the ventral

sucker. To this latter group our species belongs. The “Strigea group” cannot,

233

however, include only larval forms belonging to the genus Strigea, since Dubois

(1938) stated that the cercariae of Cotylurus appeared to be characterised by the

possession of four pre-acetabular gland cells while the presence of an excretory

commissure in front of the ventral sucker constituted a second feature possessed

by these larvae, the cercaria of C. communis (Hughes) (= C. michiganensis

Haitsma) being an exception.

Into this “Cotylurus’ group, as defined by Dubois, fall five cercariae rather

closely resembling our species with regard to the position of the flame-cells and

the two pairs of pre-acetabular gland cells, but readily distinguishable from them

by the presence of the pre-acetabular excretory commissure, and differing in other

minor features. These are C. douglasi Cort 1917; C. Cotylurt flabelliformis

(Faust); C. Cotylurt cornuti (Rudolphi); and C, helvetica XXXIV, all with

20 flame cells as in our form, and C. fissicauda (La Val.) with 18 flame cells.

A further group may be distinguished from our species, though bearing some

resemblance to the latter. This group possesses four pre-acetabular gland cells,

but, unlike our cercaria, has a post-acetabular excretory commissure; it comprises

C. helvetica XIV and C. helvetica XX XIX, each with 24 flame cells, and C. ranae

Cort and Brackett 1938, with 20 flame cells, the arrangement of which in C. ranae

differs fundamentally from the pattern seen in our cercaria, as there are two

groups each of three flame cells high in the tail and an unpaired flame cell in the

anterior part of the body. ,

C. tenuis Miller 1923, and C. sudanensis 7 Archibald and Marshall 1932,

possess four pre-acetabular penetration glands, but the proportions of these and

of the other body organs, as well as the arrangement and number of flame cells,

differ greatly from those of C. tetradena.

Cort and Brackett (1938) described two species of furcocercariae from

Stagnicola, which closely resemble each other and to which they gave the names

of C. macradena and C. micradena, These differ from one another mainly in the

relative sizes of the penetration glands, which are unusually large in C. macradena

and very small in C. micradena, The latter is also smaller in all its measurements.

The other distinguishing feature is the position of the flame cells in the tail-stem ;

in C. macradena they are in a group near the junction of body and tail, while in

C. micradena the flame-cells of the tail-stem are distributed at about regular

intervals in its anterior half. Both cercariae have the posterior pair of gland cells

displaced to a position dorso-posterior to the acetabulum. The gland cells of

C. tetradena are intermediate in size between those of the two cercariae just men-

tioned. Apart from the position of the posterior pair of gland cells and their

size, C. micradena and C. tetradena resemble each other very closely. The excre-

tory systems are identical with respect to both formula and actual position of

flame cells in relation to the other organs; the main collecting duct of both extends

to the midregion of the ventral sucker; a patch of cilia is found in the posterior

collecting tubule at the same level in each; the bladders are of the same shape and

size. The only apparent difference is that the flame cells of the tail-stem are

placed relatively further back in C. tetradena, Spination and digestive system are

very similar. The absence of caudal bodies in C. micradena is a distinguishing

characteristic. Measurements of C. micradena (body length 154y, body breadth

AOp, tail-stem length 268, furca length 2332) reveal that, though the body is of

approximately equal size to that of C. tetradena, the tail is considerably larger.

In 1940 Olivier completed the life-cycle of C. micradena, proving it to be

the larva of a diplostome, Diplostomum micradenum, which he obtained experi-

mentally from domestic pigeons. The metacercaria was found in tadpoles. As

mentioned above, we were unable to recover metacercaria of C, tetradena from

tadpoles, using Lymnodynastes sp. Possibly another species of tadpole may be

the natural intermediate host of our larva.

234

Cercaria (Furcocercaria) notopalae n. sp.

Fig. 6-16

A large furcocercaria, Cercaria notopalae, has been found on several occasions

during examination of the mollusc, Notopala hanleyi, for larval trematodes. This

gastropod has been collected on six separate occasions, once at Renmark (April

1939), once at Morgan (April 1942), and at Swan Reach in December 1943,

December 1944, February 1945 and May 1945. The parasite has been emitted

from only six out of the total number of 1,757 of these gastropods collected.

approximately a 0°3% infection. It has not been found in any other species

of mollusc.

Few cercariae are emitted each day, but these are conspicuous because of their

large size and the clumsy movements with which they swim. As they can encyst

back into the primary molluscan host, it was found advisable to remove them,

upon emergence, to another vessel for study of live material. The cercariae appear

during the morning in slightly increasing numbers until midday ; a few are emitted

juring the afternoon, but apparently none at night. They live for about 48 hours.

The swimming habits of C. notopalae are highly characteristic. The descrip-

tion which Komiya (1939, 360) gives of the activity of the cercaria of Para-

coenogonimus ovatus Katsurada applies almost exactly to our species. The cer-

caria hangs in the water with the body at an angle of about 90° to the bent tail

(fig. 13), and the furcae spread. The tail is bent at about its proximal third. In this

position the cercaria very gradually sinks. As a result of contact during the rest~

ing stage, or upon shaking the water, or after sinking for some minutes undis-

turbed, the cercariae may swim rapidly upwards, tail-first, with awkward jerky

movements, so as to maintain its floating position. It rarely moves in this rapid

fashion for more than a few seconds at a time.

Cercariae were fixed by the addition of an equal quantity of boiling 10%

formalin to the water in which they were swimming, and were measured from a

water mount, using coverslip pressure only sufficient to keep the cercariae in one

plane without distortion. The averages in micra, of ten measurements, fol-

lowed by the range (in brackets) are as follows: body length, 270 (229-328) ;

breadth at widest part, 133 (114-155) ; tail stem length, 423 (393-451), breadth

at widest part, 41 (32-57); furca length, 294 (270-377), breadth at widest part,

42 (32-57); distance of junction of tail from posterior border of body, 32 (27-

37). The tail stem is widest distally, becoming somewhat narrowed at its junction

with the body.

The body of the cercaria is clear and pear-sharped. There are no special

spines at the mouth. Following a circumoral spineless area (fig. 6) is a cap, over

the anterior organ, of about nine rows of recurved, thorn-like spines (fig. 15),

diminishing in size from before backwards. The largest are about 2-4 long and

2u broad at the base. The remainder of the body is beset with smaller, straight

spines about 1-6 long, not arranged in any definite order. Along each side of

the tail stem, and of either furca, is a single row of similar fine, backwardly-

directed spines.

The anterior organ is protrusible and can assume either of the positions

shown in fig. 6 and 9. Notrace of a ventral sucker was observed, even in heavily

stained preparations. The ventral surface is slightly concave as described for

C. Paracoenogonimi ovatt,

Fig. 6-9, C. notopalae—6, body, showing spination, digestive system, glands,

nervous system, genital primordium; 7, sporocyst; 8, tail; 9, excretory system of

body. Fig. 6 and 8 drawn with camera lucida from preserved specimens; fig. 9

drawn with camera lucida from live mount.

235

7 8 7 § 07%

—- te, 2 40"

nies aS

7] Fs ry

Fs ve

ee Ad fof

of * — 0900,

wt ook oe pe

by %

Dae" o0% of

acc see

{5 ¢

Ep SS:

Piet IOS

236

The subterminal mouth is followed by a short pre-pharynx, a stout muscular

pharynx, a short oesophagus, which varies in diameter with the state of contrac-

tion, and two wide caeca, which stain faintly with intra-vital neutral red. In a

living specimen the caeca appear quite clear, and no cell-boundaries could be dis-

tinguished as described in C. tatez (Johnston and Angel, 1940, 336). The caeca

are typically arranged in two to three tortuous curves, and partially segmented by

numerous transverse constrictions,

Most of the body is occupied by the very numerous gland cells which are

inconspicuous in an unstained specimen. It was unfortunately necessary to study

the glands almost entirely in preserved material. The method found most useful

was to stain the preserved cercariae lightly with neutral red or with methylene

blue and neutral red together, and examine in a water mount as for study of live

material. This technique prevented the shrinking and brittleness incurred in

using clearing agents, the worms being flat enough to render the latter unnecessary.

Other stains used on preserved material were Mallory’s triple stain, which stained

all gland cells orange; acetic acid alum carmine, which stained their nuclei only ;

and Delafield’s haematoxylin and carmine, each staining the nuclei darkly and

some of the anterior glands faintly,

On either side of the anterior organ is a small group of gland-like organs

which in live material stain very darkly with neutral red. These may be small

glands, homologous with the slender head-glands which Komiya (p. 362) described

as present in C. Paracoenogonims ovati; or they may possibly be ducts of some of

the other glands, though no connections with other cells could be traced, These

glands could not be distinguished at all in preserved material.

Neutral red used as above for differentiation in preserved cercariae indicates

three types of unicellular glands (fig. 6). The first group, situated on either side

of and behind the oesophagus, remains completely colourless. It was these glands

that stained lightly with carmine. In weak methylene blue or neutral red solution,

they appear completely colourless and faintly granular with clear, unstained, -

refractive nuclei. A darkly staining mass on either side of the prepharynx within

the anterior organ may represent the ducts of these unstained glands, or may be

a further group of “head-glands,” like those of C. Paracoenogonimi ovati, As in

the latter, half of the remaining unicellular glands in C. motopalae stain with

neutral red, while the other half remain colourless, though their nuclei become

stained. These two types of cutaneous or cystogenous glands appear to have

short ducts leading to the surface of the body, since in a preserved specimen

numerous small round refractive drops of exudate may be sometimes found at

the surface.

The posterior cell mass or genital primordium, which stains deeply with

nuclear stains, has an irregular but definite shape and is situated just anterior

to the excretory bladder (fig. 6). A strand of exceedingly fine fibres lying across

the oesophagus apparently represents the nervous system.

The large muscular tail (fig. 8) is attached to the body not terminally but

dorsally, as is usual in this type of cercaria (fig. 12). There are no caudal bodies.

The furcae are finless. There are many muscular fibres arranged obliquely in

the tail-stem, tending to become more longitudinal at its distal extremity. A

smaller number of fine transverse fibres is also present, together with some longi-

tudinal fibres, the latter mainly around the central canal of the tail stem. Oblique

fibres are found in the furcae. Longitudinal fibres, which pass from the tail-stem

to the furcae, would control the angle which the latter maintain with the former.

Mallory stains the tail a deep blue, due to its muscular character. Nile-blue

sulphate, which stains parenchyma blue (Talbot, 1936), colours the tail of

C. notopalde blue when used intravitally.

237

From each lateral lobe of the bladder (fig. 9) arises a main collecting duct

which passes anteriorly, following the curve of the corresponding caecum, At the

level of the origin of the caeca, the two ducts curve back and inwards over the

caeca and fuse in the midline. From the point of fusion arises a duct which,

passing posteriorly, divides about half-way back to the bladder into two branches,

each of which enters the bladder just anterior to the lateral lobes. At the region

where the two main collecting canals begin to curve towards the midline, each

gives off a short, blindly-ending protuberance which in one specimen was seen to

vary as shown in fig. 16. These blindly-ending ducts and the central forked duct

are equivalent to those which, in the larva of Paracoenogonimus ovatus, Komiya

terms “reserve canals.” Refractory granules, as described for C. tatet, were not

seen in these canals,

Just posterior to the short, blind protuberance, the main collecting duct gives

off a secondary duct which passes posteriorly and about half-way back to the

bladder divides into two tertiary ducts; one of these passes forwards and drains

three capillaries, each with a group of three flame-cells; the other passes pos-

teriorly, draining the capillaries from two further groups, each of three flame-

cells, and then passes into the tail at the side of the central canal, where it drains

three further flame-cells (fig. 8-9). The excretory formula is hence 2[(3 + 3 + 3)

+ (3 +3 +4 [3] )] = 36.

The central canal of the tail is connected with the posterior lobe of the bladder

by two branches, which surround an island of Cort; the canal bifurcates at the

distal end of the tail-stem, a branch passing to either furca to open at its tip. The

bladder has a dorsal excretory pore as indicated in fig. 9.

Throughout the body of the cercaria are many small round refractory bodies

(fig. 9, showing those of the right-hand side) arranged in groups, clusters or

singly. Though these appear to have no connection with the canals of the excre-

tory system, they are probably rudiments of the secondary excretory system.

Using immature cercariae taken from living sporocysts, Komiya was able to

record very fully the development of the excretory system in the cercaria of

P, ovatus. Though it has not been possible to follow the development as fully in

the case of C. notopalae because of the lack of live material, those stages observed

indicate that the main tubules arise in the same way as in the larva of P. ovatus.

An almost mature larva, taken from a sporocyst when the host mollusc had died,

was studied in more detail; its excretory system is shown in fig. 10. The refrac-

tory granules are present from a very early stage.

SPoROCYST

Upon dissection of a Notopala which had been emitting C. notopalae, sporo-

cysts were found abundantly in the liver. They are clear, faintly grey, cylindrical,

with round ends, much coiled and twisted. The length and breadth are variable:

one long specimen, unpreserved, measured 6 mm. Sporocysts obtained from a

snail which had been dead only a few hours were found to be executing slow

coiling and writhing movements, very apparent under a low-power microscope.

This was due to active movement on the part of the sporocyst and not to move-

ment within the sporocyst of cercariae, which somtimes cause a similar effect.

Some of the sporocysts have a banded appearance (fig. 7 ) like those of C. tatei;

apparently this is due to bands of transverse muscle fibres. The sporocyst has

considerable power of lengthening and shortening. All stages from germballs to

mature cercariae are found within a single sporocyst. A birthpore was not seen.

METACERCARIA

Cercaria notopalae has been found experimentally to encyst in the molluscs,

Limnaea lessoni, Amerianna pyramidata and Notopala hanleyi, In every Notopala

238

dissected for sporocysts, cysts of our parasite as a natural infection have been

discovered. Since Notopala hanleyi is usually found in deeper water along the

river banks and Amerianna and Limnaea chiefly in swamps, the latter are pro-

bably rarely infected in nature. No cysts were recovered from the fish, Gambusta

affinis, after exposure to infection with C. notopalae.

15 4 \

Fig. 10-16, C. notopalae—10, immature cercaria; 11, cyst; 12, showing dorsal

attachment of tail; 13, floating position in a drop of water, without coverslip;

14, cysts im situ; 15, spine from anterior organ; 16, part of excretory system,

showing variation. Fig. 10, 14, 15 and 16 drawn freehand from life; fig. 11-12

drawn with camera lucida from preserved material; fig. 13 drawn with camera

lucida from life.

239

The clear spherical cysts are conspicuous in the darker surrounding tissue

(fig. 14) and are found usually in the denser tissues of the molluscs, particularly

the mantle. The cyst wall is very thick (fig. 11), formed of two layers, an inner

denser and an outer lighter layer, similar to those described by Ciurea (1933,

156-159, fig. 14, 15, 16, 17) for Prohemistomulum circulare from fish, though

our larva lacked the pigment so characteristic of the former. Prohemistomulum

circulare, first recorded as the metacercaria of Opisthorchis felineus by Askanazy

(1905), was proved to be the larva of Paracoenogonimus ovatus by Katsurada

(1914), by the feeding of infected fish to mice, and this experiment was confirmed

in 1939 by Komiya, with further details of the life-history. Szidat (1933), in

describing C. Monostomi viviparae, which, like C. notopalae, encysts in the

mantle of the molluscan first intermediate host, included a photograph (fig. 6) of

the cysts in situ in the mantle, and these bear a striking resemblance to the cysts

of C. notopalae.

The dimensions of ten preserved specimens of C. notopalae in micta,

averaged, are: diameter of cyst (excluding cyst wall), 150 (140-162) ; thickness

of cyst wall, 77 (63-86).

In a metacercaria only three weeks old, the holdfast is well developed and

occupies a large proportion of the space. There is no sign of a ventral sucker.

The anterior organ is apparent and the course of the main excretory ducts is

indicated by the small granules within them. Refactory granules of larger size

as described for the cercaria are present. No further details can be seen in the

preserved, encysted metacercaria, which is a small round worm, no longer than

the inner diameter of the cyst.

RELATIONSHIPS

Cercaria notopalae belongs to Group 3 in Sewell’s (1922) classification of

furcocercariae, though it does not resemble members of either of the subsidiary

“Viwax” or “Tetis”’ groups which he established. The “Vivax’ group was

characterised by the presence of a rudimentary ventral sucker, furcal finfolds

and 30 flame-cells, and comprised C. vivax Sons. 1892, C. indica XV and C. indica

LVIII; while the “Tetis” group with neither ventral sucker nor furcal fins, and

with only 14 flame-cells, included a single form, C. indica XX XIII. Miller (1923)

divided his somewhat artificial group of pharyngeal, longifurcate, monostome

cercariae into three subsidiary groups. He followed Sewell’s classification for his

first two—“Vivax”’ and “Tetis” groups—adding to the former C. leptoderma

Faust 1922; but the third group, which he called the “Rhabdocaeca” group, con-

tained three forms only very distantly related to the “Vivas” and “Tetis” groups.

Szidat (1933) described three new species of monostome furcocercaria, namely,

C, balthica and C. curonensis (= larva of Cyathocotyloides curonensis) which he

allocated to Sewell’s “Tetis” subgroup, and C. Monostomi viviparae (== larva

of Linstowiella vivipara) for which he created a new subgroup, characterised by

the possession of 24 flame-cells. This cercaria also lacked a ventral sucker and

furcal fins, and possessed very numerous glands. To this last-named cercaria,

C. notopalae bears a close resemblance, even though the number of flame-cells is

different. Wesenberg-Lund (1934) listed three cercariae—his “Cercaria vivax,”

Cercaria sp. (which he described as closely resembling his C. vivax, although it

possessed no furcal fins), and Cercaria No. 4 Petersen—which he grouped to-

gether in the “Vivax” group. Komiya (1937), in describing the life-cycle of

C. Paracoenogonimi ovati, recorded the larva as a forked-tailed, monostome cer-

caria without comparing it with similar forms already described.

Dubois (1938) claimed that all cercariae possessing an excretory system

“comprising four lateral collecting ducts: two external, joined together by an

anterior commissure, and two internal, converging and fusing into a median canal

which meets the commissure in its middle,” were members of his superfamily

240

Cyathocotylides. This definition includes all cercariae placed by earlier authors

in the “Viwarx,” “Tetis’ and “Vivipara’ subgroups, and also our larva, C. noto-

palae. The cercariae of Miller’s “Rhabdocaeca”’ group belong, not to the

Cyathocotylides but to Dubois’ superfamily Strigeides.

Dubois classified the Cyathocotylid cercariae further into five groups as

follows:

1 “Vivax”’ group as defined by Sewell; Dubois including in this C, indica XV,

C. dorsocauda Tub. 1928, C. vivax Wes.-Lund. 1934, C. indica LVI

(although the last has no trace of a ventral sucker), as well as C. vivax Sons.

1892 and Dicranocercaria utriculata Lutz 1934, in which the number of flame-

cells is unknown.

2 “Vivipara’ group as defined by Szidat; including only C. Monostomi vivi-

parae.

3 “Tetis’ group as defined by Sewell, comprising C. indica XX XIII, C. curonen-

sis, C. balthica and C. Cyathocotylis graviert Mathias 1935 (the larva of

Cyathocotyle graviert).

4 “Leptoderme’ group, containing only C. leptoderma, characterised by the

possession of an excretory system with a formula 2[(3 +3 +3) + (3+3

+ [3] )] = 36, no ventral suckers, no fins, spines, only on the anterior organ.

and a brevifurcate tail as defined by Miller, 1.e., the furcae are less than one-

half the length of the tail stem.

5 “Taviane’ group, comprising only C. tauiana, with an excretory formula of

2[2+2+2] =12 flame-cells, none of which are in the tail, no ventral

sucker, no fins on the furcae, and apparently no histolytic glands.

C. vivax Sons, 1894 (nec. Sons. 1892), which is probably the larva of Szidatia

joyeuxi, is considered by Dubois as constituting a possible sixth subgroup; the

flame-cell number is at least 14, but the arrangemént of those observed (Dubois’

Monograph, fig. 335) differs fundamentally from all other Cyathocotylid cercariae.

Cercariae of the Cyathocotylid type not mentioned by Dubois include

Cercaria sp. Wes.-Lund 1934 and Cercaria No. 4 Petersen (Wesenberg-Lund

1934, 128-133), the descriptions of which are too inadequate to make possible

further comparisons; C. gigantosoma Faust (1926, 105-106), which its author

claimed had certain affinities with the “Vivax” group, but which is probably a

member of the Strigeides; the cercaria mentioned by Leiper and Atkinson (1915)

is also a possible addition to the “Vivax”’ group; C. tate: Johnston and Angel

1940, which resembles members of the “Vivaz’’ group except that the excretory

system comprises 36 flame-cells; C. kentuckiensis Cable (1935) which resembles

the “Vivax” group except that it possesses 34 flame-cells; and C. Paracoenogonimi

ovati, which resembles the “Vivipara’ group very closely, except that the flame-

cell number of the former is 36, and of the latter 24,

Cercaria notopalae appears to have closer affinities with the “Viwvipara” group

and with C. Paracoenogonimi ovati than with any other group of Cyathocotylid

cercariae, A classification based wholly on the number of flame-cells would relate

our cercaria closely to C. tatei and C. leptoderma; but in the latter, the very short

furcae, the position of the glands in the anterior third of the body only, the

aspinose condition of the body, the nature of the intestinal cells, and the larger

size, differentiate sharply between the two larvae; while in the case of C. tate,

the arrangement of the glands, the presence of a rudimentary ventral sucker and

of furcal fins, and the character of the intestinal cells distinguish the two, even

though they are of similar dimensions. Moreover, C. tafei encysts in fish, while

C. notopalae encysts in molluscs. One point of resemblance between the two is

the development of C. tatet in a sporocyst with bands of muscle such as are

241

possessed by C. notopalae, although in the latter the occurrence and distribution

of such bands are less regular.

C. notopalae resembles C. Paracoenogonimi ovati in the number, distribution

and nature of the gland-cells; in the character and arrangement of the spines on

both body and tail; in swimming habits; in the number and arrangement of the

tubules and flame-cells of the excretory system—the two are identical; in the

absence of furcal fins and ventral sucker; in the position of the sporocysts in the

liver of the host mollusc; and in size, C. Paracoenogonimi ovati being slightly

larger (body length = 0°335 mm., tail stem == 0°515 mm.. furca = 0-337). The

first intermediate hosts are closely related molluscs—Vivipara vivipara for the

one, Notopala hanleyi for the other. The larvae differ mainly in the presence of

sensory filaments on the tail-stem of C. Paracoenogonimi ovatt, and their absence

from the Australian form; and in the choice of second intermediate host—

molluscs for C. notopalae, fishes for the other species.

Our larva resembles C. Monostomi viviparae in the large number of glands,

absence of furcal fins and ventral sucker, the very similar appearance of the cysts

which are comparable in size (cyst wall of C. Monostonu viviparae 0-04 mm.,

cavity of cyst 0°19 mm.) and in the position of the sporocysts in the liver of the

mollusc. Both develop in related molluses—Notopala and Vivipara vivipara

respectively. The two larvae are of almost identical size, measurements of

C. Monostomi viviparae indicating that its body length is 0°22 mm.; tail stem

0°42 mm., furca 0-30 mm. The latter cercaria, however, possess sensory filaments

on the tail-stem and apparently no spines, and has a smaller number of flame-cells,

which are arranged, nevertheless, in the same fundamental pattern, with

five groups in the body, the formula being probably [2 (2+2+ 2+2+1

+ [3] )] = 24. The most striking resemblance between the two forms is that

both encyst back into the molluscan host, the cysts in each case being found in the

mantle. No other reference to Cyathocotylid cercariae encysting in molluscs has

been noticed by us, apart from the discovery by Faust 1921, of “Tetracotyliform

larvae” in the testes of Vivipara lapillorum, which, when fed to ducks, developed

into Cyathocotyle orientalis, and a suggestion made by Faust (1930) concerning

C. tauiana, viz., “no histolytic glands are present. It seems likely, therefore, that

the larva metamorphoses into the next stage within the same molluscan host.”

However, Faust and Tang (1938) stated that it seemed probable that all Cyatho-

cotylids had a similar life-cycle; there was an anacetabular, forked-tailed cer-

cariae which developed in fresh-water molluscs, and on emergence invaded the

tissues of fresh-water fish where they underwent metamorphosis into a Pro-

hemistomum. type of metacercaria; when fishes infected with these metacercariae

were ingested by reptiles, birds or mammals, they developed into adult worms in

these, their definite hosts. This statement holds for all Cyathocotylids whose

life-history is known, except Linstowiella vivipara. In the latter, the mollusc

Vwipara vivipara, is the second, as well as the first intermediate host, and the

adult is a parasite in the intestine of Sterna paradisea.

Dubois considers that all of the subgroups “Vivax” and “Vivipara” are larvae

of his subfamily Prohemistominae, since all adults developed from these larvae

up to the time of his monograph belonged to genera within this group. Similarly,

cercariae of the “Tetis” group are probably larvae of Dubois’ subfamily Cyatho-

cotylinae. The adult of C. notopalae will presumably be a member of the Pro-

hemistominae, closely related to the genera Linstowiella and Paracoenogonimus,

parasitic in a mollusc-eating bird, e.g., one of the native ducks.

SUMMARY

1 Cercaria (Furcocercaria) tetradena, a new species of Strigeid larva from

Plotiopsis tatei, from the River Murray, is a longifurcate, distome cercaria,

242

possessing four pre-acetabular penetration glands, but without an excretory com-

missure. The adult may belong to the genera Diplostomum, Cotylurus or Strigea.

2 Cercaria (Furcocercaria) notopalae, a new species of Cyathocotylid larva

from Notopala hanleyi, also from the River Murray, 1s a large, anacetabular furco-

cercaria which encysts in molluscs and is closely related to the larvae of the genera

Linstowiella and Paracoenogonimus,

Our thanks are due to Messrs. G. G., Fred and Bryce Jaensch, and L. Ellis, of

Tailem Bend, Murray River, for assistance in gathering Plotiopsis tatei; and to

our colleagues, particularly Miss P. M. Mawson, for helping collect Notopala

hanleyi, which is not found at Tailem Bend. The work was carried out under

the terms of the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

LITERATURE

Azim, M. A. 1932 Z. f. Parasitenk., 5, 432-436

Brown, F. J. 1926 Parasitol., 18, 21-34

Caste, R. M. 1935 Jour. Parasitol., 21, 441

Crurea, I. 1933 Arch. roumaines Pathol. exper. Microbiol., 3, 5-134

Corr, W. W., and Brackett, S. 1938 Jour. Parasitol., 24, (3), 263-271

Cort, W. W., and Brackett, S. 1938 Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc., 57, (3),

274-281

Cort, W. W., and Brooxs, S. T. 1928 Trans. Amer, Micr. Soc., 47, 179-221

Dusors G. 1929 Bull. Soc. Neuchat. Sci. Nat., 53, 14-32

Duszors, G. 1938 Monogr. Strigeida. Mem. Soc. Neuchat. Sci. Nat., 6, 535 pp.

Faust, E. C. 1921 Jour. Parasitol., 8, 78-85

Faust, E. C. 1922 Parasitol, 14, 248-267

Faust, E. C. 1926 Parasitol., 18, 101-127

Faust, E. C. 1930 Parasitol., 22, 145-154

Faust, E. C., and Tane, C.C. 1938 Livro Jub. Lauro Travassos, Rio Janeiro,

157-168

Jounston, T. H., and Ancer, L. M. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64, (2),

334-339

Karsurapa, F. 1914 Zentr. Bakt., 1, Orig., 13, 304-314

Komiya, Y. 1939 Z. f. Parasitenk., 10, 340-385

Leper, R. T., and Atkinson, E. L. 1915 Brit. Med. Jour., 201-203

Lutz, A. 1934 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz, 27, 449-476

Lutz, A. 1935 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz, 30, 157-168

Marutas, P. 1935 C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, 200, 1786-1788 (not available)

Mitter, H. M. 1926 Illinois Biol. Monogr., 10, (3), 1-112

Outvier, L. 1940 Jour. Parasitol., 26, 447-478

Ottvier, L., and Cort, W. W. 1941 Jour. Parasitol., 27, 343-346

Sewett, R. B. S. 1922 Ind. Jour. Med. Res., 10, (Suppl. No.), 370 pp.

Szipar, L. 1933 Z. f. Parasitenk., 5, 443-459

Tarsor, S. B. 1936 Amer. Jour. Hyg., 23, (2), 372-384

Tusancut, M. A. 1928 Philippine Jour. Sci., 36, 37-54

Wesenperc-Lunp, C. 1934 Denk. Kgl. Dansk Vidensk. Selsk. Skr. Natur.

Math. Afd., 9 Raekke, 3, 223 pp.

CAPILLARITD NEMATODES FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN

FISH AND BIRDS

BY T. HARVEY JOHNSTON AND PATRICIA M. MAWSON (READ 9 AUGUST 1945)

Summary

The genus Capillaria is relatively poor in characters of taxonomic value, and though numerous

species have been named, the descriptions of many are insufficient. In the present paper the main

taxonomic features considered are:- the ratio between the regions of the body, and the characters of

the spicule, spicule sheath, bursa, vulva and eggs. Measurements given for eggs have been based on

those nearest the vulva, since those further removed may show considerable variation in size and

form.

243

CAPILLARIID NEMATODES FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIAN FISH AND BIRDS

By T. Harvey Jounston and Patricia M. MAwson

[Read 9 August 1945]

The genus Capillaria is relatively poor in characters of taxonomic value,

and though numerous species have been named, the descriptions of many are

insufficient. In the present paper the main taxonomic features considered are:—

the ratio between the regions of the body, and the characters of the spicule,

spicule sheath, bursa, vulva and eggs. Measurements given for eggs have been

based on those nearest the vulva, since those further removed may show consider-

able variation in size and form.

Many helpful figures and descriptions were found in the papers published

by Freitas and Lent (1935) and Heinze 1933) on species from fish; and Cram

(1936), as well as Freitas and Almeida (1935) on species from birds. Types

are being deposited in the South Australian Museum.

We desire to acknowledge our indebtedness to Messrs. H. M. Hale, K.

Sheard, H. M. Cooper, S. Hurcombe, and E. J. Hanka for forwarding viscera

from fish; Messrs. G. G., F., and B. Jaensch and L. Ellis for generous assistance

for many years in obtaining material from the Tailem Bend region of the River

Murray ; and to the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

Host-ParAsite List

Fisa

CALLIONYMUS CALAUROPOMUS Richardson—St. Vincent Gulf, Capillaria cooperi

n. sp.

LAtTRiporsis ForsTert Castln—Kangaroo Island, Capillaria latridopsis, n. sp.

CANTHERINES HIPPOCREPIS—-Glenelg, Capillaria cooperi n. sp.

APTYCHOTREMA BANKSII Mull, and Henle (Rhinobatus phillipi of Waite’s Hand-

book of the Fishes of South Australia)—-Rapid Bay, Capillaria rhinobati n. sp.

Birns (all from the Tailem Bend district, Murray River)

PHALACROCORAX CARBO Linn——Capillaria jaenschi n. sp.

PHALACROCORAX SULCIROsTRIS Brandt—Capillaria jaenschi n. sp.

PHALACROCORAX MELANOLEUCAS Vieill—Capillaria jaenschi n. sp.

PHALACROCORAX FUSCESCENS Vieill—Capillaria jaenschi n. sp.

PELECANUS CONSPICILLATUS Temm.—Capillaria jaenschi n. sp.

LARUS NOVAEHOLLANDIAE Stephens-—-Capillaria jaenschi n. sp.

CHLIDONIAS LEUCOPAREIA Temm.—Capillaria jaenschi n. sp.

CHENOPSIS ATRATA Lath —Capuillaria ellisi n. sp.

PoMATOSTOMUS SUPERCILIOSUS Vig. and Horsf.—Capillaria pomatostomi n. sp.

GRALLINA CYANOLEUCA Lath——Capillaria grailinae n. sp.

Capillaria rhinobati n. sp.

Fig. 1-3

From Aptychotrema banksii, from Rapid Bay, collected by H. M. Cooper.

The material consists of one broken male worm, a whole female, and several parts

of females. The body bears ventrally a bacillary band which extends throughout

the length of the body.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (2), 30 November 1945

244

The single complete female specimen is 20°4 mm. in length, with its oeso-

phageal region 6°5 mm. long, or one-third of the body length. The posterior end

terminates abruptly, and the anus is almost terminal. The body width at the

anterior end is 7p; at the base of the oesophagus 52u; and at the widest part of

the worm &0u.

The vulva is just posterior to the oesophagus, and its position is made con-

spicuous by a flap formed by the intrusion of the end of the vagina. Eggs are

Fig. 1-8

Fig. 1-3—Capillavia rhinobati: 1, vulvar region; 2, egg; 3, male tail. Fig. 4-6

—Capillaria latridopsis: 4, anterior end of female; 5, egg; 6, male tail. Fig. 7-8—

Capillaria cooperi: 7, vulvar region; 8, male tail. Fig. 2, 3, 5 and 7 to same scale:

fig. 6 and 8 to same scale.

present in larger numbers than is usual in members of this genus; they are thin-

shelled and measure 19p by 63p.

The male specimen present is incomplete, consisting of an intestinal region

13-7 mm. long with a maximum width of 60% and part of the oesophageal region

(2°4 mm. in length) with a width of 54« at the base of the oesophagus. The

245

spicule is "16 mm. long. A small bursa, containing five lobes of hypodermis, is

present. The spicule sheath is not extruded, and spines are not discernible.

The appearance of the egg of this species is somewhat like that of C. helenae

Layman 1930, and C. tomentosa (Dujardin). The species differs from the latter

in having a smooth egg-shell, and from the former in total length and in the length

of the spicules.

Capillaria latridopsis n. sp.

Fig, 4-6

From Latridopsis forsteri, Kangaroo Island, colllected by S. Hurcombe. The

material consists of a male and a female, both incomplete. The male piece, whose

head is missing, measures 6-7 mm. long, of which the intestinal region occupies

2°38 mm. The female piece is 10-2 mm, in length and its oesophageal region

9-4 mm. The species is obviously one in which the length of the anterior end

greatly exceeds that of the posterior. The configuration of the anterior end of

the female is shown in fig, 4.

The body widths at different levels are, for males and females respectively,

554 and 68. at the posterior end of the oesophagus, and 63 and 8lp at widest

part of the worm. The width of the head in the female is 8p.

The posterior end of the male is widened into two narrow lateral flanges

which appear like caudal alae, but which are not continuous with the small bursa.

The spicule is *3 mm. long. No spinous sheath was observed.

The position of the vulva in the female is marked by a flap of cuticle. The

eggs are 25h by 58p, and each is enclosed in a capsule. The measurements agree

with those of C. brevispiculata as given by Freitas and Lent 1935, but it differs

in egg-shell. The species differs from C. helenae Layman in the ratio of the

body parts.

Capillaria cooperi n. sp.

Fig. 7-8

From Callionymus calauropomus (St. Vincent Gulf; South Australian Mu-

seum material), type host, and Cantherines hippocrepis, from Glenelg, collected

* by H. M. Cooper. The material comprises numerous males and two females of

a short stout species of Capillaria. The males are 4-5 mm. long, the females

5°4-7-9 mm. long. The widths at various levels of the body are, for male and

female respectively, 7» and 10 at the head, 45% and 54 at the base of the

oesophagus, and 54 and 63 at the widest part of the intestinal region. The ratio

of the length of oesophageal region to the total body length is 4:7 in the male,

5:7 in the female.

No bursa is present in the male, the cloaca opening ventrally near the tip of

the tail. The spicule measures :12 mm. in length.

The vulva is simple, situated just posterior to the oesophagus. The eggs are

2ip by 54, their shells being very finely pitted,

The relation of the body parts agrees with C. pterophylli Heinze 1933, but

the worm is shorter and stouter, and the shape of the egg is different.

Capillaria jaenschi n. sp.

Fig. 11-13

From Phalacrocorax sulcirostris (type host), P. fuscescens. P, carbo, P. melano~

leucas, Pelecanus conspicillatus, Larus novaehollandiae and Chlidonias leucopareia,

all from Tailem Bend. Capillaria sp. from Phalacrocorax fuscescens, Hobart,

recorded by us in the B.A.N.Z.A.R.E. Report (1945), belongs to this species.

246

The worms are long slender Capillariids, recognisable by the structure of the

egg and by the form of the male tail, The body bears two bacillary bands

throughout its length.

Females 7:1-27-4 mm. long; the ratio of the oesophageal to the intestinal

region, 1:1-1-1-3. The breadth of the body measured across the head is 7p, at

the base of the oesophagus 37-41, and at widest part 45-90y. The cuticle around

the vulva projects as a tubular flap. The eggs, 18-20» by 48-50, have coarsely

pitted shells and prominent polar capsules.

30 pb.

Fig. 9-17

Fig. 9-10-—Capilleria ellis: 9, vulvar region; 10, male tail, Fig. 11-13—Capillaria

joenschi: 11, egg; 12, male tail; 15, spicule sheath. Fig. 14-16—Capillaria

grallinae; 14, egg; 15, bursa; 16, male tail. Fig. 17—Capillaria pomatostomi, egg.

Fig. 9 and 16 to same scale; all other figures to same scale.

The male, of which only one complete specimen is available, is 9-9 mm. in

length, with a ratio of intestinal and oesophageal region 1:1:2. The breadth of

the body across the head is 6, at the base of the oesophagus 36n, and at the widest

part 45y. The spicule is *7 mm. long; the sheath extruded in one specimen bears

247

six longitudinal ridges with convoluted edges. The bursa consists of a dorsal

and two lateral lobes, quite distinct from one another; the dorsal being narrow

and in lateral view appearing as a stout backwardly-directed hook.

The species is distinguishable from the widely distributed bird parasite

C. contoria (Creplin) by the ratio of the body parts. It is distinguished from

C. lericola Wassilkova by the ratio of the body parts in the female, as well as

by the absence of spines on the spicule sheath in the male and by the smaller size

of the eggs. Capillaria spp., hitherto recorded from Phalacrocorax spp., are

C. carbonis (Rud.) (Europe), of which no description is given; C. appendiculata

Freitas (Brazil), from which the present species differs in spicule length and egg

size; and C. spiculata Freitas (Brazil), from which it differs in the shape of the

egg and the bursa.

Capillaria ellisi n. sp.

Fig. 9-10

From the black swan, Chenopsis atrata, Tailem Bend.

The material consists of one female and one male, as well as several broken

pieces of worms. The complete female is 15-9 mm. long, the ratio of the oeso-

phageal to the intestinal region being 1:1. The body width at its widest part is

63p, at the base of the oesophagus 40, and at the head 5p.

The cuticle of the anterior vulvar lip projects as a flap. The eggs are smooth-

shelled and measure 37» by 51p.

The male is 9-2 mm. long, the ratio of the oesophageal to the intestinal region

being 1:1°4. The body width at the head is 5, at the base of oesophagus 34z,

and at the widest part of the worm 36u. The spicule is 1-4 mm. long. A very

spinose sheath is present (fig. 10). The cuticle on either side of the cloaca pro-

jects as two bursal flaps, each supporting a bilobed portion of the hypodermis.

The form of the spicule sheath of this species is very like that of C. contorta

and C. friloba, but the species differ markedly in the ratios of the anterior and

posterior body parts.

The only recorded species of Capillaria from a swan is C. droummondi Trav.

1915, a description of which is not available to us. It differs from C. anatis

(Schrank) in the absence of a bacillary band.

Capillaria pomatostomi n. sp.

Fig. 17

From Pomatostomus superciliosus, from Elwomple, near Tailem Bend.

Only female specimens are represented. They are 14-4-15-1 mm. in length, the

ratio of the anterior to the posterior parts of the body being 1:1:5-1:6. The

width at the head is 7p, at the base of the oesophagus 45, and at their widest part

68u. Bacillary bands were not observed. A small cuticular flap overhangs the

anterior lip of the vulva. The eggs are smooth-shelled, more ovoid in form than

most Capillariid eggs, and measure 28 by 43-45y.

Capillaria grallinae n. sp.

Fig. 14-16

From the peewhit, or “Murray Magpie,” Grallina cyanoleuca. Numerous

specimens were obtained at various times from this host species, all from Tailem

Bend. The oesophageal region tapers markedly towards the head. A single wide

bacillary band is present.

The female measures 10°4-16°6 mm. in length, the ratio of the anterior to

the posterior body parts being 1:1°8 (1:1-3 in one specimen). The body width

at the head is 9u, at the base of the oesophagus 46-63p, and the widest part 57-72p.

248

The vulva is inconspicuous. The egg-shell is spiny and measures 20-21p by

50-52.

The male measures 11-11:5 mm. in length, the ratio of anterior to posterior

body parts being 1:1°4. The body width at the head is 7p, at the base of the

oesophagus 36-39n, and at the widest part 54u. The spicule is well chitinised and

measures *9-1 mm. The spicule sheath is very strongly annulated.

The species is closest to C. venteli Freitas and Almeida, C. graucalina J. & M.

and C. emberigae Yamaguti. The measurements agree with those given by Yama-

guti for C. emberigae; the eggs of the latter species are described as “lemon-

shaped,” and as no figure is given, nor any mention of the texture of the shell,

comparison is difficult; the very wide variation in egg-size mentioned by Yamaguti

suggests that unripe eggs were included in his measurements. In view of this

uncertainty regarding the size and shape of the eggs, and of the wide difference

in locality and host, we consider it wiser to name our species as new.

LITERATURE

Cram, E. B. 1936 Tech. Bull. U.S. Dept. Agric., No. 516, 27 pp.

Frerras, J. F. 1933 Compt. Rend. Soc. Biol. (Rio de Janeiro), Paris, 962-964

Freitas, J. F., and Avmeipa, J. L. de, 1935 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz, 30, 123-156

Freiras, J. F., and Lent, H. I. 1935 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz, 30, 241-284

Heinze, K. 1933 Zeitschr. f. Parasitk., 5, 393-496

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1941 Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 66,

250-256

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1945 B.A.N.Z. Antarctic Research

Exped. Sc. Repts., Ser. B., 5, (2), 73-159

SOUTHERN AUSTRALIAN GASTOPODA PART IIT DOLIACEA

BY BERNARD C.. COTTON (READ 13 SEPTEMBER 1945)

Summary

In this paper are given notes, records and descriptions of new species of Mollusca belonging to the

superfamily Doliacea.

For many years the large collection of Australian Gastropoda in the South Australian Museum has

been undergoing the process of being arranged in biological order. Good series from numerous

localities now enable notes to be readily made on new species, variations, range and exact localities.

In past lists the records are frequently given or implied as merely “South Australia”, which covers a

very big portion of the Flindersian Region.

249

SOUTHERN AUSTRALIAN GASTROPODA

PART II DOLIACEA

By Bernarp C. Corton

[Read 13 September 1945]

In this paper are given notes, records and descriptions of new species of

Mollusca belonging to the superfamily Doliacea.

For many years the large collection of Australian Gastropoda in the South

Australian Museum has been undergoing the process of being arranged in biologi-

cal order. Good series from numerous localities now enable notes to be readily

made on new species, variations, range and exact localities. In past lists the

records are frequently given or implied as merely “South Australia,” which covers

a very big portion of the Flindersian Region.

The following abbreviations are used in the tabular lists of Australian species :

—N.A., North Australia, the North Coast of Australia and the Islands between

Queensland and North-Western Australia; N.Q., North Queensland; S.Q., South

Queensland; N. N.S.W., North New South Wales; S. N.S.W., South New South

Wales; E. Vict., East Victoria; W. Vict., West Victoria; E.S.A., East South

Australia; W.S.A., West South Australia; 5. W.A., South Western Australia;

N. W.A., North Western Australia; E. Tas., East Tasmania; S. Tas., South Tas-

mania; W.Tas., West Tasmania; N.Tas., North Tasmania; S. Pac., South

Pacific; Ind. Oc., Indian Ocean.

Depths are indicated in the tables as “S” for shallow water or littoral species,

“dredged” where they are from uncertain or unknown depths, and where the

depths are known numbers are given representing fathoms. An asterisk indicates

that the species in the genotype of the genus listed. “T” indicates “type locality.”

Family CASSIDIDAE

The species form a remarkable assemblage of shallow, deeper water and

varied geographical forms showing sometimes definite and at other times obscure

diagnostic differences.

PHALIUM BANDATUM (Perry 1811)

Cassidea bandata Perry 1811, Conch., pl. xxxiv, fig. 2.

Fig. 1A

Loc.—East Indies (type). Queensland: Harvey Bay; Bundaberg; Cooktown.

New South Wales: Byron Bay. Western Australia: Carnarvon. North Aus-

tralia: Groote Eylandt; Connexion Island.

Remarks—A single specimen of this species, of which coronulata Sowerby

1825 is a synonym, from Carnarvon, is very heavily built and measures 112 mm.

in height.

XENOGALEA DENDA Cotton 1945

Xenogalea denda Cotton 1945, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 69, (1), 169.

Remarks—aA figure of this recently described species is given here. Iredale

1927, Rec. Aust. Mus., 15, 342, when discussing pyrum and stadialis states

“Still another shell from Tasmania, apparently a beach specimen, is superficially

a large, smooth, unicolour stadialis, though just as certainly a pyrum form.” This

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (2), 30 November 1945

250

may be denda, but I have not seen such a specimen in the May Collection material

so far examined. From the type locality, 100 fms., Great Australian Bight, are

two micromorphs, the largest 39 mm. in height, and there are no intermediates

connecting with denda. Micromorphs of stadialis Hedley are also known from

25-50 fms. from the Continental Shelf of New South Wales.

Fig. 1

A—Xenogalea denda n.sp., shell. B-C—Gondwanula bassi Angas: B, operculum; C, tentacle.

D—Negyrina delecta n.sp., shell

Australian Species of CAssip1mpaz are here listed

Se ety eed aa gags

Genus and Species Depth < ag a And ae nv eg BS & & & AS

Z2e2aG BG HERE HG Aw BAG

Cassis Scopoli 1777—

cornuta® Linné 1758 .. .. 8 x x T

Nannocassis Iredale 1927—

nana* Tenison Woods 1879 S T x

torva Iredale 1927 PA a S$ T

Hypocassis Iredale 1927—

“decresensis’* Hedley 1923 5S Tx

fimbriata Quoy & Gaim. 1833S T

bicarinata Jones 1839 .. Ss Xx TX xX

‘Cypraecassis Stutchburyi 1837

rufa* Linné 1758 .. S a x x T

Phalium Link 1807—

glaucum* Linné 1758 .. iS) x xX x xt

areola Linné 1758 S x x x ae x T

bandatum Perry 1811 .. .. Ss x x x x x T

agnitum Iredale 1927 S px

Xenophalium Iredale 1927—

hedleyi* Iredale 1927 .. .. 70 ,

251

Australian Cassipipag (continued)

2 ar atddtug as g

Depth o *® 7 A YQ 3A A Y f 8 &F a Bd 6

Genus and Species ” dag4a id af ae = e 5 & a oy

Z2Z2u 40d GER SH ezwHG Baa F&

Semicassis Mérch 1852—

diuturna Iredale 1927 .. .- S$ Xx x xT

Casmoria H. & A. Adams 1853

ponderosa* Gmelin 1791 Ss xx —

erinaceus Linné 1758 .. .. S$ x x a

vibex Linné 1758 iS) x x xT

Xenogalea Iredale 1927

pyrum* Lamarck 1822... .. S$ xX xX x XT

stadialis Hedley 1914 .. .. 50-100 x T *

denda Cotton 1945 .. .. 100-250 T

thomsoni Brazier 1875 .. .. 45-100 .,

palinodia Iredale 1931 .. .. drdgd. x T

nashi Iredale 1931 .. .. drdgd. T

sophia Brazier 1872 .. -. S$ x xT

nivea Brazier 1872 .. .. 5S x T

mawsoni Cotton 1945 .. .. 120 x 7

paucirugis Menke 1843... S x XT

lucrativa Ireuale 1927 .. .. 5 xT

labiata Perry 1811 tf ae «6S x xT

inseparata Iredale 1927... 5S x x T

angasi Iredale 1927. .. .. S , x

spectabilis Iredale 1929 .. 50-60 T

Antephalium Iredale 1927—

semigranosa* Lamarck 1822 Ss x xxx x xo Ye Beta

adcocki Sowerby 1896 .. .. S x Tx x

sinuosum Verco 1904 .. .. 15-20 xT

angustatum. Cott. & Godi. 1931 20 ~

Family CYMATITDAE

CYMATILESTA BARTHELEMY! (Bernardi 1857)

Triton barthelemyt Bernardi 1857, Journ. de Conch., 2, 54, pl. i, fig. 1.

Loc.—Victoria (type). South Australia: Beachport. Tasmania: Frederick

Henry Bay.

Remarks—The species enters the South-East of South Australia, but I have

not taken it elsewhere in that State or Western Australia. Verco 1895, Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 102, recorded spengleri from Middleton and Port Lincoln on

the authority of Adcock and Matthews, but these shells may have been water-

housei. The only specimen I can find from the Matthews collection and labelled

“Middleton” is certainly waterhousei. The South Australian and Tasmanian

shells are much more obese than the typical spengleri of New South Wales. The

Tasmanian shells grow to a large size and have very wide varices, remarkably

expanding the outer lip. Three examples of this species measure: Height

140 mm., width 90 mm., Port Albert, Victoria; height 133 mm., width 77 mm.,

Beachport, South Australia; height 170 mm., width 100 mm., Frederick Henry

Bay, Tasmania. In comparison a shell from Port Jackson, Cymatilesta spengleri,

measures 157 mm. x 79 mm. and is comparatively longer in the spire. Queens-

land shells are similar in ratio of height to width. I have not seen deep water

forms of barthelemyi so far.

252

CYMATILESTA WATERHOUSEI (Adams and Angas 1864)

Triton waterhousei Adams and Angas 1864, Proc. Zool., 35,

Loc—South Australia: Port Lincoln (type), Kangaroo Island, Encounter

Bay, Gulf St. Vincent, Spencer Gulf, Pondolowie Bay, Beachport, Point Sinclair ;

dredged, Eastern Cove, 14 and 194 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 164 and 20 fms. ;

Royston Head, 22 fms.; Port Lincoln, 9 fms.; Newland Head, 20 fms.; Thorny

Passage, 25 fms.; Beachport, 40 fms.; St. Francis Island, 15 to 20 fms. Alive

down to 25 fms. Western Australia: Esperance, Albany, Ellenbrook, Bunbury.

Remarks—The species is thinner and lighter than spengleri and has a broad

flattened varix forming the outer lip on which the external ribbing is produced,

not the internal sculpture as in spengleri, and also the spiral lirae are double. The

periostracum has a series of longitudinal fringes with numerous projecting

bristles, sometimes up to 5 mm. in length, and the interspaces are covered with a

system of delicate periostracum lamellae forming a right-angled criss-cross

pattern. Sizes for the shells are as follows:

Height 120 mm., width 65 mm. Port Lincoln, South Australia.

Height 94 mm., width 55 mm. Point Sinclair, South Australia.

Height 67 mm., width 38 mm. Hardwicke Bay, South Australia,

Height 66 mm., width 34 mm. Reevesby Island, South Australia.

Height 125 mm., width 63 mm. Beachport, South Australia.

Height 61 mm., width 31 mm. Albany, Western Australia.

Height 33 mm., width 20 mm. Bunbury, Western Australia.

Height 63 mm., width 36 mm. Port Fairy, Victoria.

Tritonium tabulatum Menke 1843, described from Western Australia, was

said to be intermediate between pileare and cutacea and it is probably a juvenile

of waterhousei, about 14” long, but the name could be used subspecifically for the

Western Australian form, which appears to be noticeably smaller.

CABESTANIMORPHA EXARATA Reeve 1844)

Triton exaratum Reeve 1844, Proc. Zool. Soc., 116,

Loc.—North Australia (type). Queensland. South Pacific. New South

Wales. Victoria. South Australia: Guichen Bay, MacDonnell Bay, Robe.

Western Australia: Albany, Bunbury, Etlenbrook, Cambridge Gulf, Fremantle

10 to 12 fms., Yallingup, Cottesloe.

Remarks—-This North Australian species ranges down the western coast to

Cape Leeuwin, and down the eastern coast round to the South-East of South

Australia, but along the southern coast between these two points it has not been

taken, nor has it been taken in Tasmania. Specimens from Albany range up to

45 mm. in height.

Cabestanimorpha euclia sp. nov.

(Fig. 2)

Shell small, thin, whorls shouldered above, crossed by weak roundly flattened

major spiral ribs, about five on the body-whorl with obsolete fine spirals between

and splitting them; spiral, sculpture finely undulated by regular weak axial grooves:

the two rather more bold shoulder ribs carrying twin tubercles, where six obsolete

axial undulations cross the major spirals, forming six pairs on the body whorl and

correspondingly fewer on the spire; outer lip varix thin but well folded in; the next

varix almost directly above but slightly to the left of the columella axis; aperture

rather wide and pyriform produced into a long, narrow slightly sinuous anterior

canal; protoconch long of four highly polished shelly whorls, very slowly increas-

ing in size. Height 20 mm., diameter 12 mm.

Loc—Western Australia: nine miles west of Eucla, 100 fms (type); 80

miles west of Eucla, 81 fms.

253

Remarks—Three adults and a couple of fragmentary juveniles. At first the

species was thought to be elongatus Reeve or vespaceum Lamarck, from the shape

and long canal. It is, however, quite distinct and may be a deep water species

related to erarata. Holotype, Reg. No. D. 6515, S. Aust. Museum.

Fig. 2

Cabestanimorpha euclia sp. nov., adult shell and protoconch

MONOPLEX PARTHENOPIUM (von Salis 1793)

Murex parthenopium von Salis 1793, Reis Neap., 370, pl. vii, fig. 1.

Loc.—New South Wales. Victoria. New Zealand.

Remarks—Hedley recorded this from the Great Australian Bight, 80 to 120

fms., Western Australia. After careful searching in the Verco and May collec-

tions, I can find no specimens of this species from Western Australia, South

Australia or Tasmania, either from shallow or deep water. The distribution is

apparently somewhat similar to that of Cabestanimorpha exarata, except that the

present species does not occur even in the South-East of South Australia,

PARTICYMATIUM LABIOSUM (Wood 1828)

Murex labiosum Wood 1828, Suppl. Index Test., 15, pl. v, fig. 18.

Loc.—New South Wales (type). Queensland: Moreton Bay.

Remarks—Iredale 1936, Rec. Aust. Mus., 19, No. 5, remarked upon the

resemblance of Wood’s figure to the Sydney shell known as strangei Adams and

Angas 1864, which is probably a synonym, and the New Zealand so-called

“labiosum,” a distinct species.

PARTICYMATIUM GEMMATUM Reeve 1844

Triton gemmatum Reeve 1844, Conch. Icon., 2, pl. xv, fig. 60a.

Loc.—Philippines (type). Western Australia: Shark Bay. North Aus-

tralia: Murray Island. Queensland.

NEGYRINA suBpIsToRTA (Lamarck 1822)

Triton subdistorta Lamarck 1822, An. S. Vert., 7, 186.

Loc.—New South Wales. Victoria. Tasmania. South Australia (type):

Kangaroo Island; St. Francis Island; Robe; dredged Beachport, 40 fms.; Yan-

254

kalilla Bay, 10 to 15 fms.; Corny Point, 27 fms.; Investigator Strait, 19 fms.;

Backstairs Passage, 17 to 20 fms.; Royston Head, 22 fms.; Newland Head,

20 fms.; Spencer Gulf, 124 fms.; alive down to 22 fms.

Remarks—Typical specimens are taken in South Australia. Reeve gives

“Port Adelaide and King George’s Sound” as localities, but although common in

South Australia I have never seen a single specimen from Western Australia or

from further west than St. Francis Island. It has never been taken with the

protoconch present however small the living specimen, so that it must be very

early deciduous. The periostracum has very short, close-set hairs arranged in both

axial and spiral lines. The aperture varies very greatly. In some examples of

even large size there is scarcely any labial callus and the labrum shows only the

gutter of the varix. In others the mouth is almost completely circular and funnel-

shaped, the outer lip expanded and somewhat reflected; the inner lip has a wide-

spread parietal callus, which is free and expanded over the columella into a wide

sloping lamina.

Negyrina delecta sp. nov.

(Fig. 1D)

Shell small, fusiform, thick, whorls slightly asymetrical, rounded, scarcely

angled; colour cream with a system of numerous intergranular reddish-brown

dots, the small granules themselves cream; sculpture consisting of numerous series

of small granules arranged in spiral ; alternate spirals with slightly larger or smaller

granules ; at the rounded shoulder of the body whorl there is a tendency to form

a row or two of a little more prominent tubercules; varices low rounded ribs,

seven in number; aperture small and rounded, inner lip ridged within, slightly

effuse but well within the border of the last varix; columella spread with a thin

glazed reflection of the inner lip; anterior canal short and narrow. Height

45 mm., diameter 24 mm.

Loc.~South Australia: Middleton (type), St. Francis Island, Kangaroo

Island, Point Sinclair.

Remarks—Holotype, Reg. No. D. 14202, S. Aust. Museum. This’ species

is distinguished from subdistorta by the smaller, more solid shell, rounded not

shouldered whorls, the distinctive colour pattern, small aperture and short anterior

canal. When taken alive it is a beautiful shell, generally of a light yellowish-

orange tint with spiral series of square dark purple black spots varying in size in

different spirals and occupying the spaces between the small nodulations; some-

times the ground colour is light purple. This species does not appear to be dredged

in depths below 5 fms. and is essentially littoral. Juveniles are consistently

different and easily distinguished from those of subdistorta. The protoconch, as

in subdistorta, is early deciduous, and no adults or juveniles in the collection

retain it. |

NEGYRINA PETULANS (Hedley and May 1908)

Septa petulans Hedley and May 1908, Rec. Aust. Mus., 7, No, 2, 118, pl. xxiii,

fig. 16.

Loc.—Tasmania: Pirates Bay Beach, near Cape Pillar (type loc.). South

Australia: Beachport, 150 and 200 fms. Victoria: Port Fairy.

Remarks—The broken specimen from 200 fms. on which Verco based the

South Australian record is before me and appears similar to May’s “cotypes’

from 100 fms. seven miles east of Cape Pillar and a living specimen from 80 fms.

10 miles east of Schouten Island, but I have not seen May’s holotype in the

Hobart Museum, which is said to have been taken on the beach. Two further

poor broken specimens separated from dredged material taken in 200 fms. off

Beachport show variation, being more strongly noduled at the shoulder ot

the whorls, but still agreeing with the Tasmanian specimens in size and general

255

features. It would seem that the holotype of petulans, according to Hedley and

May’s figure, is an extreme variant in which the nodules are reduced, our South

Australian forms covering both extremes. Three perfect, fresh specimens, the

best I have seen, have the locality Victoria? Kenyon Collection.

CYMATOMA KAMPYLA (Watson 1886)

Nassaria kampyla Watson 1886, Journ. Linn. Soc. Lond., 16, 594,

Loc—New South Wales: off Sydney, 410 fms. (type). Victoria. Tas-

mania, 30 and 100 fms. South Australia: Beachport to Cape Jaffa, 90 to

200 fms.

Remarks—There are two distinct variants of the species in South Australia,

found in the same localities and depths:

(a) Nearest to typical kampyla, Protoconch large and similar to (b), but

generally more sturdy. Shell more solid, anterior canal shorter,

less curved; sculpture more valid.

(b) Thinner and less sturdy, sculpture less valid, longer in proportion to the:

width than in the typical kampyla,

The type locality of Lampusia nodocostata Tate and May 1900 was “East.

coast of Tasmania,” and it is a direct synonym of kampyla. We have a good series.

from 100 fms. off Cape Pillar and 30 fms. off Storm Bay, Tasmania.

GONDWANULA BAsst (Angas 1869)

Triton bassi Angas 1869, Proc. Zool. Soc., 45, pl. ii, fig. 3.

(Fig. 1B-C)

Loc.—Victoria: Bass Straits (type). Tasmania: North Coast. South Aus-

tralia: Eastern Cove, Kangaroo Island; Point Sinclair; St. Francis Island;

dredged Beachport, 110 fms.; Gulf St. Vincent, 14 and 17 fms.

Remarks—The species is rare but has been taken alive on rocky beaches at

Point Sinclair, the shell being purplish-brown, but white in specimens dead on.

the beach.

South Australian specimens are much less nodulated than the Tasmanian

shell and the spiral ridges are much wider and flatter. South Australian shells

have only two nodules, Tasmanian six or seven and much sharper. Tasmanians

have also two finer angulations anteriorly, which are finely tuberculated ; these are

absent in South Australian shells. The embryonic shell, unlike that of Negyrina

subdistorta is usually present, being blunt and rounded. Living specimens dredged

in Backstairs Passage, 17 fms., have an ovate not acute operculum, with the

nucleus anterior, a little external to the middle line. The foot is about one-half

the length of the shell and about half as broad as long, of a dull yellowish-white

colour tinted with red in minute spots at the posterior extremity. The tentacles

are about as long as the foot is wide, of a crimson red colour and with the black

eyes on their outer sides at about one-quarter of their length from the bases of

the tentacles, which are white for a short distance immediately below the eyes..

GONDAWANULA FRATERCULUS (Dunker 1871)

Triton fraterculus Dunker 1871, Malak. Blatt., 166.

Loc.—South Australia: Thorny Passage, 25 fms.; Tunk Head; St. Francis.

Island, 15-20 fms.; Point Sinclair (Weeding). Victoria: Bass Straits (type).

Remarks—The species appear to occur as far west as St. Francis Island. It

is not represented in any Western Australian material I have examined.

Sipho mimeticus Tate 1893, holotype from Tapley’s Shoal, eight miles off Edith--

burgh, 12 to 16 fms., is a synonym.

256

GONDWANULA TUMIDA (Dunker 1862)

Ranella tumida Dunker 1862, Proc. Zool. Soc., 239,

Loc—Tasmania (type). Victoria. Western Australia. South Australia:

Port MacDonnell, Pondolowie Bay.

Remarks—-There are two small beach-worn specimens in the collection, one

from “Middleton” and one from “MacDonnell Bay,” both of doubtful origin, and

there are two specimens in the Elliott Collection from Middleton and Pondo-

lowie Bay.

CyMATIELLA veRRUCOSA Reeve 1844

Triton verrucosus Reeve 1844 Conch. Icon., Triton, pl. xvii, fig. 71.

Loc—Victoria (type). Tasmania. South Australia: Port MacDonnell;

Pondolowie Bay; Streaky Bay; dredged Backstairs Passage, 20 fms.; Cape Borda,

55 fms. and 60 fms.; Cape Jaffa, 130 fms.; Beachport, 40 fms and 110 fms.;

Ardrossan, 14 fms.; Wallaroo, 15 fms.

Remarks—The species is distinguished by the coarse sculpture and well

open wide mouth. It is probably less common than the very plentiful

gaimardi. No specimens from Western Australia have been seen by me. Triton

quoyi Reeve 1844 is a synonym.

CYMATIELLA GAIMARDI (Iredale 1929)

Cymatiella gaimardi Iredale 1929, Rec. Aust. Mus., 17, No. 4, 174, pl. xl, fig. 7.

Loc.— South Australia: Port Lincoln (type); Normanville; Kangaroo

Island, American River; Encounter Bay; Robe; Troubridge; Gulf St. Vincent;

Spencer Gulf; Henley Beach; Glenelg; Port Wakefield; Point Sinclair; dredged,

Yankalilla Bay, 10 to 15 ims.; Rapid Head, 9 to 12 fms.; Port Lincoln, 9 fms. ;

Corny Point, 30 fms.; Hardwicke Bay, 8 to 10 fms.; St. Vincent Gulf, 5, 7, 9, 15

and 17 {ms.; Investigator Straits, 13 fms. and 15 fms.; Backstairs Passage,

16 fms.; Eastern Cove, Kangaroo Island, 11 and 14 fims.; Spencer Gulf, 20 fms.;

Porpoise Head, 17 ims. ; Newland Head, 20 fms.; alive down to 30 fms. Western

Australia: Esperance Bay; Hopetoun.

Remarks-——-Shell narrower, more attenuate than verrucosa, aperture smaller

and more closed, sculpture coarse. This species is common in South Australia.

Examples from Pondolowie Bay, Spencer Gulf, have a dark brown crescentic

blotch at the extreme wpper end of the labial varix, and so indicate throughout

the spire the site of previous labial varices. Shells from St. Francis Island,

Esperance and Hopetoun are prettily decorated with spiral brown bands and dots.

CYMATIELLA LESUEURI Iredale 1929

Cymatiella lesueuri Iredale 1929, Rec. Aust. Mus., 17, No. 4, 175, pl. xl, fig. 11.

Loc.—Victoria: Port Phillip (type). East Tasmania. South Australia:

Middleton; Robe; St. Francis Island; Gulf St. Vincent; Spencer Gulf; Beach-

port, 40 fms.; Backstairs Passage, 22 fms.; Middleton, 10 fms. Western Aus-

tralia: Hopetoun; Yallingup; Rottnest.

Remarks—-Although comparatively common in South Australia I have seen

only three specimens, one from each locality mentioned, in Western Australia.

CYMATIELLA COLUMNARIA (Hedley and May 1908)

Cymatium columnarium Hedley and May 1908, Rec. Aust. Mus., 7, No. 2, 119,

pl. xxiii, fig. 15.

Loc-—Tasmania: Cape Pillar, 100 fms. (type); south and east coasts.

South Australia: Beachport, 40, 100, 110, 150 and 200 fms.; Cape Jaffa, 130

257

fms.; Cape Borda, 60 fms.; Neptunes, 104 fms. Western Australia: West of

Eucla, Great Australian Bight, 50 to 120 ims., 100 fms., and 75 fms. off Beachport.

Remarks—-Probably a deep water form of gatmardi.

RATIFUSUS MESTAYERAE Iredale 1915

Ratifusus mestayerae Iredale 1915, Trans, N.Z. Inst., 47, 466.

Loc.—New Caledonia (type). New South Wales. Victoria. Tasmania.

South Australia: Port MacDonnell. Western Australia: Albany.

Remarks—The species is not uncommon in the South-East of South Aus-

tralia but I have not seen it from elsewhere in the State.

RATIFUSUS Aproncrug Iredale 1929

Ratifusus adjunctus Iredale 1929, Rec. Aust. Mus., 17, (4), 183, pl. xl, fig. 5.

Loc.—New South Wales: Montague Island, 50-60 fms. (type). South Aus-

tralia: Beachport, 110, 150 fms. and 200 fms.

Remarks—A perfect South Australian specimen is half as big again as the

holotype, being 25 mm. in length and appears to have finer sculpture and a slightly

wider aperture. Hedley 1911 recorded schoutanicus May from Cape Wiles 100

fms., but I have not seen specimens from South Australia, and as the species is

merely listed it is questionable whether the species is schoutanicus or the deeper

water Eastern Victoria conterminus from 100-250 fms. of East Victoria.

RATIFUSUS BEDNALLI (Brazier 1875)

Colubraria bednalli Brazier 1875, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 6.

Loc. South Australia: Guichen Bay (type), Gulf St. Vincent and Spencer

Gulf ; Encounter Bay; Robe; MacDonnell Bay ; Corny Point; Daly Head; dredged

Beachport 40, 110, 150 and 200 fms.; Cape Jaffa, 130 fms.; Cape Borda, 55 fms. ;

Backstairs Passage, 16, 18, 19, 20 and 22 ims.; Newland Head 20 fms.; Porpoise

Head, 12 fms. Western Australia: Rottnest. Victoria: Western Port.

Remarks—Specimens from 40 fathoms and below show a rather different

sculpture, the longitudinal sculpturing predominating, but the difference is not

consistent. The species is plentiful in South Australia, especially on open ocean

beaches, but rarer in Gulf St. Vincent.

CHARONIA RUBICUNDA (Perry 1811)

Septa rubicunda Perry 1811, Conchology, pl. xiv, fig. 4. ;

Loc-—New South Wales (type). Queensland. Victoria. Tasmania. South

Australia: Kangaroo Island; Thistle Island; Outer Harbour. Western Aus-

tralia: Ellenbrook; Albany; Bunbury; Yallingup.

Remarks—-A specimen of this Australian species in our collection from

Albany is the typical shallow water form, measuring 192 mm. x 115 mm., and

similar specimens are represented from Ellenbrook up to 175 mm. x 85 mm. The

shell is taken alive off Kangaroo Island, and the Outer Harbour record is

probably due to a specimen having been tossed out there from a crayfish boat,

returning from Kangaroo Island. The shell grows large and thick in the Flinder-

sian Region, a specimen from Kangaroo Island measuring 210 mm. x 110 mm.

CHaARoniIA EucLIA Hedley 1914

Charonia nodifera euclhia Hedley 1914, Zool. Res. Endeavour, 2, 65, pl. viii.

Loc.—Western Australia: Great Australian Bight, 80-120 fms. (type),

100 fms. (Verco) ; dredged, Albany; Rottnest.

298

Remarks—This species is not necessarily distinguished from rubicunda by

the narrow form, for both wide and narrow variants of the latter shore species

occur right along the Southern Australian shore line from South Australia to

South Western Australia, one from Bunbury measuring 170 x 90 mm., and one

from Ellenbrook 170 x 80 mm., both living specimens. The five specimens of

euclia before me, dredged in the Great Australian Bight, are consistent in the

delicacy of the shell and sculpture and paleness of the ornament. Though they

vary considerably in relative width, they tend to be narrower than typical shore

shells of rubicunda. Their form is not a matter of East and West latitude, but

probably the result of environment in the quiet depths of 100 fms. on a sandy

bottom instead of among rocks on a shore-line. But while searching through the

collection I came across a large specimen from Middle River, Kangaroo Island,

measuring 210 x 115 mm., which approached euclia in size and delicacy

and must have measured about 230 mm. in length when complete, thus

approximating to the proportions of dredged specimens from the Great Australian

Bight. Turning up some old manuscript notes of Verco’s, I found the following:

“Mr. George Pattison of Cape de Coudie Lighthouse sent Mr. Ashby an example

of Charonia lampas var. eucha in January 1923, which he submitted to me for

discussion, and he returned it to the sender with my comments. On Feb. 4 1923

Mr. Pattison wrote to Mr. Ashby as follows”; then the following quotation occurs

from Pattison’s letter: “The shell was found by myself at Cape de Coudie, Kan-

garoo Island; on 10 November 1922. I was wading in the sea turning over rocks

at low water mark, when I discovered the shell under a rock with the fish alive

in it. There were also numerous broken shells of the same species, about seven

or eight. Today, being a fairly low tide, I climbed down the cliff and hunted for

some live ones. I found two alive and one shell without a fish in it, By what I

have observed, I should say that given an extra low tide one could find plenty of

specimens.” Mr, Pattison’s specimen must have been similar to the Middle River

specimen before me, which is but slightly heavier than true euclia.

I can only suggest that the narrower lighter shell 1s distinct and is represented

in shallow and deep water, the true euclia Hedley being the deep water form of a

narrower and more delicate species related to rubicunda.

MayYENA AustRALAsIA (Perry 1811)

Biplex australasia Perry 1811, Conch., pl. iv, fig. 2, 4, = lewcostoma Lamarck 1822.

Loc—South Australia: Corny Point; Middleton; Robe. Western Aus-

tralia: Ellenbrook; Rottnest. New South Wales (type).

Remarks-—Only three specimens of this species have been seen from South

Australia, two beach-worn and one in living condition, It was recorded from

Middleton by Adcock, and Yorke Peninsula by Matthews, but I have never

dredged it in South Australia and have only taken the one beach-worn specimen

at Robe. At Ellenbrook a good series of typical specimens ranging from very

small to about 80 mm. by 45 mm., and one from Rottnest. All are similar in form

and sculpture to the Tasmanian shells. While apparently common in Western

Australia and Eastern Australia, it seems to be extremely rare in South Australia.

Mayena euclia sp. nov.

(Fig. 3)

Shell long, narrow, solid, white with yellowish thin periostracum like coarse

muslin, with a minute, erect hair at each intersection; between the larger nodules

there is a sparse nut-brown maculation; four rows of nodules beneath the major

shoulder row appear on the ventral surface of the body whorl; spire one and a

half times the height of the aperture; aperture small, rounded, strongly dentate

259

except at the middle of the columella; canal long and strongly dentate on the

columella side; protoconch (from the juvenile specimen) conical, of four sloping

convex whorls, the minute extreme apex absent. Height 90 mm., diameter 43 nim.

Loc—Western Australia; west of Eucla; Great Australian Bight, 100 fms.

Remarks—Holotype D.6771, South Australian Museum. The holotype and

one juvenile specimen were both briefly recorded by Verco 1912, Trans. Roy.

Mayena cuclia sp.nov. Entire shell and protoconch

Soc. S. Aust., 36, 220, under the name Argobuccinum australasia, The specimens

are very different from ausiralasia in every way. It is long and narrow and has

a long anterior canal. It recalls benthicola Iredale 1929 from the continental shelf

of Eastern Australia, but is even narrower and has a longer and straighter anterior

canal.

APOLLON GyrINUS (Linné 1758)

Murex gyrinus Linné 1758, Syst. Nat. Ed., 10, 748.

Loc.—North Australia: Gulf of Carpentaria; Murray Island.

Australian species of CyMATIDAE are here tabulated

EE 4 Sente ,

_ 24 88 4448 gu bead

Genus and Species Depth 4AqQq4%24 5 = Awe EEE ied some va

Z424uA4u m2 Ss Bu Aa edH eA GS

Cymatium Bolten. 1798—

femorale* Linné 1758 .. Ss Not Australian. Type loc., West Indies

lotorium Linné 1758 S x xX x T

sarcostoma Reeve 1844 Ss x xX T

encausticum Reeve 1844 Ss x Tv

moritinctum Reeve 1822 S$ x T

pfeifferiananum Reeve 1844 § x

tuberosum Lamarck 1822 S x x x T

gracile Reeve 1844 S x T

260

Australian CyMATIIDAE (continued )

Depth

Genus and Species

chlorostoma Lamarck 1822.. S

Cymatilesta Iredale 1936—

spenglert® Perry 1811 .. .. i)

barthelemyi Bernardi 1857... S

procurum Iredale 1929 .. .. drdgd.

boltenianum Adams 1854 .. S

waterhouset Ad. & Ang. 1865 0-40

subsp. tabulatum Menke 1843 5S

frigidulum Iredale 1929 drdgd.

tepida Iredale 1936 .. .. Ss

Cabestanimorpha Iredale 1936

exarata® Reeve 1844 .. .. 0-12

vespacca Lamarck 1822 .. S

euclia Cotton 1945 81-100

elongata Reeve 1844 .. .. Ss

Monoplex Perry 1811—

partheropium* von Salis 1793 S

Lampusia Schumaker 1817

pilearis* Linné 1758 S

aquatilis Reeve 1844 .. .. 6S

nicobarica Bolten 1798 Ss

Tritonocauda Dall 1904—

caudata* Gmelin 1791 .. S

vulticula Iredale 1936 .. .. Ss

Ranularia Schumaker 1817—

clavator* Lamarck 1822 5

pyrum Linné 1758 de hee TS

sinense Reeve 1844 S

defrenata Iredale 1936 iS)

Particymatium Iredale 1936—

labiosum* Wood 1828 ..

gemmatum Reeve 1844

rutilum Menke 1843

simara Iredale 1929

Septa Perry 1810—

rubecula* Linné 1758 ..

blacketi Iredale 1936

Distorsio Bolten 1798—

anus* Linné 1758 .. .. -. SS

francesae Iredale 1931 ‘eS

Austrosassia Finlay 1931 —

parkinsoniana*® Perry 1811... §

basilicus Iredale 1924 .. 50-70

Negyrina Iredale 1929—

subdistorta®* Lamarck 1822.. 0-40

delecta Cotton 1945 .. 6. 06S

petulans Hedley & May 1908 9.200

Cymatoma Iredale 1929-—

kampyla* Watson 1886 90-410

Phanozesta Iredale 1936—

remensa* Iredale 1936 --» 110

be NLA,

4 NO.

4 S.Q.

N.N.S.W

rtd od

Type loc., Mediterranean

W.S5S.A.

S. W.A.

N.W.A.

E, Tas.

S. Tas.

x Xx

Type loc., China

Pane

“4 28 4

Zr we

A HE gi

ST ee

TeX xX

xX xX X T

x xX

T X X

“

W. Tas.

N. Tas.

~ S. Pac,

Ind. Oc.

261

Australian CyMATIIDAE (continued)

Genus and Species Depth

Gondwanula Finlay 1926—

tumida* Dunker 1862 .. .. S

bassi Angas 1869 we ee 60-110

fraterculus Dunker 1871 .. 0-25

Cymatiella Iredale 1924—

verrucosa* Reeve 1844 .- 0-110

peroniana Iredale 1929 .. 50-60

columnaria Hed. & May 1908 40-100

gaimardi Iredale 1929 .. .. 0-30

lesueuri Iredale 1929 .. .. S

eburnea Reeve 1844... Ss

Obex Iredale 1925—

mulveyanum* Iredale 1925... 74

brasiert Angas 1869 .. .. S

Ratifusus Iredale 1929—

adjunctus* Iredale 1929 .. 50-60

mestayerae Iredale 1915 .. §S

schoutanicus May 1910 .. 75-86

conterminus Iredale 1925 .. 100-250

bednal Brazier 1875 .. .. 0-200

volaticus Iredale 1925 .. .. 0S

Apollon Montfort 1810—

gyrinus* Linné 1758 2. .. SS

affine Broderip 1833

ranelloides Reeve 1844

Gyrinella Dall 1924—

pusilla&* Broderip 1832 .. S

facetus Iredale 1936 .. .. S

deliberatus Iredale 1936 .. S

Fusitriton Cossmann 1903—

cancellatum* Lamarck .

retiolus Hedley 1914 .. .. 50-410

laudandum Finlay 1926 .. 40

Charonia Gistel 1848—

tritonis® Linné 1758 .. .. SS

rubicunda Perry 1811 Ae S

euclia Hedley 1914 .. .. 80-120

instructa Iredale 1929 .. .. 50-79

Vernotriton Iredale 1936—

pumilio Hedley 1903 .. .. = 0-22

Mayena Iredale 1917—

australasia*® Perry 1811

benthicola Iredale 1929 .. drdgd.

euclia Cotton 1945 .. «= 100

BE ss AT nla?

“wg eset ds gy

AGqgt%zrratseBead

Zu 42406 62 we zw ot

x XxX X X x x

{teat dae aa

TX XX

x TX xX

x XX xX T

x. Ex

TX XX x x

Not Australian

xX EF

T x

X XXX

3 x x T

TX xX

x T X

xX x

x x

Type loc., Lord Hood Island

x xox Tr

Type loc., West Indies

Xx T

Type loc., New Zealand

x x Type loc., West Indies

X XTX XXX XXX

KR ERM oC:

~T xX x x XxX

Family BURSIDAE

DuLcERona JABiIcK (Bolten 1798)

Tritonium jabick Bolten 1798, Mus. Bolt., 127,

Loc-——-New South Wales (type).

Western Australia:

Ellenbrook. South Australia: Kangaroo Island, dredged.

W. Tas.

N. Tas.

“

S. Pac.

Tnd. Oc.

x Type loc., N. Caled.

Rottnest; Albany;

262

Remarks—Synonyms are granifera Lamarck 1816 and granularis Bolten

1798, the latter introduced on the same page but following jabick. A single living,

perfect specimen dredged by Verco at Nepean Bay, Kangaroo Island, was mixed

with some subdistorta.

The Australian species of BuRsipAE are as follows:

Genus and Species Depth

N.N.S.W

N.S

E, Vict.

W. Vict.

EL S.A.

W.S.A.

S. W.VA.

N.W.A,

E, Tas.

S. Tas.

W. Tas.

N. Tas.

S. Pace.

Ind. Oc.

ce:

Bursa Bolten 1798—

bufonius* Gmelin 1791

rana Linné 1758

S Not Australian

==crumena Lamarck 1822... 5

SS)

mammaria Bolten 1798

venustula Reeve 1844

bituberculatus Lamarck 1822

Tutufa Jousseatme 1881—

bufo Bolten 1798 .... oS

lissostoma Smith 1914 an i) Xaex

Gyrineum Link 1807—

spinosa® Lamarck 1843 .. S Not Australian T

procator Iredale 1931 .. .. drdgd. T

cavitensis Reeve 1844 .. .. Ss T

Dulcerona Iredale 1931—

jabick Bolten 1798 .. .. S T x cae

=granularis Bolten 1798

=granifera Lamarck 1816 ..

Annoporenna Iredale 1936

verrucosa*® Sowerby 1825 .. S x x x x Type loc., Norfolk Island

Argobuccinum Bruguiére 1792

succinctum Linné 1771 ae x x

x Type loc., Philippines

Family TONNIDAE

TONNA VARIEGATA (Lamarck 1822)

Dolium variegata Lamarck 1822, An. c. Vert., 7, 261.

Loc-—Western Australia: Shark Bay (type); 80 miles west of Euela,

100 fms.; Rottnest ; Ellenbrook.

Remarks—Fragments of shell from the last two localities.

Family FICIDAE

Ficus geosprLa (Peron 1807)

Pyrula eospila Peron 1807, Voy. Terre Austral., 1, 132.

Loc.—Western Australia: Depuch Island (type) ; Rottnest; 90 miles west of

Eucla, 100 fms.

Remarks—-A fragment only from Rottnest.

SUMMARY

Four new species are described and the figure of a previously described

species is given. Notes and exact locality records of twenty-four other species

are also recorded, while complete lists of Australian Cassididae, Cymatiidae and

Bursidae are added.

GRANITES OF THE TINTINARA DISTRICT

BY D. MAWSON AND E.. R. SEGNIT (READ 13 SEPTEMBER 1945)

Summary

This contribution deals with the distribution and nature of granite outcrops yet to be described in the

remaining section of the Uper South-Eastern District of South Australia. Other areas have been

dealt with in publications 2 and 3 of the list of references on page 276. The area now concerned lies

to the west of Tintinara Railway Station, between the Adelaide to Bordertown railway track and the

Coorong (see map, p.264). Most of this area is covered with low scrub, difficult to traverse except

on foot or horseback on account of the absence, except in the approaches to Tintinara, of tracks

passable to wheeled transport.

We have located on the map a large number of granite outcrops and believe that few, if any, that

appear above the soil and ancient drift sand covering of that region have been overlooked. These

new records are part of the extensive batholythic belt which we have now traced from Murray

Bridge almost to Bordertown.

263

GRANITES OF THE TINTINARA DISTRICT

By D. Mawson and E. R. Seenrr

Pirates XVI to XVIII

[Read 13 September 1945]

Page

CONTENTS

Tae Form anp Distrrsution or Ourcrors .. “sd te fee 4 .. 263

The Cambalapien Outcrops .. is a aa aa fe - .. 264

Petrography ; Rocks numbered: 5783, 5786, 5790, 5791, 5787... ay .. 265

Outcrops of the East Side of the Mt. Boothby Ridge be He i .. 268

Petrography; Rocks numbered: 5795, 6045. i Ap he . .. 268

Outcrops in the Neighbourhood of Armchair Rock .. cs = ay .. 269

Petrography; Rocks numbered: 5793, 5782, 5788, 5794, 5794A i .. 269

Outcrops in the Vicinity of Tolmer’s Rock .. i ais nr on .. 271

Petrography; Rocks numbered: 5792, 6044, 6048, 6042, 6046... Rn .. 272

CONCLUSIONS s “4 mn w Pe re a if be .. 274

SUMMARY 4 }. a shy an ik “a as i .. 276

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 7 ts e = Ys zt +s mh .. 276

REFERENCES Ju oF ah ma bs 7 Fe dst - .. 276

Description or Pirates XVI, XVII, XVIII .. AA = . ar, .. 276

This contribution deals with the distribution and nature of granite outcrops

yet to be described in the remaining section of the Upper South-Eastern District

of South Australia. Other areas have been dealt with in publications 2 and 3 of

the list of references on page 276. The area now concerned lies to the west of

Tintinara Railway Station, between the Adelaide to Bordertown railway track

and the Coorong (see map, p. 264). Most of this area is covered with low

scrub, difficult to traverse except on foot or horseback on account of the absence,

except in the approaches to Tintinara, of tracks passable to wheeled transport.

We have located on the map a large number of granite outcrops and believe

that few, if any, that appear above the soil and ancient drift sand covering of

that region have been overlooked. These new records are part of the extensive

batholythic belt which we have now traced from Murray Bridge almost to

Bordertown,

THE FORM AND DISTRIBUTION OF OUTCROPS

The outcropping granite masses are nearly all individually of very restricted

area, many of them being no more than a single rock like those in the illustrative

plates herewith or, at the most, a group of several of such monoliths or whale-

backs. These rock masses usually project to heights of 10 to 30 feet above the

surrounding plain which is diversified by very little relief; such as there is of the

latter being mainly in the nature of rises of drift sand on which there is some-

times developed a thin calcareous crust. Our extended field experience in that

region has led to the conclusion that this ancient granite is distributed very widely,

located either directly beneath the Pleistocene and Recent unconsolidated sedi-

ments or separated from them only by a thin formation of Miocene to later Ter-

tiary limestone.

Again we record that our search for outcropping granite has been assisted

by the recognition that patches and belts of timber among the ubiquitous low scrub

Trans, Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (2), 30 November 1945

264

always indicate the close approach to the surface of granite or other pre-Pleisto-

cene formations. In this region of porous, unconsolidated or but poorly con-

solidated surface formations, we have found granite basements to be most effec-

tive in establishing forest growths. This, of course, can happen only where the

granite outcrops either at the surface or is disposed at shallow depth. This

appears to be due to two factors: firstly, the underlying granite surface prevents

such rain as falls in that dry district from sinking to depths out of reach of tree

roots; secondly, the granite supplies certain mineral deficiencies which are so

marked a feature of the sandy and calcareous regolith in the Coorong area.

wee

~ ca y ‘“

aed

“

i 1 “BM,

reepy / i

*) 2, WELLS” ‘ ES ty |

Picea per os i

MP BOOTHBY ® hue i aa cal ae 1 BNL,

* Nee ieene, 4 1 wh 4

SCALE z 4 on /

2 4MiLes : oF eer y 4

eee me ™ JINTINARAL = Fak

CAMEALAPIEN HUTS, MBS ye7 tee MA

Quin) goofesereen ey oi nee et eee

: ; see

. SENT

ToLMERS Rock ~~

cn ERAEI TO FIRTINA RA — a gs :

GOVT. WELL, nat :

_# CAMBALAPIEN WELL i 7 fe” dl

aon Yo i aade,

(isn ten 2 70 : %

vy? TOLMERS WELL e : -ELLEN

*#TOM GIBBS WELL

The granite outcrops are distributed among stunted forest timber, and rarely

amount to more than isolated tors. They range up to a height of about 25 to

30 feet, but some are low whalebacks, and these are the most difficult to locate.

As the outcrops rarely rise above tree height they are not observed until

closely approached. Individual masses are presented in a variety of shapes,

apparently the result of long continued subaerial weathering under semi-arid

conditions. Their northern faces, which receive the full heat of the sun, have

developed a resistant case-hardened surface. On their southern faces weathering

of the feldspars has progressed normally, assisting in the crumbling of the rock.

Thus it is that the southern faces of tors and the underneath surfaces of supported

boulders are sometimes hollowed out (see pl. xvii, fig. 2). Tall monolithic forms

are quite abundant.

THE CAMBALAPIEN OUTCROPS

A ridge elevated one or two hundred feet above the general level of the sur-

rounding country extends southward to Mount Boothby from the area of granite

outcropping at Crotty’s Knob and Binnie’s Lookout. Though outcrops have not

been located between Crotty’s Knob and Mount Boothby, there is good reason to

believe that granite, at moderate depth, does underly the surface sands and traver-

tine crusts of that belt of country.

To the south, beyond Mount Boothby, the ridge gradually fades out within

a couple of miles. In this area, however, the underlying granite comes to the

surface at a number of isolated spots as indicated in the sketch map herewith

(p. 265), in which each outcrop is numbered to facilitate reference in the text

to follow.

The outcrops (numbers 17 to 28) on the southern end of the Mount

Boothby rise are grouped together in this account as the Cambalapien

outcrops. Once upon a time that region was taken up by an over-optimistic

‘pesnnennsonnenan sian

265

pastoralist and named Cambalapien sheep station, only to be abandoned at a later

date. The ruin of the former homestead is situated on the western side of

outcrop 20.

Outcrop 18 is no more than a low ledge about 40 yards across. Outcrop 20

consists of a group of upstanding tors and crags aligned in an approximately north

to south direction, covering a length of almost 500 yards by a width of 200 yards.

Tors are met with as much as 22 yards long by 30 feet in height; where they are

upstanding, the profile of the northern face of each of the masses is of convex

curvature, while the southern face is an almost vertical wall. At the extreme

south end of this chain the rock is of finer grain. The rock of some parts of the

GRANITE OUTCROPS a TO 28) WEST OF TINTINARA

N /

fia (

12 ARMCHAIR

0 » ROCKS Pia

{ oa Foad

MM? BOOTHBY a TH REEDY WELLS 10 KE,

‘ail Fe a eS,

rs & — _ AN

“vy

SAGE SE Es alas

o17 OC”

19 248 0.

CAMBALAPIEN+ “9 20 TOR ROCK

WHALEBACK 99 or

ROCKS Og "OTT totter ett

j THE MONOLITH

UMBRELLA S i?

day ROCKS ‘

B22 ae,

: Tyee

903 Mae +0 wet ie

2ad ‘ a.

§25 40 BO" A

TOLMER'S

026 1 ROCK

Sa7

R28

ALE

° t BMILES

eS eed

outcrop is better described as a microgranite ; in some places it is miarolitic. Veins

containing green fluorspar occur in one of the Cambalapien outcrops.

Outcrop 21 is a comparatively high craggy mass with some cave development

due to weathering along joints. One feature is a small umbrella-rock due to

cavernous weathering on the underside of a perched tor. We were not able to

visit the chain of outcrops south of 21, but by their bearings were able to plot them

roughly on the map.

PETROGRAPHY

Rock [5783]

A potash-soda-leucogranite, representative of outcrop 21, is the most typical

and general of the Cambalapien granites. It is fine- to medium-grained and com-

posed mainly of buff-coloured potash-feldspar, light smoky-grey quartz, sub-

ordinate off-white plagioclase, and a very little black mica.

266

Microscopic Observations—It is holocrystalline, allotriomorphic to hypidio-

morphic granular. The coarsest constituent is perthitic orthoclase which fre-

quently exhibits a porphyritic tendency, individuals appearing up to over 6 mm.

diameter. The average diameter of the quartz and plagioclase is about 1 mm.

The quartz is glassy clear but for sporadic patches with minute liquid inclusions.

Occasionally to be observed enveloping the quartz grains are micrographic inter-

growths of quartz and feldspar in which the quartz is in optical continuity with

that of the central quartz grain.

The feldspar is mainly a coarse microperthite which is invariably somewhat

cloudy due to incipient alteration; it often exhibits Carlsbad twinning. The

plagioclase component is apparently nearly pure albite but exhibits, only to a

limited degree, twinning on the albite law. The free plagioclase, which occurs in

small but well-formed crystals, is also apparently almost 100% albite. Only

rarely is pericline twinning evident.

Biotite is the only other constituent present in any quantity, It is in small

irregular flakes averaging about 0°5 mm. diam., and exhibits strong pleochroism:

X = light-yellowish brown, Y= Z= very deep brown to deep greenish-brown.

Minute apatites and zircons with haloes are commonly included in the biotite.

Elsewhere through the rock tiny apatites, zircons and a few specks of black iron-

ore are also met with, though rarely.

A noteworthy accessory constituent is fluorite, which is usually colourless

but occasionally exhibits purple spots. More usually it is associated with the

biotite, occasionally idiomorphic, with the mica wrapping around it. Fluorite also

appears up to 0°S mm. diameter in association with the quartz and feldspar; one

idiomorphic crystal is embedded in the quartz and certainly has every appearance

of being a primary constituent of the rock.

A chemical analysis of this rock is given in the table on page 267. The

mode determined by Rosiwal measurements and the calculated norm are stated

below.

MopE Norm

Quartz - 41-3 Quartz - - 37°38 Magnetite - - 0-81

Perthite - 41-7 Orthoclase - 28°36 Ilmenite - - 0-15

Albite - - 14:8 Albite - - - 29-34 Calcite - - ~ 0-20

Biotite - 2-0 Anorthite - - 1-11 Fluorite - - 0-31

Fluorite - 0-2 Corundum - 1:22 H:O - - = 0°38

—— Hypersthene - 0-89

100-0 Total 100-15

The C.I.P.W. classification is: I. 4. 1. 2.

Rocx [5786]

Potash-soda leucogranite from the south end of outcrop 20, as viewed in the

hand-specimen, is not very different from [5783] but is somewhat granophyric.

With the aid of a pocket lense there can be distinguished occasional purple grains

of fluorite embedded in the mica.

Microscopic Observations—-The feldspars are both large microperthites,

occasionally exhibiting a marginal zone rich in graphically intergrown quartz, and

also plagioclase, with albite and pericline twinning, whose optical properties

correspond to pure albite. A rough measurement indicates that this albite is

present to the extent of about 10% by volume.

Though there is present a very little muscovite, the main bulk of the mica

is greenish-brown biotite amounting to nearly 5% of the rock. Accessory

minerals are fluorspar and zircon, both of which are usually in association with

267

TABLE A

Chemical Composition of the Granites

T II Til IV Vv VI VII

SiOz 76°77 75°18 76-81 73°67 73°77 74-08 71-28

ALOs 12-53 12-89 12-38 13°55 13-06 13-50 14-05

FeOs 0-56 0-60 0-28 0-61 0:72 0-60 1-13

FeO . 0-69 1-07 0-78 1:66 1°43 1-64 1-94

MnO 0-08 0-02 0-01 0-01 0-05 0-03 0-05

MgO 0-04 0-04 0-09 0-22 0-12 0-16 0-33

CaO . 0°58 1-04 0-53 1-05 0-89 1-09 1-81

NazO 3°47 3-59 3-79 3-41 3-55 3°86 3°56

K:0 .. 4-83 5-06 4-70 5-01 5-44 4-19 4-78

HeO-+- 0-26 0-37 0-34 0-24 0°57 0-23 0-37

20 — 0-12 trace 0-14 0-08 0-11 0-06 0-09

TiOs .. 0-08 0-14 0-11 0-26 0-18 0°24 0-37

POs .. 0-03 trace 0-02 0-06 0-08 0-04 0-13

ZrOz .. 0-01 —_ _ trace 0-01 0-02 0-03

BaO 0-04 — _ 0-02 0-06 0-03 0-02

COz . 0-08 _ 0-03 0-23 0-16 _ 0-15

F 0-14 0-15 0-10 0-14 0-04 0-16 0-09

ci aise 0-04 trace — 0-08

S 0-03 ood —_ 0-01 0-02 0-04 0-01

100-34 100-15 100-11 100-27 100-26 99-97 100-27

Less O for

F,C1,&$ 0-07 0-07 0-04 0-06 0-02 0-06 0-04

Total .... 100-27 100-08 100-07 100-21 100-24 99-91 100-23

Specific

Gravity .... 2:612 2°63 2-603 2-631 2-613 2-784 2-654

VI.

VII.

Potash-soda leucogranite (5783) from Cambalapien (Tintinara District).

Analyst: E, R. Segnit.

Potash-soda leucogranite (3796) from Binnie’s Water (Coonalpyn Dis-

trict). Analyst: L. W. Parkin (see Ref. 2).

Potash-soda leucogranite (5785) from Section 123, Hundred of Wirrega

Analyst: W. B. Dallwitz (see Ref. 3).

Potash-soda granite (5793) from Armchair Rocks (Tintinara District).

Analyst: E. R. Segnit.

Potash-soda quartz-porphyry (4426) from Mount Monster (Keith Dis-

District).

trict). Analyst: W. B. Dallwitz (see Ref. 3).

Potash-soda hornblende-biotite granite (5097) from Crotty’s Knob

Analyst: E. R. Segnit (see Ref. 2).

(5792) from Tolmer’s

(Coonalpyn District).

Horntlende-biotite-adamellite

Analyst: E. R. Segnit.

District).

Rock (Tintinara

the mica. An elongate grain of colourless fluorspar 1 mm. in length was observed

embedded in feldspar.

Rocx [5790]

Another type of Potash-soda leucogranite, from outcrop 20, is strongly

granophyric while finer and more irregular in grainsize than [5873]. Its fabric

268

illustrates a transitional stage towards microgranite. It is slightly miarolitic. The

dominant feldspar is reddish-brown. In one of the hand specimens there is visible

a grain of purple fluorite 1-5 mm. diameter.

Microscopic Observations—The most abundant constituent is clouded micro-

perthite. Plagioclase (albite), as separate individuals, is present to the extent of

only a few per cent. Most of the quartz is in coarse graphic arrangement with

the microperthite but is also present as fine micrographic intergrowths, Biotite

with X == light-brown; Y = Z = dark olive-green is present in minor quantity.

Of accessory minerals, magnetite and zircon are rare. Fluorite is compara-

tively abundant, usually intergrown with the biotite but also met with in grains

up to 1 mm. by 0-8 mm. scattered elsewhere in the slide.

Rock [5791]

This is a leucocratic, aplitic, buff microgranite of general fine-grained nature

but with some porphyritic dark quartz grains. It is from the south end of

outcrop 20. It is finer-grained and contains less mica than the granite of other

parts of this mass. In the microscope slide it is seen to contain grains of fluorite,

not only associated with the biotite but as clear grains amongst the quartz and

feldspar and embedded in the latter. Some of the quartz is in micrographic inter-

growth with microperthite.

Rock [5787]

This is an aplitic microgranite from outcrop 18. It is very similar to [5786]

as viewed in the hand-specimen, but is characterised by the dark appearance of

the quartz grains.

Microscopic Observations—Clouded microperthite is abundant as coarse

crystals; these contain a notable amount of plagioclase intergrown with it. On

the other hand, there is a paucity of free plagioclase (Ab),An,) as compared with

rock [5783]. A small amount of strongly pleochroic biotite is present: X =

straw-yellow, Y = Z= very dark brown. The accessories are zircon, magnetite

and fluorite.

OUTCROPS OF THE EAST SIDE OF THE MOUNT BOOTHBY RIDGE

This group is taken to comprise outcrops 7 to 9 and 12 to 16, representing

a considerable area of granite, but mainly low-lying and inconspicuous occur-

rences, Those like 8 and 9 are so flat and unrelieved as to be easily overlooked

even by an observer in the close vicinity. Outcrop 7 is a high rock of limited

area. Numbers 15 and 16 are larger areas but are partly hidden by a thin cover-~

ing of sandy regolith,

PETROGRAPHY

Rocx [5795]

Biotite granite from the foot of the Mount Boothby Range on the east side.

This location is outcrop 14 just south of a dry dam, close to a boundary fence,

some 3 mile west of the south-east corner of P.L. 1577. From Tintinara Railway

Station this lies about 15 miles on a west-by-north bearing. The rock is a medium-

grained biotite-granite in which the quartz is somewhat smoky. The ferro-

magnesian constituent is more abundant than in rock [5783] of the Cambalapien

outcrop.

Microscopic Observations—Microperthite is plentiful as individuals up to

6 mm. in length. Plagioclase, though in considerably less amount, is also a

major constituent; it is in smaller, strongly zoned crystals up to 1-5 mm. in length,

often in clustered arrangement. Optical measurements on selected examples of

zoned crystals indicate an inner zone composition of Ab, )An,, ranging to

269

Ab,,;An,, without. It was further estimated that their average composition

approximates to Ab,,An,, (oligoclase). A small scale development of a fine

mytmeketic intergrowth with quartz is to be noted around some of the plagioclases.

Quartz, in large symmetrical grains, is next in abundance to the feldspars.

Biotite, pleochroic from light yellow-brown, is present to the extent of about

5 or 6 per cent. There is also about 1% of a hornblende, pleochroic from light

brownish-green to dark green, These ferromagnesian minerals are usually closely

associated, but no reaction relation is indicated.

Accessory minerals are grains of ilmenitic black iron-ore occasionally partly

leucoxenized: apatite in tiny rods; zircon in small crystals; also occasional tiny

sphenes which are usually grouped in close association with the ferromagnesian

minerals. There has been noted also one very small grain of fluorspar and a grain

of calcite 0-5 mm. in length enclosed within an assemblage of biotites.

Rock [6045]

Biotite-hornblende-adamellite from Tor Rock (outcrop 7). In the hand-

specimen this does not differ greatly from [6046], but the quartz is not so regularly

distributed.

Microscopic Observations—The potash feldspar is observed to be mainly

orthoclase but grades into microperthite. It is much altered in places. The plagio-

clase is zoned from Ab,,An,, within to AbgoAn,, without; a sericitic clouding is

observed in some individuals. The biotite is much altered to chlorite. Horn-

blende is rare.

Bright, brown pleochroic sphene up to 1-8 mm. in length is commonly asso-

ciated with the biotite. The accessories are black iron-ore, apatite, and zircon;

all are rare. Occasional grains of yellow epidote have developed.

OUTCROPS IN THE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF ARMCHAIR ROCKS

To the west of Reedy Wells the track rises some 60 feet on to a low timbered

platform from which rise granite tors and whalebacks. Judging by the extent

of timbered country the granitic area in this region is quite considerable. At

about 1 mile west of Reedy Wells there are some outcrops of unusual shape. One

of these, weathered out to form a comfortable seat (see pl. xvii, fig. 2) suggested

the name of Armchair Rocks for the locality. Another unusual erosion form is

illustrated in pl. xvii, fig. 1.

About 400 yards further to the west-north-west are some high tors, one

(pl. xviii, fig. 1) quite 30 feet in height. Within 2 miles west of Reedy Wells is

the low face of granite shown in pl. xviii, fig. 2.

Rock [5793] PETROGRAPHY

Biotite-hornblende-adamellite from the eastern outcrop at Armchair Rock

is medium to coarse-grained and macroscopically very like [5792], though some-

what coarser. In general appearance it bears a resemblance to [5783], but in

this case the feldspar is all yellowish-buff. It presents an evenly mottled appear-

ance, resulting from coarser feldspar-rich areas distributed among finer-grained

aggregates richer in somewhat-smoky quartz and ferromagnesian minerals.

Microscopic Observations—The hypidiomorphic to allotriomorphic granular

texture is modified by a glomeroporphyritic tendency of the quartz.

The larger and more abundant feldspar is a somewhat cloudy microperthite,

present as individuals up to 8 mm. in length; the plagioclase constituent occurs

as blebs and filaments about 0-03 mm. thick along intersecting planes. Plagioclase,

which is always clear compared with the potash feldspar, also occurs in the

270

general body of the rock, as small strongly zoned, usually anhedral crystals;

optical measurements show the range of composition to be from Ab,,An,. in the

case of the minor zone to Ab, An,, without. The average grade of this plagio-

clase is oligoclase about Abg, An,;.

The ferromagnesian mineral is principally biotite, whose pleochroism is X =

light brownish-yellow, Y= Z = very dark brown, almost opaque. There is a very

little greenish hornblende. There is evidence that some at least of the biotite was

developed at the expense of the amphibole.

Accessory minerals are zircon, apatite, black iron-ore, and rarely, sphene.

There was observed only one doubtful grain of fluorspar.

A chemical analysis appears in the table on page 267.

The Norm is as follows:

Quartz ~ - 32-28 Magnetite - 9-93

Albite - ~ 28-82 Apatite - - O14

Anorthite -~ 2°78 Calcite - -~ 6-60

Corundum ~ 1-43 Fluorite - - 0:31

Hypersthene - 2-58 H20 - - 0-32

Total 100-27

The C.I.P.W. classification is: I. 4.2.3.

As the slide area available was small compared with the grain-size, an

approximate value only was obtained for the Mode, namely, as follows: quartz

37°1%, microperthite 33-6%, plagioclase 25-09%, biotite and accessories 4°37.

The values obtained are sufficient to indicate that it is a potash-soda granite com-

ing within the adamellite sub-group.

Rock [5782]

Biotite-hornblende-adamellite from the northern outcrop at the Armchair

Rocks locality. It is a medium-grained granite generally similar to [5793], though

more even in texture. Here, however, the small plagioclases are distinguishable

owing to their white appearance.

Microscopic Observations—The slide reveals the presence of a larger propor-

tion of amphibole to biotite than in [5793]; also a greater abundance of apatite

and zircon. The zoned plagioclases were found to range between Ab,, An,

within to Abg, An,, without. The more anorthitic central areas show a tendency

to clouding, while the albitic outer zones are always quite fresh.

Rock [5788]

Biotite-hornblende-adamellite is an example of the normal type of granite of

outcrop 11. It is a medium to fine, even-grained rock in which the slightly-smoky

quartz shows up well among the off-white to faintly buff feldspar. In the hand-

specimen it resembles [5788].

Microscopically examined, this rock was found to have no special features

not met with in other granites of the neighbourhood. The quantity of horn-

blende is perhaps greater than usual. The biotite is observed to have been

derived from the hornblende. Accessories are apatite, zircon and ilmenitic black

iron-ore partly leucoxenized.

Rocx [5794]

Biotite-hornblende-adamellite, from a large tor of the western extensions of

outcrop 10, is a medium- to coarse-grained rock bearing a close resemblance

to [5793].

271

Microscopic Observations—But for the presence of more hornblende, the

slide presents very similar features to that of [5793]. The hornblende is strongly

pleochroic: X == light brownish-green, Y = Z = dark green; it usually occurs in

association with the biotite. The quartz exhibits cracking and undulatory extinc-

tion. Microcline-perthite is present. The plagioclase is strongly zoned, ranging

from Abg, Ang, to Aby, Ang, in which the albite zone is very narrow.

Accessories comprise an unusually large amount of both apatite and sphene,

some black iron-ore and leucoxene and a little zircon.

A Rosiwal modal measurement gave quartz 34-0%, microperthite 35°2%,

plagioclase 26°6%, biotite 3-2%, hornblende 06%, and accessories 04%.

Rock [5794a]

Potash-soda-leucogranite also from the western part of outcrop 10, is a

coarser rock than [5794]. The quartzes are distinctly smoky and the biotites.

notable; also pinkish potash feldspar of larger size and small whitish plagio-

clases are a feature.

Microscopic Observations—Coatse microcline and microcline-perthite are a

feature, and they occasionally contain graphically intergrown quartz. Orthoclases

are present of rather larger size than usually appear in these granites. There is

evidence that large, first-formed, orthoclases were subsequently affected by late-

magmatic mother liquors resulting in the introduction of albite and quartz. The

plagioclase is rather free from zoning and has optical characters of an albite

(Ab,, An,). ‘

The ferromagnesian mineral is mainly biotite, but there is also a very small

quantity of greenish hornblende. There are several small radial patches of a

chloritic substance evidently representing an altered ferromagnesian mineral.

Accessory minerals noted are black iron-ore, tiny zircons, rods of apatite and one

small grain of greenish fluorite.

OUTCROPS IN THE VICINITY OF TOLMER’S ROCK

Included in this section are those numbered 1 to 6 on the map (page 265).

An area of nearly half-a-mile around Tolmer’s Rock is a feature of the landscape

for, (a) it is clothed in a growth of relatively high eucalypts which contrast with

the low banksia scrub of the surrounding sandy plains; (b) it is elevated some-

what above the surrounding country. The summit of the highest granite mass.

is 125 feet above the ground surface at Reedy Wells.

Granite appears at intervals over an area about 300 yards in diameter around

Tolmer’s Rock (outcrop 1). It reappears as a small face to the west at number 4

and as a long ridge, numbers 2 and 3, located to the east-north-east. Rock [5792]

of number 1 is obviously more biotitic than that from Cambalapien, and it appears

to weather somewhat more readily.’ One tor has a cavern excavated in it to a

depth of about 10 feet, and there a large, partly assimilated xenolith [6044] was

observed,

Granite from the above-mentioned half-mile long, S.W. to N.E. trending

ridge which includes outcrops 2 and 3, is very like in appearance to that occurring

at Murray Bridge. The width of this ridge is only about 200 yards. There is,

there, in addition to the normal rock [6048], some intersecting veins of aplitic

microgranite [6047], and an occasional pegmatitic schliere.

Rock [6046] is from the Monolith (No. 5), which is a small isolated mass.

rising out of an extensive flat sandy area occupied by low scrub,

272

PETROGRAPHY

Rock [5792]

Hornblende-biotite-adamellite from Tolmer’s Rock (outcrop 1) is a coarse-

grained, pinkish granite in which can be seen light grey quartz, light pink felds-

par, yellowish-grey plagioclase and minor amounts of biotite and hornblende.

Microscopic Observations—The texture is coarse granitic. The quartz, in

clear anhedral crystals, tends to be distributed as glomeroporphyritic aggregates.

Liquid and gas inclusions are aligned along defined tracks, and some crystals

show slight undulose extinction.

Microperthite occurs in large anhedral individuals up to.8 mm. long; it is

but little affected by secondary clouding. Antiperthite, though rare, is recorded

in the slide. Plagioclase is present as abundant subhedral crystals of smaller size

than the potash feldspar; individuals reach 3 to 4 mm. in length. Slight zoning

is usually evidenced; in one case a range from Ab,, An,, within to Ab,, An,,

without was observed. Making allowance for the respective width of zones, it is

estimated that the average composition of this zoned crystal would be about

Abg, Anys.

The ferromagnesian minerals are biotite and hornblende; they are distinctly

more abundant than in the Cambalapien rocks. The biotite is pleochroic: X =

light brown, Y = Z= very dark brown, almost opaque. The flakes are often

clustered together into aggregates. Alteration to pleochroic green chlorite is to be

seen. Hornblende with pleochroism, X = yellow-brown, Y = very dark brown,

Z = dark green, is not so abundant as the biotite; the crystals are quite fresh,

subhedral in form and occur up to 0-8 mm. in length.

Accessories are rather abundant. Light-brown sphene often appears in

lozenge-shaped twinned crystals up to 0°5 mm. in length. Small embedded

apatites and grey zircons are common; grains of black iron-ore are frequently

associated with the biotite and hornblende. No fluorite has been observed in

slides examined.

A chemical analysis of this rock appears in the table on page 267. From it

the Norm as stated below has been computed. A Rosiwal measurement of the

Mode, made on two large slides, is given below; the quartz in this by comparison

with the Norm appears to be low; this may be so, for there is a tendency when

making slides of this rock to include more of the finer-grained quartz-rich areas

and to loose some of the feldspar-rich portions.

Mope Norm

Quartz - - 24-8 Quartz ~ - 28-08

Perthite - - 39-7 Orthoclase - 28-36

Plagioclase ~ 28:4 Albite ~- - 29°87

Biotite - - 4-0 Anorthite - - 6°67

Hornblende ~ 2:2 Corundum - 0-61

Magnetite - - 03 Hypersthene - 2-91

Sphene - - 0:3 Magnetite - 1-62

Apatite - - 02 Ilmenite - - 0-76

Zircon - - OQ 1 Apatite - - 0°34

— Fluorite - - 0-16

Total 100-0 Calcite - - O31

— H:O - - 0:46

100-15

The C.I.P.W. classification is: 1.3.23.

273

Rocx [6044]

This is a highly transfused portion of a large xenolith out of the adamellite

[5792] of Tolmer’s Rock. It is somewhat darker coloured than the enclosing

rock, with a fine-grained base through which are scattered irregular porphyritic

crystals of quartz, feldspar, hornblende and biotite. In the centre of the xenolith

there remain less-altered relics of hornfels, which suggest that the original rock,

later to be engulfed as a xenolith, was probably of a slaty nature.

‘Microscopic Observations—The fine-grained (about 0-2 mm.) base is an

equigranular aggregate of quartz and feldspar with subordinate biotite and horn-

blende ; embedded therein are occasional larger quartzes and feldspars, the latter

hypidiomorphic in form. As would be expected, the minerals of this transfused

xenolith are similar in composition to those of the embedding granite.

The quartz is clear with occasional patches of dusty inclusions. The larger

plagioclase crystals are up to 2 mm. in length; they are strongly and sharply zoned

into two parts, having the composition Ab,,An,, (andesine) within and

Ab, Anz, (oligoclase) without. Evidently when the process was arrested the

andesine was in progress of being made over to the oligoclase by sodic magmatic

liquors. Also there are present porphyritic (up to 4 mm.), slightly cloudy micro-

perthites.

Occasional very fine-grained, granophyric intergrowths of quartz and feldspar

are to be seen. Biotite and hornblende, the former preponderating, are similar in

nature to those of the granite. Accessories, apatite, magnetite, sphene and zircon

are rare except the first mentioned. :

A Rosiwal measurement indicates the percentage composition of the Mode

to be approximately as follows:

Quartz - - 38:6 Biotite - - 8-1

Microperthite - 36:7 Hornblende - 353

Plagioclase -~ 18-1 Apatite - - 0-2

Rock [6048]

This is a hornblende-biotite-adamellite from outcrop 2. In appearance it is

very similar to [5792], though coarser grained. The ferromagnesian minerals

are less abundant, while the quartz and feldspars show a greater tendency to form

clustered aggregates.

Microscopic Observations—This is a hypidiomorphic granular rock differing

from [5792] chiefly in its coarser grain and smaller amounts of ferromagnesian

minerals. The plagioclase is rather more strongly zoned, ranging from Ab, ,An,;

within to Ab,An,, without. An estimate of its average composition is Ab,.An,,

(oligoclase). It is twinned on the albite, pericline and Carlsbad laws. Some

crystals show slight secondary alteration of the inner zone with the development

of calcite, sericite and rarely, epidote.

Accessories are sphene (one crystal measuring 1-7 mm, x 1 mm.), magnetite,

apatite, zircon and a little fluorite.

Rosiwal measurements, based on three large slides, gave the Mode as:

Quartz ~ - 35-7 Biotite - - 3:7

Microperthite - 31-9 Hornblende -~ @-9

Plagioclase - 27-3 Accessories -. 05

As the feldspars are fairly uniformly distributed it is believed that the above

figures are relatively significant for them. In the case of the quartz, however,

its distribution in clustered aggregates probably vitiates the result; the quantity

ranged from 29% to 41% in the several slides which, however, may present an

unduly high proportion of quartz-rich sections of the rock.

274

Rock [6042]

Aplitic micro-adamellite from outcrop 2 occurs as a 3-feet wide dyke in the

main mass of the hornblende-biotite-adamellite [6048]. It is fine-grained,

yellowish-brown, and composed of light brown feldspar and quartz, plus a minute

quantity of biotite.

Microscopic Observations—It differs from the parent rock mainly in grain-size

and poverty in ferromagnesian minerals. The average grain-size is about 0-5 mm.

Orthoclase is present in irregular anhedral crystals somewhat larger than the

average grain-size. The plagioclase, which is anhedral to subhedral, has the com-

position Ab,,An,, and is not zoned. Biotite is present only in accessory propor-

tions. Other accessories which include black iron-ore, zircon, and apatite are

very rare. A little epidote and some sericite is present as a change product in the

plagioclase.

Rock [6046]

Biotite-hornblende-adamellite from the Monolith (outcrop 5) is finer grained

and greyer than [5792]. Quartz is more abundant. The two feldspars appear to be

present in nearly equal proportions. Distribution of the minerals is much more

even than in the case of [5792].

Microscopic Observations—The orthoclase, some of it microperthitic but

containing a very small proportion of plagioclase, tends to form larger crystals

(usually about 3 or 4 mm.) than the plagioclase individuals which are commonly

only about 1°5 mm. in length.

The plagioclase intergrown with the orthoclase occurs not only in the usual

irregular bands and patches, but also as a very fine, regular, parallel intergrowth

which, at first sight, may be taken for the albite twinning of plagioclase. The

plagioclases are usually not zoned in the case of the large individuals, but the

smaller ones are zoned. Unzoned crystals have a composition about Ab,,An,,

(oligoclase).

Biotite is plentiful but in places has been altered to a pleochroic, green chlorite

answering to penninite. Hornblende is in much smaller quantity than in [5792].

Accessories are not abundant ; they comprise light brown sphene, magnetite, apatite

and zircon.

A Rosiwal measurement gave the Mode as: quartz 380%, orthoclase and

perthite 31°8%, plagioclase 26°5%, biotite, etc., 3-8%.

CONCLUSIONS

The chemical composition of three type granites from the Tintinara district

are given in Table A, and with them are collected analyses of several of the more

typical key granites from other areas of the South-East.

In Table B are set out the average composition of some combinations of the

granites of Table A, and in addition, an analysis of the Dergholm granite of

Western Victoria and a tordrillite from Nevada. Column I is the average of the

three more leucocratic of our South-Eastern potash-soda granites. Column IT is

the mean of three less leucocratic examples, and which are, in fact, probably

more normal for the magma. Column III is the mean of both the above averages,

and so must be a close approximation to the magma typical of the batholyth as a

whole. Column IV is a further combination representing a somewhat more basic

variant, namely the mean of the composition of the granite of Tolmer’s Rock and

that of Column III which is the average of all the others in Table A. This latter

combination should illustrate a possible phase of the batholythic magma and is

275

observed to correspond rather closely to the composition of the Dergholm granite

stated in Column V.

TABLE B

I il III Iv Vv VI

SiQe ee 76°25 73°84 75-04 73°16 74°37 74-30

AkOs den See 12-60 13-37 12-98 13-51 13-01 13-29

FeeOz wie (Ea. 0°48 0-64 0-56 0-84 0-84 1-15

FeO in eth 0°85 1-58 1:21 1-57 1-12 0-10

MnO fue ths 0-04 0-03 0-04 0-05 0°17 trace

MgO viuk oolette 0-06 0-16 0-11 0:22 0-05 0-09

CaQin. ve ue 0-72 1-01 0-91 1-36 1-44 0-85

NazO me thu 3°61 3:61 3°61 3-58 3°17 3:75

K20 we 4-86 4-88 4:87 4°83 4-56 4-83

H.O+ fn A 0-32 0°35 0-34 0-36 0-52 0-50

HiOwma oh it 0-10 0-08 0-09 0-09 0-15 0-91

TiO: 24d. Paros 0-11 0-23 0-17 0-27 0°25 0-20

P.Os skit eet 0-02 0-06 0-04 0-08 trace 0-07

ZrOz ah ata 0-01 0-01 0-01 0-02 nil Ls

BaO Sen 0-03 0-04 0-04 0-03 nil nil

COa ee wtuk ahs 0-05 0-15 0°10 0-13 trace nil

F set cat antes 0-13 0-11 0-12 0-11 ~ —

Ces weed aut, — 0-02 6-01 0-04 trace —

S A ete WE, 0-01 0-02 0-01 0:01 0-04 0-03

100-25 100-19 100-26 100-26 99-69 100-07

Less O for Cl, F,

and Su. o. 0-06 0-05 0-05 0-06 0-01 0-01

Total ... 100-19 100-14 100-21 100-20 99-68 100-06

I. The average composition of three leucogranites I, I], and III of Table A

(page 266).

II. The average composition of the three potash-soda rocks IV, V and VI of

Table A.

III. The mean of columns I and II of this table thus representing the average

composition, of six characteristic leucocratic potash-soda granites of the

Upper South Eastern District of South Australia.

IV. A mean composition resulting from averaging the values in column III

above and column VII of Table A (granite from Tolmer’s Rock), which

latter represents a slightly more femic phase of these granites.

V. The chemical composition of the Dergholm (Western Victoria) granite.

This analysis was made by F. F. Field, of the Victorian Department of

Mines, for Mr. D. J. Mahony. Field’s analyses record also the follow-

ing: LiOe a trace; CoO, NiO and CreOs all nil.

VI. Tordrillite from Sweetwater, Nevada, Analyst: G. Steiger. Described

by J. E. Spurr, U.S.G.S. Bulletin 228 (1904).

The Dergholm granite, in addition to chemical affinity with the neighbouring

South Australian granites, is of similar appearance and mineral constitution. The

heavy minerals of the Dergholm granite (1) are also in reasonable agree-

ment with those of the granites of South-Eastern South Australia.

Professor E. W. Skeats, in reviewing (4) the granites of Victoria, has stated:

“The Dergholm granite in the Western District is an acid variety similar to the

granites of the Murray Bridge district and may be Pre-Cambrian.”

Finally, as there is no evidence contrary to this conclusion, it may be accepted

that the Dergholm granite is part of the batholyth which, extending from Murray

Bridge, occupies so much of the South-East of this State.

276

Near Hamilton in Western Victoria there is an ancient quartz-porphyry

underlying Miocene sediments; this closely resembles some phases of the rock of

the Mount Monster (near Keith, South Australia) outcrops. It may be a further

appearance within Victoria of the Murray Bridge magma.

Whether the latter was intruded in Pre-Cambrian times has yet to be proved,

for there has been advanced no evidence definitely precluding the consideration

of late-Cambrian as the period of its intrusion.

SUMMARY

An account of the distribution of ourcrops and nature of the granites of the

Tintinara District is given. This concludes a detailed survey of the granites of

South-Eastern South Australia.

Over a very wide area, apparently extending into Victoria, there is demon-

strated the existence of a large-scale granite batholyth, recognised until recently

as existing only in the region adjacent to Murray Bridge.

Fluorite as an accessory primary constituent occurs in the granite of many

of these outcrops that are of the nature of leucogranites. Where hornblende

makes its appearance, fluorite is usually absent. Accessory calcite also has been

observed in clear grains which appear to be a primary constituent.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Our thanks are due to Mr. L. H. Mincham and Mr. H. E. E. Brock for

assistance in the field. We are indebted to Dr. Frank Stillwell for locating and

communicating a chemical analysis of the Dergholm granite.

REFERENCES

1 Baxer, G. 1942 The Heavy Minerals of some Victorian Granitic Rocks,

Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 54, 2

2 Mawson, D., and Parkin, L. W. 1943 Some Granitic Rocks of South-

Eastern South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (2)

3 Mawson, D., and Dattwrrz, W. B. 1944 Palaeozoic Igneous Rocks of

Lower South-Eastern South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (2)

4 Sxeats, E,W. 1931 The Age, Distribution, and Petrological Characters of

the Granites of Eastern Australia, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 43, (2)

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES

PiatE XVI

Fig. 1—Granite masses outcropping at Tolmer’s Rock. The figures are L. H.

Mincham and H. E. EF. Brock. Photo by D. Mawson. Fig, 2—Outcropping granite

masses of the Armchair Rock group. Photo by D. Mawson.

PLaTE XVII

Fig. 1—A granite monolith of peculiar form developed by weathering processes

from the neighbourhood of Armchair Rock. Photo by D. Mawson. Fig. 2—Armchair

Rock, located one mile west of Reedy Wells. The northern side is protected from

weathering by superficial case-hardening. On the shaded side, weathering and erosion

have been active, hollowing it out as-shown. The figure is L. H. Mincham. Photo by

D. Mawson.

PiLate XVIII

Fig. 1A granite mass situated several hundred yards to the north-west of Arm-

chair Rock. Photo by D. Mawson. Fig. 2—A whaleback outcrop (Car Rocks) located

west of Armchair Rock. Photo by D. Mawson. Fig. 3—Granite outcrops in the

vicinity of Tolmer’s Rock. Photo by D. Mawson. Fig. 4—Tor Rock (outcrop 7).

Photo by E. R. Segnit.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Atst., 1945 Vol. 69, Plate XVI

Fig. 2

1945

Vol. 69,

Plate XVIL

Trans. Roy. Sov. S. Aus

» 1945 Vol. 69, Plate XVILL

SOME ASPECTS OF THE GEOMORPHOLOGY OF PORTION OF THE

MOUNT LOFTY RANGES

BY R. C. SPRIGG (READ 13 SEPTEMBER 1945)

Summary

This contribution to the physiography and development of the Mount Lofty Ranges is the outcome

of extensive geological reconnaissance mapping along the western slopes of the range. Certain of its

more essential features formed the physiographic section of a thesis dealing with geological

investigations carried out in the western Mount Lofty foothills. The scope of the work has since

been expanded considerably.

277

SOME ASPECTS OF THE GEOMORPHOLOGY OF PORTION OF THE

MOUNT LOFTY RANGES

By R. C. Sprice

[Read 13 Sept. 1945]

Piates XIX anp XX

CONTENTS Page

INTRODUCTION - - - - : - 7 : 277

THE AREA : - - - r - : 279

GEOMORPHOLOGY - : “ - - - - - 279

Part I—LANp Form ANALYSIS - - - “ - - - 279

Altimetric Frequency Curves - - - - - - - 281

Strip High-Point Profiles - - - - - - - 282

Reconstructed or Generalized Contours - - - - - 285

Profile Projections in the Plane of the Meridian - - - - 287

Summary of Part I - - - - - - - - 288

Part I]—Hypro.ocy

Quantitative Hydrophysical Factors - - - - - - 290

Stream Orders - - - - - - - . 290

Drainage Density - - - - - - - - 292

Stream Frequency - - - - - - - - 292

Bifurcation Ratio - - . - - - . - 292

Stream Length Ratio es - - - - - - 292

Ratio p - : - - - - - = 292

Laws of Drainage Composition: - - - - - - 292

(1) The Law of Stream Numbers - - = - - 292

(2) The Law of Stream Lengths - - - - = 292

Comments on Values of Hydrophysical Factors of the Torrens and

Onkaparinga Drainage Basins - - - - - - 293

Analysis of Trunk Streams using Polar Diagrams with References to the

Evolution of the River Torrens—A Theory of River Capture - - 295

Some Observations - - - - - - - - 298

Tributaries of the River Torrens — - - - - - 299

Fifth, Fourth, Third, Second and Bot Creeks - - - - 299

Brownhill Creek - - - - - - 300

River Sturt - - - - - - - - 301

Notes on Examptes of River Piracy - - - - - . 301

Summary of Part II - - - - - - - - 302

REFERENCES Sie kee a - - - - - 302

INTRODUCTION

This contribution to the physiography and development of the Mount Lofty

Ranges is the outcome of extensive geological reconnaissance mapping along the

western slopes of the range. Certain of its more essential features formed the

- physiographic section of a thesis dealing with geological investigations carried out

in the western Mount Lofty foothills.“ The scope of the work has since been

expanded considerably.

The paper has been divided into two sections. The first portion consists of

land-form analysis. An attempt has been made to establish more definitely the

@) Sprigg, R. C., Thesis for Degree of Master of Science, Adelaide University.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 5.A., 69, (2), 30 November 1945

278

LOCALITY PLAN

ne TANUNDA

AM Kifchene

4! Lofty

@Ry Bather

of (TURRAY -

yy, BRIDGE

"VICTOR

HARBOUR

Fig 1 Locality Plan, showing portion of the Mount Lofty “Horst” Range.

fracture-pattern of the fault blocks constituting the Mount Lofty Horst and their

relative degrees of movement; to describe the topography of the early Tertiary

erosion surface and its relationship to the present-day land forms.

Part IT is a description of the hydrology of portion of the area, with special

reference to the history of some of the streams of the western escarpment.

279

THE AREA

The area investigated comprises a rectangular strip across the Mount Lofty

Ranges, extending from Angaston in the north to McLaren Vale in the south.

To the west it is bordered by St. Vincent Gulf, and to east by the eastern escarp-

ment fault of the Mount Lofty Ranges. In the direction of longitude and latitude

the area extends 50 and 40 miles respectively.

GEOMORPHOLOGY

The Mount Lofty Ranges form part of a major meridional “horst” region

bounded on the west by the St. Vincent Gulf-Adelaide Plains Senkungsfeld, and

on the east by the Murravian Basin.

The conception of the Gulf and Range regions of the axial area of South

Australia as a fault-block system we owe to Dr. W. N. Benson (1911). This

theory has been developed and accepted by other workers, notably Dr. C. Fenner

(1930 and 1931), who produced a major work on the subject.

The “range” region consists of a number of fault blocks, elevated differen-

tially above the bordering alluvial plains. The principal fault escarpments are

weil defined.

In early Tertiary times much of South Australia had been reduced to a “base

surface” (term preferred to peneplain—see Horton, 1945), The land surface

was “old and fully dissected.” This erosion surface was then buried by Tertiary

lacustrine and marine deposits (the overmass sediments). Block faulting began

later in the Tertiary Period. Differential movements of the various fault blocks,

particularly those near Adelaide, resulted in warping and tilting. The new cycle

of erosion which now began has removed the bulk of the overmass sediments as

well as much of the early Tertiary erosion surface.

Topography in the vicinity of the major fault escarpments is “young, well

dissected.” Dissection has proceeded more rapidly along the western aspect of

the range by reason of greater rainfall (relative “rainshadow” to the east) and

higher gradients. In the central (plateau) area, mature characters are more in

evidence. The topography there is “young, little dissected,” and, therefore,

strongly resembles the original erosion surface. In such regions stream gradients

and drainage densities are lower than at the escarpments.

Where stream erosion is powerful, more particularly in the western regions,

gorges, waterfalls and rapids are prominent features.

PART I. LAND FORM ANALYSIS FROM TOPOGRAPHICAL MAPS

Sufficient of the old erosion surface still remains to allow a satisfactory

reconstruction of the block-fault pattern and the relations of the various blocks.

To aid in such reconstruction a special topographic map was prepared by the

author and submitted as part of the original thesis. In it spot altitudes (selected

from military survey maps) were used. The levels selected were all “high spots,”

and these formed the basis of a contour plan in which erosion by minor streams

was disregarded. :

Since the thesis was submitted for examination the author has found that

other improved techniques have been devised. These are described in the follow-

ing pages, and the results of their application to the area in question are incor-

porated in this paper.

In a paper presented to the Royal Society of New South Wales, Mr. W. H.

Maze (1944) described several techniques of land-form analysis which have been

developed in recent years. He examined the methods, made slight modifications

280

and applied them to areas in New South Wales, for which topographic maps pre-

pared by the Military Survey of Australia are available.

These maps have a scale of one inch to one mile with a contour interval of

50 feet. More recent editions are gridded into areas 1,000 yards square and so,

sa Tertiary: Sediments

~Z Alluvium”

Aor Kiltchener

a aPewsey Vale Peak

WILLIAMS TOWN

BIROWOOD

MP TORRENS

PALMER

fans Gharles AME Beevor

a Filsell Hill /

f » a

y PU OAKBANK ce

Wy w

a at

1 \

a Disher Hilt \

oa |

\ §&

4 Birfks- Hill a

S Gifford Hil & r ,

i a

MEADOWS

a Bulls Knob

Fig. 2 Key plan to the Central Mount Lofty Ranges

in Maze’s words, “readily present small units suitable for any statistical methods

of relief analysis.” The accuracy of the maps has been set out by F. A. Vance

(1940). It is not suitable for the determination of minor features in the land-

scape, but it is sufficient for the preparation of generalized maps for use in the

reconstruction of old land forms and erosion surfaces now in the course of dis-

section.

281

The three principal methods of analysis applied by Maze are closely followed,

with certain small modifications, in this paper. The reader is referred to that

author’s paper if further details are required.

All three methods are based upon data obtainable from topographic maps.

In South Australia the military survey maps are the only ones which are satis-

factory, being gridded into 1,000 yard squares. From these maps a special base

plan is prepared showing the grid squares for the area under analysis. “In each

square the height of the highest point in the corresponding square of the topo-

graphic map” is recorded. “The value of the height of the highest point in each

square” is plotted “as the height shown by the contour encircling the highest

area in each square and reckoned as having a value up to 50 feet above that

height” (Maze).

The size of the mesh of readings is very significant. With this in mind Maze

tested a coarser and a finer mesh of readings. A mesh of 4,000 yards was found

to give insufficient information in some areas, while one of 250 yards “was found

in sample areas, to give essentially the same results as the 1,000 yards grid

squares.” The military grid of 1,000 yards is, therefore, regarded as sufficiently

detailed in the case of major land-form surfaces.

This plan of the “high-point” values of the area to be analysed is all that is

required for the three methods described below. For the central Mount Lofty

Ranges area selected by the author almost 5,000 values for “high points” were

recorded.

ALTIMETRIC FREQUENCY CURVES

By this method the values of the “high-points” are listed and arranged to

give the frequency of occurrence of each height. From such frequencies a

frequency curve has been constructed, showing the altitudinal distribution of such

FREQUENCY OF OCCURRENCE.

4.2 3 @ S$ 6 7 8 D 1 HH IBIS 1 IS 46 17 18 19 20 Bt 22 23 4B 5 F 9 WU AD dS NT 49 2A BS

ALTITUDE

(i hundreds of feet}

Fig. 3 Altimetric frequency curves for the Central Mount Lofty Ranges

“high-points” over the central Mount Lofty Ranges. In fig. 3A, the frequencies

have been plotted against altitudinal intervals of 50 feet. However, as Maze

points out, the grouping of the frequencies for an additional range of 50 feet is

unsatisfactory when dealing with any erosional surface. In the Adelaide region

block “warping” and “tilting” has introduced an additional factor which renders

such grouping of little value. An altitudinal interval of 200 feet (fig. 3B) is

therefore more satisfactory, although both curves give essentially the same results.

From a study of these two diagrams it is immediately apparent that there

are broad areas ranging between 1,100 and 1,600 feet with maximum development

between 1,400 and 1,500 feet. Slightly more than 40% of the total readings fall

into the former altitudinal range which constitutes approximately 22% of the

282

maximum altitude recorded for the area. This suggests the presence of an

extensive tract of erosion surface within the 1,100-1,600 foot range.

The even distribution of the altitudinal frequencies suggests that tilting and

warping of the ancient erosion surface has been general. To examine further such

possibilities, a new technique of displaying the altimetric frequency data has been

introduced by the author. It is intended to display the altitude frequencies in

such a manner as to give a “summary profile” for the whole area. Altitude

frequencies have been totalled successively to give a summation curve when plotted

against height above sea level. The height above sea level has been plotted against

the vertical axis in altitudinal intervals. of 50 feet, 2200.9

200:

HEIGHT ABOVE SEA LEVEL

{ ia feet)

2000 3000

Frequency SUMMATION

Fig. 4 Summation Profile

The diagram (fig. 4) produced in this manner shows a very smooth disposi-

tion of altitude frequencies. There are no abrupt interruptions in the summary

profile to indicate large areas of horizontally disposed erosional surfaces. How-

ever, there is the marked flattening of the curve between 1,100 and 1,600 feet

which is not likely to be wholly fortuitous, and warrants the deduction that the

old erosion surface is most widely preserved within this range. That the flatten-

ing of the curve is not as marked as might have been expected from our conception

of the original erosion surface is not difficult to explain. The degree of perfec-

tion of the original peneplain surface (Early Tertiary) and the extent of deeper

(modern) stream dissection have a considerable effect on the resultant altimetric

frequency curves. Also warping of block surfaces serves to mask further the

distribution of high level erosion surfaces. This block tilt and warping will be

discussed below.

strip “Hicu-Poinr”’ Prorites

The second method used in this paper consists in the drawing up of what

Maze calls “strip ‘high-point’ profiles.” These are constructed by selecting the

highest point from a strip 3,000 yards wide (i.e. from three adjacent grid-

squares) at 1,000 yards intervals along the line of section. The separate profiles

represent strips 10,000 yards apart from centre to centre. Such a summary of

high-point elevations covers 30% of the total area, and by eliminating recent

minor erosional features emphasises major erosional surfaces and prominent

structural features.

Nine strip profiles have been prepared for the Mount Lofty area, and the

approximate location of the centres of each strip is indicated in fig, 5.

Profile A.A’.: Two, or possibly three, erosional surfaces and a surface of

accumulation are indicated. The surface of aggradation (westernmost) is that of

coalesced alluvial outwash fans at the eastern margin of the Adelaide Plains. Of

the two major erosion surfaces the lower one, which occurs between 500 and

283

800 feet, is complex. There is evidence that it can be subdivided to correspond

with the northern extensions of the differentially raised Para and Mount Gawler

fault blocks. The downward dip beyond the relatively flat area to the east on this

2 KMT Lorry

~ if

MT. BARKER

Fig. 5 Strip “high-point” profiles for the Central Mount Lofty Ranges

section probably marks the approximate location of the Eden fault (E). The

Para fault (P) marks the western boundary of the lower erosional surface. The

combined surface presented is in part the result of recent erosion in soft over-

284

mass (Tertiary) sediments. These sediments overlie the early Tertiary “pene-

plain” surface which is responsible for so much of the flat sky-line scenery to be

seen in the Mount Lofty Ranges. Remnants of this fossil erosion surface “out-

crop” on the western aspect of this section.

The higher erosional surface lies between 1,400 and 1,800 feet and constitutes

a well-defined plateau delineated on its western and eastern margins by the

Kitchener (K) and Palmer (Pl) faults respectively. This major fault block is

tilted to the east.

Profile B.B’.: In general outline this profile is similar to Profile A.A’. The

Para escarpment fault is now clearly defined. Pewsey Vale Peak (2,064 feet),

the high point on the profile, is probably a monadnock “inherited” by the present

erosion cycle.

Profile C.C’.: Save that the Para (P) and Eden (FE) faults are more pro-

minent, profile C.C’. closely resembles the two above.

Profile D.D’.: Although the relationships between the various surfaces of the

profile are still much the same, the relative importance of the various fault escarp-

ments has altered considerably. The Eden fault is rapidly becoming the most

prominent, while the Kitchener fault is scarcely recognisable. Little or no east-

ward block tilting can be recognised between the Eden and Palmer faults, The

average elevation of the major erosion surface is approximately 1,500 feet. Only

small areas of overmass (Tertiary) sediments remain on the area represented by

this profile.

Profile E.E’.: The Eden block fault in this section is the principal west

escarpment fault. The downthrow of the Para block relative to the adjoining

Gawler block exceeds 1,000 feet. The Para block surface is only 200-300 feet

above sea level. There is no evidence of east tilt, although it may be masked by

remnants of Tertiary Sedimentary series and outwash accumulations. Within the

plateau area the profile does not exhibit major breaks, The Kitchener fault scarp

is just recognisable and the eastern scarp is well defined. Mount Torrens appears

as an “inherited” monadnock.

Profile F.F’.: The Para block (and the Burnside splinter block) are buried

beneath alluvial accumulation within the Adelaide Plains. The Eden fault controls

the abrupt western escarpment. A step-like arrangement of sub-horizontal sur-

faces before Mount Lofty suggests two additional block faults parallel to the

Eden fault. These may be continuations of the Ochre Cove fault (OQ) (on the

west) and the Kitchener fault (K).

Mount Lofty (2384 ft.) is probably another “inherited” monadnock.

Beyond Mount Cary the profile falls away in a manner which suggests further

faulting, but there is insufficient evidence on hand to make a decision on this. A

little to the west of Murdoch’s Hill a low retreating escarpment marks the possible

northern continuation of the Meadows fault. Assuming that this block fault is

continuous here, the block to the east is tilted eastwards towards the Bremer (B)

fault and block. The Bremer fault block dips east and is defined on its eastern

border by the Palmer fault. The erosion surfaces of the Meadows and Bremer

faults are not deeply dissected.

Profile G.G.@: Three erosion surfaces are plainly visible within the profile.

‘They are defined on their western borders by the Eden fault (which has curved

@) The Military Survey Maps for the south-eastern corner of the area have not

‘been produced up to the time of writing. For completeness, an attempt has been made

to overcome the deficiency; sketch profiles have been compiled from the little information

at present availakle concerning details of the topography of the areas in question and

added to eastern portions of Profiles G.G. to I.I., inclusive.

285

westward, out under the sea), the Ochre Cove fault and the Bremer fault respec-

tively. The Eden-Moana block erosion surface is covered by a thin veneer of

Early Tertiary sediments (Sprigg 1942). The erosion surface is remarkably

horizontal in east-west section.

The profile for the central erosion surface does not exhibit the significant

characteristics of pronounced block faulting. However, from field evidence and

from the results of other methods of analysis (see below), it is almost certain

that two other block faults occur within this segment of the profile. The western-

most of these two faults has a very small downthrow to the west and is the

northern continuation of the Willunga scarp fault. The Willunga fault block,

like the adjoining Clarendon-Ochre Cove, Eden and Meadows fault blocks, is

tilted down to the south. Its pivot or hinge line is situated somewhere in, the

vicinity of this profile section line. For this reason its confining faults are diffi-

cult to distinguish. The more easterly of the two faults referred to is the western

escarpment fault of the Meadows block. It is just recognisable on the profile, and

differential movement along it has produced only a low scarp. The erosion sur-

face is tilted down to the east. Mount Barker stands out strongly as a pronounced

monadnock. It has been inherited from the earlier erosion cycle.

The third erosion surface has been drawn in sketchily from sketchy survey

data. The Bremer fault (Dickinson 1942) marks the western limits of the

Bremer block. The escarpment formed is low. To the east the block merges

with the Murray Plains and the profile surface becomes one of aggradation.

Profile H. H’.: In most respects this profile is similar to the last one. The

Eden fault has disappeared beneath the sea. The Ochre Cove, Willunga and

Meadows fault escarpments are all prominent. The erosion surfaces of the

Clarendon-Ochre Cove and Willunga blocks have not been tilted down very sig-

nificantly to the east, although overmass sediments may have masked such an effect.

The Bremer block and escarpment fault are still recognisable.

Profile I. 1’%.: The various blocks and their erosion surfaces bear similar

relations to those as in profile H. H’. The Eden block is not represented in the

profile as the Ochre Cove fault has curved out under the sea. The Willunga fault

now forms the main escarpment. The Willunga block erosion surface is tilted

down to the east.

RECONSTRUCTED OR GENERALIZED CONTOURS

An improved method for reconstructing generalized contours for areas

where broad stretches of summit planes remain has been outlined and used by

Maze (1944), He writes: “The ‘high-points’ plotted in each of the 1,000-yard

squares, and used above for other methods of analysis, may be regarded as a set

of spot levels occurring in the centre of each square. Such a series offers a suit-

able mesh of heights from which contours, with 200 feet vertical interval, can be

drawn by the usual methods of interpolation.” Such reconstructed contours

dispense with the confusing detail of minor valley dissection.

Fig. 6 is a reconstruction of the high-point surface for the central Mount

Lofty Ranges, using the method outlined by Maze. The contour interval is

100 feet, The shallow interval has effectively indicated the major fault escarp-

ments, although it tends to mask the old erosion surface a little. The effects of

minor stream erosion have been practically eliminated. The valleys of the major

rivers are for the most part traceable except in those sections where gorge charac-

ters are strongly developed. For example, the course of the River Onkaparinga

is not obvious where it has cut through the Ochre Cove escarpment, nor is the

course of the River Torrens through the Eden escarpment.

286

The plan establishes the principal fault escarpments so clearly that detailed

description is unnecessary. The major block faults can be traced clearly, and the

reader is referred to fig. 2 for a key to the nomenclature adopted.

It is to be noted that the block-fault pattern produced is essentially similar to

those outlined by Benson and Fenner. However, several minor faults postulated

by these authors appear to the present writer to be based upon insufficient evidence,

RECONSTRUCTED CONTOURS

(00. INTERVALS)

CLOSED “DEPRESSIONS”

and the locations of several of the more prominent faults have also been modified.

Statistical analysis suggests that. the major faults are fewer in number than Fenner

indicates—intensive field work in the western Mount Lofty Ranges confirms this.

In the maps and diagrams which accompany this paper no attempt is made to

indicate the location of a complex pattern of a series of ancient (Palaeozoic)

287

faults, the majority of which were inactive throughout the Kosciusko period of

deformation. The relationship of these ancient faults to those of the Kosciusko

epoch will be discussed in an associated paper to be published shortly which deals

with the geology of portion of the western Mount Lofty escarpment region.

That the principal block-fault pattern conforms closely to the plan produced

is strikingly apparent when the area is viewed from the air. The location of thick

remnant Tertiary overmass sediments is confined markedly to many of the

tectonic valleys,

A block model constructed directly from the generalized contour plan has

been prepared and presented to the Department of Geology, University of

Adelaide.

In the vicinity of Mount Lofty, however, the relationships of the various

faults are still in doubt. Detailed geological reconnaissance mapping has revealed

a number of ancient faults striking north-north-east in this vicinity. Between the

main western escarpment fault (Eden) and Mount Lofty only one of these ancient

faults (Ochre Cove fault) appears to have reopened during the Tertiary

(Kosciusko) period of block faulting. The reconstructed contours indicate

another escarpment immediately in front of Mount Lofty. It may be a fault

escarpment or an ancient erosional feature.

To the east of Mount Lofty, almost in the projected line of strike of the

Willunga fault, there is another problematical escarpment feature with (?)

“downthrow” to the east. In the absence of sufficient field study, it is impossible

to come to any satisfactory conclusion about it at present.

The fault fracture pattern is a simple one. The faults are arc-shaped, with

convexity directed generally to the west. They are sensibly parallel. In the

south as each block arches towards the coast, there is a notable increase in block

width. Fault blocks to the south of Mount Lofty pitch to the south, and each

one is tilted slightly to the east. In this manner a series of shallow “tectonic

valleys” has been produced, trending a little east of north. The Para block

shows similar relations in its southern extension, but in the north its direction of

pitch is northerly. East tilting, if present, is not recognisable. The Gawler block

pitches north beyond Mount Gawler. The main fault block, including Mount

Lofty and Mount Kitchener, is tilted to the east.

The fracture pattern, the small hade of the block faults and the tilting of the

separate blocks are typical of tension stress.

Several eminences stand in marked relief relative to the general erosion sur-

face. In practically all cases these are monadnocks inherited from the early Ter-

tiary erosion cycle. The most prominent are Mounts Lofty, Gawler, Torrens,

Barker and Crawford and Pewsey Vale Peak.

On the lower slopes of Mount Gawler and around its base remnants of the

eatly Tertiary lacustrine sediments, which once covered it, are still preserved.

This and the other old monadnocks were buried by an accumulation of lake sands

and clays before the transgression of the Miocene Sea and before block faulting

occurred.

It is to be noticed that the Burnside splinter-block, which undoubtedly exists,

is not evident on the plan. It has been obscured by outwash accumulations. This

fault “splinter” and the south continuation of the Para block will be dealt with

more fully in a later publication now in preparation.

ProFite PROJECTIONS IN THE PLANE or THE MERIDIAN

An attempt has been made to illustrate the longitudinal warping and tilting

of various of the fault blocks constituting the central Mount Lofty Ranges (fig. 7).

288

The Strip Profile method outlined above does not show this clearly. A

modified method has been devised by the author which is calculated to satisfy

special local conditions.

The maximum high-point value is selected from each grid strip trending

approximately transverse (1.e., east-west) to the elongation of the fault blocks.

It has been found that these high values are located towards the front (western

aspect) on the blocks, as most of them are tilted down to the east. Care has been

taken not to select values near the backs of the blocks, as such localities are fre-

quently areas of accumulation and not erosion surfaces.

a” ae

we >

2000: AEF a Slant eke 2p00°

ete tm EP CH Ne py

ae Es MEADO

i ng ate eS MBs een |

ape MIL RUNGA ttt

4000' She 4000'

eye a

ioe oh,

~ ~e soot

° : oa he Bt.

o MILES 3 16 1s 20 Fz) e) ard 40 45 30

Fig. 7 Profile projections in the plane of the meridian.

Projecting these high-point values upon a north-south plane, a composite

profile of the blocks as they appear from the west has been drawn up. Although

all observations of high-point values have been recorded, the final curves were

drawn to eliminate monadnocks and smooth out pronounced topographical irregu-

larities. The effect, though less accurate, is more illustrative. The warping and

tilting of the various blocks is shown plainly. The (?) downwarping between

Mount Lofty and Mount Kitchener may be actual or may be the effect of river

erosion.

SUMMARY OF Parr I

Several methods of land-form analysis have been applied to the central Mount

Lofty Ranges, and the state of preservation of the exhumed early Tertiary erosion

surface has been demonstrated. The nature and extent of the (?) Kosciusko

Period block faulting within the area has been outlined, and the tilting and warp-

ing movements of the separate blocks have been illustrated graphically.

Maximum elevation has occurred in a more or less central zone, which

includes Mounts Lofty and Kitchener and which trends approximately north-

north-east and south-south-west. This trend is set slightly obliquely to the boun-

daries of the horst range, which are approximately meridional. With the excep-

tion of blocks to the west of the Eden fault the crest zone is the locus of a change

in direction of block tilt down. To the south and east the fault blocks are hinged

down to the south. To the north and west they are hinged down to the north.

The Para block and those beneath the Adelaide Plains have their crest lines

located successively further north. The majority of the separate blocks are also

tilted down to the east.

The block fault pattern is simple; it is considered that the form of block sub-

sidences, the vertical hade and the arcuate plan of the faults are indicative of

tensional stress. Longitudinal warping of the separate blocks in combination with

the east-tilt factor has produced a series of tectonic valleys which exhibit an

increase in the degree of development away from the locality of Mount Lofty.

For the purpose of Part II of this paper, it is emphasised here that at some period

these tectonic valleys must have exerted a control on drainage development.

Remnants of the early-mid Tertiary lignitiferous lacustrine “overmass” sedi-

ments are preserved in portions of the tectonic valleys, and to a lesser extent on

the backs of blocks. The locations of some of them are indicated in fig. 2.

289

PART II, HYDROLOGY

A study of the erosional morphology of the Mount Lofty Ranges would be

incomplete without reference to its drainage development. In this section of the

paper the author has two distinct aims. In the first place an attempt has been

made to apply recent techniques of statistical analysis of stream develop-

ment to portion of the Mount Lofty Horst. Secondly, a new theory is

advanced to explain the anomalous courses of certain major streams of

the area, in particular the Rivers Torrens and Onkaparinga, which have been the

subject of much discussion in the past. All authors, however, appear to agree

with Fenner (1931) that “The controlling factor has been the tectonic fault and

tilt movements, with capture, differential rock resistance, and possibly inheritance

of earlier routes as secondary factors.”

Benson (1909) considered that the winding course of the River Torrens

showed independence of geological structure, and except in minor detail was not

influenced by the variation of the hardness of the different strata through which

it passed.

Howchin (1933, p. 30) writes: “With respect to the geological age of the

river (te., the Torrens—R. C. S.), the evidences seem to suggest that it was

called into existence under the deformation that was incidental to the elevations

of the Mount Lofty Ranges. In that movement the country received a tilt to the

westward—a pitch down in the direction of the trough fault—which became the

controlling factor in determining the lines of drainage on the southern side of the

uplift, having a westerly direction.”

Hossfeld (1935, p. 20), when referring to a part of the north Mount Lofty

Ranges, noticed the complicated features resultant upon partial dissection of much

of the former peneplain following differential elevation and tilting. He writes:

“1. All of the longer streams run meridionally for some distance from their

sources, their courses being concordant with the strike of the rocks of the area.

At some distance downstream, however, everyone of them changes its direction,

disregarding the structure of the country entirely, crossing impartially, ridges and

valleys, igneous and sedimentary, hard and soft rocks.

“2. In the meridional sections of their courses, the valleys are broad, gently

graded, and approximately straight, and possess numerous highly mature

tributaries. In the easterly or westerly sections, however, these streams flow

through steep narrow gorges, over waterfalls and rapids, and pursue meandering

courses irrespective of the structure or topography of the country. Furthermore,

in general they have few long tributaries in this section; of these, most are mature

in their upper reaches, and some for the greater part of their courses. The shorter

streams pursue an easterly and westerly course along the whole of their length,

and are in the juvenile stages of development.”

Hossfeld (1935) considers the drainage system to have developed as follows:

“The mature meridional sections of the streams are antecedent and represent the

dismembered drainage of the former peneplain, probably dating from the Miocene

period. Subsequent uplift, and east and west tilting, produced easterly and

westerly meanders, grafted and the dismembered antecedent streams.

“The gradual elevation of the area resulted in the entrenchment of the

meanders, and the rapid removal of Tertiary deposits, residual soils, and alluvium

revealing the superimposed character of the east and west drainage. Rejuvenation

of the upper sections and dissection of the remnants of the peneplain surface is

going on rapidly.”

Fenner (1931, p. 275) and Benson (1911, p. 111) each considered the pos-

sibility of river capture. With reference to the River Onkaparinga, Fenner writes:

2590

“Tt was difficult to decide with any degree of certainty whether the gorge above

Noarlunga was due to capture by headward erosion or to an antecedent position,

though the latter theory is favoured in this book.”

Benson records that “Rivers were captured, as the heads of the Onkaparinga

by the Torrens, or revived with the formation of valley in valley structure, as in

Foreston Creek near Gumeracha.” In a footnote Benson adds that with reference

to the capture of the Onkaparinga headwaters by the Torrens, Howchin had

arrived at the same conclusion independently.

To overcome difficulties provided by certain physiographic structures,

Fenner (1930, p. 17) introduced a theory suggested by Professor Douglas W.

Johnson, of Columbia University, N.Y. The theory assumed “two dominant

stages of block faulting with two periods of peneplanation, the latter planation

being partly carried out in the softer Tertiary overmass.” In pursuing the theory

Fenner states “that the mature landscapes of the upper Torrens, upper Onka-

paringa and other streams heading towards the Mount Pleasant area are difficult

of explanation, unless we assume a long period of subaerial planation following

the first uplift, some exhumation of the Pre-Miocene surface and some later

tectonic influences, followed by the present cycle of erosion. The two or three

western blocks that are truncated by the Torrens Gorge must have risen later and

their topography, antecedent superimposed (Torrens, Para, etc.) and consequent

with headward erosion (Morialta, Waterfall Gully, etc.), is in a youthful stage.”

The present author has carefully considered this previous research on the

evolution of the western Mount Lofty streams. Although in agreement with

much of the factual evidence presented, it was felt that none of the theories

advanced had explained satisfactorily certain unusual features of the rivers in

question. An attempt has been made to rectify this in the second part of this

portion of the paper.

QUANTITATIVE HypropuysicaL FActrors

Recently, Mr. A. E. Horton (1945) has shown how the problem of erosional

morphology may be approached quantitatively. In applying methods to many

areas in the United States he has referred particularly to the effects of surface

run-off.

His methods, which are in part modifications of previous ones, provide the

best means yet evolved of assessing drainage-basin development by surface water

erosion, Certain of them will be used in this paper. It is hoped that the data

which is thus produced will provide a basis for statistical comparisons with other

Australian stream systems in the future.

Several of the analytical methods will be referred to briefly and the data

from their application to the Rivers Torrens and Onkaparinga produced in table

form and discussed.

STREAM ORDERS

In Europe attempts have been made to classify streams on the basis of

branching or bifurcation. Horton has produced a modified method, in which the

trunk stream is given the highest order and the unbranched fingertip tributaries

are designated by the unit ordinal. In Horton’s system (p. 281) “unbranched

fingertip tributaries are designated as of Order 1, tributaries or streams of the

measured) involves a personal element. This will be of little consequence where stan-

dards for the degree of detail adopted in map preparation are the same. However, if

these standards vary from country to country, precautions will be necessary when it is

desired to compare relevant statistics, particularly for minor streams.

291

second order receive branches or tributaries of the first order but these only;

a third order stream must receive one or more tributaries of the second order

but may also receive first order tributaries. A fourth order stream receives

branches of the third order and usually also of the lower orders, and so on.

Using this system, the order of the main stream is the highest.”

Rules have been produced in order to determine which is ‘the parent and

which the tributary stream, upstream from the last bifurcation. Quoting Horton

(p. 282) they are:

“(1) Starting below the junction, extend the parent stream upstream: from the

bifurcation in the same direction. The stream joining the parent stream

at the greatest angle is of the lower order. Exceptions may occur where

geologic controls have affected stream courses.

Fax

Mtlawler p<

; FIL LAF

fijver Torrens + SoS

TASER

: “

S|} ADELAIDE.

= ‘

IS beeen pNey Ps 4 \

y spar 4% ay cay

s F Mtlotty ee es St

. H yy 4 ete Pr

& ile ON oan *

NY bl SE .\ ~

XQ ae “ye, : sete ag £ Yael

he : QE pee

AT ref i ; aera ata ; ’

eh se2\@ye — Onkaparinga River

if ree pak eS?

a “ ; & ¥

Geer q ies i

Whe eh, 7 * ora

4 in : a Ky KE of

Ss a i y > F oS va

Fol piste

/ i

-! rf

i wo

)

Fig 8 The Drainage Basins of the Rivers Torrens and Onkaparinga.

The local divides of drainage nets and the subdivision of the trunk

streams for polar analyses are indicated. The form of the drainage nets

has been controlled by block faulting.

“(2) Tf both streams are at about the same angle to the parent stream at the

junction, the shorter is usually taken as of the lower order.”

For drainage nets of basins of comparable size, the determination of stream

orders affords a simple quantitative basis for comparison of the degree of develop-

ment in each case. Horton further notes (p. 283) that “Its usefulness as a basis

for such comparison is limited by the fact that, other things being equal, the order

of a drainage basin or its stream system generally increases with size of the

drainage area.”

292

Dratnace Density (Horton 1945, p. 283-4).

The term “drainage density” is intended to characterise the degree of

drainage development within a basin. It is the average length of streams within

the basin per unit of area (Horton 1932). In equation form it is expressed by:

Drainage Density, Da = a

where % IL is the total length of streams and A is the area, both in units of the

same system. For example, a well-drained basin may have D, = 2°78, and the

poorly drained one 0°72, or approximately one-fourth as great.

In this present contribution the analytical data has been obtained directly

from Australian military maps. On these maps perennial streams are usually

shown by solid blue lines, intermittent streams by broken blue lines. Both are

included in the measurements.

STREAM FREQUENCY

Stream frequency is the number of streams, F., per unit area, or Fs aN

; A

where N = total number of streams in a drainage basin of A aerial units.

Horton notes’ (p. 285) that the “Values of drainage density and stream

frequency for small and large drainage basins are not directly comparable because

they usually vary with the size of the drainage area. A larger basin may contain

as many small fingertip tributaries per unit of area as a small drainage basin, and

in addition it usually contains a larger stream or streams, This effect may be

marked by the increase of drainage density and stream frequency on the steeper

slopes generally appurtenant to smaller drainage basins.”

BirurcaTion Ratio

The bifurcation ratio is the ratio of the average number of branchings or

bifurcations of streams of a given order to that of streams of the next lower order.

It is usually constant for all orders of streams in a given basin.

SrreAmM LENGTH RATIO

The stream length ratio is the ratio of the average length of streams of a

given order to that of streams of the next lower order.

RATIO p

This ratio, which is that of the Stream Length Ratio to the Bifurcation Ratio,

has been shown (Horton, p. 292) to be an important factor in relation to both

drainage composition and the physiographic development of drainage basins. It

is determined by “those factors—hydrologic, physiographic, cultural, and geologic

—-which determine the ultimate degree of drainage development in a given

drainage basin.”

Laws or DratnAce Composition (Horton 1945)

“(1) The Law of Stream Numbers: The numbers of streams of different orders

in a given drainage basin tend closely to approximate an inverse geometric

series in which the first term is unity and the ratio is the bifurcation ratio.

“(2) The Law of Stream Lengths: The average lengths of streams of each of

the different orders in a drainage basin tend closely to approximate a direct

geometric series in which the first term is the average length of streams of

the first order.”

These laws, which are the direct outcome of a mathematical study of stream

development, are supplementary to Playfair’s Law. This law of Playfair (see

Tarr and Martin, 1914, p. 177) is stated as follows:

293

“Every river appears to consist of a main trunk, fed from a variety of

branches, each running in a valley proportioned to its size and all of them together

forming a system of valleys, communicating with one another, and having such a

nice adjustment of their declivities that none of them join the principal valley

either on too high or too low a level.”

COMMENTS ON VALUES of HypropHysicAL FAcrors or THE TORRENS AND

ONKAPARINGA DRAINAGE Basrns.@) (See Table I).

The measured values of several more important physiographic factors for

the two stream systems have been produced in table form together with certain

other characteristics determined by simple calculation. The equations used in

these calculations are indicated in Table I,

The measurements have been made directly from the latest military maps.

The complete drainage basins of the rivers in question are considered. Both

permanent and perennial streams are included. The drainage basins subdivide

naturally into genetically related drainage nets, which themselves are determined

by the major block faulting discussed in Part I. The divides between the separate

drainage nets are indicated in fig. 8.

Stream Numbers—The law of stream numbers is obeyed closely by both

streams.

Stream Lengths—The law of stream lengths is obeyed generally by streams

of lower order. For higher order streams, however, major derivations from

the mean are apparent. This immediately suggests that some geological control

has interrupted normal stream development. The nature of this control is dis-

cussed later in this paper. Both drainage basins are strongly elongate. Therefore,

in order that each may be drained satisfactorily, the main streams have lengths

commensurate with those of the two basins. That is, the main streams in these

cases are much longer than ordinarily would obtain for drainage basins of the

same respective order, of normal form.

Drainage Density—The upper and middle drainage nets of the River Torrens

represent good drainage conditions, The drainage density of the lower portion

(down to Para’ Block fault) is relatively poor. This change is the result of the

nature of the sediments and topography over which much of the lower net is

distributed. Porous soils and the relatively low grades of those portions of the

streams traversing the “plains” area combine to reduce the drainage density.

That portion of the River Torrens between the Para fault and the sea is extremely

poorly drained. Difficulties encountered in defining the limits of this lower

drainage net prevented its accurate assessment.

The drainage densities of each drainage net of the River Onkaparinga are

high, that of the central portion being extremely so. The Onkaparinga Basin is

better drained than the Torrens Basin.

Stream Frequencies—The stream frequencies of both basins and their

separate drainage nets exhibit relations similar to those of Drainage Densities.

The extreme variants, however, are more pronounced.

Bifurcation Ratios—Horton has pointed out that, in general, a ratio of about

2 indicates flat or rolling drainage basins, whereas a value of 4 indicates moun-

tainous or highly dissected drainage basins. On this assumption then, with the

exception of the Upper Onkaparinga net, the headwaters of each drainage net

@) Small variations in the degree of minor stream detail reproduced on the military

maps reduces the accuracy of some of the physiographic factors. In dealing with small

areas, it appears advisable that aerial photos should be used to determine minor stream

detail. In this paper, for ‘broad analysis and generalizations, the values quoted are of value.

294

‘JON a8turerq JueAIas 0} Joodsa1 Ul AUC. poiapisuod wWeag YuNIy, jo rapig t

“SIOQUINN WedI]S Ul pay[ejo} JOU SE sJoOyoINY} pue ‘JoN sseuleiq] Yoes 0} WVowwOS st WeaI]g (UIey) YuNIT, »

"YUNOIIE OJUL USye} Ussq JOU sey ney yoolgG eiegq ey} puokoq Wise aseureiq jo uoriog 4

Was UleW jo pig

NX swrevays jo ‘on [ejoy

(S®W Ur) weelg uepy Jo yySueT

£ ts to Z 9 tp 9 9

00r'e Ort cZs 6LET cert Pst 662 ovo

09 cl ot ce 405 8T 8 $2

0-01 “ = 0-$ = = ae — “ yyg-u1Z

Ted a <z Tr O-Z = = 0:9 “-yag-1139

cra aaa Zt ara crA eas 8-0 Ani “ Pig-yi¢

ore Ore Te 6 oT Pe PS O-d Plg-Yip

Td ore £-¢ 0-2 Ore ae 6-£ 1-2 “ pug-pig

8% 9-¢ 6% BS nara oe oo oe TPIO 3s][-pug

8-8 5 ae oF = — =) a “ w9-uaZ

e-2 a “ $+ L9 7 — 1-9 “ yag-439

cl a 0-2 oT 6:0 are oT 6°0 ‘ Udp-4ag

ao 0-2 8-z Le O-~ ST Le BS PlE-Uip

Ze Or Le 8c Po Pe 6 ase 1piOQ pug-ple

6:6 +-6 L-el 0°6 8° 9-7 OL GZ

UP GE: O-r 6¢ O-€ OZ Ge 9-6

9b8 19 88 L6S £66 cial 6et 90€ - = [eo

09 (21) (91) ze = —~ care = “Uy

Zl — ae ZI 0S (31) (8) ¥C 49

vA) = zl 0S IZ Ta 6 cl i 4i¢

99 14 Tl TS “ZS ot rai ce y yp

Set Z pe £6 Ort ce 92 cS “pag

£1e ZT OP OST TOT ev Be 08 “pug

062 Té 69 002 él SP OV £OT PIO 38]

O0r'z OFT GZS 6LE° G2‘ $81 662, Zb9 - = eIOL

«I yoni, = yunsy, I = = = = eg

¢ — —_ e «lt YUN yun, I “Wag

ras = vA oT ¥ = T £ 7 yg

8z T £ ZA val I c ai i‘ Yip

vel v ce 88 cs IT (At ee Es pic

66£ ce £01 £9¢ 197 Sb TZ taal “pug

ees'T 80T cer 066 06£ rel £1? sy T9pIO I]

fl? 9-ST e:op 2-e51 ¢-S6l £-02 F-6E 8-S8

NISVE YIMOT HIGaIt waaan NISVa XaMOT eacnterm waada

GOVNIVaG SLEN ZOVNIVUG SOVNIVUC SLUN ADVNIVAC :

VONINVAIVANO MAAN ASNAYUMOL MHALY

—oey yysuay wees

—oney voueomng

vin = *a

~ AQuenbaiy ureays

——— .. P

Leer

—Ayisuaqd sseureic.

(SoT1W_ Ur)

- Jy isyysueyT wens

- N isiequinN ureads

Vv i (Saqt arzenbs ur) reary

SYOLOVA IVOISAHAOUCAH I Fv

295

constituting the Torrens and Onkaparinga drainage basins should be in well

dissected terrain. This is the case. The low values obtaining for higher order

stream ratios probably indicate lower stream grades in the central portions of

the drainage nets. These facts apparently demonstrate the existence of strong

geological controls. The Mount Lofty horst is a faulted plateau region in an

advanced stage of dissection by “youthful” streams. For the most part higher

order streams are confined to the “backs” of fault blocks. The lower order

streams are more frequent along fault scarps and adjacent to the gorges of high

order streams where the latter have cut through the western. upturned edges of

fault blocks,

Stream Length Ratios—In general the values of this ratio are reasonably

constant within each drainage net or basin. However, major deviations are

evident in the case of the higher order streams. These streams are abnormally

long.

Observations—From the above data it is clear that the two river systems

have had very similar evolutionary histories. Both drainage basins are readily

sub-dividable into several nearly closed drainage nets which are strung out along

the course of the trunk stream. In the case of each drainage basin, a strong

geological control has been in action producing abnormally long trunk streams.

The similarities in historical development will be amplified further when their

respective stream patterns and geological history are considered.

ANALYysIs of Trunk SrreaAmMs ustna PoLar DIAGRAMS, WITH SPECIAL

REFERENCE TO THE EVOLUTION OF THE River TorrENS — a THEORY OF

RiveR CAPTURE,

This occasion appears to be the first in Australia in which extensive use is

made of polar diagrams in an attempted solution of the anomalous courses of

streams.

The method is simple. The compass directions are divided into 36 10°

sectors, and each 10° sector represented by a radius on a polar circle. The rela-

tive distances traversed in each of these sector directions by any particular river is

then plotted along the respective radii. In the case of a stream flowing over

gently graded alluvials which possess no natural barriers, its diagram should

approximate an ellipse with major axis in the direction of highest gradient. How-

ever, if geological controls are active within a particular drainage net, the resultant

diagram may exhibit anomalous features.

In the Mount Lofty Ranges strong geological controls are frequently in

evidence. The present study applying to the western aspect of the ranges has

produced evidence which warrants the formulation of a new theory based on

river capture.

When considering the possibilities of such river capture the following two

factors are important:

(1) The greater rainfall and hence more rapid erosion along the western

scarp; a relative “rainshadow” exists on the east.

(2) Steeper gradients associated with the western escarpments.

Under these conditions it may be assumed that in the history of the develop-

ment of the Mount Lofty Ranges the main watershed divide between the eastern

and western escarpment streams has migrated to the east. On this assumption,

then, the possibility of river capture operating from the west is a distinct one.

In order to highlight anomalous directional tendencies, which may be inter-

preted fairly as indicating previous headwater piracy, the River Torrens has been

296

divided into “natural” segments, based on the block fault plan produced earlier

in this paper. The major directional changes have also been taken into considera-

tion, A polar diagram has been prepared for each of the segments so decided

upon, Their location is indicated in fig. 8.

A study of these polar diagrams (pl. xix B) indicates that the River Torrens

in its approaches to each block fault (fig. B, D and F) flows in a direction sensibly

parallel to a line drawn at right angles (the “normal,” N.) to the respective block

fault. Such sections of the stream coincide in the direction of flow with the

normal “consequent” escarpment streams occurring along each block-front escarp-

ment. In the remaining segments of the stream the major direction of flow is

definitely at variance with these escarpment segments, i.e. along the tectonic

valleys at the back of the fault blocks.

In view of these facts it is probable that the theory of am inherited (7e.,

antecedent) course preserved from the original surface of the Tertiary overmass

beds does not hold. Hossfeld’s descriptive summary of the outstanding features

of streams of the north Mount Lofty Ranges (see p. 289 of this work), however,

holds admirably for a theory of river capture which will now be developed.

With the formation of the block mountain range, a series of N.N.E.-5S.5.W.

tectonic valleys were formed, a result of the accompanying east tilting of the

separate blocks (see Part 1). The pivotal movement relative to the major upwarp

matked by Mounts Lofty, Torrens and Kitchener and Pewsey Vale Peak was

with downthrow to the south in the south, and to the north in the north.

These tectonic valleys confined drainage from the upland area. Hence,

although the escarpments possess strong westerly aspects, many of the earlier

major streams ran N.N.E.-S.S.W. or S.S.W.-N.N.E. They were therefore “con-

sequent” streams, owing their development to upwarping and to block faulting.

A second related series of “consequent” streams developed contemporaneously

from the escarpments. These two types will be referred to hereafter as the

“escarpment consequents” and the “tilt consequents” respectively.

In order to understand the mechanics of the river capture theory several

segments of the River Torrens are now considered in more detail.

Referring in the first place to that section of the Torrens between the big

bend (marked X on fig. 8) and the Eden block fault, the average directional trend

(pl. xix, fig. D) is a little to the north of west. This corresponds to the direction

normal to the strike of the local block fault, so the consequent nature of the

stream is pronounced here. In contradistinction the segment from X to the

Kitchener Block fault exhibits a pronounced tendency to meridional flow

(see pl. xix, fig. C).

The Millbrook (or Chain of Ponds) Creek, which enters the River Torrens

on this segment, also follows the $.S.W. direction; further, the divide beyond the

former’s headquarters is so low that it is easy to conceive of the Millbrook Creek

as originally flowing N.N.E. as portion of the South Para River headwaters

(Malcolm Creek). Its course was later captured (with part reversal of flow)

by the advancing headwaters of the juvenile Torrens (an escarpment consequent

stream near Hope Valley). Such northward flow of the South Para River head-

waters would not be abnormal, as the nearby Little South Para shows similar

tendencies. Again, it is possible that even Deep Creek (or Upper Sixth Creek)

may represent the original south extension of the Malcolm Creek. For the major

portion of its course it bears directly towards Millbrook Reservoir (and parallel

to the “front of range” fault). The sharp right angle bend at the deviation from

this direction is quite typical of the postulated river capture system of the western

Mount Lofty Range.

297

The River Torrens then, as a result of higher stream gradient and early

erosion in soft overmass, succeeded in capturing the south headwaters of the

South Para River. These latter headwaters once flowed along a depression line

at the “back” of an east-tilted faulted block.

In the vicinity of Cudlee Creek, escarpment formation also was responsible

for rapid headwater erosion by small “escarpment consequent” streams. One

such stream cut back towards Birdwood and finally captured the headwaters of

the ancient Onkaparinga. Whether the capture was effected before the juvenile

Torrens had captured the headwaters of Malcolm Creek is uncertain. However,

it is more probable that this happened subsequently; the steepening of the grade

of creeks draining from Kitchener Scarp caused by a shortening of their courses

by the river capture would increase their erosive power locally. Much of the

erosion up to this time had taken place in the soft Tertiary sedimentary overmass,

and hence probably many streams had eroded back into the escarpment. Only

that stream which succeeded in capturing a big flow of water would be able to

maintain its gorge when eventually the harder overmass rocks were exposed. The

anomalous kink in the Torrens Gorge in its course across the escarpment segment

of the Kitchener Block may be due to a rock structure or subsidiary river capture.

Concerning the headwaters of the modern streams, it is noticeable that the

River Onkaparinga bears certain significant relations to that of the River Torrens

above Birdwood. Benson (1911) and Howchin (1918) have recognised the

possibility that the modern Torrens headwaters were once those of the original

Onkaparinga. It is suggested that the probable “link” is the Angas Creek, which

possesses a deep and wide valley characteristic of a stronger stream and there-

fore suggestive of a more complex history. Its valley slopes rise to the. east

250 feet and to the west 500 feet (Mount Torrens), and its valley bottom is quite

broad. The headwaters of the Angas Creek are separated by a low divide from

those of the Onkaparinga.

A possible alternate course for the old Onkaparinga, in the vicinity of Mount

Torrens, is to the west of this monadnock,

A notable feature of the modern Onkaparinga is its relatively direct S.S,W.

course from Mount Torrens to the Mount Bold Reservoir. It is running parallel

to the postulated north continuation of the Meadows fault. At Mount Bold the

sharp bend to the west suggests (as Fenner 1931, p. 273, has noted) river capture

by a swift flowing high-graded stream crossing the Willunga Scarp from the

west. The divide which separates the River Onkaparinga from the Kuitpo

Valley Creek is quite low. It is probable that the ancient Onkaparinga flowed

along the Kuitpo Valley to join the River Finnis. This latter creek, too, shows an

anomalous course; this has been noted by Mawson (personal communication).

However, it is beyond the area discussed in this paper.

To recapitulate chronologically (see fig. 9), possibly as early as the close

of the Miocene period, block faulting of the Kosciusko Epoch had commenced

to form the Mount Lofty Horst. By Pliocene time shallow arms of the sea had

advanced over low-lying portions of various pivotal blocks. One such imcursion

occurred about the site of Adelaide and Paradise. Into this depression ran a

number of “escarpment consequents” streams draining from the low range appear~

ing to the east (fig. 9A). A more northerly escarpment stream was destined to

become the River Torrens after a complex history of river capture.

As the differential uplifting and combined tilting of the various blocks became

prominent, streams on the back of the block (tilt consequents) came to conform

with tectonic valleys so produced.

By virtue of higher stream gradient over easily eroded Tertiary sediments

the juvenile Torrens was able to erode back through the rising scarp, to capture

298

and so dismember the south headwaters of the South Para River (fig. 9, B). By

continued headwater erosion through a second Kitchener scarp the Torrens finally

captured the headwaters of the ancient Onkaparinga (fig. 9, C).

Contemporaneously the old Onkaparinga suffered further dismemberment

south along its course. Originally it had flowed along the “back” of the Willunga

Block along the tectonic valley via Meadows and Myponga, probably reaching the

sea at Normanville. Its flow probably first became diverted through to the sea at

Myponga, and then later towards Lake Alexandrina along the present course of

the Finnis River (see fig. 1). Within the area with which this contribution is

mainly concerned, its flow then became diverted once more to the west, near

Mount Bold, because of the higher erosive power of a consequent stream drain-

ing from the Willunga Scarp toward Noarlunga. In this manner the original

Fig. 9 Suggested stages for the evolution of the River Torrens and

Onkaparinga, based on a theory of river capture.

Onkaparinga has been dissected into six segments, the three northernmost form-

ing the nucleus of three major streams of the western Mount Lofty Horst.

Additional capture probably occurred near Noarlunga across the Ochre Cove fault

escarpment.

During the late Phocene Period, with the recession of the sea from the

vicinity of Adelaide, the various escarpment streams became engrafted to form a

series of tributaries of the main Torrens River System (fig. 9, C). These tribu-

taries were consecutively the Fifth, Fourth, Third, Second, First, Brownhill and

Sturt Creeks.

SOME OBSERVATIONS

No attempt has been made to criticise formally the “double peneplanation”

theory of W. D. Johnson and C. Fenner. However, a few brief comments are

made below.

Fenner (1930) has mentioned “peculiarities of certain critical areas, such

as the Torrens Valley on the one hand, and the coastal strip that runs from

O’Halloran Hill to Myponga on the other,” which could be better explained by

assuming two dominant stages of block faulting, with two periods of peneplana-

tion, the later planation being partly carried out in the softer Tertiary “overmass.”

It seems that he is referring to signs of very recent movement along the Para

fault, and along other faults in the western portions of the Mount Lofty Horst,

and to the existence of mature landscapes of the upper Torrens, upper Onka-

paringa, and the other streams heading towards the Mount Pleasant area,

Although the author agrees that these faults have been active recently, there

seems no reason to infer that the activity followed a period of protracted still-

299

stand (and peneplanation). The “friable, dissected, horizontal, ferruginous, beds

of (?) Pleistocene age that remain against the main Mount Lofty Scarp on the

south side of Anstey’s Hill road,” which are considered to be further evidence

of this uplift after still-stand, are Pre-Miocene Marine “overmass” sediments

which in part may have been redistributed.

The mature landscapes of the Mount Pleasant area are said to be “difficult

of explanation unless we assume a long period of sub-aerial planation following

the first uplift, some exhumation of the Pre-Miocene surface, and some later

tectonic influences, followed by the present cycle of erosion” (Fenner 1930).

In the Mount Pleasant locality streams possess low grades, and hence low

erosive power, for at least two reasons. Firstly, they are on a tableland with a

well-developed “fossil erosion surface” which has not long been exhumed from

beneath the soft “overmass’” sediments. The topography here then is “young,

little dissected,” but not “mature.” Secondly, river erosion within the area has

been inhibited by the tectonic valleys which strike more or less parallel to the range.

Originally drainage to the sea was controlled by these longitudinal valleys, and

hence the average stream gradient was much less steep than it would have been

via much shorter courses disposed transversely to the range. Under these condi-

tions stream erosive power was proportionately less powerful. However, when

river piracy short-circuited the headwaters of tectonic valley streams, the “local

base level” at the point of capture was rapidly lowered, giving in effect just such

“rejuvenation” as the “double peneplanation” theory was calculated to account for.

It is to be noted that the high level occurrences of laterite formed on “under-

mass” and “overmass” sediments may favour a short period of relative still-stand

during block faulting. Their formation apparently coincided with a humid pluvial

period prior to the Pleistocene Period (Crocker 1945). Lateritic ironstones have

been formed partly on Pre-Cambrian slates, quartzites and limestones and partly

on older Tertiary sands. To associate their formation with the unqualified term

peneplanation” is undesirable, as it implies a very lengthy period. Laterization

was almost certainly post-Miocene and Pre-Glacial—relatively a short period.

On the original rising area of weak overmass sediments it is probable that

vertical corrosion never exceeded horizontal grading, nor the general wearing

down of the surface. In this manner the landscape on which laterization occurred

was an “old from birth” base surface. It would correspond with Johnson and

Fenner’s second period of peneplanation.

Concerning the age of laterization it is hoped that investigations to be under-

taken shortly on bore material from the Adelaide Plains will produce valuable

evidence. The considerable thickness of reddish clays within the post-Upper

Pliocene Alluvials (= Tate’s mammaliferous drift) may be correlated in part

with laterization. Floaters of lateritic ironstone, if found within the clays, may

indicate dissection of the laterite beds elsewhere.

The author’s theory of river capture is in contradiction to Howchin’s refer-

ence (1918) to the Torrens and other streams as antecedent superimposed. The

remarkable coincidence in the larger segments of these streams with block fault

structure renders Howchin’s theory untenable. The stream courses may be

regarded as superimposed in that they have been carried through from overmass

strata on to an old erosion surface, but the major relevant structures in both cases.

have been controlled by the block faulting movements.

TRIBUTARIES OF THE RIVER TORRENS

Polar analysis of the main escarpment tributaries of the lower Torrens

drainage net has proved invaluable in demonstrating the genetic relationships of

a series of streams. These tributaries are consecutively the Fifth, Fourth, Third,

300

Second, First, Brownhill and Sturt Creeks (fig 9C). They owe their develop-

ment largely to escarpment formation, but their polar diagrams have indicated

other influences and the extent of their effect.

Polar diagrams have been prepared for each of these main creeks in the

lower Torrens Basin, and these will be dealt with briefly.

Fifth Creek (pl. xixA)

The polar diagram at first may appear misleading, but the “consequent”

nature of the stream is readily established when the normal to the local strike of

the escarpment is superimposed on the diagram. That the creek has not followed

the exact direction of natural slope for any significant distance must be fortuitous.

The noted deflection to the south-west can be accounted for by a strong quartzite

barrier faulted across the course of the stream. The more northerly deflection

may be partly due to a tilt-down to the north of the Mount Gawler Block.

Fourth Creek (pl. xix A)

The Fourth Creek-Sinclair Gully pattern is that of a consequent stream, in

part affected by the differing hardness of sedimentary strata. The strong south-

east prolongation represents the deflection of the stream by the Rock Hull Thick

Quartzite massif. The diagram for the south member indicates a lateral tributary.

Third Creek (pl. xix A)

A normal consequent stream traversing no very significant barriers.

Second Creek (pl. xix A)

This stream presents a typical consequent diagram, although there is a ten-

dency to be diverted west-south-west by the massive Thick Quartzite outcrop at

Slapes Gully. :

First Creek (pl. xix A)

Both tributaries of this creek have been “analysed” and the diagram so

obtained is simple. Its major prolongation almost coincides with the direction

at right angles to the local strike of the block fault. Accordingly, the stream is

normal “consequent.”

Brownhill Creek and Tributaries (pl. xix A)

In attempting to “solve” this irregular creek, separate diagrams have been

constructed, but are not reproduced herein. Their separate traces are thought

to be typical of a series of tributaries constituting a basin. Diagram G repre-

sents the course of the creek across the plains. It provides an excellent example

of a creek traversing a gently graded alluvial fan, the normal to the strike of the

local fault scarp providing the dominant direction of flow. First to Fifth Creeks,

in their courses across their respective alluvial fans, should analyse similarly, but

only the portions of those creeks above the main block fault have been analysed

on the accompanying diagrams. The analytical data for Brownhill Creek and its

lateral tributaries down to the main scarp fault has been superimposed to give a

single resultant curve (see composite diagram). The average trend indicated is

between 30° and 40° in an anti-clockwise direction from that of the block fault

“normal.” This more southerly flow is due to the south dip of the Eden-Moana

Block surface consequent upon “pivoted” faulting. The pivotal influence, namely

a south pitch, is recognisable as far north as Mount Osmond.

In a similar manner a northerly tendency of flow may be accounted for in

Fourth, Fifth and Sixth Creeks and in the upper Little Para, due to a reversal

in direction of tilt to the north.

301

The River Sturt (pl. xix A)

Once more in an attempt to “solve” the complex pattern of this creek system,

separate diagrams were prepared for natural sections of the river and for

tributaries. These do not give a clear picture, but the composite diagram

provides a solution. As with the case of Brownhill Creek the diagram indicates

a stream affected by two controlling factors, namely, the block fault scarps and

the south tilt of the block over which the stream flows. As the vector value of

the degree of south tilt of the block is becoming relatively stronger in relation to

intensity of western escarpment formation, so the analysis diagram presents a

greater and more uniform spread. Hence a definite grading is observable from

Second Creek through First and Brownhill Creeks to the River Sturt, as the

second factor (south tilt) becomes important.

As Fenner (1931) has suggested, the right angle bend of the River Sturt,

near Flagstaff Hill, suggests river capture from the west.

Notes oN ExAMeLes or River PrrAcy OBSERVED WITHIN THE AREA

In attempting to reconstruct the evolutionary history of the Rivers Torrens

and Onkaparinga, river capture has been held responsible for many of the

anomalous bends noticeable in their courses. From the study made, there seems to be

little doubt that further signs of such piracy should be found in the area. This is so.

Dr. Fenner (1931) has recorded

a probable example as follows:

“There is evidence in favour of the

theory that the Sturt originally

flowed down the tectonic valley

formed by the Sturt and Belair 1 anainace

Blocks (at the back of the Eden 3 oe

Block, R. C. S.), and flowed into

Hallett’s Creek (Happy Valley).

The evidence consists of the charac-

teristic elbow bend and gorge north

of Flagstaff Hill, with a low gap

and sands at the head of Happy

Valley. Thus the Sturt is led

turough the scarp face to the

west... 0. ” The drainage basin

of the Sturt and Hallett Creeks are

shown on fig. 10 B,

A parallel case of such piracy

concerns the lower drainage nets

of the River Torrens and the Dry

Creek drainage basin. (fig. 10 A).

However, on this occasion the posi-

tion of the master stream is re-

versed. A small escarpment stream

has captured a tributary of one of

the principal drainage basins of the

Mount Lofty Ranges.

Professor Howchin (1918) describes a case of stream piracy which has

occurred three miles north of Palmer: “A creek formerly flowed south, on the

western side of a range of hills, and passed near Palmer; but the Milendella

Creek from the opposite side of the range cut its way back by means of a water-

fall through the range and tapped the stream on the other side.”

RIVER CAPTURE

Seaueg 2 aiMats ; Sy

yes

Fig. 10

302

SuMMArRyY oF Parr IT

Several techniques of statistical analysis of stream development as developed

or modified by A. E. Horton have been described briefly and applied to the area.

The data so obtained indicated that strong geological controls have operated.

These controls are the tectonic valleys and steep fault escarpments described in

Part I of this paper.

Polar diagrams have been used extensively in the analysis of the direction

of flow of trunk streams. The River Torrens has been treated in this manner,

and from the information forthcoming, it is evident that river piracy has played

a much greater part in the history of many of the major streams of the western

escarpments than hitherto has been realised. Also, a series of escarpments con-

sequent streams have been submitted separately to polar analysis, and their dia-

grams have indicated the complicating effect of fault block tilting. The effects of

individual rock structures have not warranted detailed attention.

Several weaknesses in the evidence for the theory of “double peneplanation”

as advanced by W. D. Johnson and C. Fenner have been outlined.

Concerning the evolution of the modern drainage of the area, Fenner has

summarized the important facts admirably as follows: “The controlling factor

has been the tectonic fault and tilt movements, with capture, differential rock

resistance, and possibly inheritance of earlier routes as secondary factors.”

REFERENCES

Benson, W.N. 1911 “Note Descriptive of a Stereogram of the Mount Lofty

Ranges, South Australia,” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 35

Crocker, R. L. 1945 “Post-Miocene Climatic and Geologic History and its

Significance in Relation to the Genesis of the Major Soil Types of South

Australia.” C.S.1.R. Bull. (in press).

Dickinson, S. B. 1942 “The Structural Control of Ore Deposition in some

South Australian Copper Fields.” Geol. Surv. S. Aust. Bull. 20

Fenner, C. 1930 “The Major Structural and Physiographic Features of South

Australia.” Trans: Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 54

Fenner, C. 1931 “South Australia—A Geographic Study.” Melbourne

Horton, R. E. 1945 “Erosional Development of Streams and their Drainage

Basins: Hydrophysical Approach to Quantitative Morphology.” Bull.

Geol. Soc. Am., 56, No. 3

Hossretp, P. S. 1935 “The Geology of Part of the North Mount Lofty Ranges.”

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.. 59

Howcutn W. 1918 “The Geology of South Australia.” Adelaide (1st

Edition) :

Howcnin, W. 1933 “The Dead Rivers of South Australia, Part II. The

Eastern Group.” Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 57

Mazz, W. H. 1944 “The Geomorphology of the Central Eastern Area of

N.S.W. Pt. I: Methods of Landform Analysis from Topographic

Maps. Pt. II: Landform Analysis of the Orange-Bathurst District.”

J. & P. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., pt. i and ii, 78

Spricc. R. C. 1942 “The Geology of the Eden-Moana Fault Block.” Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 66, (2)

Vance, T. A. 1940 “Mapping a Continent.” The Aust. Surveyor, 8, No, 3, 151

Vol. 69, Plate XIX

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1945

| An~ 3

eet all

f ‘~

f 5

£UL 20TH F NGLLTZEIO + meee om

LTDYE HITE THROM rence

oqtmi Li J

$038 O33I¥ O4 LTOVE Wayd'9 N

AVOVS WYVd OLA, 4 A, OL LINVs 3093

£hvs NII OL x, 'G WX, OL L10V4 WINSHI'D

23fvs WANBHDLIY OL doomauis “g doomaua OL, JHNOS "Wy

SLN3WO3S LNWdYvISa SYIVB_WIOIG LiNvs NO SLNANDIS

SN3YYOL YSAIY

BH4 uOs

SWVHOVIG BY 10d

a 77 A(PORDIONVIVd wae) of

MwA/ SNiWid JowaaEv

ée

WHS SUI@NVHO HLM NOLL

H-ONNL OL 3°A JAOS-28n00

“SUUVINGIUL SIVA ONY AVIE LS}

UNNYA Os WYYOVIG FLIsoSNOS i

(x. azouvwa)

AN3N9 US

SNIW Td

3divVRG¥

SWVYOVIG ev10d

stava wo0%e N303

OL HD SUIGNVHD

Budvingigt KIVA P 7

WadLS MNMYL wos

OWIT TLUSOdWOD

Lins

HBOTE8 3A99-2UHIO

TIE OL TTOTE avn cone

yupUbae Cul

by) apazout you $900)

ABYLASTEL HLEON +

NYJHLS UNA

Vol. 69, Plate XX

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1945

SLNBWIGIS SNLSNDVT te >

SBNOLSSNIT SNADOIN, EE

S.LN3WIG3S SNIVA SNS00IMd = =9SEE

;

303

MORPHOLOGY AND ANATOMY OF THE

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF TRIODIA R.BR.

I. GENERAL MORPHOLOGY

By Nancy T. Bursipce, M.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute

[Read 13 September 1945]

PLates XXI to XXV

In the course of a taxonomic study of the genus Triodia R. Br. interest was

aroused concerning the general structure of the plants and their internal anatomy.

Owing to war-time difficulties publication has been delayed. The present contribu-

tion is the first of a series dealing respectively with: I, General Morphology;

IT, Internal Anatomy of Leaves; III, Internal Anatomy of Root and Shoot; and

IV, Seedling Anatomy and Development.

GENERAL Hapit

The plants under discussion are all xeromorphic tussock-forming perennial

grasses, occurring in the arid summer-rainfall areas of tropical Western Australia.

Information concerning the type of habitat has already been published (2, 3).

The coarse tussocks have projecting pungent-pointed leaves and the form

may be pyramidal, flattened, ring-shaped or crescentic. In the first case the grow-

ing shoots are at or near the whole periphery. In the second, growth is made on

the lower parts of the circumference or the tussock may be formed by the develop-

ment of long stolons, each of which has a tuft of shoots at its apex. These tufts

commonly become rooted and may ultimately attain complete independence. The

result is a tangled mass of stolons and tufts (pl. xxii, fig. 1 and 2). Crescentic

and ring tussocks are formed by the death of the central older portion. Owing

to the rooting of the various culms, the tussocks become multiple plants or

colonies. Stages in the development of a ring are seen in the series of photos in

pl. xxi. Permission to publish these was kindly given by Mr. C. P. Mountford,

who obtained them in Central Australia. :

Where tussocks are adjacent they may merge to form a compound structure

which attains a considerable size. Plants up to 2 metres high have been reported

in Triodia pungens R. Br. and T. longiceps J. M. Black.

No type of tussock is confined to one species but the form of each has its

particular characteristics, which are shortly described as follows:

T. pungens R. Br.: all tussock forms described above occur in this polymorphic

species, which is widespread from Western Australia to Queensland and

which is the only one of any real economic importance. The different

types observed were described in the taxonomic paper.“ The leaves

are resinous,

T. Basedowni Pritzel: a rigid pyramidal tussock, becoming annular or crescentic,

T. lanigera Domin: a coarse species forming large irregular pyramidal tus-

socks. The leaves are glaucous, giving the plant a drab appearance.

C) These species are described in a taxonomic paper in Jour. Roy. Soc. W. Aust.,

30, for 1943-44, but not yet published. :

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 69, (2), 30 November 1945

304

T. Wiseana C. A. Gardner: a compact almost globular tussock. The green

leaves of the new growth are conspicuous against the straw-coloured and

dry sheaths of the older leaves,

T. brigioides® N. T. Burbidge: similar in general form to the preceding but

the leaves are glaucous (pl. xxii, fig. 3).

T. irritans R.Br.: young tussocks pyramidal. Older ones low, flat and

straggling with a tendency to ring formation.

T. Fitegeralditi) N. T. Burbidge: no field notes are available for this species

which is known from its type specimen only. It is a coarse-leaved plant

and probably forms large tussocks.

T. longiceps J. M. Black: a large form with more or less pyramidal tussocks

which merge together to form sprawling and impenetrable clusters up to

two metres high and more than that in diameter.

T. angusta“) N, T. Burbidge: a tussock very similar to that of the preceding

species but more irregular in shape and always smaller (pl. xxii, fig. 1).

T. secunda® N. T. Burbidge: a tussock formed by interlaced stolons. The

plant begins as a group of erect shoots, each having an apical tuft of

secondary shoots beneath which long stolons branch out horizontally. At

the end of each stolon another tuft of similar construction forms (pl. xxii,

fig. 2), The clusters of shoots are supported by prop-like roots, and the

adult plants often appear to be resting on stilts. When there is much drift

sand the tussocks may be built up. In one case the author saw a mass one

metre deep and 25-3 metres in diameter which had been formed in this

way. More commonly the plant is about 30 cm. high and many times that

in diameter.

Roots AND SHOOTS

The culms in all species are formed by a number of long internodes followed

by a number of short ones. Axillary shoots develop in the leaf axils of the latter.

Of these axillaries the lower develop in the same way as the parent culm, while

the upper commonly remain erect and form the tufts mentioned above. The apex

of the parent culm or of any of the culms secondary to it gives rise to the panicle,

which is always terminal, Thus the branching is centrifugal, and one is tempted

to use the word cymose (pl. xxiii, A, B and C). It has been reported that in

Saccharum spontaneum L., if growth is interrupted by grazing or by fire, then

a series of long internodes on a culm may be followed by several short ones

before long internodes are again developed (1). No such accidental interrup-

tion occurs in Triodio. T. pungens, while growing vigorously under glasshouse

conditions, developed the alternate series of long and short internodes so

characteristic of all species (text fig. A). On a long internode portion the nodes

may be exposed and the laminae of the leaves reduced. On a short internode

section the nodes are hidden by the sheaths unless there is displacement due to

curvature.

There is a tendency for the long internode sections or stolons to be hori-

zontal. They are rarely sufficiently robust to hold aloft the apical tuft of axillary

shoots. As a result curvature of the short internode portion is necessary if the

axillary, apogeotropic intravaginal shoots (1) are to stand erect. Curvature

takes place with the bending of the unthickened basal region of the internode

and of the pulvinal development of the subtending leaf sheath-base (pl. xxiv,

fig. 3). There is no geotropic tendency in the orientation of the stolons, which

become horizontal owing to a passive response to the weight of the apical tuft.

In a tussock the long culms are supported by other culms and also by the roots.

Leaves arise in an apparently alternate fashion though the spiral phyllotaxy

is evident. Where the internodes are short the sheaths fit one inside the other, but

MORPHOLOGY AND ANATOMY OF THE WESTERN AUSTRALIAN

SPECIES OF TRIODIA R. BR.

BY NANCY T. BURBRIDGE, M.SC., WAITE AGRICULTURAL RESEARCH INSTITUTE

(READ 13 SEPTEMBER 1945)

Summary

In the course of a taxonomic study of the genus 7riodia R. Br. Interest was aroused concerning the

general structure of the plants and their internal anatomy. Owing to war-time difficulties publication

has been delayed. The present contribution is the first of a series dealing respectively with: I,

General Morphology; IJ, Internal Anatomy of Leaves; HI, Internal Anatomy of Root and Shoot; and

IV, Seedling Anatomy and Development.